ill,
FRIEND PALMER,
inufae-
turer
.lock,
: to the Peninwlar Bank, Jefferron Ai
DETROIT.
THEORETICAL AND PRACTICAL
OF THE
OTCHIPWE LANGUAGE,
THE LANGUAGE SPOKEN BY THE CHIPPEWA INDIANS; WHICH I*
ALSO SPOKEN BY THE ALGONQUIN, OTAWA AND
POTAWATAMI INDIANS,
WITH LITTLE DIFFERENCE.
FOR THE USE OF MISSIONARIES
AND OTHER PERSONS LIVING AMONG THE INDIANS
Of the above named tribes.
BY THE REV. FREDERICK BARAGA,
Missionary at L'jlnse, Lake Superior.
DETROIT :
JABEZ FOX, PRINTER.
1850.
BREVE ITER PER EXEMPLA, LONGUM PER PR.ECEPTA.
Quint il.
NEG.LECTA PRUDENS CORRIGAT LECTOR.
PREFACE.
This is, I think, the first and only Otchipwe Grammar
that ever was published in the United States. It was ra-
ther a hard work to compose it ; I had to break my road
all through. Writers of other Grammars avail themselves
of the labors of their predecessors, and collect, like the bee,
the honey out of these flowers of literature, leaving the dust
in. I had no such advantage ; I had nothing before me.
No wonder then, if all be not correct in this first essay.
Those who shall find errors or omissions in this Grammar,
will oblige me very much by sending me their corrections
and remarks, which will be thankfully received and duly
considered.
My principal intention in publishing this Grammar is, to
assist Missionaries in the acquirement of the Otchipwe lan-
guage and its kindred dialects, as I know by experience how
useful it is to the Missionary to know the language of the
people whom he is endeavoring to convert to God.
At the same time it is my wish to do, for my part and in
my sphere, what I wish should be done by other Missionaries
or competent persons, in their respective spheres ; that is,
that complete Grammars and Dictionaries should be com-
posed and published, of all the different Indian languages
in the Union. It is the judicious opinion of Mr. HENRY R.
SCHOOLCRAI T, (\vlio has done, and is doing yet, much for
the Indian history,) '* that the true fiixt< n/ of the Indian
tribes and their international relation*, muxt rest, «.v a basis,
upon the light obtained from their language*.'9 This is
true; and to obtain this light from the Indian languages,
Grammars and Dictionaries would render the surest ser-
vices.
And finally I wish to do a service to the Philologist, to
whom it affords pleasure and acquirement, to compare the
grammatical systems of different languages.
THE AUTHOR.
G R AM M A R
OF THE
OTCHIPWE LANGUAGE.
INTRODUCTION.
The Otchipwe language is spoken by the tribe of In-
dians, called Chippcwa Indians * which was once a nume-
rous and powerful tribe. It is now reduced to the small
number of about 15,000 individuals, who are scattered
round Lake Superior, and far round in the inland, over a
large tract of land. Several other tribes of Indians speak
the same language, with little alterations. The principal
of these are, the Algonquin, the Otaiva, and the Potoivata-
mi tribes. He that understands well the Otchipwe lan-
guage, will easily converse with Indians of these tribes.
The Otchipwe Grammar, which is here presented to the
reader, teaches the art of spelling and writing correctly the
Otchipwe language. This Grammar is divided into three
parts, viz : Orthography, Etymology and Syntax.
*The proper name of these Indians is, Otchipwe Indian*. By this name,
pronounced according to the orthography stated in this book, we will call
this Grammar and language i
PART FIRST.
ORTHOGRAPHY.
Orthography, (according to the meaning of this Greek
word, correct writing,) teaches the art of spelling the words
of a language with correctness and propriety. To speak
and write is the faculty and art of expressing thoughts with
words. Words then are signs of our thoughts. These signs
are either sounds uttered by the mouth, or marks formed
by the hand.
Words are composed of letters, which are the represen-
tatives of sounds formed by the organs of speech.
There are only seventeen letters in the Otchipwe alpha-
bet ; and no more are required to write correctly and plain-
ly all the words of this expressive language. These letters
are divided into vowels arid cosonants.
A vowel is the representative of an articulate sound, which
can be distinctly uttered by itself. There are only four
vowels in the Otchipwe language, namely, a, e, i, o. This
language has no u. The letter u is sounded differently by
different nations, English, French, German, etc. The Ot-
chipwe language has none of these sounds. The German
sound of the vowel it, (like oo in fool, or like u in full,) is
unknown to the Otchipwe language; so much so, that even
in the two or three words, which these Indians have adopt-
ed from the French, the sound oo, (in French ou,) is chang-
ed into o. F. i. a handkerchief, (un moz^choir,) tnntlurc ; my
button, (mon bouton,) nin bold ; Lowis, Noi. But more yet
than the German sound of u, is the French and English pro-
nunciation of the same, unknown to the Otchipwe lan-
guage.
. A consonant is the representative of an inarticulate sound,
which can only be perfectly uttered with the help of a vow-
el. There arc thirtcru consonants in this language, name-
ly : b, c, (1, g, hj, k, m, n, p} s} t, w. The following con-
sonants, f, L q, r, v, x, z, never occur in the words of this
language ; and the Indians who speak it, can hardly pro-
nounce them, and many cannot pronounce them at all, es-
pecially old Indians. They pronounce / and v like b or
p; I and r they pronounce like n. So, for instance, when
they are asked to pronounce the French word farine,
(flour,) they will stqgQp^r th%?ame David, they will pro-
nounce Dabid; the name marie, Mani; the name Marguerite,
Magit ; etc.
REMARKS ON THE VOWELS,
Many methods have been tried to write Otchipwe words,
but they proved deficient, and did not express exactly the
sounds of these words, because the English orthography has
been used. It can easily be observed, and will be acknowl-
edged, when impartially examined, by persons who under-
stand some other language, that the English orthography,
being so peculiar, can never be successfully applied to any
other but the English language. It is impossible to write
with propriety any other language but the English, accor-
ding to the English orthography, because the English vow-
els have so many different sounds, that they must necessa-
rily create difficulty and uncertainty, when applied to the
writing of words of other languages.
And so, in fact, k is the case with any other language,
more or less. Every language has its own orthography,
which could not be entirely applied to another language.
Why then should the Otchipwe language (with its kind-
red dialects) not have its own orthography? This question
immediately arose in my mind, when I first entered the field
of missionary labors among the Indians ; and soon brought
me to the establishing of an own orthography for the O-
tchipwe language and its dialects. This orthography does
not entirely belong to any other language, but is taken from
the English and French, and adapted to the Otchipwe.
According to this orthography I wrote my first little In-
dian work, in 1831, (with the help of an interpreter, at that
tame,) and published it in Detroit in 1832; and have ever
since followed the same in my subsequent Indian writings ;
8
only one alteration, whirh T have adopted in writing
this Grammar: putting the English >Vi instead oftlie French ch.
I am satisfied, in my huiuhle opinion, that this is the ea-
and plainest method of writing the Otchipwe !
It is generally aj)proved by those who have occasion to ex-
amine it ; and it was adopted hysonie writers of Indian
work ially by the ~&\. flMfljfe (Lapointe, Lake
Superior.) wiio pnblislied the New Testament, (New-York
l^M,) almost entirely according to this simple mood of
writing the Otchipwe language.
If ere is an explanation of this orthography. The sound
of the voircls never changes : they have always the same
sound. The sounding of the consonant* is adapted to the
pronunciation of the same in English and French. Thi>
will be better understood after the perusal of the follo\\mi>
remarks.
The four vowels, «, r, ?", o, are pronounced as follows :
a is invariably pronounced as in the English wordy atlu-r ;
as, anakanan, mats; ta-na^aiid, he will be left behind ; ga-
sagaang, he that is gone out.
c is always pronounced as in the English word met ; as,
(•teg, what there is ; cta> only ; cncndang, according to his
thought or will.
i is always pronounced as in the English word pin ; as,
mini, a man; kigi-ildt, thou hast said ; iwidi, there.
n is always pronounced as in the English word note :
odon, his mouth ; onow, these here ; okoj, its bill.
These rules have no exception in the Otchipwe language
The four vowels are inrnriabh/ pronouno .•<! here;
they may occur in the first or last syllable of a word, or in
the middle; and they are m rrr silent. Which you will
plea*c to mind weJl, if you wish to pronounce correctly and
easily the words of this language.
As the genend rule for the pronunciation of vowels
to pronounce them always equally, and never to let them be
silcni, it follows that, where two or threevowels, of the same
kind or ditl'.-rent. vowels, appear together in a word, they
must all be sounded
9
EXAMPLES.
Saagam, he goes out ; pron. sa-ga-am.
Oossi. he has a father ; pron. o-os-.s-/.
Nin nibca, I cause him to sleep ; pron. nin ni-bc-a,
O moawan, they make him weep, cry ; pron, o mo-a-wan.
Waiba, soon; pron. wa-i-ba.
Maingan, wolf; pron. ma-in-gan.
Nawaii, in the middle ; pron. na-iva-i-i.
There are some diphtongs proper in this language.
The letter i forms them, when it is preceded or followed
by some other vowel ; ai, ci, oi ; ia, ie, io. Both vowels
are pronounced in one syllable, but both must be distinctly
sounded; they are proper diphtongs.
EXAMPLES.
Misaij a loach, (fish;) pron. mi-sai.
Omodai, bottle, pron. o-mo-dai,
Apakwei, a mat to cover a lodge ; pron. a-pa-kwei.
Hoi ! (iiiterj) hallo!
Saiagiad, whom thou lovest ; pron, sa-ia-gi-ad.
Ebiian, thou who art ; pron. c-bi-ian.
Aiaieg, where you are; pron. a-ia-ieg.
Aioiog, make use of it ; pron. a-io-iog.
ACCENTS ON VOWELS.
In order to facilitate the pronunciation of the words of
this language, and to distinguish the first person from the
second "in some moods and tenses, I make occasionally use
of accents in this Grammar and in the Dictionary of this lan-
guage. These accents are, the acute, the grave and the
circumflex accent.
1. I put the acute accent on that syllable in the word
which must be pronounced with more emphasis or stress
than the others. And this emphasis, put on one syllable
or on another, sometimes entirely changes the meaning of
the word, as you see in some of the following Examples.
F. i., dnakwad, it is cloudy ; andkan, a mat ; minikdn, seed ; j
dgammg, on the beach ; aridminy, on the other side of a
river, bay, lake, etc.; saoaigan, a small lake: sagdigan, a
nail ; nib my f in the water ; nibiny, in summer.
10
2. I make use of the r/rarr accent to distinguish the first
person from the second in many circumstances, as will be
seen in the paradigms or patterns of the Conjugations.
Examples :
En&ndamdn, as /will or think ; cnhi daman, as thou wilt.
Saffitoidmban,htid 1 liked it; sagitviamban, hadst thou liked
it. Endaicang, where we live or dwell ; (the person or
persons spoken to. are not included in the number of those
who dwell in the place alluded to.) Enddiang, where we
live or dwell ; (the person or persons spoken to, are in-
cluded.
2. I place the circumflex accent on some vowels," to sig-
nify that they have the nasal sound, almost the same as in
French, when they are followed by the letter n. F. i., sr-
niba-t silk, ribbon ; pakaaktwi', a hen ; abinodj), a child ;
gigb, fish, etc. The exact pronunciation of these vowels
cannot be given in writing; You must hear them pronounced
by persons who speak Otchipwe correctly ; and endeavor
to take hold of the genuine pronunciation.
I must observe here, that I don't put accents on every
Indian word in this Grammar. I put them occasionally^
for the accommodation of brginncy.*. When I am writing
for Indian readers, I never use accents, except grave
accents, for the distinction of the two persons ; (as above
in No 2.)
REMARKS ON' THE CONSONANTS.
In- -/egard to the consonants of this language, several
remarks are to be made, which you are requested to peruse
carefully and keep in memory, in order to read and write
correctly the Otchipve language.
I tried to reduce the Otchipwe orthography, as much
as possible, to the easiest ami plainest prmriples. No
more letters are employed than are absolutely necessary.
For this reason there are no silent letters in this ortho-
graphy, and no r///y;//Vv///o//s of letters, except of the loll-
!i i- indispensable. I employ the I'Yriirh /. to <tand
in Otchipwe lor the same soft sound as it does in
11
because there is a perfect analogy between the Frenchji in
jour, jar din, etc., and the Otchipwe jf injoniia,jiwan, etc.,
which the English consonants cannot well express. In
English we have sh ; but this sound does not exactly ex-
press the sound of the French or Otchipwe j ; it is harder.
ThisJ is the only consonant I take from the French alpha-
bet ; all the others are English consonants.
Peruse now diligently the following remarks on the
Otchipwe consonants.
The letter c is never employed by itself; it can easily be
dispensed with, by using s and Jc. It is only used in the
composition of letters tch, of which we will speak below.
The letter d connected with./, has the sound of the Eng-
lish j, or of g, when pronounced soft, as in gender, ginger,
etc. F. i., mddjan, go on ; ninindjt my hand ; dndjiton,
change it ; gimodj, secretly.
The letter g has, in the Otchipwe orthography and read-
ing, always a hard sound ; not only before a and 0, but
also invariably before e and i ; without any exception.
F. i., geyet, truly ; gigito, he speaks ; gi-nigi, he was born ;
gego, something.
The letter h is used by itself only in some interjections,
where it is pronounced with a strong aspiration, as haw !
haw! halloo! hurrah! go on! hoi! halloo! The main
use of this letter is its connexion with s> to form the same
sound as in English, sh.
The letter jt as above stated, is always pronounced as in
French, that is to say, softer than the English sh. F. i.,
jomin, grape, raisin j joniia, silver, money ; ojimo, he runs
away ;• onijishin, it is good, fair ; mij, give him ; ganoj,
speak to him. — -Kind reader, be careful, not to pronounce it
as in English, (John, joy, jar,) but as in French> (jour, ja-
mais, etc.)
The letter s is always pronounced like z, in the beginning
as well as in the middle and end of syllables and words.
When it is double, it has the hard sound of double s, like
in English. F. i., nin segis, I fear, (pron. nin zegiz;) sas-
pgisi, he is avaracious, (pron. zazagizi ;) nin sessessakis, I
12
burn and weep, (pron. zf^fr^n /•/-:) nitrlfi*?, come here,
(pron. onda$a.) After a consonant, the letter s lias always
the hard s-ound, like dnublc s. F. i., kwiteisejtsag, boys,
(pron. konwiztnssag :) (trnoiisftff, little bees or flies, (pron.
amonssag.) — The two letters s and h in connexion, have
the same sound in Otchipwe, as in English; in the begin-
ning, middle and end of syllables and words. F. i., nhliime,
my younger brother, (or sister ;) at/iithin, put me; asham,
give him to eat; binish, till; Jdganatk, an Englishman.
The letter t in connexion with ch gives the sound of the
same composition of letters in the English words watch,
match, pitcher, etc. F. i., tchinnin, a canoe, tcliatcham, he
sneezes; nin tchitckag, my soul ; gwanatcli, beautiful ;
minotch, notwithstanding.
The letter w is pronounced like in English.
It must be observed here, that the pronunciation of some
consonants in the Otchipwe language is very vague and un-
certain. There are six consonants of this kind, viz : Z>, p;
<•/, t ; gt Jc. It is impossible to ascertain, by the pronun-
ciation of the Indians, the correct orthography of some
words commencing with these letters, or containing them.
So, for instance, in a word beginning with b, yon will often hear
the Indians pronounce this b like p ; and sometimes like b.
Or if the word begins with a p, they will pronouce it at one
time j3, and at another b. And the same they do with d
and t, with g and k. They confound very frequency these
consonants. We also see in letters written by Indians in
their own language, how they confound b with ]> ; d witht;
g with k ; not only in the beginning, but also in the middle
and at the end of words.
As a fff-nrra/ rule for the right use of these six consonats,
when they fi-rni'mntr the word, take this : In order to know
whether h or p, d or /, «• or /,-, terminate the word, (which
you ordinarily cannot ascertain from the Indian pronunci-
ation,) prolong the word, that, is, add a syllable*, by forming
the plural, or making some other change, and you will find
the true final \<
13
EXAMPLES.
The wordjingob, a fir-tree, is often pronounced jingop.
To ascertain whether b or p is the final letter of this word,
form the plural by adding igt and you will havejingobig,
where b is distinctly sounded.
The words gijig, day, air, sky; and gyikt cedar or ce-
dar-tree, are ordinarily pronounced alike; but by a prolon-
gation of the words, their final letters appear distinctly. -They
say gijigad, it is day ; gijikag, cedar-trees.
So also mitig, a tree, and akik, a kettle. These two
words both exhibit k as their final letter in common pron-
unciation ; but when you prolong the words, you will have,
mitigog, trees ; akikog kettles. There the letters g and k
are sounded clearly.
Wenijishid, he who is good, or handsome ; commonly
pronounced wenijisliit ; but in the plural, wcnijitliidjigj the
letter d is sounded in the soft pronunciation of djig. (And
so in all the participles ending in ad, cd, id, od, which
make their plural by adding Jig1.)
To ascertain whether you have to write dj or tcli, in the
middle or at the end of words, try to find out, whether the
word, if placed in another position or inflection, would
show d or t ; and you will know, whether you have to write
dj or tch. *
EXAMPLES.
Ojitchigade, it is made ; not ojidjigadc, because it is de-
rived from the verb, nind ojiton, I make it : where t is dis-
tinctly sounded.
Wtnitchige, he is making dirty (something, or some
place) ; not winidjige, because it comes from nin winiton,
I make it dirty ; where again t is clearly heard.
Nin banadjiton, I spoiled it ; not nin banatcliiton, be-
cause it comes from banadad, it is spoiled ; where d is
most clearly sounded.
Kikendjige, he knows; not kikentchige, because it isde-
riyed from nin kikcndan, I know it ; where d is distinctly
heard.
1 1
, secretly ; not gimotrJi, because it comes from
i, he steals. — Etc.
1 know very well, dear reader, that you cannot make any
of these rules now in the beginning of your studies.
But after the first perusal of this Grammar, and when you '
shall have acquired some knowledge of this languajro, these
rules will be useful to you ; they will be to you a good guid-
ance, and help you materially in your endeavors to acquire
a reasonable, systematical and grammatical orthography of
the Otchipwe language.
If we wish to cultivate a little the Otchipwe language,
we ought to fix the orthagraphical use of these six conso-
nan's, according to the most common and most reasonable
pronunciation. This I tried, arid yet try, to effect in my
Indian writings, especially in this Grammar, and in the
Dictionary of this language. If now those who feel able
and disposed to write in Otchipwe, would adopt the ortho-
graphy of these works, it would be fixed and established.
And it is indeed the Grammar and the Dictionary we ought
to consult and to follow in regard to the orthography of a
laniruatre.. If every one writes as he pleases, we will never
arrive at uniformity and systematical regularity.
There is an analogy of this in the German language. The
Germans also pronounce the letter b very often like^?; and
also the letter dYike t, and g like- k; in the beginning and
at the end of words. But when they are writing, they don't
follow this corrupted pronunciation ; they follow the or*
thography of their books, especially of Dictionaries.
There will be some more rules and remarks, in regard to
orthography, in this Grammar. I cannot explain them here;
they would be entirely misplaced, if here. You will find
them in their due places.
PART SECOND.
ETYMOLOGY.
Etymology, (according to the signification of this Greek
word, doctrine of the origin of words,) is that part of Gram-
mar, which teaches the derivations and inflections of words,
and treats of the different parts of speech.
There are nine Parts of Speech in the Otchipwe language.
I will put them down here in the same order in which this
Grammar treats of them. This order differs from that ob-
served in other Grammars ; for good reasons.
The parts of speech are as follows :
1. The Substantive or Noun; as, inini, man; ikwc, wo-
man ; wigiwam, lodge, house ; mokoman, knife.
2. The Pronoun ; as, nin, I ; kin, thou ; win, he, she,
it.
3. The Verb ; as, nin gigit, I speak ; ki nondam, thou
nearest ; bimadisi, he lives.,
4. The Adjective ; as,gwanatch, beautiful ; matchi, bad ;
onijishin, good, fine, useful.
5. The Number ; as midasswi, ten ; nijtana, twenty ;
ningotwak, hundred.
6. The Preposition; as^ndwaii, in the midst; megwe,
among ; binish, till.
7. The A dverb ; as, sesika, suddenly ; nibiwa, much ;
gwaiak, well ; wewib, quick, fast.
8. The Conjunction ; as, gaie, and ; missawa, although ;
kisJipin, if.
9. The Interjection ; as, hoi! halloo! haw! goon!
Remark 1. This language is a language of verbs. I
would almost treat of the verb in the very first chapter of
Etymology, because all depends on the verb, and almost all
is, or can be, transformed into verbs. But the natural or-
der requires it, to treat first of the substantive or noun,
which is the subject of the verb ; and then of the pronoun^
16
which stands for the noun or *u! . ns the subject of
l h«.' verb, and ordinarily precedes it. But immediately after
the noun and pronoun comes the nrb, which occupies two
thirds of this Grammar. After the verb comes the ar/jt, t
and then the number, because these paris of speech are
commonly transformed into verbs. Now I'M! lows the prep-
osition, which is often connected with the verb, and conju-
gated with it: then the arlrrrb, which modifies the verb in
various manners ; and then the remaining two parts of
speech.
Remark 2. There are no articles in the Otchipwe lan-
guage. The words air, iir, etc., which are sometimes pla-
ced before substantives, are no articles : lh'\v are demon-
strative pronouns. So, for instance, air fkirr, does not pro-
perly denote, the woman, but thi* or that woman.
Remark 3. In the Otchipwe language, three parts of
speech are declinable, that is, they undergo changes; the
rest are indeclinable, they never change. The declinable
parts of speech are the first three, substantive, pronoun,
verb. Substantives and pronouns undergo •'' change in the
plural ; and this is all their change. Verbs have their var-
ious Conjugations. Adjectives and number* are indeclina-
ble as such; but when they are transformed into verbs,
they have their Conjugations.
CHAPTER I.
OF SUBSTANTIVES OR NOT
A Substantive or Noun is the name of a person or thing,
really existing or only though! , iinainned.
name of a single individual is called a jtni/tcr nnun \
[\<. \\'(nrif(i/an, Detroit : Moncngwanekan, Lapointe; \\'ik-
jriff. L An-r: Miin»n.<irl, Loonst'oot.
A inin, , ion nnun or .ntbtfattfici- \> the name applied to all
persons or things of the same kind; as, /'//////, man; ikuv,
17
woman ; maingan, wolf ; animosh, dog ; mitig, tree ; adop-
owin, table.
OF GENDER.
Gender is the distinction of substantives with regard to
sex. Almost all languages make a difference in their arti-
cles and adjective^ when they apply them to substantives
of the three different genders, the masculine, feminine and
neuter. But the English language employs the same arti-
cle and the same adjective before substantives of the three
genders. And so does the Otchipwe language. For per-
sons and things of both sexes, and of those that belong to
none, the same adjective is used. F. i , mino inuri, a good
man ; mino ikwc, a good woman ; mino wigiwam, a good
house ; gwamitch kirlirisfnt, a beautiful boy ; gwanatcli ikwe-
sens,'& beautiful girl ; gwandtch masinaigan, a beautiful book.
But the Otchipwe language goes yet a step farther ; even
in the pronoun there is no distinction of gender made; win
signifies lie, she and it. But as the distinction of the two sex-
es is necessary in certain circumstances, the Otchipwe lan-
guage, (like other languages,) has some different words for
individuals of the two sexes.
EXAMPLES.
Masc. Fern.
Ogima, chief or king; ogimakwe, queen.
Inini, man ; ikwe, woman.
Kiviiviscns, boy ; ifauesens, girl.
Noss, my father. ninga, my mother.
Ningw'iss, my son ; ninddniss my daughter.
Nissaic, my elder brother ; niniisse, my older sister.
Nimishomiss, my grand father ; nokomiss, my grand-mother.
And a variety of other terms of relationship, and expres-
sions of friendship.
Instead of the English mode of distinguishing the two
sexes, by prefixing he to substantives for the masculine, and
she for the feminine sex, the Otchipwe language contrives
the distinction in the following manners, viz :
18
1. By prefixing the word n<tbr, (male,) to substantives of
the masculine gender, and /Av/v', (\voman, female,) to those
of the feminine gender. F. i., ndbe-pyikit a bull or ox;
ikirt'-itijiki, a cow.
2. By making use of the words nubraiaa, (male being,)
and ikirt'diita, (female being.) which are ordinarily placed
after the substantive. F. i., pakadkin- ntibi'uida, a cock ;
pakadkwe ikir'!<iiaa, a hen : bebejif/oyanji nabcaiaa, a horse ;
bcbejigogcayi ikmeaiaa, a mare.
3. By affixing to substantives of the masculine gender
the word inini, (man,) and to those of the feminine gen-
der the word itwe, (woman,) modifying the. two words a
little. F. i., anokitayt'winini, a man servant ; anokitagekwe,
a maid servant; kikinoamagewinini^ a school-teacher (man);
Jcikinoamgekwe, a female school-teacher. Thev also will
say; nlshimc inini, (or, Jcwiwisens,) my younger brother ;
nishime ikice, (or, ikwesens,} my younger sister.
Remark. Instead of the distinction of gender, there is
another distinction made between the substantives of the
Otchipwe language, which is as important, as it is difficult,
and peculiar to this language. It is the division of all the
Otchipwe substantives in two classes ; some are animate
and some inanimate.
Aniinatt' sitbttantin-s are called those which denote be-
ings and things that are living, or have been living, really
or by acception.
Inanimate substantives are called those which signify
things that never lived.
This must well be borne in mind, as it is of great impor-
tance for the correct speaking of the Otchipwe language.
The animate substantives, which denote brings that are
rKilli/ living, or have been so, cause no difficulty; they
arc naturally known, and cannot be mistaken ; as, tftynffrns,
a cat ; wawdbigonodjl^ a mouse ; sogtme, a moscheto ;
big, a .-erjMMit, etc. But substantives which signifies
things that have no life at all, but which the Indians treat
in their laniriifij.ro like substantives that si unify living
beings, create one of the greatest difficulties and peculiarities
19
of this language ; because there is no rule by which you
could be guided to know these substantives. And still it
is necessary to know whether a substantive is animate or
inanimate, because on this distinction depends the right
use and inflection of the verb and pronoun. If you con-
found the verbs that are used in connexion with animate
substantives, with those that are employed with inanimate,
you commit as big a blunder in the Otchipwe language, as
you would in English by saying : / am afraid of that man
because SHE is a bad man ; or, Hove my mother because HE
is so kind to me.
Remark. The animate substantives will always be de-
noted by the sign an., in this Grammar as well as in the
Dictionary ; and the inanimate substantives will be marked
in. The same signs will also be employed for the verbs
that have report to animate or inanimate substantives.
Please remember well this remark.
Here are some of those substantives which signify things
that have no life, but are employed by the Indians like sub-
stantives that signify living beings :
Mi tig, a tree. Sibwdgan, corn-stalk.
Pakwejigan, bread. Nindigig, my knee.
Ass'm, a stone. Agig, cold, phlegm.
Mishimin, an apple. Gisiss, sun, moon, month.
Pingwi, ashes. Tibaigisisswan, watch,
Assejna, tobacco. clock.
Akik, a kettle. Migwan, feather, quill.
Opin, a potatoe. Nabagissag, a board.
Pigiw, pitch. Wababigan, lime.
Mikwdm, ice. Opwdgan, pipe.
Gon, snow. Joniia, silver, money.
Tdshkiibodjigan, saw-mill. Assab, a net.
Tchibaidtig, cross. Ess, a shell.
Manddmin, corn. Kishkibitdgan, a tobacco-
Wdbigan, clay. pouch
Senibd, silk, ribbon. Miskotlissimin, a bean.
Masin'itchigan, image. Jingob, a fir-tree.
20
(jfijik, cedar. J'mgirak, pine-tree.
i:un<]korrhief; Mindjikuwan, a mitten, a
Joniidtit, a shillii irlo\ t>.
Afinessagdwanj , thorn. '.an, a sled no.
An;in^\ a star. Ounni'bwi, g;i\\, bile.
Aninriki, thunder. Jlottftfun, a stamp, stamper.
Ishkotekan, fire-steel. Nindinigau, my shoulder-
Kitcluphoti, belt. 1)1 ade.
Titiiisse-odaban, waggon, Mitkichnin, a raspberry,
cart. Pagunak, a walnut-tree.
Kotawan, a block. Ojas/ufkon, (tripe de roche).
Ni$(iko*i, a corn-ear. Papdgimak, ash-tree.
Masdn, a nettle.
And a vast number of others.
To facilitate the acquirement of these substantives,
animate only by acccption, I have marked them in the
Dictionary thus: <v». ; and the last letter of their plural is
always g\ whereas the last letter of the inanimate substan-
tives in the plural, is always n.
OF NUMBER.
Number is that property of a substantive by which it
denotes one object, or more, Number is double, the singu-
lar, and the plural number.
The singular number denotes only one object; as ?/v>/-
trfim, a ]')(!;_••(•; uni'th, a beaver; omigan, a plate or dish;
mokoman, a knife.
The plural number expresses two or more objects : as.
jimdganishag, soldiers ; wakdiganan, houses ; ani^/iitK-
Indians : toagdJtwadon, axes.
As in every lai!',m (so in the Otchipwe, there arc
many substantives which, from the nature of the objects
they signify, have no plural ; as, tntothahn, milk ; sisibdkwad,
sugar; kitimiwin, la/.incss, etc. But there are none in
this language which have no singular.
21
FORMATION OF THE PLURAL NUMBER.
The formation of the plural of the Otchipwe substantives
is somewhat difficult. We have only a few rules for it,
which are not sufficient. There are some general and some
special rules.
GENERAL RULES.
RULE 1. The plural of the Otchipwe substantives is always
formed by adding to the singular a letter or a syllable.
Never anything is changed in the substantive itself. This
is a rule without exception, as well for the animate as in-
animate.
RULE 2. The last letter of the plural of an animate substan-
tive is invariably g ; and the last letter of the plural of
an inanimate substantive is always n. This rule again
has no exception.
But the learner of this language gains little by these
rules, because the letters that precede this final g or n in
the syllables which are added to the singular, in order to
form the plural, are so various, that we distinguish no less
than twelve different terminations of the plural, viz : seven
for the animate, and five for the inanimate.
The seven terminations of the plural of the animate sub-
stantives are : g, ag, ig, iag,jig, og, wag.
The five terminations of the plural of the inanimate sub-
stantives are : n, an, in, on, wan.
There is no general rule for the formation of these dif-
ferent terminations of the plural ; but there are some special
rules which will be useful to the learner.
SPECIAL RULES.
RULE 1. The animate substantives in ans, ens, ins, ons,
(which are always diminutives), and all the animate sub-
stantives indicating contempt, add always the syllable ag
to the singular, to form the plural.
2
22
EXAMPLES :
///s, a little chief.
Ji''tiiifin.<, a billing,
Pakwejigans, a small cake,
Senibdns, a small ribbon,
Wdgoshens, a young fox,
Agimens, a small snow-shoe,
Anishindbens, a young Indian,
Jishibens, a young duck,
Gyikcns, a little cedar,
JH/tfisinx, a young eagle,
IVdbisins, a younu; swan,
Opmins, a small potatoe,
Omimins, a young pigeon,
a calf,
, a young bee,
* a young loon,
Manitons, an insect,
Animons, a small dog,
Amilcons, a young bearer,
J.A:/A"OW5, a small kettle,
Assabixh, a bad net,
Ininiwish, a bad man,
Opwdganish, a bad pipe,
Akikosh, a bad kettle,
pi.
jonnansag.
pakwtjigdnsag.
senibdnsa
wdgoshensag.
agimensag.
anishindbentag
jisMbensag.
rngsnsog.
wdbisinsag
oinuniiixai!;.
" pijikinsag.
" drnnntf/'/.
" mdngonsag.
ti manitonsag.
" an im on sag.
*' amikonsag.
" akikonsag.
" astabifi/irfi;-.
" ininiwishag.
u opwaganithag
11 akikoshag.
Some partif-ip/i1* also make their plural invariably In
adding ag to the singular, as you will see in the Dubitatin
Conjugations.
KII.I: 2. All the animate substantives in an and -in, add
likewise ilie syllable tiff for the plural. But when t host-
in in have the accent on the last syllable, they add /»•
(See the last two words in these Examples.)
EXAMPLES :
Kitchimokoman, American,
ifigwan, a feather, or pen,
pi. KitcJrimokomanay
" m'igivanag..
23
Tibdigisisswcm, watch, clock, pi. tibaigisisswanag.
Awakdn, slave, " awakdnag^
Nind inawjmagan, my relative " nind inawemaganag.
Opwdgan, pipe, " opwdganag.
Masinitchigan, image, " masinitchiganag.
Islikotekaii, fire-steel, " ishkotekanag.
Mindjikdwan, a mitten, " mindjikdwanag.
Webinigan, a rejected person, " weblniganag.
Oddban, a sledge, " oddbanag.
Nin widjiwctf/an, my companion,
Mishimin, apple,
Ninidjdnittikawin, my god-child
Manddniin, one corn,
MiskodissimtHj a bean,
Op in, a potatoe,
Assm, a stone,
nin widjiwaganag.
misli'iminag.
ninidjdnissikawinag.
manddminag^
miskodissiminag .
opinig.
assinig.
RULE 3. The animate substantives in a, e, 2, u* add in-
variably iay to the singular, to form the plural.
EXAMPLES :
Senibd, a ribbon, pi. senibdiag.
Pakadkwe, cock or hen, " pakadkiueiag,
Akiwes^i, old man, " akiwesnag,
Gigb, fish, " gigoiag.
RULE 4, All the participles of the affirmative form (which
are at the same time animate substantives,) add the
syllable jig for the plural, when their final letter is d ; but
when their final letter is gt they add ig.
EXAMPLES :
En ami ad, a Christian, pi, enamiadjig.
Keklnoamawindi a scholar, " kekinoamawindjig.
Waidbanyed, a spectator, " waidbahgedjig.
Geginawishkid, a liar, " geginawislikidjig.
Netd-wissinid, a great eater, " netd-ivissinidjig.
Netd-gikaicidany, a quarreller, " neta-gikawidangig.
* See p, 10.
24
a hearer, " peslmbmgig.
iraidband-
Debcndany, proprietor, owner, " debendangig.
Dcgwisking, arriver, comer, " dSgwishingig.
RULE 5. All the participles of the nciatirc form (which
are at the same time animate substantives,) add the sylla-
ble og for the plural.
EXAMPLES :
Enamidssig, a pagan, pi. enamidssigog.
\<'bos$igt an immortal, '' nebossigog.
\i'td-giyitossig, a dumb person '* nctii-gigitossigog.
J3emosscssiy, a lame person " bcmossctsigog.
RULE 6. The inanimate substantives in gan and win, and
likewise all inanimate diminutives in ant. r//.s, //is, ons,
and also all the inanimate substantives indicating con-
tempt, add the syllable an for the plural.
EXAMPLES :
\Valcdigan, a house, pi. wakdiganan.
Wasswdgan, a torch, " wasswdganan.
Nibdgan, a bed, " nibdganan.
Adopowin, a table, " adopowinan.
Dodamowin, action,
Batddowin, sin,
Ondgans, a small dish,
Apdbiwincns, a small chair,
Anitins, a small spear,
Biwdbikous, a small iron,
Masinaiganifh, a bad book,
dodamovrinan,
batddowinan.
ondeansan.
apdoiwinenMn.
anitinsan.
biwdbikonsan.
m a s In a ii'd n is/i d n .
Wigiwamish, a bad honse or lodge, wigiwamishan.
These are all the rules I can give you for the formation
of the plural number of Otchipwe substantives.
Let us now consider all the twelve different terminations
of the plural, (that is, the letters and syllables which are
added to the singular, to form the plural,) to see the difficulty
which this variety must cause to the learner of this
language.
EXAMPLES OF THE TWELVE TERMINATIONS OF THE PLURAL OF
OTCHIPWE SUBSTANTIVES.
Anishindbe, an Indian,
Hfeme, a wood-pecker,
Windigo, a giant,
Windigokwe, a giantess,
Anishindbckwe, a squaw,
Moshwey a handkerchief,
Omimi, a pigeon,
Animiki, thunder,
Bebejigoganji, horse,
Manito, ghost, spirit,
Joniia, silver, or a piece of silver
Ogima, chief,
2. ffl£.
Wdgosk, fox,
Kotawan, a block,
Namebin, a sucker,
Jishib, a duck,
Bijiw, lynx,
Kitchipison, a belt,
Namego&s, trout,
Mishtmin, apple,
Kokosh, a hog,
Manddmin, one corn,
Jimdganish, soldier,
Jdganash, Englishman,
3. i£.
Jingob, fir-tree,
^Issm, a stone,
Assdb, a net,
Opm, potatoe,
Minessagawanj, thorn,
Naidgatawendang, thinker,
pi.
anishindbeg. '
memeg.
windigog.
u'ind'tgokweg.
anhldnabckweg.
moshweg.
omirnig.
animik'ig.
bebejigoganjig,
manitog,
joniiag,
ogimag.
wdgoshag,
kotaivanag.
namebinag.
jishibag,
bijiwag.
kitcJiipisonag.
namegossag.
mishiminag,
kokoshag.
manddminag.
jimaganishag,
Jdganaskag.
jingobig.
assinig.
assabig.
opinig.
minessagawanjig.
naidgatawendangig .
Netd-agonwctang, gainsayer, ,, netd-agonwetangig.
Mcir/ii-dodang, malefactor, ,, •mt'tr/ii-dodanffi^.
4. tag.
Mis/tike, turtle, pi. mishikeiag.
Wotodbigtmodfi, mouse, ,, ii-airdbiironodj'.iair.
Assabikefhi, spider, ,, ctssabikeshtiag.
Eslipaiu, a Spaniard, ,, Etlipaiuiag.
Nijode, a twin, ,, nijodtidg.
\i*$aie, my older brother, ,, •Jii.uaii'iaff.
Nimisse, my older sister, ,, mniia^rififf.
Ninddngoshe, my cousin, ,, ninddngosheid
Bfindimoie, an old woman, 3, jnindimoii'-
Swdnganamiad,* good Christian, pi. swdnganamiarfjig.
Mekisiniked, shoemaker, ,, mekisinikedjig.
Bcu'dbikoked, a miner. ,, bewdbikokedjig.
IVcddkcd, steersman, ,, wcddkcdjiff.
Bebdmadisid, traveller, ,, bebamadisidjig.
Netd-nagamod, a singer, ,, netd-nayamodjig.
Kekinoamdged , teacher, ,, kekinoamdgedjig,
Remark. The substantives of this nuinbrr, with innu-
merable others of this description, are also participle*. It
must be observed that the termination jiff in the plural of
these words is only a corruption, which is established now.
and must remain. Properly it ought to be iff, as above.
No. 3. We ought to say : Svfdnganamiadig, M:'/,-i*inikrdiff.
bewdbikokcdig, -etc. The Indians of (Irand Portage, Fort
William, and other places north of Lake. Superior, have-
conserved this genuine pronunciation.
, C. og.
Wdbos, a rabbit. pi. trab-'
Gisiss, sun, moon, month, ,, gitis.w/.
1 /•//,-, kettle, ,, akikog.
V 'it 'iff, tree, ,, mitiffu*.
Wont, moose, ,, wo/txoff.
Ananft a srar, ,, andngog.
\abdgissag) a board, n v<
Enamiassig, pagan,
Enokissig, idler, sluggard,
Menikwessig, a sober person,
7. wag.
Inmi, man,
Ikwe, woman,
Amik, beaver,
Pijiki, ox, cow,
Name, a sturgeon,
Atik, a rein-deer,
Migisi, eagle,
Wanagek, bark,
Atikameg, white fish,
Jtngwdk,, pine tree,
Bine, a partridge,
WawashkcsM, deer,
Anjeni, angel,
Wemitigoji, Frenchman,
8. n.
Abw'i, a paddle,
Anwi, a ball, bullet,
Aii . . ., thing . . ,
9. rtft.
Wadjiw, mountain,
Omodai, bottle,
Kitigdn, garden, field,
Nisid, my foot,
Sakdon, a cane,
Tchiman, a canoe,
Ndbikwan, vessel,
Jimdgan, a lance,
Apdbiwin, chair, bench,
Masindigan, book, paper,
10. in.
Anit, fish-spear,
Abdj, a lodge-pole,
,, enamiasstgog.
„ enokissigog.
,, menilcwessigog.
pi. ininiwtzg.
pijtkiwag.
nameivag.
at'ikwag.
m'igisiwag.
vxmagekwag^
at'ikcunegwag,
jmgwdkiuag.
binewag.
w awdsh keshiwag.
anjcniwag ; (also an-
jenig.
wemitigojiwag.
pi. cibwin.
anwm.
pi. ivadjiwan.
„ ombdaian.
,, kitigdnan.
„ nisidan.
,, sakdonan.
,, tchimdnan.
„ ndbikwanan.
f) jimdganan.
,, apdbiwinan.
,, masindiganan.
„ anitin.
„ abdjin~
28
. rainbow, ,, nagweittbirt.
'y a bow, „ mitigirdbin.
11. on.
Gijigad, day, pi. gijigadon.
Tibi had, night, „ tibikadon.
Anamiewigamig t church, „ anarniewigamigon.
Anindtlgy maple-tree, „ anindtigon.
IVdiran, egg, „ wdwanon.
Wagdkwady axe, „ wagdkwadon.
Makdky box, „ makdkon.
12. wan.
Sibi, river, pi. sibiwan.
Mashkiki, medicine, „ mashkikiwan.
Odenciy village* town, ,, odrnttirun.
Wdbashkikiy swamp, „ wdbashkikiiran.
By considering this great variety of terminations
of the plural, you will perceive that there is no gen-
eral rule to be established for its formation. It must
be learned from usage. (See Remark 1> in the beginning
of Chapter III., in regard to the mutative vowel.)
To facilitate the study of the Otchipwe language also in
this respect, I have marked in the Dictionary the plural of
all the substantives of this language,, which are susceptible
of it.
FORMATION OF SUBSTANTIVES.
The Otchipwe language is a language of verbs. Verbs
are more frequently used than substantives. Where other
languages will employ a substantive, the Otchipwe language
uses a verb. Substantives are often changed into verb
are also other parts of speech ; and from verbs many sub-
stantives are formed. There are some iitrar/fih/i: Rul< .^
for this formation, which you \\i\\ find explained here. You
will better understand these rules after the perusal of tin-
long Chapter of Verbs ; but we must put them here^becn
they belong to the Chapter of Substaatives.
29
RULES FOR THE FORMATION OF SUBSTANTIVES.
RULE 1. By adding the syllable win to the third person
singular, present, indicative, affirmative form, of a verb
belonging to the I. Conjugation, you will have its sub-
stantive.
EXAMPLES.
Ojibiige, he writes ; ojibiigewin, writing.
Jawendjige, he is charitable ;jauxndjigewin, charity, grace.
DibaamdgCy he pays; dibaamdgcwin, payment
(given.)
Dibdkonigc, he judges ; dibdkonigcivinjudgment(held,
pronounced.)
Sdgiiwe, he loves : sagiitoewin, love.
Grimi, he deserts; gimiwin, desertion.
Gimodi, he steals : gimodiwin, stealing, theft.
Kitimi, he is lazy ; kitimiicin, laziness.
Anwcnindiso, he repents ; cuiwenindisowin, repentance.
Gigito, he speaks ; gigitowin, speakingj dis-
course.
RULE 2. By changing the last syllable, wag, of the third
person, plural, present, indicative, of a verb called
" communicative,," into winy you will form its substan-
tive.
EXAMPLES.
ifigddiwags they fight ; migddiwin> fighting, war.
Ditaamddiwag, they are dibaamddiwin> a general pay-
paid together ; ment.
Gikdndiwag, they quarrel ; gikdndiwin, quarrel.
(ranomdiwag, they s]>eak to gfmonidiwin> conversation.
each other ;
Jingcnindiwag, they hate jingcnindiwin^ hatred.
each other ;
RULE 3. Add to the first person, singular, present, passive
voice, of a verb belonging to the IV. Conjugation, the
syllable loin^ and you will have its substantive ,
30
EXAMPLES.
A7/z dibaamdgo, I am paid ; dibaamdgoicin, payment (rc-
ff.)
A7« dibdkonigo, I am judged; dibt'tkonigoirin, judgment (un-
dergone. )
Nin kikinoamdgo, I am Idkinoamdgowin, instruction
tauglit ; (nrcirrd.)
-\in mini go, I am given ; minigoirin, gift (received.)
RULE 1. Change the final # Of the tliird person, plural,
present, indicative, of the verbs belonging to the II. and
HI. Conjugations, into win, and you will have their sub-
stantives.
EXAMPLES,
Dodamag, they do; d'>dnnwirint doing, action.
Kashkendamog, they are sad ; kashkendamowin, sadness, sor-
row.
ndatiwg, they are afraid; segendamomnt Sr.ir.
Osdmidonog, they speak too osdmidonounn, too much
much ; speaking.
Rn,r. 5. Add the syllable win to the third person, singular,
present, indicative, negative form, ending in /, of the
verbs of the first three Conjugations, and you will have
their substantives.
EXAMPLES.
Kairin w/?i/7.-//T.vs-/, he does mimkwetsiwin, temperance.
not drink ;
K<i //•/// nitd-gigitossi^'he can- nitd-gigitessiwin) dumbness.
not s;>c;ik :
Knii'in hfibi.'niitftn.ti, he does babamitansiwin, disobedi-
not obey ; ence.
Jii LI: (>. riiaiigo the final r of the verbs ending in i
dj'tgr, into an, and you will form mimes of
tn- '
31
EXAMPLES.
Nin pakiteigc, I strike ; pukiteigan, hammer.
Nin tchigatdige, I sweep ; tchigatdig&rL, broom.
Nin tckigigdige^ I square tchigigdigan, broad axe.
timber ;
Nin ktshkiibodjige, I saw kichkiibodjigan, hand-saw or
(across.) log-saw.
Nin tdshkiibodjige, I saw tdshkiibodjigan, pit-saw or a
(along.) saw-mill.
Nin mokodjigc, I am cutting mokodjigan, plane, drawing-
wood (with a knife.) knife.
Nin bissibcdjigc, I grind ; bissibodjigan, corn-mill.
RULE 7. Change the final c of the verbs, called " Working
Verbs" (which you will find in the article : " Formation
of Verbs, after all the Conjugations; " ) change this e in
an, and you will form substantives denoting the place
where the work signified by the working verb, is going
on.
EXAMPLES,
Nind akaknnjeke, * I burn akakanjekan, the place
coal ; where a coal pit is burn-
ing, or has been so.
Nin jominabolce, I make wine; jomimibokan, the place
where they make wine,
(vineyard.)
Nin sisibdlcwadoke, I make sisibdktoadokan,sugM-camp,
sugar ; sugar-bush.
Nin biwdbikokc, I make biwdbi/cokon, the place where
(produce) iron ; they produce iron, an i-
ron-mine.
Nin miskwdbikolce, I make miskwdbikokan, a copper
(produce) copper ; mine.
RULE. 8. Some verbs of the iv. Conj. form animate sub-
stantives by adding gan to the first person singular.
* The letter n is scarcely heard in this word.
BXAXPLBS.
\lnd itiftircma, he is a rela- ;m?<7 inawcmagan, my rela-
tion of mine. ' tive.
Nin iridigcwrt, I am married nin vridigemagan, my hus-
to him, (her.) band, (wife.)
Xln iridjhra, I accompany nhi widjiwagan, my com-
him, (her.) panion.
Remark. In regard to the substantives formed accord-
ing to thejirst and third of the above rules, you will please
to bear in mind, that those which have e before the end-
syllable ?/•/>?, signify an action done or doing; and those that
have o before win, mark the effect received from an action.
It is important to mind this difference. In English there
is no difference in the words of both kinds, (as you will see
in the following examples,) but in the Otchipwe language
the difference is material.
EXAMPLES.
\in dibaamagcurin, my pay- nin dibaamdgowin, my pay-
ment, (made by me;) merit, (received by me.)
Ki dibaKonigetoiri, thy judg- ki diodkonigowin, thy judg-
ment, (made by thee ; ) ment (undergone by thee.)
O ki/cinoam<tgewin,hismstruc- O kikinoamdyoicin, his in-
tion, (given by him ;) struction, (received by
him.)
Nin windamdgewin, my re- nin windamagotirin, my re-
port, narration, (given by port, narration, (heard by
me;) me.)
A'/ gdssiamagewint thy remis- ki gdssiamagowin^ thy re-
sion, (granted by thee.) mission (rcceivcdlyy thee.)
O pakiteigewin, his beating, 0 pakiteigowin, his beating,
(dunr by l>iin : ) (receired by him.)
And a great number of other words of this description,
which ;ire not all in tin- I )iction;irv, because they can be
:y obtained, from the respective verbs, by the learner
him-
33
FORMATION OF TERMS OF CONTEMPT.
There is yet another formation, or rather transformation,
of substantives, which must be mentioned in the Otchipwe
Grammar.
By adding one of the syllables, ish, osh, or wish, to a sub-
stantive, they transform it into an expression of contempt.
Here are the Rules for this transformation.
RULE 1. The animate substantives that make their plural
by adding ag, ig, or iag ; and the inanimate that form the
plural by adding an} or in ; take ish for the case of con-
tempt.
EXAMPLES.
Substantives. Plural. Contempt.
Kwiwisens, a boy ; kwiwisensag, kwiwisensish, a bad
boy.
Ikwcsens, a girl ; ikwcscnsag, ikiccscnsish, a bad
girl.
Ninidjaniss, my child ; ninidjanissag, ninidjanissish, my
bad child.
Assab, a net ; assabig, assabish, an old net.
Assin, a stone ; assinig, assinish, a bad, unfit
stone.
Abinodji, a child ; abinodjiiag, ab.inodjiish, a bud
child.
Akiwes'i, an old man ; akiwesiiag, akiioesiish, a bad old
man.
Mokoman, a knife ; mokomanan, moko manish, a bad
knife.
Mojwdgan, scissors ; mojivaganan, mojwaganish, bad
scissors.
Mitigivab, a bow ; ' mitigicabin, mitigivabish, a bad
old bow.
Anit, a spear ; anitin} anitish, a bad, unfit
spear.
RULE 2. The animat substantives that form their plural
by adding og} or wag, (when these latter terminate in a
consonant in the singular,) and the hianinuttc that make
their plural in un} take <m/i for the case of contempt.
BXAICPL
Plural. Contempt.
Nabagissag, a board : nabagissagog, nabagissagosh, a bad
rotten board.
Mit'i", a tree ; mitigog, miti«osh, a bad tree.
Akik, a kettle ; akikog, (tkikus/i, a bad old
kettle.
Anang, a star ; anango", dudntfonh,n. bad star
Ami/:, beaver; attiikirdg, amikosh, a bad bea-
ver.
Ji //if teak, pine; jingirakwag, ji-ngtrakush, a bad
pine.
(jitta, a porcupine ; gd^iraa:, gd^os/i, a bad porcu-
pine.
Nishkinjig, my eye ; nishkinjigon, nishkinjigoshtmyb&d.
eye.
Sfakdk, a box ; makakon, wakakoth, a bad box.
iri///v///j an egg ; icawtumn. ira wa w «>•//, a bad spoil-
ed egg.
RULE 3. The animate substantives that make their plural
by adding #, or wdg, (when these latter tenninatr in a
rou'd in the singular ;) and the inanimalc. that form tin-
plural by adding wan ; take wish for the case of con-
tempt.
EXAMPLES.
Sttbttdiifirr*. Plural. Contempt.
Ogima, a chief; ogit/idg, oginuurith, a bad
chief.
Wemitigojikwe, u-rmitia;<>jik- wemitigojikwewish, a
Frenchwoman ; //v'Ar, bad Frenchwoman.
Anishinabe, Indian ; anishinabcg, anishinabewish,Q.b&d
Indian.
. a man j 'minlimi:, inin'nrinh, a bad,
wicked man.
35
Pijiki, an ox: pijikiwag, pijikit&ish, a bad ox.
Sibi, a river; sibiwan, sibiwish,^. bad river.
Odcna, a village; odenawan, edenawish, a bad vil-
lage.
Remark 1. In the first three words of the above exam-
ples, viz : Kiritcisensish, ihffesensish,ninidjanissish ; and in
the diminutives, which all end in sish, when expressing con-
tempt, this sish is pronounced shisJi. But nevertheless we
must grammatically take it for sish. The pronunciation
shish is only a corruption. So also, for instance, will a
common speaker of the English language pronounce, sha>/sh
she; but it ought to be, says she. And Canadians will say,
// va checher, (it will dry ;) instead of saying, // va sec/icr.
Remark 2. The plural of all the animate substantives
indicating contempt, is invariably formed by adding ag to
the singular ; and the plural of the inanimate by adding an.
F. i., Kwiurisensish, kwiwisensishag. Mitigosli, mitiaoshag.
Ininiwish, ininiwishag. Jffokomanisfc, mokomanishan. Ma-
kakosh, makakoshan. Sibiwish, sibitaishan, etc.
Remark 3. There are a few inanimate substantives de-
noting contempt, which make an exception from the above
Rule 1. They take ash, instead ofisk; as, nisid, my foot;
pi. nisidan ; nisidash my bad foot. Nibid, my tooth ; pi.
nibidan ; nibldash my bad tooth. Mashkimod, a bag; pi.
mashkimodan ; ?nashkimodash, a bad bag ; etc. Abwi, pad-
dle ; makes abwish; anwi, a ball; anwish.
Remark 4. It must, however, be observed, that these
terms implying contempt, are not always intended, nor taken,
for contempt. They are sometimes expressions of humility,
and at other times they are caressing terms.
So, for instance, an Indian speaking to you, will mention
all that belongs to him, in those terms denoting contempt ;
but only by modesty and humility. He will call his wife,
nin mindimoicmish ; his children, ninidjanixsishag ; his
lodge or house, nin wigiwamish; his canoe, nin tchimanishz
his luggage, nind aiimishan, etc.
36
And a squaw, for instance, caressing her little son, will
J\T/wif,i/v".<.sv>w.s-/.s7/ / ningwissensish ! fningwissens, sig-
nities, my little son.) And caressing her little daughter she
will repeat: Nindanissensish ! nindanissensish ! (nindan-
isscns, means, my little daughter.)
FORMATION OF DIMINUTIVE SUBSTANTIVES.
The Otchipwe language is very rich on diminutive sub-
stantives. They are formed from common substantives by
the annexation of six different terminations. These termi-
nations are : 5, ns, ens, ins, o?is, wens.
Here are the Rules for the formation of the diminutives.
RULE 1. The termination s is attached to substantives,
animate and inanimate, that end in gan, without an ac-
cent ; (if gait has an accent, the substantive belongs to
Rule 3., as, Kitigdn, kitigdnens.) The animate make
their plural in ag, the inanimate in an.
EXAMPLES.
Substantives.
Mas in itch igan,
image.
Opwdgan, a pipe ;
Diminutives.
Botdgan, a stamp ; botaganag ;
Plural
masinitchiga- masinitckigans, a lit-
nag ; tie image.
opii'uganag; opwaguns, a small
pipe.
bolagans, a small
stump.
Btminigan, an auger; biminiganan ; biminigans, a gimlet.
Masindigan, a book ; masinaiganan; 7n((^iinti^ans, a small
book.
Kijapikisigan, a kijapikisigdr. kijapildsigans, a small
stove; nan; stove.
KLLE 2. The termination ns is added to the animate suh-
>t;mtives that form their plural by adding », i<iit, or irag,
(when tlicse latter terminate in ;i roirr'l in the singular) ;
and to the inanimate that add n for the plural.
37
Substantives.
Ogimd, a chief;
EXAMPLES.
Plural
ogimdg ;
Maine d, a bear ; Malswag ;
Wissakodekwe, a half- wissakodelqpeg;
breed woman ;
OM-inawc, a young oslikinaweg ;
man ;
Nishimc, my younger Nisliimeiag ;
brother ;
Pakadkwe, a hen ; pakaakweiag ;
Pijiki, an ox, or cow; pijikhrag ;
igisij an eagle; migisiwag ;
Diminutives.
ogimdns, a small or
young chief.
makwans, (pron. ma-
hons) a young bear.
tvissakodekwens, a
young half-breed
woman.
oshldnawens, a small
young man.
nishimcns, my small
young br. or sister.
pakaakwens, chicken.
.S-, a calf.
mgsms, a young ea-
IVemitigoji, a French- Wcmitigoji-
man. wag ;
Abwi a paddle ; dbwin ;
Anwif a ball ; ~ an win ;
gl
e.
Frenchman.
abwins, a small paddle.
amc ins, a small ball,
shot.
RULE 3. The termination ens is annexed to those animate
substantives that form their plural by adding ag ; and
those inanimate that add an in the plural ; except the
animate and inanimate substantives ending in the singu-
lar in gany without an accent, which belong to Rule 1.,
as above.
EXAMPLES.
Substantives. Plural. Diminutives.
Jdganash, an Eng- Jaganashag ; Jaganashens, a little
lishman ; Englishman.
Kokosh, a pig ; kokoshag ; kokoshens a young
Pig-
Mtgwan, a pen, fea- migwanag ; migwanens, a small
ther ; feather.
3
38
r//?, a field ; kitigdnan : kitiganens, a garden.
Mitchikan, a fence ; m.tchikanun ; mitchikanrn*, a small
i'ence.
Bodawdn, a chimney; bodawanan; bodawanens, a small
chimney.
RULE 4. The termination ins is attached to the animate
substantives that make their plural in ig ; and to the
inanimate that make it in in.
EXAMPLES.
Substantives. Plural. Diminutives.
Assin, a stone; assinfg ; assinins, a little stone.
Attab, a net , assabig ; assabins, a small net.
Opin, a potatoe ; opinig ; opinins, a small po-
tatoe.
Abaj, a lodge-pole ; abajin ; abajins, a small lodge-
pole.
Anit, a spear ; anitin ; anitins, a little spear.
RULE 5. The termination ons is added to the animate sub-
stantives that form their plural by adding og, or wag
(when these latter terminate in a consonant in the singu-
lar,) and to the inanimate that make the plural in on.
EXAMPLES :
Substantives. Plural. Diminutives.
Andng, a star ; amingog ; ananguns, a small star
(asterisk.)
Akik, a kettle ; akikog ; akikonx, a small kettle.
Gincbig, a serpent, ginebigog ; ginebigons) a young
snake; snake.
Jingtr<</;, a pine-tree jjingwakicag ; jingwakonf, a young
pine-tree.
Atik, a rein-deer j atikwag ; at ikon*, a young rein-
deer.
Ajibtk, a rock; ajibikon; ajibikon*, a small rock.
Wag d Jc wad, an axe; wagaktoadon t wagakwadonst a small
axe.
Makdk, a box ; makakon : makakojis, a small box.
39
RULE 6. The termination wens is attached to the inanimate
substantives which make their plural by adding wan ; as,
Odena, a village ; odenawan ; odenawens, a small village,
etc.
For the plural of the diminutives, sse page 21 and 24.
OF THE CASES OF SUBSTANTIVES.
Case, in the grammatical language, is the position or
state of a substantive, with regard to other words in the
same sentence.
The Otchipwe substantives have four cases, viz : the
Nominative, Possessive, Objective, and Vocative.
The Nominitivc denotes simply the name of a person or
thing, or the subject of the verb. Examples of the nomina-
tive case ar all the substantives of the Dictionary, from the
first to the last.
The Objective denotes the object of some action or rela-
tion. It does not differ from the nominative in its con-
struction, except in the third person of the personal pro-
nouns, where the nominative is win, winaioa, he, she, it,
they ; and the objective is o, him, her, it, them.
The Possessive expresses the relation of property or pos-
session. This possessive case is expressed in Otchipwe by
putting o or od between the two substantives, of which one
corresponds to the English nominative, and the other to the
possessive. The position of the two substantives is the same
as in English ; the possessive comes first, and then the nomi-
native ; and instead of the letter s with an apostrophe be-
fore it, which is put in English between the possessive and
the nominative, we put in Otchipwe o or od} (which proper-
ly signifies his or her.) We put o before nominatives that
begin with a consonant, and od before those that begin with
a vowel. But sometimes this ^ is inseparably connected
with the possessive, and sometimes changed into w. (This
will be better understood after the study of the possessive
pronoun.)
40
I \ \MPLES OF THE POSSESSIVE CASE.
ffi-bidon John o masinuigan, I have brought John's
book.
Anindi noss o sakaon ? where is my father's cane?
A.7 vjidigemagcm oil inawemaganan, thy wife's relatives.
Nin wi-gishpinadon kissaic o 'iraktHgan, I will buy thy
brother's house.
Meno-ijiwtbisid inini od incndamowinan, a good man's
thoughts.
Kitclii ogimd ogwissan gi-nlboiran, the King's son is dead.
Kikinoamdgevrimni ir/tran dkositcan, the school teacher's
wife is sick.
Nissaie o ic/iiman, my brother's canoe. Kimisse od ana-
/iratt, thy sister's mat. Noss od assabin.my father's nets.
Aw inini ojisheian, that man's grand children.
The Vocative is used in calling persons or other objects.
It is double, singular and plural.
The vocative in the singular number is only employed
in calling proper names, or terms of relationship. Other
.substantives are not susceptible of this vocative ; or rather,
their vocative is like the nominative. They undergo no
change in the vocative.
I. RULES FOR THE FORMATION OF THE VOCATIVE SINGULAR.
RULE 1. Proper names of women, ending in kwr, reject
the two last letters, //« nnd r, to form the vocative. F. i.
Gijignkim, voc. Grijigok ! — Wmdignkwc, voc. Windi-
gok ! Ogcikwe, voc. Ogdk ! — Nodinokwe, voc. Nvdhwk!
Olairdkii'r, voc. Olawuk !
RULE 2. The proper names of men nnd women, ending in
a voirrl, cut off this vowel for the vocative. F. i. Nijudc,
voc. Nijod ! — Ahhiodji voc. Abinodj.
RULE 'i. Terms of relationship, ending in a roirrf, reject
this vowel, to form the vocative. /•'. /'. Nita, my brother-in-
law; voc. nit ! — .V///.s7/r, my uncle, (my mover's brother,)
voc. -nijish ! — \',nnsln' (or nhiirishc,) my aunt, (my
tnot/u'r's sister,) voc. ninosh ! or ninwish ! — Ningd^ my
mother, voc ning ! (Tln-y s:i\ more commonly, ningc /)
41
Exceptions. — Nimiskome, my uncle, (my father's brother,)
makes nimisho ! — Ninddngwe, my sister-in-law, or my
friend, (a female speaking to a female,) does not change in
the vocative, ninddngwe ! — Nidji, my friend, (a male speak-
ing to a male,) makes likewise nidji !
For the terms of relationship, ending in a consonant, there
is no general rule for the formation of the vocative. Some
of them make their vocative like the nominative; as Nhig-
wiss, my son, voc. ningwhs ! — Ninddniss, my daughter,
voc. ninddniss ! — Ninidjaniss, my child, voc. ninidjaniss !
Nikdniss, my brother, my friend, voc. nikdniss ! — Ninsi-
goss, my aunt, (my father's sister,) voc. ninsigoss ! — Nin-
dojim, my step-son, voc. nindbjim ! — Some of these terms
form the vocative in a peculiar manner ; as : Nimishomiss,
my grand-father, voc. nimisho- — Nokomiss,my grand-moth-
er, voc. noko ! — JVoss, my father, voc. nosse ! — (The Indians
of Grand-Portage, Fort William, and other places in the
north, say noss ! instead of nosse /)
The vocative in the plural number is used for substan-
tives animate and inanimate, after the following rules.
II. RULES FOR THE FORMATION OF THE VOCATIVE PLURAL.
a. For animate substantives.
RULE 1. Substantives ending in d, e, 3, o, add idog for the
vocative plural. F. i. Akiwcsi, an old man, voc. akiwesii-
dog ! — Abinodji, a child, voc. abinodjiidog ! — Gigo, a
fish, voc. gigoidog !-—Pakadkwe, a cock, voc. pakadk-
weidog I
RULE 2. Substantives ending in the plural in ag or wag,
change ag into idog, to form the vocative, F. i. Nind inaw-
emaganig, my relations, voc. nind inawcmaganidog !— —
Jimaganishag,so\diers,voc.jimdganishidog! — Kwiwistn-
sag, boys, voc. kwiwisensidog ! — Ikwesensag, girls, voc.
ikwescnsidog! — Ininiwag, men, voc. ininiwidog ! — Iku'e-
wag, women, voc. ikicewidog I — Pijikiwag, oxen, voe.
pijikiwidog /
42
Hi I.E 3. Substantives ending in the plural in i*, iff, or og,
change the final # into do^. F. i. Ani*himibcg, Indians,
voc. anishikdbectog ! — Oginn'g. chiefs, voc. ug'nndaog !
AndngOgi stars, voc. andngodog ! — \Vabotogi rabbits,
voc. wubnstf.dog ! — Opi/iitf, potatoes, voc. opinidog ! —
Assail g, nets, voc. assabidog!
RULE 4. Substantives with possessive pronouns change
their last syllable nig into dog. F. i. Nind 6gimaminanigt
our chiefs, voc. nind ogimaminadogi—Nikdnissinanig, our
friends, our brethren, voc. nikdnissinadog ! — Nin irid-
jiwdganinanig, our companions, voc. nin widjiwdganina-
dog ! — Nind- inawemaganinanig, our relations, voc. nind
nawemaganinadog !
b. For inanimate substantives.
Inanimate, substantives have a proper vocative plural in
the rhetorical figure of Apostrophe, where inanimate ob-
jects are addressed like animate beings. There are two
rules for the formation of this vocative.
RULE 1. Inanimate substantives ending in the plural in
an, change this an mioidog, to form the vocative plural.
F. i., Sfasindigcmcut, books; voc. masindiganidog !
Matclii bimdcKsiwinan, bad lives, (bad habits;) vocative,
matchi bimddisiwinidog !
RULE 2. Inanimate substantives ending in the plural in in
or on, change their final n into (Jog. F. i., Mitigwdbin,
bows; voc. mitigwubidog ! flfagweiabin, rainbow*; voc.
nagweiabidog ! Otchib/Lon, roots; voc. otchtbi/codog !
Remark. Substantives which are at the same time par-
ticiples, form their vocative, singular and plural, according
to the paradigrrs of the iliflerrnt Conjngatirns, (as you will
see in the Chapter of Verbs.) F. i., Enamiad, a Christian ;
voc. uHtntHiiftn ! Christian! enamiaiegt ye Christians!
lliHiiniamig, a pagan ; voc. cnaHiiussiwan ! pagan ! cnarni-
assiivcg ! ye pagans !
CHAPTER II.
OF PRONOUNS.
A Pronoun, as denoted by its very appellation, is a word
used for a noun, or instead of a noun or substantive, to
avoid the too frequent repetition of the same word. This
is the reason why it follows here immediately after the sub-
stantive, And it is ordinarily placed immediately before
the verb in the sentence. This is the reason why it pre-
cedes immediately the verb in this Grammar.
There are five distinct sorts or classes of pronouns in the
Otchipwe Grammar, viz : Personal, Possissive, Demon-
strative, Interrogative^ and Indefinite pronouns. We shall
now consider each of these different classes of pronouns,
respecting their inflections and peculiar use.
L PERSONAL PRONOUNS,
Personal Pronouns are those which designate the three
persons : the first person, or the speaker; the second per-
son, or the one spoken to ; the third person, that is, the
person or thing spoken o£
SCHEME OF THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS.
( sing. nin, I, me,
First person: < i nin. or lei. )
(P'ur- \ minmind, or kinawind, }
Sec. person : J si"g- *?• " *'«>. thou' thee>
( plur. kinawa, KI, you,
TO person : I ** "*" *
(plir. winava.they,
Remark 1. To the pronouns Tim and ki, a euphonical c2
is attached, when the following verb commences with a
vowel; as, nind ija, I go; kid anoki, thou workest ; nind
inendamin, we think; kid indwa, you tell him, etc.
"' } «.«»
y, j (^j
44
There are analogous cases of such euphonical letters also
in other languages. In French the letter t is inserted be-
tween the verb and pronoun in some instances to avoid a
cacophonical accumulation of vowels ; as, y en a-t-i/ ? ahne-
t-on ? etc. There is another analogy to our case in the Ital-
ian language. When the conjunctions e and o, and the
preposition a aro followed by a word beginning with a vow-
el, a euphonical d is attached to them ; as voi ed io ftrato ;
io od oif/ii at' ro ; ad tin ccrto passo . . ., etc. There are
also in the Chapter of Verbs some such interpositions of the
euphonical cl, (od> ged-9 gad-*)
It must, however, be observed, that this d, although
generally used, may also sometimes be omitted. We may
say : Mi ge-ijiwebak, instead of //// ^rfl-ijiircbak^ so it will
happen. Mi gc-ing, so it will be,, or be it so. Mi aw
<rr-ijad, this one will go. In the Otawa dialect the eupho-
nical d is more frequently omitted than in the Otchipioe.
As we are speaking of euphonical letters, we must men-
tion one more, which is used in this language. It is the
letter 2, which is sometimes prefixed to the particles gc^
ko, na, and sa, and to the conjunctions dash andgaic, when
the word preceding them, ends in a consonant, to avoid a
disagreeable crowd of consonants ,- as, irin tf/o> he himself
od man iko, he uses to tell him ; ki nondcrw ina ? dost thou ;
hear me? ki kUetnda$i /'s<v, thou art learned; nongomidash,
but now ; nin igaic, I also. But it must again be observed,
that the interposition of this euphonical / is not absolutely
necessary; and I remarked among the Indians, that it is
more usual in some places than in others ; and more fre-
quently employed by old grave speakers than by voung
folks. It is also more frequently used in speaking than in
writing. Be it finally remarked, that the same vowel is
used iu Italian, to prevent a crowd of consonants.
1\i-ni(irl: ~. The first person in the plural, ire, is express-
ed in Otchi])\ve by ;//'// or /.'/', by ninntrhid or kintnrind. —
.Y/// or ki is employed in the immediate connexion with
the verb; as, nin nagnmtnirin, we sing; /,•/ phindamin, we
listen. But when the pronoun is not connected with the
45
verb, ninawind or kinawind is employed for we ; as, awenc*
nag igiw negamodjig? Ninawind sa. Who are those
that sing ? We do. Awenenag igiw pesindangtg ? Kin-
au'ind sa. Who are those that listen? We do.
Remark 3. Although the pronouns nin and kl, ninawind
and kinawind, all signifiy wey the difference between nin
and ki, and between ninawind and kinawiwdt is material,
and must well be kept in memory, for the right use of
them.
1. Nin or ninawind is employed, when those that speak,
do not include in their number the person or persons whom
they speak to. F. i., nin nagtxmomin, we sing, (we that
speak now, not the person or persons to whom we speak.)
And likewise ninawind, that is, we only that speak, not the
person or persons spoken to.
2. Ki or kinawind is used, when those that speak, in-
clude in their number the person or persons to whom they
speak. F. i., ki phindatnin, we listen, (we that speak, and
the person or persons to whom we speak.) And so also
kinawind, we altogether, those that speak, and those that
are spoken to.
Nota bene. Please mind well this difference between nin
and ki, ninawind and kinainnd. You will have to make
use of it throughout this Grammar.
Remark 4. The Otchipwe language, like all other prim-
itive and ancient languages, does not use the second person
plural in addressing a person to who'n respect is shown ;
the second person singular is invariably employed, may the
person addressed be on the lowest or highest degree of res-
pectability. You have seen this already in many of the
preceding examples. In English such addresses sound ra-
ther rough and unusual, (except among Quakers.) But in
order to give exactly the meaning of the Otchipwe phrases
in English, I always retain the second person singular also
in English. Be it generally remarked here, that the En-
glish portion of all the examples of this Grammar eould be
much better than it is, but I try to accommodate the trans-
46
lation as much as can be, to the original, in order to give
to the learner a clearer understanding of the Otchipwe sen-
ten <••
.II. I'OSSKSSIVE PRONG I
Posscsive Pronouns are those which mark possession or
property. They may be divided in two classes, vi/ : those
that immedi itely precede a substantive, which we may call
conjunct rr possessive pronouns : and those that stand sep-
arated from it, which can be named rclaf — ivc pro-
nouns.
first class ; Conjunctive Possessive Pronoun*.
(Nin, my; C Nin or /•/, our;
Sing. < ki, thy ; ' Plur. < £/, your ;
( o, h:s, her, its. ( o, their.
These pronouns are always placed immediately before a
substantive, or before an adjective proper that may precede
a substantive.
EXAMPLES.
mindjikdwanag b/j, bring me my gloves, (mittens.)
Li toiwakwan, put on thy hat.
Mi av kwiwisens saidgitod o masinuiffont this is the boy
that likes his book.
Kimisse osam o minwcndan o uxibmotcJiitchagioan, thy sis-
ter likes too much her looking-glass.
Nin sfi'jla air abinodji ; uii ow o wiwakioonens, 1 like this
cliild ; here is its little bonnet.
Anindi n n tcMnuininan ? \\ here is our canoe ?
Ka icika ta-nibtms'tirdg /,-/ tr/iitr/utiioiKtniif, our souls will
never die.
Anin tndathiirod Li manishtdnishintticog ? What is the
number of your slieej) ?
Mij ogow kwurisauag o wiasindiganiwtM, give to the.-c
boys tlieir books.
Ttata tioiffin o mino dodamowinan, his (her) good deeds are
many.
47
Ninjingendan nin matchi ijiwebi$iwins I hate my bad
conduct.
Ki gcte masinaigan aion kikinoantading, kidoshki masinai-
gan dash mino ganawendan, make use of thy old book at
school, and take well care of thy new book.
Second class ; Relative Possessive Pronouns.
( Nin, mine ; ( Nina wind, or kinau-ind,
Sing. I kin, thine; Plur. I kinawa, yours; [ours;
( win, his, hers ; I w'/nawa, theirs.
These pronouns are not in immediate connexion with
the substantive to which they allude, but are separated from
it by one or more words, which precede or follow the sub-
stantive.
EXAMPLES.
Nin ganabatch nin nokoman ow. E, nin sa, nin nissitu-
winan. This is perhaps my knife. Yes it is mine, I re-
cognise it.
Kin ganabatch lei moshwem ga-mikawag. Kin sa, nind in-
endam. It is perhaps thy handkerchief I found. It is
thine, I think.
Win na o pakitiigan ow ? E, win sa. Is this his (her)
hammer? Yes it his (hers.)
Kinawa na ki wakaiganiwa ow? Kawin ninawind. Is
this your house ? No it is not ours.
Rinawind na geget kid akiminan kakina iw ? E, kinawind
sa kakina. Is that indeed all our land ? Yes it is all
ours.
Ninawind na nin tchimaninan iw ? Kawin, kinawa, nind
inendam. Is that our canoe ? No, it is yours, I think.
IVinawa na od assabiwan band<lisiwan 1 E, winawa sa.
Are their nets lost 1 Yes theirs.
Remark 1. You see by these examples, that, whenever
the possessive pronoun is not immediately before the substan-
tive, one of the second class is employed
Remark 2. What has been said in the preceding number
48
of the euphonical d, is to be applied to the pronouns of this
number likewise. So, you will say :
Win babisikawagan, my co&t ; but you will have to sny,
nind (indkan, my mat.
Ki mdkisin, thy shoe; but, kid ondgan, thy plate.
O dodamowin, his doinir ; but, od anamiewbf, his religion.
Remark 3. The difference between nln and kin, ours :
ninaicind and kinaiffind, ours ; is the same as stated above
in Remark 3, of the preceding number, (p. 45.)
The use of the Otchipwe possessive pronouns is difficult.
The difficulty is not created by the pronouns themselves,
which are simple; but by the substantives that follow them.
To employ correctly these pronouns with their substan-
tives, attention must be paid to the substantive or noun, to
know whether it is animate or inanimate. (See pages 18
and 19.)
We will here first consider the use of the possessive pro-
nouns with inanimate substantives.
A. Possessive Pronouns with inanimate Substantives.
FORM 1.
tchiman, my canoe,
/»•/ tchiiiuin, thy canoe,
o tchiinan, his (her) canoe.
!n in f eft i i/i a tr<m, my canoes,
/,•/' frhinHini\u, thy canoes,
o tchittuiif.ui. his (her) canoe.
«. , fa tf/i/ni(iii\n;\u, |
>mgu ar. < ^. //•//' ///«// iwa, your canoe,
o tr/ii/it(tti'\\\'i\, their canoe.
nr canoe*,
ft t ff/ff//f«/riii<ilkill, |
a ' j ki tc/iiiii<tn\\\-;m, your can
/ o tchim(ini\\an, their canoes.
49
After this form may be constructed all the inaminale sub-
stantives with their possessive pronouns, that add the sylla-
ble an for the plural, as :
Nin nabikn-an, my vessel. Nin mokoman, my knife.
Nin masindigan, my book. Nin wakdigan, my house.
Nishtigwdn, my head. Nisid, my foot.
Ninik, my arm. Nikud, my leg.
Nindon, my mouth. N-kdn, my bone.
Nitdwag, my ear. Nibid, my tooth.
Nind apabiwin, my chair. Nind ad'powin, my table.
Remark. In regard to the orthography of some words in
this list, and of many others of this description in the fol-
lowing forms, it is necessary to observe, that I adopted the
rule, as well for the inanimate as animate substantives, to
write the possessive pronoun with its substantive in one
word, whenever (mind this well) whenever the substantive is
such as never to be used alone, separated from its possessive
pronoun. So, for instance, nishtigwdn, my head. The
word shtlgwan is never used in the Otchipwe language, it
is no word of this language. It must always have a posses-
sive pronoun before it, and is inseparable from it. Of the
same kind are: Ninik, • nindin, nisid, nikan, nishkinjig ;
niiaw, niidss. Noss, ningu, nokomiss, nijishe, nit a, ninim,
nissim, nish'imc, nissa'-c., nidjikiwi', ninddngwe, ningwiss,
nindaniss, etc. etc. — These and other words of this kind,
are never pronounced without a possessive pronoun. Why
and how shall we then separate them in writing? What
the most ancient usage of the language has connected, the
individual writer ought not to separate.
Here is a little sub-form for this kind of substantives,
with their possessive pronouns.
f Nikan, my bone,
Singular. \ kikan, thy bone.
( okan, his (her) bone.
{nikan&n, my bones,
kikanan, thy bones,
okana.n, his (her) bones.
50
(*
Singular. ,
/i7/.v///iwa, your bone,
L 0//«/mvn, their bone.
r />/AV/?inanin, )
Plural ]«•«'»<->">, }ourbones'
] kikaniwan, your bones,
(_ o/jM/ziwan, their bones.
Note. Some of these words, denoting parts of the human
body, terminate in the second plural in ananin, as, nisid,
ray foot; nmWananin, our feet. Likewise nin.l:, my arm;
nikdd, my leg ; nitdicag, my ear ; ?i',bid, my tooth. Some
words of this, and of the following forms, change the pos-
sessive pronoun of the third person, o, into wi, as, nibid,
my tooth ; w'tbid, his tooth. And many others in other
forms, inanimate and animate.
EXAMPLES.
Nibld nind dkosln ; I have toothache, (pain in one tooth.)
Wibidan od akosinan; he has toothache, (pain in more
than one tooth.)
Kakina kid dkotiniin klslitigwdnm^mn ; we have all head-
ache, (we all hnve pain in our heads.)
JVdbang ta-mticljiiassin lei //<. bikicHiiuum ; our vessel will
leave to-morrow.
fifamitchdwan Id ndbikwamwnn ; your vessels are large.
Takwdmagad ki bimddisiwinin&n oi/ia aking; our life on
earth is short.
AniL't-nindiswLd , andjitoda l;>d yiwebisitDininyn, ki cja-gas-
siu/iHigoiifin tlath Dcbeniminang ki batddowiniumm ;
L< t us rcjXMil ;MK! (•lian^o our conduct, (our life) and
our Lord will blot out our sins.
Debenimiiang, bonigidetavrishinam n'm b&tddourinin&nin ;
Lord, forgive us our sins.
Debendjiged o kik'-ndanan kokina kid inSndamowinmtaan \
the Lord knows all our thoughts.
Debinimiiang, l;i irtihundn n<m knkina Jilii dv(l<unowiii\\\z-
nin : Lord, th ill our actions.
51
FORM 2.
{Nind abaj, my pole, (lodge-pole,'
kid abaj, thy pole,
od abaj, his (her) pole.
{nind abajin, my poles,
kid abdjin, thy poles,
oil abaj'm, their poles.
o}
~. , kid
Singular. 1 your
od abaji\V(L, their pole,
nmd abajmzmn, > Qur ,
kid abajmanm, )
Plural. s 7
kid abajiwzn, your pole?,
od abajiwan, their poles.
To this form belong the substantives with their posses-
sive pronouns, that add for the plural the syllable in ; as :
Nind anit, my spear, pi. nind anitin.
Ninindjt my hand, ,, ninindijin.
Ninde, my heart, ,, nindeinanin, our hearts.
Niiaw, my body, ,, kiiawinan, our body.
Niiass, my flesh, ,, kiidssinan, our flesh, etc.
Note. The two last words, n'daw and niiass, have wi in
the third person ; instead of o ; wiiaw, his body ; u-iiass,
his flesh, (or meat in general.) See Note, p. 50.
EXAMPLES.
Kiiatcinanm kaginig ta-limadisimagadon gijigong, Jdslipin
enamiangin iji bimadisiiang dking ; our bodies will live
eternally in heaven, if we lead a Christian life on earth.
Metchi-ljiwebisidjig wiiawiwan kagige ishkottng ta-dand-
kideniwan ; the bodies of the wicked will burn in eternal
fire..
Awishtoid kitchi nibiwa o gi-ojitonan kid an'it'man'm ; the
blacksmith has made a great many spears for us, (a great
number of our spears.)
52
nioatig nind abafm o gi-bodawenan; he burnt up (or
fired) live of my lodge-pol<
/v/V'W/inanin d'n'tiang kid ojiiomin kakina kid inanoki-
?/-/;/inan ; by the use of our hands \ve do ;dl our work.
Swdnganamiadjig w/.-'iwan moskkineniwan mi n't im'ndamu-
win ; the hearts of true Christians are full of good will.
FORM 3.
{Nin makdkf my box,
ki makak, thy box,
o makak, his (her) box.
( nin ?nakakon, my boxes,
Plural. < ki mukakon, thy boxes,
( o makakon, his (her) boxes,
f Nin makdkon&n,
Singular. «• ^,
I: i makakowz, your box,
t o jniikako\vn, their box.
(///'// makakonanm.
/.-/^^/onanin,
/•/ ///r/Av//,-o\van, your boxes,
o »iY//,Y//.-ownn, their boxes.
After this form can be formed aJl the inanimate substan-
tives with their possessive pronouns, that add the syllable
on to the singular to form the plural ; as :
Nin wigtod&siwigamig) my Nin wagdkwad, my axe.
lodge.
Nishkinjig, my eye, or my Ninrl ajatreslik, my sword.
face.
E±AMPLE8,
Mamoda ki loagdkwadon&nm, awi-manis$eda ; let us take
our axes, and let us go and chop wood.
Manddtidon ki wagdkvHldow&D, awdshimt onrjitJiin nin ?iin
irit n, ',!,•„•(, f] ; yuiir axes arc bad, my a\c is better.
Kid <il;i>*!>i )ia kishkinjig 1 Is thy eye sore ?
'/ o gi-wanitonan oshkinjigon] he almost lost his eyes.
53
Nijinon nangwana kid ajaweskkon ; thou hast then two
swords.
Mddjidon lei makak; gaie kinawa mddjidoiog ki makak-
owan ; carry away thy box ; and you also carry away
your boxes.
Remark, We could take the three forms in one only,
and say that the mutative vowel* which is a in the first
form, i in the second, and o in the third, makes the only
difference in the terminations. But I think that for the
beginner it will be easier to have the forms before him de-
tailed according to the three different mutative vowels.
Learners that are more advanced, may take the three forms
in one.
OF THE POSSESSIVE TERMINATIONS.
The inanimate substantives with possessive pronouns
take sometimes the terminations m, hit, or om, which may
be called in the Otchipwe Grammar the possessive termina-
tions, because they are annexed to substantives with pos-
sessive pronouns, in order to express more emphatically
properly or possession. F. i. Nind aki, my land, my farm;
nind akim, my own piece of land ; nin kijupikisigdns, my
little stove ; nin kiidpijcisigdnsiw^ my own little stove.
Nin wdgakwad, my axe ; nin waga/avadom, my own axe.
There are three rules for the annexation of the posses-
sive terminations to inanimate substantives ; viz :
RULE 1. Inanimate substantives with possessive pronouns,
which terminate in a vowel, take the possessive termina-
tion m ; as, Nin miskwi, my blood ; nin miskwim, ki misk-
wim, o miskivim, my, thy, his own blood. Nin maskkiki,
my medicine ; nin mashldkim, etc. Nin sibi, my river ;
nin sibim, o sibim, etc.
* You will find a Note on the mutative vowel in the next Chapter, in
the enumeration of the different kinds of verbs. As far as this mutative
vowel is concerned here, you may call it thus j The vowel with which
Ifie terminations of these forms commence.
4
54
RULE 2. Inanimate substantives with possessive pronouns,
which lor in their plural by adding on, take the possessive
termination om ; as, Ain gijigadon, my days ; ningijiga-
r/om, my own day ; nin ^'/y^m/oman, my own particular
days; o gijigacfam, his remarkable day. Nine/ fijawcth-
kon, my swords ; od ajaweshkom, od ajaweshkoman,
etc.
RULE 3. All the other inanimate substantives with p<^
sive pronouns, and likewise all inanimate diminutives,
take the possessive termination tm; as, Am nabikican,
my vessel; nin n^bikwamiu, my own vessel, my very
vessel. Nin mitigwdb, my bow; nin mitigwabim, o mi-
tigwabim, etc.
Note. All these substantives with possessive pronouns,
that take a possessive termination, belong to Form 1. " Nin
tchiman."
B. Possessive Pronouns with animate Substantives.
We have seen in the preceding forms, how possessive
pronouns are expressed with inanimate substantives. Let
us now consider the effect they make on animate substan-
tives.
FORM 1.
{Nin (I (ik'tk, my kettle,
kid akik, thy kettle,
od akikou, his (her) kettle.
f nind nkikogy my kettles,
Plural. <. kid akikog, thy kettles,
( od a k ikon, his (her) kettles.
f K!.Md. "'•'/•»"™> } our kettle,
c. , I kid r/Av/onan, j
ar' 1 kid r//,//owa, your kettle,
(_ od r//.//owan, their kettle.
fnind r//,-//,-onanig, > kettles
/ - / / •/ * / *MII K( MM >
kid a&t&onanig, )
kid dfctJtowag, your kettles,
od aA'/Aowan, their kettles.
55
Some animate substantives with possessive pronouns,
that terminate their plural in ig, conform also to this form,
but their imitative vowel* is .i instead of o. F. i. nind
assdb, my net; pi. nind astabig, my nets; od assab'm,
nind assab'man, kid assabiwag, etc. This i remains through-
out aH the terminations,
Some animate substantives with possessive pronouns,
that add only g- for the plural, and end in a vowel in the
singular, belong also to this form with a little variation ; as :
f Nidj'anis/iinabe, my neighbor, (fellow-man,
Q. , I brother,
angular. < ^., anisllhiab^ thy neighbor,
(^ widf anishinabcn, his (her) neighbor.
nidf anishinabeg, my neighbors, (ti-liow-
pi j men,
kidf anishinabeg, your neighbors,
widf anishinaben, his (her) neighbors.
JVid/' anishinabenan, ) -IT.
Sin ular ^ ***? an'^inabcn^ } °Ur neighbor^
I kidf anishinabewa, your neighbor,
widf anishinabewan, their neighbor.
widf/' anishinabenznis, ) . , ,
/ • j-j • 7 • z. • / our neighbor?,
Plural - onisMnabesvaag, )
;' anishinabewzg, your neighbors,
/'' anishinabewau, their neighbors.
Likewise, wic?;' bimadisi, my fellow-liver, (fellow-man),
etc.
Remark. This jPorwi 1. is seldom used. The animate sub-
stantives with possessive pronouns, take almost always the
possessive terminations, m, imy or om.
There are likewise three rules for the possessive termina-
tions of the animate substantives, viz :
See Note p. 53.
56
RULE 1. Animate substantives, ending in a vowel, take the
possessive termination ///, when they are preceded by a
possessive pronoun. F. i. J\ijc-M<ini1o, ( lod ; nin Kijc-
Mttnihim, my Hod. Ogimii, chief, king ; nind /iginifmi,
my chief. Inini, m;m ; y/ /'///•/ ///////m, my man, my hus-
band. JA:i0c, woman ; /////<-/ i/cirnn, my woman, my wife.
Moshwe, handkerchief; wm mosliwcm, my handkerchief.
RTLE 2. Animate substantives forming their plural by add-
ing ag, ig, or lag, take the possessive termination imy
when a possessive pronoun is prefixed to them. F. i.
Maiiixh tan ith, sheep, (pi. motttjAlaftisAag,) nin inani^li-
tanishim, my sheep. Masinitchigan, image, (pi. mftti-
nitchigan&g,) nin masinitckiganim, my image. Opin, a
potatoe, (pi. opitng,) nind op'n\m, my potatoe. Gigo, fish,
(pi. gtg#iags) '''/* ,Ar///.vim, my fish.
RULE 3. Animate substantives that form their plural by
adding og or wag, take the possessive termination «///,
when they have a possessive pronoun before them, ir/u-n
they don't terminate i/t a roircl in the singular. (If the
substantives with the plural termination in it'dg, terminate
in a vowel in the singular, they belong to the first of
these rules, ad take the possessive termination m ; as,
lkwet woman, (pi. /7-//v//v//>-,) nind i/siccm. Pijiki, ox,
pi. pijikiwag,) nin p ijikiin, etc.)
IAAMPLES TO RULE 3.
Wabos, rabbit, (pi. ?f«6osog,) nin irfibotom, my rabbit.
Ajuing, star, (pi. anfin^n^,) nind anantunn, my star. At'tk,
rein-deer, (pi. atikwag,} nind r///7.-om, my rein-deer. Jing-
//Y/A-, pine-tree (pi. jingwakvrag) nin jingwakom, my pine-
tree, etc.
All the substantives with possessive pronouns, mentioned
in the above three rules, belong to the following form.
FORM 2.
{.\iiifl turhtinw, my chief,
hid (>Lr ii/Kiin, thy chief,
ad ogimamim, his (her) chief.
57
{nind ogimam&g, my chiefs,
kid ogimamag, thy chiefs,
od ogimam&n, their chiefs.
Q. , I kid ftgtmttmman,
-angular. <^ ^ ogimam'lw^ your chief,
L or/ ogimamiwsin, their chief.
p. , kid ogimamintnig,
a ' ] kid ogimamiwsig, your chiefs,
(__ or/ o^mmwavvan, their chiefs.
Besides all the animate substantives with possessive pro-
nouns, that have the possessive terminations, those also
that add ag in the plural, belong to this form, as some of
the following examples will show you.
EXAMPLES.
Mino inakonigewag kid ogimdm'm<img ; our chiefs make
good laws, (regulations).
Nebwakad anishinabe o babamitawan od ogimdman ; a pru-
dent Indian listens to his chief.
Nissiwag nin kitchi pijikim'mamg, nananiwag dash nin
pijikinsim\n&mg ; the number of our cows is three ; and
of our calves, five.
Gi-mino-nitawigiicag na kid op/mmiwag ? Have you got a
good crop of potatoes ?
Batamowag na kid ikwesensima.g 1 — Nawatch batdinowag
nin kwiwisensimag. Hast thou many girls 1 — I have more
boys.
Nin gi-wabamimanan od andngoman wabanong ; we have
seen his star in the east.
Nind inawemagan, my relative, (pi. nind inawemaganag.)
Nongom nibiwa nind inaiuemagan\iva.\nggi-bi-ijaivag oma;
to-day many of our relatives came here.
Kotawan, a large piece of wood for fuel, a block, (pi. ko~
tawari&g.) Ki kotawaiiiw&g, your blocks; nin kota-
trawinanig, our blocks ; o kotawqntm, his block, or his
58
Kitckipison, a belt, (pi. kitckipison&g.) Bij ki kitclnpis-
onag- bring here thy belts. Nin kite hip isomnim, our
belt; ki kitchipisonuinnig, our belts.
In the terms that mark the different degrees of relation-
ship, there is some deviation from the preceding forms,
some irregularity, which we have to consider now.
IRREGULAR FORM 1.
( Noss, my father,
Singular. < A-OS.S, thy father,
I ossan, his (her) father.
{nossag, my fathers,*
kossag, thy fathers,
ossan, his (her) fathers.
("TVossinan, \ ,. .
g. ukr 1 toyman) 1°™ father'
I Arossiwa, your father,
(_ ossiwan, their father.
f ««"inluli«. I our fathers,
Plural. ^"lamgj
kossiwzg, your fathers.
ossiwan, their fathers.
This form is irregular only in the third persons, which
are not preceded by od, as the regular form is, od osr-ima-
man, o;l o^iin<unhr<in. Exactly after this form is inflected
the term nokomi&s, my grand-mother.
The following terms of relationship : Nimishomiss, my
grand-father ; ningwiss, my son ; nindtinht, my daughter ;
ninidjaniss, my child; -m'siniss, my father-in-law; and
others whicli you will iind below, in the list displayed after
these irregular forms, are also inflected according to this
first irregular form, except in the third persons, were they
take o or ad: «///•'>•//«/// /s.s^//, ogii'i**fin, urldnisxa-n, onidja-
osinissan, etc.
* A person may have two fathers, or two mothers ; one by nature, and
another by adoption.
59
IRREGULAR FORM 2.
{Ningd, my mother,
kiga, thy mother,
ogin, his (her) mother.
f ningaiag, my mothers,
Plural. < kigaiag, thy mothers,
( ogin, his (her) mothers.
{&™ganan> \ our mother,
1 kiganan, }
ar. < j,ig-lwa^ y0ur mother,
/ ogiwan, their mother.
.f™^™™^ I our mothers,
kiffonanig, S
Plnral
] kigiioag, your mothers,
(_ orjiwan, their mothers.
This form, as you see, is altogether irregular ; and there
is no other word belonging to it
IRREGULAR FORM 3.
f Nissaie, my brother (older than I,)
Singular. < kissaie, thy brother,
( ossaiei&n, his (her) brother.
( nissaieiag, my brothers,
Pkiral. ! /i-/\s\sY//riag, thy brothers,
t ossaieia.n, his (her) brothers.
f Nissaienan, )
7 . . > our brother,
^. T I A:?5sc<enan, )
1 kissaieiwa., your brother,
|[_ 055«zciwan, their brother.
nissaien3in\g, )
k
Hard ,
kissateiMvag, your brothers,
their brothers.
60
Here are some animate substantives with possessive pro-
nouns belonging to this form ; viz :
Nimishome, my uncle, (my father's brother.)
Nijisht, my uncle, (my mother's brother.)
NinoshS, (ninvriske,) my aunt (my mother's sister.)
Nimissff my sister, (older than I.)
Nishime, my brother or sister, (younger than I.)
Nidjikiwe, my friend, my brother, (ivifljik'tireinn.)
NindangosJie, my she-cousin, (a female speaking.)
Ninddngive, my sister-in-law, or my friend, (a female speak-
ing-)
Nojishc, my grand-child, (ojishcian; qjisheiwan.)
Besides these terms of relationship, all the animate sub-
stantives with possessive pronouns, that make their plural
by adding iag belong to this form ; as :
Nijode, twin; nin nijodeiagi ki ?iy or/en an ig : ki nt/oofeiwa.
Abinodji, child ; nind abinadjinBH ; kid abhiodjiiwdg.
iC) old woman; nin mindimoienanig ; o
Bines hi, bird; o bineshiinu ; ki bincshiiag', nin
Pakadkwe, cock, hen ; ninpakaakwenamg] kip<(l:(iakwc\\<ai\.
etc. etc.
The other terms of relationship, (besides the above,)
conform themselves to the preceding irregular forms, or to
the regular forms, according to thc-ir plural. If you know
the first and the third person of the first singular, and tho
first persons of the first plural and second singular, you can
construct the rest according to the above forms. In th<
following list these four persons are indicated.
Nins'miss* my father-in-law ; Oi>iuistan> ?ii-nsini*wgt ninsiii-
IJJtJMMi
.V/w.s/.ifas'/'.s-.f, my mother-in-law; osigosissan, ninfigo$is8Ogt
ninsigosissinton.
Nita, my brother-in-law ; w'danj; nitag, nitanan.
* See Remark . p. 49. t See Note, p. 5Q.
61
, my sister-in-law, (or my brother-in-law ; a female
speaking ;) winimon, ninimog, ninimonan.
Nitdwiss, my he-cousin ; icitawissan, nitawissag, nitawis-
sinan.
Ninimoshe, my she-cousin ; ivinimosheian, ninimosheiag,
ninimoshenan.
Nikdniss, my friend, my brother; (a male speaking;) wi-
kanissan, nikanissag, nikanissinan.
Niningwan, my son-in-law; oningwanan, niningicanag,
niningwa ninan.
Niss'nn, my daughter-in-law ; ossimiti, nissimig, nissiminan
JVmsigoss, my aunt, (my father's sister ;) osigossan, nln-
sigossag, mnsigossinan.
Nin'mgicaniss, my nephew; onhigwctmssa?i,nini}igivanissag,
niningwanissinan.
Nishimiss, my niece, (a male speaking;) oshimissan, nithi-
missag, nichimissinan.
Nindojim, my step-son, or my nephew ; odojiman, nindoji-
mag, nindojiminan.
Nindojimikwcm, my step-daughter, or my niece ; odojimik-
weman, nindojimikiuemag, nindojimikiccminan,
Nindoyiiniss, my niece, (a female speaking;) odojimissatt .
nindojimissag, nindojimissinan.
Nindindttwa, the father or the mother of my daughter-in-
law ; odindawan, nindindaivag, nindindawanan.
Otchipwe terms for " my cousin."
A male
will say
my uncle's (nimisliome)
my uncle's (nijishe)
son, nissaie (or nishi-
me,) my cousin,
daughter, nimisse (or
nishimc,)my ccusin,
son, nitdwiss, my
cousin,
daughter, ninimoshc,
my cousin.
my uncle's (nimishome) son, nissaie (or nishi-
mi-,) my cousin,
daughter, w/w/.s-.sr (or
A female , ni$hitnr,)my cousin,
will say: ] my uncle's (nijislic) son, •ninimoshc, my
cousin,
daughter, nindan go-
she, my cousin.
my aunt's (ninsigost) fson, nildioi**, my cou-
I sin,
| daughter, ninimoshe, my
A male J I cousin,
will say : j my aunt's (ninwishe) pson, nissaic (or nishime)
\ my cousin.
] daughter, nimisse (or
L nishime) my cousin.
my aunt's (ninsigOfs) pson, -nlHunouhr, my cou-
j sin,
| daughter, nindangoshe,
A female I I my cousin,
will say: } my aunt's (nimclshc) pson, w/s.xv/?V (or uixhinn}
J my cousin,
| dau liter, •///;// /.<.NV (or w/-
L shiiitc) my cousin.
Otchipice terms for " my nephew,"
my niece.
\ male
will say:
'my brother's (nisxaic, ("son, nindojim, my noph-
nishime) \ ew,
I daughter, nidojimikwem,
t my niece,
my sister's (nimisse, fson, niningwaniss, my
nitlume)\ nephew,
daughter, nitlthnht, my
niece.
63
A female
will say :
<~my brother's (nissaie, ("son, niningwaniss, my
nishime) I nephew,
j daughter, nishimiss, my
I niece,
my sister's (nimisse, f son,
miss,
nishime) \ nephew,
I daughter, nindojimiss,
^ my niece.
Otchipwe terms for " my brother-in-law,"
ter-in-law."
my ss-
f my wife's brother, nita, my br other-in-lay.
A male f my sister's husband, nita, my brother-in-law,
will say : } my wife's sister, ninim, my sister-in-law,
(^ my brother's wife, ninim, my sister-in-law.
my husband's brother, ninim, my brother-in-
law,
A female J my sister's husband, ninim, my brother-in-law,
will say : j my husband's sister, nindange, my sister-in-
law,
my brother's wife, nindange, my sister-in-law.
Peculiarities in regard to these terms of relationship.
1. The English term, " my brother," is given in Otchip-
we by two terms, nissaie and nishime ; the former signify-
ing a brother of mine that is older than I am ; and the lat-
ter a brother younger than I. And the English term, " my
sister," is also given by two terms, nimisse, my sister older
than I ; and nishime, my sister younger than I.
2. The English term, "my uncle," is given in Otchipwe
by nimishomfi, which signifies, my father's brother; and by
nijishcy which denotes, my mother's brother. And the term
"my aunt." is expressed by ninsigoss, my father's sister ;
and ninwishe,(ninoshe,) my mother's sister.
3. Like the Jews and other ancient nations, the Otchip-
we Indians call the children of two brothers, or of two sis-
64
ters, btttiUfsand sisters, (nissuie, nimisse, nishimc,) which
are called cousins in English and in other modern langua-
ges. But the children of a brother and a sister, they call
CQUsins, jiitutriss, (niniwoshe, nind<ini*oshc..)
4. The Otchipwe cannot name distinctly any higher de-
gree in the ascending line, than grand-father and grand-mo-
ther, nhnishomiss and nokomiss. For great grand-father
and great grand-mother, they have the same terms as for
grand-father and grand-mother. They have the term, niud
aianik&nimishonriss ; but this does not strictly signify, my
great grand-father ; it signifies any of my ancestors higher
than grand-father. In the descending line they call both
a grand-son and a grand-daughter with the same term,
nqjisJic. And all that is lower than -nojishe, is called ani*
kobidjigon.
EXAMPLES.
Wenidjanissidjig o kitclii stig'inwan iko onidjdnissiwva ;
parents use to love very much their children.
Nun'ng'uii onid bi-ij<ucag nitdwiss\\&mg ; our cousins
come here frequently.
Eji-s (giidisoiang ki dtt-sdgiandnig kidj'anishindbentaugi
as we love ourselves we ought to love our fellow-men.
Joseph 0ss«/Yian midadatchigwnban, osAimiian dash beyigo-
nigoban ; Joseph had ten brothers (older than himself,)
and one brother (younger than himself.)
Nongom nin gi^wdhamag nij kini/nug • to-day I saw two of
thy sisters-in-law, (speaking to a untie ;) or two of thy
brothers-in-law, or sisters-in-law, (speaking to a female.)
Ki wdbamiewag na ko kishimissivf^gl Do you see some-
times your nieces? (speaking to a malr.)
Anin eji-bifnddisiwad kidojimissiw&gl How do your nieces
do 1 (speaking to a female.)
KiL-'inofiiiitiii' iini^i nn i^iin /.'/.s///'///riag, teach thy brothers (or
sisters, younger than them,) to read.
Nin pijikini\\\\m /ntl.-fflcfif/nsu, kinatrti dash ki />////r////iwag
kit< In ir'inintiirti" ; our ox (or cow) is poor, but your ox-
en (or cows) are fat.
65
Nislume o gi-banddjlan o tibaigisisswanan ; my (younger)
brother spoiled his watch.
Jfinossc, nin tibaigteissi0(ttiintai ; our clock goes right (or
is right.)
Idigwa butdinowag hi nidjdnisimamg ; our children are
already many.
Mi oma ga-ddji-nitdwlglangidwa kakina ninidjanissin&nig',
it is here we brought up all our children.
IVi/id atdwewininin^n o mi no rf'xlawan od anishindbemo.n ;
our trader treats well his Indians.
Nitag pitchinago nin gi-bi-ganonigog ; my brothers-in-law
(a male speaking) came yesterday and spoke to me.
All these substantives with possessive pronouns can be
transformed into verbs, and they are often so ; and then they
are conjugated. They have two tenses, the present and
the imperfect.
We will employ here the examples of our preceding
forms. Now mind this : The present tense of these sub-
stantives with possessive pronouns transformed into verbs,
is exhibited in the preceding forms, regular and irregular ;
and the imperfect tense will be shown in the following
forms.
A. Possessive Pronouns witli inanimate Substantives trans-
formed into Verbs.
FORM 1.
Imperfect Tense.
C Nin tchimanib&n, the canoe I had, (or for-
«. , merly my canoe,)
' ] ki. /c/wmawiban, the canoe thou hadst,
(_ o tchinmnibim, the canoe he (she) had.
f nin tchima?iibanm, the canoes I had, (or for-
p, , merly my canoes,)
a ' I ki tchimanib&mu, the canoes thou hadst,
f o teJiimambtimn, the canoes they had,
(Hi
(Nin tckiman'm&ban. } P
, . . ' : our former canoe,
,,. , I hi fcAtnuzninaban, )
1. ki /r/////w/mvaban, the canoe you had.
[_ o fc&tmaniwabaii, the canoe tliey liad.
( nin fc&tfnoftmabanin. ) ..
former1^ our cail(H's'
Plural
| ki tchimaniwabxnin, the capoes you had,
[ o tchimaniwa.b&mn, the canoes they had.
EXAMPLES.
Mi ow nin kitiganiban, bakdn datli ningotchi nongom nin
kitige; this \vas formerly my field, hut now I make my
field elsewhere.
Antndi giraiak ga-rttcg ki iffakaiganivrab&n ? Where is
the spot where your house stood ?
K.ishunr. od aian nin ma^itiaiganiban. ; thy brother has the
book I had before.
Gi-sakidc endaiang, kakina dash nin masinaiganinabanin
gi-tckdgidewan ; our house took fire, and all our books
we had, burnt down.
Ki mojtcdganiwtbanini once your scissors. O mojtedg&mm-
ban, once his (her) scissors.
FORM 2.
Imperfect Tense.
{Nind abajib&n, my pole (lodge-pole) which
I lost,
/,-/>/ ab(ij\\r,m, thy pole thou hadst,
od abajibzn, the pole he (she) had.
{nind r//^//ibanin, the poles I had,
kid <y/>r//'ibaniii, the ])oles thou hadst,
od <7/;i7/il>anin, the poles he had.
INind a&a/inabaD. ) Al
... . •'.. ' > the Dole we. had,
kid Bftajfmaban, )
kid (il>iij\\\\\\r,\\\, lh(> polr you had,
od «/;r//i\vtiban, the pole they had.
67
, haj
pi i
v'f/ afczpwabanin, the poles you had,
or/ afto/iwabanin, the poles they had.
EXAMPLES.
Mo jag nin mikwendan nimndjibzn ; nin kasJikcndam gi-
ircrnitoian ; I think often on the hand I had ; I am sorry
to have lost it.
Nimisse o mawiton onindjibzu ; my sister is crying because
she lost her hand, (or she is bewailing the hand she
lost.)
Apine n'uid ctnitibamn, kawui nin mikansinan ; the spears
I had, are lost, I don't find them.
FORM. 3.
Imperfect Tense.
JNin makakob\\\\, the box I had, (my former
box,)
ki »i«M-oban, the box thou hadst,
o maka/cobzn, the box he (she) had.
{nin ma&a&obanin, the boxes I had,
ki makakobmun, the boxes thou hadst,
o makakobsmin, the boxes they had.
Cffin «<ii«£onaban. » QUr former bo
Q. , ! ki i»aAraA:onaban, )
angular. \ u j^^Aowaban, the box you had,
L o makakowabzn, tlie box they had.
f "» ™«^fonabanin, » ^ bmeg wg had
p, , ,' ki maAraAronabanm, )
ira ' ', ki makQkowa.ba.nm, the boxes you had,
(_ o /waA:aA:owabanin, the boxes they had.
EXAMPLES.
Gi-gawissemagad nin pijikiwigamigoba.n ; the stable I had
tumbled down.
Minossebanin ki wagdkwadonabamn ; the axes we had
were good;
68
Xind <it(iireirigamigob'dii oma ulrban ; here was the store
I had.
Kid ataioewigamigwr*\)*A, the store you had, once your
ore.
Note. Tiie Remark on page 53 is applicable also to
these three forms.
B. Possessive Pronoun* with animate Substantives trans-
formed into Verbs.
FORM 1.
Imperfect Ten s c.
( Nind a£i/joban, the kettle 1 had,
Singular. < kid <7/.-//>-oban, the kettle thou hadst,
( od akikob&mn, the kettle he (she) had.
{nind <7/,:/7,-obanig, tlie kettles I had,
kid rt.t//jobani<r, the kettles thou hadst.
od rt/.-//rolnniu, the kettles he (she) had.
Nind aki koi iab an, ) , , ,
«rfaiaoBab«;}the^e»lewehad'
kid tf/.-//jo\vaban, the kettle you had,
od ^/.•/'//owabanin, the kettle they had.
-is aasff *•'*•"" wta*
A'/r/ ^/»'/A:ovvabani(T, the kettles you had,
orf w/c//,-o\vabaniu, the kettles they had.
.I// .sv/ r//r il-ire od aki /-ob anin ; to this woman belonged the
kettle, (or the kettles.)
Gi~batdinowag nind oJtiionabanig ; the kettles we had
were many.
\in nind <i*<.<ib\\r,\\\ air ; nongum f/ft.^/i knir'tH odossnbissi.
This was my net; but now I have no net.
fri-:iiiri>i-(iii od 0£&l£iwabftoin, they had four nets be-
fore.
69
Nidf anishi nab (ban, my fellow-man (brother) I had, (or
my deceased fellow-man (brother.) Widj' anishinabe-
banin, his deceased fellow-man. Kidf anishinabenabqmv,
our deceased fellow-men.
FORM 2.
Imperfect Tense*
{Nind ogimamiban, my deceased chief, (or the
chief I had before,
kid ogimam\bsm, thy deceased chief,
od ogimamibzmn, his (her) deceased chief,
{nind ogimamibo.nig, my deceased chiefs,
kid ogimamib&mg, thy deceased chiefs,
od 0g?'wawibanin,his (her) deceased chiefs.
Nind ogimaminabzn, ^ our deceased chief,
> (or the chief we
Singular. ^ kid ogimaminabim, J had before,)
kid ogimamiwaban, your deceased chief.
od 0£i??jfl«nwabanin,his(her)deceas'd chief
C nind o&imaminabania- ) , . ,,
,.7°. • , • / our late chiets,
p, , J kid ogimamiuabauig, )
j kid ogunamiwabanigj your former chiefs,
(^ od 00-ima/wiwabanin, their deceas'd chiefs*
EXAMPLES,
Ki kitchi ogimdmin'dban od indkonigcwin ; our late king's
law.
Nin leidjiwdgan'ib^n od inodeit'isiwin ; my deceased compan-
ion's, (or partner's) property.
Kawin wika nonvom awiia nin wdbamassig nin kikinoam-
f/^-««ibanig , i never see now any of my former scholars.
Nissai, keiabi no ki mikwtnima ki widigemagambinn ? My
brother, dost thou yet remember thy deceased wife?
Igiw nij ikwewag o gi-mino-dodaiuaican mojag o widigema-
^•amwabanin ; these two women have always treated well
their deceased husbands.
70
Nitag o gi-sapiairnn o widigemagmiw*b*fvfo ; my bro-
thers-in-law have loved their deceased wives..
Kitchi ginwenj gi- a7ir'nigosi omd nin bdniilaffaninabiin ;
our deceased servant was very long employed here.
The words of the irregular forms belong to this Form 2,
in their imperfect tense, as :
Noss, my father. JVossiban, my deceased father. Koss-
inaban, our deceased father. ^Vossinabanig, our de-
ceased, fathers.
Nimishomiss, my grand-father. JKuR**A*mt*5inabanig,
our deceased grand-fathers. Kimishomissibvn, thy de-
ceased grand-father.
Nbkomiss, mygrand-mother. /!L0&077us$inaban,our deceased
giandrmother.
Nissaie, my, older brother. Nissaieiba.n, my deceased bro--
ther. jK>"ssaieinabanig, our deceased brothers. Ossaie-
iwabanin, their deceased brother, (or brothers)
Nitawiss, my he-cousin. Nitdwissiban, my deceased cou--
sin. Witdwiss'iwabtimn, his deceased cousins.
Nindojim, my step-son. Nindojimibun, my deceased step--
son. Kidojimm&ban, our deceased step-son. Kidojim-
iwabanig, your deceased step-sons.
Some of the words of the irregular forms, when in the
imperfect tense, belong toother forms, according to the ex-
planations given at every form, as:
Nita, my brother-in-law. Nitaban, my deceased brother-
in-law. TVYtanabanig, our deceased brothers-in-law. Wit-
tfbanin, his deceased brother-in-law, (Or brothers-in-law.)
(After " Nidf anishinabe." Nidf a?iishinabeban.)
Ninim, my sister-in-law ; (pi. ninimog.)Nlnimo\^\\, my de-
ceased sister-in-law. Wr/i/wobanin, his deceased sister-
in-law, (or his deceased sisters-in-law.) Kiniinoiiiibau,
our deceased sister-in-law. (After '* Nind akikonz-
banj etc., . . etc. . .
The term ningd, my mother, makes its imperfect in. a,
[peculiar manner ; viz :
71
( Ningiban, my deceased mother,
Singular. < kigiban, thy deceased mother,
( ogibanin, his (her) deceased mother,
f ningibanig, my deceased, mothers,.
Plural. f kigibanig, thy deceased mothers,
( ogibanin ^ia (lier.) deceased mothers*
f Ninginaban, j deceased mother>
J kiginaban, \
]^giwa^ant your deceased mother,
£ ogiwaban, their deceased mother.,
\ninginabanig, )
Plural L Mginabamg, \
] kigiwabanig^youT deceased mothers,
(^ ogiwabanin, their, deceased mothers.
The dubitative or traditional mood of speaking is often
used in the imperfect tense of terms denoting relationship,
when they speak of deceased persons whom they never
saw.
The invariable rule for the formation of the traditional
ia this imperfect tense is,, to put the syllable go before the
letter 6 in the terminations of the imperfect tense. F. i.
Nossiban, my deceased father ; nossigoban, my deceased
father whom I never saw.
Kokotnissinaban, our deceased grand-mother ; kokomissin-
«goJ«7t,.our deceased grand-mother whom we did not
see.
Nind ogimaminaban, our deceased chief ; nind ogimami-
nagoban, our deceased, chief whom we did not see.
Kimishomissinabanig, our deceased; grand-fathers; kimi-
shomissinagobanig, our deceased: grandfathers whom we
never saw.
&id so on. putting always go before b in the termina-
tions.
OF THE THIRD PERSONS.
There is another peculiarity of the Otchipwe language,
which I must treat of here. Three different third persons
are distinguished in animate substantive, each of which has
its own construction ; namely : the fhnjtle third person, the
second third person, and the third third person. I would
have mentioned this in the Chapter of Substantives ; but as
the three third persons have influence also on substantives
with possessive pronouns, I mention and explain it here.
1. Third person simple.
The third person simple is that which is the only one in
the sentence ; as : Nin sagla noss, I love my father. Nin
babamitawa ninga, I listen to my mother. Noss and ningd
are the the third persons simple in these sentences. Then-
is nothing extraordinary about that.
2. Second t liird person.
When there are two third persons in a sentence, one
of them is our second third person ; according to the con-
struction of the verb. F. i.
Mabam kwiwiscns o minddeniman ossan; this boy honors
his father.
Aw mini od anokitawan nossan ; that man works for my
father.
Nimisse o widokawan ningaian; my sister is helping my
mother.
Kitchitwa Marie o gi-nigian Jesusan ; St .Mary gave birth
to Jesus.
The second third persons in the above sentences are :
ossnn, wo.s-.sv///, HIIIL f(t',nn, Ji'tnutn. Those, that understand
Latin, must not ih;nk that the second third person always
corresponds with the Latin accusative. It often does in-
deed, but not always. Jn the above four H-ntrnres the se-
cond third persons exactly express the Latin accusative.
73
But this is not invariably the case. Where there are two
third persons in a sentence, one or the other may be our
second third person, the accusative or the nominative, ac-
cording to the verb. The following examples will illustrate
this matter.
O kikenimawan nossan kakina nnishhiabeg oma endanaki-
djig ; all the Indians of this place know my father, (pa-
trem meum.)
O kikenimigowan nossan kakina anishinabeg oma endanaki-
djig ; my father (pater meus) knows all the Indians of
this place.
In these two sentences the second third person is always
nossan ; but in the first sentence nossan expresses the ac-
cusative, (patron meum,) and in the second it expresses the
nominative, (pater mcus.) (See Remark after the paradigm
of the Passive Voice in the iv. Conj.)
3. Third third person.
When there are three third persons in a sentence, one of
them is the second third person (according to the construc-
tion of the verb,) and the third third person is that which
has the nearest report to the second. F. i.
Joseph o gi-odapinan Abinodjiian oginigaie, (or oginiwan,)
mi dash ga-iji-madjad ; Joseph took the Child and his
mother, and departed.
In this sentence, Abinodjiian is the second third person,
and ogini the third third person,
Remark. Sometimes there are three and more third per-
sons in a sentence ; but if all are in equal and immediate
relation to one, this one is the third person simple, and, all
the others are second third persons, and there is no third
third person in the sentence. F. i.
Kitchi ogima Hcrode nibiwa o gi-nissan abinodjiian, nibi-
wa gaie ininiwan, oshkinawen, ikwewan gaie ogini ssan ;
74
King Herod slew many children, and he also slew many
men, young men, and women.
A w Wemitigoji o mino bamian osinissan, wiwan,onidjanissan ,
witan gale ; that Frenchman takes well care of his fa-
ther-in-law, of his wife, children and brother-in-law.
In these two sentences, Hcrode and Wemitigoji, are sim-
ple third persons ; all -the rest ane second third persons ;
there is no third third person.
Formation of the second and third third person.
A. Formation of the second third person.
This person is formed by adding certain terminations to
the singular of the third person simple. These termina-
tions are seven in number,, viz : n, an, ian, in, oian, on, wan.
We shall consider them in examples. .(Breve iterper ex-
empla, longum per praecepta.)
Term. Simple third person. Second third person.
n. Anishindbe, Indian, (or man,) anishindben.
Manito, spirit, maniton.
Ogimd, chief, ogiman,
Joniia, silver, money, joniian,
an. Noss, my father, nossan.
Ninid}dniss, my child, ninidjdnissan.
Gijik, cedar, gijikan.
Nind ogimam, my chief, nind ogimaman.
Pijikins, calf, pijikiman.
ion. Ningd, my mother, ningdimt.
Kimisse, thy sister, kimisseian.
Nissaie, my brother, nissaieian.
Senibdi ribbon, senibdian.
Gigo^ fish, gigbian.
in. Jingob, fir-tree, jingobin.
Opin, potatoe, opinin.
Niss'im, my daughter-in-law. nissimin.
Nishkdnj, my nail, nishkanjiu.
75
Term. Simple third person. Second third person,
oian. (In proper names :)Monsogidig, Monsogidigoiaft.
Kitckigijig, Kitchigijigoian*
Mctnitctgisiss, Manitogisissoian.
Wewassang, Wewassangoian.
on. Ninim, my sister-in-law, ninimon.
Mitig, tree, >mitigon.
Amm, mean dog, animon.
Anting, star, anangon.
wan* Anjeni, angel, Anjeniwan.
Wemitigoji, Frenchman, 'Wemitgojiwan.
Inini, man, ininiwan.
Ikwe woman, ikwewan.
Amik, beaver,
The general and invariabe rule for the application of
these different terminations, in forming the second third
person, is, to change the letter g, in which all animate sub-
stantives end in the. plural, into n. (Examine the above ex-
amples.
B. Formation of the third third person.
The third third person always terminates in ini, except
in some proper Indian names, where it ends in ani. This
person is formed from the second third person. Let us ex-
amine the above seven terminations of the second third per-
son, and see how the third -third ;pereon is obtained from
-1. To the terminations n, in, on, a&l ini, for the third third
person. F. i. Maniton, manitoninL Nissimin, nissim-
inini. Mltigon, mitigonini.
"i2. The terminations an, and ian, are changed into ini.
F. L Nossan, nossini. Ossan, ossini. Ogwissan,
ogwissinL :Kimisseian, kimisseini. (Sometimes the
syllable wan is here added, as: Ossiniwan, nossin*
jwan, ogwissiniwan, etc.)
76
3. The termination oian (in proper names) adds i for the
third third person. F. i. Manitogisissoicur, Manitogis-
issoiau i. MioitsogidigoittH, Sfonsogidigowmi.
4. Tlie termination wan is changed into wini. F. i. TTV/w-
itigojiwan, Wemitig<yiwi*i, Iku-cn-an, iku-eiriiii. Wi-
wan, iriirini. — Exception. Oginy his mother, takes only
i for the third third person : oginiy sometimes oginiican.
This distinction of three third persons is one of the beau-
ties and perfections of the Otchipwe lan/uage. It contri-
butes materially to the unequivocal understanding of the
whole sentence ; whereas in English and in other langua-
ges we are sometimes obliged to insert a proper name or
another word to avoid misunderstanding.
Illustration. In the sentence : Paul is indeed a wiebed
man, he almost killed his brother and his wife ; you cannot
know whether Paul almost killed his own wile, or his bro-
ther's wife ; both senses can be understood in the above
sentence ; and when it becomes necessay to avoid misun-
derstanding, you must insert Paul's name, or some other
word, and say: he almost killed his (Paul's) wife; or, he
almost killed his brother and his own wife. And if you
want to say that Paul almost killed his brother's wife, you
have to say : lie almost killed his brother and his brother's
wife. This double sense of the sentence is avoided in tin
expressive Otchipwe language, by the third third person
They will say : Paul geget matehi 'mini in, gcga ogi-nissa-n
ossii'nittn, n-in-ini (or ir'nrin'uran ) gaic. The third third
]nT.M)ii, iriirini, can only niraji Paul's brother's wife ; be*
catlse if Paul's wife be meant,Jit would bo irftrtm, the *<:cond
third person: and then it would read : wga o i^i-ii issa n os*
saiei'in. u-i trail gate; he almost killed his brother and hi-
(Paul's) v,
Another illustration. In the sentence: Mary is a rrrif
industrious irnunni, she ahrtufs he/ps her eatixiii and hri
mother; you cannot know with certainty, whose mother i-
It can be Mary's mother, or her, cousin's mother
77
In Otchipvve there can be no double sense in such sen-
tences. If you say : Marie kitchi nitci-aiioki, mojag o wid-
okawon odangosheian, ogin gale; it is clear that you want
to say, Mary always helps her cousin, and her own (Mary's)
mother. But if you say: Marie mojag o widokawan odan-
goshcian, ogini gaie ; it is clear that Mary always helps her
cousin and her cousin's mother.
Remark. The third person appears sometimes even in
inanimate substantives with possessive pronouns; but it is
not so commonly used, nor so important as in animate sub-
stantives with possessive pronouns.
EXAMPLES.
Enamiad u'nrcni o gad-oda pi namawan Jcsusan wiiawini ;
the Christian ought to receive worthily the body of Jesus.
(Enamiad, simple third person : Jrsusan, second third
person ; wiiawini t third third person.)
JDcbcncljigcd o bonigidctawan aianwcnindisonidjin o bata-
dowinini (or o batadowininiwan ;) the Lord forgives
their sins to those that repent. (Debendjigcd, simple
third person ; aianwenindisonieljih, second third person ;
o batadawininit(as o bata&ounniniwan)jhird third person,
Jtitchitwd Marie apitchi weweni o gi-ganawendamawan
Jcsusan od ikitowin'mi. St. Mary kept very well the
word of Jesus.
Nind awiig aw ikwe odanan od onaganiniwan ; that woman
lends me her daughter's dishes.
Ill, DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS.
Demonstrative Pronouns are those that indicate or point
out the persons or things spoken of. They are divided,
according to the two classes of substantives or nouns, in
those that refer to animate substantives, and those that have
report to inanimate.
1. First Class; Demonstrative Pronouns referring to*
animate objects.
For near objects.
Sing. Aw, wadiv, mabam ; this, this one, this here,
Ogoiv, mdmig ; these, these here,
78
For distant objects.
Sing. Aw, that, that one, that there.
(For the second third pers. : iniw, or aniv.)
Plur. Igiw, or agiw, those, those there.
(For the second third pers. : into, or anitr.)
Remark. There is no difference of sex perceptible in the
Otchipwe demonstrative pronouns. The same pronoun is
employed to refer ;to a man, a woman, a child, or even a
lifeless object, when it is used in Otchipwe like a Jiving
being. (See p. 18, 19, 20,)
EXAMPLES.
Mdbam Abinodji ta-kitchi-dgonwctawa ; this Child shall be
much spoken against.
Mi aw inini debcnimad iniw manishtanishan ; this is the
man that owns those sheep.
Ml mdmig ninidjanissag, iniw dash nijishe onidjanissan;
these 'here are my chilclren, aricl those 'there my uncle's
children.
Memindage aw inihijttwemd&g&si, cji-mhio-ijiwcbiniti ; thi?
man (or that man) is really happy, being so good.
Mi mdbam pakwejigan gijigong wcndjibad ; this is the
bread which comes down from heaven,
Kid ashamin ogow mishiminag ; \ give thee these apples
here to eat.
Aw ikwe wcweni o nitdwigian onidjanhtan'; this woman
brings well up her chihlren.
Kitchi mawiskki mabam ikwesens ; this little girl is always
crying.
Kawin na hi nondawassig mtuiug'Ogimag rhiiuirad / Dost
thou not- hear these cliiefe what, they - ay I
•Igiw dkwewag kitchi nitd-nagai>i»ir<t<r ; ihose women arc
good singers.
Ki ni**it&t*WOg na -o»ow ininiirag 1 vgnw >oshkinawrg ?
Dost thou understand these men here 1 these young men
here?
Nin kikenima aw inini wedi bemossed; I know that man
that walks there.
79
Nin sagid aw kwiwisens aidpitchi-nibwakdd ; I like that
very wise bey.
Noss o dibcniman iniw pijikiwan ; my father is the owner
of this ox, (or these oxen,) (this cow, or these cows.)
Mi sa igiw, odtnang ged-'jadjig ; those are the persons that
will go to town.
Kakina igiw anishinabeg ningoting ta-anamiawag; all
those Indians will once be Christi ans.
2. Second Class ; Demonstrative Pronouns referring
to inanimate objects.
For near objects.
Sing. Ow, mdndan ; this, this here.
Plur. Onow, iniw ; these, these here.
For distant objects,
Sing. Iw, that, that there.
Plur. Iniw, those, those there.
EXAMPLES.
Nin kitchi sdgiton'Otv masinaigan, ow gaie ojibiigan ; I like
very much this book, and this writing.
Wegonen mdndan? Ka na wika ki wdbandansin? What
is this ? Hast tfeou never seen it ?
Ki nissitdwinan na iw 1 Do"st thou know that ? (or recog-
nize it?)
Ninmanddjiton mdndan anamiewigamig ; I respect (I honor)
this church.
Nin kitchi minotdnan iniw nagamonan ; I like very much
to hear those hymns.
Onow ki minin masindigana<n; mino inabaajitoni I give
thee these books here; make a good use of them.
Nin gi-mamakddendan iw kitchi anamiewigamig Moniang
eteg ; I admired that great cherch in Montreal .
Maididokan iniw apabiwinan ; carry away these chairs
((or benches.,)
-
TV. I VIM
jHtrrrn<r<ifiri' Pronoun* are those tli:it servo to ask ques-
tions. There arc three of this kind in the Otchipwe lan-
guage, viz :
For animate objects : Atoenen? who? which? what? Flu:
AwtMsnag \
For in ail mite objects. We gone*? Aiiin ? what?
EXAMPLES.
' ,irn gc-dibiikoni-nfing gi-L$hkwa-bimadisiiang a king ?
Who will judge us after our life on earth?
Aii-ctun gijigong grd-ijad? Who si i all go to heaven ?
Awenenag nrcli bemishkadjig ? \\lio ;ire those in that
canoe there ?
Air'tu'iifi-'r iff iir negamodjig? Who are those that sing?
\\':'-iTt>m'n naidgatawendaman ? What art thou thinking
on? (or contemplating.)
\Vegonen in- cl:J!oie<! / \Vhat are you saying ?
Wi'ironrn ge-dodang diriitt tr/ii jawenddgosid kagigekamig /
What has a person to do in order to be happy eternally ?
Ininiwidog, niKdnissinadog ! anin ged-ijitchigeiang f Men,
brethern ! what shall we do ?
Anin t-kittiitrn ? A\"hat say»»st thou ?
Anin endJcQtfnigak ? \\ \\-.\\ is the news ?
Remark. The second third person of airt'iirn nnd nu-tur-
wr/«,', i^airt'-iH'/if/n, \vhich exactly expresses the Knglish irlwm.
Y. i. Awencnan ga~anonadjin .//•>•//>• /r///' gagikwenid rni^n-
kwftir dki / \\'honi did Jesns oinj»loy to preach every where
on eartli ? "
Aii'ciif'iKi/i .//.s//s ga^apitchi»sagiadjin jiiinik ga-dashinid o
kikmoamaganan / \\ hoin did Jesus especially love
aiming all his disciples !
.']//•( iic/if/ii gct#matcadi8sddjin kith'tim- pitchinago / \\ hom
did tliy brother \isii \rstcrdav ?
81
V. INDEFINITIVE PRONOUNS.
Indeftnitive Pronouns are those which denote persons or
things indefinitely or generally. There are four of this de-
scription in the Otchipwe language ; viz :
For animate objects.
Awiia, one, somebody, some person, anybody.
Kci awiia, or kawin aw Ha, none, nobody, no person.
Awegwen, whoever, or whosoever, I don't know who. Plu-
ral : awegwenag.
For inanimate objects.
IVegotogwen, whatever, or whatsoever, all, I don't know
what.
EXAMPLES.
Awiia o pakitean islikwdndem ; somebody knocks on the
door.
Awiia na aid agwatching ? Is there anybody without ?
Kawin Awiia mas hi dagwishinsi ; nobody (or no person)
has arrived yet.
Kawin awiia o da-gasliJtitossin^ nij gc-dibenimigodjin tchi
anokitawad ; nobody can serve two masters,
Awegwen ge-nishkadisitawagwen wikanissan anisha, ta-
matchi-dodam ; whosoever shall be angry with his brother
without a cause, will do evil.
Ow o gi-inan Jesus o Icikinoamdganan : Awegwen ge~gas~
siaaWMtegwen o batudowinan, mi aw gt-gdssiigadenig.
Jesus said to his disciples : Whose soever sins you remit,
they are remitted unto them.
IVegotogwcn ge-nandotamawagwen Weossimind nind iji-
nikasowining, k> ga-minigowa ; kid igonan Jesus. Jesus
says unto us : Whatsoever you shall ask the Father in
my name, he will give it you.
Wcgotogwcn wofikitogwen, kairin nin nissitotawassi ; I
don't know what he wants to say ; I don't understand
him.
Remark 1. The second third person of awcgwen and
awegwtnag, is awgwcnan, which is expressed in English
by : I don't know who, or, we don't know who. F. i.
82
ga-uwbiigogtccnan air ga-gagibingwe-nigipan ;
gi-ikitinran onigiigOH.. We don't know who has opened
the eyes of this horn, blind.; said, his parents.
Aicegwcnan ga-bi-ganonigogwauui. nixhime ;. gegctnongom
mino ijiiri'bisi. I do not know who> came and spoke to
my brother. ; he behaves now well.
Remark 2. If you are asked : Awencn aw ? Who is this
or that person.? Or, awcncnag ogow 1 or, igiw ? Who are
these or those persons ? And if you; don't know, you will
have to answer, for the singular : Awegwen : and for the
plural : Awegwewg ;. which both signify, I don't know
who. F. i.
Awencn awbaddssamossed? Awegwen. Who is that per-
son there coming this way ? li don't know;
Awenen aw ikwe ga-bi-ijad oma jeba ? Awegwen. Who
is that woman. that carne here this morning? I don't
know.
Awenenag ge-mddjadjig wabang ? Awcgivenag. Who are
those that will start to-morrow ? I don't know.
Awenenag igiw ga-giosscdjig pltchinago} Awegwenag.
Who are those that have been a hunting yesterday.? I
don't know;
The second third person, of this word of answer is:
Awtgwcnan, for both the singular and plural. F. i.
Awenenan. ga-dnwcnimadjrn nimishome ? Airegwcnan.
Whom did my uncle reprimand? I don't know.
Awcnendnga-bi-ganonigodjin uis/iime? Awegu-enan. Who
came and spoke to my brother ? I. don't know*
Before we close the Chapter of Pronouns we must observe
that there are no relative pronouns in the Otchipwee lan-
guage. The sentences in which there are relative pronouns
in English, (irho, which, that, what,) are given in Otchipwe
by what is called, in this Grammar, " The C/iange of the.
first vowel " forming chiefly participles. We have already
employed thi& "Change" in some examples^ but we have
83
had till now no opportunity of mentioning it ; and even
now we mention it only because the relative pronouns are
always expressed by the Change. But in the next Chapter,
towards the end of the first Conjugation, you will find a full
explanation of it. This* explanation naturally belongs to
the Chapter of Verbs, because the Change never occurs but
ia. verbs.
Here are a few examples in. which you will see how the
sentences with relative pronouns are given in Otchipwe,.
AH this, however, you will better understand when you
study it again after a careful perusal of the next Chapter..
Kije-Manito misi gego ga-gijitod,misi'gego gaie mdninang,
wcnidjanissingin ki sagiigonan ; God who made all things,
nnd. who gives us all, loves us like children.
Jawenddgosiwag icaidbandangig waidbandameg ;, blessed
are they who see what you. see..
Jawenddgosi daiebwctang ano wabandansig ;, blessed is he
that believes- although he sees not..
Ininiwag ga-ano-nandomindjig, kawin gi-bi-ij assiwag ; the
men that have been called, did not come.
Inini ga-wabamag, ga-ganonag gaie^ . . . The man that I
have seen, and whom I. have spokentto. ....
Oshkinawe enonad gi-bi-ija oma jeba ; the young man
whom thou employ est, came here this morning.
Scwe wddigemag ; the woman to whom I am married:
Inini wddit*emag ;~ the man to whom I am married,
CHAPTER III.
OF VERBS.
A Verb is that part of speech which expresses an action
or state, and the circumstances of time in events, or in a
being.
The being which does or receives the action expressed
by the verb, is called its subject ; and the being to which
relates the action, in some verbs, is called its object.
The verb is the principal and most important part of
speech, especially in the Otchipwe language, which is a
language of verbs.
DIVISION OF VERBS,
The principal grammatical division of verbs is in two
classes, transitive and iutrantitirc. Each of these two
classes has its subdivisions, which are detailed here.. It
Was necessary to give to sonic sorts of verbs peculiar names,
which do not occur in other Grammars. liut in the Gram-
mar of the Otchipwe language, which diUers so much from
other languages in its grammatical system, it seemed
necessary to establish distinct denominations for certain
peculiar kinds of verbs.
A. TRANSITIVE VF.UHS.
1. Actirr. verbs, or /rt/n.^!l h'f-^rojtcr, express an act done
(or that could be done) by one person or tiling to another.
F. i. j\'in sti $ in MOSS, J love my father. Nind o/ibian
masinaigcaif 1 write a letter. JMn da-ganona wabamagl I
would speak to him if I saw him.
2. Jircij)ri><-(tl verbs arc; tlmse which desi;ma1e a reaction
of the Mibjert on it>Hf. !;. i. J\'in kikt'nindh, I know my-
self. »S'/i,'/'/V//'.sfl, IK- loves him-elf. KitimogildisQWag, they
make themx-lves poor.
85
3. Communicative verbs. So are called the verbs that
express a mutual action of several subjects upon each other,
in a communicative manner. These verbs have only the
plural number. F. i. Igiw nitamga-bi-anamiadjig, weweni
gi-sagiid iii'dg, gi-ja wen inditrag, in ojag gi-m ino-dodadiwag.
The first Christians loved much each other, were charitable
to each other, and treated each other well. — It must, how-
ever, be remarked, that these verbs do not always signify a
mutual action of several subjects upon each other ; but
sometimes they mean that the subjects of the verb act toge-
ther, or are influenced together, in a common or communi-
cative manner. F, L Nin dibaamadimin, we are paid
together. Nimiidiwag, they are dancing together. Wid-
jindiwag, they are going together.
4. Personifying verbs. We call, in this Grammar,
those verbs personifying, which represent* an inanimate ob-
ject acting like a person, or another animate being. F. i.
Nishtigwan nhi nissigon, my head kills me, (I have a vio-
lent head-ache,) Masinaigan nin gi-bi-odissigon, a letter
came to me. Nindc ki nandawcnimigon, my heart desires
thee. Ishkotewabo ki makamigon kakina kid aiiman, ar-
dent liquor (fire-water) is robbing thee of all thy things.
There is yet another kind of personifying verbs, which
are formed by adding magad to the third person singular
present, indicative, of verbs belonging to the I., II., and
III. Conjugations. These verbs give likewise to inanimate
objects the activity or quality of a person, or another
animate being. F. i. Ijdmagad, it goes, (ijd, he goes.)
Nabikwan bibonishimagad oma, a vessel winters here,
(bibpnishi, he winters.) Mandan masindigan jagandshi-
momagad, this book speaks English, (jaganashimo, he speaks
English.)
Remark 1. When the third person singular, above men-
tioned, ends in a consonant, you must first add to this third
person the mutative vowel, and then the termination magad,
to form these personifying- verbs. The mutative vowel is
that in which ends the third person singular, present, in-
G
86
dicativc ; or with which commences the termination of the
third person plural F. i. Nin ikit, I say ; third person
singular, ikito, he says ; this o is the imitative vowel. If
you annex ma gad to tliis o, you will have the personifying
verb ik&magad, it says. But when the said third person
singular ends in a consonant, you have to go to the third
person plural, and see its conjugational termination ; and
the vowel with which this termination begins, is our muta-
tive vowel. F. i. Dagwishin, lie arrives ; the third person
plural is, dagwishinog ; now this o is the mutative vowel ;
and now add to this o the termination magad, and you will
have the personifying verb dagwiskinomagad, it arrives, it
comes on. In substantives the mutative vowel appears in
the termination of the plural. F. i. Anang, a star; plural,
anangog ; o is its mutative vowel. Assin, a stone ; plural,
assinig; i is its mutative vowel. Biwdbik ; biwabikou.
Remark 2. Sometimes abbreviations are employed in
the formation of these verbs, F. i. Kitimaglsi, he is poor.
According to the rule we ought to form the personifying
verb by adding ma gad to this third person, and say, ///V/-
nMgisimagad ; but they say, kitimagad, it is poor. Kiti~
magad end/nan, my dwelling is poor. Kitimagad mud ag-
iciu'in, my clothing is poor.
B. INTRANSITIVE VERBS.
1. Neuter verbs, or intransitive-proper, are those verbs
that express a state .of being, or an action not going over
on any object. F. i. Kin kasKkcndam, I an) sorrowful, sad.
Kid dkos, thou art sick. Minu-rndfim, he is contented,
glad, happy. Nibtf, he sleeps. These are intransitive
verbs, because they express a state of being. The follow-
ing express an action confined to the actor, not passing
over on any subject, and are therefore intransitive. Nin
madjfi, I depart, 1 start. Ki dagu-hhin, thou arrivest.
IVfihringe, he is looking on. Anishinabcwidjigc, he lives
and acts like an Indian.
2. Rrproftr/n'tt<r verbs. So are called here the verbs
which signify that the subject thereof has some reproachful
87
habit or quality. F. i. Aw kwiwiscns nibashkit this boy
likes too much sleeping, (nibd, he sleeps.) Nimisse nimishki,
my sister likes too much dancing, (nhni, she dances.)
Ginau'ishkimig, they are in the habit of lying. Gimodiskki,
he is a thief.
3. Substantive-verbs are those that are formed directly
from substantives. F. \. Akinggi-ondji-ojitchigadckiiaw,
minawa dash ki gad-akiw ; out of earth was formed thy
body, and thou shalt be earth again. (Aki, earth; nind
akiw, I am earth; akiwi, he is earth.) Lot w'twan gi-
abandbiwan, mi dash ga-iji-jiwita ganiwinid ; Lot's wife
looked back and became salt (a pillar of salt.) (Jiwitagan,
salt; nin jiwitaganiw, I am salt; jiwitaganiv)it he (she) is
salt.) Nind anishinabcw ; nind ininiw ; nind ikwew.
4. Abundance-verbs. These verbs are likewise formed
from substantives, and they designate that there is abund-
ance of the object signified by the substantive from which
they are formed. They all end in ka, and are unipersonal
verbs, belonging to the VII. Conjugation. F. i. Nibika
oma, there is much water here. Anishindbeka wedi, there
are many Indians there.. Tibikong gi-kitchi-anangoka,
last night there was plenty of stars, (many stars were
visible.) Assinika, there is abundance of stone. Giguika,
there is plenty of fish.
5. Unipersonal verbs are those that have only the third
person. The verbs of the preceding number are uniper-
sonal verbs. These verbs are commonly called by Gram-
marians impersonal ; but the term unipersonal is undoubt-
edly more adapted to them ; because they are not entirely
destitute of persons, but they have only one ; so they are
rather unipersonal than impersonal. F. i. Kissind or
kissindmagad, it is cold. Kijdte, or kijdtemagad, it is
warm. Gimiwan, it rains. Sanagad, it is difiicult.
6. Defective verbs are those that want some of the
tenses and persons, which the use does not admit. F. i.
88
lira, he says, (inquit.) Nln dind, I am, I do ; anin cndiian?
h«>w do you do.
There are many other kinds, or rather modifications of
verbs, of which we will speak after all the Conjugations,
under the head of Formation of Verbs.
There are no auxiliary, or helping verbs, in the Otchip-
we language. The verbs of all the Conjugations of this
Grammar are inflected or conjugated by themselves without
the help of any other verb. The verbs to be and to have,
which are auxiliary verbs in other languages, are principal
verbs in tho Otchipwe language. Instead of auxiliary
verbs, the Otchipwe verbs take certain prefixes or signs, in
certain moods and tenses.
There are five prefixes, or signs, in the Otchipwe Con-
jugations, by which the different moods and tenses are dis-
tinguished ; viz : ga-, ge-, gi-, da-, ta-.
Ga-, (pronounced almost ka-,) for the perfect and pluper-
fect tenses, (in the Change,) and participle perfect and
pluperfect.
Ga-, (gad-,) and ta-, for the future tense indicative.
Gc-, (ged,) (pronounced almost kc-, kcd-,) for the future
tenses, subjunctive, and participle future.
Gi-, for th perfect and pluperfect tenses.
Da-, for the conditional mood.
Remark. The English language has also several signs
which are employed in the Conjugation of verbs ; as, will,
would, shall, should, ought, etc. Hut there is a great dif-
ference, in regard to the use of signs, between the two lan-
guages. The English signs are sometimes used by them-
selves, separately from their verbs ; and one sign may serve
for several subsequent verbs. Not so in Otchipwe. In
this language the signs always remain attached to the verb,
and can never be used separately ; and the sign must be
repeated before every verb which stands under the influ-
ence of the same.
This remark is rather a syntactical one; but speaking
here of these signs, as attached to verbs ctymologically , I
89
make it here. You will better understand it when you re-
turn to it after the attentive perusal of the long Chapter of
Verbs.
SOME ILLUSTRATING EXAMPLES.
In English you would say : I will work to-morrow all day ;
indeed I will. Here the sign will stands alone, separated
from its verb, only referring to it.
But in Otchipwe you must say ; JVin gad-anoki wabang
kabe-gijig ; gcgct nin gad-anoki. You cannot put the
sign only and say : Gegct nin gad. The sign can never
be used separately from its verb ; it must remain attached
to it ; you must say : Gcgct nin gad-anoki.
So again you would say in English : He ought to pay thee ;
yes, he ought. The sign ought is separated from its
verb,
In Otchipwe you have to sayt Ki da-dibaamag sa. E, ki
da-dibaamag, — The sign da-, remains attached to its
verb.
In the following example you will see how the Otchipwe
sign must be repeated at every verb to which it relates.
In English you would say, for instance : He wculd be
loved, respected, and well treated, if he did no drink so
much. — The sign would be, is put only once for the three
subsequent verbs.
But in Otchipwe you must repeat the sign before every
verb, and say : Da-sagia, da-mi nadcnima, da~mino-doda-
wa gciie, osam minikwessig. You see how the sign, da-,
is repeated before every verb to which it refers.
INFLECTION OF VERBS,
To the inflection of verbs belong voices, forms, moods,
tensest numbers and persons, and participles. We shall
now consider each of these articles in particular, and state
the peculiarities of the Otchipwe Grammar,
90
A. Of Voices.
Voice in verbs shows the relation of the subject of the
verb to the action, or state of being, expressed by it. We
have two voices in the Otchipwe verbs; viz :
1. The Active Voice, so called because it shows the
subject of the verb acting upon some object ; as : Nind
ashama bekaded, I feed the hungry. Ki kikinoamawag
kinidjanissag, thou teachest thy children. O bibdgiman
ogin, he calls his mother.
2. The Passive Voice, so called because it shows the
subject of the verb in a passive state, acted upon by some
person or thing ; as : Ashama bekaded, the hungry person
is fed. Kikinoamawawag kinidjanissag, thy children are
taught. Wegimid bibagima, the mother is called.
B. Of Forms.
There are two forms throughout all our Conjugations, the
affirmative and the negative forms.
1. The Affirmative Form, which shows that some state
of existence, or some action, is affirmed of the subject ; as :
Waurijendam, he is joyous. Nin wassitawendam, I am sad.
Kid adissokc, thou art telling stories. Gashkigwasso, she
is sewing.
2. The Negative Form, which shows that some state of
existence, or some action, of the subject of the verb, is
denied ; as : Kawin nin nibassi, I am not asleep. Kairin
ki nibdgwessiy thou art not thirsty. Kntrin bigwakamigi-
bidjigcssiwag, they don't plough. Kawin kid agonwcto-
ssinoninim, I do not gainsay you. Ojibiigt$sigVMt if they
do not write. Anoki.ssig, if he does not work.
Remark. It must be observed, as a peculiarity of the
Otchipwe Grammar, that throughout all the Conjugations
the negative form must be distinctly developed, fully dis-
played, because it is so peculiar, difficult, and varying, that
no general rules can be abstracted for the formation of it.
It must be exactly pointed out in every Conjugation, and
91
in every part of it. The negation is effected by placing
before the pronoun and verb the adverbs ka or kawin, no,
not; or kego, do not, don't. And it is also expressed in
the verb itself. In many cases this latter kind of negation
only is employed, and the above negation-adverbs are not
used.
C. Of Mooch.
Mood in verbs is the manner of indicating the state of
existence, of action, or passion, in subjects. The Otchipwe
verbs have four moods ; viz :
1. The Indicative, which simply affirms or denies some-
thing, or asks a question ; as : PijiktiMg adabiwdg, the
oxen are drawing, hauling. Gctgwedibenima, he is tempted,
Kawin maminddifissi, he is not proud. Kawin awiia nin
miskamassi, I don't insult anybody. Ki niskkenima na
awiia 1 Hast thou angry thoughts against anybody ? Kawin
na ta-ijassiwag? Will they not go?
2. The Subjunctive, or Conjunctive, which represents
something under a doubt, wish, condition, supposition, etc.
Verbs in this mood are preceded by some conjunction, tchi,
kishpin, missawa, etc. ; and they are preceded or followed
by another verb not in the subjunctive ; as : Nin minwendam,
missawa kitimagisiian, I am happy, although poor. (Kiti-
magisiian is in the subjunctive mood.) Ki windamon iw,
tcld kikendaman, I tell thee this, that thou mayst know it.
(Kikcndaman, subjunctive.) Wabamad kishimc, ki gad-
ina tchi bi-ijad oma; if thou seest thy brother, thou wilt
tell him to come here. (Wabamad, that is, KISHPIN u-aba-
mad, if thou see him ; kishpin is understood.)
3. The Conditional, which implies liberty, or possibility
of a state or action, under a certain condition, expressed in
another verb in the subjunctive, preceding or following the
verb in the conditional ; as : Wissinissiwan nin da-bakade,
if I did not eat, I would be hungry. (Nin da-bakade, is in
the conditional mood.) Kishpin kibdkwaigasossig, da-bi-
ija ; if he were not in prison, he would come. (Da-bi-ija,
is in the conditional.)
92
Ilfinark. The English potential mood is expressed in
Otchipvve by the adverb goniina, or kona, perhaps ; which
i> placed before the verb that is in the potential in English,
but in Otchipwe it remains in the indicative ; as : It may
rain, goniiud ta-g'uniwan. He may preach or sin«i, kema
ta-gagikicc, kema gale ta-nagamo. But when the English
potential implies condition^ (which is only understood,) in
Otchipwe the conditional is employed ; as : I would gcr,
(if . . .) nln da-ija, (kishpin . . .) You should obey your
father, ki da-babamitawaica kossiwa . . . (if you wish to do
your duty . . .)
4. The Impcratlvfy which is used for commanding, ex-
horting, praying, permitting or prohibiting ; as : Dodan
lie, do that. Ojiton ow, make this. Enamiangin bima-
disiiog, live like Christians. Dcbhiimiiang, bonigidrta-
wishinam ga-iji-hata-d Jiang ; Lord forgive us our sins.
Mddjan, go. Kego madjakcn, don't go.
Remark. There is, properly speaking, no Infinitive
Mood in the Otchipwe language. What some believe to
be the Infinitive, as : Ikitom, tchi ikitong>tchiinendamingt
etc., is not that mood; it is the indefnitive third person
singular ; which may be given in English with the indefi-
nitive pronoun one. Better yet it is expressed in Fr.ench
and German, F, i. Ikitom,. signifies in French, " on d-it,'
and in German, " man sagt" In English we may say,
" one says" or " they say ;" but this is not so expressive
as, ikitmn, or on dit, or man sagt. In the paradigms of
the Conjugations we will express this person, at least in
some tenses> in French, for such as understand this lan-
guage.
D. Of TCH.SY.S-.
Tinges in verbs are those modifications of the verb, by
which a distinction of time is marked. There are naturally
only three times; vix : the jn-t*rnt, the pcrj'nt, and the
future time. But to express more exactly the circumstances
of time in events, actions, or states of existence, three
93
other distinctions of time have been adopted. This makes
six tenses we have in Grammars, viz :
1. The Present, which indicates what is actually exist-
ing or not existing, going on, or not going on ; as : Bcjigo
Kije-Manito, kawin nississiwag ; there is one God, there
are not three. Nind ojibiige, kaicin nin babamosscssi ; I
am writing, not walking about.
2. The Imperfect, which represents a state, action, or
event, as past, or as continuing at a time now past ; as :
Nind incnddnalan tchi ijaian gaic nin ; I thought to go
myself too. Wissiniban api pandigeiang ; he was eating
when we came it. Nimissc <'tk<n>ibftn ba-mddjaian; my
sister was sick, when I started to come here.
3. The Perfect, which represents events, actions or
states, as completely finished and past ; as : JVinoshe gi-
nibo ; my aunt is dead. O gi»nissan o pijikiman ; he has
killed his ox.
4. The Pluperfect, which signifies that an action or
event was over, when or before another began, which is
also past; as: Nin gi-islikwa-ojibiigenaban, bwa madness-
ing kitotagan ; I had done writing, before the bell rang,
Ki gi-gijitonaban na apdbiurin, api pandigewad? Iladst
thou finished the bench when they came in ?
5. The Future, which represents actions or events, defi-
nitely or indefinitely, as yet to come ; as : Wabang nin ga-*
bi-ija minawa ; to-morrow I will come again, (definitely.)
Nag at cli nin ga-bi^ija minawa ; by and by I will come
again, (indefinitely.')
6. The Second Future, which indicates that an action
or event will be over, when or before another action or
event likewise future shall come to pass ; as : Kakina ge-
gi'bimadisidjig aking ta-abitcliibawag, tchi bwa dibakonid-
ing ; all that shall have lived on earth, will rise again be*
fore the general judgment,
91
E. Of Number* and Persons.
The Numbers are two in every tense and mood, the sin-
gular and the plural. And each iiumher has three Per-
sons, the first, the second, and the third.
The subject* of verbs are ordinarily noun* or pronoun*.
The pronouns that are employed to serve as subjects to
verbs, are the two personal pronouns, nin, I, me, we ; and
ki, thou, thee, we, you, us. These two pronouns serve for
both sexes and both numbers ; nin for the first persons, and
ki for the second. — The third persons have no personal
pronouns in the immediate connexion with verbs. In some
Conjugations, indeed, the third persons are preceded by an
o; but this o does not signify he, she, it, or they ; it signi-
fies him, her, it, or them, the object of the verb. F. i. O
wabaman, he sees him, (her, them.) O ivabandan, he sees
it. O wabandanan, he sees them. This o is also a pos-
sessive pronoun signifying hi*, her, its, their, as we have
seen in the preceding Chapter.
F. Of Participle*.
A Participle is a part or form of the verb, resembling, at
the same time, an adjective, and occasionally also a substan-
tive, and has his name from htB participating of the qualities
of the verb, the adjective, and the substantive.
The Otchipwe participles have two forms, all the six
tenses, the three persons, and both numbers, singular and
plural.
The two forms of the participles are :
1. The Affirmative Form; as: Gtigitod, speaking, or
he that is speaking. Degwishing, he that arrives, arriving.
Kf-ntiftnk, what i.s difficult. IVcnijishint;, what is fair, good,
(being fair.)
2. The Negative Farm ; as: Gagitottig, he that is not
speaking. Dcgwishintig, he that arrives not, riot arriving.
:, what is not difficult; not being difficult.
t not being fair, good.
95
The six tenses of the participles are the same as stated
above ; viz : The present, the imperfect, the perfect, the
pluperfect, the future and the second future ; as: Gagito-
idn, I who am speaking. Gagitolaniban, thou who wast
speaking. Gd-gigltod, he who has been speaking. Gd-
glgltolangiban, we who had been" speaking. Ge-gigitoicg,
you who will be speaking. Gt-gi-gigitowad, they that will
have been speaking.
Towards the end of the paradigm of the I. Conjugation
you will find an important Remark on the Otchipwe parti-
ciples, which you will please mind well.
Of the Dubitative.
The Dubitative or Traditional is used when persons
are spoken of, whom the speaker never saw, or who are
absent ; or other objects, that he never saw nor experienced
himself; or speaking of events which happened not before
the eyes or ears of the person speaking, or shall come to
pass in future ; as : Mi ga-ikltogwen aw akiwesi bwa nibod^
so said that old man before he died. Anindi aiad kissaie /
— Moniang aiddog. Where is thy brother ? — He is in
Montreal; (or, I think he is in Montreal, but I am not cer-
tain.) Ki klkcndan na ga-ijiwebadogu-cn cndaleg awass
blbonong 1 Dost thou know what happened in your house
the winter before last ?
Remark. This Dubitative is peculiar to the Indian lan-
guages, and in some respect bears testimony to the fact,
that the habit of lying is a strong trait in the Indian cha-
racter, which induced the Indians originally to establish
the Dubitative in their languages. Being aware of this
habit themselves, they much mistrust each other ; and con-
sequently, when something is related or narrated to an
Indian by his fellow-Indians, (or other men;) he will in-
deed remember the narration, but with the idea in his mind
of possibly being imposed upon. This he will manifest by
the manner in which he will repeat the narration. He will
96
speak in the Dubitfttivr, and give the hearer to understar i
that the narration may not be true in all its parts. This
mood of speaking being now in their language, they will
even apply it, (without any evil intention,) to the relating
of Scriptural facts, or to Eternal truths. They will, for
instance, say of a small child, (speaking of Christian In-
dians,) that died after baptism in angelic innocence: "Aw
abinodjl mi no d.iiidug gijigong;" which properly says : "I
think that child is well in heaven, but I am not certain."
Or : "I suppose that child is happy in heaven." This is
the proper meaning of that Dubitativc. They firmly be-
lieve that the child is in heaven and happy; but this mari-
ner of speaking being in their language, they will employ
it occasionally, even in speaking of certain, events and
truths, but which did not happen before their eyes. So
also I heard a good, faithful, Christian Indian, who firmly
believes in the Omnipresence and Omniscience of God
Almighty, say thus, using his Dubitativc: "Migaienon*
gom nondawigwen Kijc-Manito ckitoidn ;" which, if taken
strictly, means : " I suppose, God hears me also now what
I say." — This, however, ought not to be so. Speaking of
certain facts and truths, we ought to speak in an tisxtiring
manner, although those facts did not come to pass before
our eyes and cars. This is the reason why Missionaries
especially ought to avoid the Dubitativc as much as pos-
sible, in relating Scriptural facts, or speaking of Eternal
truths, or such future events and states of things, as
we know by the Word of God. We can speak of all thnt
very correctly and intelligibly, without employing the Du-
bitat'tve.
Speaking of common uncertain events or objects, or of
common persons obsent, or of times past, we may employ
it witlrpropriety. For this reason it is also called Traditional.
It is also employed with the indcfinilivo pronoun dirc^u'cn,
whoever, or whosoever; as: Awegwen ged^ikitogwen . .
Whoever shall say . . . Awegwen grd-ijagwen . . . Who-
mever shall go ...
97
But what shall we call this Dubitative or Traditional?
We cannot call it a mood ; it has moods itself, the indica-
tive and subjunctive at least. We cannot call it a. form ei-
ther, because it has itself two forms, the affirmative and the
negative. We cannot even call it a voice, as we find in it
two voices, the active and the passive. I think the most
appropriate name for it would be : DuMtative Conjuga-
tion.
The dubitative Conjugations have not all the tenses and
moods of the common Conjugations. We shall exhihibit
in the paradigms of the dubitative Conjugations those tenses
that are commonly used in them.
Note. When we observe the Indians in their speaking,
we see that they have three manners of expressing them-
selves, when they speak of uncertain, or unseen and unex-
perienced events or persons.
1. They use the Dubitative, as established in the Dub.
Conj. of this Grammar. F. i. Abidog, he is perhaps in ;
gi-madjadogenagt they are perhaps gone away.
2. They use not the Dubitative, but they employ adverbs
denoting uncertainty ; as, gonima, ganabatch, makija,
which all signify perhaps. F. i. Gonima abi, he is perhaps
in ; ganabatch gi-madjawag, they are perhaps gone away.
3. They use the Dubitative and these adverbs of uncer-
tainty together. F. i. Gonima abidng, he is perhaps in ;
gonima gi-madjadogcnag, they are perhas gone away.
They have also, for the expression of such phrases, the
words knee and madw(-,\\\\\c\\ signify, they say, or, it is said.
F. i. Gi-nibo kiwe ; or, gi-metdw$-nibo, they say he is dead ;
Gi-dagicishinog kiioe, or, gi-madwe-dagwishinog, it is said
that they have come.
93
CONJUGATION OF VERBS.
The Conjugation of a verb is a written or recited display
of its different voices, forms, moods, tenses, numbers and
persons, and participles. To accommodate and arrange with
ease all the different kinds of verbs of this "language of
verbs," we must assume no less than nine Conjugations.
Remark. I must, however, make here a similar remark,
as I did in the preceding Chapter, p. 53. I will lay here in
the following Conjugations, where all kinds of the Otchipwe
verbs are conjugated at large.through all their voices, forms,
moods, tenses, numbers and persons, and participles, I will
lay, I say, a full and complete display of them before the
eyes of the learner ; because I think that by this method
a thorough knowledge of the use of the Otchipwe verbs
may be easier conveyed to his mind and memory, than by
any other plan I could think of. But I say again here, as
I said in the above cited remark, that this detailed display
of verbs is principally intended to assist the beginner, and
to show him at once the whole verb in all its inflections.
But learners who are more advanced in the study of this lan-
guage, may abridge the Conjugations, and contract several
in one; My principal intention in writing this Grammar is
to assist beginning learners, especially Missionaries, in the
acquirement of this so peculiar language. Have they once
ascended some degrees of knowledge in this study, they will
then go on easily, without my guidance.
The characteristical mark by which verbs are known, to
which Conjugation they belong, is the third person singu-
lar, present, indicative, affirmative form. Besides this per-
son, the quality of the verb must be considered. At the
commencement of every Conjugation it will be said, which
verbs belong to it.
The following table shows the nine different Conjugations,
and the verbs belonging to each of them.
99
CONJUGATION TABLE.
Conj.
Quality of verbs.
Term, of the
3 per son.
I. Conj
II. Conj.
III. Conj.
IV. Conj.
V. Conj.
VI. Conj.
VII. Conj.
VIII. Conj.
IX. Conj.
Intransitive (or neuter) verbs, end-
ing in a vowel at the 3. person
sing. pres. indie., the reproach-
ing and substant.-vcrbs ; like-
wise the reciprocal and commu-
nicative, although transitive. «, ey ?, o.
Intransitive verbs, ending in am at
the 3 pers. sing. pres. indie , (and
likewise so at the first person, }am.
Intransitive verbs, ending in in or
on at the 3 pers. sing. pres. in-
die., (and likewise so at the first
person.) - - - - in, on.
Transitive (or active) verbs, ANI-
MATE, ending in an at the 3 per-
son sing. pres. indie.; (at the
first person in a.) an.
Transitive verbs, ANIMATE, ending
in nan at the 3 pers. sing. pres.
indie., (and likewise so at the
first person.) - nan.
Transitive verbs, INANIMATE ; and
the personifying, - - an, en}in}on.
Unipersonal verbs, ending in zvowcl a, ey it o.
Unipersonal verbs, ending in acL ad.
Unipersonal verbs ,endingin an orinan, in.
100
Remark. The order of these Conjugations may appear
.-insular. It is so indeed ; the intrantitiM verbs precede
•ransitirr. Hut tliis plan and order again I have adop-
ted to accommodate the beginning learner. The Conjuga-
tions of the transitive verbs are much more difficult and
complicated than those of the intransitive. These are sim-
ple and easy ; and may be considered as the first steps in
the scale of the Otchipwe Conjugations, by which the learn-
er will easily ascend to the more difficult ones. But if he
had to commence with the Conjugations of transitive verbs,
he would begin with the most difficult and embarrassing of
all these Conjugations, with the fourth in the above table ;
and might possibly be frightened and discouraged.
I. CONJUGATION.
To this Conjugation belong the intransitive or neuter
verbs that end in a vowel at the third person singular, pres-
ent, indicative. There are also other verbs ending at the
third person in a vowel, but they belong to the VII. Con-
jugation, being unipcrsonal verbs.
This vowel in which ends the third person above men-
tioned, and which is the characteristical mark of the in-
transitive verbs belonging to the I. Conjugation, may be «,
r, i, or o. F. i.
Inransitive verbs. Third person.
Nin mddja, I depart, I start, marlju.
Nin inij(i<r</, I arrive (in a canoe, etc.,) mijag^
Nmjaaendjige, \ practice charity, jawe-ndjige.
.Mini ijifr/i/ifc, \ do, I act,
Nin bos, I embark,
Nind ab, I am (somewhere,) ab\.
Nin gwil, I speak,
Nin mindid, 1 am big,
101
To this Conjugation also belong the reciprocal verbs, be-
cause they all end in o at the third person singular, pres.
indie.; as : Nin kikcnindis> I know myself; kikcnindiso.
Nin gagwedjindis, I ask myself; gagwedjindiso. Niu
palritcodis., I strike myself; • pakiteodiso. The reciprocal
verbs are in some respect transitive, because they express
a reaction, of the subject on itself. Still they don't belong
to the transitive Conjugations, because the action of the
subject does not go over upon another subject, but re-
dounds on the same that is acting.
Likewise do all the communicative verbs belong to this
I. Conjugation, although they are of a real transitive
signification. They are used only in the plural, where
they conjugate exactly like intransitive verbs, not bearing
any marks of transition in their construction ; as : Nin
widokodadimin, we help each other ; Id widokodadim, wid-
okodadiwag. Ki pakittodimin, we strike each other ; ki
pakiteodim, pakiteodiivag. Nin u'dbandimin, we see each
other ; ki ivabandim, wabandiwag.
The reproaching verbs and the substantive->verbs are in-
transitive, and all end in i at the third person above men-
tioned, and of course belong to this Conjugation; as : Nin
mhrikwcshk, I am in the habit of drinking; minikwesJiki.
Nin bapishk, I am in the habit of laughing ; bapishki. Nin
mitigow, I am wood ; mitigowi. Nind a$siniwt T am stone;
assiniwi.
Remark 1. In the paradigms or patterns of the Conjuga-
tions, the terminations of all the moods and tenses are print-
ed in Roman the better to show the inflection of the verb.
Remark 2. In regard to the difference between nin and
ki, we, see Hem. 3. page 45. And in regard to the euphon-
ical d, see Rem. 1. page 43. These remarki must be well
borne in mind, as they will be of use throughout the Con«
jugations.
102
Remark 3. Remember well, dear reader, that in the pat-
terns or paradigms of these Conjugations, we don't express
both first perons plural, nin and ki, (or nind, kid,) we; we
put only one, nin, (or nind;) the other one, ki, (or kid,) is
understood. This will save many a line in this book. But
remember well, that in all the forms, in all the moods and
tenses of all these Conjugations, where there are first per-
.-ons plural, both can be used, according to the above re-
marks. So, for instance, instead of saying in the para-
digm :
Nind ikit, I say, etc. .
kid ikit,
ikito,
nind ikitom'm, )
kid ikitomm, \ we say-
kid ikitom,
ikitovrag ;
we will say thus :
Nind ikit,
kid ikit,
ikito,
nind ikitomin, we say,
kid okitom,
ikitowa.g.
And you will have to supply yourself the second first person
plural, which is ordinarily the same in the verb, the pron-
oun only is different. But where the verb itself differs in
the two persons plural, there we express them both ; as in
the subjunctive mood, in participles, etc,
Remark 4. In the paradigms of these Conjugations, we
express the English verb only at ihejirst person singular in
every tense, and the others will again be supplied by you ;
because we don't teach here to conjugate in English, but in
Otchipwe.
103
Remark 5. The characteristical third person of the verbs
belonging to this Conjugation, may end in any of the four
vowels, in a, e, i, or o ; and the end-vowel of this third per-
son remains throughout the whole Conjugation. To this
characteristical vowel the terminations are attached ; but
the vowel itself does not belong to the terminations, which
are always the same for all the verbs of this Conjugation ;
whereas the characteristical vowel is different in different
verbs. In the following four verbs the end-vowel of the
the third person is different in each of them ; but the term-
inations are always the same,
Gaba, he debarks, nin gabamin, ki gabam, gabawag.
Gagikinge, he exhorts, nin gagikingemin^igagikingem.
gagikingew&g.
Nimi, he dances, nin wiwimin, ki nimim, m'miwag.
Nibo, he is dying, nin nibomitij ki nibotii,
Here follows now the paradigm of the I. Conjugation,
fully displayed. Endeavor especially to commit to memo*
ry the terminations. If you know the terminations, and
know the characteristical vowel of the third person sing.
pres. indie., you will easily conjugate every verb of this
Conjugation. This characteristical third person is some-
times difficult to know. For this reason I took a particu-
lar care in the Dictionary to express it at every verb
104
AFFIRMATIVE FORM.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE.
Nind ikit> I say,
kid ikit,.
ikito^ ( one says,
ikitom, < (on dit,*)
nind ikitomm, ( or they say.
kid iJcitom,
ikitowag,
IMPJJJIFECT! TENSE.
Wind iJbVonaban, I saidr
kid i/t?#onaban,
ikitob&n,
nind eft&omiftabatfc,
kid ikitomwaba.nf
//,/fobanig;
PERFECT TENSE.
Nin gi-ikit, I have- said;
ki gi-ikit,
gi-ikifo,
gi-ikitom, they have said, (on «t
nin gi-ikitomin,. [ditr>
ki gi-ikitom ,
gi-ikiio\vag.
ILUPERFECT TENSE.
Nin gi-ikitonab&nj I had said,
ki gi-ikitona.ba.n,t
gi-ikitobau,
* See Remark, p. 92.
t Note. This pluperfect, and the imperfect tense, are not so sharply
distinguished in Otchipwe, as they are in English, or in other civilized-.
105
NEGATIVE FORM.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE.
Kawin nind ikitossi, 1 do not say,
" kid ikitossi,
" ikitossi,
ikitossim, they don't say, (on ne dit
" nind ikitossimm, [pas . )
" kid ikitossim,
IMPERFECT TENSE.
Kawin nind i&jVossinaban, I did not say,
" kid iAr^ossinaban,
iH^ossiban,
" nind tf&ossimraaban,
kid z'H^ossimwaban,
PERFECT TENSE.
Kawin nin gi-ikitossi, I have not said,
" ki gi-ikitossi,
(i gi-ikitossi,
gi-ikitossim, they have .not said, (on nja
*' nin gi-ijcitossim'm, [pas dit.)
" ki gi-ikitossimt
" gi-t/h'fpssiwag,
PLUPERFECT TENSE.
Kawin nin gi-ikitossmaban, I had not said-
,ki ^i-i/h'fwsinaban,
languages. In Otchipwe they are used promiscuously. So, for instance t
vo eic^resB, "He said," the Indian will say: Ikitoban, or gi-ikttoba?*
etc.. ~ Tiiis note aj>j>lies also to other Conjugations,
106
nin gi-ikitominabau,
ki gi-ikitomwaban,
gi-ikitobanig,
FUTURE TENSED
Nin gad-ikit, I will say,
ki gad-ikit,
ta-ikito,
ta-ikitom,
nin gad-ikitomin,
ki gad-ikit om^
ta-ikitovr&g,
SECOND FUTURE TENSE
Nin ga-gi-ikit, I will have said,
ki ga-gi-ikit,
ta-gi-ikito,
ta-gi-ikitom,
nin ga-gi-ikitomin,
ki gct'gi-ikitom,
ta-gi-ikitowag,
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD
PRESENT TENSE.'
Ikito\a.n* I say, or, that I say
ikitod,
ikitong, (quron dise,)
ikitoieg,
ikito\vad,
See Remark 1. p. 116.
107
Kawin nin gi-ikitossimmaban,
ki
FUTURE TENSE.
Kawin nin gad-ikitossi, I will not say,
ki gad-ikitossi ,
ta-ikitossi,
ta-ikitossim,
nin gad-ikitossimin,
ki gadoikitossim,
ta-ikitossi\va.g,
SECOND FUTURE TENSF.
Kawin nin ga-gi-ikitossi, I will not have said.
" ki ga-gi-ikitossi,
ta-gi-ikitossi,
ta-gi-ikitossim,
nin ga-gi-ikitossimin,
ki ga-gi-ikitossim,
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE.
//h'fossiwan, if I do not say,
i&itassiwan, «•
ikitossig,
ikitossing, that they say not, (qu'on ne
dise pas,)
iT_
We ' '
ikitossiweg,
ikitossig
PEREFCT TFNSE.*
Cr/VAr/f0ian,t because I have said,
#/WM0ian, [or, as I have said,
gi-ilritodt
gi-ikitoi&hs,
PLUPERFECT TENSE.
It?'{0iamban, if I had said, or
because I had said.
ikitoi&mban,
ikitongiban,
/^vYoiangiba
/A-//oiangoba
?A:?'/oiegoban,
.f
/A-//oiangoban,
FUTURE TENSE.
Gcd-ikitoiant that I will say,
gcd-ikitong,
f^S; | ^at we sha,, say,
gcd-ikitoieg,
gcd-l&itowtd,
SECOND FUTURE TENSE,
Gc-gi-ikitoian, as I shall have said,
gc-gi-ikitodt
gc-gi-ikitong,
•^•0
Sc« R«m«r* 2; p. 116. f See Aofe, after all cho
109
PERFECT TENSE.
Gi-ikitossiw&n, I have not said, or because
I have not said,
gi-ikitossiwan,
gi-ikitoss\g,
gi-ikitossing,
gi-ikitonsiw&ng, )
gi-ikitossiwang, )
gi-ikitoBsiweg,
gi-ikitossigwa,
PLUPERFECT. TENSE.
Ikitossiwamban, J if I had not said, or
had I not said,
tfa'fossiwamban,
/A-//ossigoban,
, ) .f
i^^ossiwangoban, ) we ' ' '
/Ar/^ossiwegoban,
FUTURE TENSE.
Ged-ikitossiwan, that I will not say,
ged-ikitoss'iw&n,
ged-ikitossig,
ged-ikitossing,
ged-ikitossiwang. \ .,
ffcd-ikitossiwang, f that we sha11 not s
ged-ikitossiweg,
ged-ikitos sigwa.
SECOND FUTURE TENSE.
Ge-gi-ikitossiwa.n, as I shall not have said,
ge-gi-ikitossiwan,
gc-gi-ikitossig,
gc-gi-ikitos$ing,
i See Remark 3, at the end of this paradigm,
110
3 we shall say
ge-gi-ikitoieg,
ge-gi-ikitovtad,
CONDITIONAL MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE.
Nin da-ikitt I would say, or I ought
ki da-ikitt [to say ,
da-ikito,
da-ikitom, they would say, (on
nin da~ikitom\nt [dirait,)
ki da-ikitom,
da-ikitovfSig.
PERFECT TENSE.
Nin da-gi-ikitt I would have said : I
ought to have said
ki da-gi-ikitt
da-gi-ikito,
da~gi-ikitom,
nin da-gi-ikitomint
ki da-gi-ikitomt
da-gi-ikitowzg,
Ge-gi-ikitoian, what I would have said
Etc., as above in the second future tense of the subj. mood
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
ta-ikito, let him, (her, it,) say,
ta-ikitomt let them say, (qu'on
ikitodt, let us say, [disc,)
ikitog, \
ikitoiog, > say, say ye,
i&itokeg, )
ta-ikitovriLg, let them say.
Ill
,
ge-gi-ikitossivreg,
ge-g i-i ki t ossig wa.
CONDITIONAL MOOD,
PRESENT TENSE.
Kawin nin da-iki.iossi, I would not say ; I ought not
" ki. da-i.kito93ir [to say.
(la-ikitossi,
da-ikitosaim, they would not say, (on ne
dirait pas,
nin da-ih'toss'imin ,
ki da-ikitoss'im,
da-ikitossiw&g,
PERFECT TENSE,
Kawin nin dc*gi-ikitossit I would not have said ; I ought
ki da-gi-ikitoss'i, [not to have said.
da-gi-ikitosei,
da-gi-ikito98\m,
nin da-gi-ikitossimin)
ki da-gi-ikitossim>
Ge-gi-ikitossiw&n, what 1 \vould n> h, s.
Etc., as above in the second future tense of thesubjv mood
IMPERATIVE MOOD,
Keffo ikitok&n* do not say, (tho«,) say not.
ktgo ta~ikito9SA> let him (her) not say,
kego ta-ikitos$\m, let them not say, (qu'on ne
ikitossida, let us not say,
kego ikitokegon, do not say, (you,) say nor.
keg? ta-ikitoss\\vag, let them not say.
*See RemfyJt \. at the cud of the prea&nX paradigm-
112
Remark. The following Otchipwe participles cannot be
given in English, throughout all the tenses and persons, in
the shape of participles. There afe no such participles
in the English language. They must be expressed by the
use of relative pronouns. Only the participle of the present
tense, in the third person singular, could be expressed by a
corresponding English participle; as: Ekitod, saying:
baidpid, laughing, etc.
The Latin participles of the verbs called, vcrla dcponen-
tia, can answer three tenses of the Otchipwe participles,
the present, the perfect, and the future ; and not only the
third person, but, by the use of personal pronouns, all per-
sons and numbers. Let us take the verb, nin g>kinge^
1 exhort, for an example, to illustrate the matter. It i>
deponens in Latin, cxhorlor.
Participles.
PRESENT TENSE.
Nin gegikingeian, ego exhortans,
kin gegikingeian, tu exhortans,
win gegikingcd, ille (ilia) exhortans,
nhiawindgegikingnang, } exhortantes,
kmawind gegikingeiang, j
PARTICIPLES.
PRESENT TENSE.
Nin ekitdwn* I saying, (I who say,)
kin e/ri/0ian, thou saying, etc.,
win ekitoil,
, what they say, (ce qu 'on dit,)
See Remark*.
113
kinawa gegikingeieg, vos exhortantes,
winawa gegikingedjigy illi (illa3) exhortantes,
PERFECT TENSE.
Nin ga-gag iking eiaii, ego exhortatus, (a),
kin ga-gagikingeian, tu exhortatus, (a),
win ga-gagikinged, ille exhortatus, (ilia exhortata).
nlnawindga-gagikingeiang, )
kinawind ga-gagikmgciang, J
kinawa ga-gagikingcicg, vos exhortati, (»),
winawa ga-gagikingedjig, illi (illa3) exhortati, (se).
FUTURE TENSE.
in gc-gagikingcian, ego exhortatu-rus, (a),
kin gc-gag'ikingeiany tu exhortaturus, (a),
etc. etc.
By these examples we see that the fblfawing are true
Otchipwe participles; but they cannot be given in English,
nor in other modern languages, in the shape of participles.
PARTICIPLES.
PRESENT -TENSE.
Nin ekitossiwan, I not saying, (I who say not,)
&i7i ekitossiwan, thou who dost not say,
win ekitossig,
ekitossing, what they don't say (ce qu 'on
ne dit pas,
114
ninawin<( ckitowig, \ ^ ^ ^
kindtcd. ckito'ieg,
tcinaica
IMPERFECT TENSE.
JV/'w e&t£0iamban, 1 who said,
fa id
kmawmd e^^oi
kinawa efo'toiegoban,
mnawa
PERFECT TENSE-.
Nln ga-ikitoian, I who have said,
kin ga-ikitoi-a.ii,,
win ga-ikitod,
ga-ikitong,
iWoiing, t
ikitoizng, )
kinawind ga-ikitoizng,
kinawa ga-ikitoieg,
>cinawa
PLUPERFECT TENSF.
Nin ga-ikitol&mbzn, I who had said,
kin ga~ikitoiamba.ii,
win ga-ikitopan,
ga-ikitongib^m,
we to had saul
kinawa
winawa
I bee Remark, p. 26.
115
ninawind e&z/ossiwang, > wg ^^ do not g
kinawind efo'tossiwang, )
kinawa ekitossiweg,
winawa eHfossigog,
IMPERFECT TENSE.
iVin cArzfossiwamban) I who did not say,
win e£/Z0ssigoban,
e&itassingiban,
tossiwangiban, ) who did not
kinawind efotassiwangoban, )
kinawa
winaica c^ossigobanig,
PERFECT TEHSE.
Nin ga»i&i£0ssiwan, I Who have not said,
kin ga*ikitoss\\van,
win ga-ikitossig,
ga-ikiiossing,
kinawa ga-ikitossiweg)
winawa ga-iJdtossigog.
PLUPERFECT TENSE.
Nin ga-i&itossiwamban, I who had not said,
kin
wn g
ga-^'^ossingiban,
ossiw4ngiban, wh ha(J
:z/ossiwangoba
:^ossiwegoban,
winawa ga*z'£i£0ssigobanig,
,
kinawa a-z'A:^ossiweoban
116
FUTURE TENSE.
Nin ged-ikito\an, I who shall say,
kin gcd-ikifoian,
win gcd-ikitod,
gcd-ikitong,
ged-ikitoieg,
vina u-a ged-ikitod'jig,
SECOND FUTURE TENSE.
Nin gc-gi-ikitoim}, I who shall have said,
kin gc-gi-ikitoian,
Etc., as above in the FIRST FUTURE,
Remark 1. The conjunctions, &/.-•///>///, if; missaira,
though ; tchi, that, to, in order to> and others, are often
placed before the verbs in the subjunctive mood, to express
a condition, supposition, wish, etc. But they do not
necessarily belong to this mood. This is the reason why
they are not always laid down in the Conjugations. If you
say : Kishpin gcgo ikitoian ; or only, ffcgo ikitoidn ; both
expressions have the same signification : If I say some-
thing.
Remark 2. There is no imperfect tense in the subjunc-
tive mood. The pluperfect has the grammatical appearance
of the imperfect, but it is its own construction.
Remark 3. This pluperfect tense is sometimes preceded
by the particle gi-, forming : 1Gi-ikitoidmbant gi-ikitoidin-
han, etc. But this particle does not change its significa*
tion at all. If you say, Kishpin gi-ikitoi&mban iV, ki da~
windimon ; if I had said that, I would tell thee ; or,
ikitoidmban iw> ki da-ioindamon ; it is all the same.
117
FUTURE TENSE.
Nin ged-ikitossi\va.n, I who shall not say,
kin ged^ikitossiwan,
win ged-ikitossigt
ged-ikitoss\ng,
°' /• we who shall not say.
kinawmd gcd-ikitossi\vang, )
kinawa gcd-ikitossiweg,
winawa ged-ikitoss'igog.
SECOND FUTURE TENSE*
;iwan, I who shall not have said.
kin ge-
always prefixing ge-gi- to the verb-.
Remark 4. The imperative in the second person singular
is expressed in two manners, ikiton and ikitokan. The
second manner, ikitokan, seems to be a kind of polite im-
perative, which is expressed in English by preposing the
word please to the simple imperative, as : Bi-ijdkan oma
ivabang, please come here to-morrow. (In the plural
ikitokeg.)
Remark. 5. The participles can have personal pronouns
before them, and have them often, as : Nin ekitoian, kin
ckitoian, win ekitod, etc. But they could also do without
them. For the better accommodation of the beginner the pro-
nouns are expressed in the paradigms of our Conjugations.
Remark 6. It is necessary to observe here, that the first
persons of the plural, ending in iang or ang, with the
grave accent, are employed in the cases where niti, (nind,)
or ninawind, is expressed or understood, according to the
rules and remarks mentioned above, page 45. But in the
cases where ki, (kid,) or kinawind, is expressed or under-
8
118
stood, the termination iang or ang has no accent ; it is
pronounced very short, and almost as icng or cng. It ia
necessary to pay attention to this difference of pronuncia-
tion, because it chants the meaning of the sentence. If
you say, for instance : Mi icabang tchi Iwsiiang ; it means
that to-morrow we will all embark ; the person or persons
speaking, and the person or persons spvkv.n to. But if you
say : Mi wabang tchi bosiidng, (with the accent on the last
syllable,) it me.ms that only the persons speaking will em-
bark to-morrow, not the person or persons spoken to. So
also, F. i.
Endaidng, in our house or dwelling, (the person or persons
spoken to, excluded.)
Enddiang, in our house or dwelling, (the person or persons
spoken to, included.)
Remark 7. Likewise in the first and second persons of
the singular, ending in idn or dnr and ian or an, nothing
but the accent distinguishes the first person from the
second. The termination of the first person ian or an, is
pronounced long ; whereas that of the second person, ian
or an, is very short. Let the following examples be pro-
nounced to you by some person that speaks the Otchipwe
language correctly, and try to get the right idea of this
difference, in, writing and pronouncing.
Ekitoian ta-ijhrcbad ; it will be (or happen) as / say.
Ekitoian ta-ijiwcbad ; it will be (or happen) as thou
sayest.
Apegish enendaman ijiwebisiidn ; I wish to behave as 1
please.
Apegish cnendaman ijiwtbisiidn ; I wish to behave as thou
pleasest.
Apegish enendaman ijiwcbisiian ; I wish thou wouldst be-
have as I please.
Apegish cncHflfit/ifin ijinrblidian ; I wish thou wouldst be-
have as thou plea-
If you look on the four last sentences, they would appear.
119
it' without accents, perfectly equal all of them. And nothing
but the accent in writing, and the emphasis in pronouncing,
effects the difference, which you will find material, if you
consider the English sentences.
Remark 8. In regard to the syllable ban, which you
will see attached to verbs in some tenses, in all our Conju-
gations, it must be observed, that sometimes it is necessary,
and must remain with the verb to which it is attached. But
sometimes it can be omitted without the least change of the
meaning or sense of the verb to which it is attached, or the
sentence in which the verb occurs. I have observed the
Indians purposely on this point, and have noticed it a great
many times, that they use or omit this syllable as they
please, without any intention to effect a change of meaning
by using, or by omitting it. Let us now see when it is
necessary, and when it can be omitted.
1. It is NECESSARY in the imperfect and pluperfect tenses
of the indicative mood, and the participles, and in the plu-
perfect tense of the subjunctive and conditional moods. In
all these cases the final syllable ban must remain attached
to the verb ; as you will see in all the Conjugations of this
Grammar.
2. But it can be OMITTED in the present tense of the sub-
junctive mood, and consequently in all the tenses which
are formed after the present tense, as you will see again in
all our Conjugations. In these tenses the Indians some-
times attach the syllable ban to the verb, and sometimes
they do not, which makes no difference in the meaning of
the verb.
EXAMPLES.
Kawin nin gasltkitossimin tclii bisan-abiiangidwa (or,
abiiangidwaban) ninidjanissinamg. We cannot make
our children be still.
1-20
Kawin nin da-gashkitossin wcwcni tchi dibadodamdmban,
or, tchi dibadodaman. I am not able to tell it exactly.
J/? gc-dodamamban, or, gc-dodcnnan. — Mi gc-onijishingi-
ban, or, gc-onijishing. It is thus thou shouldst do it. —
That would be good, (fair, useful.)
Kawin, n'uid inendansimin tchi ijaiangiban nongom, or,
tchi ijaiang. We are not willing (or, we don't intend) to
go now, (or, to-day.)
Nin da-gi-ina. Mi sa iw ge-gi-inagiban, or, gc-gi-inag.
I would have told him. That is what I would have told
him.
Respecting the annexation of the syllable ban, you have
to observe that the final letter n of the verb to which ban
is to be attached, is changed into m ; which is always the
case, where these two letters come together in composi-
tions.
When the final letter of the verb is g, a vowel is inserted
between this g and the syllable ban. This vowel is ordi-
narily i, as you see in the above examples ; but in some
instances the vowel o is inserted ; as you will see in the
Conjugations, in some moods and tenses, where the in-
cluding first person plural (kinawind) ends in goban.
WThen the final letter of the verb to which the syllable
ban is to be attached, is d, this letter is taken off, and the
syllable pan, instead of ban, is added.
EXAMPLES.
Kawin nongom o da-gashkitossin tchi ijad, or, tchi ij apart.
He would not be able to go to-day.
Kawin gi-incndansi tchi gi-ganojid, or, tchi gi-ganqjipan.
He was not willing to speak to me.
Kawin gi-inendansiwag tchi gi-ganojiwad, or, tchi gi-ga-
nojhrapan. They were not willing to speak to me.
Anairi <> da-gi-gashfcitonatoa tchi gi-qjitnowad, or, tchi gi-
ojimmrapan. They could have fled away.
121
Kawin awiia aiassi gc-nishkiid, or, gc-nishkiipan. There,
is nobody to make me angry.
Note. Gi-ikitoidn, means indeed, " as I have said," or,
" because I have said ;" F. i. Gi-ikitoidn : i( Ningad-ija,''
mi ge-ondji-ijaidii ; because I have said : " I shall go,"
therefore I will go. — But at the same time it means, "when
I shall have said," or, (i as soon as I shall have said." F. i.
Gi-ikitoidn wenijishing gego, nin ga-madja ; when I shall
have said something useful, I will go.
Gi-dagwishinang, ki ga-urindamoninim gego ; when (or, as
soon as) we shall have arrived, I will tell you something.
Paniina gi-nanagataicrndamd-n, nin ga-gigit ; afterwards,
when I shall have reflected, I will speak.
Gi-gijitodj o ga-bidon oma ; when (as soon as) he shall
have made it, he will bring it here.
Remark that in all these cases a future time is signified,
at which some action or event shall take place, although
the first verb has the full appearance of the perfect tense.
(This appearance of the perfect could be given also to the
English verb ; we could say : "As soon as he has made
it, he will bring it here." Even of the present : " As soon
as he makes it, he will bring it here.")
But when actions or events are signified, which have
just past, the same verb in the Change is employed, (which
is the 3d Rule of the Change, p. 136.) To illustrate the
matter, let us take the same examples as a.bove, applying
them to events just past.
Ga-ik'itoidn wenijishing gego, nin gi-madja ; when I had
said (as soon as I had said) something useful, I went
away.
Ga-dagwishinang, ki gi-windamoninim iw ; when we had
arrived, I told you that.
Panima ga-nanagatawendaman, nin gi-gigit ; afterwards^
when I had reflected, I spoke.
122
Ga-gijitod, o gi-bidon oma ; when (as soon as) he had made
it, he brought it here.
Please remember well this Note ; it is to be applied to
almost all our Conjugations.
EXAMPLES ON THE I. CONJUGATION.*
INDICATIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE. — Kid dkos na 1 — Kawin nind aJcosissi ;
ninidjanissag akosiwag, ninga gale dkosi. Art thou
sick? I am not sick; my children are sick, and my
mother is sick.
Ninmanisse nongom ; ki manissem na gaie kinawa ? I
am chopping wood to-day ; are you chopping too ?
Kawin ninawind nin manissessimm, nind assabikemin ;
we do not chop, we are netting, (making nets.)
IMPERFECT TENSE. — Nin nita-nag(imonaban waicshkat,
nongom dash kawin gwetch nin ini^ainossi ; I used to
sing often formerly, (in the beginning,) but now I don't
sing much.
Ka na ki gi-ifcitossimwaban pitchinago tr.hi bi-jjaicg non-
gom ? Did you not sny yesterday that you would come
here to-day 1
Meivija dkosiban ; he fell sick a long time ago.
PERFECT TENSE. — la'igwa gi-mijagawag kid inairemagani-
nanig ; our relations are already arrived, (in a canoe,
boat, etc.)
\Vcwcni nfi ki gidcitigem sigwanong / Aningicana.
Have you farmed well last spring ? Yes, certainly.
Kawin gi-nibassi tilikong, gi~&koshkade ; she did not
sleep (has not slept) last night, she had colics,[(has had.)
" Note. The English part of these Examples could be expressed
•omewh&t better ; and would be so, if given by itself. But I tried to
accommodate it to the Otchipwe sentences, as much as the English Un-
guage would admit.
123
PLUPERFECT TENSE. — Kitchi nibiwa anishinabeg gi-aiaba-
nig oma aking, bwa bi-nigid Jesus ; great many people
had been on earth, before Jesus was born.
Bwa onishkaiegjeba, ningi-ija-naban ninsigoss endawad;
before you got up this morning, I had been at my aunt'?.
Nijing ja'igwa ki gi-gigitomwaban, api win pesigwid wi-
gigitod : you had already spoken twice when he rose
to speak.
FUTURE TENSE. — Wabang kabe-gijig ki ga^bimossemin:
to-morrow he will walk all day.
Kaginig gijigong ki ga-mino-aiam, kishpin babamitaweg
Debendjigrd ; you will eternally be well in heaven, if you
are obedient to the Lord.
JVi/i gad-ijitchige ga-ijlian ; I will do what thou hast
told me.
SECOND FUTURE TENSE. — Nin ga-gi-madja, api ge-dagwc-
shinan oma ; I will have been departed before thou ar-
rivest here.
Ki ga-gi-ishkwdtam na tchi bwa anamiegijigak? Will
, you have done the work before Sunday ^
(This tense is very seldom used.)
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE. — Kishpin pdlcatch ikitoian, ivenijishini!
gcgo tchi ijitchigeian, ijitchigen ; if thou once sayest that
thou wilt do something good and right, do it.
Apegish enamiangin iji bimadisiieg, kaginig gijigong
tchi jawendagosiieg ; I wish you would live like Christi-
ans, to be eternally happy in heaven.
Kawin iw onijisliinsinon tchi ikitong : Kawin nin do-
gashkitossin tchi anoldtawag Debendjiged ; it is not right
to say : I cannot serve the Lord.
Kishpin anamiaieg^ anokiieg gaie, ki ga-jawendagosim ';
anokissiweg dash, eshkam ki ga-kilimagisim ; if you pray
and work, you will be happy ; if you do not work you wilf
get poorer and poorer.
124
PERFECT TENSE. — Gwaiak gi-ikifoirad tchi bi-ijawad, mi
ircndji-akowabamagwa ; I am looking out for them,
because they have expressly said they would come.
Ki gi-matchi-ijiwebis gi-bimosseian gi-anamiegijigak ;
thou hast done evil because thou hast travelled on
Sunday.
Gi*anokissiwegt gi-kitigt>ssiwcg sigwanong, mi nongoin
wendji-bakadeieg ; because you have not worked, not
cultivated the ground last spring, therefore you are starv-
ing now.
PLUPERFECT TENSE. — Kin gi*gigitoiamban, Debenimiian,
mi wendji"debicetaman ; because thou hadst spoken Lord,
therefore I believe,
Nibossigoban Jesus, kawin awiia gijigong da-ijassi ;
had not Jesus suffered death, no person could go to hea-
ven.
Pagidaioassiurangiban tagwagong, ni n da-gi-bakademin
uongom bibo-ng ; had we not made the fall fishery, (had wet
not set nets last fall,) we would have starved this winter.
FUTURE TENSE. — Api ged-islikwa-bimadixiian akiug, ml
api ged-apitchi-jawendagosiian ; when I shall end my life)
on earth, then I shall be perfectly happy.
Kiikina mindjimcndan mi nil: ged~ikitod mekatt,w\kwa\
naie tmamiewgamigong ; keep all in memory whatever*
the priest shall say at church, (in the church.)
Nin kikendan ged*ikitoidn gcd-ikitossiic&n gttic ; I know
what I will say and what I will not say.
SECOND FUTURE TENSE. — Ge-gi-in-bimadisid rnamiad
a king, mi gcd-iji-dodau'intl dibakonig^-gijigadinig ; as
the Christian shall have lived on earth.,, even so he shall
be treated on the day of judgment.
Gc-gi-iji-i iKikonigru'dd luiganisidjig, mi ged-ijitchigeieg ;
as the chiefs (or superiors) shall Qoftstitute, so you
should act.
125
CONDITIONAL MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE. — Ki da-mi me ctidagos, kawin gaic ki da-
kilimdgisissi, kishjnn minikwtssiwan ishkotewabo ; thou
wouldst be beloved, and thou wouldst not be poor, if thou
didst not drink ardent liquor.
Ki da-nibiuakdm, gwaidk gate ki da-bimddisim, pisin-
damegoban gagikwcwin; you would be wise, and you
would live uprightly, if you would listen to preaching.
Gwaiak ki da-dibadjini eji-kikendaman, kawin ki da-
segisissi ; thou oughtst to tell just as thou knowest it ; thou
oughtst not to be afraid.
PERFECT TENSE. — Nin da-gi-ijdmin nongom odenang,
mino gijigakiban ; we would have gone to town to-day,
had the weather been fair.
Nibiwa ja'igwa da-gi-gashkitchigc, mojag anokipan ;
he would already have earned much, if he had worked all,
the \irne.
Kawin n in cta-gi-aj£giwessit kikcndamamban mikana :
I would not have gone back again, had I known the road.
Ki da-gi-ijam anamiewi garni gong pitcliinago, kawin ki
da-gi-mawadishiwessim; you ought to have gone to church
yesterday, you ought not to have paid visits.
Kawin ki da-gi-bapissi gi-*nondaman wnitagosiwin ; thou
oughtst not to have laughed when thou heardst impure
talking.
IMPERATIVE MOOD,
Anamian kigijeb tchi bwa madji-anokiian ; panimu dash
weweni anokin, kego kitimiken, kcgo gaie anishd mawa-
dishiweken ; pray in the morning, before thou beginnest
to work j and then work diligently, and do not pay any
useless visit?.
Bi-ijdkan minaica oma, bi-pindigtkan endaidng ; please
come here again, and corne to our house.
Ta-nagamo aw oxkinigikwe ; let that young woman sing.
Ta-ikoga aw netd-giwashkwebid, kego oma ta-aidssi ; let
this drunkard be gone; let him not be here.
126
Ambc pasigwida, mddjada,aim-anolcida mdmawi\ let us
rise and go and work together.
forgo matchi. ikitosxitla, kcg<> mdttki ijiuoebisissida, ki nun-
dagonan .SY/, /,•/ uxibamigonan gnic Dcbcndjiged ; let us
not say any bad words, and let us not act wrong, because
the Lord sees us and hears us.
Bisdn aidg, u'circni namadabiiog; be still, be sitted quietly.
Ikogag oma, kiffiwisfnsidog ; madjag, giicdog ; be gone
boys ; go away, go home.
Kego wika waiejingekcgou, tnamiaicff, kego gaic nibiira
masinaigtkegon ; do never cheat, Christians, and do not
take much on credit.
Ta-ashamdwag kakina igiw anisJiinabeg ; kcgo ta-giices-
fiwag tchi bwa wissiniii'dfl ; let these Iiidi;ins have sonic-
thing to eat ; let them not go home before they eat.
PARTICIPLES.
PiiKSKNT'TEXSi-:. — Gdgitnfl ulii pi s'i luidica ; I listen to t.hii
person that speaks, (to the speaking person.)
U a1tdiii''t(iu' gegikwedjig ; obey the preaching (persons.)
Nctd-bimossedjig nliid aiwnag; I hire well walking per-
sons.
Kin enokilan enami£gijigakin, ki gad-dnimis ningoting ;
thou who workest on Sundays, thou wilt suffer once.
Kiiifiira rnami<ixxiwrg ki kitinidgi^im ; you who are not
Christians, are miserable.
\Valdhixaiff, tg )iin k It i mdgrn inui g ; I pity those who do
not see, (the blind.)
IMPKKFKCT TKNSK. — Ml igiw (niixhinalicg cnarn iajtani g ;
here are the Indians that were Christians.
Kin. enokissitcambcm pitchinago <i/>i I>a-ij<iidn <>?na, n<>n-
gnm inigok (inoliin ; thou who didst not work yesterday
whiMi I came here, work to-<lay with all thy force.
Nin mikirt'nitii.'i ekitnpnn iw : I remember the
who said so.
127
PERFECT TENSE. — 3ft aw oshkinawe ga-minikwed, ga-ata*
ged gaie ; this is the young man that drank and played.
Awenenag ga-bidadjimodjig iw ? who are those that
have brought that news ?
Kijawendagosim kinawa wika ga-akosissiweg ; you are
happy who never have been sick.
Mi sa igiw ga-mashkossikessigog ; these are the persona
who did not make hay.
PLUPERFECT TKNSE. — Kinawa mnjag ga-nimiiegnban, keg<>
minawa nimike.gon ; you who always had been dancing
before, don't dance any more.
Nin minwendam gi-madjawad ga-nita-gimodipanig ; I
am glad those are gone away who always had been stealing.
Gi-madja gaie ic'in wika ga-debicesftigoban ; and he who
never had told the truth, is likewise gone.
Mikwenimishin nin ga-ikitoiamban iw ; remember me
who had told it.
FUTURE TENSE. — 3fi aw gwai.dk ge-dibadj imod ; this i«
the one that will tell exactly.
3f/ na igiw gc-gopidjig ? Are these the person? that
will go into the inland I
Kawin aking aiassiwag igiw wika ge-nibossigog ; those
that never shall die, are not on earth.
Awenen aw wika ge-pindigessig ogimawiwining gijigQttg?
Who shall never enter into the kingdom of heaven ?
SECOND FUTURE TENSE. — Ge-gi-mino-ijiwebisid aking.
ta-jawendagosi ajida-bimadisiwining ; he who shall have
behaved well ori earth, will be happy in the other life.
Aw gc-gi-ishpenindisossig aking, ta-apitchi-apitendagosi
gijigong ; he who shall not have exalted himself on earth,
shall be glorious in heaven.
THE CHANGE.
It is time now to speak of that famous Change of the first
in verbs, which will occupy us in all our Conjugations,
and which embarrasses much the beginning learner of this
language. I have already mentioned it in the preceding
chapter, page 82. But here I will give you a full expla-
nation of it. We will call this grammatical operation with
une word, the Change.
j) Mr reader, I know you will riot be able to understand
well this instruction on the Changcy tit first, before the
study of this whole chapter. But I must give this instruc-
tion here ; this is its due place. When you return to it,
after the perusal of this Grammar, a second and a third
time, you will understand it better.
In many instances the //V.v/ vnurl in verbs is changed i;
another, or in two or three others. The following tabl«
will show you, how this change is effected.
129
G
» 15
s s 1
.2
b£-
s
"S „
CO "O
— e
2-1
bfi
.S
cu
0^ ?*, ,—i
§~I
•HI
^ «
I!
O co
*J 0>
r« -JC
go
£
CO
CO
2
«* -S > ^
11 1°
•- -^
8 "<
3-
J-i rn »—i QJ
o « «3 ^
0,^3 ,0 %
>^ £ Q £
&) --* 2
rPQ
*a ~3
^r-r: ^ «
S ^ h§ «" rl '
. • r^r ^s ^
Jllll'
g X
« 2
S^!
•^ ? «
J2 cd ^S
O O
rr-; ^3
S X!
O
ss'Jis
•3 * $
-2-al
O .g
<i> v-2 ^-^O>
43 5 •-
.1|1I
X) * ***
<S) Xrf _T* ,r*
-S V
•Z* co
^ <D t«2
130
REMARK 1. Some verbs beginning with a d, make the
Change by prefixing the syllable en ; as :
Nin da, I dwell, I stop ; cnddiiin, where 1 stop or dwell;
end ad f where he stops, or who stops, dwells, etc.
Nin dams, I am in a certain place ; r.ntldnisid oma, he who
is or lives here ; mi ima cndanhiidn, I am there, etc.
Nin danaki, I reside, or am native of a certain place ; Mo-
ningtitanekening endanakidjig, the natives or the perma-
nent inhabitants of Lapointe.
Nin dodam, I do; mi endodamdn, I do so; mi endodaman,
thou dost so ; mi endodang, he does so.
Nin dapine, I die in a certain place; nibikang (iidapinfd-
jigt those that die in the water ; nopiming endajrined, he
that dies in the woods.
Nin danakamigis, I play somewhere ; ablnodjiiag cndana-
kamigisidjig, playing children; cndanakamigisiidinn,
where I am playing.
Nin danakis, I burn somewhere; anamakamlg endanakis-
odjig, those that burn in hell-fire.
Nin dan, I have property ; endanidjig ktnrin bakadessiwag,
those that are rich don't starve; kinaica cndaniirg, you
who are rich.
Nin danwewidam, I talk ; mqjag cndanwcwidangig, those
that talk always; endanwewidaman, thou who talkest.
Nin dqjikan, I am occupied in making something, or occu-^
pied with something; wegonen cnddjikaman ? What art
thou making?
Kind reader, I can .give you no rule at all, by which you
could know the verbs beginning with a d, that make the
Change in the above manner. There are many, beginning
likewise with a d, that make the Change regularly, accord-
ing to the above table ; as :
Nin dagwishin, I arrive ; degwishing, he that arrives ;
dassing degwishindnin otna ki toabamin, every time I ar-
rive here I see thee.
131
Nin dibddjim, I tell ; debddjimodjig, those that tell ; kawin
nin debwetawassi aw anutch gcgo debadjimod ; I don't
believe him who tells so many different things.
Nin dibakoniwe, I judge; debakoniwed, a judge; clausing
dcbakoniweian, inmlkwcnim Dcbcndjigcd, as often as thou
judgest, remember the Lord.
Nin dajinge, I calumniate ; dejingedjig, those that calum-
niate, calumniators ; dijlngcian, thou who calumriiatest.
Nin dibenima, I am his, (her, its,) master, or proprietor :
debenimad iniw oshkinawen, the master of this young
man. Debenimag, whose master I am.
Nin dibaaki, I am surveying lands ; dSbaakidjig, survey-
ors ; dibaakiidnin nopiin'n^ nin babamosse, when I am
surveying, I walk through the woods ; debaakiieg> ye sur-
veyors.
Nin dibaige, I measure, I pay; gwaiak debaigedjig, those
whose measure is just; dtbaigeidnin, when I am measur-
ing, or paying.
Nin debiveiendam, I believe ; daiebiuciendang, who believes,
a believer ; Id jawcndagos, daicbweicndaman, thou art
happy, believer ; daiebweiendangin, when he believes.
Nin debissin, I ate enough ; dalebissinid, a person that has
eaten enough ; daiSbisslnianin migwetch inenim Debend-
jiged, when thou hast eaten sufficienty, thank the Lord.
Nin debwe, I tell the truth ; kaginig daiebwcd, who always
speaks the truth ; daiebivcssig jingendagosi, who does not
tell the truth is hated ; daitbweiangon, when we are tell-
ing the truth.
As there is no rule which could point out the verbs begin-
ning with a rf, that belong to the first class, or to this second
class, you will have to learn them by usage, and by the
Dictionary.
Remark 2. In the perfect, pluperfect and future tenses
the Change is not made in the verb itself, but in the parti-
cles or signs that precede the verb. These particles or pre-
fixes are: gi-, ga-,gad-. Gi-, is changed into ga^_ ga~
into ge-'j gad- intoged-. F. i.
132
Gi-gigita, he has spoken ; mi air ga-gigitod, tliis is the
one that has spoken.
Girtigaandaso, he h;is been baptized ; ga-sigaandasodjigt
those that have been baptixed.
JYw gadodam,! will do; wc«<mcn ge-dodamdn ? what shall
I do?
Ki ga-nondam, thou wilt hear ; ki kikendan na gc-nonda-
manl dost thou know what thou shalt hear ?
Nin gal-anikatK taagc, I will interpret; awcnen gcd-anikan-
otaioad? whom wilt thou interpret?
Nin gad-ija, I will go ; anindi gcd-ijaian ? where wih
thou go?
Remark 3. There are two other particles or signs, bi-,
nnd «j /-, which use to precede verbs ; and the Change i?
made in these signs ; hi-, which indicates approaching or
coming, is changed into ba- ; and id-> which ordinarily de-
notes intention, will, or wish, is changed into tea-. F. i.
Nin bi-ija, I come here ; ba-ijaidmn, when I come here :
flatting bfi-ij(tir<ron ki bidonnwa grgo, every time you
come here, you bring something ; ba-ijadjig, those that
come here.
Nin bi-gagwtdjima, I come here to ask him a question ;
ba-gagwedjinlag, he to whom I come to ask him a ques-
tion ; ba-gagwt-djimikig, those who come to ask thee a
question.
Nin wi-madja, I intend to go away ; mi igin- wa-madjadjig,
those are the persons that want to depart ; ira-marljaba-
nig, those that intended to go; anrnrn \oa~madjad ? who
wants to go ?
Nin wi'kikt'jidan, I want or wish to know ; wa-kikendang
frfigwrf/iM, lie who wants to know, asks; ica-kikcnf/ama-
nin gcgo, when 1 wish to know something.
Iti-f.-ifirk \. When tiro of these signs precede the verb,
the Change is made in the first, one. F. i.
\in gi-bi-bimisJikdj 1 came here (I have come here) in a
; ga-bi-bimit/ikfirf, he who came here in a canoe:
133
ga-bi-bimishkadjig, those who came here in a canoe,
boat, etc.
Nin gi-bi-bimosse, I came here (I am come here) on foot :
ga-bi-bimossedjig, those that came here on foot ; nin ga-
bi-bimosseian, I who came here on foot.
Nin ga-wi-ija, I will go ; awenen ge-ici-ijad ? who will go ?
ge~wi-ijadjig, those that will go.
Nin ga-wi-dibadjimotaway I will tell him; mi aw ge-ioi-
dibadjimotawdd, this one will tell him ; nin ge-wi-diba-
djimotawag, I who will tell him.
Remark 5. Verbs that are preceded by certain particles
or prefixes, by prepositions, adverbs, or adjectives, make
the Change in the first vowel of these words. When more
than one of such words precede the verb, and relate imme-
diately to it, the Change is made in the first vowel of the
first of them; and in writing we attach them with hyphens
to the verb, beginning from the Change. F. i.
Gego nind ondji ikit iw, I say that for some reason ; wego-
nen wendji-ikitoian iw ? why dost thou say that ?
Win mino bimadis, I live well ; m$no-bimadisid, who lives
well.
Kitchi mino ijiwebisi aw mini, he is a very good man ; a/r
ketchi-mino-ijiwcbisid inini, that very good man.
Nind apitchi mino aia, I am very well ; aiapitchi-mino-
aiadjig, those that are very well.
Apitchi kitcJii akosi, he is extremely sick ; aidpitchi-kitchi*
akosid, a person extremely sick.
Progressive scale of Change.
Aid, he is ;
eiad, he that is ;
meno-aiad, he that is well ;
ketchi-mino-aiad, he that is very well ;
aidpitchi-kitchi-mino-aiad, he that is perfectly well ;
wa-apitchi-kitchi-mino-aiad, he that wishes to be perfectly
well ;
ge-wi-apitchi-kitchi-mino-aiad, he that intends to be per-
fectly well.
9
134
Remark 6. In regard to the orthography of the above-
mentioned signs, viz :
gi-i ga-, - • denoting the perfect or pluperfect
tenses,
ga-, gad-; ta-; ge-, ged-; denoting the future tense,
bi-; ba-; ,, coming, approaching,
wi-; wa~; ,, intention, will,
da-, ••••„ condition,
etc. etc.
In regard, I say, to the orthography of these signs of
prefixes, I wish to observe that I think it very proper and
grammatical, to attach them with hyphens to their respec-
tive verbs, to which they are really incorporated, in the
Change as well as without it. You will perhaps say that
in the English Conjugations we also have signs, to express
different significations and positions of the verb ; as : have,
shall, will, should, would, etc. ; but we don't join them, in
writing, to their verbs with hyphens. — Yes, that is true ;
but the analogy is not quite adequate. These English
signs in Conjugations are at the same time words by them-
selves ; whereas our Otchipwe signs are not words by
themselves, are never employed alone, but only used with
verbs to give them the above-mentioned significations.
They must be considered as portions or parts of their verbs.
This is the reason why some write them in our word with
the verb; which I also did formerly myself. Hut consider-
ing the thing grammatically, I think it is better to let the
verb appear by itself, and to join its sign by a hyphen
to it.
For an illustration of the inadequateness of the above
analogy, consider the following examples ;
fn English ycu say : " I will «r<> :" and if asked : Will you
go? your answer is: " Yes, 1 will." Here you use only
the sign will.
In Otchipwe you say : " Nin gad-ija ;" and if asked ;
Ki gad-ija na? your answer cannot be, " E, nin gad.''
135
You cannot use only the sign, gad; you must put the verb
with it and say : " E, nin gad-ija"
In English again you say : " I have written five letters
yesterday." And then affirming you will say : " Certainly.
I have."
In Otchipwe you say : " Nanan masinaiganan nin gi-ojibi-
anan pitchinago" And then affirming you cannot say :
" Geget nin gi" As soon as you pronounce gi, you must
also express the verb, and say : Nin gi-ojibianan.
You see by these illustrations, that these Otchipwe signs
are inseparably connected with their respective verbs : and
that it is reasonable to join them to the verbs also in writ-
ing ; but in a manner as not to disfigure the verb, and still
to appear joined to it ; which is effected by the use of hy-
phens.
And in grammatical consequence of this method of join-
ing the signs to their verbs by hyphens, all the words be-
tween the sign and its verb, must come under the same
rule. F. i. Nin bimadis, I live; nin ga-bimadis ; nin ga-
mino-bimadis ; nin ga-kitchi-mino-bimadis ; nin gad-apitchi-
kitchi-mino-bimadis. — All these words between the sign
and the verb, are in the immediate connection with the
verb like one word with it ; and throughout all the move-
ments and changes of the verb, they will remain in the
same position to it, like a constellation. F. i.
Nin gi-apitcln-kitchi-mino-bimadis ;
lei gi-apitchi-kitchi-mino-bimadis ;
gi-apitchi-kitchi-mino-birrtadisi-;
etc.
Ta-apitchi-kitclii-mino-bimadisi ;
ta-apitclii-kitcki-mino-bimadisiwag ;
etc.
Kin ga-apitclii'kitchi-mino-bimadisiian ;
ga-apilchi-kitchi-mino-bimadisid.
But where there is no such sign with a hyphen in the
beginning, the adverbs or adjectives that precede the verb.
136
not be attached to it by hyphens; there is no gram-
matical reason for it ; as : Nin mino himadis ; nin kitchi
> bimadis ; nind apitrhi kitchi mino bimndis.
We have now seen how the Change is effected ; let us
here consider, when it is used.
RULE 1. It is used in all the participles of all the tenses,
as you will see in all these Conjugations. F. i. Ekitod,
who says ; ga-inendang, who thought ; nin ge-dagwishi-
nan, I who shall arrive; ntn waidbamag, I who see him,
etc.
RULE 2. It is employed in sentences which express period-
teal actions, events, or states of being. These sentences
or expressions contain in English the words : each, crcrii
one, every time, when, whenever, as often as . . . F. i.
Ananriegijigad, it is Sunday, (VIII. Conjugation.) Dossing
cnamiegijigakin, every Sunday, (as often as it is Sunday.)
Enamicgijigakin, on Sundays.
Nin ganona, I speak to him; gegonagin nin nnkwrtug.
when I speak to him, he answers me; genonindwcurin,
when they are spoken to.
Nind ab, I am ; ebiianin oma, bi-nasikctvriskikan, when I
am here, come to me; during cbi<ljin rocdi, minikwe,
every time he is there, he drinks.
RULE 3. The Change is likewise employed in sentence*
which express actions or events as just past, and con-
tain in EnglishHhe words, w/tr.n, r/.s* soon as, etc. F. i.
-madjad koss, gi-ikitowag iw ; when thy father had gone
away, (or, after he went away,) they said that.
Ga-ishkwa-naffamowad anamie^nagamen, gi-mndjawag ;
when they liad sung a hymn, they went . . .
Oa-sagaang nhhiinc, pnhi<rr. nin gi-mikan masinaigan ; as
goon as my brother had gone out, I found the book.
Panima ga-ishkwataieg kinawa, gi-madjita ; when you
had done, he began.
137
RULE 4. The Change is employed after the interrogative
adverbs aninl how? what? and aniniwapi ? when?
And after the interrogative pronouns awenen 1 awenenag ?
who? and wegonen? what? Likewise after the adverb
api, or mi apt, when, at that time, then. F. i.
Anin eji-bimadisiian ? how dost thou do? (how dost them
live ?)
Anin ekitod kossl what says thy father?
Anin ejinikadeg ow ? what they call this ?
Aniniwapi ga-nibopan? when has he died?
Awenen ga-bi-pindigcd ? who came in ?
Wegonen gcd-ikitoian? what wilt thou say?
Api gc-niboiang, when we shall die-
After the interrogative adverb anindi ? where ?, the
Change is made sometimes ; but ordinarily it is not used.
F, i. Anindi ijaian 1 where art thou going? Anindi ateg?
where is it ? Anindi aiad Jesus nongom 1 where is now
Jesus? The Change is used after anindi?, when iio is ex-
pressed or Understood F. i. Anindi ga-danisid Jesus bira
mashi gagikwed ? where lived Jesus, before he began to
preach? Iw is understood : Anindi iw ga-danisid? (where
is that place where he lived?)
RULE 5. The Change is used in sentences expressing
comparison, and containing in English the conjunction
as. F. L
Enendaman nin gad-ijitchige, I will act as thou wilt.
En&ndaman apegish ijiwebak, be it as thou wilt, (thy will
be done.)
Wewetii ijiwebisin. swanganamiadjig ejiwebisiwad, live up-
right, as good Christians live.
Ekitoian mi ge-diidn, be it done to me as thou sayest.
RULE 6. The Change is used in sentences that express
quality, and contain the adverbs minik, kakina, misi,a\\,
all that, whatever ; wegotogwen, whatsoever. F. i.
Minik ekitod Kije-Manito, dfbivewinagadini, all that God
says is true.
138
\ina minik eji-gagikimigoian, rji-wabandaman gaie ki
inftsinnigan, ktikina irnccni frninnrc-mlo.ni whatever thou
art taught in sermons, and all that thou readest in thy
book, keep all well.
Wegotogwtn gf-dodamogwen^ged-ikitogwcn gate; whatsoev-
er he shall do and say.
Wegotogwen ge-nandotamawegwen Weossimind nind i/ini-
kasowining, ki g a- turn .ig oiccr. whatsoever ye shall ask the
Father in my name, he. will give it to you.
RULE 7. The Change is employed in some tenses of the
subjunctive mood in the Dubitative Conjugations ; as
you will see there. F. i. Ekitowdnen, if I say perhaps.
Ekitogwcn, if he perhaps says. . .
Kishpin gwaiak ga-ana/iiiassiwdjien, if I have perhaps not
well prayed.
RULE 8. Ordinarily, (not always,) the Change is employed
after mi. F. i.
Mi enendamdn, mi ekitoidn ; so I think, so I say.
Mi ejiwebak oma aking, so it is here on earth.
Mi sa ga-ikitod, mi dash ga-iji-madjad : so he said, and
went away.
Mi no. eji-kikinoamagoian 1 art thou taught so f
Mi gi-ishkwatang , madjada ; all is over, let us go.
Mi gi-debissiniidn ; migwetch gi-ashamiian ', I have eaten
enough ; I thank thee that thou gavest me to eat.
Mi na madjaian ? art thou going ?
(In the three last examples there is no Change after mi.)
RULE 9-. The Change is always employed in sentences
which contain in English a relative pronoun. (Kxam-
ples you will find on page KJ.)
This RULE ^, is to be considered as coincident with RULE
1, because rc/atirc ///-otioujis in English sentences are al-
ways expressed in Otchipvve by -participles.
Let us now consider the ve^rb of our paradigm of the 1.
Conjugation, in the cases of the Change.
139
The participles are displayed in the paradigm.
In the sentences expressing periodical actions, events, or
tates of being, the verbs of the I. Conj. are formed thus :
AFFIRMATIVE FORM.
PRESENT TENSE.
JEkitoiamn, when I say, or, whenever I say,
ekitodfin,
ekitongin, (quand on dit,)
,» henwesay
, j
NEGATIVE FORM.
PRESENT TENSE.
j&kitossiw&nin, when I dont say,
c&zfossiwanin,
ekitossigon,
ekitossing'm, (grand on ne dit pas,)
, ) fa d ,
Jt
Remark. In the sentences expressing periodical actions,
events or states, not only the Change is made, but also one
of the syllables in, nin, or on, is added to the verb, as you
see here above, and in the examples of Rule 2., page 136.
This is done, when the adverb classing, (which signifies,
whenever, as often as, every time,) is expressed or under-
140
stood. At the third persons, that end in d, the letter j is
inserted between d and the syllable in, as you see above.
(See an analogy of it in Remark, p. 26.)
Please remember well this Remark. It is applicable
to almost all our Conjugations.
In the perfect and future tenses the terminotions remain
the same, and the Change is made in the signs, or prefixes,
gt-, and ga-, or gad-; the former being changed into ga-,
the latter into ge-, or ged-; as :
Ga-ikitoiamn, when (or whenever) I have said.;
ga-ikitod]\n, when he has said ;
ga-ikitoiegon, etc. . .
ged-ikitri-dimn, whenever I shall say,
ged-ikitoiznm,
ged-ikito\vad]in, etc. . .
Ga-ikitossiwsimn, when I have not said;
ga-ikitossigon, when he has not said ;
ga-ikitoss\\vcgon, etc. . .
ged-ikitossiwamn, whenever I shall not say,
ged-ikitcssiwan'm,
ged-ikitoss\gwau'm, etc. . .
In the other oases of the above Rules, p. 137, and
138, the Change is made in the same way as here stated :
only the end-syllables, in, jin, nin, on, are taken off; as :
Ekitoian ; ekitossiwan. Ga-ikitaian ; ga-ikitostiwan ; grd-
ikitoian ; ged-ikitossiwan. Examine the examples of the
said Rules.
Remark 1. Respecting the conjunction ///, (in the
Change, ?ji-,) which you see often to precede verbs, it must
be remarked, that it is never employed alone, but always
in connection with a verb, which it precedes immediately ;
and the Change in the verbs preceded by iji, is made in
this conjunction, which i.s then attached to the verb with a
hyphen, in the cases of of the Change, not otherwise ; ac-
cording to the rules stated above. The signification of this
conjunction is : as, as-so, as-as . . F. i.
141
tiji-sagiidisoian, ki da-sagiag kidf anishindbeg ; as thou
lovest thyself, thou oughtst to love thy neighbor.
Eji-kikendamdn kid iji wlndamon ; as I know it myself, so
1 tell it to thee.
Ga-iji-jawenimiian gi-akosiidn, kid iji jawenimin akosiian',
as thou hadst pity on me when I was sick, so I have pity
on thee while thou art sick.
But sometimes the conjunction iji seems to accompany
the verb superfluously, because it can be omitted without
the least change of the meaning of the sentence. F. i.
Atchina oma gi-aia, mi dash ga-iji-madjad ; he was here a
short time and went away ; or, mi dash gi-madjad.
Mi dash ga-iji-kitchi-nishkadisid ; and he flew in a passion;
or, mi dash gi-kitchi-nishkadisid.
Kid iji pagossenimin, Debenimiian, tchi jawe.nimiian ;
Lord, I pray thee, to have mercy on me ; or, ki pagosse-
nimin. . .
Ki ivindamon ga-iji-wab an daman, or ga-wabandamdn ki
ivindamon. Both sentences equally mean : I tell thee what
I have seen.
Remark 2. If you examine the paradigm of this I. Con-
jugation, and the examples till now related, you will see
how all is formed and derived from the third person sing,
pres. indicative. If you know this third person, you have
only to add to it the terminations, and make the Change
according to the above rules, and you will find no verb be-
longing to this Conjugation, which you would not be able
to conjugate correctly. The terminations are fully dis-
played in the above paradigm or pattern of this Conjugation ;
but the third person and the Change (participle) must be
learned by practice and the Dictionary. This Remark
again is applicable to all our Conjugations.
Remark on Remarks. I request you, dear reader, to
mind well, perfectly well, all these Remarks on the I. Conj.,
because they are applicable also to other Conjugations, but
they cannot be repeated at every subsequent Conjugation,
142
I. DUBITATIVE CONJUGATION.
AFFIRMATIVE FORM.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE.
Nind ikitomidog, perhaps I say ;
kid ikitomidog, perhaps thou sayest ;
i/iitowidog,*
ikitomidog, (on dit peut-6tre,)
nind //vV"ininadog,
kid iki/(>m\\nddg,
•//.•//owidogenag,*
Form after this tense, the perfect and the future iaen.t,
PLUPERFECT TENSE.
Gonima gi-ikito\c&mba.nj I had perhaps saidj
" gi-ikitowiimba.n,.
11 gi-ikitogoban,
gi-ikitowangob&n,
gi-ikitowego\r<\n,
gi-ikitogwaban,
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOI>.
PRESENT TENSE.
X
Ekitow£ncn, if I say perhaps,
rk/t'>\\;\\ir\\,
elcitogwen,
ckif nvanu'cn,
"These two persons arc oftfin expressed by adding only dog,or,dogtn-
ff, to the imitati vo vowel ; an , «6idog, afridogcnag ; i/adog, yadogenag j
i*.<rj7ii(lop;, i/'i.s.siViidotjcnnfT, etc.
t To form the imperfect tense, (which is not much used,) you have
143
I. DUBITATIVE CONJUGATION.
NEGATIVE FORM.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE.
Kawin nind ikitossimidog, perhaps I don't say,
" kid ikitossimidog,
'*• ^7 'ssiwid g,
nind ikitt
kid lA'v'tfossimwadog,
?A'i£ossiwidogenng,
ses ; as: Ningi-ikitomidog, . .. .. Nin gad-ikitomidog . ..
PLUPERFECT TENSE.
Kawin g/-iA'/tassiwamban, I had perhaps not said,
gi-ikitossigobzn,
gz'-ifo'fossiwangiban,
gi-ikitossigwabziii,
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE.
JS&ifossiwanen, whether I say not,
ckit Jssigwen,
cA:?^ossiwangen,
eAr^ossiwangen,
only to take off the prefix gi- ; as : ttitowamban, ikitogoban,
And so also in some other Conjugations
t See Remark 3, page 4o.
144
ekitowegwen,
After this tense form the perfect and the future tenses :
PLUPERFECT TENSE.
J&rtowdmbanen, if I had perhaps said.
z'/r^wambaneh,
i&i/owangibarien, (jiinawind,) )
iA:i/0wangobanen, (kinaaiind,) )
i&zfowegobanen,
|£tf0wagobanen,
PARTICIPLES.
PRESENT TENSE.
Nin ekitow£nen, I who perhaps say,
kin eA-i^vvanen,
win ckitogwen,
-^o perhaps S,v.
kinawa ekitowegweu,
winawa ekitog\ven&gy
After this tense, the perfect and the future tenses arc form-
PL i TENSE.*
•Nin ga-fKlow&mbanen, I who had said perhaps.
/•/*//. ga-iAri^wambanen, thou wlio per. hadst ^aid.
//•///. ga-iA^Vogpbanen,
wewhohad
kinawa g'a-i^i
winawa
' .See second Afofe,page 126. C-WtneJfcifouj&Tn&anen; W
145
ekitossiwegwen,
ekitossi\va.g\ven,
as: Ga-ikitowanen, ... Ged-ikitowdnen, . . .
PLUPERFECT TENSE.
Kawin ifoYossiwambanen, if I had p. not said,
?!&?£0ssiwangibanen, (ninawind)
i&ttossiwa&gobaneu, (kinawind)
iAr^ossiwagobanen,
PARTICIPLES.
PRESENT TENSE.
Nin eH^ossiwdnen, I who perhaps don't
kin ekitossiw&nen,
win ekitossigwen,
ninawind e^/#c9ssiwanoren, )
7 . . , j .. } we who . . .
kinawind eAri^ossiwangen,
kinawa efo'fossiwegwen,
winawa
ed : as: Nin ga-ikitowdnen, . . Nin ged-ikitowdnai, . . .
PLUPERFECT TENSE.
Nin ga-i&^ossiwambanen, I who had p. not said
kin ga-iAr^ossiwambaneri,
win g#-iA:/£0ssigobanen,
ninawind ga-i/n'Jossiwang
kinawind ga-z'Ar/jfossiwangobanen,
kinawa ga-i&ifassiwegobanen,
winawa ga-iA:^ossigobanenag.
, ) ,
, ) w
146
EXAMPLES ON THE I. DUBITATIVE CONJUGATION.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE. Nin matclti ikitomidog na-ningiw, kawiu
dash kakina nin mikiwiidansin nougom. 1 suppose I
speak often ill, but I don't remember now all.
Nin da-gl-ija cndawad, kawin dash ga-nabatch abistido-
genag. I would have gone to their house (dwelling),
but I think they are not in.
Ki giwanimomidog, kawin ki dcbwessimidog. Thou idl-
est a lie, I think, thou dost perhaps not tell the truth.
Ki bakademwadog, g'nnrcnj gi-bimosscicg. You must
be hungry, because you have walked long.
PEREFCT TFNSE. Gi-aiii-madjadof/, gi-giirrthtg, kfiicin .<a
ningotrhi nin irabamassi. He is probably gone away
he is gone home, I suppose, I don't see him anywhere.
J^baomagi-bimossedogenagyikitom ; kairin nin gi-wabam-
titixi". It is said that this morning they passed by here ; I
did not see them.
Kawin nimishomc ganabntclt mashi gi-J)osis$id<><;. My
uncle has perhaps not yet started, (in a canoe, etc.)
PLUPERFECT TENSE. Ki tuishomissinabanig waicshkal Mort-
icing gi-'ldtKi/.-igiraban, him hi-gos'iimd own. Our
grand-fathrrs (forefathers) had formerly lived in Canada,
before they moved to this place.
GH-nodjimzgoban turn d&gwiskinirtid <>d hiawrmiigamin.
He had recovered (they say) before his relations arrived.
147
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE. Etidogwen keicibi matcJii gijwtwanen. Ki
gi'boniton na matchi gijwewin ? I don't know whether
thou speakest yet bad words. Hast thou abandoned bad
speaking?
Namdndj ba-oiulji-ij assign en ; gonima akosi, (or akosi-
dog.) I don't know why he does not come ; he is per-
haps sick,
Kawin nin kikenimassig wendji-nishkadisiwagwen. I
don't know why they may be angry.
Namdndj wendji- anokissiwagicen. I don't know why
they don't work.
PERFECT TENSE. Endogwen ga-ijitchigegwen ga-iji-aian-
gwamimagiban. I doubt whether he has performed (or
not,) what I had recommended him.
Nissaie tibikong kawin o gi-atcansin wassakwancndji-
gan; mi sa kabe-tibik ga-cjibiigegwen. My brother IK.S
not put out the candle last night ; I suppose he has been
writing all night.
Endogwcn ga-minikwessiwegwen ishkotewabo, tashkigi-
bodjiganing gi-ijaieg. I am not certain whether indeed
you have not drunk any ardent liquor, when you went to
the saw-mill.
PULUPERFECT TENSE. KisJipin ikitowagobanen iw, da-gi-
dibadjimowag gi-gagwcdjimindwa. If they (perhaps)
had said that, they would have told it when they were
asked.
Ojibiigegobanen, kawin da-gi-agonwctansi. Had he (1
suppose) written, he would not have denied it.
Nissaie nibogobancn,gwaiak nin da-gi-kikendan pitchina-
go. If my brother were dead, (I suppose,) I would surely
have known it yesterday.
148
FUTURE TENSE. Kakina nap finish/jig ininhrag gi-mawan-
djHdiwag ; nanuindj ged-inakonigevxtgwen. All the prin-
cipal men have assembled ; I don't know what laws (re-
gulations) they will make.
Gcd-ikit'ru'ancn mi gr-durhnnnn ; minik dath gc-ginaam-
dgewane.n, kawln nin wi-ijitchigessi. Whatever thou
shalt say (command), I will do it ; but whatever thou
shalt forbid, I will not do it.
Aircgwen ged-ijitchtgegwcn cji-minu'cndang Debcnlmin-
ang, ta-jawendagosi. Whosoever shall do what pleases
the Lord, shall be happy.
Ged-ako-bimadisiwangcn ki gad-anamiamlr.. — Kumn ki
kikcndarishnin api ge-nibowangcn. As long as we live we
will be Christians. — We don't know when we shall die.
PARTICIPLES.
PRESENT TENSE. Kin ncttf-dajingewanen ki g(id-aiiiini<
dibakonigc-gijigak, kishpin gcgct ijiwebisiia.H. Thou
who art (as they say) in the habit of backbiting, thou
wilt suffer on the day of judgment, if thou really art so.
Igiw nij oshkinigikweg irika gawanimossigioenag, gfgi-t
jawcndagosiwag. These two young women, who :
tell a lie, (as it is said,) are indeed happy.
Aw oshkinnwe. vika wrni.kirrsai«in-ji hhkotnrabo, mino
dodaso. rl'his young man, who never drinks any ardent
liquor, (as they say,) does good to himself.
PERFECT TENSE. Airrgwrn ga-bi-dibadjimogwen matchi
dajindiwin. — l\r«i> debwetangego*. I don't know who
has told here the calumny. Do not believe it.
Kawin nin gi-wdbamassig if/nr ga-bosigwen&g pitchinago.
I have not seen those that have gone away yesterday (in
a canoe, boat, etc.) (as I understood.)
149
Kin wika ga-atagessiwanen, kego gaie nongom wlka
wissokawaken netd-atagedjig. Thou who never hast
gamed, (as they say,) do also now never frequent habitual
gamblers.
PLUPERFECT TENSE. Anishinabeg waieshkat ga-bimadisi-
gobanenag aking, gi-matchi-ijiwebisigwaban. People
who had lived on earth in the beginning, were wicked.
Mi na aw inini ga-gigitogobanen ? — Endogwen. Is that
the man that spoke (that had spoken) 7 — I don't know,
(or, may be.)
FUTURE TENSE, Awenen aw ged-ijitchigegwen mojag, get-
inakonigeiang nongom gijigak? Who is likely to do
always what we have ordered to-day.
Nin, wa'iba ge-nilowanen, kawin nin babamendansm do-
niwin aking. I, who perhaps shall soon die, don't care
for the riches of this world,
Remark in regard to the second third person*
In the simple third person singular, present, indicative,
affirmative form, you say : Ikito, he says. But in the se-
cond third person to have to say : Ikitowan, etc., according
to the following Examples. The simple third person, to
which the second is relating, is often understood only, not
expressed, as you will see here below.
* See page 72.
10
150
AFFIRMATIVE FORM.
INDICATIVE MOOD-
PRESENT, PERFECT, AND FUTURE TENSES.
Ossan ikitowan, his father says.
Onigiigon ikitowan, his parents say.
Ogin gi-nibowan, his mother is dead.
Nij oshimeian gi-nibowan, two of his younger brother?
(sisters) are dead.
Ogwissan ta-madjawan, his son will go away.
Nisswi ogwissan ta-madjavfan, three of his sons will £o
away.
IMPERFECT AND PLUPERFECT TENSES.
Ossan ikitoban'm, his father said.
Onigiigon ikitobanin, his parents said.
Osan gi-ikitobai\'m, his father had said.
Onigiigon gi-ikitobamn, his parents had said,
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
PRESENT, PERFECT, AND FUTURE TENSES.
Kiskpin ossan ikitonid, if his father say.
Kishpin onigiigon ikitomd, if his parents say.
Kashkendam nitdwiss gi-nibomd ossan, my cousin is afflicted
because his father is dead.
Kashkendamog inning wanissag gi-nibomd ossiwan, my
nephews are afflicted because their father is dead.
Kashkendamog nishimissag gi-nibomd onigiigowan, my
nieces are afflicted because their parents are dead.
151
NEGATIVE FORM,
INDICATIVE MOOD.
PRESENT, PERFECT AND FUTURE TENSES.
Kawin ossan ikitossiwan, his father does not say.
,, onigiigon ikitossiwan, his parents don't say.
„ ogin gi-?iibossiwa.n, his mother is not dead.
,, nij oshimeian gi-nibossiwan, two of his younger
brothers (sisters) are not dead.
„ ogwissan ta-madjassi\va.n. his son will not go away.
„ nisswi ogibissan ta-madjassiwan, three of his sons
will not go away^
IMPERFECT AND PLUPERFECT TENSES.
Kawin ossan i&iZossibanin, his father did not say.
,, onigiigon i&z/ossibanin, his parents did not say.
,, ossan gi-ikitossiban'm, his father had not said.
ji onigiigon gi-ikitossibanin, his parents had not said
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
PRESENT, PERFECT^ AND FUTURE TENSES.
Kishpin ossan ikitoss'mlg, if his father does not say.
,, dnigiigon ikitossimg, if his parents do not say.
Minwendam nitdwiss gi-niboss'inig ossan, my cousin is glad
that his father has not died.
Minwendamog niningwanissag gi-nibossimg ossiwan, my
nephews are glad that their father has not died.
Minwendamog nishimissag gi-niboss'urig onigiigowdn, my
nieces are glad because their parents have not died;
152
Aniniwapi ge^nadjanid ossaieian ? When will his brother
start ?
Nin kikendan gcd-ijitchigcmd oshimeian, I know what his
brother will do.
PLUPERFECT TENSE.
Ossan ningot z&ztonipan, bakan da-gi-ijiwebad ; had hi*
father said anything, it would have been otherwise.
Ogwissan gwaiak ijiwebisinipan, kawin da-gi-anitnisissi-
wan ; had his son behaved right, he would not have been
punished.
PARTICIPLES.
PRESENT TENSE.
Debeniminang o sagian cnajnian'id'jin, the Lord loves the
Christians, (or, a Christian.)
Aw anisJiinabe weweni o pisindawan gegikwen\d)in, this
Indian listens attentively to the preacher, (or, preachers.)
IMPERFECT TENSE.
M'ekatewikwanaie o ^-ganonan anishindben enamiampan'm,
the Missionary spoke to an Indian that was a Christian,
(or, to Indians that were Christians, that prayed.)
Ossaieian iniw ekitonipan'm, it was his brother who said it.
After these two tenses you may
Wegonen iw ged-ijitchigessimg ossaieian ? What is that
which his brother shall not do ?
IVegonen ged-ikitossinig oshimeian ? What will his bro-
ther not say ?
PLUPERFECT TENSE.
Ossan ningot zfoVossinigoban, kaivin ningot da-gi-ijiicel--
assinon, had his father not said anything, nothing would
have happened.
Ogwissan gwaiak {/twe&mssinigoban, da-gi-animisi\van,
had his son not behaved right, he would have been
punished.
PARTICIPLES.
PRESENT,
Kawin Debeniminang o sagiassin enamiassinigon, the Lord
does not love pagans, (or, a pagan.)
Kawin enamiad o da-wissokawassin gwaiak ejiwebisissim-
gon ; the Christians, (or, a Christian,) ought not to associ-
ate with those that behave not well,
IMPERFECT TENSE.
Mekatewikwanaie nongom o gi-gashkian iniw oshkinawen,
gwaiak e;'i£e/ugessinigobanin, the Missionary (priest) has
now converted that young man who did not act well.
Mi na ossaieian iniw gwaiak efo'fossinigobanin ? Is he that
did not say right, his brother ?
form the others of these participles.
154
II. CONJUGATION.
To this Conjugation belong all the intransitive or neuter
verbs ending at the characteristical third person in am.
They likewise end so at the first person singular, present,
indicative. This m, in which all the verbs of this Conju-
gation end, is put among the terminations r as you see in the
paradigms. The reason is, because it does not remain
in all the tenses, but is sometimes changed into n.
Note. In the I. Conjugation, I displayed' the negative
form in full, (on the opposite page.) Tn order to save
joom, I will put, in the su.bseq.uent Conjugations, only the
terminations of the negative form, the body of the rerb re-
maining the same in this form, as in the affirmative. F. i.
Rind inendam, negative, Kawin nind incndansi. Kid
inendam, neg. Kawin kid inendartsi* fnendam,. neg. Ka^
win inendans'}, etc. /
Hjere are some verbs belonging to this Conjugation r
First Person. Third Person.
Nin nanagataz&endam, I meditate ; ndnaga'awendam
Nind anijitam, I give up ; dr.ijitam.
Nin segcndam, I am afraid ; .«:<rendam~
Nin dodam, I do, I act ; dodam.
Nin kashkendam, I am sad ; Rashkendam.
Nin pisindam, I listen ; pisindom.
Nin pagossendam, I ask, I hope ; pagosstntl <uu
Nind initamr I hear something ; initatn.
Nin wassitdwendam ; I am sorrowful ; wasxituwendam*
Nin sagaam, I go out ; ^u^ufnn.
Nin songejidam, I have a firm thought ; sentgendam.
Nind dgonwctam, I disobey, I contra- dgwnwetam.
diet ;.
Nin gijendam, I resolve ," g'ljcndam.
Ninjajibitam, I gainsay * jajibitam.
Nin boncndam, I forget something; boncndnn?
Nin debwetam, I believe ,* dtbwetam.
Njn wissagendam, I suflfer ^ wssagcndafl*
155
AFFIRMATIVE FORM. NEGATIVE FORM. •
INDICATIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE.
Nind inendam, I think* (or, I will) Kawin nsi,
kid inendam, ,, nsi,
inendam, ,, nsi,
inendam, they think, (on „ nsim,
pense) t one thinks,
nind inendamm, ,, nsimin,
kid inendam, „ nsim,
inendamog, ,, nsiwag,
IMPERFECT TENSE.
Nind inendanaban, I thought, Kawin nsinaban,
kid inendanabzn, ,, nsinaban,
inendamoban, ,, nsiban,
nind inendam'mab&n, „ nsiminaban,
kid inendamwab&n, „ nsimwaban,
inendamobanig, „ nsibanig.
PERFECT TENSE.
Nin gi-inendam, I have thought, Kawin nsi,
ki gi-inendam, ,, nsi,
gi-inendam, „ nsi,
gi-inendam, (on a pense) ,, nsim,
nin gi-inendamm, ,, nsimin,
lei gi-inendam, „ nsim,
gi-inendamog, „ nsiwag.
PLUPERFECT TENSE.
Nin gi-inendaua.ba.n,$ I had thought, Kawin nsinaban,
ki gi-inendanaban, ,, nsinaban,
»
* See Remark 4. p. 102. f See Remark p. 92,
t See Note, p- 104.
156
Kawin nsiban,
a in gi-inendaminab&n, ,, nsiminaban,
ki gi-inendamwaban, „ nsimwaban,
gi-nendamob<m\g, . ,, nsibanig,
FUTURE TENSE.
Nin gad-inendam, I will think, Kawin nsi,
ki gad-inendam, „ nsi,
ta-inendavdy „ nsi,
ta-inenddm, „ nsim,
nind gad-inendamin, „ nsimin,
ki gad-inenddm, „ nsim,
ta-inendamog, „ nsiwag.
SECOND FUTURE TENSE.
Ninga.gi'inendam, I shall have thought, Kawin nsi,
Arz ga-gi-inendam, „ nsi,
ta-gi-inendam, „ nsi,
ta-gi-inenddm, „ nsim,
>*m ^a-^t-inenrfamin, ,, nsimin,
&*' ga-gi-inendam , ,, nsim,
ta-gi-inendamog, ,, nsiwag.
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE.
if I think, nsiw&n,
nsiwan,
inendang,
z'wemfaming, that they think,
(qu 'on pense)
Doming, j we nsiw&ng,
iwenaamang, ) nsiwang,
* Sec the Remarks concerning thi0 and the following two tenio,
p. 116.
157
inendamowad,
PERFECT TENSE.
Gi-inendamsin, because I have
thought,
gi-inendaman,
gi-inendang,
gi-inendaming,
gi-mendam&ng, ) b
gi-incndamang, j
gi-inendameg,
gi-inendaino\vad}
nsiweg,
nsigwa,
nsiwan,
nsiwan,
nsig,
nsing,
nsiwang,
nsivvang,
nsiweg,
nsigwa.
PLUPERFECT TE^SE.
Inendam&mban, ifl had thought, nsiwamban,
nsiwamban,
nsigoban,
nsingiban,
nsiwangiban,
nsiwangoban,
nsiwegoban,
nsigwaban.
inendamamban,
inendangiba.il,
inendamingiban,
mew^amangiban, ) ...
mendamangoban, } l
inendamegoban,
inendamowapan,
FUTURE TENSE.
Ged-inendamsin, what I shall think, nsiwan,
ged-inendaman, nsiwan,
ged-inendang, nsig>
ged-inendaming, nsing,
ged-inendama.ng, nsiwang,
Etc. as above in the present tense, prefixing ged-f
SECOND FUTURE TENSE
Gre^-g i-inendama.il, what I shall have nsiwan,
thought,
ge-gi-inendaman, nsiwan,
Etc. as in the present tense, always prefixing
158
CONDITIONAL MOOD.
t
PRESENT TENSE.
Nin da-inendam, I would think (or, I Kawin nsi,
ought to think,)
ki da-inendam, ,, nsi,
da-inendam, ' ,, nsi,
da-inendam, they would think ,, nsim,
(on penserait,)
nin da-inendamin, ,, nsimin,
ki da-inendam, ,, nsim,
da-incndamog, „ nsiwag.
PERFECT TENSE.
Nin da-gi-inendavf\, I would have Kawin nsi,
thought, or I ought
to have thought.
ki da-gi-inendam,
da-gi-inendam, '
da-gi-inendtim,
nin da-gi-inendamin,
ki da-gi-incndam, '
da-gi-inendamog,
nsi,
nsi,
nsim,
nsimin,
nsim,
nsiwag,
Gc-gi-incndam&n, what I would nsi wan,
have thought,
Etc., as above in the second future tense of the subj, mood,
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
Incndan, ) think, Kego ngen,
inendamokan, j (thou.)
ta-inendam, let him (her, it,) " nsi,
think,
ta-inenddm, let them think, " nsim,
(qu'on pense,)
159
inendanda, let us think, " nsida,
inendamog, think, (you,) " ngegon,
ta-inendamog, let them think, " nsiwag.
PARTICIPLES. *
PRESENT TENSE.
Nin enendam&n, I who think, nsiwan,
kin enendamzn, thou who think- nsiwan,
est,
win enendang, nsig>
enen</aming,what one thinks nsing,
(ce-qu'on pense,)
ni net wind enendamang, ) we that nsiwdng,
kinawind enendam-dng, ) think, nsiwano-.
kinawa enendaveg, nsiweg,
winawa enendangig> nsigog. ,
IMPERFECT TENSE.
Nin encndam£mb?Ln, I who tho't^ nsiwdmban,
kin ewenrfamamban, nsiwamban,
win enendangiban, nsigoban,
effcemfamingiban, nsingiban,
atnawinft cnendam&ngib&n, ) we who nsiwangiban,
kinawind e»c/?c?amangoban, ^ thought nsiwangoban,
kinawd enendamegoban , nsiwegoban,
winawa enendaugiba.n\g. nsigobanig,
PERFECT TENSE,
Nin ga-inendamtiii, I who have nsiwdn,
th ought >
kin ga-incndam&n, nsiwan,
win ga-inendang, nsig,
ga-inendaming, nsing,
ninawind ga-inendam£ng, ) we who have nsiwdng,
jrinawind ga-inendamang, ) thought, usiwang,
* See Remark 5. p. 117,
160
Icinawa ga-incndameg, nsiweg,
icinawa ga-incndangig, nsigog.
PLUPERFECT TENSE.
Nin ga-incndamsimban, I \\ho had nsiwamban,
thought,
kin ga-inendamamban, nsiwamban,
irin ga-inendang\ban, nsigoban,
ga-incndam'mg]ban, nsingiban,
ninatcind ga-inendama.ng\ban, > we who nsiwangiban,
kinawind ga-inendamangoban, ) had th. nsiwangoban,
Icinawa ga-inendamegoban, nsiwegoban,
winawa ga-incndangibamg, nsigoban ig,
FUTURE TENSE.
JV//1 gcd-inendam&n, I who shall nsiwan,
% think,
kin gcd-inendaman, nsiwan,
win ged-inendang, nsig>
ged-inendam'mg, nsing,
ninawind ged-mendam&ng, ) we who shall nsiwang,
kinawind ged-inendamang, j think. nsiwang,
kinawa ged-inendameg, nsiweg,
winawa gcd-inendangig, nsigog.
SECOND FUTURE TENSE.
Nin ge-gi-incndaman , I who shall nsiwan,
have thought,
kin gc-gi-incTbdaman, nsiwan.
Etc., as above in tbejirst future, always prefixing gc-gi-,
to the verb.
Remark. The letter n before the «yllable si* in the neg-
ative form, is commonly not heard in pronouncing. F. i
Kawin inendansi, is ordinarily pronounced : Kawin inen-
dasi, etc . . , But this n must be in, grammatically, be-
cause otherwise there would be two s in the negative form,
at this always is the case between two vowels,- and the a-
161
bove word would then be, inendassl : but it does not sound
so. Correct speakers pronounce the n enough to be per-
ceived by an attentive ear.
Let us now consider the Change of the verbs of the II.
Conjugation.
The participles, which have always the Change, are fully
displayed in the above paradigm.
In the sentences expressing periodical actions or states of
being, the verbs of this Conjugation are formed thus :
AFFIRMATIVE FORM. NEGATIVE FOR3I.
PRESENT TENSE,
Enendamamn, when, (or whenever Jnsiw&nin,
I think,
cn^ndam^mn, nsivvanin,
enendang'm, nsigon,
enendamingin, nsingon,
enendamkngm, I when nsiwftngin,
eneiidamamgon, ) nsiwangon,
enendan\^gonv nsiwegon,
ewe?i</amowadjin, * nsigwanin.
In the perfect and future tenses the terminations are the
same as here above, and the Change is made in the prefixes,
gi-> and ga- or gad-. Gi- is ch.an.ge4 into ga-\ and ga- or
gad- into ge- or ged-. F. i,
Ga--inendama,mn, when (or when- nsiwanin,
ever) I have thought^
ga*in&ndamamn> nsiwanin,
ga-inendang\n, nsigon,
Ged-inendam&mn, when I shall nsiwdnin^
think,
ged-inendamangm, nsiwdngin,
nsigwanin^
SeQ Remark, p, 26.
162
In the other" cases of the Change, (see p. 137. and 138.)
it is made in the same way as here stated ; only the end-
syllables, fw, (jin ,) ni?i, or o??, are omitted ; as: Encnda-
inan ; ga-inendamdn, ged-incndaindii, etc. .
EXAMPLES ON THE II. CONJUGATION. *
INDICATIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE. Pakadkwc bonam, kakina gaie bineshiiag
bonamog; the hen lays eggs, and all the birds lay eggs.
Pabige anijitamog, knwin songendansivxtff ; they give
up immediately, they have no firm resolution.
Kaginig modjigcndamng gijigong cbidjig, kaginig niiiui-
wanigwendamog ; those that are in heaven are always
contented, they continually rejoice.
IMPERFECT TENSE. Ki kashkendanaban, waieshkat onta
ba-aidian ; thou wert lonesome when thou first stayed
here.
Mino kwiwisensiwiban, kawin wika agnnwetansiban ;
he was a good boy, he never contradicted, (disobeyed.)
- fttinwendamobanig nlnigiigttg iti-u-dhamhrad initialed ;
my parents were glad when they saw me again.
PERFECT TENSE. Kawin nakdwc ki gi*ndnagat&wtndan*i
ged-ikitoian ; thou hast not reflected before hand what
thou wouldst say.
Gi-sdgaam na 1 Kawin gi-sdgadnsi) kciabi oma aid. I?
he (she) gone out ?— He (she) is not gone out, he (she)
is yet here.
IVawcni nin gi-pisindamin gi-gagikwtian ; we have lis-
tened attentively while thou prrarhcdst.
PLUPERFECT TENSE. Nin gi-iiHunakddcndanaban n-ni'-
* See- Jfote, p. 122,
163
shkat wabandaman ishkotenabikwan ; I wondered when 1
first saw a steamboat. *
Kakina gi-sagaamobanig gi-bwa-pindigeidn ; they were
all gone out before I went in.
Kawin na ki gi-debwetansimwaban bidadjimoiuin ga-
nondameg 1 Did you not believe the news you heard.
FUTURE TENSE. Mojag niu ga-nanagatawendam tchi bwa
gigitoidn ; I will always reflect before I speak.
Mtno-ijiwebisidjig kaivin ta-segendansiwag api ge-nibow-
ad; those that behave well, will not be afraid at the hour
of death.
Metchi-ijiwcbisidjig kdginig ta-kotagendamog andmak-
amig ; those that are wicked will suffer eternally in
hell.
SECOND FUTURE TENSE. Nin ga-gi-gijendam tchi bu'a
minawa wdbamiian; I shall have taken a resolution be-
fore thou seest me again.
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE. Apegisli mojag mino inendamdn, wika
dash tchi matchi inendansiwdn ; I wish I had always
good thoughts and never bad thoughts.
Apegish mashkawendamowad tchi anamiawad ; apegish
wika bakan inendansigwa. I wish they would think
firmly to be Christians ; I wish they would never thing
otherwise.
Kishpin kashkendaman , kotagendaman gaic oma aking
mikwendan kagige wdnakiwin gijigong ; if thou art sad
and suffering here on earth, think on the eternal repose
in heaven.
Manadad, pabige tchi nishkadendaming °, it is bad to
have immediately angry thoughts.
t See Note, p. 116.
164
Onijishln tchi maskkawcndaming, venijishivg gcgo tchi
(todaming ; it is right to think firmly (or to have a firm
will,) to do something that is fair, (or good.)
PERFECT TENSE. Gl-wcwlbendaman^ml wa'iba ga-bi-ondji-
giweian ; because thou hast made haste, therefore thou
hast come back soon.
\Vika gi-bcjigicendansigirat ml sa ga-ondji-amjltamo-
wad ; they never have united in their thoughts,, therefore
they have given up.
Ml gi-bonendamdn ga-iji-kitchi-matchi-dodagoidn ; I
have now forgotten, (I have done thinking,) how ill 1
have been treated.
PLUPERFECT TENSE. Dodansiivegoban ga-dodamcg, kair-
In kl da-mino-aiassim nongom ; if you had not done what
you did, you would not be well now.
Gi-bi-sagaamdngiban gi-bwa-pindiged, mi ga-ondji-bi-
san-abid ; because we were gone out before he came in ,
therefore he was quiet.
IVinawa gikawidansigwaban, kawln awiia bakan da-gi-
matchi-ikltossi ; had they not quarrelled, nobody else had
said any bad words.
FUTURE TENSE. Kl ga-windqmon ge-dodamdn ; I will
tell thee what I shall do.
Pisindan gagikwewin, mi
tchi mlno ijlwebisiian ; listen to preaching^ and thou
wilt firmly resolve to behave well.
Mikwendamog ge-dibaamagoicg, mi dash iv> wika gc-on-
dji-anijitansiweg eji-anamiaieg* think on the reward
you shall receive, and you will never give up your religion.
SECOND FUTURE TENSE. Ki ga-windamon ge-gi-inend-
amdn ; I will tell thee what I shall have thought.
Mlnik ge-g\-dodamegoma akingjni iw ge-mikameg dibakc*
nige-gijigak ; whatever you shall have done on earth, you
will find it on the day of judgment,
165
CONDITIONAL MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE. Kl da-minwendam na tchi wabameg
kinigiigowag ? Would you be glad to see your parents ?
Kishpin bekadisiiamban, kawin ki da-gikawidansi mo~
jag ; if thou wert of a quiet disposition, thou wouldst not
always quarrel.
Da-mamakadendamog kishpin wabandamowad Kltclii-me-
katcwikwanaie od anamiewigamlg ; they would wonder if
they saw a cathedral.
Ki da-debweiendam nwandamanin gagikwewin ; thou
oughtst to believe when thou hearest a sermon.
PERFECT TENSE. Nin da-gi-kitr./ti-wassitawendam, mikwt-
nimassiwagiban Debendjiged ; I would have been very
sorrowful, had I not thought on the Lord.
NawdtcJi nin da-gi-minu'cndamin, kakina dagwishino-
wapan ; we would have been more contented if they had
come, all of them.
Kawin wika nin da-gi-nanagatawendansi ged-ijiwebak
ningoting, nondansiwdmban Kije-Manito od ikitowin ; I
would never have meditated on what shall once come to
pass, had I not heard the word of God.
Kawin ki dc^gi-segendansim, ki da-gi-songcndam sa ;
nawatcli da-gi-onijisliin. You ought not to have been
afraid, you ought to have had a strong thought (resolu-
tion;) that would have been better.
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
Debweie-ndan, kego agonwetangen, kcgo gale matchi inen-
dangen ; believe, do not contradict and think not evil.
Mino dodamokan, ninidjaniss, ki ga-jait'endagos ; do good,
my child, and thou wilt be happy.
Ta-mashlcawcndam ; kid ig mckatewikwanaie ; H gad-ina.
Tell him, the Missionary says: Let him be firm in his
resolution.
11
166
Ta-wewibendam aw inini ; let that man make haste.
Minwendanda, tiimttt&ngosida, rnamiairfr , ki jnwcnda-
gosimin! Let us be contented, let us be joyful, Chris-
tians, we are happy !
Kego wika matchi inendansida, kego mishkudrndansida ;
let us never think evil, let us never have angry thonghts.
Kego kashkendangegon, minwendamog ; wnrcni •ndiutgata-
wendamog ga-ijiwebak. Be not sad, be contented, think
well on what happened.
Kego anijitangegon, apine bejigwendamog ; do not give up,
have always the same thought.
PARTICIPLES.
PRESENT TENSE. — Ninjawenimag wassagendangig ; I pity
those that suffer.
Jawendagosi enamlad meno-uirndang ; happy is the
Christian that has a good will.
Kinawa w'ika menwcndansiweg, ki sanagisim ; you that
never are contented, you are difficult to be dealt with.
Gewanandang mcmindage kitimdgisi ; he that dies oi
hunger, is very much worth of pity.
IMPERFECT TENSE. Igiw inini imp ai&gonwftangibanig,
nongom wcwcni debwctamog ; those men that contradict-
ed before, believe now.
Kinawa Bwangetidansittyegobctn vtaieshkat, an in -ntni^on;
encndanieg ? You that liad r^o firm resolution at first,
what you think now ?
Mi aw oshkinawe menwtndonsigoban ; this is the young
man that was not willing.
PERFECT TENSE. — Nond ga*sagaa*gig kawin o gi-nondan-
sinawa gagikwcwin ; those that went out too soon, did
not hear the sermon.
Kin ga-apitchi-kashkendaman, keiabi na kikashkendam ?
Thou that hast mourned so much, art thou yet sad ?
Awenen aw ga-gijendang tclii madjad wabang? Who,
is the person that resolved to start to-anorrow I
167
PLUPERFECT TENSE. Ga-apitchi-debiveiendangibanig oma
aking, nongom apitchi mino aiawag gijigong ; those that
had a perfect faith on earth, are now exceedingly happy
in heaven.
Kinawa ga-initamegoban matchi dajindiwin, ki gi-deb-
wetanawa na 1 You that had heard the calumny, have
you believed it?
Win ga-segendansigoban wika, nongom o gotan nibowin ;
he that never feared before, is now afraid of death.
FUTURE TENSE. Mi sa igiw ged-anijitangig wctiba; these
are the persons that will soon give all up.
Aw ge-mashkawendang tchi mino dodang, o ga-songen-
damiigon Debendjigenidjin ; the Lord will give strength
to him who shall firmly resolve to do right.
Ge-matchi-dodansig wika, ta-jawendagosi ; he that shall
never do wrong, will be happy.
SECOND FUTURE TENSE. Ge-gi-mino-dodangig aking,
kaginig ta-dibaamawawag gijigong ; those that shall
have acted right (done well) on earth, shall be eternally
rewarded in heaven.
168
II. DUBITATIVE CONJUGATION.
AFFIRMATIVE FORM.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE.
Nind inendamidog, I think perhaps,
kid inendamidog,
inendamodog, [pense peut-eHre,)
inendamidog, one thinks perhaps, (on
nind inendammzdog,
kid inendamwadog,
inendamodogenzg,
Form after this present tense, the perfect and the future
PLUPERFECT TENSE.*
Gonima gi-inendamo\vamban, I had perhaps th. . . .
gi-inendambwu.mba.n,
f
gi-in^^mowangiban, > h L d >_
gi-inendamowangobzn, }
gi-inendamowegoba,n,
gi-i?icndamogwaban,
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE.
Enendamowdnen, if I think perhaps,
enendamowznen,
enendamogwen,
enendamowangen, (ninawind) ) .»
f//r/?r/«mowangen, (kinawind) } ] ve> '
enendamowegwen,
* See second Note, page 142, ( Inendamowamban ; inendamogoban, .)
169
II. DUBITATIVE CONJUGATION.
NEGATIVE FORM.
IJNLD1CATIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE.
Kawin nind inendansimidog, I do perhaps not think,
kid inendansimidog,
inendansidog,
inendansimidog,
nind inendansiminadog,
" kid inendansimw&dog,
inendansidogen&g,
tenses ; as : Nin gi-inendamidog. Nin gad-inendamidog. . .
PLUPERFECT TENSE.
Kawin gi-inendansiwamban, I had per. not thought,
" gi-inendansiwa.mba.n,
11 gi-inendansigobzn,
" gi-inendansi\vangib'dn, > ,
" gi-inendansiwziigoban, $
" gi-inendansiwegob&n,
" gi-inendansigwaban,
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE.
Enendansiwanen, if I do perhaps not think.
enendansiwanen,
enendansigwen,
enendansiwangein, ) ./. ,
lf we do er' n0t '
enendansiwegwen,
170
Form after this tense the perfect and the future tenses ; as :
PLUPERFECT TENSE.
Inendamo\vamba.nen, if I had thought I
znendamowambanen, [suppose,
inendamogobanen,
iweraJamowancribanen, ) -r , , .,
, > if we had th. . .
inemzamowangobanen, J
inewefamowegobanen,
iwewdamowagobanen ,
PARTICIPLES.
PRESENT TENSE.
Nin enendamow&nen, I who think perhaps,
kin enendamowanen, thou who. . .
win cnendamogvien,
ninawind enendamow arisen, )
i • • j ' > we who th. p. .
Kinawind ewewaamowangen, )
kinawa enendamowegwen,
winawa enendamogwenag,
The perfect and future tenses are formed
damowdnen, . . . JV///
PLUPERFECT TENSE.*
Nin ga-inendamr>wambB.iiei\) I who had p. th. . .
kin ga-inewd0mowambanen,
win ga-inendamogob<\nen,
ninawind ^a-iwenrfctmowangibanen, ) , , ,
kinawind ga-iwenrfamowangobanen, / w
kinawa ga-inendamowegob&nen,
winawa ^a-iweneZamogobanenag,
* For the imperfect, (seldom used,) ./Vin tnendamowambanen, . . Kin
itendamowambanen, , . .
171
Ga-inendamowdnen, . . . Ged-inendamowanen, ....
PLUPERFECT TENSE.
Jwcnctonsiwambanen, if I had not thought I
mewrfansiwambanen, [suppose,
inendansigobznen,
m^ansiwdngibanen, ) .f we had not
memzflnsiwangobanen, )
incndansi-wegobanen,
inendansiwagobsinen,
PARTICIPLES.
PRESENT TENSED
Nin enendansiw&nen, I who do per. not think,
kin ene/idflnsiwanen, thou who . . .
win enerzrfansigwen,
ninawind .nrr^ns.wangen, > ^ d<) ^ ^
kinawind enendansiwzngen, )
kinawa
winaiea
after this present tense ; as : Aw ga-inen*
gcd-inendamvwanen, . . .
PLUPERFECT TENSE.
Nin ga-ihendansi-wtimbanen, I who had p. not th.
kin ga-iwe/zrfGnsiwambanen,
win ga-inendansigobanen,
ninawind ga-inendansi\vB.i\gibaneii, \ , , ,
winawa
172
EXAMPLES ON THE II. DUBITATIVE CONJUGATION.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE. Aw aiakosid mini kitchi masitagosi ;
wissagendamodog apitchi. This sick man groans much ;
he must suffer exceedingly.
Kawin kid inendansimidog mashittchi wi-amccnindisoian*
kawin sa mashi maianadak gego ki bonitossin. It seems
that thou dost not yet repent, because thou hast not yet
abandoned any thing wicked.
Nij nishimeiag wassa aiawag bakan aking. Kashken-
damodogenag, kitchi intndanwdogenag tclii bi-gitocwad.
Two younger brothers of mine are far off in a foreign
country. They must be home-sick ; they probably wish
very much to come back again.
PERFECT TENSE. Ki gi-agonwctamwadog gi-nondameg
gagikwewin, kawin ki gi-debwttansimwadog* I think
you have contradicted when you had heard the sermon,
you have probably not believed.
Kawin keiabi bi-ijassiwag biwabikokewininiwag : gi-ani-
jitamodogenag. The miners don't come here any more ;
they have probably given up.
Aw oshkinawe kawin bapish od odapinanfin i&hkotcwdbo ;
gi-gijendamodog tclii minikwes&ig ic'ika. This young
man does not accept any ardent liquor ; he has probably
made a resolution to drink no more.
PLUPERFECT TENSE. Nishimc John kau-in khrr
gi-jninwcnd&nsigoban, kikinoamading iri-ijad;
dash kitchi minwendam, kitr/ii d(i<l<if<il>i gnic Icilci iiixiind-
gosid masinaigan. My brother John had not been wil-
ling at first to go to school, (as I understood ;) but now
he likes it very much, and is learning very fast to read.
Igiw nij oskhnaweg gt-kitchi-intndamogwaban tih*<ttrhi-
wan tc'lii i/dinul , bira nibotrid OSriwdbairin ; 'kfttrin f/fis/t
nonyom ganabatch ta-ijassidogcnag. \ heard that these
two young men had thought much of going below, before
their father died ; but now they will probably not go.
173
FUTURE TENSE. Kawin wa'iba ganabatch ta-gijendansi-
dogenag tchi bonitowad minikwewin. They will perhaps
not soon take a resolution to give up drinking.
la'igwa iva'iba ta-inendamodog tchi anamiad. He will
probably soon have a mind to become a Christian, (to
pray.)
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE. Anawi anamia aw anishinabe ; cndog-
wen dash meshkawendamogiven mojag tchi anamiad.
This Indian indeed is a Christian ; but it is doubtful
whether he has a strong resolution, (thought,) to be al-
ways a Christian.
Kashkendamog, kawin wika minwendansiwag ; wegotog-
wen wendji-kashkendamowagwen. They are dejected,
(low-spirited,) they are never contented ; I don't know
why they are so dejected.
Kawin naningim anamiewi garni gong ki bi-ijassim ; ?ni
sa, swangendansiwegwen tchi anokitaweg Uebcndjiged.
You don't come often to church, (house of prayer ;) it is,
I suppose, because you have no strong will to serve the
Lord.
PERFECT TENSE. Kishpin ga-nishkadendamogwen, kawin
nin'nin gi-nishkiassi. If he has had perhaps angry
thoughts, it was not I that made him angry.
Gonima ga-segendamowanen gi-kitchi-noding ; thou
hast perhaps been afraid, when it blew so hard.
Ga-initamowegicen ningotchi matcJii dajindiwin, pabige
ki gi-debivetanawa. You have perhaps heard somewhere
the ill report, and you have forthwith believed it.
PLUPERFECT TENSE. Kishpin gijendamogobanen wi-mad-
jad, da-gi-bosi nabikwaning pitchinago. If he had, (I
suppose,) made up his mind to go away, he would have
gone on board the vessel yesterday.
174
Mimrcndansiwagobanen kakina tndasliiwad, kawingana-
batch o da-gi-widigema*sin iniw ikwnran. If they had
(perhaps) not all been willing, he would not have mar-
ried that woman.
FUTURE TENSE. Ged-ako-mashhaiccndamowcgwen, kawin
kl ga-iDaiejimigossiwag metcki-ijiwebisidjig. As long as
you shall have a strong resolution, (thought,) you will
not be seduced by the wicked ones.
Nin wi-nondawa aw inini ; namandj ^cd-i nt'nddmoirantn
kishpin nondawag. I will hear that man ; I don't know
what my thought (will, mind,) shall be when I hear
him.
Namdndj gc~dodamowagwcn, kawin nin gi*gagwtdjimas~
sig. I don't know what they will do ; I have not asked
them.
PARTICIPLES,
PRESENT TENSE, Aw inini wiku saiegendansigwe*, t<i-
segendam api ge~nibod> That man who seems never to
fear, will be afraid at the time of his death.
Kin metchi-inendajnowane?i, mikwenim Debendjigcd ; o
kikendanan sa win kid intndamowinan. Thou who hast
perhaps evil thoughts, remember the Lord ; he knows all
thy thoughts.
Kawin nongom bi-anokissiwag igiw cdanijitamogwenag.
They don't come to work to-day those that are supposed
to give up.
PERFECT TENSE. Mi aw inini nond ga-sagaamoywen gi-
gigitong. This is the man who went out, (as I heard,)
before the council was over.
Kinawa ga-matchi-doildmowegwcn, ningoting ki ga-ki-
kendagosim ga-ijiwebisiwegwen nongom. You who have
175
perhaps done evil, you^will once be known, how you have
(perhaps) behaved now.
PLUPERFECT TENSE. Igiw waieshkat ga-debwciendamogo-
banenag, gi-kitclii-mino-ijiwesigwaban. Those who had
believed in the beginning, (the first Christians,) behaved
very well, (as we read.)
Kin ga-songendansiwambanen waieshkat, awashime kin
nongom ki song' dcbwetam, kid inawcmaganag dash.
Thou who at first hadst perhaps had no strong belief,
(thought,) thou believest now stronger than thy rela-
tions.
Kinawa ga-kotagendamowegobanen bibonong nopiming,
ki mino aiam nongom oma. You who had suffered last
winter in the woods, (as I understood,) you are now well
here.
FUTURE TENSE. Aw gc-kashkcndansigwen, ge-nishkadcn-
dansigwen gaie, gego wenitodjin, nibwakawinining ta-
apitenima. He that shall not be sad, nor shall have
angry thoughts, when he loses something, will be esteem-
ed a wise man.
Awegwenag wika ge-pisindansigwenag matchi babamad-
jimowin, bisan 4a-bimadisiwag aking. Those who never
shall listen to bad reports, shall live quietly (in peace) on
earth.
176
Some Examples in regard to
AFFIRMATIVE FORM.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE.
Mimvendamowan na ossan, oma tclii bi-ijanid ? Is his
father willing that he should come here ?
Apitchi kashkejulamowan omisseian. His sisters are very
sad (lonesome.)
And so forth in all the tenses
IMPERFECT AND PLUPERFECT TENSES.
() iridigcmaganan inendamobamn tclii gishpinadomd aki.
It was the will of his wife, (or, her husband,) to buy
land.
Onigiigon inendamobanin tchi widjcmad iniir ikircwan.
It was the will of his parents that he should marry that
woman.
Gri-sag0amobanin witan, bwa p/^r/^niid ogwissan. His
brother-in-law had gone out, before his son came in.
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE.
Kishpln ossan minwendam'mid, ta-bi-ija oma. If his father
is willing, (consenting,) he will come here.
* See page 72.
177
the second third person.*
NEGATIVE FORM.
INDICATIVE MOOD.'
PRESENT TENSE.
Kawin minwendansiwtm ossan tchi madjanid. His father
is not willing that he should go away.
Kawin na geget omisseian kashkendansiwan 1 Are his sisters
not really sad (lonesome ?)
that are derived from the present.
IMPERFECT AND PLUPERFECT TENSES.
Kawin o widigemaganan inendansibanin tchi bosinid. It
was not the will of his wife, (or, her husband,) to em-
bark.
Kawin onigiigon incndansibanin tchi widigemad iniw ik-
wewan. It was not the will of his parents that he should
marry that woman.
Kawin mashi gi-sagaansibanin witan, api pandigemd og-
wissan. His brother-in-law had not yet gone out, when
his son came in.
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE.
Kishpin ossan minwendansinig, kawin ta-bi-ijassi. If his
father is not willing, (not consenting,) he will not come.
Apegich mashkawendaminid ogwissan, tchimino-ijiwebisinid.
I wish his sons would firmly resolve to behave well.
And so on in the other tenses
PLUPERFECT TENSE.
Kishpin ogln minwendamimpsin, da-gi-widige aw oshkin-
igikwe. That young woman would have married, had
her mother given her consent.
Wewib sagaamimpan ossaieian, kawln da-gi-gikandiss'un .
Were his brother gone out immediately, there would have
been no quarreling.
PARTICIPLES.
PRESENT TENSE,
Kawln Kijc-Manito o sagiassin cnamianidjin aiagonweta-
minidjin. God does not love Christians who are dis-
obedient, (who contradict.)
Kawin awiia gwaiak enamiad o wissokawassin metc/ii-da-
6?aminidjin. No true Christian associates with those that
are doing wrong.
IMPERFECT TENSE.
Paul o sagiabanin oshimeibanin., Mfyug nirno-inrntl(nmni\rd-
nin. Paul loved his deceased brother who always had
good intentions, (a good will.)
John o sagiabanin o tffidigemaganibanin, inojaif menwen-
</aminipanin. John loved his deceased wife, who always
was contented (cheerful.)
Form the other tenses of these-
179
Kishpin mashkaivendansmig ogwissan, kawin ginwenj ta-
ta-mino-ijiwebisissiwan. If his sons have not a firm
resolution, they will not long behave well.
formed after the present.
PLUPERFECT TENSE.
Kishpin ogin minwendansimgoba.n, kawin da-gi-widigessi
nimisse. My sister would not have married, had her
mother not given her consent.
Ossaieian sagaansimgoba.n wewib, da-gi-gikandim. Were
his brother not gone out immediately, there would have
been quarreling.
PARTICIPLES.
PRESENT TENSE.
Debendjigcd o nita-jawcniman enamianidjin wika aiagon-
wetansinigon. The Lord loves Christians who never
contradict, (disobey.)
Kawin awiia gwaiak enamiad o widokawassin meno-dodan-
sinigon. No true Christian helps those, (keeps company
with those,) who act not right.
IMPERFECT TENSE.
John kawin givetch o sagiassibanin ossaieibanin wika meno-
mewfZffnsinigobanin. John did not much love his de-
ceased brother, who never had a good will.
Paul kawin o sagiassibanin o widigemaganibanin, wika
wenwjewdansinigobanin. Paul did not love his deceased
wife, who never was contented.
participles after these two.
180
III. CONJUGATION.
To this Conjugation belong the intransitive or neuter
verbs, that end at the third person singular, present, indic-
ative, in in or on ; and they likewise end so at the first
person.
Here are some of the verbs of this description.
First Person. Third Person.
Nin dagwishin, I arrive; tlagirhhin.
Nin jmngishin, I fell; pan $i thin.
Nind dpitchishin, I fall hard; njiifchhhin.
Nind agodjin, I hang; or I am on high; agodjin.
Nin jingishin, I am lying ; jingithin.
Nin minoshin, I lie well ; minoshin.
Nin twashin, I break through the ice ; twdshin.
Nind ojashishin, I slide> or glide ; . ojdshishin.
Nind osamidon, I speak to much; osdtnidon.
Nin dandnagidon, I talk ; dandnagido*.
Nin mishidon, I have a long beard; mishiduu.
AFFIRMATIVE FORM. NEGATIVE FORM.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE.
Nin dn gin shin, I arrive,* Kairin si,
/,-/ dagwishin, si
dagwiskin, si,
r/r/"-//-/.N-/*///im, 0110 arrives, " sim,
they arrive, (on
arrive,)
nin dfiirisJiiiiiimnJ " simin,
See Remark \. p. 10& f See Remark 3. p. 102.
181
ki dagivishinim, " sim,
dagwishinog, " si wag,
IMPERFECT TENSE.
Nin da.gwisJiinmsLba.Uj I arrived, Kawin sinaban,
ki dagicishimnob&u, • " sinaban,
dagwishinoba.u, " siban,
nin dagwishiniminabw, " siminaban,
ki dagwishinimwB.b<int (< simwaban,
dagwishi7ioba.mg, " sibanig,
PERFECT TENSE.
Nin gi-dagwisliin, I have arrived, " si,
ki gi-dagwishin, " si,
gi-dagivishin, " si.
Etc., as above in the present tense, always prefixing gi-,
to the verb.
PLUPERFECT TENSE.
Nin gi-dagwishin'mab&n, I had ar- Kawin sinaban,
rived,
ki gi-dagivishininab&n, " sinaban,
Etc., as above in the imperfect tense, always prefixing^/-,
to the verb.
FUTURE TENSE,
Nin ga-dagioishin, I will arrive, Kawin si,
ki ga-dagwisliin, " si,
ta-dagwisliin, " si,
ta-dagwishinimt " sim,
nin ga-dagwishimmin, <f simin,
ki ga-dagwishiriun, " sim,
ta-dagwishinog, " siwag,
12
182
SECOND FUTURE TENSE.
Nin ga-gi-dagwishin, I shall have ar- Kawin si,
rived,
ki ga-gi-dagwishin, " si,
ta-gi-dagw-ishin, " si,
Etc., as above.
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE.
Dagwishin&n* if I arrive,
dagwishinan,
dagwishing,
dagwishining,
dagrishintog, ) .f
dagwishmzng, \
dagwishineg,
dagwishinowzd,
PERFECT TENSE.
Gi-dagwishinain, because I have
arrived, or when
I arrived.
gi-dagwishinan ,
si wan,
siwan,
sig>
sing,
siwang,
siwang^
siweg,
sigwa,
si wan,
si wan,
Etc., as above in the present tense,, prefixing gi-t to the*
verb.
PLUPERFECT TENSE.
DagwisJiin&mbzn, if I had siwamban,
arrived,
dagwishinzmbzn, siwamban,
* See the Remarks concerning this and the following two tenses,
p. 11G.
183
dagivishingiban, sigoban,
dagwishin'uigiban, singiban,
dagwishin£ngib?in) ) if we siwangiban,
dagwishinangob&n, \ had . . siwangoban,
dagwishinegoba.il, siwegoban,
sigwaban.
FUTURE TENSE.
Ge-dagwishinan , that I shall arrive, siwan,
ge-dagwisliin<m, siwan,
Etc. , as above in the present tense, prefixing ge-.
SECOND FUTURE TENSE
Ge-'gi-dagivishin&n, that I shall have siwan,
arrived,
gC'gi-dagwishina.n, siwan,
Etc. , as above in the present tense, prefixing ge-g .
CONDITIONAL MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE.
JVm da-dagwiskin, I would arrive,or si,
I ought to ar-
rive.
ki da-dagwisJiin, Kawin si,
da-dagwishin, ,, si,
da-rdagwishinim, they would ar- ,, sim,
rive, (on arrive-
rait,)
ninda-dagwishinimin, ,, simin^
ki da-dagwishinim, „ sim,
da-dag wishinog, „ siwag,
PERFECT TENSE.
Nin da-gi-dagwisliin, I would have ar- ,, si,
rived, or I ought
to have arr.
184
ki
da-gi-dagwisli in ,
da-g i-<l tig irixJiinim,
71 in (fa-gi-dagwish in i in in ,
ki da-gi-dagwish /v/im,
da -g i-dag wishinog,
„ si,
» si,
„ sim,
,, sitnin,
sim,
„ siwag
Ge-gi-dagivishina.n, that I would siwdn,
have arrived,
Etc. , as above in the second future of the subj. mood.
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
s,
sim,
sida,
gegon,
siwag,
ta-dagwlshiii, let him (her, it)
arrive.
ta-dagu'ishin\m,\et them arrive.
(qu'on arrive,)
dagwishinfa, let us arrive,
dagwishinog, arrive, ye,
tfrdagwishinog, let them arrive
PARTICIPLES.
PRESENT TENSE.
Nin degicishin&n, I who arrive,
kin fh'xii'ix/iiiiim, thou whoarr.,
win degwishing,
ninawind
kinawa degioishineg,
winawa di-gwisk ingig,
*
siwdn,
si wan,
sig,
sing,
siwang,
siwang,
siweg,
sigog.
185
IMPERFECT TENSE.
Nin degivisMna.mba.Ti, I who arrived, siwamban,
kin dcgioishinamban, siwamban,
win degwishingtoiUQi, sigoban,
ninawind dcgivishiimngiban, ) siwangiban,
kinawind degwiskinangob<n\, ) siwangoban,
kinawa dcgwishin'egoban, siwegoban,
winaiva degwishingibanig, sigobanig,
PERFECT TENSE.
Nin ga-dagivishinan, I who have arrived, siwan,
kin ga-dagwishinan, siwan,
Etc., with the terminations of the present, and prefixing
grt-, to the verb.
PLUPERFECT TENSE.
Nin ga-dagwishinamban, I who had arr. siwamban,
kin ga-dagivishina.mb.in, siwamban,
Etc., putting the terminations of the imperfect, and pre-
fixing ga-.
FUTURE TENSE.
Nin ge-dagwishin&n, I wh^shall arrive, siwan,
kin ge-dcrgwishinan, siwan,
Etc., after the present, prefixing ga-.
SECOND FUTURE TENSE.
Nin ge-gi-dagivishin&u, I who shall have ar. siwan,
7cm ge-gi-dagw?shln<m, siwan,
Etc., after the present, prefixing ge-gi-.
Review diligently the Remarks and Notes of the two
preceding Conjugations, and mind them well ; especially
the Rules and Remarks regarding the Change.
186
Remark. In regard to the conditional mood of these
Conjugations it must be observed, that only two tenses, the
present and the perfect, are commonly used in it. A third
one, called the second per fa i tcasr, could be expressed ; as ;
Nin da-gi-i kit oiid ha n ; ninjda-gifinendanaban, etc. But it
is not in common use ; therefore it is omitted in the para-
digms. (To this tense, the 1st Number of Remark *v
page 119, is partly alluding.)
EXAMPLES ON THE III. CONJUGATION.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE. Nin mdnishin, kawin nin minosliinxi.
ikito aw aidkosid. I lie uncomfortable, I don't lie well,
says that sick person.
Ki da-gaslikibds, ki kiiclii mishidon goshd. Thou
oughtst to share ; thy beard is very long indeed.
IMPERFECT TENSE. Keiabi jingishinobanig ba-madjaiu'n.
They were yet in bed when I started to come here.
Gegct kid osdmidonlmwaban tibikong; apcgixh -nawatc'i
bisdn abiieg. You spoke too much indeed last night ,- I
wish you would be more quiet.
PERFECT TENSE. Nissing nin gi-pangishin pit chin
mikwaming gi-bimosseian ; -nijing dank nin gi-twaxhin.
I fell three times yesterday, walking on the ice ; and 1
broke through twice. ^
Nin gi-kitchi-kijikamin anawi, kftir/n dusk gtrniak nin
gi-dagwishinsimin ; we went on very fast, but still we
did not arrive in due time.
PLUPERFECT TENSE. Ginwenj Jesus gl-agodjinolan tchi-
bfiiiftifrmi", Inra nibod; Jesus had hung long on the cros>.
before he died.
Kawin mashi kakina gi-dagwishinsibanig, «pi maiadji-
gagikwcng ; all had not yet arrived, when the sermon
began.
I-YTURE TENSE. Aw ikire mi k tram ing bcmosscd ta-ojnxli-
is/tin ganabatch, la-apitcliixhin dash. That woman \\lio
walks on the ice, will probably glide and fall hard.
187
Kawin minawa nin ga-osamidonsimin, manddad iic ; we
will no more talk too much, it is wrong.
SECOND FUTURE TENSE. Nin ga-gi-dagwisliin iwapi, nit
dash wedi tchi wabandiiang ; I shall have arrived by
that time, and so we will see each other there.
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE. Ambe bisan bimosseiog tclii pakiteshin-
siweg; walk carefully lest you fall.
\Vidokaw aw aiakosid, tchi gwckisJiid; assist that sick
person, in turning on the other side.
Apegish bisdnishiicg, kwiwisensidog ; I wish you would
lie still, boys.
PERFECT TENSE. Bibonong, gi-twasltinan, gega nibilcang
nin gi-dajrine. Last winter, when 1 broke through the ice.
I almost perished in the water.
Gi-apitchishinan, mi wcndji-akosiian; thou art sick, be-
cause thou fellest so hard.
PLUPERFECT TENSE. Osamidonsiwegoban, kawin awiia
da-gi-nishk&dishsi ; had you not talked too much, no-
body would have been mad.
Dagwishindmban (or g't-dagwisliinamban) mcgwa oma
aiad, nin da-gi-gagwedjima gego ; had I arrived while
he was here, I wo«W have asked him a question.
FUTURE TENSE. Mhw ganaw£nindisoiog, kawin ki kiken-
dansmawa atpi ge-dagwishing aniskinabe Ogwissan. Be-
ware well, for ye know not when the Son of man shall
come.
la'igwa islipi-gijigad ; anin minik gc-jingishinowad kei-
abi? It is already late; how long will they yet lie in
bed?
FUTURE TENSE. Mi iwapi hitchi ag timing ge-gi~
dagwishinan mewija ; at that time I shall have arrived in
Europe long ago.
188
CONDITIONAL MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE. Kitchi tiatadowining ira'i'ba ki cla-pan-
gishhii khlipin u'issnkfurttd aw o*hkinanv.\ thou wouldst
soon fall in great sins, if thou frequented that young man.
Kawin ow apt lei da-jingishinsim OUKI, ki da-onokim sn ;
at this hour you ought not to lie here, you ought to be
at work.
PERFECT TENSE. Nin da-rgi-minoshin tibikong, akosissi-
wdmban; I would have lain comfortably last night, had
I not been sick.
Nibikang da-gi-pangishinog abinodjiiagj li-ijassiwam-
ban ; the children would have fallen in the water, had
I not come here.
Mi api gc-gi-(lagwishindn,QT, gr.-gi-*lagicisliinamban ;*
it is at that time I would have arrived,
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
Bisanishin, nibdn, kcgo bdpiken; lie still „ sleep, do not
laugh.
Bi-dagwisldnokan m'mawa wabang ; iii/t miicendamin hi-
ijdian. Please come to-morrow again ; we are happy
when thou comest.
Kego ta*vsamidonsi aw ikwc ; let that woman not speak so
much.
Ta-gwckisliin aw aidkosid iititii ; let that sick man turn
on the other side.
Kcgo osam dcm&nagidernsida, ki nonddgmian Utbendjiged ;
let us not talk too much, the Lord lu nrs us.
Bi*dagwishinog nanin^hn^ bi-iralHimig mekatttoihtfcuak
come often here, come to see tho Missionary.
Jtixfin himosseiog, krgo pangishingcgon ; go on quietly.
don't fall,
Ta-ishkwa-dandn(t«i<l<>no<rtinoh-li ckitodjig^ let them cease
to talk, those that speak so much*
* See Remark 8, page 119.
189
PARTICIPLES.
PRESENT TENSE. Kitchi onijishiwag anangog ishpiming
egodjingig ; the stars on high are very beautiful.
Rinawa besanishiieg kab6-gijigt gcget Id kitimishkim ;
you who are lying still all day long, you are really lazy.
IMPERFECT TENSE. ICinaica knbe-bibon pekitcsliinsiwego-
ban, gcgft ki i/tino gana.wenindisom bimosscicg. You who
never fell all winter, you walk with great precaution in-
deed.
Ininiwag noniala ba~dagwishingibanig ni/i gi-wcibamag
nungom ; I have seen to-day the men that arrived here a
short time ago.
PERFECT TENSE. Aw Abinodfl ga-jingishing ningoting
pijikiwi garni g<mg, hii aw Dcbcndjigcd ki Kije-Manito-
minan. The Child tliat lay once in a stable, is the Lord
our God.
Jaw(>ndagosiivag wika ga-pangishinsigog kitchi batado-
wining ; happy are they who never fell in a great sin.
PLUPERFECT TENSE. Mi ogow anisJii'ttf/beg ga-twasliingi-
banig awdssonago ; these are the Indians that broke
through the ice the day before yesterday.
Anindi ejad aw inini ga-dagwishingiban oma sigioanong ?
Where is that young man that had arrived here last
spring ?
FUTURE TENSE. Mi aw gc-dandnagidong minawa kabe-
gijig ; she is the one that will talk again all day.
Oma ge-gaw'ishimodjig> mi igiw gegrt ge-minoshinsigog ;
those who will lie down here, will indeed not lie comfort-
able.
SECOND FUTURE TGNSE. Kakina igiw gr-gi~dagwishin-
sigog anaminci garni gong, tchi Iwa madjitad mckatewik-
wanaic, kawin ta-mino-dodansiwag. All those that shall
not have arrived at the church, before the priest begins
the service, will not do right ,
190
III. DUBITATIVE CONJUGATION.
AFFIRMATIVE FORM. NEGATIVE FORM.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE.
,\in dagwishinimidog, I arr. perhaps, Kawin simidog,
ki dagwishinimidog, " simidog,
dagwishinodog, " sidog,
dagivishinimidog, one arr. perh. " simidog,
nin dagicis/riniminndog, " siininadog,
ki dagwishinimwa.dog, " simwadog,
dagwishinodogen&g, " sidogenag,
After this present tease are formed the perfect and ihr
future tenses : as: Nin gi-dagwisliuiimidog\ etc.. .
PLUPERFECT TKNSE.
girdagwishinogeibtn,
gi~dagwish i-no\\ angoban,
•r i-df/ir //• i .v h i ii owegoban,
, Ihad perh. Kawin sinowainban,
arrived,
sinowambaji.
sigoban,
sinow^ngiban
sinowangiban
sinowegobbn,
sigwabao,
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD,
PRESENT TENSE.
, that I perh. ar., sivviincn,
si \vsinrn,
that we p.
///•:i1'-/r/\/////()waiigen, arr.
191
degwiskinowegwen, siwegwen,
dcgwishinowagwen, siwagwen,
After this present tense are formed the perfect and fu-
ture tenses ; as : Ga-dagwishinowanen, . . . ge-dagwishin-
PLUPERFECT TENSE.
Dagwi-skinowa.mba.uen, if I had ar- siwdmbanen,
rived I suppose,
dagwiskinowambauen, siwambanen,
dagwishinogobauen, sigobanen,
dagwishinow&ngib&nen, ) I sup. siwangibanen,
i, ) if we., siwangobanen,
siwegobanen,
siwagobanen.
PARTICIPLES.
PRESENT TENSE.
Nin dcgicishinow&neu, I who arrive perhaps.
kin degwishinowanen,
win dcgwishinogwen,
n> tiff wind degwishinowangen; )
.77.,. > we who arr. pern.,
kinawind degwis/iinowangen, )
kinawa degwiskinogwenag,
winawa degwish ittowegwen ,
PRESENT TENSE.
Nin degwishinsiw&uen, I who do perh. not arr.
kin degwishinsiwanen,
win degwishhis'igwen,
ninawind dcgwiskinsi\va,n<ren, )
j • • i t • i • • / we who do p. not arr.
kinawind degwishmsiwangen, $
kinawa degicishinsiwegwen,
winawa dcgwishinsigwenag.
192
After this present tense are formed the perfect and fu-
ture tenses ; as : Niu ga-dcigwisliinowan<:n, . . . J\'in gC'
dagwishinowdncn. . . .
PLUPERFECT TENSE.
Nhi ga'dagvrishinow&inb&neu, I who had pcrh. arr.
kin ga-dagwisk inowambanen,
win ga-dagwishinogob&uen,
nlnawlnd ga-dagwishinow&ngibsineu, > , , ,
kinawhid ga-dagioishinovt&ngobwen, J w
kinawa ga-dag-wis/i mowegobanen,
winawa
PLUPERFECT TENSE.
Nin ga-dagwi.shins\w&mbanent 1 who did p. not arr.
kin gfi-f/(iifiri.sh / wsi wambanen,
win gff.-f'/(t^ wish hi sijrobo nen ,
ninawind ga-dagwishin?\w&ngibajien, ) ,
kinowind ga-dagw/shinsiwangobaneu, j w
kinawa
winawa ga-
EXAMPLES ON THE III. DUBITATIVE CONJUGATION.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE. OMIIH inn ha. n'ni dagioishinimidog, kair-
in (ttri'm oiiift (rifixst. I arrive porluips too tsoon, tliere is
nobody yet here.
Kan'in ii'tni iiii-in. /.'/ pangishirtsunidogt apitclii sa vcn-rn'i
l:i himnxxr. Tliou fiillcst. |)robably not often, because
tho walkest very well, (cautiously.)
PERFECT TKNSI;. Gt-dagurishinodogeiuigga-biindjig ; cnri-
ir(i!nnii(i(l(ini^. T\M\ cxpccK'd |)orsons have probably ar-
med; lot. us iro and sco them.
Ki gi-jingithinimidog kciabi ki nibaganing jcba, apt
193
medwcssing kitotagan ; na ? Thou hast probably been
yet lying in thy bed this morning, when the bell rang :
hast thou not ?
PLUPERFECT TENSE. Gega gi-nibowag nij anishinabeg ;
niwing khve gt-ani-twdsliinogwdban l)wa oditamowad mi-
niss. Two Indians have almost perished ; they had bro-
ken through the ice four times (they say,) before they
reached the island.
Gi'dagwishinogoban koss odr.nang bwa bi-madjcudn,
Icavln daxli nhi nln gi-wabauiassi. Thy father had arri-
ved in the village, (so it was said,) before I left, but I
have not seen him.
FUTURE TENSE. Wabang ta-dagicishinodogcnag nhrigng-
og. Gcgct nin ga-kitchi-minwendam tcld ivabamagwa.
To-morrow will perhaps arrive my parents. I will be
happy indeed to see them.
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE. Endogwr.n keiabi wcsamidonowagwen
igiiv ikwcivag, waieshkut ga-ijiwebisiwad. I don't know
whether these women are yet so talkative, as they have
been at first.
Namandj wendji-jingisliinogwcn keiabi ; gonima akosi-
dog. I don't know why he is yet in bed ; he is perhaps
sick.
PERFECT TENSE. Gi-ano-akavwbamaivag kid inawemagan-
ag pitcldnago. Gonima ga-dagwisJiinoicagwen ; aivi-gag-
wcdii'fM. Thy relations have been expected (looked for)
yesterday. They have perhaps arrived : go and ask.
Nin kitimagenima aw aiakosid 'mini ; endogwen ga-mi-
194
iwshinogwen ttbikong. I pity that poor sick man ; I
don't know whether he lay comfortable last night.
,1'LUPERFECT TENSE.
Kawln ?i hi kikenimassig kissaieiag tcld gi-dagwishino-
irfigobanen odenang, bwa-sakidcnig. I don't know wheth-
er your brothers had arrived in the village, (town, city,)
before the fire broke out.
Nawdtch mino cuia kiga; endogwcn tchi gi-jingishino-
gobanen kciabi nibaganing pitrhhwgo ba-madjatun.
Thy mother is somewhat better ; I don't know whether
she had yet been confined to bed yesterday when 1
went away.
FUTURE TENSE.
Nita mikwaming bimosse nongom kabe-gijig ; namandj
dassing ge-pakiteslimogwen. My brother-in-law is travel-
ing to-day on the ice all day; I don't know how often he
will fall.
PARTICIPLES.
PRESENT TENSE.
Kin pcngishinsiwanen wika kitchi batadowining, gt-
get ki jawcndagos. Thou who perhaps never fallest
in a mortal sin, thou art happy indeed.
Kawin ganabatch wika dagwishimtwag oma. Awnn ti-
ng igiw wika degwishinsigwcnag 1 They pcrluip*
never come here. Who are they that perhaps never
come?
195
PERFECT TENSE.
Awegwen ga-jingishinogwen nin nibaganing nonda-gi-
jig. I don't know who has lain down on my bed dur-
ing the day.
Kin aw a ga-pangisMnowegiven naningim kitchi batadow-
iningf. bwa bi-aiad oma mekatewikwanaic, nongom wewem
anwenindisoiog. You who have perhaps often fallen in
grievous sins, before a Missionary was here, repent now
sincerely,
PLUPERFECT TENSE,
Winawa nitam ga-gabeshigob anenagoma, bwa kinaicind
dagwishinang, gi-ojitogwaban ow kitigan. Those that
first had settled here, before we arrived, have made this
field, (or garden.)
FUTURE TENSE.
Kwiwisensidog, pisindamog : Awegwen osam wika gc-
dagwishinogwen kikinoamading,ta-animisi. Boys, listen :
Whosoever shall come too late to school, shall be punish-
ed, (or shall suffer.)
1.96
A few Examples in regard to
AFFIRMATIVE FORM.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE.
Akosiw&n onidjanissantjingishinon nibaganing. His child
is sick, it is lying on a bed, (or, his children are sick,
etc.)
William ossan bt-dagioishinon. William's father is coming
here.
And so on in all the tenses
IMPERFECT AND PLUPEIUV.CT T,;NSJ:S.
Nibiwa od inowcmaganan dagicishinob&mn jjilchinago.
Many of his relations arrived yesterday.
Aw ikive odcniitMni apitchishinobanw (ni-(i**on<igo. The
little daughter of this woman fell hard the day before
yesterday.
Aw anisldnabe ogwissan nijing gi-tioashinobanin. bwadag-
wishimmd oma ; this Indian's s<»i had broken twice
through the ice, before he arrived he-re.
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
PIJKSIi.vr TENSE.
Kishpin o mdigemaganan dagwishininid, l-airin minawa
ta-madjassi\vim. If her husband comes, he will not go
away any more.
197
the second third person.
NEGATIVE FORM.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSEL
Agawa ukosiwan onidjanissan, kaicin jingishinsiwzn niba-
ganing. His child is a little sick ; it is not lying in
bed, (or, his children are a little sick, etc.)
Kawin mashi William ossan dagwishinsiwan. William's
father arrives not yet
derived from the present.
IMPERFECT AND PLUPERFECT TENSES.
Kawin mashi ogin dagwishins'ibanm. His mother did not
yet arrive.
Kawin oma mikanang apitchishinsibamn aw'ikwe odan-
issan. The little daughter of this woman did not fall on
this road here.
Kawin nijing gi-twashinsiba.n'm aw anishinabe ogwissan,
mi eta abiding. This Indian's son had not broken twice
through the ice, but only once.
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE,
Missawa dagwishinsmig 6 widigemaganan, kawin nongom
biboninig ta-madjassi. Although her husband arrive not .
she will not go away this winter.
13
198
Kishpin keiabi jingisJiimnid ogwisMtn, grgrt kitimiwan.
If his sons are yet in bed, they are really lazy.
And so on in all the tenses
PLUPERFECT TENSE.
Kishpin daginshiriinipxa omisJiomissan api pandi^
niii da-gi-wabamuiiun. Had his grand-father arrived
when I came in, I would have seen him..
Dagwisliinm\\>3i\ wit an megu-a ima a'taian, ?nn da-gi~l»-
widjiwiman. Had his brothers-in-law arrived while I wa-
there, I would have brought them here, (or, I would have-
come here with them.)
PARTICIPLES.
PRESENT TENSE.
Awininiendasso-tibikadinig oganawabamananangon islqii-
ming egorfinidjin. This man is gazing every night on
the stars that are (hanging) on high.
Aw ikwe o ganawcniman onidjanissan hnn jcu^i.sJi/nimd-
jin. This woman is watching over her child that ib
lying there.
PERFECT TENSE.
Iniw ogwissan,pitchinago
wan oma. His son that arrived yesterday, went by
here.
Mi iniw od opwaganan assining ga-pangi$hin'um\im,, This
is his pipe that fell down on a stone.
199
Kishpin keiabi jingishinsinig ogwissan, nin ga-walamiman
wakalganing.. If his sons are no more in bed, I will see
them in the house.
derived from the present.
PLUPERFECT TENSE.
KisJipln dagwishinslmgobzin omishomissan megica iinu
aiaian, kawin nin da-gi-wabamassl. Had his grand-
father not arrived while I was there, I would not have
seen him.
DagwishinsimgobsiD. wltan megwa ima aiaian, kawin nin
da-gi-ganonidissimin. Had his brothers-in-law not arrived
while I was there, we had not spoken to each other, (or,
conversed.)
PARTICIPLES.
PRESENT TENSE.
Kikinoamagewinini Icawin o mimcenimassin iniw abinodj,-
ian wilt a kikinoamading dcgwis/uns'migon. The teacher
does .not like those children that never come to school.
Iniw onidjanissan masM jengishinsimgon, wciiba ta-gaw-
ishimowsai. Those of her children that are not yet lying
(in bed), will soon go to bed,
PERFECT TENSE.
Iniw ogwissan, pitchinago ga-dagwishins'migon, wabang
ta-bi-aiawan oma. His son who did not arrive yester-
day, will be here to-morrow.
Mi iniw widjikiweiatf, wika ga-pakitesJd?is'migon bibonong
This is his brother who never fell last winter,
200
IV. CONJUGATION.
Here now, dear reader, you are at the most important
and the most difficult of all our Conjugations.
To this Conjugation belong all the transitive or active
verbs ANIMATE, ending at the third person singular, present,
indicative, in an. The object upon which acts the -subject
of these verbs, is always contained in the verb itself: So,
•nin wabama, does not mean : 1 see ; but, I see him, (her
It.)
All the verbs belonging to this Conjugation end in a at
the first person singular, present, indicative. This final a
is placed among the terminations, to facilitate the conjuga-
ting process of these verbs ; and this a does not belong to
the body of the verb. See the imperative mood of this
first paradigm, and the passive voice, p. 224.
Note. In the following two paradigms you will find the
singular in the first column of the page in full, and the
terminations of the plural in the second column.
Here are some verbs of the IV. Conjugation :
First Person. Third Per ton.
Nin wabandaa, I show him, (her, it ;) o irnbnndaan.
/libra, I put him (her, it,) to sleep; <> niht-an.
jY/n sdgia, I love him, (her, it;) o xa^ian.
Nind dnwa, I eat him, (her, it;) od ainonn.
.\/u noiK/tura, 1 hear him, (her, it:) o nondatran.
Nin wdbama, I see him, (her, it ;) o walnniuui.
Nin iridiircnid, I live with him, (her, it;) o widigeman.
Ninjitim'nimfi, I hate him, (her, it;) o jingeniman.
Nin n<:lcaiii<i, I promise him, (her, it ;) o nakoman.
Nin pisindawa, I listen to him, (her, it;) o /lixituJdioan.
fim'ma, I employ him, (her, it ;) od anonan.
asset, I put him, (her it ;) od assan.
201
Remark. As the Otchipwe language makes no distinc-
tion of the two sexes in the personal pronouns, the pronouns
of all the three genders ought to be expressed in English,
in some instances. But, to make it shorter and easier, we
will ordinarily express only the masculine pronouns ; and
the feminine and neuter will be understood. So, for in-
stance, Nin wabama, can mean, I see him, I see her, I see
it, (some animate object.) Waiabamdd, can mean, he, she,
or it, who sees him, her, or it. Instead of this we will only
say : Nin icabama, I see him ; waiabamdd, he who sees
him, etc., etc. The feminine and neuter pronouns will be
understood,
ACTIVE VOICE.
AFFIRMATIVE FORM.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE.
Singular. Plural.
Nin wabama., I see him, ag,
hi wabamai, ag,
o wabamtm,* an,
nin wabamananj ananig,
lei wabamawa, awag,
o wabama.wa.n, awan,
IMPERFECT TENSE.
Nin wabamabzn, I saw him, abanig,
ki waba?naban, abanig,
o wabamn.ba.mn,t abanin,
nin wabamsmzban, anabanig,
ki wabam&w<ib?in, awabanig,
o waba?na.wabanin, awabanin,
' See page 94. t See Remark 3. p. 102.
PERFECT TENSE.
Nin gi-wabama, I have seen him, (or, ag,
I saw him,)
o gi-wabatnan, an,
•n'tn gi-wabam&u&ii, ananig,
o gi-wabama.\va.n, awan,
PLUPERFECT TENSE,
/tt gi-z0aZ»«waban, I had seen him (or, abanig,
I saw him,)
ki gi^ii'aba?nu.bnn, abanig.
Etc., after the above imperfect tense, prefixing if/-.
FUTUTIE TENSE.
Nin ga-wabama, I will see him, ag,
ki ga-wabamn., ag,
Etc., after the above present tense, prefixing ga-.
SECOND FUTURE TENSE.
Nin ga-gi-wabamti, I shall have seen him, ag,
ki ga-gi-ivabama, ag,
Etc., likewise after the present tense, prefixing g(t-Lr>-
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE.
Wdbamzg* if I see him, a<r\va,
u'lfbriiHiu], adwa,
wabam&d, ^id,
' Sec the Remarks concerning this and the following two tenses
p, 11G.
203
id, (ninawind,)* angidwa,
wabamzng, (kinawind,) angwa,
wabameg, egwa,
awad.
PERFECT TENSE.
Gi-wdbamag, when I saw him, agwa,
gi-wdbamad., adwa,
Etc, , as abov,e in the present tense, prefixing gi-.
PLUPERFECT TENSE.
FF"«Z>«magiban, had I seen him, agwaban,[|
;adwaban,
apan,
idiban, i . angidwaban,
wdbcun&ngoban, j angwaban,
wdba?negoba.n} '.egwaban,
.z«#c£#?M aw apart, aw apan.
FUTURE TE"NSE,
that I shall see him, agwa,
ge~wabama.d, adwa,
Etc., as above in the present tense, prefixing ge-.
'.SECOND FUTURE TENSE.
Ge-gi-wdbam&g, that I shall have seen him, agwa,
ge-gi-wdbamad, adwa,
Etc. , likewise after the present tense, prefixing ge-gi->
"See Remark 3. p. 45.
204
CONDITIONAL MOOD.
PRESENT, TEXSK.
Nin da-wabam*, I would see him, or I
ought to see him,
fci da-ivabam<tf
o da-wabamxn,
nin da-wabamBfiatt}
ki da-wabam&wa,,
PERFECT TENSE.
Nin da-gi-ivabama, I would have seen him, I
ought, etc.,
ki da-gi-wabamvi,
Etc., after the present tense,
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
l&dbam, see him, ( thou,)
wdbamaknn, please see him,
o ga-wdbam<m, let him see liim,
waba?n&da, let us see i
wdbamig, see him, (you,)
o ga-wabama.\van, let him see him,
PARTICIPLE3.
P RE SENT TENSE.
Singular.
Mn waidbamtg, I who sec him,
win waidbamag, he whom I
kin U'ft'n 'ihti ;//nd, thou \\liu BCOSt him,
win i'-fri(/bam-d(], he wlwun thou seest,
win waiabam&d, he who sees him,
an,
ananig,
a wag,
awan,
ag,
Ge-gi-wabamag, that I would have seen agwa,
him.
akaii,
an,
adanig>
»g»
awan,
205
iniw waidbamsidi'm, he whom he sees,
ninawind waidbamaxisnd, } , •
7 . ' . ,7 > we who see him.
kinawind waiabam&rig, )
win .raWft^ungid, > whom we sg
w?m iffdiaoamangi \
kinawa waidbfimeg, you who see him,
?r/M wdidftdtiieg, he whom- you see,
winawa waidbfinia.d}ig,** they who see him,
iniw wawt&om^wadjin, he whom they see,
wai&bam&gyrQ, I who see them,
winawa waidbam^gig, they whom I see,
A:m icaidbam3.d\v<i> thou who seest them,
winawa waidbam^ig, they whom thou seest,
w;m wdiabam&dt he who sees them,
i?u20 Z(?a2«6amddjin, they whom he sees,
ninawind ivdidbamaneidwa., )
kinawind waidbamw we who
wnawa , i
whom we see'
kinawa ivaiabameg\v.a, you who see them,
winawa waidbamegog, they whom you see,
winawa waidbama.d]igy they who see them,
iniw zmm^awawadjin, they whom they see,
IMPERFECT: TENSE..
Sinular.
Nin waiabamagilmn, I who saw him,.
win ztf«mZ>«??iagiban, he whom I saw,
kin iffaidba?n^diban) thou< who sawest him,
win waidbamadibtLn, he whom, thou sawest,
See Remark p. 26.
206
inn tmzid&amapan, he who saw him,
i iii if" wau&djRapanin, he whom he saw,
ninawind uuzuzfazmangidiban. )
we wll° saw
, ,
wn • he whom we saw'
kinaica waidbamegobzn, you who saw him,
tt?zyz 7/'«/dia?7zegoban, he whom you saw,
t0atd6amapanig, they who saw him,
zw<2o ?6'«mZ>«/;iawa.panin, lie whom they saw.
?r^/c//;r/?«agwaban, T who saw them,
winawa zrata5amagibanig, they ulioin I saw,
Arm inaia^amadwaban, tliou wlio sawest them,
winawa iwzifl&amadibanig, they whom thou sawest,
7/v//V/6r/7wapan, he who saw them,
//Y//a/>c//^apanin, they whom he saw,
idwaban, ) ,wllot,aw theni,
kinawind imia^amanwaban, )
kinaira w?ftt6Jawiegwaban,,1you who saw them,
iritiftirft waiabamegobznig, ibcy whom you saw,
•inmni'd ir(!idlnnm\\)i\\\\^, they who saw tliom,
//////• ;/Y//aAc/^awap;ujiji, they wliojn they saw
PERFECT TCNfll
Singttlar.
JVm gar9Jodbamuat \ wlio have seen him,
;/•/'// ga-irii l>n ni a <j. lie whom I have1 seen,
/:/// nn-u'(ihaun\i\, tliou who'hast-secn him.
JVin ga*wdbam&gw*i 1 wlio liavo ?een them,
n-i >iau'aga-wabam&g\g,t\iey whom I have seen,
207
kin ga-it'dbamadwa, thou who hast seen them.
Etc., after the above present tense, prefixing ga-, to the
verb.
PLUPERFECT TENSfc.
Singular.
Nin ga-wabamag'ibzn, I who had seen him,
fljin^-wa&omagiban, he whom I had seen.
Plural
Nin ga-wdbamagwaban, I who had seen them,
wina ica ga~W(tbamagihzn\g, they whom I had seen.
Etc., after the above imperfect tense.
FUTURE TENSE.
"Singular..
Nin gc-u-abamxg, I who shall see him,
ivin gc-u'dbamzg, he whom I shall see.
Plutal.
Nin gc-u'abamag\va, 1 who shall see them.,
winawa gc-wabamagig, they whom I shall see,
Etc., after the present tense, prefixing gc-.
SECOND FUTURE TENSE
Singular..
Nin ge~g.i-wabama.g, I who shall have seen him,
win ge-gi-wabam&y) he whom I shall have seen,
Plural.
Nin ge-gi-wabamag\v<i, I who shall have seen them,
winawu ge-gi-wabamagig, they whom I shall have seen.
Etc., likewise after the present tense, prefixing ge-gi-.
208
ACTIVE VOICE.
NEGATIVE FORM.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE.
^Singular. Plural.
l\ .aw in nin wdbamzssi, [ don't Kawin assig,
see him,
,, hi toabamassi, yy as>i^.
,} o irafH{.nti\**'m, ,, assin,
„ nin W/V///assi\vanan, ,, assiwana;
,, ki MJO&maseiwawa, „ assiwaw.iir,
„ o ivdbamassi\va.\v<\.n, „ assiwawan,
IMPERFECT
l\.awin nin wa&amassiban, I .did not Kawin assil)anig,
see him,
,, /,•/' ?/Y//>r/;^assihau, - „ assibanig,
,, o ifta&amassibanin, ,, assibanin,
„ nin MHi^amassiwanaban,
,, /„•/' /,'Y//>r////assi\va\vaban, ,, assi\va\val)aninr.
>, o K?a6a7»aj9siwawabaniq, ,, aesiwawabanin,
•
I'Klll'KCT TENSE.
ICiifin nin gi^waAainaati, I have not soon Ktnrin Bflffig,
him,
,, /•/ if/-?/Y//>rt7«assi, ,, assi-.
Ktc., after the present /r//sr, prefixing ^/- to the verb.
l\/ni'in nin i,r/-7/v//>r////assiban, I liad Kairln assibanig.
not seen him,
Etc., after the imperfect tense, likewise prefixing #•/-.
209
Kawin nin ga~wabamassi, I will not see Kawin assig.
him,
„ ki ' ga-wabama.ssi, ' „ assig.
Etc., after the present tense, prefixing ga-.
SECOND FUTURE TENSE.
Kawin ninga-gi-ivabamsissi, I shall not have Kawin assig,
seen him,
„ ki ga-gi-wctlamvLSsi, . ,, assig,
Etc., likewise after the present tense, prefixing ga-gi-.
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE.
Wa&awiassiwag,* if I don't assiwagwa,
see him,
wabama.ssiwu.dj assiwadwa,
waba?na.ss\g, assig,
assiwangidwa,
assiwangwa,
?raZ>amassiweg, assiwegwa,
assigwa.
PERFECT TENSE.
, when I did assiwagwa,
not see him,
gi-wabama,ss\\va.d, assiwadwa,
Etc., as above in the present tense, prefixing gi-.
PLUPERFECT TENSE.
, if I had assiwagwaban,
not seen him,
See Remarks, p.HG.
assiwadwaban,
toaftamassigoban, assigoban,
idiban, V assiwangidwaban,
oban, J
K?a£amassiwangobaQ, j assiwangwaban,
assiwegwaban,
assigwaban,
FUTUKE
, \vlion I shall assiwagwa,
not see him,
ge-wabamaasiw&d, assiwadwa,
Etc., after the present tense, prefixing gc~.
SECOND riTrKE TENSE.
assiwag, when I shall assiwagwa,
not have seen him.
assiwadwa,
Etc., likewise after the present tense, prefixing gc-gi-.
CONDITIONAL MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE.
Kcuwin nin da-wa'bama.ssi, I would not Kawin assig,
see liim, (or, I
ought not to see
him,
,, Id da-wabanr.
ass'm,
ki
o
assiwananig,
assiwawu^.
assiwawan.
PERFECT TENSE.
Kawin nin da-gi-wabanifrssi,. I would not Kawln assig,
have seen him,
or, I ought, etc.
„ ki fhi-gi-icabama.ssit .,. assig,
Etc., as above- in the present tensey. always prefixing gl-
to the verb.
, that I would not- liave seen him,
assiwagwa.
Etc. , as above in the second future of the subj. mood.
IMPERATIVE MOOD,
Kego wabamzken, don't see Kego akeu,
him, (thou,)
„ o ga-ivabamnssin, let him not ,, assin,
see him,
,, z^«iamassida, let us not ,, assidanig,
see him,
,, wabam&kegon, don't see ,, akegon,
him, (you,)
., o ga-wabam&ssiwo.\van, let „ assiwawan,
them not see
him.
PARTICIPLES,
PRESENT TENSE.
Singular.
Nin waia&amassiwag, I who don't see him,
win waiabamdissiwa.g, he whom I do not see,
kin waiabamsissiwad, thou who dost not see him?
212
win waiabamassivfa.d, he whom thou dost not see,
win tooiabama&itig, he who does not sec him,
iniw waiabamassigov, he whom he does not see,
mnawlnd zmza&amassiwangicL ) , , ..
> we who don t see him,
Kinawtna UHztaoaffiassiwang, j
'iiL ) ,
> he whom we do not see.
, j
wn
win
kinawa waiaba?n<iss\wegf you who don't see him,
win waiabama&siweg, he whom you don't see,
winaica u-aiabamassigog, they who don't see him,
•iniw waiabamass'igw&mu, he whom they don't see.
Plural,
Nin waiabama.ss\\vag\va, I who don't see them,
winawa «>aiaJa»ias8iwagig, they whom I don't see,
kin waz«Z>a7/?assiwadvva, thou who dost not see them,
winawa epaia&amassiwadjig, they whom thou dost not see,
win waiabamassig, he who does not see them,
iniw waiabamassigon, they whom he does not see,
ninoicind tr«(,S«MaSsnrai.idwa > weu.,iodon.tseethenl,
th whom we don,t s
winawa waiabamassiwangpgt
kinawa waiabamae&fwtgWfy you who don't see them,
winawa waiabam&ssiwegog, they whom you don't see,
winawa waiabam&88\gog, they who don't see them,
iniw ztfflitf&tfmassigwanin, they whom they don't see.
IMPERFECT TENSE.
Singular.
Nin rmiaJrtmassiwagibnn, T who did not sec him,
irin 7/:<7/<7/W/Massi\vaLril>'iM, lie whom I did not see,
kin ?/v/m/"////assi\\;i<lil>;m, thou who didst, not see him,
;/•//.» //vi!/V//^Ay//nssiw;)(lihan, hf whom thou didst not sec,
ivin wata&amasnobaDi he who did not see him,
213
iniw ?mm&flMassigobanin, he whom he did not see,
ninawind ?c«mtoassiwangidiban, ) we whodidnot
kinawind
win tcaw&flwiassiwangidibaR, Ke wllom we did not s
win ?mza06massiwarigoban, )
kinawawaiabamzssiwegoban, you who did not see him,
win UMuadamassiwegobaiv, he whom you did not see.
•winawa tpataiomassigobaftig, they who did not see him,
MM.*0 iPfleaioctassigwdbaain, lie whom they did not see,
Plural.
Nin teaiaftamassiwagwabaiij I who did not see them,
winawa tpaia&OMassiwagibanig, they whom I did not see,
• kin tt'#z'«Z>awassiwadwaban, thou who didst aiot see
them., T
tcinawa v>aiabamO8s\ir&diba.mg, tliey whom thou didst not
see,
win imia&amassigoban, he who did not see them,
iniw toataiamassigobamn, they whom he did not s..,
ninawind wata&aniassiwangidwabaii, ) we who did not see
Ninawind ?^am&amassiwangwaban, ^ them,
trinaioa icaia&amassiwangidibanig, \ they whom \ve did
•tcinau'a twiia&amassiwangobanrg, j not see,
kinawa MJamiamassiwegwaban, you who did not see
them,
Ji'inawa ?c»«mftamassiwegobanig, they whom you did not
see,
winawa ?/>«mZ'«wassigobanig, they who did not see them,
iniw ztfaia&awassigwabanin, they whom they did not
see.
PERFECT TENSE.
Singular.
JVm ga-iodbamassiwag, I who have not seen him,
win ga-tt>dbamBLSSiwa.g, he whom I have not seen,
kin ga-ivabamnssi\va.d, thou who hast not seen him,
14
214
Plural.
Aw g-tf-wa&flwassiwagwa, I who have not seen them,
vAnawa ga-wabajna.ss'nvagig, they whom I have not seen.
kin ga-wabam&ssiwadwa., thou who liast not seen th' »
Etc., after the jn-esent tense, prefixing ga-.
PLUPERFECT TENSE.
Singular.
Nin ga-wabama.ssiwaig\bcLn, I who had not seen him,
win ga-iuabamzssiwagiban, he whom I had not seen.
Plural
Nin ga-wabama.ssi\vag\v&bnn, I who had not seen them,
mhawa grt-wa&awassiwagibanig, they whom I had not seen.
Etc., after the above imperfect tense prefixing ga-.
FUTURE TENSE.
Singular.
Nin gc~wabanm.ssiwsig, I who shall not see him,
win ge-wabamassiwag, he whom I shall not see.
Plural
Nin gc-wabama.ssiwa.gwa., I who shall not see them,
winawa gc-wabama.ssiwa.gig, they whom I shall not see.
Etc., after the present tense, prefixing gc~.
SECOND FUTURE TENSE.
Singular.
Nin ge-gi-wabamassiwzg, I who shall not have seen
him,
win gc-gi-ivabam&ssiwag, he whom I shall not have
seen.
215
Plural
Nin ge-gi-wabamzssi\vag\va, I who shall not have seen
them,
winawa ge-gi~ivabamass\\vag\g, they whom I shall not have
seen.
Etc., likewise after the present tense, prefixing ge-gi~.
Note. Review the Rules and Remarks regarding the
Change, and apply them to these two forms, the affirmative
and the negative.
EXAMPLES ON THE WHOLE ACTIVE VOICE.*
INDICATIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE. Nin sdgia Kijc-Manito, nin sagiag gciic
kakina nidfanishinabeg, kaivin awiia nin jingenimassi.
I love God, and I love all my fellow-men,! hate nobody.
Nin gagtkimananig mojag ninidjanissinanig ; eniwzk
dash bisdn abiwag. We speak always to our children,
(we exhort them,) and they are tolerably quiet.
Nin kikemina noss, kinawa dash kaivin ki kikenimassi-
wawa. I know my father, but you don't know him.
Awkwiwisens o kitchitwdweniman ossan, h(t wika odagon-
wetawassin. This boy honors his father, he never diso-
beys him.
IMPERFECT TENSE. Nind dnikanotawalan aw inini meg'
wa oma aiad. I interpreted for that man during his stay
here.
* See Note, p. 122. See Remark 4. p. 45.
216
Mishime kawin wika o ganonaxnibanin Iniw ininiican,
iHrngom dash wr.wcrii ganonidiwag. My brother never
spoke to that man, but now they speak friendly to each
other.
A.W oshkinawe mckatevriJcwuiaien od anokituu'dbanin !>i-
honong. This young man worked for the Missionary
last winter.
Kawin wika odiji babamitawassiwawabanin pirigiigowan,
nongom cji-babamitaicawad. They never obeyed so well
their parents, as they obey them now.
PERFECT TENSE. Kawin wewcni win gi-ni*sitotavxi&si an-
inini ga-ikitod. I have not well understood that man,
what he has said, ( I have not well understood what that
man said.)
Kitclii nibiwa jimaganisliag nin gi-nagishkawananig,
kawin na gaie kinawa ki gi-wabamassiwawag ? \Ve
met a great many soldiers, did not you also see them ?
Weweni nin gi-ganona, kawin nin gi-matchi indssi. I
spoke to him in a fair manner, I did not give him any
bad words.
Judawininiwag o gi-kotagiawan, o gi-nissawan gale DC-
bendjigcnidjin. The Jews made the Lord suffer, and
put him to death.
PLUPERFECT TENSE. Kin gi-islikwa-kikinoamawdbdnig
abinodjiiag apt pandigewad anishinabcg. I had done
teaching the children when the Indians came in.
Kawin na kin ki gi-awassiban aw migwan, fooa-ojibiig-
><l. aw ikwtsens 1 Hadst thou not used this pen, before
that girl wrote ?
joniian a gi-dtuwamabanin witan. Jle
had borrowed ten dollars of his brother-in-law.
217
Kinawa na ki gi-bamiawabanig nijodensag, Iwapindig-
anindwa akosiwigamigong 1 Had you taken care of the
little twins, before they were brought to the hospital.
FUTURE TENSE. Ki ga-babdmitawa na nongom kost /
Ki ga-minadenima na ? Kawin na minawa ki ga-ma-
tchi-nakwetcncassi ? Wilt thou obey now thy father ?
Wilt thou respect him ? Wilt thou not give him any-
more bad answers ?
Kishpin cnamiangin ijiwcbisiieg, ki ga-wabamawag kin-
idjanissiwag gijigong tbidjig. If you behave like Christ-
ians, you will see your children that are in heaven.
Debeniminang o ga-dibakonan Jcakina anishinabcn ; mc-
no-ijhcebisinidjin dash gijigong o gad-assan. Our Lord
will judge all men, and the good ones he will place in
heaven.
Kctwin nongom nin ga-ndsikawassi aw inini, panima
wabang nin gad-ijanan. I will not go to that man to-day,
to-morrow I will visit him.
SECOND FUTURE TENSE. Tchi bwa onagwishig nin g«-
gi-kikenima enendang. Before evening I shall have
known his idea.
Kawin ganabatcli mashi ki ga-gi-ganonassi iwapi.
You will probably not yet have spoken to him by that
time.
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE. Weweni gijendan tchi sagiad Kije-Man-
ito, tchi anokitawad gaie ; wika dash tchi wissokawassi-
wadwa mctchi-ijiicebisidjig. Firmly resolve to love
218
God, and to serve him ; and never to join the company
of the wicked.*
Kishpin jaw&nimegwa kttimagisidjig, mino dodawcgira
gaic, win. ii^o Jesus ki mino dodatcawa* If you have
mercy on the poor, (afflicted,) and treat them well, you
treat well Jesus himself.
Waiejimad awiia, gimodimad gaic, kin tibinawe Id ma-
tchi dodos, awashime win eji-matchi-dodawad. Ifthou
cheatest somebody, and stealest something from him,thou
wrongest thyself more than him.
Ginu-tnj wdbtimdssiwangidwa nlnd inawemaganinanig,
nin kashkcndamin. If we don't see our relations a long
time, we are sad. (The person or persons spoken to, nut
included. — See Remark 3. p. 45.)
PERFECT TENSE. Nin gi-minwendamln gi-nondawangid
mckatewikwanaie gi-anamicgijigak. We were satisfied
(contented) when we heard the .Missionary last Sunday.
(The person or persons spoken to, not included.)
Kawin Id gi-gashkitosslmln tcJi'i gi-gagtoedjttnang gf^n
(in- ini-ni, osam sa at china oma gi-d'xi. \\"c. could not
ask that man any questions, he was here too short a time.
(The person or persons spoken to, included.)
Anishfoin gi-babamitawossiwadwa kinigiigog ? Why ha^t
thou not listened to thy parents ?
Gi-labamcnimfissiirrgir,'! /•/' pijikimhrctir, mi ga-onrlji-ni-
hnwad. Your oxen died because you did not take care
of them.
PLUPERFECT TENSE. IVeweni ganawenimangidwdbctn nin
joninniLinmiig, kawin 'iimigoiii nin dfr-kitimagisitsimi*
JIad we well taken care of our money, we would not be
poor now.
1)a-«i-nibt> aw aiakotit/, irriroii gv&amiassiw&ngidiban.
This sick person would have died, had we not well taken
care of him. (The person spoken to, not included.)
•:c Remarks, p. 11G.
219
Ginaamawapan oddnan, kaivin wedi da-gi-ijassiwan. If
he had forbidden it to his daughter, she would not have
gone there.
Klkinoamawegwaban kinidjanissiwag gwaiako-bimadi si-
win, kaivin da-gi-dodansiwag ga-dodamowad. Had you
taught your children uprighteousness, they would not
have done what they did.
FUTURE TENSE. Aniniwapi ga-ndsikawag Jesus 1 When
shall I go to Jesus ?
Eji-minwendameg tclddodagoieg, mi ge-dodawegwa kidf
anish&nabewag. What you like that should be done to
you, even that you should do to your fellow-men.
Gonima ningoting kawin ki gad-aiaw&isi pakwcjigatt
ged-amoad. Perhaps the time will come when thou shall
have no bread to eat.
Kije-Manito kid apitchi dibenimigonan ; mi gc-ondji-
anvkitawang mojag, mi ge-ondji-agouwetaivassiwan^
wika. God is our absolute master ; therefore we will
serve him always, and we will never disobey him.
SECOND FUTURE TENSE. Enamiad gc-gi-iji-sagiad Kije-
Maniton, mi ged-iji-aiad kagige bimadisiwining. As the
Christian shall have loved God, even so he shall be in
life everlasting, (happy or unhappy.)
Ge-gi-iji-kikinoamawad abinodji, mi iw ge-dodang Icetclii-
anishinabewidjin. What thou shalt have taught the child,
that he will do when he is a grown man.
CONDITIONAL MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE. Kislipin wdbamad Kije-Manito, win cji-
wabamik, ki da-gossd, ki da manadjia gate, kawin das/i
ondjita ki da-nislikiassL If thou couldst see God as he
sees thee, thou wouldst fear him, thou wouldst respect
him, and thou wouldst not purposely offend him.
Wabameg osawa joniia, gonima osam ki da-misscnc-
enimawa. If you saw gold, you would, perhaps, too much
covet it.
220
A'; dn-nasikawa aw ga-iiishkiik, ki da-mitw-rjanouadu.*...
Thou oughtst to go to the person that has offended thee,
and thou oughtst to speak friendly to him, (her.)
Kau-in ncta-minikcnidjin f> da-wissokawa&sin. lie ought
not to frequent the company of drunkards.
PERFECT TENSE. Nin da-gi-anwenimag wabamagteaban
I would have reprimanded them had I seen them.
Kairin nin da-gi-b/assi, kikenimagiban g'uiHvnj fr/ii bi-
•ijattiig. I would not have waited for him, had I knowis
that he would not come so long.
Ode nan g ijdiangoban, Kitchi-mekatewikwanaie, ki dd-gi-
•iruhainauan. Were we gone to town, we would hnvr
seen the bishop.
Mewija ki du~gf-dibaamawawa nta irc/r/nt'n/ ; wigc-fri-mii-
jiskingiban. You ought to have paid the merchant Ton^
ago ; that would' have been fair.
I\fi i w ge-gi-inag, or, ge-gi-inagiban* That, is what I
would have told him.v
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
Anwrn'un kinidjanissy kishfW match) dodany ; bdltiuntnm
rjitrebisid, kego pagidlnakcn,, win cnendung fc/ii dodang
Reprimand thy child, when he does wrong ; turn thj
attention to his conduct ; don't permit him to do a> In
pleases.
Ashamdkan bekaded, jawcnimdkan kefimagisidt ki gn-mt-
itiig dash misi gego Waidbandang. Feed the hungr}-
and be charitable to tlte poo^ and lie who sees all will,
love- thee.
O - ga-nandoMfrn ttnis&UKzbcfr, o- ga-windamawan daxh ga-
nut". Let him call; the Indians, and let him tell then*
wliat I told kim».
l\i-<Ttt o gcHnatthi-dajimassin iridf ikwtwan. Let her aot
speak ill of her fellow-women,
Remark 8, page II 9L
221
Wewenl sagiada Debe-niminang, mamoiawamada ; kcgo
dash wika agonwetawassida. Let us love our Lord, let
us be thankful to him ; and let us never disobey him.
Mikwenimadanig naningim yijigong eiadjig aiapitchi-
jaicendagosidjig ; kcgo, gate wansnimassidanig andmak-
amig ebidjig kaiagige-kotagitodjig. Let us often think
on those that are in heaven, whp are exceedingly happy ;-.
and let us not forget those that are in hell, who suffer
eternally.
Takobinig onindjing, osidang gaie^ sagid/jiwebimg daslt
kaskkitibikadong. Bind him hand and foot, and" cast
him into outer darkness.
Kego awiiajingenimakegon, kego gaie awiia batamakegon.
Don't hate anybody,, and don't calumniate anybody.
\Yinawa nongom agad-aivawan pijikiwan*. Let them to-
day use the oxen.
Kego animoshag o gad-amodsslwawan iniw jjakwejiganau .
Let not the dogs eat up this bread.
O ga-sagidinawan gawaslikictbinidjin. Let them turn ou-t
the drunkards^
PARTICIPLES*
J-RKSENT TENSE.. Jawendagosi wcdabamdd Kije-Manitoii
gijigong. Happy is he who sees God in heaven.
Nenibikimassigog onidjanissiwan ta-animisiwag dibako*
nidiwining. Those who donl reprimand their children,
will suffer at the judgment
Kinawa maidwandjicg joniia,_ jewenima,ssiweg ketimagi*
fid jig, meshkwat klnawa ki ga-fcitemctgisim gi-ishkwa-bim-*
adisiieg. You that accumulate money, you that have no
charity towards the poor, you- will be- poor in your turn
after this -life-.
jBatainoivag igiw mdnadjig ge-bisikamowad. Those are-
many to whom thou givest clothing.
Kl mino dfld.am kin mdnad gego. ketimagisidjig.. Thou
doest well in giving somethiitg to the poor,
IMPERFECT TENSE. Aw oshJnnawe neganadiban pttrliina-
go, jtba gi-d&guishin. The young man whom thou leftst
behind yesterday, arrived this morning.
Nuss cnonapaiiui gi-g'tmiu'dii tibikong. The person
\vhom my father hired, deserted last night.
IVinaira enonegob&nig iccu'cni gi-(tno/>ih'-ag. The per-
sons whom you hired, worked well.
Nind ina iccmaganag toaidbamasstiocgebamg sigwanong.
nongom minawa oma aiawag* My relatives whom you
did not see last spring, are now here again.
PERFECT TENSE. Gi-jawcndagosrtaag ighr ga-wabamad-
jig Jcsusan, ga-nondawadjig gft/c; awdshime dash gi-
jawendagosiwag ga babctmitawadjig, Uuppy were they
\vlio saw Jesus and heard him ; but happier yet were
ihose who obeyed him.
Mi aw ikw6s£nsjJDika ga-agonwetawassig onigngon. This
is the girl that never has disobeyed her p;tn ;
Kinhwaga-pagidinassiwegwaqiriidjanissiwqg iiimiiditig
/ •/' g'i-inlno-dodam. You who have not permitted your
children to go to a ball, you have done right
Ki n idjd » /.v.v / mig gft-jtfn? id in a*s i wgog iu ntch I m i ?? a ira n i -
gosiwining, ningoting Av' ga-m&moiawamigowag. Your
children whom you did not permit to g"o to sinful plea-
sures, will once thank you.
PLUPERFECT TKNSK. Igiit
ohauiif /id/ling////, 'iiotigotii u'rirt-ni (in(i/ni(nr<ig. Those
Indians to whom we had spoken so often, are now good
'Christians. (The person or persons spoken to., inc/u-
'J'hc Indian.- to whom \vc li ad spoken, (whom wehadcxlmrt-
fd,) are gone. (The person or persons spoken t
included.)
inl;n g&nagibucastiwegeba*
223
tiongom weiceni mawadissig. You who never had gone
to the Missionary, pay him now a visit.
Mi aw mini ga-atdwamadiban anokasowinan. This is
the man from whom thou hadst borrowed tools.
Mi aw kwiwisens ga-awiassiwagiban nin masinaigan ;
osa?n sa o banadjiton. This is the boy to whom I had
not lent my book, because he spoils it too much.
FUTURE TENSE. Aw u'cweni gc-pagossenimad Dcbcndji-
gcnldjin, o ga-jaii'cnimigon. He who shall well pray to
the Lord, will obtain mercy.
Enamiad ge-sagiassig itridfanishinabtn,ge-bonigidetaw-
assig gate, kawin f/aie icin ta^bonigidetawassi. The
Christian who shall not love his neighbor, and shall not
forgive him, he shall not be forgiven either.
Ge-nojnnanadjig gijlgong cb/nidjin, ta-dagwisliinog icedi
gale winawa. They that follow those who are in heaven,
will also themselves arrive there.
FUTURE TENSE. Aw ge-gi-is.h&wa-wissokawad
netd-giwashkwtbini(lji)>, o ga-bouiton gate win mtttchi
minikwewin. lie who shall have given up the company
of habitual- drunkards, will step also himself bad drink-
ing
Win ge-gi-sftgiassig Kije-Mmiiton oma aking, kawin
pitchinag wedi ajida-bimadishvining ta-madjitassi ?/•/•
sagiad. He who shall not have loved God on earth.
shall neither in the n'ext life begin to love him.
PASSIVE VOICE.
AFFIRMATIVE FORM. . TIVE I'OKM.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TEXSK.
:\~Vw wabamlgOyl am seen, Knwin igossi,
ki irabanrigo, " i^ossi,
irnbamn, " assi,
o ritaftamigon,* he is seen
by ... " igossin,
win irabamigmnm, igossimin,
ki wabamigom, " igossim,
o wa/w/figowan, they are... t4 igossiwan,
IMPERFECT TKNSE.
JV//j ioafczmigonaban, I was Kawin igossinaban,
seen,
ki //'f/^r/wigonaban,. igossinaban,
assiban,
o ym/wwigobanin, he was. . .
igossiminaban,
Kw&amabanig, assibanig,
//v//^////i(T()\vabanin, igossiwabanin.
TENSE.
Win gi-wab*migot] have been s. Kawin igossi,
Ktr., alti-r thr present tense, prefixing^*-.
i^ee Remark ;\l the cod of this paradigm.
PLUPERFECT TENSE.
Nin gi-wabamigouabzin, I had Kawin igossinaban,
been seen,
ki gi-wabam\goncib<m, " igossinaban,
Etc., after the above imperfect tense.
FUTURE TENSE.
Nin ga-wabamigo, I will be s. Kawin' igossi,
ki ga-wabamigo, igossi,
Etc., after the above present tense, prefixing ga-.
.SECOND FUTURE TENSE.
Vm ga-gi-wabamigo, I shall have Kawin igossi,
been seen,
Etc,, likewise after the present tense, prefixing ga-gi-.
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOR
PRESENT TENSE.
Wabamigoian, if I am igossiwan,
seen,
tmz&omijgoian, igossiwan,
wabamind, a^siwind,
wabamigod, if he is s. by, igossig,
t wabamigoiang, ) ... igossi wang,
w?d6amigoiang, j ' igossiwang,
wabamigoieg, igossiweg,
ivabam'mdwa., assiwindwa,
wabamigowad, if they . . igossigwa,
PERFECT TENSE.
1 6ri-zm6amigoian, when I igossiwan,
have been seen,
gi-wabamigoia.il, igossiwan,
Etc., after the present tense, prefixing gi-.
t See Remark 6, p. 117.
t See Remark!, p. 118.
PLUPERFECT TENSE.
Waif/wigoiamban, had I igossiwamban,
been seen,
tPofomigoiamban, igossiwamban,
«Y//>rt//muliban, lissiwindiban,
wabcmiigopan, had he igossigoban,
been seen by. .
waiflwigoiangiban, ) had igossiwdngiban,
t0a&<2wigoiangoban, j we. igossiwangoban,
w>aZ>awMgoiegoban, igossi wegoban,
?rrt?>r/windwaban> assiwindwaban,
igossigwaban,
FUTURE TENSE.
Ge-wabamigoi&n, when I igossiwan,
will be seen,
ge-wabam\<ro\a.n, igossiwan,
Etc., after the above present tense, prefixing gc-.
SECOND FUTURE TENSE.
Ge-gi-wabamigo'ian, when I igossiwan,
shall have . . .
Etc., after the present tc?isc, prefixing ge-gi-,
CONDITIONAL ' MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE,
Nin da-wabamigo, I would be Kawin igossi,
seen,
ki da-wabaniigo,
da-wabam^
o da-wabamigon, he would
be seen by ...
nin da-wabamigom'm,
ki da-wabamigom,
igossi,
assi,
igossin,
igossimin,
igossim,
assiwag,
o da-wabamigowan, they . . *' igossiwan.
"
227
PERFECT TENSE.
Nin da-gi-wabam\go, I would have Kawin igossi,
been seen.
Etc., after the abov;e present tense,
Ge-gi-u'c(bamigo'i&n, that I would have been seen ; Ge-gi-
wabatmgossiw&n, that I would not have been seen.
Etc.., as above in the second future of the subj* mood.
IMPERATIVE MOOD,
Ki ga-wabamigo,. be seen, (thou,) Kego igossi7.
ta-wabam&r let him be seen, "• assi,
nin ga-wabamigomin, let us be seen^ ** igossimin^
ki ga-wabamigomrbe seen,, (you,) " igossim,
ta~wabam<L\va,g, let them be seen, " as&iwag,.
PARTICIPLES,
PRESENT TENSE,
Nin waidbamigo'iin, I who am seen, igossiwjp,,
kin waidba?nigoi<mr thou who art . . igossiwan,
win waiabamind, he who is seen/ assiwind,
win ivaidbamigod, he who i&seen by . . igossig,
ninawind waiabam\goi£ng, ) we who are igossiwdng?
kinawind waiabamigoiang, > seen, igossiwang,
kinawa waiabam\goi\eg, you who are . . igossiweg,
wlnawa waidbammd-wa, they who are . . assiwindwa,
winawa waidbamigodjig, they who are igossigog,
seen by ...
IMPERFECT TENSE.
Nin waiabctimgoi&mb<LT\f I who was . „ igossiwalmban,
kin Mwrnfomigoiambaii, igossiwamban,
win waiabamindibzu,. assiwindiban,
ninawind ivaiabamigoi&ngiba.&, > igossiwangiban,
kinawind wam&awigoiaDgoban, J " ' igossiwangoban?
228
kintnra zmtflJawigoiegoban, igossiwegoban,
winaica waiabam'mdibamg, assiwindibanig,
PERFECT TENSE.
Nin ga-wabam\go\a.n, I who have b. s. igossiwan,
kin ga-wabamigoiaiii, igossiwan,
Etc. , sifter the above present tense.
PLUPERFECT TENSE.
Nin ga-wabam\goiumbxn, I who "had . . igossiwamban,
kin ga-wabamigoia.mba.il, igossiwamban,
Etc., after the above imperfect tense, prefixing £dk
FUTURE TENSE.
Nin ge-wabamigoian, I who will be s. igossiwan,
kin ge-wabamigoian, igossiwan,
Etc., after the present tense.
SECOND FUTURE TENSE.
Nin ge-gi-wabam'igo\£n, I who shall . . igossiwan.
kin ge-gi-waba?n'igoian, igossiwan,
Etc., likewise after the above present tense .
Remark. When a verb in the passive voice in the third
person, has no report to another third person in the sen-
tence, the terminations of the first kind, in a, a wag, etc.,
are employed; (seep. 224.) F. i. Wabania air kiriirisens,
that boy is seen ; wabamawag igiw /'/-//v.sv/j.NV/i,', those girls
are seen ; without any report to another third person. But
when there is a second third person in the sentence, the ter-
minations of the second >kind, in igon, igowan, etc., are
used. F. i. Ossan o WY//W ////#(/// mr ku-iiriwns, that boy is
seen by ///.s fat her. Oiriiran o toabatitigOtMM ill in* ikm*-
• utifig, those girls «ire seen hi/ fhcir inollur. Osstin, his fa-
ther, and ogiwan, their mother, an- the second third persons
m these sentences. (See page 73,)
229
The verbs of this Conjugation ending in awa, are con-
jugated exactly after the paradigm Nln wabama, through-
out the whole ACTIVE voice. But in the PASSIVE voice they
differ a little.
We shall point out here below the moods and tenses, in
which the verbs ending in awa, differ from the verb Nin
wabama. We take the verb Nin nondawa, I hear him,
(her, it,) for an example. Here we don't put only the final
a among the terminations, as we did in Nin wabama, but
the w also; because we use to consider (in Conjugations,)
as the body of the verb only those syllables and letters,
\vhichjemain unchanged throughout the whole Conjugation.
PASSIVE VOICE.
AFFIRMATIVE FORM. NEGATIVE FORM.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE.
J\in nondago, I am heard, Kawin^gossi,
ki nondago,
nondawa,
o nondagon, he is heard by . .
nin nondagomm,
ki nondagom,
wassi,
.gossin,
gossimin,
gossim,
wassiwag,
gossiwan,
o nondagowa.u, they are heard
by . . .
IMPERFECT TENSE.
Nin nondagonabzn, I have b. h., Kawin gossinaban,
ki nondagonzb&n, " gossinaban,
nondawzban, <( wassiban
15
230
0-wonrfagobanm, he was h. " gossibanin,
by . . .
ftin ttOM'/agominaban, " gossiminaban,
ki lumciag bmwaban, " gossimwabari,
?i0w/rwaban-ig, " wassibanig,
o nondagowaban'm, they were " gossiwabanin,
heard by ...
Form the other tenses of the indirafirc. mood after these
two tenses, prefixing gi- or ga-9 according to the preceding
paradigms ; as : N/n gi-nondago . . . Air'«. gi~nondaganar
''d.n . . , Nin ga-nondago . . . Nin ga-gi-nattdagat.
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD
PRESENT TENSE,
n nondago\&.n* if I am heard, Kislyrin gossiwan,
nondagoian, ** gossiwan.
nowr/awind,
nondagod, if he is IK by . ,,
wassiwind,
o;os.sig,
gossiwang,
nondagoinng, $ A1 gossiwang,
nondagoieg, gossiweg,
nondawmdvfft, wnssi \\indwa.
nondagowad, if they are h. gossigwa^
by..,
PERFECT TENSE,
Gi-jwndagoian, that I have b. h. gossiwdn,
gi-nondagoiaB, gossiwisn.
Etc.,, as above in the present tense, prefixing gi-r
' ' •
See Remarks, page 119.
231
PLUPERFECT TENSE.
, had I been gossiwamban,
heard,
gossiwamban,
wassiwindiban,
w0«6?agopan, had he been gossigoban,
heard by . . .,
nondagoiangib'du, ) had we gossiwangibaii,
w0/irffflgoiangoban, J been h. gossiwangoban,
gossiwegoban,
wassiwindwaban,
noncftzgowapan, had they gossigwaban,
been heard by ...
Form the two future tenses after the above present tense,
prefixing ge-, and gc-gi-.
The t\vo tenses of the conditional mood are easily form-
ed after the present and perfect tenses of the indicative
mood ; as : Nin da-nondago, I would be heard. . . Nin
do-gi-nondago, I would have been heard. . .
IMPER ATI VE . MOOD.
Ki ga-nondago, be heard, (thou,) Kego gossi,
ta-nonda\va, let him be heard, ". wassi,
rtin ga-nondagom'm, let us -be h., " gossimin,
ki ga-nondagom, be heard, (you,) " gossim,
^rt-7i0wf/awawag, let them be " wassi wag,
heard,
PARTICIPLES.
PRESENT TENSE.
Nin nwandagoi£n, I who am heard,
kin nwandagoizn, thou who art heard, etc,,
win nwandawind,
3*9
iiinairind .
kinauind ,,,,-a^o^, wc who are heard>
kinawa nicandctgoieg,
icinawa nwandawindjig,
m Ttwarwfogossiwan, I who am not heard,
khi nwonrfagossiwari, thou who . . . etc.,
irin ;2?rtt/jc/<Y\vassi\vind,
ninawind nwaTMtogossiwarig, >
we who are not
kinawa it ira n da goss i wog ,
mnawa n Z6*«wrfawassiwindjig.
IMPERFECT TJ:
iarnban, I who was heard,
ninawind y/?^y/r/c/goiangiban, ) ,
kinau'ind nwandagoi&ngobaR, i
/H. nu?a7^affossiwamban, I who was not. heard,
?/•///
,
, , / we who were not h.,
kinawind wtt?an«#gossiwangoban, )
/.- / //Y/ ,vv/ ?/ ?rr/ y/ r/,7 <r« >s s i \v( • ir< > ! > ; 1 1 1 ,
irincnra
Form the other four tenses of these participles after the
above prrsrnL ;UH! i/u/xrfcrf tenses : as : A"/'// ^(t- nondago-
ian. . . AY// ga-ttondagoidjjiban. . . JViti ge-nond&goidn. . .
\in gC'gi~nondagoidn. . .
llrnifirk. There are some verbs belonirinjr to this IV.
., whicli end in <»i-a. It must, however, be observed,
233
that the letter o, before the syllable wa in these verbs, is
hardly heard, or rather not at all, in some moods and tenses ;
as: Nind ininajaowa, I send him; nind agiuanaoica, I co-
ver him ; nin pakiteowa, I strike him ; nin kibdkwaowa, I
shut him up ; nin handontowa, I look for him ; nin bash'tba-
owa, I stab him, etc. In hearing these verbs pronounced,
we should think they ought to be written : Ininajawa, ag-
wdnawa, pakitewa, kibdkwxwa^ naiidonewa, bash'ibawa, etc.
But it is grammatically certain that there is an o before iva.
In some inflections of these verbs this o appears openly, (as
you will see below,) and we could never grammatically ac-
count for its appearance, if we did not assume, that these
verbs really end in owa at the first person singular,
pres., indie., act. voice. An accurate speaker will let it
sound a little.
Let us now examine, how far the verbs ending in owa,
differ in conjugating from those ending in awa, which we
have considered above.
In the ACTIVE voice they conform to the paradigm Nin
wabama; like those ending in aira ; except in the impera-
tive mood, as you will see by and by. ,But in the PASSIVI:
voice there is some difference. The indicative mood does
not differ. Take off the end-syllable wa, as you do in Nin
nondawa ; and th.n attach the terminations of the paradigm
Nin nondago, and you will correctly conjugate the indica-
tive. F. i. Nin pakiteogo , I am struck ; nin pakifeogdna-
ban, I was struck : nin gi- pakiteogo, I have been struck,
The subjunrtire. mood differs a little, in the third persons,
follows :
PASSIVE VOICE.
\FFIRMATIVE FORM. NEGATIVE FOKM.
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE.
Pakiteogoi&n, if I am struck, gossiwan.
pakiteogoian, gossiwan.
pakitffoviQ^ wassiwind,
pakiteogod, if he is st. by ... gossig,
gossiw;'
gossweg,
wassiwindwn,
gossi g w a .
PERFECT TENSE.
rV/-;;r//.://cogoian, when I have been st. gossiwan,
gi-pakitcogoi&n, gossiwan,
Etc., after the above present tense.
:-I'KllFECT TK.\
P«A,i^eogoiumbnn, had T been struck, gossiwainban.
pa^ii^ogoiamban, gossiwainban,
pakiteondib&n, wassiwindiban,
.,. , gossiu 'unirib
l
gossiwangoban.
gossiwegobaxij
wassiwindwaban.
Form the two ////// /•/• tenses of the sabjunctt TO after the
above present tense, vi/ : Gc-p<lJrittogOiaH . . . Gc-gi~p«-
k'ttt'ogoian . . .
-<:e Remark 3, p. 11 fi.
235
The two tenses of the conditional mood are easily formed
after the above present and perfect tenses, viz : Nin
da-pakiteogo . . . Nin da-gi-pakiteogo . . .
The imperative mood is to be formed after the above
paradigm, viz : Ki ga-pakiteogo . . . Ta-pakiteowa . . , etc,
PARTICIPLES.
PRESENT TENSE,
Nin pekittogoia.il, I who am struck,
kin pekiteogaian,
win pekiteond,
kinawa pekitcogoicg,
Nin pckiteogossiw&n, I who am not struck
kin pekiteogossiwan,
win pckiteowassiw'md,
nmawM
h
kmawind
:naiva jy^Ari/
4MPERFECT TENSE.
Jtfin pcArz^eogoiamban, I who was struck.,
kin pekifeogoia.mb'dn,
win ^e&iteoBdiban,
.nimMndpckticogoiang'ib^ ) h k
kinawmd pekitcogoizmgobw, f *
kinawa j»e&?'/e#goiegobaii,
ffiin peHteogoeeAwambm, I who was not struck-,
236
ninawind /?e&i££?gassiwdDg)bftn, ) we who were not
kinairind iH'ki1t'<»_ oban, \ struck,
kinnwa jp^ile^gpssiwegoban ,
irinau'a jjckitrn\\ ;i>si\\ mdibanig.
Form the other tenses of these participles ofter the above
two tenses, viz : ISin ga-pakiUogmfcn . . . Nin ga-pakit(<\-
fiibsm . . . Nin ge-pakit£og<>ian . . .
EXAMPLES ON THE WHOLE PASSIVE V()l
INDICATIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE. Nin wd$av\igo, tiin nondagn gait- : d<i-
inendam cnamlad mojaa;, in '/ .< : ir <'• grtic. A Cliristir;n cn^ln
to thi?ik always and everywhere : I am sceu and [ an>
heard.
A.W abinodji kawin mashi sigaandawa&si, kutrin gair
anishinabeg sigaandawassiwag iiiathi. Tliis child
>i yet baptized, nor are these Indians baptized yet.
jMabam tkwescns inino ganawenima, omixxcian o
kimigon mojag. This girl is well taken care of: she i>
always exhorted by licr sister.
IMPERFECT TENSE. Nin nancLdmlgominaban gene ntnatrind
mtui-iding, kawin dn.</i. /tin izi-ijus* iinin. We were alsc..
invited to the ball, bin we did not <TO.
\Veirc.ni ki b.abamit<t«o)ntr(ih(H> iru'u-shknt, krnrin irU:<t
kid agontottagossimwaban. You AV<M-C \\rll obi-ycd in the
beginning; you were nerer coutradicted, (disobt-yed.)
I\(ikina nandomabanigi /v/ //•/'•// r/as/r annul it\n<lii*c
All were called, but some don't come in.
PERFECT TENSE. Kctimagisidjig gi-askamcntrag,
kawin awiia gi-ikonajaogosti turn w.hrin<?-
Note, p. 1
237
gcgo. The poor have been fed, and have been clothed ;
nobody has been sent away before he was given some-
thing.
Gi-besiawag na mishimmag? — Kawin mashi bosiassi-
wav. Have the apples been shipped? — They have not
yet been shipped, (they are not yet on board.)
Kitclu nibiwa waitclikat gi-kotagidwag, gi-niss&ieag
gaie, anam.iewin ondji. In the begiimirig, great many
have been made to suffer, and have been put to death, for
religion's sake.
PLUPERFECT TENSE. Nin gi-kitchi-anokiigondban nifrinong,
hckish dash nin gi-mino-dodagonaban. Much work was
given to me last summer ; but at the same time I was
well treated.
Kakina gi-riitawigiabanig ninidjanisaag gi-bwa-nibod
ogiwabanin. All my children were grown up, (had grown
up,) before their mother died.
Nin gi-aqpnigominqbari a/)/ dcgwiahing nimishoim^nan.
We had been engaged, (hired, employed,) when our uncle
arrived.
FUTURE TEXSE. Ki gGr-dibakonig&ftiin gi-ishkwa-bimcidis-
iiang; ffijtgoHg dash ki gd-ptndigdnigomin^ kislipln
guviiak ijiwebisiiatig. We will be judged after this life,
and we wiH be admitted into heaven, if we behave, well.
Kishp'm bisfui aiaicg, kwiwisensidog^ kawln- wika ki ga-
nantbikimigossim, I: a win gaic ki ga-ibaskanf&ogossim. If
you remain quiet, boys, you will never be rebuked,
and you will not be whipped.
Kejewadisid enamiad ta-sagia, ta-bonigidataica, Jcagige
dcbisiwin dash gijigong ta-mina. The charitable Chris-
tian will be. loved, will be forgiven, and in heaven he will
be given an everlasting happiness.
SECOND FUTURE TENSE. Kawin iwapi maslii nin ga-gi^
minigossi, gc-mmigoian. At that time I shall not have,
bejen given yet.4 what I am to be given.
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE. Apcgish m'nw dmlmrind inn/fig air inini :
(//t('«ic/i u-ikd nnttrhi. dajim&ssiwincl. I wish tliat man
would always be treated well, and never be spoken ill
of.
Kith pin ostan ptsindagad <tw oxJikinajrc, Icnirin xm«
mate/it ikitutsi ; tumdagostig dank o.win,-kitrlii triitigijur.
When that young man is heard by his father, he does not
say a bad word ; but when he is not heard by his father,
he speaks very indecently.
]\U mi enamiekasodjig wendji-mino-dodamowad, anis/ii-
naln-n t.rhi u-ohtnni^nirdd ', tchi minowinigowad gdie. The
reason why hypocrites do good works, is, to be seen and
praised by men.
PERFECT TENSE, tjrfrw&iejimind Haningim, gi-gimodimind
gdici mi iwngom wendji-kitimagisid. Me is poor now,
because he has been cheated often, and stolen from, (or.
robbed.)
, gi-kdtagrigirian, ^i->ii.^^/^»'nni gnie,
i ge-ondji-jawenimiian. .Lord, l)er:mse thou hast
been made to suffer and to die for me, therefore have
mercy on me.
l\ air/ n irrircni ^/-r/;/o/r/.v.v/, dcbtnimigodjin ^i-icdbtnnt-
gotxiir. lie did not work well, because his iraster (or,
employer,) did not see him.
T'KNsr:. Gagwedjitnigoidmban ///'// dn-^i-di-
mi nil: kekendaman. Had J IWMMI asked, I would
have told what -I know.
Pisindagos3iwamban kau-in nin da*gi~kikenftansimin
rjhrrhf/k Kijc-M/tniio <>d i inikoni^i'irhi. If thou hadsi
not been lisf-ej^'d <o. \ve would inn have known the law
of God.
Kdginig ki d&gfrdnimisitnin kakiiHi, pindiganigfosi-
wangoban Jews 4>d Jinamitwigamigong We would a.U
239
have suffered eternally, had we not been brought into the
Church of Christ.
FUTURE TENSE. KisJipin swdngctnamiangin iji bimadis-
iian, mino aiboian dash, mi apl ge-ijiwinigoian kagigc
bimadisiwining. If thou livest like a good Christian, and
diest happy, then thou wilt be carried into life ever-
lasting.
Kawin >ki. bonigidetawassiu'fncag kidj' anishinribewag,
mi gt-ondji-bonigidttagos&iweg gate kinawa, ga-batd-iji-
webisiieg. You don't forgive your fellow-men, therefore
you also will not be forgiven what you have sinned, (your
sins shall not be forgiven to you.)
Animwapi ge-dibaamagod ga-anonigodjin 1 \\egoncn
ge-minigod ? When will he be payed by his employer?
What will he be given?
SECOND FUTURE TP:NSE. Pak odjttchisscg, mi apl ge-gt-
dibaamagoian minik mesinaamagoian, nind Inauhnn. I
think, when Easter-Sunday arrives, 1 shall have been
paid all that is owed to me.
Kawin dash kinawa iwapi ma-slii ki ga-gi-kijikagosstni
kakina. But you shall not yet have been paid all at that
time.
CONDITIONAL MOOD,
PRESENT TENSE. Kawin ki da-jaweni?nigossi, kawin gate,
ki da-miuo-dodagossi, kishpin widigcmad ntta-giwash-
kwcbid inini. Thou wouldst not be treated -with charity,
and tKou wouldst not be dealt with well, if thou marricst
a habitual drunkard.
Weweni da-dibaamawawag,.kitchi nibiwa gi-anokiwag.
They ought to be paid well ; they have done much
work.
.Kishpin awiia matcni dodang, wi-anwenindisossig dash,
•kawin Kijc-Maniton o da-boniaidctagossin. If a person
committed a bad action and would .not .repent, God would
.not forgive him.
TKXSI:. Air inini da-gi-minogdnatoabama ,
gftic, '/Jicgica OIIHI gi-(ti(/f/t nttwtilcli minn
pitn. That man would have been resprrted and beloved,
during his stay here, if he. had behaved better.
Kawin ki da-gi-minaigossim ishkdtSwabo, pindigtssiwcgo-
hun siginigewigamigong, Nobody would have given
you to drink ardent liquor, (firewater,) were you not
one to the tavern.
teabamigopatl. That boy would have been mpri-
inanded and beaten by his father, had he been seen by
him.
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
Mann l:i ga-wabamigo, I:is/i/iin inino iiofhimrtn ; wano I:i
<fK-:io)i''(t-r<), klslipiii wenijishing gcgo dibadodamoJi. Be
seen when you are doing good actions ; and be heard,
when you are telling something good and useful.
Weweni^ ta-dibaamawa an-*- \Vnnit i^oj:, L\-^o ta^ioaie^si-
i; ircinii! /•/' gi-anokitagowa. Let that l-'renclnnan
!)•" well paid, let liiin not be cheated ; he worked well for
you.
/•///// HID gadfinenimigojnin fc/ii in hi ign-
iting //s7//,-/ mfisiiifiigdiunt. Well, let us also be thought
worth to receive new books.
mojag '/tin ga-matcht-dtyimigossintin, nin kash&n-
Let us not always be spoken ill of; we are
•
M.iiin imrcni iwiigm/i l:i gad-ashamigom, osdm
\v well fed, you have starved too
tohg,
A?nbr, /.'/' ga-sagidinigojn, u'cinbigi^iirg ! 15e turned out.
y<- noisy fellows !
iftxxitrdir iir'm' ()'</ikin(iii'<-g, o.<fi>/i 1,'if it/it it'fig ;
• {'fiir ta-debwetawasaiwag, gaginawishkiwag. Let
241
not those young fellows be hired, they are too lazy ; and
let them not be believed, they use to tell lies.
PARTICIPLES.
PRESENT TENSE. Kin waidbamigossiwan, kakina gcgo ki
u'abandan. Thou who art not seen, thou seest all.
Kekinoctmawindjig kikinoamading ijawag. Jawendagos^
abinodji kckinoamtncimL Tlie scholars (or, those that
are taught,) are going to school. Happy is the child that
is taught.
Kekinpamartassiwindjig dbinodjliag kitimagisiwag ; ka-
irln masi-Hdigan o ga-ni$sitawinahsinawa. Children that
are not taught are worth pity ; they will not know how
to read.
IMPERFECT TENSE. Kinawa gegwtdjimigmeg&ban, kair'ui
gwaidk ki nakweiansinwvab&n. You who were asked
questions, did not answer right.
Nijodciag waiabamassiwindibanig kabt-bibon, pitch i-
?i ago gi-bl-glwtwag. The twins which were not seen
all winter, came yesterday back again.
Aw kttchi-jingcniniiiidibdn innigom sag/a ; kakina boni-
gidetadiwag. The person that was hated so much, is now
beloved ; they forgive each other all.
PERFECT TENSE. Dcbenimiian, ga-sassagdkwaogouin
tchibaiatigong, nin ondji; jawenimisliin. Lord, who
wast nailed to a cross, for my sake ; have mercy on me.
Kakina igiw, anamicwln ga-ondji-kotaglitidjig, ga-ondji-
nissindjig gaic, jawendagosiwag gijigong ; those that
have been persecuted and killed for religion's sake, are
happy in heaven.
Kinawa ga-mino-kildnoamagossiwcg, kego odapinangcgon
maianadak ; you who have not been taught to do good,
don't adopt any bad thing.
242
PLUPERFECT TKNSK. Kinaira irnrcnl »a-nnwrnhmgoiego-
bdn, krifo m'uitncd doddUgtgon H(t-<linl<unr<r. You who
had been so friendly reprimanded, never more do what
you have done.
Jifiir ga-ginfutmaitrincllbanig kdirin gi-babdmitansivxtg.
kittccn gi-mddjtzrcag ; those that had been forbidden, did
not obey ; they, went away notwithstanding the prohibi-
tion.
FUTURE TENSE. Kijc-Manito Debendjiged tni air ged-
anokitaioind nioja^, mt air ged-apitcki-<babaimtaiffmd ;
God the Lord shall be always served, he shall be perfect-
ly obeyed.
ge-matchi-dodagoieg , nii.d ikitntrin. ondji, ki ja-
tini; ir't-ikilo Jvsus.. Jesus said: You who will
be ill treated, because of my word, (religion,) you are
happy.
Awenenag i^hr gijigong ged-*tsstndjig-? \\rlioare those
that shall be placed in heaven?
There are some verbs belonging to this IV. Conjugation,
that make an exception at the sr.cond person sing, of the
imju-rdfii-f nwodt in the active voice. There are three kinds
of these verbs.
FLKST KIND.
Many verbs ending in na at the first person sing, indie.,
change this syllable na in j, at the .second person singular
of the imperative ; as :
VEKJIS. 2nd. TEKS. SING. IMI'
\in /iindifffina, I mak<3 him (her, it) go in ; pindigaj.
Nln natia, 1 fetch him, (her, it;) n<ij.
Nind odd Ixin <t, I drag him, (her, it;) odttbaj.
.\in mi tin, I give him. (her, it;) /////.
Nin wdwina,! call or namr him, (her, it;) wturij.
Nind ijiwina, I conduct, lead, carry him, ij'ni'ij.
(her, it;)
243
Nin takdbina, I tie or bind him, (her, it;) takobij.
Nin Him, I bring him, (her, it;) bij.
Nin madjiwina, I carry or lead him, (her, it,) mddjiwij.
away ;
Nin w'ikobina, I draw him, (her, it;) wikobij.
Nin pakewina,l separate from him, (her, it ;) pakewij.
Nin giwewina, I carry or lead him, (her, it,) giwcwij,
back again ;
Nind apagina, I throw him, (her, it;) apagij.
Nind onapina, I harness a horse or dog; onapij.
Nin bisikona, I dress him, (her, it;) bisikoj.
Nin ganona, I speak to him, (her, it;) ganoj.
Nind anona, I hire or employ him, (her, it ;) anoj,
Nin nona,I suckle him, (her, it;) noj.
Nind agona, I pat on high, or hang up, him, agoj.
(her, it;)
Nin bibagikona nabagissag, I make thin a bibagikoj.
board ;
Nin kislikibona nabagissag, I saw a board kishkiboj.
across ;
Nin tashkibona nabagissag, I saw a board laslikiboj.
along ;
Etc. etc. . . .
Remark 1. Sometimes, in hearing the above imperative
pronounced, we should think there is an n before j; as :
nanj, waivinj, etc. But it is heard so seldom and so indis-
tinctly that I think we need not care about it.
Remark 2. I know no general rule which could point
out those verbs ending in na, that make the above excep-
tion in the imperative mood. There are many, likewise
ending in na, that make no exception in the imperative ; as :
VERBS. 2nd PERS. SING. IMP.
Nin sagidina, I carry or turn him, (her, it,) sagidin.
out ;
Nin pagidina, I let him, (her, it,) go; pagidin*
Nin webina, I throw him, (her, it,) away ; webin..
\in tdiiffinfi, I touch him, (her, it;) .,>•/?;.
JV/«.'/ omhina, I lift him, (her, it,) up; <»nhin.
Xind o(/(//>ina, I take him, (her, it ;) oddpin.
\'ui gandhia, 1 push him, (her, it;) gdndin.
nawadina,ltake hold of him, (her, it;) nmradin.
I\in mindjimina, 1 hold him, (her, it;) luindjimin.
ojiflina, I take him, (her, it,) from and in.
somewhere.;
sdgaMgina, I lead him, (her, it,) on a sagabi'jtn.
string ;
-Y//t kitchinagijina, I bowel, or gut him, kitchinagijin,
(her, it:)
IW/i tchekdgamina, I dip him, (her, it,) in; tchekd gamin,
Nind ikona,I put him, (her, it,) away; /7,v'«.
J\7« .jiakoitd, I Hay him, (her, it;) pitko-n.
I\in dibt/konct, I judge him, (her, it;) dihdkon.
-Y/'//. takona, 1 seize him, (her, it:) takon.
Etc. etc. . . .
Remark. It seems, however, that we can say with se-
curity, that all the verbs of^this Conjugation, ending in ana,
change the last syllable na into j, at the second person
singular of the imperative mood. But for those ending in
ina and «/m, no rule is known to me. Some of them, as
you see, change the last syllable nit into /, at the said person
of the imp. ; and some do not, they have a regular impera-
tive.
\D KIXI).
The verbs of this Conjugation, ending in .V.NV/, at the first
person sing, of the indicative mood, change this termination
in a hi, at the second person sing, of the imperative mood :
as :
VKKIIS. Olid I'KUS. SINC. DIl'.
Ninffd**(i, 1 am afraid of him, (her, it:) ///.
«*.SY/, I put him. (her, it :) as/it.
245
JYm nissd, I kill him, (her, it ;) nish't.
Nin mawadissd, I pay him, (her, it,) a visit; mawadisht.
Nind odissa, I go to him, (her it:) odishi.
Etc. etc. .
Jr|=i ^llrl-rillL ^^
^ S° & ^ 8 s o "" * 5 ^-.^ £ ^ < » £T. 2
^ ^ S> ^ a, a a -• s g- ^°3 a ^ « 2 <" £
•**^ «*. 5" O S"1 «3 «3 £S *4 Si *S ** nT •* H • •"
SC3-S~I=''~: -"•'-sj'^CfQr^ ?° ^O"-^-
sllj
cr o
5 =T !!.§:
'^Z^ ^ . "^ . *"*" CD ^ "SoO -5
CD ^^^ J"^ v_^- ^ >— ' ,O" ^ tp 2
o o ^*^ ^
: fit
r* P Ct>
5» S" 2". SJ"
a a c' n 2 »
t/s ^L. •* ' ( f P o
^ oi. F™1 P^
s^ ^ * w o
fs^ r' g ~>&
-^ t g; S1 2
V2 £J /.-
2'r5'1l 5 " lit
1-^loM^ot P|cp|-^ g ^l|
85
1C ^
246
The following verbs are irregular at the second person
idar of the imperative mood, but they are regular in tlu>
VERFS. 2nd PERS. SING. IMP.
\ind awd, I make use (of some an. obj.;) aim.
Xindina-,1 tell him, (her, it;) iji.
Nindondp-nand, 1 kill him, (her, in,) for such: ondji-nan'i
a reason, (for religion's sake, etc.)
Kte. etc. . . ..
Remark. The verbs of all these kinds are irregular on-
ly in the imperative mood ; but throughout al> the other
moods and tenses they are perfectly regular, as far as the
preceding paradigms are concerned, which we have conju-
gated till now. But in the '• Cases " this irregularity will
»-ome forth in all those tenses that arc derived from the sec-
ond person singular of the imperative mood ; as you will sets
in the paradigms of the " Cases."
IV. DUBITATIVE CONJUGATION,
ACTIVE VOICE.
AFFIRMATIVE FORM
INDICATIVE MOOD,
I'KKSJiNT TKNHK.
Singular. Plural
.V>'M woiomadog, I see him perhaps, adogenagr
/•/ wabamzdog, adogenag,
tra6amadogenai^ adogenan,
n>n dMi^ajRanadog, anadogenmg,
ki wabdm&w&dog, awadogenag,
n va^ofnawadogenao, awadogenan,
247
TMPERFECT TENSE.
IVabam&wagilmn, I saw him perhaps, awagwaban,
wabamawadiban, awadwaban,
imzfawagobaD, agoban,
wa&awawangidiban, ) awangidwaban.
wabama\vangoban, JW awangwaban,
u?a£>#/wawegoban, awegwaban,
vaftoinagwaban, agwaban,
Form the remaining tenses after these two.
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE.
i, whether I see him, awagwawen,
a w ad w aw en.,
waiabamagwen, agwen,
waiabamawangiden, (ninawind,) awangidwawen,
waiabamawangen, (kinciwind,) awangwawen,
waiabama\veg\ven, awegwawen,
waiobama\vag\vcu , awagwen,
PERFECT TENSE.
Ga-wabama.\vagen, if I have perh, seen awagwawen^
bj DO,
Etc., after the above present tense,
PLUPERFECT TENSE.
Tfa&awzawagibanen, ifl hadperh. seen awagwabanen,
him,
wja&«mawadibanen, awadwabanen,
wafomagobanen, agobanen,
wa^a??iawangidibanen, \ awangidwabancn
waiamawangobanen, \ awangwabanen,
Mw&awawegobanen, awegwabam-n,
teal amawagobanen, awagobanen
The future tense is formed after the present ; as : 6V-
wabamawagen, etc. . .
PARTICIPLES.
PRESENT TEN SK .
Singular.
Nin t0ata'fta«»awagen, I who perhaps see him,
fo'tt zpaia&amawaden, thou who perh. secst him,
win waii. fo/wagwcn, he who perh. sees him,
f. /?0 uuzta&amagwenan, he whom he sees perhaps,
idei,, J wc whogee ,jim ,
en, )
kinawind zmtaoamawang
k.iiawa : \vcgwcn, you who perh. see him,
iriHftira rtWfrdAa//iagwenag, they who perh. see him,
i-Mc?*1 u-aiabaii .awagwenan, lie whom they peril.
Plural
Nin zca^'aJawzawagenag, I who pfcrhnps see them,
/./, wa/aftamawadenag, thou who perh. seest \
wit, waiabam^gwent he who perhaps sees them,
2;//> /r rt/yrt//f;i<r\v(.'ii:in, they whom lie pecs, perh.
ninauind i^a/a^xzmawangidenaff, >
, . 6V> we who perh. s. them,
kinawind waiaoa772awangenag1 ^
n I'a&amawegwenag, y«>u wlio perh. sec them,
ir ifih ; •~'.[i\\r\i'\£, they \\iio p M
MJaiai^Wtawagwenan, they whom thev perh. ss
T::
\in ga-wileaniwagen, I who perh. have seen him.
J^/n g<z-t4'ff6/7mawagenagi I who perh, have seen them.
Etc., after the above ;,rrs ///
249
PLUPERFECT TENSE.
ISlngtldr.
Nin £fl-?0a&r/niawagibanen, I vvhoperh. had seen him,
kin ffrt-MaZw/ttawadibaiien, thou who . . .
win gYf-KW/wwagobanen, he who p. had seen him,
iniic g-a-wa&awagobanenan, he whom he ...
ninawind garwaMmywa^\nmm, \ ye who had h
/,• / n a w i n d ff «- wa o a n; a w an go b an e n , )
kifiaira ga-wabama.\vcgobfmen3 you who had p. seen him,
win air a ^/-w/ftrmawagobanenag, they who had p. s. h.,
//>/?" g'a-tt'aZ'awawagobanenan, he whom they . . .
Plural
ga-wdbama.wbgwaban&bj I whop, had seen them,
kin ga-wd&amawadwabaii^n!, thou who . . .
wi?i ga-w0bama.gQiba.ngn, he who p. had seen them,
irtiw ga-icabamzgobmensn, they whom he p. had s.,
iti'md ^r/-?tfflfV//«awangidwabanen, ) we who perh. had
ki unwind irc/-,'^«&rt;«awangwabanen, f seen them,
khtau'ii gfl-twtiflffiawegwabaiieli, you who had p. s. them,
id/lawn grt-jw&a/Mawagobanenag, they who p. h. s. them,
g'fl-wa&awiawagobanenan, they whom they h. p. s.,
•\';.tc. To form the imperfect tense, (which is not much
used,) you have only to take off the prefix g«-, and make
the Change; as: Nin tcaiabamawagibaneri, I who perhaps
>aw him, etc.
FUTURE TENSE.
Singular,
Nin ge-ioafomawagen, I who perh. shall see him,
Plural
N'ni gc-wabamawagenag, I who p. shall see them,
Etc., after the above present tense,
250
ACTIVE VOICE.
NEGATIVE FORM.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE.
Singular*
Kawln nin i^aJamassidog, I don't perhaps see him,
ki ivabamassidog,
o
?ii?i
ki
o
Plural
Kawin nin ?w*Z>a/«assidogcnag, I don't perhaps see them,
' ki
o
' nin
' ki
o
IMPERFECT TENSE.
Singular.
Kawin 7£fl/;rt>wassi\vagiban, I did p. not see him,
inn KMl^MMMiwagwabtO, I did perh. not nee thnn,
" ?/v//>«/?iassi\v ad \vaban,
251
" wabamassigoban,
11 uuz&amassiwangidwaban, »
" ttvz&amassiwangwaban,
" tmirtwassiwegwaban, )
"
After these two tenses all the others of the indie afire
mood are easily formed,
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE,
Singular. Plural.
n'<7/«7>#wassiwagen, if I p. don't s. him, assiwagwawen,
ttHZUz5amas8iwadfen, assiwadwawen,
ivaiabat/i \ss\g\v en, assigwen,
/miada/nassiwangiden, > if we p. don't assiwangidvvawen,
/ivziaZuzwassiwangen, $ see him, assiwangvvawen,
<Tuiabama.ssiwegwen, assiwegwavven,
/mia&a/wassiwagwen, assiwagwen.
PERFECT TENSE.
Ga-ivaba?nassiwa.gen, whether I have sssiwagwaweii,
not seen him.
Etc., as above in the present tense.
PLUPERFECT TENSE.
TFrt&«wassiwagibanen, if I had not assiwagwabanen.
seen him,
?oa&amassiwadibanen, assiwadwabanen,
waia/wassigobanen, assigobanen,
jca?Mmassiwangidibanen, ) -~ assiwangidwabaneit
^aiawassiwangobanen, ] 1 ^ ' * * assiwangwabanen,
wrt&amassiwegobanen, assiwegwabanen,
«?aifl7;iassiwagobanen, assiwagobanen,
The future tense to be formed after after the present ; as :
Ge-wabamdssi2vagcn, . . . Gc-wabamassiwadcn, etc,
PARTICIPLES.
VRF.SENT
Singular.
Nin t0aii£Z&a/«assiwagen, I who perhaps see him not,
kin irfl?V//?flwias$i\vacien,t}iGU who peril, seest him not,
win i0«Mi6amassigwen, he who perhaps does not
him,
iniw tflai^fo^assiffwenan, he whom lie p. does not s.,
ninawind ?r«m/w?/?assiwan^iden, \ we who don't perhaps
Ininiwind 70awiaMassiwangen, j see him.
hinawa «wi«ftawassiwegwen, you who perhaps don't see
him,
winmca tbQiabam&sstgwen&g, they who perhaps don't see
him,
iniw 70fli«Z>fl7Ha:ssiwagwenan, he whom they p. don't s
Plural
i\in //Y//V/6«/«assiwagenag, I who peril, don't see them.
kin wttftt&flmassiwadenag, thou who dost not p.
them,
fn i0aiaJaw*assigwert, he who perhaps dt;
tliem,
i?iizw «J«a&awassigwe^tt^. they whom he p. does not
~ see,
•ninawind wraiafiawtassiwangicteriag^ we who don't perh. s
k ir, a wind iraiahai:; J, J th.
kinaira ?/7i/«/v«massivv( .oil wlio p. don't s. them,
it?* utttioiafiiassigwenag imp. don't s. them.
ip«ia^<v»assiwagw€nan, they whom they do p. . .
'II. •
l
[wassiwagen, 1 who have p. not .seen him.
Plural
Nin /Trt-Wv///f//j/^.si\v:iiir< nair, I uho have p. not s. them,
Etc., after the ab< ••'( tr-usc.
253
PLUPERFECT TENSE.
Singular.
JVi/z ga-M?0J0massiwagibaneh, I who had p. nots. him,
kin «T/-w.Y//></.'Hassiwadibanen, thou who hadst p. . .
win ga-tt>a5amassigobanen,ne who had p. not seen him.
iniio ga-M'fl&rtwassigobanenan, he whom he had p. . .
n in a wind ga-zw/fomassiwangidibanen, } \ve who had perh.
kinaicind #«-«'«i#/ttassiwangobanen, j not seen him.
kinawft gd-ica oywassiwegobanen,, you wlio had . . .
in'nawa #a-z0afoz?feassiwagob|anenag, they wlio had p. not
seen him,
initc g^-?rrt6ft;/rassiwagobanenan, he whom they had . ,
Plural
Sin ^-?r«ia/Massiwagwabanen,l who had p. not £. tii.,.
kin . ifa-iYJ##«M3>^iwad \vabanen, tliou whobadstp. . .,
ga*-wa&awiassigobanen, he who had p. n. s. tli.
i.niw ga-wabai/i&ss\trob anen an, they whom he had (,-
not seen,
nhicncind gct-wal)am?^$i\vzngid\\Tabznen, ) we who had p. not
kinuwind ^a^aJamassiwangwabahen, ^ s. them,
1:1 iia z(jag«-w«6o/«assiweg\vabancn, you who had p. not s.
them,
vinawa o-fif-?/Y<7^t'7«assi\vagobaiienag, they who had p. not
seen them,
v'./i/ 7f ^ff-z»a6a»iassiwagobanenan, they whom they h:n(
perh. not seen,.
FUTURE TENSED
Singular-.
Nui g-c-w;«&awassiwagen, I who shall p. not see n.
, I who shall p. not see then:?,
Etc., after the pwscnt tense,
EXAMPLES ON THE ACTIVE VOICE OF THE IV. DIBIT.
AFFIRMATIVE AND NEGATIVE FORMS.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
NT TENSE
hi kikenimadog William ; ni/igoting oma gi-bi-ija. \
suppose thou knowest William ; he came here once.
Kairin girdclt o mindjiminassiwadogftian onidjanistiiran :
mojag &imiiding ijmran. They do probably not much
keep back their children, (from evil,) they always goto
dancing .parties.
I\<u!'in HI iii £ GUI iidriingim hi ivabamassiwadog kimissewa,
cko-widiged. You do probably not see often now your
>M«-r, since she is married.
IMPERFECT TENSE. Pnul gikamagoban o widigenfaganan;
mi vtendji-madjad ganabatch air ikice. They say Paul
solded his wife ; that is perhaps the reason why the wo-
man goes away.
-Kfnriti wabamassigwaban iial-a ire mekatewikwa na icn .
fnra gi;j)iu'(ifL 1 think they did not go to see the priest,
before they went in the interior, (inland.)
I'KKI KCT TENSE. Ki gi-wissoJMiDOflogenag mttcki-gijwtd-
//i% mi wcndji'kikentUnnan nihin-a nudchi ikiiowinan,
Thou hast probably frequented persons that use bad lan-
U'UJijro, tlwTeloni thou knowest so many bad words.
.fcdirin Lfirdidt: /tin gl-flissitotawfissinadog air 'mini <j<i-
hi-ikitogwen ; Icdu-in. sr/ i^irdinl: nin girijitciigessimirt.
\\ C have pro!>ably not well understood that man, what
'tie has said here, for we have not donr the right thing.
Cri-kitch*-ba$hanjeou>a aw /.-//• iwi. sr/iv. Anish, o gi-agon-
twtnii'(tilo»cHnn o**riti. This boy lias been whipped
thoroughly. \Vhy, he has .probably been disobedient to
his father.
Knwin inn^hi gl-kikc*ima8sil0adi-
dt'df/, dj)i dcbatljimo'mn iir. Thou hrulst pro-
•455
bably not yet known that he was in the room, at the
time when thou toldst that.
Bibonorig anishinabeg gi-amoagwaban kaldna o pak-
wejiganimiwan, gi-bwofodjitchis^fnig anamitodading*
Last winter the Indians had eaten up all their flour
(I understood,) before New year's day arrived.
Kawin nindangwe gi~atawassigoban mashi omdjaniy-
tan gi-anamiegijigadinig* My sister-in-law (a female
speaking) had not yet had her child last Sunday, the)
say.
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE, Geget wedi nongom o gaganonan, endog-
ircn dash nessitawinawagwtn* He is now indeed speak-
ing to him there, but I don't know whether he recognises
him.
Anawi nin pisindau'a, kaicln dash nin kifcendan.si/it
"icaiak nessitotawdwagen. I listen to him indeed, but I
don't know whether I understand him right.
Kawin Jci kikenimi&sinon, -non gam gcget jangenimassiwa-
den, ginwenj dash. Id gi-jingenimaban. I don't know
whether now indeed thou dost not hate him, but thou
liadst hated him a long lime.
PERFECT TENSE. Kawin ganabatch o gi-adimassin. />'//-
dogwen ga-adhnassi given. He has perhaps not over-
taken him. It is doubtful whether he has not overtakes
him.
Mi egoidng ninawind ga-waicjimdwangidcn aw inini ;
kaw'in dash nin kikendansimhi. They say of us thai
we have cheated that man ; but we know nothing of it,
(The person spoken to, not included.)
Kawin nin mikivcndansin, wika ga-dajimchi'agwawcn
igiw ikwcwag* I don't recollect to have ever spokrn
ill of those women.
256
PERFECT TENSE. Namnnflj • ,/, tchi gi-dibaam-
awagobanen gate kakina meslnactmawadjin^ hiramo
I don't know what was the matter with him, and whether
he had paid all his creditors before he went away.
End-pgwen wlka tchi .-li^ngou,
mi dd<h pili-hiiKtiT tchj, gi-apitthi-gi it is doubt-
t'ul whether he had never stolen before anything from
• arents, and that he only now committed so oreat a
theft.
FUTURE TENSE. Kishpin Wanniatanong ijad. mi idm
n<ririmn> . bi hi mad i:-
If lie goes to Detroit, then, 1 suppose, he will
on, if he is living
Nqm$ndj «;>i !>;i'~xiirar Xumamlj
•if>i ge^tni I don't know when the
time will arrive, when thoa shall no more tell lies to thy
r; raid the time when thou shalt always r.
him.
PARTIC11M
I*' -i-ikfi
Nibiwa nin ^i-irftltantf'^. This is, I suppose,
tlio man who never so- :oux. 1 iiave seen
many.
Kin fi?<> .bin, nin
k'ttfi. Thoii \v!-. much
inont-y. rv poor.
Ka k'ni 1 1
:;minl-
"jiit. All those who (perhn|)s) cheat their fellow-nien.
to think on (u)d, who knows all.
T\:\
tkitchija u. lie that perhaps
never h;; How-men, is very happy
And-
257
Awegwen ga-nissagwen nin pakaakweian, nindaian gale.
I don't know him who has killed my chickens and my
dog.
Igiw ini.jiiwag ga-sagiagwenag osamjoniian, kawin ga-
•nabatch jawendagosissiwag ; kite/a bqtadowining gi-da-
pinedogcnag. Those men who perhaps have loved money
too much, are probably not happy ; they might have
died in great sins.
PLUPERFECT TENSE, Igiw ga-anokitawassigobunenag 1)>-
bcndjigenidjin, megwa gi.-bimadisiwad (iking, kawin
nongom o wabamassiwawar\ gii/^on^. Those who had
not served the Lord, while they lived on earth, do not
see him now in heaven.
Aw mc.kateu:i!;wanaic, nitam ^a-gagikimagobancn Otchi-
pwen, kitc/ii nihiwa o gi.-anamic-sigaandawadogcni'n.
That Missionary who first of all had preached to the
Chippewa Indians, must have baptized great many.
FUTURE TENSE. Aw gc-iagiagwen, gc-jawenimagwen gair
wikanitsan, ia-jawcnima gaic, win He who shall love
his brother, (his neighbor,) and shall have mercy on him,
he shall also find mercy.
Kinawa ge-'Ci-boiiigldctiwassiwegwenfig Jcikanissiwag,
kawin gaie kinawa ki ga-bonigidrtagossiwa Kijf-Manito
ga-iji-batn-diicg. You that will not forgive your brethren,
(your neighbor,) to you also God will not forgive your
sins, (what you have sinned.)
258
PASSIVE VOICE.
AFFIRMATIVE FORM. NEGATIVE FORM.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE.
Vin Wtftemigomidog, I am per- Kawin igossimidog,
haps seen,
ki uxtbamigomidogt „ igossimidog,
wdbamndog, „ assido<j,
0 w/a/Jrt/mgodogenan,* igossido<renan,
inn tooiamigonitnadog, igossiminadog,
ki ipadomigomwadog, igcssimwadog.
2T«/;rt;/iadogenag, assidogenag,
Q wrt6rtwiigowadogenan, igossiwadogenau.
IMPERFECT TENSE.
TVaiamigowamban, I was Kawin igossiwamban,
perhaps seen,
igossiwamban,
assi wind! ban,
igossigoban,
ipafounawiadibao,
, he was
per. seen by ...
iva ha ma wind xvab an ,
iM&DTiigogwaban, they
were p. seen by ...
igossiwangiban,
igossiaangoban,
igussiwegoban,
assiwindwaban,
igossigwaban.
The remaining tenses of the indicative are to be formed
after these two. *
* See Remark p. 229.
259
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSF.
, if I am per- igossixvanen,
haps seen,
igossiwaneny
uiaiabamsi\\Tmdent assiwinden,
waiabamigogwen, if he is per- igossigvvea
haps^een by ...
waiafiamig&waogen, { -r v igossiwdngeu,
ivaiabamigbw&Qgen, ] ' igossiwangen,
iraiabam\go\veg\ven, igossi vvegvven,
assiwindwawen,
, if they arc igossiwagwen,
perhaps seen by . . „
I'EUFECT TENSE.
, that I have igossiwanen.
perhaps been seen,
Ktc., after the above present tense.
PLUPERFECT TENSE.
\Vabam\go\v -ambmi^n* if I had igossiwambanen^
perhaps been seen,
wa&amig6wambaaett, igossi wambanert,
assiwindibanen,
fwe igossiwangibinen^
. . . igossiwaiigobanen,
wjaZ>a»zigo.vegobanen, igossivvegobanen,
assiwindwabanen.
See Note, p.
200
RE TKNSK.
, that I will igossivvanen.
he perhaps seen,
Etc., after the above j.rcsmt tens?.
PARTICIPLES.
P II K S K N T TENS!,.
yin waiabam\<row&ncu, I who am perhaps seen,
kin waiabamigbw&n&n*, thou who art perhaps
ic In u?ata6an$awinden, he who is perhaps seen,
Iniw MNziaiawigogwenan, he who is per. seen by .
mnawind ^iaiawigowdngeBj \ wc whf) ftre
kinawind icaiaiatfiigowangdn, j
kinaica w«iaft<l»rigowegwen,, you are perhaps seen,
toaia6a7?iawindenag) who are perhaps se<
who are per. seen bv
..V/'/? tt>aiawigossiwanop, I who am per. not seen,
k'.n waiabamigbshiwaneri, thou who art p. not seen.
win waiabamassiw\nd.&Qi he wlio is p. not seen,
iniic z0aia5amigossigweDan, he who is perhaps not
seen by . . .
ntnatoind wai«6r/77zi£rossiwanrrrn )
,..,-, } we who are . . .
innawiiia waiabam\\ ':
Idnawa wa/a6a7nigossivvegwen, yon who are j>. not
z^aiaiawassiwinden •,. ho an> p. IK.
waia6a/Higossiwagwe.nan, they who are p< r};;tj».<
;i by . . .
RFliCT T!
N n loaio&amigowambanen, 1 wlio wns perhap:
kin I0aiaiflwnig6wambanen, thtui who wast . . .
w.'n »ata^amAwindlbanen, he wlio was p< r
261
iniw waiaJamigogobanenan, he who was perhaps seen
by...
ninawind wma&«wigow«togibanen, } w
kinawind tt>amZ>araigowangobanen )
kinawa ivaiabam\gowegoba.nen, you who were per. seen,
winawa w?#mZ>«w?awindibanenag, they who were p. seen,
iniw zmz«£«wigowagobanenan, they who were perhaps
seen by ...
Nin waiabamigossiwambanen, I who was p. not seen,
kin w?ai«6«mig6ssiwambanen, thou who . . .
win ?m?'aZ>rtwassiwindibanen, he who was p. not seen,
iniw ?6Y««Z>rt?7zigossigobanenan, he who was perhaps
not seen by ...
ninawind ?0<zmZ>«miorossiwdnp;ibanen, ) ,
T . .,.-,.&. ' > we who were . . .
kinawind ?mm6tfwigossiwangobanen, j
kinawa ?yaz<2Z>a//iigossiwegobanen, you who were perhaps
not seen,
ivinawa w><ZM£#wassiwindibanenag, they who were per-
haps not seen.
iniw M?<n'aZ>amigossiwagobanenan, they who were per-
haps not seen by ...
The remaining tenses are formed after these two, as :
Nin g a-wdb ami gowa ncn . . « Nin ga-wabamigowdnibanen,
. . . Nin ge-wabamigoivdnen, . . .
EXAMPLES ON THE WHOLE PASSIVE VOICE OF THE IV.
DTJBITATIVE CONJUGATION.*
INDICATIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE. Nin nondagomidog oma libagiidn, ond-
jita dash ganabatcli hawin awiia nin wi-nakwetagossi.
I think 1 am heard as I am shouting here, but perhaps
purposely nobody will give me an answer.
* The verbs ending in atoa and owa make no difference in the Dubita-
Jive Conjugation.
17
262
Ambc madjada ; kawin ki minwcnimigossiminadog oma.
Let us go away ; I think we are not well liked here.
O kikenimigodogenan ossan aw oslikinawe ejiwebisid,
kawin dash od anwcnimigossin. I suppose the father of
this young man knows his conduct, (he is probably
known by his father,) but he does not reprimand him.
IMPERFECT TENSE. Kawin jingenimassimndiban oma;
anisha win gi-inendam wi-madjad* I think he was not
disliked here ; it was his own will to go away.
Ossiwan ganabatch wabamigogwaban igiw kwilffisensag,
gcgct ta-anhni si ira^- These boys were probably seen
by their father, they will be punished, (they will suffer.)
PERFECT TENSE. Kawin weweni gi-nitawigiassidogenag
igiw abinodjiiag, anotch sa match ijlircbijiirftg. It
seems that these children have not been well brought up,
because they have many faults.
Ki gi-wabamigomwadog bi-dagwishineg ; waiba ta-pin-
(ligcwag.You have probably been seen when you arrived :
they will soon come in.
Gi-kitcld-apitenimadog aw mashkikiwinini wrgira kitclii
odenang gi-danisid. This physician, I understood, has
been very highly esteemed, while he lived in the city.
PLUPERFECT TENSE. Anin cnakmnigaf:, nidji 1 Gi-kitchi-
ashamawindwaban kiwe aniehinabeg agt/Hiing. What is
fhe news, comrade ? * I hear the Indians had a great
dinner on the other side.
Gonima gi-kikiiwamagoirtunlxin inasinaigan, bira dag-
wishinan oma. Thou hadst perhaps been taught to read
before I arrived here.
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSK. 7\'/.s7//>/// kekenimigow&ngen oma aiaitnm,
pdbige anishinabfg nin ea-bi-mawadissigonanig. If we
only are known to be here, the Indians will soon come
to sec us. (The person spoken to, not included.)
263
Kego wika inendangen : Mi oma waidbamigossiwdncn .
Misiive hi wabamig Debendjiged. Never think : Here,
I suppose, I arn not seen. Everywhere the Lord sees
thee.
Endogwen mcno-dodawdwinden ningwiss, nissatchiwan
ga-ijiwinind. I don't know whether my son that was
taken below, (to some southern or western place,) is well
treated, (or not.)
PERFECT TENSE. Kawin nin debwctansin ekitong, mi set
weweni ga-dibaamdgossiwcgwen, gi-anokiieg. I
don't believe what they say, that is, that you have per-
haps not been well paid for your work.
.Ki gi-nondam no,, ga-kitchi-gimodimdwinden kissaie tibi-
kong? Hast thou heard what is said, that much property
has been stolen from thy brother last night?
Ga-wdbamigowanen siginigewigamigong gi-pindigeian .
mi sa, gi-giwashkwebi, icendji-igoian. Because thou
hast probably been seen to go to a tavern, that is the
reason why they say that thou hast been drunk.
PLUPERFECT TENSE. Gi-aiawamban iwapi sagaiganing, gi-
nissdwindwabanen nij Wemitigojiwag. Thou hadst per-
haps been on the little lake at the time when the two
Frenchmen were killed there
Kawin nin kikendansin asJiamigosslwdmbdncn. —
Anisha ikitom ; iveweni mojag nin gi-bamiigo. I don't
know that I had not been well fed, (given to eat.) They
tell a lie ; I have always been well taken care of.
Nissiny nin gi-bibag, mi dash pitchinag ga-nondagowdm*
bdnen. I called (hollowed,) three times, and then only,
I suppose, I was heard.
FUTURE TENSE. Kishpin mino anokiidn, mi na api ge-
minwcnimigowanen 1 If I work well, shall I then be
(perhaps,) liked?
Ged-ako-mino-dodaffossiwdngen oma, mojag nin ga-wasi-
tawendamin. As long as we shall not be well treated
264
here, we will always be sorrowful. (The person spoken
to, not included.)
Ged-ako-anonitfotcangcn, mojag hi gad-uiamin oma. As
long as we shall be employed, we will always remain
here. (The person spoken to included.)
PARTICIPLES.
PRESENT TENSE. Mi sa air inini unofcJi dcjinunrindcn.
Anixha dash gcgct ina ; kawinmatchi ijitc/iigrsfii. This
is the man who is so much spoken ill of, as I understood.
But he is spoken of without truth ; he does not act wrong.
Awegwcnan kekinoamagogwenan ctnamieitiin ,- jaigwa -ni-
biwa o kikendan. I don't know who is the person by
whom she was taught to say prayers ; she knows already
much.
Kin wikawaiabamigoss'nvancn anamiewigamigong, anin-
di kin ge-wi-ijaian, gi-ishkwa-bini<tdisii<in (iking? Thou
who never art seen in the church, as I understood, where
shalt thou go after death ? (when thou hast finished to live
on earth ?)
IMPERFECT TENSE. Kinau-a u-ika mashi ktkenimigonito*-
gobanen tchi anwemnc&goieg, ka na nibon-in hi frutnnt'ui-
awa ? You who were perhaps never known to repent,
are you not afraid of death ?
Kin nwandagowambanen pi-tlajimad air inini, ki gdd-
animis ganafxitch. Thou who wast j)rol);ibly heard when
thou spokest ill of that man,thou wilt perhaps suffer for it.
PERFECT TENSE. Awgutoncut g&toahiigogwenan,
vhimnnd niu kiJcotdansimin ; irin ign
Who he ia that has opened his eyes, we know not
him.
l\in gO-minigowanen kitrhi iiilihra joni'm, jtnrciu'm kid
inawemaganag ketimagisidjig. Thou who hast been
265
given so much money, as I heard, have pity on thy poor
relations.
Nin ga-mino-igossiwdnen ningotchi odcnang, nin kiken-
dagos nongom gi-matchi-dodansiwan. I who have not
been spoken well of somewhere in the village, as I un-
derstood, I am known now, not to have done wrong.
PLUPERFECT TENSE. Jawendagosiwag nongom gijigong
winawa ga-kotagiawindibanenag anamiewin ondji. Hap-
py in heaven are now those who had been made to suffer
for religion's sake.
Aw wika ga-ijiwinassiwindibanen matchi minawanigosi-
wining megwa gi-oshkinaweicid, nongom minwendam.
He that probably never had been seduced into sinful
pleasure during his youth, is now happy, (contented.)
FUTURE TENSE. Awegwcn ge-debwetamogwen, ge-sigaan-
dawdwinden gale, ta-kagige-biniadi$i gijigong. Whoev-
er shall believe and be baptized, shall live eternally in
heaven.
Awegwenag abinodjtiag ge-mino-ganawenimawindcnag
mojag, ta-mmo-ijiweljisiwag ketchi-awshinabewiwadjin.
Children that shall be always well guarded, (taken care
of,) will behave well, when they are grown persons.
The greatest peculiarity as well as difficulty in this IV.
Conjugation, consists in the connection of the verbs belong-
ing to it, with the personal pronouns me, thee, us, you. We
will display here the Two Cases, in which are comprised all
possible modifications of the verbs of this Conjugation in
connection with the above personal pronouns.
As the right use of these Cases is all-important in con-
versation and allocution, the learner is desired to mind well
the terminations,
266
FIRST CASE.
(I. . . thee.)
AFFIRMATIVE FORM. NEGATIVE FORM.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE,
Ki wdbamw, I see thee, Kawin issinon,
ki wdbamigo* we see thee, " igossi,
ki wabanng, he sees thee,t " igossi,
ki wabam'igog, they see thee, " igossig,
ki •i0dbam'mimm> I see you, " issinoninim
ki wdbamigom, we see you, " igossim,
ki tooSomigowa, he sees you, " igossi tv a,
ki wdbamigovtsig, they see you, " igossiwag,
IMPERFECT TENSE.
AFFIRMATIVE FORM.
Ki wa&tfwininaban, I saw thee,
ki W7#&amigonaban, we saw thee,
ki wabamigoban, he saw thee,
ki ivabamigobanig, they saw thee,
ki ?0a&amininimwaban, I saw you,
ki wa&ajttigominaban, we saw you,
ki ?m&«?mgowaban, he saw you,
ki wa&awugowabanig, they saw you.
NEGATIVE FORM.
Kawin ki ?m6aa»issirK>mnaban, I did no see thee,
" ki »a6a»igossinaban, we did not see thee,
" ki it'«Z>a»iigossiban, he ...
" ki waia7»igossibanig, they. . .
•••i.i •mm-
* See Remark at the end of this paradigm.
t See Remark, p. 2"
267
ki waittmissinoninimwaban,
ki
ki
ki
AFFIRMATIVE FORM. NEGATIVE FORM.
PERFECT TENSE.
Ki gi-wabam'm, I have seen thee, Kawin issinon,
ki gi-wabamigo,we have seen thee, " igossi,
Etc., after the above present tense, prefixing gi-.
PLUPERFECT TENSE.
Ki gMcaiawiinmaban, I had seen Kawin issinoninaban,
thee,
ki gi-wabam\gonaba.n, we had " igossinaban,
seen thee,
Etc., after the above imperfect tense prefixing gi-.
The two future tenses are easily formed after the pres-
ent, prefixing ga-, and ga-gi--s as : Ki ga-wabamin , . < Ki
ga-gi-ivabamin . . .
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
PERFECT TENSE,
Kishpin wabaminan* if I see thee, Issinowan,
'* i^aiamigoian, if we see thee, igossiwan,
" wabamik, if he sees thee, issinog,
** wabamikw^ if they see thee, issinogwa,
wabam'm&gog, if I see you, issinonagog,
wabamigoieg, if we see you, igossiweg,
wabamineg, if he sees you, issinoweg,
wabammegwa, if they see you, issinowegwa.
* See Remark l} p. 116.
268
PERFECT TENSE.
i, because I have seen issinowan,
thee,
gi-wabamigoi&n, because we have igossiwan.
seen thee,
Etc., after the above present tense, prefixing gi-.
PLUPERFECT TENSE.
had I seen thee, issinowamban,
had we seen thee, igossiwamblD,
toaftamikibaii, had he seen thee, issinogiban,
w>a&a?ttikwaban, had they seen thee issinogwabam,
tt?a&#?mnagogoban, had I seen you, issinonagogoban,
t0aZ>a;«igoiegoban, had we seen you, igossiwegoban,
wraZwminegoban, had he seen you^ issinowegoban,
waba?n'megwa.baii). had they seen you, issinowegwaban,
Form the two future tenses after the present, prefixing
ge-. and gc-gi-, as: Gc-irdlxuinnun, when I shall see thee,
. . . Ge-gi-wabaminan, when I shall have seen thee, etc.
You can also form the two tenses of the conditional mood
after the present and perfect of the in'JictiHi'i- miwl, (p. 266,)
prefixing da-, as: Ki da-lbabakitn, I would see thee, . . .
Ki da-gi-wabamin, I would have seen thee, . . .
PARTICIPLES.
PRESENT TEN
Nin waidbaiinD&&, I who soc rlici-,
"nrin'l. waidbamigoi&n, we who see theer
//•/// irfiitibfiiiiik, he who sees thee,
ir/H(iir</ ii'tiifibftnnkirr, they who see thee,
nin trata^ommagogj I who see
260
ninawind waiabamigoieg, we who see you,
win ivaiabam'meg, he who sees you,
winawa ivaiaba?}iinegog, they who see you.
Nin waiabamiss'mow&n, I who don't see thee,
ninawind waidbamigossiw<\.n, we who don't see thee,
win ivaidbamiss'mok, he who does not . . .
winawa waiabamissinok.ig, they who don't see thee,
nin waiabamiss'monzgog, I who don't see you,
ninawind ivaiabatnigossiweg, we who don't see you,
id n waiabamissinoweg, he who does not see y.
winawa waiabamissinowegog, they who don't see y.
IMPERFECT TENSE.
Nin waiabammamba.n, I who saw thee,
ninawind waiabamigoiamban, we who saw thee,
win waiabamibibrin, he who saw thee,
winawa ivaiabamikibamg, they who saw thee,
nin waiabamma.gogoban, I who saw you,
ninawind waiabamigoiegoban, we who saw you,
win waiaba?nmegob<m, he who saw you,
winawa ivaiaba?n'megobauigy they who saw you.
Nin waiabamissinowa.mban, I who did not see thee,
ninawind i0ai«/;a/mgossiwamban, we who did not . . .
nin waiabani\ssinogiba.n, he who did not see thee,
winawa waiabamissmogiba.i\ig, they who did not s. thee,
nin ttma&amissinonagogoban, I who did not s. you,
ninawind waiabamigossiwegoban, we who did not s. you,
win ivaiabam'iss'mowegoban, he who did not see you,
winawa ^az«6«missinowegobanig, they who did nots . y.
Form after these two the remaining tenses of these par-
ticiples, as : Nin ga-wabamindn, I who have seen thee . . .
Nin ga-wabamindmban, I who had seen thee . . . Nin gc-
wabaminan, I who will see thee . . . Nin ge-gi-wabami ~
wow, I who shall have seen thee . . .
270
Remark. In the present tense of the indicative mood,
(p. 224,) we have, Ki wabamigo, for, " we see thee," and ki
trabamigom, for " we see you." Properly, ki wabamigo,
means, thou art seen ; and ki wabamigom, you are seen.
(See p. ead.) But it is certain that the Otchipwe language
expresses it as above. You may ask, a hundred times,
Otchipwe Indians that understand English : How do you
say in Otchipwe : We see thee ; we see you ? They will
always answer you : Ki wabamigo, ki wabamigom. The
Otawa dialect of the same language has : Ki wabaminimi,
for " we see thee," and ki wabaminiwmi, for " we see you;"
but this cannot be used in the Otchijncc dialect.
The verbs ending in awa at the first person singular in-
dicative, make some little deviations from the preceding
paradigm, as you will see here below. We take again the
verb, Nin nondawa, as an example.
In conjugating these verbs in our "First Case," we take
off the whole termination awa, and then apply the termina-
tions of the paradigm ; because, (as you see,) nothing of
this termination remains unchanged in the conjugating
process of this Case.
AFFIRMATIVE FORM. NEGATIVE FORM.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE.
Ki nondon, I hear thee, Kawin ossinon,
ki nondago,* we hear thee, ,, agossi,
ki nondag, he hears thee, ,, agossi,
/•/. wonrfagog, they hear thee, ,, aijossig,
ki ?i0?»r/<minim, I hear you, ,, ossinoninirn,
ki wmdiLgom* we hear you, ,, agossim,
/•/ wowdagowa, he hears you, ,, agossi wa,
ki ftonefagowag, they hear you, ,, agossi wag,
f See Remark above.
271
IMPERFECT TENSE.
Ki wojictoninaban, I heard thee, Kawin ossincninaban,
ki 7ionda.gona.bcLn, we heard „ agossinaban,
thee,
ki jionda.goba.n, he heard thee, „ ^gossiban,
lei nonda.goba.nig, they heard „ agossibanig,
thee,
ki nowcfoninimwaban, I heard „ ossinoninimvvaban,
you,
ki nondagommaba.n, we heard ,, agossiminaban,
you,
ki M<wrfagowaban, he heard ,, agossiwaban,
you,
ki norarfagowabanig, they heard ,, agossiwabanig,
you,
Form the other tenses of the indicative mood after these
two, as : Ki gi-nondon, I have heard thee . . Ki gi-nondoni-
naban, I had heard thee . . . Ki ga-nondon, I will hear
thee . . . Ki ga-gi-nondon, I shall have heard thee.
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE.
Kishpin nondonan, if I hear thee, ossinowdn,
„ nonrfagoian, if we hear thee, agossiwan,
,, nondok, if he hears thee, ossinog,
,, nondokwa, if they hear thee, ossinogwa,
,, no7idona.gog, if I hear you, ossinonagog,
„ nondagoieg, if we hear you, agossiweg,
,, nondoneg, if he hears you, ossinoweg,
„ nondonegwa, if they hear you, ossinowegwa,
272
PERFECT TENSE.
Gi-nondona.n, because I have heard ossinowan,
thee,
gi-nondagoian, because we have agossiwan.
heard thee,
Etc., after the above present tense, prefixing gi-.
PLUPERFECT TENSE.
iYw/r/onamban, had I heard thee, ossinowamlmn,
Ronrfagoiamban, had we heard thee, agossiwamban,
nondokiban, had he heard thee, ctesinogiban,
noTfrfokwaban, had they heard thee, ossinogwaban,
/ww/onagogoban, had I heard you, ossinonagogoban,
nonrfagoiegobair, had we heard you, agossiwegoban,
/m/ir/onegoban, had he heard you, ossinowegoban,
nomZoliegwaban1, had they heard you, ossiuowegvvaban.
Form the two future ten MS after the pmrnt, as : 6V
nondon&n, wlieu I shall hear thee . . . Ge-gi-nondoneui,
when 1 shall have heard thee . . .
Form the two tenses of the conditional wood after
the present and perfect tenses of the indicnlire mood,
(p. 270,) prefixing da-, as : Kl dd-uondon, I would lic;n
thee . . . Ki da-gi-nondon, I would have heard thee . . .
PARTICIPLES.
PKKSKNT THNSE.
Nin nwftiidwdii, 1 who hear thee,
n'uiawhid hio&ridfagoi&n, \ve who hear thee,
win inrnnditk, lie who hears thee,
irhifiii'fi ////v//K/ok'iLr, they who hear thee,
nin ?///v///</onajr<)«r, I who hear you,
ninawi-nd 7t//v///'V;ijroieg, we who hear you,
win nwandoneg, he who hears you,
wlnawa nwandonegog, they who hear you,
273
Nin mmndossinowan, I who don't hear thee,
ninawind nwandagossiwan, we who don't hear thee,
win nu-andossmog, he who does not hear thee,
winawa nwa?idossinogig, they who don't hear thee,
nin mvandossmonagog, I who don't hear you,
ninawind nwandugossiweg, we who don't hear you,
win nwandoss'moweg, he who doejs not hear you,
winawa nwandoss'mowegog, they who don't hear yon,
IMPERFECT TENSF.
Nin mttMieZondmban, I who heard thee,
ninawind n?r«?i<r/agoiamban, we who heard thee,
win ntra-Hf/okiban, he who heard thee,
winawa mvandokib&mg, they who heard thee,
nin nwandonagogoban, I who heard you,
ninawind w?t'rtrtfZagoiegoban, we who heard you,
win nwcmdonegoban, he who heard you,
winawa /m-a/if/onegobanig, they who heard you.
Nin ftMYmdossinowamban, I who did not hear thee,
mnawind Tmvzwrfagossiwamban, we who did not . . .
win nw7a??efossinogiban, he who did not hear thee,
winawa nwandossmogibamg, they who did not hear thee,
nin mt'rt??fZossinonagogoban, I who did not hear you,
ninawind wttrma'agossiwegoban, we who did not hear you,
win wzrrtwr/ossinowegoban, he who did not hear you,
winawa nzftznefossinowegobanig, they who did not h. you,
Form the remaining tenses of these participles after the
above two, as : Nin ga-nondondn . . . Nin ga-nondoii'
dmban, etc.
The verbs ending in owa at the first person singular, in-
dicative, (p. 245,) are conjugated, in this First Case, again
a little differently from those of the preceding sort. The
difference is trifling ; but it is important to the beginner to
see it at once plainly. You will see it in the following
paradigm.
274
AFFIRMATIVE FORM.
NEGATIVE FOR3I.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
PRESENT, TENSE.
Ki pakitcon, I strike thee,
ki pakiteogo, we strike thee,
ki pakitfog, he strikes thee,
ki pakiteogog, they strike thee,
ki pdkiteouinun, I strike you,
ki pakiteogom, we strike you,
ki jMzHfeogowa, he strikes you,
ki pakiteogowfrg, they strike y.ou,
Knwui ossinon,
ogossi,
ogossi,
ogossig,
ossinoninini
ogossim,
ogossi wa,
:V ogossi wag.
IMPERFECT TENSE.
Ki joa&zfeoninaban, I struck thee,
ki y;r//i-//cogonaban, we s. thee,
ki pakiteogob&a, he struck thee,
ki pakiteogobajiig, they s. thee,
ki paKtedninitnwabah, I s. you,
ki ;jr//i-/fr'ogominabaii, we s. you,
ki pafoVeogowaban, he s. you.
&i jMZ&fteogowabanig they s. you, " ogossiwabanig.
After these two tenses all the others of the hif/icfttin
mood art' formed: as: Ki ffi-/mkiti'on . . . Ki ^i-/>akif<o/i-
. . Ki ga-iKikiteon . . . Ki ga-yi-jtakitcon . . .
Kawin
ossinoninaban,
" ogossinaban,
*' ogossiban,
" ogossibanig,
4< ossinoninimwa-
bari,
" ogossiminaban,
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE.
Kishpin pakitcon£n, if I strike thee, ossinowan,
pakitcogoian, if we s. thee, ogossiwan,
pakitcok, if he strikes thee, ossinog,
pakitcokwa., if they s. thee, ossinogwa,
pakitebnagog, if I s. you, ossinonagog,
pakiteogoieg, if we strike you, ogossiweg,
pakiteoneg, if he strikes you, ossinoweg,
pakitconegwdi, if they s. you, ossinowegwa,
PERFECT TENSE.
Gi-pakiteonsin, because I have ossinowan,
struck thee,
gi-pakiteogoizn because we have ogossiwan,
struck thee,
Etc., after the present tense, prefixing gi-.
PLUPERFECT TENSE.
Pa£?7eonamban, had I s. thee, ossinowamban,
, had we s. t, ogossiwamban.
had he s. thee, ossinogiban,
pakiteokwab&h, had they s. t., ossinogwaban,
paA:^eonagogoban,had I s.you, ossinonagogoban,
^«Arufogoiegoban, had we . . ogossiwegoban,
pakiteonegoban, had he s. you, ossinowegoban,
j9oteeonegwaban, had they s. ossinowegwaban,
you,
Form the two future tenses after the above present tense
as : Ge-pakiteondn, that I shall strike thee, . , . Ge-gi-
pakiteondn, that I shall have struck thee . . .
276
Form the two tenses of the conditional mood after the.
present and perfect tenses of the above indicative mood,
prefixing da-, as : Ki da-pakiteon, I would strike thee, etc.
PARTICIPLES.
PRESENT TENSE.
Nin pekiteonan, I who strike thee,
ninawind pekitcogwnn, we who strike thee,
win pekiteok, he who strikes thee,
winawa pckitcokig, they who strike thee,
nin ppkitfonzgog, I who strike you,
ninawind p&lnttogoteg, we who strike you,
win pckitcancg, he who strikes you,
winawa pakiteonegog, they who strike you.
Nin peKtfeossinowdn, I who dbn't strike thee,
ninawind jpe&iVeogossiwan, we who don't strike thee,
win jpW.vVrossinog, he who does not strike thee,
winawa jv&tfeossraogig, they who don't strike thee,
nin pckiteoss'monagQg, I who don't strike you,
ninawind pekiteogossiweg, we who don't strike you,
win peAriteossinoweg, he who does not strike you,
mnawa ptkiteoBsinowegogi they who don't strike you.
IMPERFECT TENSE.
Nin _/;rA:'/ronumban, I who struck thee
ninawind pefct7£ogoiambaii, we who struck thee,
inn peArifcokiban, lie \vlio struck the<>,
tcinaira ;W,-/Vrokil)::ui.i.r, tliey \\ho struck thee,
mVi ppHfconagogoban, I who struck you,
>iinaii'iml /«•/•/// oLn«i«'.Lr«»l):ui, we who struck you,
tmi pekiteonegobaji, he ulio struck you,
ninatca peArzfconegobanig, tliey who struck you.
277
Nin pekiteoss'mow&mbnn, I who did not strike thcc,
ninawind ^e&iieogossiwamban, we who did not strike teee,
win pekitcossmogibftn, he who did not strike thee,
winawa />e/.'/7eossinogibanig, they who did not strike thee,
nin pe&^eossinonagogoban, I who did not strike you,
ninawind peA'i/cogossiwegoban, we who did not strike you,
win _/?e/;*feossinowegoban, he who did not strike you,
winawa peAi/eossinowegobanig, they who did not strike
you.
The remaining tenses of these participles are to be form-
<-d after the above two.
EXAMPLES ON THE FIRST CASE.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE. Ningwiss, Kcgo wika malcJti dodangen,
kego gale matchi ikitoken • ki wabauiig sa Lteb&ndjiged,
Id nondag gale. My son, never commit a bad action, and
never speak bad words ; the Lord sees thee and hears
thee.
Anindi wendjilaieg kinawa? Kawin ki kikenimistino-
ninim. Where do you come from 1 I don't know you.
Ki jaifcndctgosim, Jcinidjanissiwag ki sagiigowag, ki
lalamitagowag gaic. You are happy, your children love
you and obey you.
IMPERFECT TENSE. Kid inawemaganag ki w,i-mawadissi~
gobanig, kawin dash kid abissinaban. Thy relations in-
tended to pay thee a visit, but thou wast not at home.
Kawin na kid ittissinonanimwaban, wika tchi dodanxi-
wcg, iiongom ga-dodameg 1 Did I not tell you, never to do
what you have done now 1
Koss nomaia ki bashanjcogoban, minawa dash ki kiwa-
18
3TO
i//.v. Thy father whipped thee,, not long ago, and thou
behavcst bad again.
PERFECT TEKSE.. Nisso bibon ki gi-k ikinoamoniniui, kaki-
na ki gt-windainonini>i< £<'<l-(ini-(l<>(lann"_r trhi jairrnda-
gosiieg.. I havetauglit you three years, I have told you
all you have to do, in order to be happy.
Nosse, nind ctnwenindTs, kaicin ki gi-bubtimitossinon, kaw-
in Id gv-mino-dodossinoH. Father, I reproach it to myself
that I have not obeyed thee, that I have not treated thee
kindly.
Kawin na ki gi-min&gossig ishkotcwabo ? Have they
not given thee ardent liquor to drink ?
PLUPERFECT TENSE. Na-nhig'un ki gi-jateinimigobanig
'uriw ikircwdg ga-m&djctdjig pitehindgo. Those women
that departed yesterday, had often been charitable to
thee.
Ki gi<-nandotamagowal>anig mirfjim, lira dagtcishinotrad
uniff. They had asked you for some provisions, before
they came here.
Knwin ki gi-JciJcenimigossimina'ban, <nn« gi-bi-ijaiegoban
\\'c did not know, (we had not known,) that you had,
come here.
Fi TTUK TENSE. Nin nuidja ; kau-in dash ^(inahutr/t rn<
wa ki garwabamissinoninim omd aking; indi ita itijignng
ki. ga^wabamininim'. I am goin^ away ; and perhaps I
will no more see you here on earth ; but there in heaven
I will see you.
ged-ako-biibaddsiian ki ga-manadjiiii, ki
.-/ ^/-.sv/«/'m enigokodeeidn ; ^ijifffnm
ki ga-iruh(iniin. Lord, as lonif
live, I will adorn thee, I will will serve thre, I will Io\r
thee froji\ all my heart; and in heaven I will ctcrnalh
thee
279
Kishjrin mddjaiany ki ga-nopinanigo. If thou goest a-
way, we will follow thee,
SECOND FUTURE TENSE. KL ga-gi-kiktiiimin ejiwebisiian^
tclii bwa bibong. I shall have known thee how thou be-
havest, (I shall have known thy conduct,) before winter.
Sigwang na Id wi-nagaddn nind pdtnaiotnsinan ? Kakina
ki ga-gi-dibaamdgo tclii bwa madjaian. Wilt thou
leave our little village next spring? We shall have paid
thee all, before thou startest.
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
PRESF.NT TENSE. Debendjigcian, apcgish gwaiak kiktni-
miku'ci bemud isidjig ; ki da-sagiigog. Klshpin eta (lu'iia
tiilceniimssineg, kawin ki sagiigossi. Lord, 1 wish all
men would know thee well ;• they would love thee. He
only that knows thee not, does not love thee.
Nhi gi-gijendam nongom, koginig tclii debwetonan minik
ckltoian ; wika minawa tclii dgomcctossinowdn. I have
firmly resolved now, always to believe thee (to obey thee)
whatever thou sayest ; never more to contradict thee, (to
disobey thee.)
Kwiwisensidog , wabamincgwa eta kinigiigowag, ki bisdn
fibim ; kishpin dash kaginig ganawenimissinowegwa, pdb-
ige ki matctii doddm. Ye boys, only when your parents
see you, you are quiet; but when they are not constant-
ly watching you, you do mischief immediately.
PERFECT TENSE. Nongom nin kikenindis eji-matchi-iji-
webisiidn, gi-nondondn gi-a-namiegijigak. Now, after
hearing thee last Sunday, I know myself how wicked t
am.
Gi-bamiikwa gi-akosiian, mi wendji-sdgicmgidwa. We
love them because they took care of thee when thou wast
sick.
-X)
I\<urin ki kiktnimissiuoninim eji-nagamoieg,wika gi-non-
dossinonagog. I don't know you, what singers you are,
(how you sing,) as I never have heard you.
PLUPERFECT TEASE. Vffegonendash ga-bi-ondfaijassiiaeg,
gl-ano-nandominagogoban / AVhydid you not come, al-
though I had called you ?
Kifhpin kinidjanissiwagpisindorteg&aban, inwija <> d<t-
gi-boniawan wttb&okcnocewaxljln. Had your children list-
ened to you, they would have left their comrades long
ago.
Enigok bibdgimissinogiban, kawin ki da~gi-bi-giit>esst.
If he had not called thee very loud, thou wouldst not ha\e
returned.
I<YTURE TENSE. JCMIS Delirnhniurn, aninnrctpi
mindn ki k it r hitu -n irr. s iw'inin g 1 Lord Je.1- us, when shall I
see thee in thy glory ?
Awenen ge-n0nl'bikimineg irika, khhp'ni nmjug ml no do-
damcg 1 Who shall ever rebuke you, if you always do
right ?
Osam naniu^hn ki giwatiim, mi jo'i^tra ge-0tldji-debwe~
tdtsinogw&btmddisidjig ; thoutellest lies too often ; that
is the reason why people will now not believe thee.
CONDITIONAL MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE. Kislipin wen&gwishigin wi-bi-ijaieg oma ,
ki da-klkinodmoninim, (tnotch gdir grsrit irrnijithtng ki
rlri-irinf/fiHHiniiiiiH. If you would come here evenings, I
would teach you to read, and I would tell you many use-
ful things.
Kuirin (iiriid anishu ki <l<t-Hrin.itfosxi £('&), ^ff-/-d/>it<-/t-
irathkifoidii fr/ii <i nokiian ; iiohody would give, thee any
thing for nothing, as long as thou art altlc to work.
Ki dfi-su«ii!!i.'irti, ki da-jawinimigowa Kije-Manite, kisJi-
l>in wi-driwemndisoiegoban ; (iod would love you and
have mercy on you, if you would repent.
281
PERFECT TENSE. Kawin kl (la-gi-matcJii-dajimigossig,
kawin gaie ki da-gi-bapiigossig, nawatch nibwakdiamban.
They would not have spoken ill of thee, and they would
not have laughed at thee, hadst thou been wiser, (more
prudent.)
Ki da-gi~windamagom ejiwebak, dibadjimoicgoban ga-
iDabandamcy ; we would have told you how it is, had you
mentioned what you have seen.
Ki da-gi-wdbamin. anamitwigamigong, pindigciamban ;
I would have seen thee in the church, hadst thou come in.
PARTICIPLES.
PRESENT TENSE. Dcbcnimiian saiagiindn, iucnimishin
tchi apitchi sagiinan enigokodeeian. Lord, whom I love,
be it thy will to give me grace to love thee from all my
heart.
Kin wika waidbamigossiwan oma a king, gijigong ki
wabaminagos. Thou whom we don't see here on earth,
thou art visible in heaven.
\Vinawa minik kckeniminegog,dibadjimowag cjiu'cbisiiegi
all those who know you, tell how you behave.
IMPERFECT TENSE. Gi-madja aw mini mojag mcnaikibaii
ishkotcwabo ; that man is gone away who always gave thee
to drink ardent liquor.
^Vin igo waiabaminegoban dibadjimo ga-dodameg ; he
himself who saw you, tells what you have done.
PF.RKKCT TENSE. Winawa wika mashi ga-nondossinokig
uina eiadjig bemadisidjig, wabang ki ga-nondagog. Those
who live here and have never yet heard thee, will hear
thee to-morrow.
Oshkinawedog, mojag mikwenimig kinigiigowag ga-mino-
kikinoarnonegog ; young men, remember always your pa-
rents who have so well taught you.
282
FUTURE TENSE. Ke.go wika waninimalcen aw gc-dibakfi-
nik ; mojttg ki ganawabfunig. Do thou never forget him
who shall judge thee ; he is always looking upon thee.
NinidjanissidGgt kcgo wistbkttttikegort nctd-giwashkwtbi-
\ djig] ml sa igiw ged-apitchi-banadjiinegog. My children.
don't associate with drunkards ; they are those who will
totally ruin you.
Nikanissidoff, wika ge-wanenimissinonagog, mojag pair
kinawa mikwenimishig. Brethren, whom I never shall for-
get, do also you always remember me.
SECOND FUTURE TENSE. Debendjigcian,
a king enigokodeewad, ml igiw ged-tipitchi-Jawendagosid-
jig gijigong. Lord, those who shall have loved thee on
earth with ail their heart, shall be most happy in heaven
SECOND CASE.
(Thou . . . me.)
AFFIRMATIVE FORM. NEGATIVE FOR}!
INDICATIVE MOOD.
PRESENT
A"/" irabf/m, thou seest me, Knirin issi,
/. :/' icffbamimj you see me, " issim,
///// ^/bating, he sees me, *' igossi,
nin wabamjgog, they see me, " igossig,
ki vHibfiiiriimn, thou seest us, '* issimin,
* ki tvabamimin, you see us, " issimin,
ii in ?/v//vr////igonan, he sees us, " ij^ossinan,
nin ?^air////i^nfi;iiiin;,tlicy s<;e us, u igossinnniii
See Remark at the end of this paradigm,
283
IMPERFECT TENSE.
Ki wabammabsaa, thou sawest Kawin issinaban,
me,
ki wa&awimwaban, you saw issimwaban,
me,
nin wabatmgoban, he saw me, " igossiban,
nin wabamigobanig, they saw " igossibanig,
me,
ki wabamim'ma.ba.n, thou saw- 4< issiminaban.
est us,
1:1 ?rrt&tfmiminaban,you saw us, " issiminaban,
•nin ?6'«i«;«igonaban, he saw us, " igossinaban,
.nin ?ra£rt?«igonabanig, they saw " igossinabanig,
as,
•PERFECT TENSE.
iKi gi-wabam, thou "hast seen me, Kawin issi,
ki gi-wabamim, you have seen ' " issim.
me,
Etc., after the above present tense, prefixing gi-?.
PLUPERFECT TENSE.
Ki gi-wabam\na.b<in, thou hadst Kawin issinaban,
seen me,
&i gi-waba?mmw<i\)<>Ln., you had ** issimwaban.
seen me,
Etc., after the above imperfect tense prefixing gi-.
Form the two future tenses after the present, prefixing ga-,
and ga-gi-; as : Ki ga-wabam, thou shalt see me, . . . Ki
ga-gi-wabam, thou shalt have seen me, . . .
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE.
Kishpln wdbamuzn, if tliou seest me, issiwan,
** wdbamiieg, if you see me, issiweg,
284
irabamid, if he sees me,
t0oZ>amiwad, if tliey see me,
ir(ih(tmi\Sincr,if thou seest us, issiuano-,
, if you see us, issiwang,
*ttttr&miiangid, ) if he sees issiwangid,
•?<Y//>«//niiiing, J us, issinowang,
*//Y//><y//niangidwa, ) if they issiwangidwa, >
•a, \
j see us, issmowangwa,
PERFECT TEN SI).
Gi-irab caiman, because thou issiwan,
hast seen me,
gi-toabamiieg, because you issiweg.
have seen me,
Etc., after the above present tense, prefixing gi-.
PLUPERFECT TENSE.
f U 'ab(inma.mb'Aii, hadst thou seen me, issiwamban,
i, had you seen me, issiwegoban,
i, had he seen me, issigoban,
i, had they seen me, issigwaban,
zrafrafttiiaugiban, hadst thou seen us, is>i\\aii<nl>an,
y/Y///rt//niangiban, had you seen us, issiwangiban,
/ra/>a//nian<fi(lil)an, ^ , , , is,si\vanindibau,
toaiaminangoban, ^ l u*' issiiiow,iiigoi)an.
waba//tirdi\'j;\(\\\;\\mi}, ( had they seen issiwauiridwabaiK
?/;a^a//iinang\vaban, J us, issiuowangwabau,
Tlie two future tenses are formed after the j>rrscnt, In-
prefixing ge-, and xr-«i-, as : (Ic-n-ahainiuin, when tltou
slialt see me . . , Ge-gi-wabauu.iany when tliou shalt have
me . . .
Tliese tonninations are employed when the person or persons spoken
to, are not included. (See Remark 3, p. 45.)
t Sen Rwttrkx "i and 3, p. 116.
285
Form the two tenses of the conditional mood after the
present and perfect tenses of the indicative mood, prefixing
da-, as : Ki da-wabam, thou vvouldst see me . . . Ki da-
thou wouldst have seen me . . .
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
Wabamishin, ) /,, N T^
7 • , -, > see me, (thou,) iLe&o
* waoamishikan, )
ivdbamishlg, see me, (you,) .,
nin ga-wabamig, let him see me, ,,
nin ga-wdbamigog, let them see me, ,,
toa&amishiham, see us, (thou,) ,,
wabaimshuiam, see us, (you,) ,,
nin ga-it'ttbamigona.n,, let him see us, ,,
nin «a-wabamigoua.mg, let them see us, ,,
PARTICIPLES.
PRESENT TENSE.
Kin waidbamn^n, thou who seest me,
kinawa waiabanmeg, you who see me,
win iraiabcnnid, he who sees me,
irinawa waiabam\(\\\g, they who see me,
kin ipaiabamu&ng, thou who seest us,
kinawa waiabamii&ng, you who see us,
• t -i
ishiken,
ishikegon,
igossi,
igossig,
ishikangen,
ishikangen,
igossinan,
igossinanig,
. 7 • / nc w mj occo US,
win waiabammtmg, )
,;„««•« W«i«4«!«iiangidjig)t I who gee
winawa waiabammangog, }
Kin waiabamiBBiw&Ti, thou who dost not see me,
kinawa ivaiabamissiweg, you who do not see me,
win waiabamissig, he who does not see me,
winawa waiabamissigog, they who don't see me,
* See Remark*, p. 117.
t See Note, p. 234.
kin waiabamissivfdiUg, thou who dost not see us,
kinawa iraia&amissiwang, you who don't see us,
,
he who does not scc tls'
«*i/«7*//wissinowangog, who don
IMPERFECT TENSE.
?m/V/7;f///niamban, thou who savvest me,
Icinawa ?«Z7aZ>amiiegoban, you who saw me,
?r/w ?rrm/7;<7//npan, he who saw me,
initatca tcaiabamvpyni^ tliey who saw me,
7r//i. ?r«/V//>r/;//iiau^ibaii, thou who sawest us,
ftinawd ^am^awiiangiban, you who saw us,
//•/•/< tfam^amianidiban ,
hc who saw us'
Al
they who saw n?!'
Kin ?/Y//a/;r/wissiwamban, thou who didst not. see m<
//v/m/^////issiwe<rol)ai], you who did not see me,
iri/i frrm/^/wissigoban, he who. . .
tcinatoa wai^tbamuango^aHg^ they who . . .
kin »aiaiamiesiwangrban, thou who didst not sec us.
ki-naira i^ata&anltssiw&ngibm, yon who . . .
,
//•/'// //Y/^VfAr/yy/issiuowanLfof);!!!, I
> ,
t^aia^amissuiowttagobanig, t u) • • •
The other tenses arc formed after these two.
ilrmnrk. You see that, here (p. %J>^)tlie singular and the
[ilural are cMjual. Speaking to one person only, or to several.
you liave to n<e tlic sanu- inllection •..!' the verb. This
peculiarity occurs several times in this " M-rond ('
287
The verbs ending in awa make also here some little ex-
ceptions from the preceding paradigm. The difference is
especially perceptible in the third persons. In order to
conjugate easily these verbs in the Second Case, you will
have to take off the last syllable wa, and place instead of it
the terminations of the following paradigm.
AFFIRMATIVE FORM. NEGATIVE FORM.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSF.
Ki non-daw t thou hearest mo,
Id nondawim, you hear me,
iiin notidag, he hears me,
n In, nondagog, they hear me,
ki twndawim'm, thou hearest us,
ki nonda\v\imn, you hear us,
nln /jowdrtgonan, he hears us,
tt in u,ondagona.mg, they hear us,
Kawin wissi,
,, wissim,
gossi,
., gossig,
,, wissimin,
,, wissimin,
,, gossinan,
gossinanig.
IMPERFECT TENSE.
Ki noTK/awinaban, thou heardst Kawin wissinaban,
me,
ki norarfawiminabau, you heard m. ,, wissiminaban,
nin nondagoban, he heard me, ,, gossiban,
nin nondagobanig, they heard me, ,, gossibanig,
&i HomZavvimjnaban, thou heardst ,, wissiminaban,
us,
ki ttoradfawiminaban, you heard us, ,, wissiminaban,
nin nondagonaban, he heard us, ,, gossinaban,
nin nondagonB.ba.mg, they heard us, ,, gossinabanig.
After these two tenses you may form all the others of
the indicative mood.
288
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
I'RKSKNT TEN1
wndawiian, ifthou hearest me, wissiwaiu
nondawiieg, if you hear me, wissiwecr,
nondaw'id, if he hears me, wissiir,
nondawiw$LQ.i if they hear me, wissigwa,
nondawii&ng, ifthou hearest us, wissiwang,
nondawiiang, if you hear us, wissiwang,
^ «-issi»-angid, '
//ow/onang, ^ ossinowaiig.
r«O7?<fowiiangidwa, \ if they hear \vissi\vangid\vu.
* tionflonzngwd, j us, ossinowangua.
PERFECT TENSE,
, because thou hast hoard me, wissiwan.
, because you have heard me, wissi\\«
Etc., after the above prc?riit
TENSE.
, liadsttliou heard vvissiwambati,
me,
, had you heard m. \\-issi\vngoban,
nonJawipan, liad he heard me, \\issiirdb.ui.
, had they heard in. \vissiir\vaban,
, hadsttlmu h.ns, wissiwangiban,
, liad you h. us, wissiwangiban,
nottrfnwiiangidrban, ^ liad lie li. wissiwaugidibai^
us, ossiuowauiroban,
aban, * ha«l tln-y wissriwangidwaban,
n, j
wontfortangwaban, j li. us, ossinowangwaban,
* A'o/e. In these third persons you hrive not only the last syllable t/'«
tr> tuke ofl'. but the whole termination awa, before you add thr termina-
tions of the Conjugation to the verb.
289
The two future tenses are formed after the present. Tho
conditional mood is easily formed after the indicative.
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
ZV0?M?a wishing ) , / i \ T- • i -i
j > hear me (tlion,) Kego wishiken,
nonoawishikan, )
ttorarfawishig, hear me (you,) ,, wishikegon,
it in ga-nondqg, let him hear me, ,, gossi,
nin ga-nondagog, let them hear me, ,, gossig,
M.0?/r/ttwishimmi, hear us (thou,) ,, wishikangen,
wowWflwishinam, hear us (you,) ,, wishikangen,
nin ga-nondagonan, let him hear us, ,, gossinan,
nin ga-nondagoiianig, let them hear us, ,, gossinanig.
PARTICIPLES.
PRESENT TENSE.
Kin nwandavruwa, thou who hearest me,
kinawa nwandawiieg, you who hear me,
win nifanrlawid, he who hears me,
•tninawa nwandawid]ig^ they who hear me,
kin nwahdawi\a.ng, thou who hearest us,
kinawa mvandaw\\£ng, you who hear us,
win nwandawii&nffid, ) ,
, > he who hears us,
ii'in nwandonang, j
winaira ntwwM?awiiaiigidjifif. ) Al
7 > they who hear us,
winawa mvanf/onu.no, } J
Kin nwandawissiwzn, thou who dost not hear me,
kinawa nwandaw\ss'i\\ev, you who don't hear me,
win mcandawissig, he who does not hear me,
winawa nwandaw \ssigog, they who don't hear me,
kin nwandawissiw&ng, thou who dost not hear us.
wn . ,
moondoasinowang? llp wl'° Aaf* "'" hriir
290
HHY/w/f/wissiwang, you who don't hear us.
wl'° Aaf* "'"
,
the>' who don l
I.MPEKFE:T TENSE.
Kin ;?//v//?r/i7wiiamban, thou who lieardst me,
kinatra nfoan^awiiegobanj you who heard me,
win motmi/awipan; he who heard me,
ir'> luuca iROQTicfawiptnig, they who lieard rne,
kin ruptzn<2awii&tig)banj thou who heardst us,
kinawa ntffiptndlawiidngibaii, you who heard us.
/r/// ////Y///r/r/u'ii;uio;idibau, ) ,
, > he who heard us,
wm RtranaonangobaD, )
?iw«w«rZawissiwamban, thou who didst not hear in
ntoan^awissiiiregpban, you who did not . . .
win nwandctwissigobsn, he who . . .
w^amfawissigobarjig, they . . .
/.•/« ///r,'///,'/avvissi\va!i^il):in, thou who did.st not h. u
kinawa nwanrfrtwissiwangibanj you wlio . . .
angiibah, \ ,
win nuJanc/Ossinowangoban, )
winowti ;///Y///r/f/wissi\v;iniridil)auiix, ^ ,
/i//v///r/ossiiiowaiig()l)auig, ^
the remaining tenses of these participles
rliose two.
The verbs of the thn-r kini/.< u<- iiieiirioued on p. -21-.'
which are irregular at the si-mud person, sinirular, irnj)era-
hve, conserve this irregularity almost throughout the whole
'' fificowl (.'•/ .-•/•." a^ you will sec ut the following paradigm-
291
Let us now consider the verbs of the first kind, ending
in lift. The irregularity of these verbs consists in chang-
ing this termination net, inj, at the second person singular,
imperative ; and this j appears then throughout all the
moods and tense-s and persons which are irregular.
A.FFIR3IATIVE FORM.
NEGATIVE FORM..
INDICATIVE MOOD,
PERFECT TENSF.
Kid ano'], thou employest me, Kawin jissi,
kid onojim, you employ me,
lind anomg, he employs me,
lind anomgog, they employ n
kid anojimin,. thou employest us,
kid araojimin, you employ us,
•rind awonigbnari, he employs us,
me,
est us,
em. us,
IMPERFECT TENSE.
jissnn,
ngossg,
jissimin,
jissiminv
nigossinan,
nigossmanig,
Kid' anojiuaban, thou employ- Kawin jissinaban,
edst me>
kid a;i0jiniwaban, you em. me, jissimwaban,.
mnd a?zonigoban, he empl'd me, nigossiban,
nlnd a/ionigobanig, they em. me, nigossibanig,
kid a?iojiminaban, thou em. us, jissiminaban,
kid rt?zojiminaban, you em. us, jissiminaban,.
nind a770iwgonaban, he empl'd us, riigossinaban,
nlnd anonigonabanig, they em. us, " n-igessinabanig.
Tbe remaining tenses of the indicative are formed aftc>;
the present and the imperfect^
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSK.
in ff/?fljiian, if thou emyl. mt, jissiwan,
, if you employ me, jissiweg,
, if lie employs me, jissig,
anojiwad, if they empl. me, jissigwa,
tfwojiiang, if thou e. us, jissiwang,
erwojiiang, if you empl. us, jissiwang, '*
anojiiangid, ) Jf h em jissiwangid,
ononinang, j nissinowang,
anojiiangidwa, » iftliey em- jissiwangidwa,
a/ioninang\va, ) ploy us. nissinowangwa
PERFECT TENSE.
Gi-anojuan, because thou hast jissiwan,
employed me,
g/-a/?ojiieg, because you have jissiweg,
employed me.
Etc., after the Above present tense.
PLUPERFECT TENSE.
^1/zojiiamban, hadst thou em- jissiwamban,
ployed me,
ffwojiiegoban, had you o. mo, jissiwofjoban,
ano\\p;m, had lio cinpl. nu1, jissi<r<>bnn,
/T//ojiwapan, had tlioy e. me, jissigwaban,
i, hadst tliou jissiwatigiban,
employed us,
i, ha<l you . . jisshvaniriban,
/7.7{»jiiaiiiiidil)aii, ) had ho
aw^ninanirol)an, j empl. us, nissiuou
anojiangiawabart, | liadthoy jissiwangidwaban,
i, i ompl. us nissinowangwabaii,
293
The two future tenses are formed after the above present-
The conditional mood is formed after the indicative, pre-
fixing da-, or da-gi-.
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
.dnojishin, > employ me, lfrg-0 jishiken,
r/wojishikan, } (thou,)
tfm.jishig, employ me, (you,) i4 jishikegon,
•nin gad-ancnig let him employ me, " nigossi,
nin gad-anon\gogt\et them employ me, " nigossig,
attojishitiam; employ us, " jishikangen,
(thou,)
arecjishinam, employ us, (you.) " jishikangen,
nin gad-am nigonan, let him emp. us, " nigossinan,
nin garf-«?tonigonanig, let them em- " nigossinanig,
ploy us,
PARTICIPLES.
PRESENT TENSE.
Kin cnojiian, thou who employes! jissiwan,
me,
kinawa ewojiieg, you who employ me, jissiweg,
win eno']id, he who employs me, jissig,
•winawa e/iojidjig, they who emp me, jissigog,
kin cn^jiiang, thou who employ- jissiwang,
est us,
kinawa enojnanz, you who emp. us, jissiwang,
win enojii.-mrrid, ) he who em- jissiwangid,
win cr/oninang, ) ploys us, nissinowang,
winawa e ojiinngidjig, ) they that em-jissiwangidjig,
rcinawa ewoninangog, } ploy us, nissinowangog.
AFFIRMATIVE FORM.
IMPERFECT TENSE.
Kin en/jiiamban, thou who employedst me,
kiniiva eriLJiiegoban, yeu who employed TOP.
19
294
win cnojipan, he who employed me,
winawa e?iojipanig, they who e i ployed me,
kin enojiiangiban, thou who employedst u.
kinawa cw/jiiangiban, you who employed us,
win eyioiiiancridiban, } ,
he who
vi»ai0a e/wjiiangidibanig, ) . ,
winawa erconinangobanig, \ J
NEGATIVE FORM,
IMPERFECT TENSE.
Kin ew<5Jissiwamban, thou who didst not employ
me,
kinawa e?70jissiwegoban, you who did not employ mer
win c?iojissigoban, he who . . .
winawa e/iojjssigobanig, they who . . .
kin c/iojissiwangiban, thou- who didst not emp. asw
kinawa en /jissiwangiban, you wlio . . .
win cw/jissiwangidiban, ) ,
win cTtobisainowangoban, j
winawa en> jissiwangidibanig, ) ,
winawa c?zonissinowangobanig, j ^
The remaining tenses of these participles are formed
after these two.
The second kind of irregular verbs comprehends the
verbs ending in sfid. (So< : It.) These verbs are
perfectly regular in the active and passive voices, except in
the second person sing, imper. in the acl.ive voice. They
also perfectly agree with the paradigm of the " First C;t
Ki. wabamin; but they deviate a little from the paradigm
of the *' Second Case," Ki irnbani. You will see the dif-
ference here below.
We hive seen, (p. 241 ) tint theso verbs change their
termination ssd into s/ii, at the second per*, sing. imi>-
295
and this sh appears in the moods and tenses, which are ir-
regular ; as you will see in the following paradigm.
AFFIRMATIVE FORM. NEGATIVE FORM.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE.
Ki gosh, thou fearest me, Kawin shissi,
ki goshim, you fear me,
nin gossig, he fears me,
nin gossigog, they fear me,
ki goshimin, thou fearest us,
ki g-oshimin, you fear us,
nin gossigonan, he fears us,
nin ifossigonanig, they f. us,
IMPERFECT TENSE.
shissim,
ssigossi,
ssigossig,
shissimin,
shissimin,
ssigossinan
ssigossinanig,
ifti g-oshinaban, thou fearedst Kawin shissinaban,
me,
ki goshi'nwaban, you feared " shissimwaban,
me,
n*» ^ossigoban, he feared me, <f ssigossiban,
nin ^ossigobanig, they feared " ssigossibanig,
me,
ki goshiminaban, thou fear- " shissiminaban,
edst us,
./:/ goshiminaban, you feared " shissiminaban.
us,
nin gossigonaban, he feared " ssigossinaban,
us,
nin ^ossigonabanig, they fear- " ssigossinabanig,
ed us,
The other tenses of the indicative mood are formed after
these two.
296
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE.
Kishpin goshiian, if thou fearest
me,
•' goshiieg, if you fear me,
goshid, if he fears me,
" goshixvad, if they fear me,
goshiiaug, if thou fearest
us,
" ^oshiiang, if you fear us,
^oshiiangid, i if he fears
** ^ossinang, f us,
^oshiiangidxva, > if they
" gossinangwa, ^ fear us,
shissiwan,
shissixveg,
ehissig,
shissigwa,
shissixvarig,
shissixvang,
shissixvan«rid,
inoxvang,
shissixvangidwa.
ssissinoxvangwa.
PERFECT TENSE.
Gi-goshiian, because thou shissixvan,
hast feared me,
^z-goshiieg, because you shissiweg,
have feared me,
Etc., after the above jJrcsent tense.
PLUPERFECT TENSE.
6roshiinmban, hadstthou shissi\vamban,
fcnrcd us,
goshiiegobtn, had you shissiwegoban,
fc:ir(¥(l me,
gosliij);iii, li;id lie f. me, sliissi^oban,
goshiwapan, had they f. shissigwabaB,
mo,
g«ebiiangiban,had»t tlnui shissiwaugiban,
feared us,
297
goshiiangiban, had you shissiwangiban,
feared us,
goshiiangidiban, i had he shissiwangidiban,
g-ossinangoban, ) f. us, ssissinowangoban,
goshiiangidwaban, ) had shissiwangidwaban,
^•ossinangwaban, /they s.-issinowangwaban,
feared us,
Form the two future tenses after the above present ; and
the conditional mood after the indicative.
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
6roslwshin, ) fear me, Kego shishiken,
goshishikan, J (thou,)
^oshishig, fear me, (you,) " shishikegon,
nin ga-goss\g, let him fear me, " ssigossi,
nin ga-gossigog, let them fear me, " ssigossig,
^•oshishinam, fear us, " shishikangen,
(thou,)
goshishinam, fear us, " shishikangen,
mn gtf-g-ossigonan, let him fear " ssigossinan,
us,
trin #a-g0ssigonanig, let them f. " ssigossinanig,
us,
PARTICIPLES.
AFFIRMATIVE FORM.
PRESENT TENSE.
Kin gweshuan, thou who fearest me,
kinawa gweshneg, you who fear me,
win gweshid, he who fears me,
tcinawa gweshidjig, they who fear me,
kin gwcsliii'dng, thou who fearest us,
298
kinawa gwrshiiang, you who fear us,
,
he who fears us'
wn
winawa
mnawa ey wo car US'
NEGATIVE FORM.
PRESENT TENSE.
Kin gweshissiwan, thou who dost not fear me.
kinawa g^eshissiw^g, you who don't fear me,
wm gweshissig, he who does not . . >
winawa £t(?£shissigog, they . . .
Arin^zwshissiwaog, thou who dost not fear us,
kinawa gzoeshtssiwaog, you who . . .
, ) ,
, j e
win g^essissinowang,
winawa g-wtt'shisssiwangidjig, ^ ,
winawa ^ressissmowangog, j iey . . .
IMPERFECT TENSE.
Kin gwlshiiamban, thou who fearodst me,
kinawa g-^cshtiegoban, you who feared mr,
win gweehipan, he who feared me,
winawa gweshipaaiff, they who feared me,
&ro gtc&hiiaDgiban, thou who fearedst us,
kinawa gtr^shiiatigiban, you who feared us,
win g^shiiangidibtn, I , , f ,
win ^wessinangoban, )
winawa
TE.NSH.
7v//j ^//vsliissiiamhan, ihou wlio fearedst me not,
" i .'"•'> I ilssiwcgoban, you who feared me not,
299
win gwessigossiban, he who did not fear me,
winawa givessigossibtmig, they who . . .
kin g'Zfleshissiwangiban, thou who didst not fear u&«
fdnawa gtreshissiwangiban, you who . . .
win gMJfshissiwangidiban, ) ,
win gwessissinowamgoban, f
winawa gzwshissiwangidibanig, I ,
winawa g?0essissinowangobanig, $ ^ ' ' '
The other tenses of these participles are formed after
these two.
The third kind of irregular verbs contains the verbs end-
ing in owa. (See p. '245.) We have already noticed some
irregularities of these verbs, (p. 274, etc.,) but there are
lome more, which you will find in the following paradigm
*»
AFFIRMATIVE FOR1VL NEGATIVE FORM-
INDICATIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE.
Ki pakite, thou strikes! me, Kawin ossi,
ki pakiteom, you strike me, > " ossim,
nin pakiteog, he strikes me, " ogossi,
nin pakiteogog, they strike me, " ogossig,
ki pakitcom'm, thoa strikest us, " ossimin,
ki pakiteomm, you strike us, " ossimin,
nin pakiteogoirm, he strikes us, " ogossinan,
nin pakiteogoRzu'ig, they strike us, " ogossinanig,
IMPERFECT TENSE.
Ki j9«/a/eonaban, thou struckest me, Kawin ossinaban,
M pa&i/eomwaban, you struck me, •" ossimwaban,
300
nin pakiteogoban, he struck me, " ogossiban,
nin imkiteogobamg, they struck " ogossibanig,
me,
fci 7;a£i/fominahan,th.ou struckest " ossiminaban,
t*s,
(•?' 7>fl£i/«ominaban, you struck us, " ossiminaban,
nin /;<7/j//cogonaban, he struck us, " ogossinaban,
nin pakiteogonzbamg, they 'struck lt ogossinabanigr
. us,
Form the remaining tenses of the indicative mood after
these two.
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD,
PRESENT TENSE.
Pakifeoian, if thoir strikest me, ossiwarr^
pakiteoieg, if you strike me, o.«siwegr
pakiteod, if he strikes mer o^ig,
pakitfo\viu\, if they strike me, ossigwa,
. froiang, if thou strikest us,ossi\vangr
, if you: strike us, ossiwang^
ossrewang,
, i if they s. ossiwangidwa.
us, ossinowangwa.
FERFEJCT TI.
, because thou hast ossivran,
struck IIK%
, because you have ossiweg,,
struck me.
Ktc., after the above present tense.,
301
PLUPERFECT TENSE.
Pakiteoi3.mb<in, hadst thou ossiwambanv
struck me,
pakitcoiegoba.il, had you s. ossiwegoban,
me,
pakiteopiui, had he s. me, ossigoban,
jM&ffcowapan, had they s. oesigwabap*
me, *
;;a/h'£eoiangiban, hadst thou osswangibar*,,
struck us,
pa&tfeoiangibao, had you s. ossiwangigan,
us,
/>a£/Yeoiangidiban, ^ , , , ossiwangidibar/,
1 . ossinowangoban^
struck us,
had ossivvarigidtwaban,
they ossinowangwabaD,
struck us,
Form the two future tenses after the above present ; and
form the tenses of the conditional mood after the present,
and perfect of the indicative.
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
Kego
JPakiteosh'm, ) x .T /A, \ oshtkeiK
oshikegon,,
ogossi,.
ogossig,
oshikangen,,
oshikangen,,
ogossinan,
ogossiaanig,
p«A:i/coshig, strike me, (you,)
nin ga-pakiteog, let him strike me,
nin ga-pakiteogpg, let them strike me,
pakiteosh'm<Lm, strike us, (thou,)
pakiteo^hmam^ strike us, (you,)
nin ga-pakiteogonan, let him strike us,
nin ga-pakitcogonznig, let them strike us,
302
PARTICIPLES.
PRESENT TENSE.
Kin pekileoiun, thou who strikest me,
pekiteofag, you who strike me,
•//•/// pekiteod, he who strikes me,
winawn pefc/tfeodjig, they who strike me,
/./// />r/;/Yroiu;ij;, thou who strikest us,
kinami pekiteo\&T\g, you who strike us,
who strikes us,
who strike us.
If/w 7^/,-//r'Ossiwan, thou who dost not strike me,
klnaira />r/V/''ossiwoir, you who don't strike me,
win />//.-//('()ssiir) he \vho does not strike me,
winawa pe/bfeossigog, they \vlio don't strike ine,
/.•///. jteAr&eossiwaftg, th;>u \vho dost not strike us,
Irinawa peArifeossiwang, you who don't, strike us,
//•.'// ni'Jc'.ln )ssiw:ill'ri;l, > ..
he who does not strike us,
inui pcAr/^cossmowaacr, )
winnira pe^/feossiwanGridii?, > .,
7 , ., o J e j (iu.v u ho don t strike us.
pe^^cossinowangog, J J
ENSE:
thou who struckest me,
you \\lio struck me,
//•/// /., /v'/'<)|) in. li" \v!i > -truck me,
-/n-f.-ff /op iuiLr, lliey who struck me,
/.-/'// /;.•://'/ -oi inxil>iu, thou who struckrst us,
, you who struck us,
303
wn pe, ,
win £*«eonanVb.n,. } be who who sirack
winawa pc AvV^oiano-idibaniff, ) Al ,
* the whoBtruck u
/J6^i7eossiwamban, thou who didst not strike me,
kinawa pekiteassiwQgoban, you who did not strike me,
win pekiteossigoban. he who did not strike me,
winawa pe/j/fcossigobanig, they who did not r-trike me,
kin ^c^/frossiwangiban, thou who dost not strike us,
kinawa £>e&i£eossiwangiban, you who . . .
win ^e/j^eossiwangidiban, I ,
gin jwA-^'ossinowangoban, J 1G ' ' '
winawa /;eA;/£cossiwaugidibariig, ) .
winawa j,ie/j/£eossmowangobanig, | ^
After these two tenses all the others of the participles are
formed.
EXAMPLES ON THE SECOND CASE.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE. Debenimiian, mojag ki ganawabam, ki
nondaw gain ningot ekitoidn; kid apitclii kikenim, cji-
webisiidn. Lord, thou lookes^. always upon me, and thou
hearest me when I say something ; thou knowest me per-
fectly how I am, (or, how I behave.)
Kawin ganabaich ki nissitstawissim ekitoian ; kawin
wewc.ni ki p: sindawissim. Perhaps you don't well under-
stand me what I am saying; you don't well listen to me.
Ki sagiigonan Dcbeniminaiig, kid inenimig man gaie,
kaginig tchi jawenddgosiianggijigong. The Lord loves
304
us, and it is his will, that we should be eternally happy
in heaven.
Kawin ninidjanissinanig mojag nin babamitagossinetnig'.
(The person spoken to, not included.) Our children
don't always obey us.
IMPERFECT TENSE. Kl ganojinaban, bckixh gale kissaie
nin gan-'migoban ; kawin dash nin kiktndansin ga-ikito-
ian. Thou spokest to me, and at the same time thy
brother spoke to me ; and so I don't know what thou
hast said.
Nin na ki nandawabamimwnban jc.'xi ? Kairin net (/ego
ki wi-gagwedjimissimwctban? Did you look for me this
morning / If ad you not some question to ask me?
Aw mishmdbe nin wi-ganonigoban, gi-jagwenimo dash.
That Indian wanted to speak to me, but he did not dare.
I'KUFECT TENSE. A7 gi-gagwedjimigom, kutcin (lath ki
gi-nahoetawissimin, kairin ki gi-ganoji$simin. We have
asked you, but you have given us no answer ; you have
not spoken to us.
Ki g i -mat c /i, i-f/i'id fi/r /,•/;/, gait: /: in (lira ki gi-matchi-doda-
wim; ki bonigidttoninim rA/s7/ kakimi. Thou hast done
me wrong, and you also have done me wrong ; but I for-
give you all.
Gtraiak nin gi-dibdamagng kakina ga-masinaamawidjig
bilxniong. Those whom I had given credit last winter,
have all paid me well.
PLUPERFECT TIASK. .V/'s.v /'•//;» urn gi-bidjibiamagobanig
niski mi-id <r bibonongtbwa dagunshinowad oma. My young-
er brothers (or sisters) h ul written to me three times last
winter, Ix-lnn- they came here.
Kawin wilca ki gi-windamawissimwaban Iji-kitimagi si-
wad Innigiigowagt Innix/i nongom gijigfi/:. You never
305
had told me, before thz's day, how poor your parents
are.
Waieslikat naningim Id gi-nishkihnhiaban gi-matchi-
gijweicg mojctg ; nongom dash Id bisanabim. At first
you had made us angry, often, because you always used
bad words ; but now you are quiet.
FUTURE TENSE. Nagatcli kawin ki ga-wabamissim, min-
nwa dash nagatch ki ga-wdbamim. A little while, and ye
shall not see me ; and again a little while, and ye shall
see me.
Kishpin kij£wadisiiang, ki ga-sctgiigpnan K<je-Manito,
gdie dash anishlnabeg ki ga-sagiiL',onaiiig If we are
charitable, God will love us, and people also will love
us.
Kishpin mttchi-ijiwcMsidjig wissokawagwa, nin ga-
matchi-kik'nioamagog, nin ga-ban&djiigt)g. If I frequent
the company of the wicked, (cr, if 1 associate with the
wicked,) they will teach me bad principles, they will
ruin me.
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE. Ninidjdniss, kishpin gcget sagiiian, Id
ga-babdmitaw ; kis^ipm dash babamitawiian , ki ga-jaw-
cndagos. My child, if thou truly lovest me, thou wilt obey
me ; and if thou obeyest me, thou wilt be hnppy.
Apegish wika gan'jissig gawashkii'tbid inini; apegish
gaie wika awita diladjimotawisdg matchi dajindiwin.
I wis^h I would never be spoken to by a drunken man ;
and I wish I would never be told any bad reports.
Debenimiiang, kishpin anishinabeg jrrgcnimiiangidwa,
nin bjigidctawananig, kin ondji. Lord, if any person*
30G
hate us, we forgive them, for thy sake. (God, who is spo-
ken to, r>ol included.*)
Nikanissidogt kishjun anishinabeg jingeniminangypa ,
bonigidetawadanig. Brethcrn, if any persons hate us,letus
forgive thcnu (The persons spoken to, included.)
PERFECT TENSE. Weweni ki mdrtioiawamen gi-jawcnimi-
ian, gi-mino-bamiiian ga-apitch-akosiian. 1 thank thee
very much, because thou hast had pity on me, and hast
well taken care of me, during my sickness.
Kawin nin gi-ganonigossig, gfrkikenimissigwa, wika gi-
wabamissigwa. They have not spoken to me, because
they have not known me, they have never seen me.
Gi-wabamiian, Thomas, ki gi-dcbu*t.ic:nr1<nn. Thomas, be-
cause thou hast seen me, thou hast believed.
PLUPERFECT TENSE. Nandomipan nin da-ui-ija endad. —
Gagwedjimipan nin da-gi-nakwctawa. If he had called
me, I would have gone to his house. If he had asked
me, I would have answered him.
WindamatPisstwamhtn cjiwebak anamicwin, ki'ginig nin
da-gi-kitintagi$. lladst thou not spoken to me of reli-
gion, I would have been miserable for ever.
Ninidjan />•>• id ><:, pisindawiiegoban wu ics/t L-ut, kawi n-
nongonikl da-kashkendansim. My children, bad you lis-
tened to me in the beginning, you would not be now so
sorrowful.
FUTURE TEXSP.. Aniniwapi ge-Ktndaiian ga-wawindama~
wilanl Atti/iiwapi minawa gc-mik;--. i? When
wilt thou send mo what thou hast promised me ? When
wilt thou remember me aga n?
Nisso bibon nin wi-babamadis, midashiwapi minawa ge-
• ,;e Remark 3, p. 45.
wabamiieg. I will travel three years, and then you shall
see me again.
Wabang ta-dagwisldn mckatcwikwanaie ; mi oma ge-da-
ji-gagikiminang. The priest will come to-morrow ; and
here he will preach to us.
CONDITIONAL MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE. Nin da-takivamig aw animosh,, kishptn
nasikawag. This dog would bite me, if I went near
him.
Pabige ki da-bi-mawddissigonan ogimd, kikcndang oma
aidiang. The chief would soon come to see us, if he
knew that we are here.
Kawin Debeniminang ki da-bonigidetagossinan, kishpin
enigokodeeiang anwenindisossiwang. Tlie Lord would
not forgive us, if we did not repent from the bottom of
our heart.
PERFECT TENSE. Kawin noss nin da-gi-bashanjeogossi,
nawatch bisan aiaiamban. My father would not have
whipped me, had I beea a little stiller.
Ki da-gi-kikinoamawimin na masinaigan pitchinago^
ijaidngoban endaian ? Hadst thou taught us to read-
yesterday, if we were gone where thou cfwellest? (to
thy house.)
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
Ganawcibamisliin, Dcbenimiian, kitimagenimishin ; mash-
kawendamiishin tr.hi wika bata-ijiwebisissiwan. See me,
Lord, and have mercy on me ; give me strength that \
may never sin.
308
Ninidjanissiifog, bftbamitawishig, odapinamawiskig nuid
ikitowiii ; krgn agonwetawishikegon. My children, lis-
ten tome, receive- my word; don't disobey me, (gainsay
inc.)
Mdno nin ga-nasikafffirr abinodjnag bebitmjimdjig, kcgo
nin ga-iuMKiiiovsiff. Let the little children come to me, let
them not be afraid of me.
Ashamishinatn, nin bakadcmin. Pindigftjishinam cndairw,
(or, endaicg,) nin gikadjimin. Give us to eat, we are
hungry. Take us in thy house, (or, your house,) we arc
cold.
Kego sagidjinajaoshikangen, kfnr'm vhi^otchi nin pindig-
essimin. Don't turn us out, we have no house to go
in.
Jddno nin ga-boniigonanig metchi-dkitodfig. Let ill-speak-
ers let us alone.
PARTICIPLES.
PRESENT TENSE. Jcsns, aiapitchi-sagiiian, ki
gaie nin enigoffodeeidn. Josus, who lovost me so much,
I will also love thee from all my heart.
Debeniminangog inojag l:i miiio dodagonanig. Our ma.s-
ters treat us always well. (The person spoken to, i-nclvd-
ed)*
Debemmiiangidjig mnjag nin ?nhn> f/wldponanig. Our
masters treat us always well. (The person spoken to, not
included.
IMPERFECT T I:N>T.. Aw ikwr netd-jawenimipant o gi-naga-
dan kid odenawentinan. That woman who used to b<?
so charitable to me, has left, < ur little village.
- See Remark 3, p. 45.
309
Naningim ki mikwcnimininim, kinawa eshamiiegoban
mojag, mcgwa kwiwiscnsiwiidn kitimagisiidn. I remem-
ber you often, you who gave me always something to eat,
when I was yet a poor little boy.
PERFECT TENSE. Igiiv ga-dajimidjig, ga-mino-dodaivissigog
gaic, kawin wika nin wi-jingenimassig, I will never hate
those that have slandered me, and those that have not
treated me well.
Ki bonigidetawananig kakina ga-nishkiinangog,ga-mimh
ganonissintnoangog gaie. We forgive all who have
offended us, and who have not spoken kindly to us. (Th<-
person spoken to, included.}
Niii bonigidetawananig kakina ffa~nishkiiiangidjig9 ga-
mino-ganomssiwqngidjig gaie. We forgive all who have
offended us, and who have not spoken kindly to us. (The
person spoken to, not included.)
FUTURE TENSE. Debenimiian, kin ge-dibakoniian wctiba,
gassiamaivishin nin matchi dodamowinan, tchi bwa nan-
domiian. Lord, who shalt soon judge me, blot out my
iniquities, before thou callest me.
Kinawa, mojag ge-im-nishiieg, aicenen aw endashiieg gf~
debimipan, " gi-bata-dodam," tchi ijldl You who want
-always to kill me, who is the person among you that
would tell the truth, if he said of me, " he has sinned?"
Ninidjanissidog, ta-kitchi-mino-dodam aw wika ged-
agonwetawissig. My children, he that never shall disobey
me, will do very right.
SECOND FUTURE TENSE. Igiw ge-gi-anojiiangidjig tchi
bwa sigwang, gega anisha ta-anokitawawag. Those that
shall have employed us before spring, will have their work
done almost for nothing.
310
Let us now consider the verb, Nin wabama, in the "JFwv
Cases" of connection with the personal pronouns, me, thee
us, yw, when used in a dubitative manner.
FIRST CASK
(L . . thee.)
AFFIRMATIVE FORM.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE,
Ki wtfJamininacfog, I see thee perhaps,
ki wabamigbdog, we see thee perhaps,
hi wubam'igodog, he sees thee perhaps,
ki wabamigodogenng, they see thee perhaps,
ki «?a&a?»ininimwadog, I see you perhaps,
ki wabamigbimdog, we see you perhaps,
ki wabamigowadog, he sees you perhaps,
ki wabamigowadogenag, they see you perhaps.
NEGATIVE FORM.
Kawin ki tfla&amissinoninadog, I do perhaps not see the^
ki wabamigossidog, we do perhaps not see theer
ki wabamigossidog, he does p. ...
ki wabam'igossidogenag, they . . .
ki wabamigossimidog,
ki waba?n\gossi\v&dog,
ki t^aiawigossiwadogenag,
IMPERFECT TENSE.
TFa&aminowamban, I saw thee perhaps,
, we saw thee perhaps,
311
M?a&aminogoban, he saw thee perhaps,
toafczmmogwaban, they perhaps saw thee,
wrt&amnowagogoban, 1 saw you perhaps,
w?a#amigowegoban, we saw you perhaps,
wabammo\vegoban, he saw you perhaps,
tm&awinowegwaban, they saw . . .
Kaivin wxz&amissinow&mban, I did per. not see thee
toodamigossiwarnban, we did perhaps not . . .
tt?a6a??nssmogoban, he did p. n. . . .
w5«Z>amissinogwaban, they did p. n. . , .
tt?a&amigossiwegoban,
Form after these two the remaining tenses of the indica-
tive mood,
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE.
Kishpin waiabam\no\v£nen, if I see thee perh.,
,, wma£amig6wanen, if we see thee p.,
ivaiabaminogwen, if he sees thee,
wam&awinogwawen, if they see thee,
wwa&aminonogwawen, if I see you p.,
,, waia6a7/iigowegwen, if we see you,
,, w?m'«£a;ttinowegwen, if he sees you,
,, waia&aminowegwawen, if they see you,
Kishpin wma&amissinowanen, if I p. see thee not,
w>az'a&a?mg6ssiwanen, if we see thee not,
, if he does not see . . .
, if they don't . . .
zmia&amigossiwegwen,
w>aia6awnssinowegwen,
waia^awissinowegwawen,
312
PERFECT TENSE.
(7a-?0a&a;«inowanen, whether I have seen thee.
6ra-tt>aJamissinowarien, whether I have not s. thoe>
Etc., after the present tense.
PLUPERFECT TENSE.
TFrt6«?winowdmbanen, if I had per. seen thee,
t^aiawiigowambanen, if we had p. seen thee,
/flaZw/miogobanen, if he had seen thee,
toaftafninogwabanen, if they had seen thee,
ua&iminagogobanen, ifJ had p. seen you,
?0afoimigowegobanen, if we had seen you,
uwframinowegobanen, if he had seen you,
?0a&a7rtinowegwaban'en, if they had seen you.
Wa&awissinowambanen, if I had p. not seen thee.
?m&amig6ssiwambanen, if we . . .
?0a&awissinogobanen, if he . . .
?0a6amigossiwegobanen,
?#a£awissinowegobanen,
waiawissinowegwabanen,
Form the future tenses after the above present, as : (,'"
wabaminowdncn, . . .
PARTICIPLES.
PRESENT TE>
JVm waiabaminowanen, I who perhaps see thee,
>i unwind waiabam\go\vaneny we who perhaps see thee,
win irdid/Him'mogwrn, he who perhaps sees thee,
iwa waiabammogwentLg, they who perhaps see thee,
nin w?aia6awinonogwawen, I who perhaps see you,
313
ninawind waiabamiguwegweu, we who perhaps see you,
win waiabaminowegwen, he who perhaps sees you,
winawa ^aiai«winowegwenag,»they who perhaps s. you.
Nin waiabamissinowtmeii, I who per. do not see thee,
ninawind w/'«/aZ>«wngossiwanen, we who p. don't . . .
win waiabamissinogwen,
wina wa waiabamissinogwenag,
nut waiabamissinonogwawen,
n I u a wind waiaba?n\gossi\vegwen,
win waiabamissinowegwen,
irina wa
IMPERFECT TENSE.
Nin tt'm'rt&rtminowambanen, I who perhaps saw thee,
ninawind ?r«/ft6«;«igowambanen, we who per. saw thee.
win waiabaminogobanen, he who perhaps saw thee,
H'inawa u-aiabaminogobmienzg, they who per. saw thee,
nin waza Jawinagogobanen , I who perhaps saw you,
ninawind icaiabaniigowegobanen, we who perhaps saw you,
win ivaiabamniowegobanen, he who perhaps saw you,
tvinawa ^rtia^minoWegobanenag, they who per. saw you.
Nin ?£« /a&tf?wssmowarnbaiien, I who perhaps did not
see thee,
ninawind tcttta&amigossiwainbanen, we who. . .
win wm0Z>a77iissinogot)anen,
irinawa icaiabamissmogobanenag,
nin ^'«mZ>amissinagogobanen,
ninawind z^aia6amigossiwegobanen,
win Z6'«ia^«missinowegobanen,
winawa
Form the remaining tenses of these participles after the
above two,
314
SECOND CASE.
(tlidu . . . inc.)
AFFIRMATIVE FORM.
INDICATIVE WOOD
PRESENT TENSE.
Ki wabamiAQg, thou seest me perhaps,
Jci wabam\midog, you see me perhaps,
nin waba?}i\godog, he sees me perhaps,
nin «Yf/>«wzigodogenag, they see me perhaps,
hi lOfl&amiminadog, thou soest us perhaps,
ki waha?)rim'm-d(\og, you see us perhaps,
nin wabamigon-ddog, he sees us perhaps,
nin z0a/>rt?ttigonadogenag, they see us perhaps.
NEGATIVE FORM.
Kawln ki waftamissidog, thou dost perhaps not see me,
„ ki wabamissimmog, you do perhaps not . . .
,, nin walamigossidog,
nin wnziamigossidogenag,
ki
ki
nin
nin
,,
IMPERFECT TKNSK.
Gonima w^amiwarabtn, perhaps thou savvest me,
, jx-rliaps you saw me,
, pi-rhaps lie saw me,
n, perhaps they saw me,
,, ^a&amrwangiban, perliaps ihou sawest us,
u^aframiwangiban, perhaps you saw us,
«v,7«,,,mvnii}ri,lil,:,,,, I ,, he saw U5,
i^aoaminowangoban, ) l
1)15
, » fi
, f ^ J
Gonima kawin wdbamissiwamban, perhaps thou didst not
see me,
wabamissiwegobsn, perhaps you did not . . .
wabamissigobcin,
wabamissigwaban,
issiwangidiban, )
issinowangoban, }
;,!
After these tvyo tenses form the others of the indicative.
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE.
Kishpin waiabamnvanen, if thou perhaps seest me,
,, waiabamiwegwen, if you perhaps see me,
,, waiabamigwen, if he perhaps sees me,
„ waiabamiwagweu, if they perhaps see me,
waiabamiw&ngen, if thou perhaps seest us,
waiabami\va.ngen, if you perhaps see us,
if he
sees us>
PerhaPs see
Kishpin waiabam\ssiwa.nen, if thou perhaps see me not,
,, wamfomissiwegwen, if you perhaps . . .
waiabamissiwa.gwen,
316
,, tcaiabamissmotwtagen,
ipota^amissiwaniridwawen. ) .~Al
7r«m6™issinowangwawen, } lf the)' P- s^ us not
PERFECT TENSE.
trn-wabatni\vanen, as thou per IK hast seen me,
Etc., after the above present tejisc.
PLUPERFECT TENSE.
W^Jamiwambaifen; if thou perhaps hadst seen ni£%
//v//^////ivvegobanen, if you perhaps had seen me,
ipaZxzoiigobanen, if he perhaps' had seen me,,
//v/7^/wnwagoh .men, if they perhaps hud seen me,.
wa^amiwangibanen, if thou perhaps hadst seen us
?oa6amiwangibranen, if you perhaps had1 seen us,
.r,
lf he erbas ha<1 S£c" llt
.
f('i'//;f/?;iissi\vambanen, if thou perhaps hadst not seen
^a&«?;iissi\vegobanen., if you pcrhnj>s . . .
?/Y//>«?//issivv angibaneir,
//•r//yr////issi \vangid ibaiien, f
7/Y//>«?//issiMovvaiigol)aii(Mi, I
//Y//>c////issi\vangi(l\val);5nen, ^
rradamissinowangwabaoen, I
Form the future tenses after the present, as :
men . . *
317
PARTICIPLES.
PRESENT TENSE.
Kin teaifl&amiwanen, thou who perhaps seest me,
kinawa t0ai05amiwegweh, you who perhaps see me,
win waiabam\gwen, he who perhaps sees me,
winawa waiabamigvrenag, they who perhaps see rne,
kin waiabamiwangen, thou who perhaps seest us,
kinawa waiabamivrangen, you who perhaps see us,
win waiabamiwangideo, \ , , ,
wen, ) C W ° PerhaPs • • •
winawa waiabdmwaugidenag, h who g
winawa toaiaJiammowangwenag, ) J
in toaidftajwissiwanen, thcu who perhaps do not
me,
kinawa tcaia&amissiwegwen, you who j>. do not see me,
winawa wa iaiamissigwenag,
jtzw ?^rt?'rt6«missivvangen,
kinawa waiabamissiw&ngon,
win
w
winawa ?^aia^«wiissinowangwenag,
IMPERFECT TENSE..
toai«Sflffiiwambanen, thou who perh. sawest m«*
Idnawa ?6'«i«5amiwegobanen, you who perhaps saw me.
«??'•«. ?r«fa&«migobanen, he who perhaps saw me,
winawa waidbamigobanenaa, they who perhaps saw me.
kin waiabajmwangib-anen, thou who per. sawest us,
kinawa iraia&ffwiwangibaneri, you who perhaps saw us*
win 7#az'fl&ewjiwangidibanen, \ , ,
win zram/>aminowangobanen,
318
irinaira MWUi^uiiiwangidibanenag, ^ , ,
r > ^ 1 ° P- s< us»
irinawa
Kin waidftamissiwnmbnncn, thou who perhaps didst
not see me,
kinawa ?r«/«/;<7w/issi\veo;obanen, you who per. did not . . .
winawa ?0fl £«/;<?/// issigobanenag,
kin fww/Zwwissiwangibanen,
kinawa ttw/a&amissiwangibnnen,
win
•„}
winawa
Form after these two tenses all the others of these dubi-
r.-uive participles.
EXAMPLES ON THE TWO CASES OF THE IV. DUB1TATIVK
CONJUGATION.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE. Kcgo ow ikitokcn : Nin tffabamigodog
Kije-Manito. — (iwnitik nin n-ubumig wishr? ; ikiton
mojag. Do not say : I suppose (lod t^res me, (or per-
haps he sees me.) Always say : He sees me certainly
everywhere.
Osam ki sagiigodogenqg kini»iigi>g, kawin wika kibash-
anjeogo ssidogen a<j, mi we ndji-match i-iji ircbixi iatt. Thy
parents probably love thec too much, they perhaps never
whip thee, therefore thou behuvest so bad.
ht / i l^'niinnii n (i(lo<fy diiix/ia r/c/.s-/t nongoin ka irin ki '///.v-
sitawinossiwfninadog, I think I know thee, but I cannot
wow recognize thee.
319
PERFECT TENSE. Ki gi-nondawidog gi-bibagiminan, ka-
win dash ki gi-nnkwetawissi. Thou hast perhaps heard
me when I called thee, but thou hast not answered me.
Kawin ki gi-mikwenimigossinadog gi-migiwed. od a'uman;
kawin sa gcgo kigi-minigossinan. He has perhaps not re-
membered us when he gave away his things, because he
has given us nothing.
Ki gi-wabamigowadog gi-d&gwishineg ; w&ba ta-bi-
ija. He has probably seen you when you arrived ; he
will soon come here.
FUTURE TENSE. Ki ga-jingcnimidog gcgapi, osam mojag
kid anwcnimin. Thou wilt perhaps hate me by and by,
because I reprimand thee always.
Kawin awiia ki ga-ginaamagossiwadog, kawin 11 in-
got awiia ki gad-igossiwadog, kishpin wi-niadjaicg,
I think nobody will forbid it to you, (or hinder you,) no-
body will say anything to you, if you want to depart, (to
go away.)
Aw oshkinawe ki ga-nandomigodog gaie kin nimiiding ;
kego dash ijaken. That young man will perhaps invite
thee also to dancing, but don't go.
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE. Endogwen,ninidjaniss, sdiagiiwancn ;
kawin, sa ki babdmitawissi. I don't know, ray child,
whether thou lovest me ; thou dost not obey me,
Kawin nin kikcndansin gcmodimigwen, waiejimigwen,
endajunigwen. I don't know whether he steals anything
from me, whether he cheats me, whether he speaks ill
of me.
Endogwen ekonigossiwanen oma, kishpin bonitossiwan
ishkotewabo. I don't know whether we drive thee not
away, if thou dost not. abandon ardent liquor,
320
PERFECT TENSE. Kawln nin kikendansin ga-batatniftoted-
nen ; kuirin airiifi nin gi-nondagossidog. I don't know
whether I have accused thee falsely ; 1 suppose nobody
lias heard me.
Onm gn+danenimissitvanen, mi ga-ontlji-nwtrhi-ikltoian ;
knwin dnsh wika kl dcwnatchi-ikitossi. Because thou
hast probably not thought me present, therefore thou
hast said bad words, but thou oughtst never to say any
bad words.
Ml ga-ondjl-bata-diidn, Dchaiimiiau , wnrt ui g(t.-sagi-
issinowdnen. Lord, I have behaved sinfully, because,
I think, I have not loved thee enough.
PLUPERFECT TENSE. J\ix/ipt.n /r /V/ /<;>•/ /if ««• kikeniminQgwa-
bancn ga-dodaman, kl. (la-^i-la.^/iaujci'go^ ga-ndbntch. If
thy parents had known what thou hast done, they would
perhaps have whipped thee.
Gftgansomissiwdngibdneri) kairin ganabatch wika ninda-
gi-anamiassimin. Had you not exhorted us, we would
perhaps never have become Christians.
Wdbatninowangwttbanen ningo&cbi, ^onimn kl da-gi-
nandomigonanig. If they had seen us SOUK where, thev
would perhaps have called us.
FUTURE T;:-\si:. Artiniwapi ?V/«if ge-jai&4nimiwanen, .^/i-
minO'4odawiwanen / When sli ill the time come whm
thou shalt have pity on me and treat me well.
nin gad-inend ; ml. da*h ('/>> gdtuibatrh gr-
rir n inlini irtt . I will be absent four months ;
and then (I think) you will see me attain.
PARTICIPLES
PRESENT 'J'ENSK. Waidbami gwenag iwnffom t(t-r/il>adji~
tiirnrfiff cndixlfiinini. Those who perhaps see me now,
will tell what I am doing.
Aw pesindawissigwen ta-kashkendam ningoting. He
who does perhaps not listen to me, will be once sorry
for it.
Gaganodamawigjangeniminowegwenag. Pray for those
who perhaps hate you.
IMPERFECT TENSE. Kin wika nwdndawissiwambanen, non-
gom wcweni ki wi-kikinoamjn ge-dodaman. Thou who
perhaps never heardst me, (preaching,) I will now in-
struct thee exactly what thou shalt do.
Aw anishinabe tcaitibaminowcgobanen nopiming, ki wi-
ganmiigowa. That Indian, who saw you in the woods,
(as he says,) wants to speak to you.
PERFECT TENSE. Mi sa ogow kwiwisensag wika ganabatch
ga-agonwrtawissinowcgwenag ; locwcni Id babam>tago-
wag. These are the boys that perhaps never have dis-
obeyed you ; they listen well to you.
Nin bonigidetawag kakina ga-gimodimigwenag anotch
nind adman, ?negwa wedi gi-aiaian. I forgive all those
who may hive stolen from me some of my things, during
my stay here.
Kawin nin loi-kikenimassiwananig ga-dajimiwangidenag.
We don't want to know those that have spoken ill of us.
PLUPERFECT TENSE. Kin ga-wdbamiwambancn megwa
kwiwisensiwiian, keiabi na ki mikwenim ? Thou who
hadst seen me (as they say) when I was a boy, dost thou
yet remember me ?
Aw inini wika ga-ganonissinogobanen, ki bi-anamikag.
This man, who perhaps never had spoken to thee, comes
to salute thee.
FUTURE TENSES. Awegicen ge-jaweniminogwen, gc-matchi-
ganonissinogwen gaie wika, nin ga-kitchi-minwendamiig .
322
Whosoever shall do charity to thee, (have pity on thee,)
and shall never give thee bad words, he shall do me
pleasure.
A u /.s7f hiabcdoff, ft ireguvnag irika gc-mina issinmrcgwcnag
ishkctewabOf ta-mino-dodamog* Ye Indians, those who
Remark. In regard to the second third person in the
" Two Cases," we have to observe that in the I. Case it
does not alter the verb. We say : Aw oshkinawe ki icaba-
AFFIRMATIVE FORM.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE.
Kishpin aw osJikinairc ossan waldm'mid, ta-bi-ija\var\
oma. If that young man's father sees me, he will come
here.
Aw ikwe o gi-inan odanissan tchi ijinid ga-nondam\nid.
That woman told her little daughter to tell me what she
heard.
PARTICIPLE, PRESENT.
Kawin win nin ?wndagossi1 ogwissan iniw nicandamimd-
jin. He does not hear me, it is his son that hears me.
Etc. etc.
323
shall never give you ardent liquor to drink, shall do
well.
Aw ged-ijiwininogwen matchi minawanigos twining, ki
ga-kitclii-banadjiig. He who shall seduce thee into
sinful pleasure, shall do thee great damage.
mig, that young man sees thee ; and likewise : Aw oshkin-
awe ossan ki wabamig, that young man's father sees thee,
But in the II. Case there is some difference, F. i,
• NEGATIVE FORM.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE.
Kishpin ossan waba??uss'img, kawin ta~bi-ijassi\va.n. If his
father sees me not, he will not come.
O gi-inan odanissan tchi ijissimg ga-nondam\n\d. She
told her little daughter, not to tell me what she heard.
PARTICIPLE, PRESENT.
Anawi win nin ganonig iko ; ogwissan dash iniw wika
genojissimgon. He uses to speak to me ; but it is his
son that never speaks to me.
324
Before we close the IV. Conj., let us consider, in short
Examples, the verb Nin wabama, in regard to the second
third person.
AFFIRMATIVE FORM.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE.
Nhi wabamimsa. ossan* I see his father,
ki wabamiman, " thou seest h. f.,
o ?/•-•<• 6andamawan ossiniwan, he sees h. f.,
nin /."nmanan, owm, we see his father,
//imawuii, " you see h. f.,
madamawawan ossiniican, they see . . .
NEGATIVE FORM.
•'...' raftrtmimassin ossan, I don't see his father.
ki UHzdamimassip, " thou dost not see h. f.
o ?£rt6andamawassin os.siniwan, he does not
see his f.
win ?rrzZ><3//iimassinan otsan, we don't see . . .
" ki ipaiamimasgiwaB " you don't see . . .
o waftandamawassivvawun ussiniwan, they
don't see his father.
IMPERFECT Ti
.\in ?/y//>«wimal)nnin o<:hi, I saw his mother,
H tpafazmUBabanin " thru sawest his m.,
o z/-G/^/ii(l;nn;i\val)anin, ogijriwan, he saw hi*
mother,
* Atn dtbwctawa Kye Manito, «in dtbicelawimnn gate f^'1
b«lieve in God, and 1 believe in hie Son.
325
nin «,Yi5rtmimanabanin ogin. we sawhis mother,
ki wa&amimawa'baiiin " you saw his mother,
o tm&andamawawabanin oginiwan, they saw
his mother,
Kawin nin rm&amimassibanin ogin, I did not see his
mother,
" ki ivabamimassiban'm " thou didst not see
his mother,
. o ?£aZ>«ndamawassibanin oginiwan, he did n.
see his mother,
" nin zr«&«mimassmabanin ogin, we -did n. see h.m.
" ki tm&amimassiwabanin " you did n. s. h. m.
o ^aiandamawassiwabanin oginivxtn,ihey d.
not see his mother.
After these two tenses you can form all the remaining
tenses of the indicative, and all the tenses of the condition-
til mood.
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE.
K.ishpin wabam\mK.g ogwissan, if I see his son,
'* ivabamimzd " if thou seest his son,
" 20a&«ndamawad ogwissiniwan,ifhe sees
his son,
«,aJafflimangid ogwiuan, I .f we gee fc
wabamim&ng )
" ivabamimeg " if you see his son,
*' z^aftandamawawad ogivissiniwan, if they
see his son.
Kishpin w«Z>«mimassiwag ogwissan, if I don't see his
son,
" 70a&a7nimassiwad *' if thou dost not s.
his son,
21
326
?0aZ>andamawassig ogwi$sini^an, if he does
not see his son,
ttJttJ#7/timassiwangid ogwissa?i, ) if we don't
MYZ&awimassiwang " J see h. s.
wabam\.ma.ss\\vev " if you oon't see
his son,
?0flJandamawassigwa0gtt>issimw>fl?i, if they
don't see his son.
PLUPERFECT TENSE.
fftzfoztmrnagiban ossaieian, had I seen hu*
brother,
wo^/zwimadiban " hadst thou s. h. b.,
ossaieiniwan, had he s.
his br.
gidiban ossaieian, ) had we seen
po&amiinagoban f his br.
waftamimegoban "• had you s. h. br.
waba n& am H \vawap an ossa/emi2yaw,had they
seen h. br.
IFJ&atnimassiwagiban ossaieian, had I not a.
his brother,
V>diamiTiassi,wadiban " hadst thou not
•i his br.
wadandafftawassigoban ossaieiniwan, had
he not seen liis br.
IMz5aminiassiwRngidibaD ossaieian, \ had we
W(ih(nn\\\\ -ssiu inijobaii " ) n.s.h.b.
iwr5«mimcts^8?wcgoban " had you not
siM-ii his l)i other.
90afcmdamawas9igvrabaa ossaieiniwan, ^had
thry ii' •' sf-ori his bro.
After these two t Mi r> are formed in the
subjunctive mood.
327
PARTICIPLES.
PRESENT TENSE.
A?n waiabamimag wikanissan,! who see his friend,
kin waiabamim&d " thou who seest his fr.
nin w/aza&andamawad ivikanissiniwan, he who
sees his friend, (or brother.)
ninawind tvaiabamimangid wikanissan, ) we who see
kinawind ivaiaba?nimang " ) his friend,
kinawa waiabamimeg " you who see h. fr.,
mnawa smiafomdamawadjig wikanissiniwan,they who
see his friend (or brother,)
Nin waiabajnimass'iwzg wikanissan, I who don't s.
his friend,
kin waiabamimzssiwad " thou who dost not
see his friend,
win 20fl?'a&6!ndamawassig wikanissiniwan, he who
does not see his friend,
ninawind MJamftamimassiwangid wikanissan, ) we who d
kinawind w«m&amimassiwang " j n. s, h. f.
kinawa ivaiabamimassiweg " you who don't.
see his friend,
winawa ?c«iaiandamawassigog ivikanissiniwan, they
who don't see his fr.,
IMPERFECT TENSE.
Nin wjaia&a?wimagiban oshimeian, I who saw his
brother,
kin 20aid£>awimadibaii " thou who sawest his , .
win waiaiandamawapan oshimeiniwan, he who s.
his br.,
328
ninawind JivziaZwrtimangidiban oshime ian, ) we who s.
hi unwind waiabamim<angob<ii\ j his hr.
L'hiawa waiabam\meg\ban " you who s. h. br.,
it'inawa ttvzia&andamawapanig oshimeiniwan, they w.
saw his br.,
Nin waiabamimzssi\\'<Lgibi}n oshimcian, I who did
not see his brother,
A'?/z tt/'am&awzimassiwadiban " thou who didst n
see his br.
win wamiandamawassigob.nn oshimeiniwan, he w.
did not see his br.,
ninawind ?£amZ>awimassi\vangidiban oshimeian, \ we w.
kinawind ?^«iaJamimassiwangoban " j[ d. n . .
kinawa zflaiafozwimassiwegoban " you who d.
not see his bro.,
winawa ?0ai#£andamawassigobanig oshimeiniwan^ th.
who did not see his bro.
After these two tenses all the others of the participles are
formed.
Remark 1. You see in these Examples, that the syllable
ini is inserted between the body of the verb and the termi-
tions ; and this syllable indicates the report to a second
third person in the sentence.
Remark 2. The number makes no difference in these
expressions. Nin wabamiman ogwissan, means, I see his
son, or, his sons. O wabandamawan cdanant means, h«
bees his daughter, or, his daughters.
329
V. CONJUGATION.
Besides the transitive or active verbs animate, belonging
to the preceding Conjugation, which all terminate in a,
there is another kind of these verbs, ending in nan, at the
first person sing, indicative ; and likewise so at the third
person. And these verbs belong to this V. Conjugation.
Here are some verbs of this Conjugation.
1. pcrs. . 3. pcrs.
Nind ijdnan, I go to him, or, I visit him, od ijanan.
Nind atdwenan, I sell him, od atawenan.
Nind atdwangenan, I borrow him, od atawangenan.
Nin gimodinan, I steal him, o gimodinan.
Nind apenimonan, I trust in him, od apenimonan.
Nin ?nanitokenan, I adore him, (an idol,) o manitokenan.
Nind anokinan, I order it to be made, od anokinan.
Nin bodaivenan, I burn it up for fuel, o bodawenan.
Nind ashangenan, I give it for food, or od ashangenan,
as food,
Nin migiu'enan, I give it away, as a pre- o migiwenan.
sent,
AFFIRMATIVE FORM. NEGATIVE FORM.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
r R E S E N T TENSE.
Singular.
Nind apenimonan, I trust in him, Kawin ssinan,
kid
330
od apcnimon&n, " ssinan,
nind apenimomiu, " ssimin,
kid tf/jc?i//tt0na\\a, " ssinawn.
od opeftiflumawan, " ssinawan,
Plural.
apeni?nonag, I trust in them, Kawin ssinag,
kid apenimoniLg, " ssin
od aptnimonzu, " ssinan,
nind apcnimomm, " ssimin,
kid apenimonsLWQg, " ssinawag,
od apcnimonzwdn, " ssinawan,
IMPERFECT TENS!'..
Singular.
Nind api*Hium»bm, I trusted in Kawin ssinaban,
him,
kid apcnimonzhnn, " ssinaban.
od apcnimoirdbvmn, " ssinabanin,
nind fipcnimominiibnn, " ssiminaban,
kid. ajoem77^>mwaba&, " ssimvvabau,
od apHUMOiMiwabanin, " ssinawabanin.
Plural.
J\7w<Z apeni9Mnabanig, I trusted in Kawin ssinabnt
them,
kid rt/wz/monabanig, " ssinabn:
od openimonabanin, " ssinabanin,
Ar/d fl^fitfR^mwabanig, " esimwabanig,
otf opentmonawabaiun, " ssinawabanin,
FECT
-Y/» fri-fiprnimonan, 1 liave trusted Kawin ssinan,
in him,
ki gi-apenimonzn, " ssinans
Etc., after the above present tense.
Plural
Nin gi-apenimonag, I have trusted Kaicin ssinag,
in them,
Etc., after the above present tense.
PLUPERFECT TENSE,
Singular.
.\in gi-apenimonaban, I had trust- Kawin ssiinabac,
ed in him,
Etc., after the imperfect tense
Plural
Nin gi-apenimonabd.mg,I had trust- Kaicin ssinabamg.
ed in them,
Etc., after the imperfect.
The future tenses are easily formed after the present . I»y
prefixing gad-,aud ga-gi-, to the verb.
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD,
PRESENT TENSE.
Singular and Plural
Apenimoi&n, because I trust ssiwan,
in him, (them,)
•apenimoi&n, ssiwan,
apenimoA, ssig,
tipenimoi&ng, ) because we ssiwang,
trust . . . ssiwang,
332
apenimoieg, ssiweg,
apenimowad; ssigwa.
PERFECT TENSE.
Singular and Plural.
Gi-apenimoi3in, because I have ssiwara^
trusted in him,
(them,)
Etc., after the above present tense.
PLUPERFECT TENSE.
Singular and Plural
4.pcmmoia.mba.n, had I tr. ssiwambu
in him, (them,).
, ssiwamban,
ssigoban,
«pem7?i0iangiban, > had we ssiwangiban
<7/;e??imoiangoban, | trusted, ssiwangoban.
^T/^wiwioiegoban, ssiwegoban,
apenimow apan, s&igwaban,
The future tenses to be formed after the present ; as
frfid-apenimoidn, . . . Ge-gi-apenimoidn. . . .
The tenses of the conditional mood are formed after the
present and perfect tenses of the indicative. ; as: Nin da-
apenimanan, I would, (or, I ought to) trust in him .
da-gi-apenimonan, I would have trusted in him. . .
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
Sing, and Plur.
Aprnimo\\, ) trust (thou)in Kego ken,
'/nokan, ) him, (them,)
333
o gad-apenimona.n, let him tr. in h. " ssinan,
(them,)
apenimoda, let us tr. in him, " ssida,
apenimodanig,\et us tr. in th. ssidanig^
apcnimoiog, trust (you)in h. " kegon,
(them,) "
o gad-apenimona\van, let them tr. " ssinawan.
in h. (them,)
PARTICIPLES.
PRESENT TENSE.
Singular and Plural..
Nin epvnimoian, I who trust in him,
(them.)
kin epenimoian, thou who trustest,
win epenimod, he who trusts,
ninawind epenimoia.us, \ ,
/ • j • • / we wno trust,
kinawind epenimoiang, )
kinawa epenimoieg, you who trust,
winawa epenimodjig, they who trust,
IMPERFECT TENSE,
sswan,
ssig,
ssiwang,
ssivvang,
ssiweg,
ssigog,
Nin epenimoiamban, I who trusted in ssiwambai^
him, (them,)
kin epenimoiamban, thou who trustedst, ssiwamban,
win epenimopan. he who trusted, ssigoban,
ninawind epenimoiangiban, > we who trusteci ssiwangiban ,
kinawind cpenimr/iangoban, $ ' ssiwangoban,
kinawa epenimo'iegoban, you who trusted, ssiwegoban,
winawa cpenimopamg, they who trusted, ssigobanig.
The other tenses of the participles are formed after the
above two ; as : Nin ga-apenimeidn, . . . Nin ga-apenimv
334
idmban.. . . Nin gcd-apcnimoidn, . . . Nin gr-gi-nj
tnoidn, . . .
Remark. The verbs of the V. Conj. cannot be given in
the Tti'o Cases by themselves, but only by the help of the
following substantives with possessive pronouns, viz : niiaw,
my body ; kiian', thy body ; wiiaw, his (her) body ; niiaw-
manin, our boclirs ; kiiawinnnin, our bodies; kiiairi.iran,
your bodies; wnawiwan, tlieir bodies; which are employed
to express the personal pronouns, I, me; he, she, it, him,
her; we, us ; you, ye ; they, them. In the "Examples
on the V. Conj.," and " on the V. Dubit. Conj.," you
will find several which contain the above words, by which,
as you will see, the "Two Cases" are expressed, (I ...
thee; thou . , . me.) These expressions are so natural to
the Otchipwe language, that they are correctly applied even
to the Lord God, who lias no body; because they stand for
the personal pronouns, and are not used with the intention
to signify a material body.
Here follow some Examples illustrating the use of the
above surrogates of personal pronouns.
Mi air hi! ni bonifo'l niidw; (mi aw inini bemiid, nin ?/•*>//-
grind "tin.) This is the man that takes care of me, (my
husband.)
.\i/i jtnt'cndan Jiiiatr ; (nin jawcnindis.) I have pity on
myself.
KisJijiiu ?)wfr/ti ijiw&isiiiifa, win kikm>l<iti jingendamdn
iiiiniif- (jinffen*ndisoian.J If I behave bad, I know
that I hate myself.
O ffi-niton iriian- <r(i-rtpi1r7t-k-- issidizo.)
lie \vas so sad, that he killed himself.
-//•.vf/s o nt-kitiin(iL';<t:in iriitnr, kinuir'nid oixlj'i ; (gi-kltimo*
made himself poor for our sake.
_•]//• oshJcinawe o in'uio d</<l<in tri if/in ml no ijiwebisid ; fmiho
tloflnso.) This young man does good to himself in be-
having well.
.\/'// i0i-mino-ganawend0mv* niiairinanin tchi-bata-ijiweb-
iit:dng; (n'ni it'i-mino-ganaiveninduomin.j We will
335
take well care of ourselves, that we may not sin ; (the
person spoken to, not included.)
Ki banadj it omi n kiiawinanin, kishpin babamendansiwang
anamicwin ; (ki banadjiidisomin. We ruin (injure)
ourselves, if we don't care for religion; (the person spo-
ken to, included.)
Enamiaiegi weweni ganawendamog kiiawiwan, tchi match i.
ijiwebisissiweg ; (weweni ganawenindisoiog.) Christians,
take well care o£ yourselves, in order not to behave bad.
Bnamiassiwegj jawcn.ia.mog Iciiawiwan; (jawenind
kagi<je katdgitowining kid apagitonawan kiiawiic-an^
kishpin jingcnd'jmcg anamicwin ; (hid apatdisom.) Pa-
gans, have mercy on yourselves ; you are precipitating
yourselves into eternal misery, if you hate religion.
Osam nibiv'a wdssinidjigod akositonawan wiiawiwan: (ako-
siidisowag.) Those that eat too much, make themselves
sick.
Jiind inag abinodjnag tchi bhiitowad wiiawiwan, tchi bwa
bi-ijawad kikinoamading, (tchi biniidisowad.} \ t< •!!
the children to clean themselves before they come to
school.
The Indians are fond of these expressions. This you
will experience very soon, if you observe them attentively
when they are speaking.
EXAMPLES ON THE V. CONJUGATION.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE. Debendjigcd nind apenimomin, kawin
bekanisid awiia nind apenimossimin. We trust in the
Lord, we don't trust in any other.
Anishinabcg na kid ijanag ? Kawin nongom nind ijassi-
nag ; Wemitigoji aiakosid nind ijanan. Dost thou go to
see the Indians? No, I don't go to see them to-day ; T
go to a sick Frenchman.
336
kwiwisens naningim o bi-gimodinan tnishiminan.
That boy comes often here to steal apples.
Nind apcnimon kiiaw, Delendjigeian. Kinawn dash,
bemadisiieg akijig, kawin gwctch nind apcnimossinan kii-
awiwan. Lord, I trust in thee, (in thee I put my confi-
dence. But in you, men living on earth, 1 don't put
much confidence,
IMPERFECT TENSE. Waieshkat naningim irind ijdnaba-
nig anishinabcg, anamiewin gi-kikinoamawagwa. In
the beginning I went often to the Indians ; I taught them
to say prayers.
Kabe-bibon kawin kid -tjassimwabanig kid inawemagani-
kitchi odenang. All winter you did not go to see
your relations in the city.
Nmidjanissidog, bifiish nongom mojag kid apcnimomwa-
han niiaiv, gi-ondinamonagog kakina gcgo ; nongom dash
•ioa bamiidisoiog. My children, until now you al-
ways depended (relied) on me, because I gave you all
you wanted ; but now take care of yourselves.
Wwija od anokinabanin akikon, kawin dash maslti oji-
tchigasossiwan. She ordered a kettle to be made, long
ago, but it is not yet made.
PERFECT TENSE. Juda o gi-atdwe,nan Jesusan, nissimid&-
na dasswabik joniian gi-missawenimad. .ludas Ins sold
Jesus, because he has coveted the thirty pieces of silver.
Osam ginwenj ki gi-apenimonawag kinigiigowag, mi
uxndji-nita-*inokissiweg nongom. You have relied too
long on your parents, therefore you don't like to work
now.
cnnmidsslgog o gi-gimodinawan abinndjiian
Some pagan Jndians have stolen a child in
the village.
337
Ki gi'bodawenag na nabagissagonsag oma ga-abidjig /
Kawin nin gi-bodawessinag. Hast thou burnt up the
little boards that were here ? No, I have not burnt them
up.
PLUPERFECT TENSE. Weioeni o gi-apenimonaban kiiaw,
Dcbendjigeian, megwa gi-bimadisid aking ; nongom dash
ki wabamig kid ogimawiwining gij'igong. He had put
all his trust in thee, o Lord, during his lifetime on earth ;
and now he sees thee in thy heavenly kingdom.
O gi-ijdnawabanin na rnekatewikwanaiev , bwa gopiwad !
Kawin sa o gi-ijassinawabanin. Had they gone to see
the priest, before they went in the woods ? No, they
had not gone to him.
Ningotoshkin opinig nin gi-atawangenabanig tagwa*
gong, bwa dagwishineg oma. I had borrowed a bag ot
potatoes last fall, before you arrived to this place.
FUTURE TENSE. Debendjiged nin gad-apenimonan ged-
ako-bimadisiwdnen aking. In the Lord will I put my
trust, as long as I shall live on earth.
Mandaminag anisha nin gad-ashangenag, ketimagisidjig
nin wi-jawenimag ; mishiminag dash nin gad-atawenag .
The corn I will give (for food) for nothing, I will do
charity to the poor : but the apples I will sell.
Gigoiag na gaie ki gad-ashangemin ? Kawin kakina ki
gad-ashangessimin ; anind eta. Shall we give also the
fishes ? We will not give them all ; only a few.
Nm ga-bi-gimodin kiiaw ningoting ; o gi-inan nishimeian
bejig anishinabe enamiassig. A pagan Indian (not pray-
ing) has said to my little brother : I will come once and
steal thee away.
338
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE. Ki minwendam na, kid inawerhaganivxig
ijnicg nongom ? Are you glad to go on a visit to your
relations to-day ?
Kishpin wi-atdwessiwan pakwjigan, mi go gaie nin
tf/ii wi-atawt$siwctn. If thou dost not want to sell any
flour, then I don't want to sell any
J\in gossag anishinabeg. tchi bi-gimodiwad nilaw ; ikito
nishime. I am afraid of the Indians that they come and
steal me, says my little brother'.
Kishpin kakina o joniiamiwun m /, ta-kitimagix-
iwag gaie winawa. If they give away all their money,
they will be poor themselves.
PERFECT TENSE. Ki gi-jawenimag igiw cnamiadjig, De-
bendjigeian, kin eta gi-apenimowad kiiair. Thou hast
had mercy on these Christians, O Lord, because they
have trusted in thee alone.
Kawin ki gi-mino-dodansi gi-ijas$iwa/i mrkatcwikwanaic,
Pak gi-odjitchisscg. Thou hast not done right that
thou hast not gone to the Missionary at Easter, (in the
Easter-time.)
Ki gi-nonddm na, anishinabeg / ali/todji-
ianl — E, nin gi-nondamin. Have you heard that the
Indians have stolen a child? Yes, we h:»ve heard it.
Gi-apcnimoian Dcbendjiged, nin gi-nodjimoig. Because
( put my trust in the Lord, he restored me to health
again.
PLUPERFECT TENSE. Atawangcssiwdmban jeba pakweji-
gan, kawin nongom ki da-amoaxsi : Lawin awiia pakwc-
jigan kid aiaivassiwanan. If 1 had not borrowed this
morning some flour, thou wouldst not eat bread now ;
we have no flour.
339
Nawatch wa'iba anokipan odabanan, nongom o da-gi-na-
dinan missan ; kissinamagad. If he had ordered the
sledge sooner, he would have fetched some wood to-day ;
it is cold.
Gimodissiwegoban joniia> kawin ki da-gi-kibakwaigax-
vssim. Had you not stolen money, you would not have
been imprisoned.
FUTURE TENSE. Aniniwapi ged-apcnimoian nii'aw enigoko-
deeian ? kid iji gagwedjimig koss gijigong ebid. Thy
heavenly father asketh thee : When wilt thou put thy
trust in me with all thy heart I
Aniniwapi ged-ijdian ki nigiigog ? — Namandj api gcd-
i jaw an en. When wilt thou go to thy parents ? I don't
know when I shall go.
Aniniwapl ged-atawangeieg minawa nin pijikimag ? Pa-
nima sigwang, When will you borrow my oxen again ?
Next spring.
CONDITIONAL MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE. Kawin kakina kokosh ki da-atawessinan ,
gegapi ki ga-bakade gaic kin. Thou oughtst not to sell
out all the pork ; by and by thou wilt starve thyself.
Nibwakaiegoban* kawin ki da-gimodissinawag nind
opinimag nin kitiganing. If you were prudent, (honest,)
you would not steal my potatoes in my field.
Kawin nin da-atawessinag nin bebejigoganjimag, kitima-
gisissiwdn. I would not sell my horses, were I not poor.
PERFECT TENSE. Nongom ki da-gi-ijamin kimissenan,
osam dash kissinamagad , sogipo gaie. We would have
gone to-day to see our sister, but it is too cold, and it
snows.
Kawin aw anishinabe ki da-gi-apcnimossinan, osam
waiejingeshkL Thou oughtst not to have relied on that
Indian, he is too deceitful.
*See Remarks, p. lift.
340
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
Dcbcndjiged ki Kijc-Manitom eta cnigokodeeian apenimon,
kcgo dash gwetch awiia 'beinttdisid upcntmokcn. Trust in
the Lord thy God only from all thy heart, but don't trust
much in anybody living on earth.
Ijakan aw aiakosid inini, jaicenim, gegct kitchi kotagito.
Go to that sick man, be charitable to him, he suffers
much indeed.
O gad-atawenan od opivaganan, krgo dash o moshwcman. n
gad-atawessinan ; nindinaaw einishinabe. I say to that
Indian thus : Let him sell his pipe, but let him not sell
his handkerchief.
Tjadanig anishindbeg awi-gagikijnangwa ; kego dash afa-
wewinini nongom ijassida. Let us go to the Indians to
preach to them, (to exhort them,) but let us not go to-
day to the trader.
Enishina1)evriiegt kego gimodjkegon ojrinig kitiganing; /,?
gad-animis'nn. Ye Indians, don't steal potatoes in the
field ; you will be punished for it.
O gad-ashangenawan kokoshan, pakwejiganan gaic. Let
them give pork and flour , (for food, not for sale, etc.)
PARTICIPLES.
PRESENT TENSE. Kawln irika nin ga~wanenimassig ('p«n<-
modjig niiaw, kuginig nin ga-*Didokawag ; ikito Ddx-ni-
mlnang. I will never forget those who trust in me, I will
always assist them, saith the Lord.
Epenimod anishinaben, naningim \oaiejima; Kijc-Mani-
ton dash epenimod, ka u-ika irtiirji//mssi. lie that trusts
in man, is often deceived ; but he that trusts in God, is
never deceived.
Apitchi matchi dodam aw masinitchiganan menitoked
llnamiassigog mi igiw mcnitokcdjig masinitchiganun
341
He that adores an image, (idol,) does exceedingly wrong.
Pagans (heathen) are those who adore images, (idols.)
IMPERFECT TENSE. Nibiwa enamiadjig gwetch epenimossi-
gobanig kiidw, Debenimiiang, nongom anwenindisowag..
Many Christians who did not much trust in thee, O Lord,
are now repenting.
Winawa epenimopanig anishinaben, nongom dgatchiwag
gi-waiejimindwa. Those who trusted in man are ashamed
now, because they were deceived.
Kinawa wikaetawangessiwegobanjoniia, ki kitchijaiven-
dagosim. You who never borrowed any money, you are
very happy.
PERFECT TENSE. Kinawa wika ga-apenimossiweg joniia,
osawa joniia gaie, gcget ki kitchi danim, Jci jaweudago-
sim gaie. You who never put your trust in silver and
gold, you are truly rich and happy.
Aw ikwe ga-anokid akikon, o ga-bi-nanan* The woman
that ordered a kettle, may come and fetch it.
PLUPERFECT TENSE. Igiw ga-manitokepanig masininin,
nongom meshkwat Kije-Maniton eta o gad^anokitawa-
wan. Those that had worshipped images (idols) before,
shall now in return serve God only.
Kinawa ga-apenimoiegoban aw mini, gi-bwa-kikenimeg,
ki wabandanawa nongom, gi-giwanimigoieg. You who had
trusted in that man before you knew him, you see now
that you have been belied, (deceived.)
FUTURE TENSE. Arc ged-ataicangessig wika joniian, weweni
dash tcJii anokid, ta-mino-bimadisi ; aw dash nibiwa
ged-atawanged joniian, mojag ta-animendam. He who
never shall borrow money, but shall be industrious, (work
well,) shall live well, (contented,) but he who shall bor-
row much money, shall always be troubled in his mind.
Awenenag igiw ged-ashangedjig nongom pakwcjiganan '?
Who are those that shall give bread (to eat) to-day.
22
34:2
V. DUBITATIVE CONJUGATION.
AFFIRMATIVE FORM. NEGATIVE FORM.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE.
Singular.
Nind apenimona.dog, I trust per- Kawin ssinadog,
haps in him,
kid apenimona.dog, ssinadog,
od
nind apcnimom'madog,
kid apenimomwtidog,
od apem'wonawadogenan,
ssinadogenan,
ssiminadog,
ssimwadog,
ssinawadogenan.
Plural
Nind opewiwonadogenag, I trust Kawin ssinadogenag,
perhaps in them,
kid open? won adogenag, ssinadogenag,
od ope/uwonadogenan, ssinadogenan,
nind opsmwominadogenag, ssiminadogenag,
kid o/jewmomwadogenag, ssimwadogenag,
od ape?i/monawadogenan, ssinawadogenan,
The perfect tense is formed by prefixing gi- to the verb,
as : Nin gi-apenimonadog, . . .
PLUPERFECT TENSE.*
Singular and Plural.
Gonima gi-apenimo\\'Sim\)i\n, I had Kawin ssiwamban,
per haps trust-
fed in him,
(them,)
esiwamban.
* bee second Note, p, 142.
343
gi-ap enimogoba.il,
gi-apenimo\va.ngiba.n ) we
j . . .
ssigoban,
ssiwangiban,
ssiwangoban,
ssiwegoban,
ssigwaban,
Form the future tense after the present by prefixing gad*
to the verb, as : Nin gad-apenimonadog, . . ,
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE.
Singular and Plural.
l^emmcwanen, that I perhaps trust in ssiwanen,
him, (them.)
cpenimo\v&nen, ssiwanen,
epenimogwen, ssigwen,
epenimo\vs.ngen, \ ssiwangen,
epewmowangen, \ ssiwangen,
epenimowegwen, ) ssiwegwen,
ssiwagwen,
PERFECT TENSE.
Singular and Plural.
CTa-apenimow£nen, that I perhaps have trusted ssiwanen,
in him, (them,)
Etc., after the above present tense.
PLUPERFECT TENSE.
Singular and Plural.
, if I had p. trusted in ssiwdmbanen,
him, (them,)
ope'm'mowambanen, if thou hadst . . . ssiwambanen,
openimogobanen, if he ... ssigobanen,
344
apenimowtingibanen, > ssiwangibanen.
opemwowangobanen, $ ssiwangobanen,
apenimowegobanen, ssiwegobanen,
ssiwagobanen,
The future tenses to be formed after the present.
PARTICIPLES.
PRESENT TENSE.
Singular and Plural.
Nin epenimowanen, I who perh. trust in him, (them,)
kin cpenimowznen, thou who perhaps tr. . . .
win cpenimogwen, he who perhaps tr. . . .
ninawind epewiwowangen, ) we who perhaps trust in
kinawind epenimo\v<\ngen, ) him, (them,)
kinawa epenimowegwen, you who parhaps tr. . . .
winawa epenimogwenzg, they who perhaps tr.
Nin epenimossiwanen, I who perhaps do not tr. . . .
kin epenimossiwancn, thou who . . .
win epenijnoss'igwen,
ninawind epemmossiwangen, ) ,
/ \vc iViio r/cr«
kinawind epewwossnvangen, )
kinawa cpenimoss'iwegwen,
winawa epenimossigwenag,
IMPERFECT TENSE,
Singular and Plural.
Nin epenimo\VBLU\\w\w\i, I who perhaps trusted in him,
(them,)
kin epem'wmnml>;mrn, thou who . . .
win
ninawind
kinawind e^enimowangobanen, c W<
345
kinawa epeniwowegobanen,
winawa epewzwzogobanenag,
Nin gpewmossiwambanen, I who perhaps did not . ,
kin epewiwzossiwambanen, thou who . . .
win epemmossigobanen,
ninawind epemwossiwangibanen, ) we
kinawind epenimossiwangobanen, )
kinawa epemmossiwegobanen,
winawa epemmossigobanenag,
The remaining tenses of these participles are to be
formed after the above two, according to many preceding
paradigms.
EXAMPLES ON THE V. DUBITATIVE CONJUGATION.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
PRBSENT TENSE. Kawin Kije-Maniton od apenimossinad-
ogenan, mi apitchi wendji-segisid. He does probably not
put his trust in God ; that is the reason he fears so
much.
Kawin abissiwag ; anishinaben od ijanawadogenan.
They are not at home ; they probably are visiting the
, Indians, (on a visit to the Indians.)
Kid apenimomwadog niiaw, ininiwidog, mi ganabatch
wendji-nasikawiieg nongom. Men, I suppose you place
your confidence in me ; that is perhaps the reason you
come to me to-day.
PERFECT TENSE. Kid inawemaganag ki gi-ijanadogenag
pitchinago ; kawin sa kabe-gijig ki gi-wabamissinon.
Thou hast probably been to see thy relations yesterday ;
so I did not see thee all day.
Aw oshkinawe osam o gi-apenimonadogenan, kakina
gego anisha tchi ondinamagod ; kawin dash gi-anokissi.
That young fellow relied perhaps too much on him, that
346
he would let him have all things for nothing ; and so he
did not work.
Kawin mashi o gi-ijassinadogcnan mekatetffikwanaien,
panima wabang ganabatcli o gad-ijctnan. He has proba-
bly not yet been to see the Missionary ; he will perhaps
go to him to-morrow.
FUTURE TENSE. Nin gi-agonabanig awassonago nind
agimag wedi ejadaw anishinabe ; o ga-gimedinadvgenan
nind agiman. I had hung up, the day before yesterday,
my snow shoes, there where that Indian is going ; he
will perhaps take my snow-shoes.
Ininiwidog, kawin nongom gwctcli ki gad-apenimossim-
wadog niiaw, kawin sa wika ki babamitossinoninim.
Men, you will now probably not put much confidence in
me, because T never do what you ask me.
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE. Kawin win kikcndansin
wdnen Dcbendjiged aiapitchi-kijeicadisid, misi
gaie kekendang. I know not whether I trust enough in
the Lord who is so exceedingly merciful, and who
knows all.
Endogwen aw mini cpmtmngimi. niiaw ; kawin giraiak
nin kikenimigossi. I doubt whether that man has any
confidence in me ; he does not know me well.
Namdndj ejitchigegtoen, rjagin-n OSMH, gon'tma pair
rjassigwcM. I don't know what he is doing, and whether
he goes to his father, or not.
PERFECT TENSE. Kawin ki kikr/iiinissinon ga-ijairancn
aw aidkosid inini ; cndogm-n ^<iic John ga-ijagwtn.
I do not know whether tliou hast been to that sick man ;
and I do not know whether John has been.
Kawin nin kiki-ninifissi ga-apenimogwen kiinw gi-kititoia-
gisifl. I don't know whether he had recourse to theo,
when he was poor.
347
Endogwen ga-apenimowagwen kiiawiwan gi-akosiwad,
I don't know whether they had recourse to you when
they were sick.
PLUPERFECT TENSE. Gimodissiwainbanen mandaminag
kitiganing, ki da-gi-ashdmin nongom pakwejigan. Hadst
thou not stolen corn in the field, (as I understood,) I
would have given thee now some bread, (or, flour.)
Apenimossiwdmbanen kiiaw, nissai, tchi widokawiian,
kawin nin da-gi-madjitassin iw anokiwin ; kego nongom
nagajishiken. Had I not relied on thee, brother, that
thou wouldst help me, I would not have commenced that
work ; do not now forsake me.
FUTURE TENSE. Namandj minik ged-atdwegwen kitchi
moshwen aw atawewinini, osam sa o sanagagiman. I don't
know how many shawls that merchant shall sell ; he sells
them much too high, (dear.)
Kishpin apitchi kitimagisid, mi apt ganalatcTi ged-ape-
nimogwen kiiawiwan, tchi jawenimeg minawa. When
he becomes very poor, then perhaps he will have recourse
to you, that you might do him charity again.
PARTICIPLES.
PRESENT TENSE. Kinawa ketchi-apenimowegwen niiaw*
wegonen ge-iji-gashkitowdmbdnen tchi dodonagog ? You
who have perhaps much confidence in me, what would I
be able to do for you ?
Kin aidpitchi-apenimowanen aw inini, ki ga-Jcitchi-
waiejimigo ningoting. Thou who trustest so much in
that man, (as I heard,) thou shalt be once much de-
ceived.
Kinawa ejdivegwen mojag aidkosidjig, ki ga-jawenimigo-
wa Jesus dibakonige-gijigak, kishpin winwendji-dodameg.
You who visit frequently the sick, (as I understood,)
Jesus will be merciful to you on the day of judgment, if
you do it for his sake.
348
•
IMPERFECT TENSE. Ningwaiak epenimossiwdmbanenkiiaw,
Debemmiian, hi pagossenimin tchi bonigidetawiian ;
weweni nin wi-apenimon kiiaw nongom. I who did per-
haps not perfectly trust in thee, O Lord, I beseech thee
forgive me ; henceforth I will perfectly trust in thee.
Mamig oshJcinaweg, endasso-gijigadinig ejdgobanenag
Ctagcshkinidjin, nongom ka wika od ijassinawan. These
young fellows who associated, every day before, with
card-players, (as I heard,) now never go to them.
PERFECT TENSE. Awegwen aw ga-bi-atawangcgwen jeba
nin bebejigoganjiman, kawin nin gi-waba?nassi. I don't
know who was the person that came this morning to
borrow my horse, I did not see him.
Kin wika gwctcli ga-apenimossiwancn niiaw, ki kikenim
na eji-tiiifiinan, cji-kiliiiHtgeniminan gate ? Thou, who
perhaps hast never put much confidence in me, dost
thou know how I love thee, and how I pity thee ?
Awegwenag ga-ashangegwcnag pukwrjiganiin, kokoshan
gate. Geget mino dodawawag mamig anishinubrg bcka-
dedjig. I do not know who are those that distributed
flour and pork. A good work indeed is done to these
starving Indians.
FUTURE TENSE. Ninidjanissidog, awegwen ge-wi-ija^rrn
wabang omishomissan, weweni nongom o ga-wabandan o
masinaigan. Children, whoever wishes to go to-morrow
to visit grand-father, must well study to-day his book,
(his lesson.)
Awegwen ge-migiwegwen naningim jmitiun. minik eji-
gashkitod, mi sa^ hrtimngixidjig tt hi mino dodau-indwa,
apitrhi kitchi daniwin o g<t-niil><in gijigong. Whoever
shall often give money, as much as he can, with the in-
tention to do good to the poor, shall find an immense
treasure in heaven.
Namandj api gtd*\jds&iwanen u-ika ctagcdjig, menik-
wedjig gait. I don't know when the time will come,
when thou shalt not associate any more with card-players
and drinkers.
349
VI. CONJUGATION.
To this Conjugation belong all the verbs transitive or ac-
tive, INANIMATE. The object, upon which acts the subject
of these verbs, is always comprised in the verb ; as : Nin
wabandan, does not mean only, I see ; but, I see it, (some
inanimate object. See page 18.)
All the verbs of this Conjugation end in », (an, en, in,
on ,) at the first person sing, present, indicative ; and like-
wise so at the characteristical third person.
Here are a few verb's belonging to this Conjugation.
1. pers. 3. pers.
Nin debwetan, I believe it, o debwetan.
Nin kikendan, I know it, o kikendan,
Nin minikiven, I drink it, o minikwen.
Nind apdndjigen, I eat it with some other od apandjigen,
thing,
Nin midjin, I eat it, (some in. obj.,) o midjin.
Nind agwin, I put it on, (clothing,) od agwin.
Nin bidon, I bring it, o bidon,
Nin biton, I wait for it, o biton.
Note. In the paradigm this final n, is placed among the?
terminations, because it does not always remain with the-
verb.
350
AFFIRMATIVE FORM. NEGATIVE FORM.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE.
Singular.
\in wabandan, I see it, Kawin nsin,*
ki wabandau, " nsin,
o waba?idan, " nsin,
toabanddm, they see it, (on le voit,) " nsim,
one sees it,t
•/i in wabandam'm, „ nsimin,
ki wabandanitw&, „ nsinawa,
o wa.bandana.wa., I ,, nsinawn,
Plural
Kawin
Min wabandanzn, I see them, (in. obj.) nsinan,
ki wabandanan, " nsinan,
o wabandana.il, " nsinan,
niti wabandam'm, " nsimin,
ki wabftndan&wsin, " nsinauan.
o waba?idana.\va.n, ' nsinawan,
IMPERFECT TEN Si:.
Singular^.
JVin wabandamihwi, I saw it, Kairin nsinaban,
/;/ i/-(ib(indfni;[\)\i}\) " nsinaban,
o wabandanalrdn, " nsinaban,
Remark p. 1GO. t See Remark p. 92.
351
win wabandam'maban,
ki wabandanawaban,
o wabandanawaban,
Plural
Nin icabandanaban'm, I saw them, (in.
objects,)
ki tvabandanabanm,
o tvabandanabanm,
nin wabandammabamn,
ki
" nsiminaban,
" nsinawaban,
" nsinawaban,
Kawin
nsinabanin,
" nsinabanin,
Ci nsinabanin,
*' nsiminabanin,
" nsinawabanin,
" nsinawabanin.
PERFECT TENSE.
Singular.
Nin gi-wabandcm, I have seen it, Kawin nsin,
ki gi-wabandan, " nsin,
o gi-wabandan, " nsin,
Etc., after the above present tense.
Plural
.Yin gi-wabandanzn, I have seen them, Kawin nsinan,
ki gi-wabandanan, " nsinan,
o iri-wabandarian, " nsinan,
Etc., after the present tense.
PLUPERFECT TENSE.
Singular.
Nin gi-wabandanzban, I had seen it, Kawin nsinaban,
Etc., Singular and Plural, after the above imperfect
tense.
Form the future tenses after the above present, as : Nin
ga-wabandan, . . . Nin ga-wabandanan, . . . Nin-ga-gi-
wabandan. .
352
* SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE.
Singular and Plural.
Wabandaman, because I see it, (them,) nsiwan,
wabandaman, nsiwan,
wabandang, nsig}
wabandaming, (qu'on le (les) voit,) nsing,
wabandam-dng* ) because we see it, nsiwang,
wdbandamzng, J (them,) nsiwang,
wabandameg, nsiweg,
tsabandamowad, nsigwa.
PERFECT TENSE.
Singular and Plural.
Gi-wabandaman, because I have s. it,(th.)nsiwan,
Etc., as above in the present tense.
PLUPERFECT TENSE.
Singular and Plural.
had I s. it, (th.) nsiwamban.
asiwamban,
wabandang'ibun, nsigoban,
waba?idamingi\)<Ln, (si on 1'eut vu,) nsingiban,
wabandam'dng'ibzn, I , , nsivvangihan,
wdbandamnngoban, j nsiwangoban,
wabanetamegobm, nsiwegoban,
tca&anefcttnowapath, nsigwaban.
See Remark 3. p. 45
t See Remark 3, p. 11G.
353
Form the two future tenses after the above present tense;
as : Ge-wabandamdn , . . Ge-gi-wabandamdn. . . .
And form the two tenses of the conditional mood after the
present and perfect tenses of the indicative ; as : Nin da-
wabandan, I would see it, (or, I ought to see it,) . . . Nin
da-wabandanan, I would see them, . . . Nin da-gi-waban-
dan, I would have seen it. etc. .
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
see it, (them,)
o ga-wabandan> let him see it,
o ga-wabandanzn, let him see them,
wabandandz, let us see it, (them,)
wabandamog, see it, (them,)
o ga-wabandan<L\va, let them see it,
o ga-wa &tf/idanawan, let them see them,
" nsin,
" nsinan,
'• nsida,
" ngegon,
" nsinawa,
" nsinawan.
PARTICIPLES.
PRESENT TENSE.
Singular and Plural.
Nin waiabandam^n, I who see it, (them,)
kin waiabandam&n, thou who seest it, (them,)
win waiabandang, he who sees it, (them,)
waiabandammg, (ce que 1'on voit,)
ninawind waiabandam£np. ) , ., /x,
Mnawind waiabandam^, } we who see !t- (them''
kinawa waiabandameg, you who see it, (them,)
winawa waiabandangig, they who see it, (them,)
Nin waiabandansiw&n, I who do not see it, (them,)
kin ivaiabandansiwm, thou who dost not . . .
354
win irf(i(tb(DK/<n}*\cr, he who does not see it, (them.)
, (ce qu'on ne voit pas,)
d
ninawind
kinawa waiabandausiw&g, you who don't see it, (the'
winawa waiabandansigog, they who don't . . .
IMPERFECT TENSE.
Singular and Plural.
Nin ?/Y//Y/J«wfZflmamban, I who saw it, (them,)
kin waiabandam&mb&n,
win waici ban fid ngiban ,
waiabandam'mgiba.n, (ce qu'on voyait,)
ninawind ?/•«/>/ /;tf//r/flm&nffiban. )
. , -77 > we who saw . . .
kmawind waiabandam<Li\gob<iTi, j
kinawa waiabandamegobm,
winawa waiabandangib&nig,
Nin waiabandansiwamban, I who did not 'see . . .
kin waiabandansiwa.mba.u,
win wa ialxt n da nsigoban ,
waiabandansingiba.n, (ce que Ton ne v. pas,)
ninawind ^mia^ansiwangiban, )
kinawmd waiaoandaasivfB.ngooBi}, )
kinawa waiabandans'iwegoban,
winawa waiabandansigobamg,
After these two tenses all the others of these
are formed; as: Nin, ga-ipabandamdn, . . . Nin ga-wa-
bandamdmban, . . . Nin gc-icabandamdn, etc. . . .
Remark. 1. The verb, nnul aiun, I have it, makes an
exception from the above paradigm in the third persons of
the subjunctive mood and the participles ; as follows :
355
AFFIRMATIVE FORM. NEGATIVE FORM.
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
PRESENT, TENSE.
Singular and Plnral.
Aidd, because he has it, (them,)
aidng, because one has it,
azdwad, because they have it,
PLUPERFECT TENSE.
Singular and Plural.
Aiap&n, had he had it, (them,)
rtiawapan, had they, . .
ssng,
ssigwa.
ssigoban,
ssigwaban,
PARTICIPLES.
PRESENT TENSE.
Singular and Plural.
Eidd, who has it, (them,)
, who have it, (them,)
IMPERFECT TENSE.
Singular and Plural.
.Em'pan, who had it, (them,)
eiapanig, who had it, (them,)
ssg,
ssig°g>
ssigoban,
ssigobanig,
In all the moods, tenses and persons, not mentioned here
above, this verb is exactly conjugated after Nin waban-
dan,
356
Remark. 2. All the verbs of this Conjugation, ending
in an, are exactly conjugated after the preceding paradigm,
Nin wabandan. But the verbs ending in en, in, and on,
undergo a little difference in some moods and tenses. We
shall point out here this difference. The moods and tenses
which are not mentioned in the following paradigm, are
conformable to the above paradigm, Nin wabandan.
We take the verb, Nin sagiton, I like it, for an example;
but the verbs in en, and in, are conjugated exactly like
those in on.
In the AFFIRMATIVE form the whole indicative mood of
Nin sagiton, is exactly conjugated as in Nin icabandan.
But in the NEGATIVE form you have to remember, that in
the terminations of this form, the letters 71.9 in the preced-
ing paradigm, are always changed into ss, for the verbs in
en, in, and on. So, for instance, you say : Kawin nin
wabandansm ; change this ns in ss, for the verb, Nin .SY/#/-
ton, and you will have : Kawin nin sagitossin. And so on,
always changing ns into ss. This is the only little differ-
ence between Nin wabandan and Nin sagiton, etc., for the
whole indicative mood. But in the subjunctive mood there
is some more discrepance ; as you see here below.
AFFIRMATIVE FORM. NEGATIVE FORM.
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE.
Singular and Plural.
Sagitoi&n, because 1 like it, ssiwdn,
(them,) in. objects,
sagito'imi, ssiwan,
sagitod, ssijr,
•ft tang, (qu'on Paime,) ssing,
357
sagitoting, ) b lik ssiwang,
sagitoia.ng, ) ssiwang,
sagitoieg, ssiweg,
sagitowa.d> ssigwa,
PERFECT TENSE.
Singular and Plural.
Gi-sagito\a.n, as I have liked it, ssiwan,
(them,)
Etc., after the above present tense.
PLUPERFECT TENSE.
Singular and Plural
i, had I liked it, ssiwamban,
(them,)
ssiwamban,
ssigoban,
L, (si on Peut aime,) ssingiban,
sagifoiangiban, i , _, ssiwangiban,
sagitoisngobaji, j ssiwangoban,
sagitoiegoba.n, ssiwegoban,
sagitowapa.n} ssigwaban,
The future tenses to be formed after the present.
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
o ga-sagiton, let him like it, " ssin,
o ga-sagitonan, let him like them, " ssinan,
sagitoda,' let us like it, (them,) " ssida,
r4f;i?' } «ke ^ chem.) kegon-
23
358
o ga-sagiton&wz, let them like it, ssinawa,
o g-a-sagifonawan, let them like them, ssinawan,
PARTICIPLES.
PRESENT TENSE.
Sing, and Plur.
Nin saiagitoi£n, I who like it, (them,)
kin saiagitoian, thou who likest it, (them,)
win saiagitod, he who likes it, (them,)
saiagitong, what one likes,
ninawind saiagitong, > wfi wh ,;k . ( h
kmawmd saiagitoizng, )
kinawa saiagitotegr you who like it, (them,)
winawa saiagitodfig, they who like it, (them,)
Nin saiagitossiwan, I who don't like it, (them,)
kin saiagitossiwzn, thou who dost not like . . .
win saiagitossig, he who does not like it, (them>)
saiagitoss'mg, what one does not like,
ninawind saiagitosswang, > , tf
kinawind saiagitossiwzng, | w
kinawa saiagitossiweg, you who don't like,
winawa saiagitossigog, they who . . .
IMPERFECT TENSE.
Singular and Plural
Nin saiagitoi&mbzn, I who liked it, (them,)
km samgifoiamban, thou who likedst it, (them,)
win saiagitopan, he who . . .
saiagitongiba.il, (ce qu'on aimait,)
359
tunawind saiagito&ngibw, ) we wh
kinawind saiagitoiangobzn, )
kinawa sam^'taiegoban, you who liked . .
winawa satagitopanig, they who . . .
Nin samg^ossiwamban, I who did not like it, (them,)
kin »atagftossiwamban, thou who didst not like . . .
win sotagtfossigoban, he who did not . . .
saiagitossingiban, what one did riot like,
ninawind sa^sshvdngiban, > we who did
kinawind satagtfossiwangoban, J
kinawa samgzYossiwegoban, you who did . . .
winawa samg^ossigobanig, they who . . .
Form after these two tenses all the others of these parti-
ciples.
Exactly as the verb, Nin set gi ton, are conjugated the
verbs which we call personifying. (See page 85.) They
all end in on. These verbs personify inanimate things,
that is to say, they represent them as doing actions, which
only persons or other living beings can do. F. i.
Kid ikitowin nin nibwakdigon. Thy word makes me
wise.
Inamiewin nin ginaamagon matchi dodamowin. Religion
forbids me bad actions.
Kitchi akosiwin ki gi-odissigomin. A great sickness has
come to us, (has visited us.)
Nitam batadowin Jcakina anishindbeg o gi-inigaigonawa.
The first sin has injured all men, (all mankind.*)
Here are some moods and tenses of these verbs, only ex-
empli gratia.
* See other Examples on page 85.
360
AFFIRMATIVE FORM. NEGATIVE FORM.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE
Singular.
Nind odissigon, it comes to me,
kid odissigon, " " "thee,
od odissigorij " " " him,
nind odissigomm, *' •* "us,
kidodissiganawat " "
otZ odissigonawa, *'
you,
them
Kairin ssin,
" ssin,
'f ssin,
" ssimin,
4< ssinawa,
" ssinawa,
Plural.
Nind odissigon&n, they come to me, Kawin ssinan,
(in. obj.)
kid odissigona.n,they come to thee, ssinan,
od odissigonan, " " " him , ssinan,
nind odissigomin, " " " us, ssimin,
kid odissigonzwa,!!, ft " '* you, ssinawan,
od odissigona,wa.nt " " "them, ssinawan,
IMPERFECT TENSE.
Singular.
Nind ofZissZjgonahan,it came to me, Kairin ssinnhnn,
kidodissigona.ban,11 " "thee, " ssinal)an,
od odissigounbim," " "him, " Ksinahan,
nind odusigotomaban, etc. . . *' ssiminabim,
kidodissigoi\a.\vaban, " ssinawaban,
od orfiss/^onawaban,
" ssinawaban,
361
Plural.
Nind odissigonabanm, they came to Kaivin ssinabanin,
me (in. obj.)
kid odissigonabaiim, th. ca. toth., " ssinabanin.
Etc. . Etc. .
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE.
Singular and Plural.
Odissigoisin, if it comes (they come) to me,
odissigoiVR, if it " *•
odissigod, if it " "
or/is.s^oiang, ) ^ .^ l( 4«
odissigoinng, J
odissigoieg, if it " •'
I, if it «' "
Etc. . Etc. .
to me,
ssiwan,
to thee,
ssiwan,
to him,
ssig%
to us,
ssiwang,
ssiwang,
to you,
ssiweg,
to them,
ssigwa,
PARTICIPLES.
PRESENT TENSE.
Nin wedissigoia.n, I to whom it comes, (they come,)
kin wedissigoian, thou to whom . . .
win wedissigod, he to whom . . .
ninawind wedissi^oi^ns, >
f . .7 , 7- • • ' > we to whom . . .
ktnawind wedissigoi&ng, ^
kinawa wedissigoieg, you . . .
vrinawa wedissigodjig, they . . .
362
PRESENT TENSE.
Nin wedissigossiwan, I to whom it does (they do)
not come,
kin wedissigossiw&n, thou . . .
win wedissigossig, he ...
ninawind ivedissigossi\v&ng, )
kinawind wedissigossiw&ng, J
kinawa ivedissigossiweg, you . . .
winawa wedissigossigog, they . . .
Etc. . . etc. . .
Remark. The formation of these per sonify ing verbs is
easy. You have only to add the letter n to the first person
sing., present, indicative, of the passive voice in the IV.
Conjugation, (page 224,) and you form these verbs.
Examples.
1 pers. pass, voice, personifying verbs.
Nin wdbatnigo, I am seen, nin wabamigon, it sees me.
Ni?i nissigo, I am killed, nin nis.s-igon, it kills me.
Nin ganonigOy I am spoken to, nin gannnigon, it speaks to
me.
Nin nishkimigo, I am made angry, nin nishkhmgon, it
makes me angry.
Nin sagiigo, I am loved, nin sagiigon, it loves me.
Ninnopinanigo, I am followed, nin nopinanigon, it follow*
me.
Nind dnwcnimigo, I am reproached, nind dmoenimigo*, it
reproaches me.
Nin jingenimigo, I am hated, nin jingfniinigtw, it liato
me.
Nin kikcnimigo, I am known, nin ktkcnimigon, it knows
me.
Etc. . . etc. .
363
VI. DUBITATIVE CONJUGATION.
AFFIRMATIVE FORM. NEGATIVE FORM.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE.
Singular.
Kawln
JYm wabandanadog, I see it perhaps, nsinadog,
ki wabandcma.dog,
o wabandanzdog,
nin iffabandaminadog,
ki wabandana.wa.dogv
o wabandana.wadog9
nsinadog,
nsinadog,
nsiminadog,
nsinawadog,
nsinawadogj
Plural
Kawln
Nin icabandaiia.dogena.il, I see them nsinadogenan,
perhaps, {in. objects,)
ki icabandatia.dogena.Yi, '** nsinadogenan,
o w?a&cmefrmadogenan, " nsinadogenan,
nin waband<im\n<idogena.n, " nsiminadogenan,
ki 76-aict/irfanawadogenan^ " nsinawadogenan,
e waband<in$wa.dogenan, ** nsinawadogenan,
The perfect and the future tenses are formed after the
above present, by prefixing to the verb gi-, ga-9 ga-gi-.
PLUPERFECT TENSE.*
^/-w^i^n^amovvamban, I had perhaps Kawin nsiwamban,
seen it, (them,)
* See second Note, p, 142.
364
" nsiwamban,
gi-wabandamogoba.n, " nsigoban,
gi-wabandamo\vu.ngib&i\, ) u j " nsiwangiban,
gi-wabaiidamoviu.ngob3.uf ) " nsiwangoban,
gi-wabandamo\vegobans " nsiwegoban,
" nsigwaban.
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE.
Waial>andamo\v£nen* whether I see it, nsiwdnen,
(them,)
wdiabandamowanent nsiwanen,
waiabandamogwen, nsigwen,
waiabandamowangen, > wheth we nsiwangen,
wdiabandamow&ngen, $ ' nsivvangen,
waiabandamowegwen, nsiwegwen,
waiabandamowagwen, nsiwagweu,
PERFECT TEJSSE.
Ga-wabandamow&nen, whether I have seen nsiwanen,
it, (them,)
Etc., after the above present tense.
PLUPERFECT TENSE,
TFa&amZamowambanen, if I had seen it, nsiwambanen,
(them,)
«0«'&aw(?amowambanen, nsiwambanen,
wabandamogobznen, nsigobanen,
, ) .,. , j nsivvangibaiien,
, | ' nsiwangobanen,
nsiwegobaneu,
?0a&cm(/amowagobanen, nsivvagobanen,
Form the future tense after the present; as: Ge-wahan-
damowanent . . .
* See Remark at the end of this paradigm.
365
PARTICIPLES.
PRESENT TENSE.
Nin waiabandamo\va.nen, I who perh. see it, (them,)
kin waiabandamovf&ueu, thou who . . .
win waiabandamogwen,
ninawind waiabandamowzngen, \ ,
klnawlnd waiabandamowzngen, J
kinawa waiabandamowegwen,
winawa waiabandamog\venagt
PRESENT TENSE.
Nin wmiabandtmatwjtBen, I who p. don't see it, (them,)
kin waiabandansiwanen, thou who p . . .
win waiabandansigwen,
ninawind ivaiabandansiw&ntren. )
/ . .7 - , 7 T 6 ' > we who p, . .
kmawind waiabandansiwangen, )
kinawa waiabandansiwegwen,
winawa waiabandansigwenng.
IMPERFECT TENSE,
Nin waiabandamowambdinen, I who perhaps saw it,
(them,)
kin waiabandamowdmbanen, thou who p. . .
win wai aba nda mogob an en ,
ninawind zyazV/&a/?r/amowangibanen, ) i
kinawind waidbandamovmngobanen, )
kinawa waiabandamowegoba.nen,
winawa waiabandamogobznenag.
Nin waiabandausiw&mbanen, I who did perhaps not
see it, (them,)
kin im«6«wcfansiwambanen, thou who . . .
366
irin waialandansigobanen,
,
kinawind M.v/m/w//r/«nsiwangobanen,
kinawa toasa&aiu&znsiwegobaneQ,
irhuura
Form the other tenses after these two.
Remark. Respecting the verbs ending in en, in and on,
(page 349,) you will please remember, that in all the cases
where the verbs ending in an, take the syllable mo in the
Dubitative Conjugation, this syllable is taken out, for the
verbs ending in en, in and on. So you say : Waidban-
damnwdncn, waiabandamogwcn, etc . . . but you will not
say : SaiagitotHOW&nen, saiagitomogwtn ; but : Saiagito-
wancn, saiagito«ir<'n ; and so forth, always taking out the
syllable me, for the verbs in en, In, om
EXAMPLES ON THE WHOLE VI. CONJUGATION*
INDICATIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE. Bfjig eta wakaigan nin iralandan, AY/»
win nij nin icauanda n^inan. I see only one house, I
don't see two.
^\"in Ititmnin nabikiran tclii bagamassing. Kawin nin
kikendansimin «]» ge-dagwishinotruxgadogwen. AVe are
waiting for the vessel to come in. We don't know when
it shall arrive.
() drhtrctfinfido" dajindi irin ^d-jionddng pitrJihiago ,v
gnif dfroir ikircu'dg odebwetanawadog. He probably be-
lieves the calumny he near d yesterday; and these wo-
men, I think, also believe it.
IMPERFECT TENSE. AH- /•//•/V/.sr//>- kawingegovkiktndan*
x'uKihnn />a-d<i i/'is/iht'/ o///r/, nongn/n das/i irnrrni o wa-
bfinf/fin ma AUHI'I if an. 'JMiis boy knew nothing when he
came here, but now he reads well.
367
Nin kitchi sagitominabanin masinaiganan ga-wanitoi-
dng. We liked very much the books we have lost. (The
person spoken to not included.)
Mokoddssowinini nibiwa od ojitonabanin apabiwinan,
adopomnan gaie, bibonong ; nongom dash mojag akosi.
The joiner made many benches and tables, last winter :
but now he is always sick.
PERFECT TENSE. Ki gi-giwewidonan na anokasoivinan ?
•Bcjig eta nin gi-giwewidon ; nij dash kawin mashi nin
gi-aiossinan. Hast thou carried back the tools ? I have
carried back (returned) one only ; but the other two I
have not yet used.
Nin gwinau' abandon wiiass oma ga-atcg ; animosh o gi-
bi-gimodinadog. I cannot find (I miss) the meat that
was here ; I suppose a dog has stolen it away.
Anotch matrhi ijitchigcwinan hi gi-wcbmanaiuanjaigira,
giwashkwebiwin gaic J:i gi-bonitonawa ; gaginawishkiwin
dash hi gi-ishlcouanaiL-a. You have already rejected
many bad practises, you have also abandoned drunken-
ness ; but the habit of telling lies you have retained.
PLUPERFECT TENSE. Bwa dagwishinan oma, nin gi-gish-
pinadominabanin iniiv mokomanant patakaiganan gaie.
We had bought these knives and forks, before thou
earnest to this place.
Nij masinaiganan jaigwa nin gi-ijibianabanin, bejig
dash kawin mashi nin gi-dc-gijitossinaban^ api pandiged
nishime. I had already written two letters, but I had
not quite finished another one, when my brother (sister)
came in.
Nibinong bwa bi-giweia?ig, Moiling wanekaning gi-ijai-
dng, pijikiwag o gi-banadjitonawabanin nin kitiganin-
anin. Last summer cattle had destroyed our fields,
(gardens,) before we came back from our journey to La-
pointe.
368
FUTURE TENSE. Wcircni n'ui ga-ganoMcnd&iuin Kijc-
Manito o ganasongewinan, katrin minawa onr/jita nin
ga-uri-bigobidossinan. I will faithfully keep the com-
mandments of God, I will no more break them purposely.
JWn gad-at awe min nin wakaiganinanin otna, hrkanakin
dash odcnang nin ga-gishpinadomin, kaicin daxh kifigan
nin gad-cyitossimin. ^\ e will sell out our houses here,
and we will buy others in the town, but we shall make
no field, (garden.)
Kishime o ga-banadjitonadogtnan masinaiganan nijike-
wabid ; awi-ijan. Thy little brother (sister) will per-
haps spoil the books, as he (she) is alone ; go to him,
(her.)
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE, Ninidjaniss^kiahpin^gego dibddodaman,
gonima gate gcgo ojitoian, mlkwcnim Debendjiged uiiti
gfgo icaidbandang. My child, if thou art telling some-
thing, or doing something, remember the Lord who sees
all.
Kislipin wa-aiamowanen gcgo, gagwedjiniishint ki ga-
minin. Bidadjimowin moandamowegwen, kryo p«l>igc
dtbwetangtgon. If thou perhaps wishest to have something,
ask me, I will give it to thee. If you happen to hear re-
ports, don't believe them immediately.
Jaigwa apitcld incudanwg fc/ii btniitowad minikircicin,
ml (/nth trlii odapinamowad minikwesti^imasinaigansan.
They already think firmly to give up (to abandon) drink-
ing, and to take the pledge.
PERFECT TENSK. J\rin j^Wcndagossimtn nongnm gi-wcln-
n&m&ng anishinabevritchigewin, mi dttxli anamiewin gi-
<>rI(il>in(iiiiun<T. We are happy now, Ix-muso we Imve re-
jected (abandoned) the Indian mood of living, and have
taken religion.
369
Mi ganabatcli wendji-dodamowad, ga-nondansiwagwen
gagikwewin gi-anamiegijigadinig. Tliey perhaps do
that, because they probably have not heard the sermon
last Sunday.
Kawin John keiabi ta-kituiuigisissi^ garbonitogwen ish-
kotcwabo. John will be no more poor now, because he
has quitted ardent liquor, I understand.
PLUPERFECT TENSE. Nawatcli waiba mikamangiban tchi-
man, mcwija nin da-gi-ddgwishinimin. Had we found a
canoe sooner, we would have arrived long ago.
Minikwessiwamban iw wcnijishing mashkikhcabo, gin-
wenj ki da-gi-akos. Hadst thou not taken this good
medicine, thou wouldst have been sick a long time.
Ningotclii bakan mikansiiccgoban anokiivin, nin ki da-gi-
mininim. Had you not found work elsewhere, I would
have given you some.
FUTURE TENSE. Wcgonen iw gc-gashkitod enamiad, ga-
nawcndang ganasongewinan ? What shall the Christian
obtain (earn) by keeping the commandments ?
Ninidjanissidog, minik nwandameg gagikwewin anamie-
wigamigong, mi iw mojag ge-mindjimendameg , ml iw ge-
wanendansiweg wlka. My children, the preaching you
hear in the church, is the thing you should always keep
in memory, and never forget.
SECOND FUTURE TENSE. Gc-gi-kitigadameg Kije-Manito
o kitiganing, enamiaieg, mi iw gc-mamaieg wcdi, gi-ish-
kwa-bimadisiicg aking. Whatever you shall have sown
on the field of God, Christians, that you shall reap there,
after your life on earth.
CONDITIONAL MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE. Ki do^-wanen^ >nawa Dcbeniminang od
ikitowin, hishpin wika nondansiweg gagikwewin. You
370
would forget the word of the Lord, if you never heard
sermons.
Nij jalgwa wakaiganan o dardibendananv nij gate kiti-
ganan o da^aianan aw inini, minikicrs.sig. That man
would already possess two houses, and would have two
fields, (gardens,) if he did not drink.
Ki da-wabandan masiiurigan, u'cndawiteissiwanhi. Thou
oughtst to read when thou hast leisure time.
PERFECT TENSE. Nibiwa masinaiganan nln da-gi-gish-
pinadonan, kawin dash gwctcli nin gi-ojoniiamis&i. I
would have bought many books, but I had not much
money.
Nissitn masinalganan ki da-gi-odissigonan, abiiamban.
Kimishome o gi-madjidonan. Three letters would have
come to thee, (thou wouldst have received three letters,)
hadst thou been at home. Thy uncle took them.
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
\Veweni sagiton kid anamievrin, minotan anamic-gagiku'c-
win, mino indbadjiton dash. Like well thy religion,
Listen with pleasure to religious sermons, and make a
good use of them.
Gijigado-masinaigan qjitokan, tchi kikendamang gijiga-
don. Please make a calendar, that we may know the
days.
Kego wika gcgo gimodiken, ki wabamig sa aw gc-dibakonik.
Never steal anything, because he who will judge thee,
sees thee.
Nin nagadanan oma anind n'ind aiiman ; kcgo awiia o ga-
mamossinan. I leave here some of my things ; let
nobody take them away.
Ambe ijadctj awi-u'nlxindanda ga-ijiwebak BethleJicming.
Let us go, let us see what happened in Bethlehem.
371
Kego babamendansida matchi minawanigosiwin aking, tcki
wanitossiwang iw kagige minawanigasiwin gijigong.
Let us not care for sinful pleasures on earth, lest we lose
that everlasting joy in heaven.
Jingendamog maianadak, sagitoiog odctjjinamog gate went-
jishing ; kego missawendangegon bekanisid odai'nn.
Hate what is evil ; like and accept what is good ; don't
covet the property of another person,
IMoteng o gad-apagitanawan o matchi masinaiganishi-
wan. Let them throw into the fire their bad books.
PARTICIPLES.
PRESENT TENSE, Jau-endagassiiuag waiabandangig waia-
bandameg, nwandangig gale nwandameg. Happy are
those who see what you see, and who hear what you
hear,
Awegiven menotansigwen Kije-Manito od ikitowin, kaivin
geget o sagiassin Kije-Maniton. Whoever does not
like to hear the word of God, he does uot truly love
God.
IMPERFECT TENSE. Kawin nin debwetaivassig winawa
debadodangibanig ejiwebadogwen odenang. I don't believe
those who reported what happened in the village, (or
town.)
Kin waidbandamamban nibiwa maianadak, kego iw ba-
pisli kikinowabandangen. Thou who sawest so many
evil things, do not take any example on those things.
PERFECT TENSE. JVz/z, ga-pisindaman iw gigitowin, nin
igo nin dibddjim ; dcbwetawishig. I who have listened
to that discourse, I do report ; believe me.
Kciwin bekanisidjig da-gagwedjimassiwag ; igiw sa in-
iniivag ga-wabandamogwenag matchi dodamowin, da-
gagwedjimawag . Not others ought to be questioned ;
those men who have seen the ill doing, (as I understood,)
ought to be called.
Jawendagosiwag ga-wabandansigog, anuu-i dash
icetamog. Blessed are they tlmt have not seen, and yet
have believed.
FUTURE TENSE. Ge-mino-ganawendang od anamiewin
ged-ako-bimadisid, l-agini" gijigong fa -debt si. He who
shall keep well his religion (be a good Christian) as long
as he shall live, shall eternally be happy in heaven.
Ow kid inininim kija : Igiw ge-minikwedjig ishkotewabo,
A few Examples in regard
AFFIRMATIVE FORM.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE.
Kawin win gego o wabandqnsin, ogioissan o wabandamim.
He sees nothing, his son sees it.
Kawin winawa o bi-nadissinawan masinaiganan, oshimei-
wan sa o bi-nadimim. They don't come for the books,
their brothers (sisters) come for them.
And so on in all the tenses
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TF.
Kishpin ossan wabandavAmA ga-iji~anokinid, ta-minwcn-
damon. When his father sees how he has worked, he
will be contented.
Kishpin o-nifriigon wabandam'wid minik ga-ojiton\df o gu-
minigon gego. When his prirmts sec how much he lias
done, they will give him something.
373
gv-bonitos$igog gale bishigwadisiwin, kawinwika weuwni
ta-anamiassiwag* I tell you beforehand : Those who
shall drink ardent liquor, and those who shall not aban-
don impurity, will never be good Christians.
Awegwen g€-sagitogwen osam od aiiman waiabamadjin
ketimagisihidjih) kawin-gaie win ta-jawenimassi. Who-
soever shall like too much his things, (be avaricious,)
when he sees a poor person, shall not find charity (mercy)
himself.
to the second third person*
NEGATIVE FORM.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE.
Witt eta o kikendan, kawin ossaieian o kikendansimni. He
only knows it , his brother knows it not.
Winawa geget o sagHonatea anamiewin, kawin dash, onid-
janissiwan o sagitossmim. They truly like religion, but
their children don't like it.
derived from the present.
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE.
Kiskpin ogin odapmansimg iw waboian, win igo o gad-
odapinan. If her mother does not take that blanket,
she will take it herself,
Kiskpin onigiigon gego odapinans'mig, anisha ta-gi-ano-
£z'wan. If his parents take no payment, they shall have
worked for nothing,
24
374
PARTICIPLES.
PRESENT TEN SK.
Mi sa witan waialandamimd]m mojag masinaigan. It is
his brother-in-law that is always reading, (looking in the
book.)
Kawinwin odilendansin iw; omisTiomissan mi iniw dvhcn-
daminidjin. He does not own this ; it is his grandfather
that owns it.
And so in other tenses
VII. CONJUGATION.
In order to accommodate all the verbs of the Otchipwe
language, we must establish three more Conjugations, for
the unipersonal verbs ; (see page 87.) One of these Con-
jugations will be for the unipersonal verbs ending in a
vowel ; the two others will be for those ending in a con-
sonant.
To this VII. Conjugation then belong all the unipersonal
verbs ending in a vowel. This vowel may be a, e, ?, or o.
Here are a few verbs belonging to this Conjugation.
'
Kissind, it is cold, (speaking of the weather.)
Sasagdj it is full of brushes, or underwood.
Jibcia, there are no brushes, no underwood.
[jitiiku'flr, it is called, (sonic in<tnniuit<i object.)
Ijitchigude, it is made, constructed.
Dagomgadei it is mixed with . . .
/r, it is warm. the weather.)
Ate, there is or
375
PARTICIPLES.
PRESENT TENSE.
Mi iniw onidjanissan gego kekendansmigon. This is his
child that knows nothing, (or, these are his children that
know nothing.)
Nibiwa win o dibendan aki ; widjikiweian dash iniw gego
debendansimgon. He owns much land ; it is his friend
(brother) that owns none.
derived from the present.
Odjitchisse, it arrives, (speaking of a certain day or time.)
Dimi, it is deep, (a river, etc.)
Mashkawagami, it is strong, (a liquid.)
Misjcwdgami, it is red, (a liquid.)
Makatew&gami, it is black, (a liquid.)
Dago, there is, it is.
Sogipo, it snows.
To this Conjugation also belong all the verbs which we
call Abundance-verbs, (see p. 87,) which all end in ka,
and are unipersonal. You will find a few of these verbs
on the same page. And some of the in. Numeral verbs,
which have only the plural, ending in wan,
Some verbs of this Conjugation have only the third per-
son singular, as : Kissina, kijate, sogipo, etc. Others
have the third person singular and plural, as : Ijinikade,
ijinikadewan ; ate, attwan, etc.
AFFIRMATIVE FORM. NEGATIVE FORM.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE.
Ijinikade, it is called, Kawin ssinon,
ijinikadewan, they are called, (in. obj.) „ ssinon.
376
IMPERFECT TENSE.
Jjinikadeba.n, it was called, Kawin ssinoban,
ijinikadebwin, they were called, „ ssinobanin.
Form the remaining tenses of the indicative after these
two, as : Gi-ijinikade, . . . Gi-ijinikadcban, . . . Ta-
ijinikade, . . . Ta-gi-ijinikade, . . .
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE.
Kislipin ijinikadeg, if it is called, ssinog,
,, ijinikadeg, if they are called, ssinog.
PERFECT TENSE.
„ ..... T , ( because it has been called, )
Gi-ijMadtg, h ssmog.
PLUPERFECT TENSE.
had it been called, > . .,
ssmogiban.
The future, tenses are to be formed after the present, as :
Gcd-ijinikadeg, . . . Qt-gi-ijinikadeg, . . .
The two tenses of the conditional mood are to be
formed after the present and perfect tenses of the indica-
tive, as : Da-ijinik<uu', it would be called, .... Da-gi-
ijinikade, it would have been called, . . .
I MPERATIVE MOOD.
Ta-ijinikade, be it called, let it be called, ssinon.
ta-ijinikade\vzn, let them be called, ssinon.
377
PARTICIPLES.
PRESENT TENSE.
Ejinikadeg, called, (which is called,) ssinog,
pjinikadegin, called, (which are called,) ssinogin,
IMPERFECT TENSE.
Ejinikadegiba.il, which was called, ssinogiban,
ejinikadegibamn, which were called, ssinogibanin.
Form the remaining tenses of these participles after the
above two, as : Ga-ijinikadcr/, which has been called, . . .
Ga-ijinikadeban, which had been called, . . . Gcd-ijini-
nadeg, which will be called, etc.
VII. DUBITATIVE CONJUGATION.
AFFIRMATIVE FORM. NEGATIVE FORM.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE.
Ijinikadedog, it is perhaps called, ssinodog,
iji7iikadcdogenan, they are perhaps called, ssinodogenan,
(inanimate objects,)
IMPERFECT TENSE.
Ijinikadegobzn, it was called, (they say,) ssinogoban,
ijinikadegob&nm, they were called, (they s.) ssinogobanin.
Form the remaining tenses of this mood after the above
two, as : Gi-ijinikadedog, . . . Gi-ijinikadegoban, . . .
Ged-ijinikadedog, . , ,
378
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE.
Gonima ejinikadegwen, whether it is Gonima ssinogwen,
called,
„ ejinikadegwen, whether they „ ssinogwen.
are called,
PERFECT TENSE.
( whether it has been \
< called,
( whether they have b.
Ga-ijinakadegwen, -J called, > ssinogwen.
">. c. )
PLUPERFECT TENSE.
if it had been called,
{if it had been called, \
if they had been > ssinogobanen,
called, j
Form the future tenses after the present, as: Ged-ij'ini-
Jcadegwen, etc.
PARTICIPLES.
PRESENT TENSE.
Ejinikadegwen, which is probably called, ssinogwen,
ejinikadegwena.nt which are probab. called, ssinogwenan,
IMPERFECT TENSE.
.E/tni&adegobanen, which was probably ssinogobanen,
called,
e/im&adegobanenan, which were pro. c. ssinogobanenan.
Form the other two tenses of these dubitative participles
after the above two.
379
EXAMPLES ON THE WHOLE VII. CONJUGATION.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE. Adopowin ijinikade ow ; onow dash
apabiwinan ijinikadeivan. This is called a table ; and
these are called chairs, (or benches.)
Kitchi sogipo nongom, kawin dash anawi kissinassinon.
It snows much to-day, but it is not very cold.
Nopiming atedog ki wagakwad ; ki makisinan dash ka-
win wedi atessinodogenan. I think thy axe is in the woods ;
but thy shoes, I think, are not there.
IMPERFECT TENSE. Oma ateban jtba nin masinaigan, nij
gate nin mokomanan oma atebanin ; awegwen ga-bi-ma-
mogwen. My book was here this morning, and my two
knives also were here ; 1 don't know who came and
took them.
Awdss nibinong kawin sasagassinoban oma ; nongom
dash apitchi sasaga misiwe. The summer before last
there was no underwood here ; but now there is very
much underwood everywhere.
PERFECT TENSE. Gi-kitchi-kijatepitchinago gi-bimosseidng;
kawin dash awassonago gi-kijdtessinon. It has been
very warm yesterday, when we walked ; but it has not
been warm the day before yesterday.
Pangi eta oma gi-sogipo ; nibiwa dash wadjiwing gi-
sogipodog. It has snowed here only a little ; but on the
mountains, I suppose, it has snowed much.
PLUPERFECT TENSE. Gi-apitchi-dteban kid ishkotemiwa
bwa bi-madjaidn. Your fire had been quite out, before
I started to come here.
Kawin gwetch gi-sogipossinoban bibonong bwa Nild-
anamiegijigak. Last winter it had not much snowed
before Christmas-day.
380
FUTURE TENSE. Waiba ow wdkaigan ta-bigobjrfj..
bekanak dash namifrh mctrluig tfrtjitckigtufo. T\\\^
house will soon be taken down, and another one larger
than this will be constructed.
Kawin ta-wcblnigade&sinon ow irugakii'ad^ ta-nttuditclit-
gadc dash, ginwenj dash kelabi ta-onijiskin. This axe-
will not be thrown away, but it will be repaired, and will
be useful )«et a long time.
Pindlgadoiog nibiwa missdn; ta-idssmodgg tibikml ;
(ta-kissiiitlbikad.} Bring in much wood; I think it will
be cold to-night,
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE. Kawin weweni anokis&im, &*•£/>//:
kijatcg ; kawin gale mino bimossessim, kishpin. ^o^ifio^
kabe-gijig. One does not work well when it is too
warm ; and one does not travel well when it is snowing
all day.
Kishpin pangi eta bodairadi'^ kijapikisigamng, ]*nbig<
kitclii kijide oma pindig* When a little fire only is mwlr-
in the stove, it is immediately very warm in this room.
Endogwen degonigadessinegwen ishkotewabo oma mixh*
iminabong. I don't know whether there is no ardent
liquor mixed with this cider.
PERFECT TENSE. Anamikodading gi~odj\Ukissegt ///
gn-witltamtiir ixhkinitrli. AVlicn New Year's day was
arrived, (on New Year's day,)! have seen him the last
time.
*Gi-sancr«frd gajialxttrh winisshitf bibnnnng, nridjim.
giri'tr.h gi-(ifi's>tnn<rii'rn. It has ])robably been distrfssiiiL:
on the island last, winter, because there have not been
many provisions there, 1 thiuk.
Note, p. 97,
381
Osam gi-kissinag kabe-gijig, mi ba-ondji-ijassigwen.
He did probably not come, because it has been so cold
all day.
PLUPERFECT TENSE. Gwaiak ganawendjigadcgiban H
kitiganiwa, kawin pijikiwag da-gi-pindigessiwag. Had
your field been well guarded, (taken care of,) cattle
would not have come in.
~\Vcweni ijibiigadcssinogiban ki masinaigan, kawin nin
da-girnissitawinansin. Had thy letter not been written
well, (distinctly,) I would not have been able to read it.
FUTURE TENSE, j^niniwapi ged-odjitchisseg Pak ? — Mi
api ged-ixlikwa-soiTipogwcn. When will Easter be, (ar-
rive ?) — I suppose it will cease snowing at that time.
Aniniwapi ged-ishkwa-^tteg maianadak oma aking ? —
Cfi-ishkwa-akiwang sa. When shall no more evil be on
earth ? — When earth shall be no more.
CONDITIONAL MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE. Akosiwin, nibowin gaie kawin da-atessi-
non, kishpin batadowin atessinog. There would be no
sickness and no death, if there be no sin.
Da-kit chi-kijote nongom, kishpin nodinsinog. — Da~gijl-
gate nongom tibikak, kishpin mijakwak, (mijakwanitibi-
kak.) It would be very warm to-day if there be no wind,
— It would be light this night, if there be clear weather.
PERFECT TENSE. Mewija onow wakaiganan da-gi-sakidc-
imn, kakina da-gi-tchagidcwan, oma aiassiwamban,
These houses would have caught fire long ago, and
would have all burnt down, had I not been here.
Kawin maslikossiwan da-gi-debissessinon kabe-bib&n>
bcjig pijiki nissassiwindiban. Hay would not have been
sufficient all winter3 had one of the oxen not been
killed.
382
mhw dodamoii'innn ja'igwa, da-
oma odnuing, nond nibossigobfrtl aw inini
mino-gagikimad oma enamianidjin. Many good works
would have been seen here in the village, were that
man not dead so soon, who exhorted so well these
Christians.
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
Wewib ta—bosidjigadewan nind aihnan,ninwi-madja. Let
ray things be shipped immediately, I'll go away.
Kcgo ta-bodawadessinon^ kawin sa kissina$8inofrt abawa
ja'igwa. Let no fire be made, it is not cold, the weather
is already mild.
PARTICIPLES.
PRESENT TENSE. Minik fjibiigadeg Kijc-Manito o ma-
sinaiganing, apitchi dcbwewinagad. All that is written
in the Bible, (in God's book,) is parfectly true.
Kakina aking cteg kawin nin babamendansin, mckuvnd-
amdnin minik gijigong endagog* For all that is on
earth I don't care, as soon (or, as often) as I remember
what is in heaven.
IMPERFECT TENSE. Wcgoncn iw cndagogobanen kitchi
kitiganing, ga-daji-bimadisiwad nit tun dnishindbeg /
What is that that was (or, what was) in tlie great garden,
(Paradise,) where the first men lived 1
Pitchinago kakina nind aiinurn tnis'iire cttgibtnitl nin
gi-mawandjitoiuin ; nongom ururni nin, wi.-ganawenda-
nan. Yesterday I gathered all my things together, that
were scattered about ; I will now well take care of them.
PERFECT TENSE. Mi mandan masinaignn g(t-<ipitchi-son-
gitrhigadcg ; kawin awila o ga-bigobidossin. This is
' See Remark I, p. 130.
i 383
the document which has been so much strengthened ;
nobody shall break it, (make it void.)
jVin bidon kakina ga-ishkwasseg gi-ojitoian ki baoisi-
kawagan. I bring all that has remained when I have
been making thy coat.
PLUPERFECT TENSE. Iw assini-ajogan mewija nawatch ga-
ojitchigadegobanen, kawin mashi nin wabandansin.
That stone bridge which had been constructed (built) a
considerable time ago, I have not seen it yet.
Nongom pitchinag nin nondamin iw wenijishing ikitowin,
wika mashi ga-wawindjigadessinogiban oma. Now only
we hear that excellent word, (doctrine,) which never had
been announced here before.
FUTURE TENSE. Anin iw minik ge-debisseg ? — Namandj
minik ge-debissegwen. How much will be enough 1 — I
don't know how much shall be enough.
Minik nongom metchi-dodameg gimodj, mi iw kakina
ge-kikendjigadeg dibakonigc-gijigak. All that you are
doing now wrong, secretly, that will all be known on the
day of judgment.
Some Examples in regard to the second third person, ex-
pressed by an inanimate object.
\Vawiiatan ijinikadeni odena endanisid; kawin bakan
ijinikadessimni. The city where he lives, is called De-
troit, it is not called otherwise.
Gagikwe-masinaiganan ijinikadcmw&n o masinaiganan,
kawin bakan ijinikadessinim\va.n. His books are called
sermon-books, they are not called otherwise.
Kishpin bakan ijinikademg ow od aiim; kishpingaie onow
od aiiman bakan ijinikademg, (or, ijinikademg\\)im%)
Id da-windamon. If this his property (his thing,) be
called otherwise ; and if these his things be called
otherwise, I would tell thee.
384
K if/i pin lidkan ijiiukadesainiftig on* <>d (/iim, kithpin gait
onow od annum bak-aii ijinikadessiniwg, ki ^/-r/nW.
If this his thing be not called otherwise, and if these
his things be not called otherwise, thou hast told the
truth.
VIII. CONJUGATIOX.
To this Conjugation belong all the ttnipersoiltd verb.-
ending in ad, as :
A, it is difficult, hard, disagreeable ; dear, high in
prce.
Wtnipanad, it is easy ; cheap.
, it. is bad, wrong, malicious.
j there is dew on the ground.
Auakwad, it is cloudy.
Mijakwad, the weather is fair, clear, no clouds.
Etc. etc.
Xotc. The verbs of the preceding Conjugation become
often verbs of this VIII. Conjugation, by taking the termi-
nation ma gad t which does not alter at all their significa-
tion, as :
l\ijatct it is warm weather : kijdtemagad,
A'/'W/w, it is cold 'weather : kissindmagad,
Sogipo, it sno\\> : sogipomagad,
, it is birr, large ; initrhanuiiiddi
i, it i- small, narrow; agdssamagad.
To this Conjugation ;ils<» brNnig the iterxoni fifing verbs
of the second kind, (see p. ?*:>,) \\hicli are formed by add-
ing nwi!f/r/ \u the third person singular, present, indicative,
385
of verbs belonging to the I. II. and III. Conjugations. (See
Examples of these verbs on the same page.)
Note. Some verbs of this Conjugation have only the
third person singular ; others have the plural also.
Here is the paradigm of a verb of the VIII. Conjugation.
AFFIRMATIVE FORM. NEGATIVE FORM.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE.
Sanagad, it is difficult ; dear, Kawin ssinon,
sanagadon, they are dear, (man. obj.) „ ssinon,
IMPERFECT TENSE.
Sanagadoban, it was difficult ; dear, Kawin ssinoban,
sanagadobamn, they were dear ; diff. ,, ssinobanin.
The remaining tenses of the indicative mood are formed
after the above two, as : Gi-sanagad, . . . Gi-sanagado-
ban, . . . Ta-sanagad, . . . Etc.
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
PRESFNT TENSE.
Sanagak, because it is (they are) diff. . . ssinog.
PERFECT TENSE.
Gi-sdnagak, because it has been (they have ssinog.
been) diff. . .
PLUPERFECT TENSE.
, {
386
The future tenses are formed after the present : as : (it •
sanagak, . . . etc.
Form the two tenses of the conditional mood after the
present and perfect of the indicative, prefixing da-, to
the verb.
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
Ta-sanagad, be it diff. ; dear, Kego ssinon,
ta-sanagadon, let them be dear, " ssinon.
PARTICIPLES.
PRESENT TENSE.
Senagak, something difficult ; dear, ssinog,
senagak'm, things dear ; diff'. ssinogin.
IMPERFECT TENSE.
, that was difficult ; dear, ssinogiban,
iii, things that were diff. . . ssinogibanin.
Form the remaining tenses of these participles after
these two; as: Ga-sanagak, . . . etc.
VIII. DUBITATIVE CONJUGATION.
AFFIRMATIVE FORM. NEGATIVE FORM.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE.
Sanagadodog, it is perhaps Kawin ssinodog,
diff. ; dear,
387
scwagadodogenan, they are " ssinodogenari,
perh. dear,
IMPERFECT TENSE.
t it was perh. diff. . . T^
, | they w£re perh ^ ^ Kawm ssmogoban,
Form the remaining tenses of the indicative after these
two.
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE.
Gonima senagadogwen, whether it Gonima ssinogwen,
is dear ; diff. . .
senagadogwen, whether ssinogwen,
they are dear ; diff. .
PERFECT TENSE.
( whether it has been diff. .
Ga-sanagadogweu, { , , , , ssinogwen, ,
PLUPERFECT TENSE.
I if it had been dear,
\ if they had been dear, ssinog°banen,
Form the future tenses after the above present ; as : Gc-
sanagadogwen, etc. . .
PARTICIPLES.
PRESENT TENSE.
Senagadogwen, that is perh. ssinogwen,
dear ; diff. . .
sewagadogwenan, that are ssinogwenan,
perh. dear,
KB
•3SM3X J.D3JH3JKI
Scnagadogobtinen, a thing ssinogobanen,
that was peril, diff.;
st'AZrtifadogobancnan, things ssinogobanenan,
that were perh. dear.
The other tenses of these participles are to be formed
after these two; as : Gk-s&hdgadogwen, etc, . .
Some Examples in regard to the second third person, ez~
pressed by an inanimate
Sanagadim od anokiwin. Kaurin girclch sanagaKiuiu'i,
mud inniflinu. His work is hard, (difficult.) It is not
very hard, I think.
Sanagadttniwah aw atateevfinmi od a //man. O waboianan
kturin gwetch sanagtissittinvtian. The goods (or things)
of this trader are dear. His blankets are not very dear.
Missawa sanagad'mig od r//.v;.v ///•///, urunii od wlajrindti.
Although his sickness be difficult, (painful,) he accepts
it well, (he takes it with resignation.)
Kishpin (txani sanagadiiiig od anokiurinan, hair in Jcakina o
{rff-irijifottiHtiH. If his works are too difficult, he will not
do them all.
Kishpin sanagasswiriig bi}i><i.<.« //•///, irnbntm fn-thiff-u'ifi/iin.
If walking is not difficult, he will arrive to-morrow.
Kishi>in sanagass'mwig air <it<un-winini <> babtsikatoaga-
nan, 'nih'nra, o gad-atawenCLYi, If this trader's coats are
not too dear, he will sell many.
Senagad\\\\£ (inol:(i(lji^<iii nin gi-wabandamavM nongom;
CscTmgtfssininig.) I havi- srcn to-day his dear (valuable)
merchandise; (not dear.)
Senagadinigin od aiinnin <min<l o gi-tcanitonan ; (swaga-
ssininigin.) Hi; has lost some of his dear (valuable)
things; (riot dear.)
389
IX. CONJUGATION.
To this Conjugation belong the unipersonal verbs ending
in an, or in ; as :
Onijishin, it is fair, handsome; good, useful; (an inani-
mate object.)
Ndngan, it is light, not heavy.
Kosigwan, it is heavy.
Biwan, the snow is driven by the wind.
Mikanawan, there is a road, a trail.
Nibiwan, it is wet, (a piece of clothing, etc.)
Songan, it is strong.
Nodin, it blows, it is windy.
Anwatin, it is calm, there is no wind.
Pangissin, it falls, (an in. object.)
Gaslikadin, it freezes over, (a lake, or river, etc.)
Mashkawadin, it freezes, (any in. obj.)
To this Conj. also belong some of the in. Numeral verbs,
ending in the plural in non.
Note. Some verbs of this Conj. are used only in the
third person singular ; and some have also the third person
plural.
25
390
Here follows the paradigm of one of these verbs.
AFFIRMATIVE FORM. NEGATIVE FORM.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE.
Onijishin, it is fair, good, useful, Kawin sinon,
onijishinon, they are good, (in. obj.) " sinon.
IMPERFECT TENSE.
Oni/'is/imoban, it was fair, good, Kawin sinoban,
onijishinoba.mn, they were good, " sinobanin,
Form after the present and the imperfect, the remaining
tenses of the indicative mood; as : Gi-onijishint . . . 6rt-
onijishinoban, . . . Ta-onijishin, . . . etc.
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE.
Onijishing, because it is (they are) sinog,
fair,
PERFECT TENSE.
Gi-onijisliing, because it has been sinog,
(they have been) fair,
PLUPERFECT TENSE.
391
Form the future tenses after the above present ; as : Ged-
oniiisfying, etc, . . .
And form the conditional mood after the indicative.
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
Taronijishin, let it be fair, good, Kego sinon,
ta-onijishinon, let them be fair, good, " sinon,
PARTICIPLES.
PRESENT TENSE.
Wenijishing) what is fair, good, sinog,
wenijishingiH) things that are fair, sinogin.
IMPERFECT TENSE.
TFeni/istegiban, a thing that was fair, sinogiban,
wenijiskingibsiiim, things that were sinogibanin,
fair,
Form after these two,. all the other tenses of these par»
ticiples ; as : Ga-onijishing, . . . Ga-onijishingiban, . . .
Ged'onijis king, etc. . . .
IX. DUBITATIVE CONJUGATION.
AFFIRMATIVE FORM. NEGATIVE FORM,
INDICATIVE MOOD.
Onijishino&og, it is perhaps fair, good, l£ditiin sinodojg,
o?u;Vs/«wodogenan, they are perh. fair, " ssinodogenan,
(in. obj.)
392
IMPERFECT TENSE.
OayisAmogoban, { JjJJji {J£; } Kawin sinogoban,
Form after these two tenses, all the others of the indica-
tive.
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE.
Wcnijishinogwen, whether it is (they are) sinogwen,
fair,
PERFECT TENSE.
Ga-onijishinogvien, whether it has (they sinogwen.
have) been good,
PLUPERFECT TENSE.
Omjis/tiwogobanen, if it (they) had been sinogobanen,
fair, good,
Form the future tenses after the above present.
PARTICIPLES.
PRESENT TENSE.
WenyisAinogwen, a thing that is perhaps sinogwen,
good,
weni/isAiwogwenan, things that are perh. sinogwenan,
good,
IMPERFECT TENSE.
lyenytsAtnogobanen, a thing that was p. sinogobanen,
good,
weni;'isAinogobanenan,things that were . . sinogobanenan.
Form the remaining tenses of these participles after the
above two; as: Ga-onijishinogwen, etc. . .
393
A few Examples in regard to the second third person, ex-
pressed by an inanimate object.
Onijishimm o babasikawagan, o wiwakwan eta kawin oni-
jishinsmim. His coat is nice, (good,) but his hat is not
nice.
Onijishimmwya o maJcissinan, o waboianan dash kawin
om/VsAwsininiwan. His shoes are good, (fine,) but his
blankets are not good.
Kishpin onijishin'mig od anokiwin, weweni ta-dibaamawa.
If his work is good, (fair,) he will be well paid.
Kishpin ode onijishins'mimg, kawin gaie od ikitowinan ta-
onijishinsimmw^n. If his heart is not good, (clean,)
neither will his words be good, (fair.)
Missawa onijishin'mig kakina o masinaiganan, kawin
gwetch o wabandansinan. Although his books are good,
(useful,) he does not much read them, (look into them.;
Kishpin onijishins'mimg od ikitowinan, kawin gaie ode bi-
nassinini. If his words are not decent, neither is his
heart clean.
WenijisJunmig o kitiganens o gi-atawen, (wenijishinsin-
inig.^ He has sold his fine garden, (not fine.)
O kitchi sagitonan wenijishinimgm o masinaiganan ;
, (wenijishins'migm.) He likes very much his fine (use-
ful) books; (not fine.)
EXAMPLES ON THE VIII. AND IX. CONJUGATIONS.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENTE. Nin ndbikawagan nokendagwad, nm
bimiwanan dash ndngan ; ikito Debendjiged. My yoke
is sweet, and my burden is light ; says the Lord.
Ml
na iw wcjitoian 1 Kawin sanagasslnon. Is
that difficult what thou art doing ? No, it is not diffi-
cult.
Batamadon nin masmaiganan, kakina «aie onijishinon.
My books are many, and they are all good.
Manadadodog nitniidiwin. — E^gwaiak manadad, £(•<;<(
gagibadad, matrlii jjiwcbad. I think dancing is Bad. —
Yes, it is certainly bad, it is very lascivious, it is evil.
IMPERFECT TENSE. Onijishinoban keiabi nin masinaigun
ga-icanitoian, oskkinagwadoban. The book that 1 have
lost, was good yet, it appeared like new.
Sana^adolxni BtM&4*U&M0^g, nopimin« ffi-bn-ms7iii(i/if> .
It was hard (difficult) last winter, when we wintered in
the woods.
Nodinoban nay omn '. gi-bitn ifJikairg ? Kairin "irrtcli m •-
dintinolxin. Did it Mow when you passed by here (in a
canoe) ? No, it did not blow much.
PERFECT TENTE. Gi-Kitchi-niskaddtl pitchinago kabr-
gijiti; ; tibiltong gafo Kffbe'tibik gtyimiiibart. It has been
bad weather yesterday all day; and last night it has
rained all night.
(;/->i>(ttch/-/jiwcb(idofl(>x odmnng; anotrh nin nondauiin.
I think that bad things have happened, in the village : we
hear different reports.
Gi-mt'idjii<i*sin na nabikwan tiliikong ? ]\<urijt $ i-ma d-
jiiassin.iino-n : keiabi sa agwinckmtogdd. lias th<- \
Bailed last night? No, she has not sailed ; she is yet lying
there.
PLUPERFECT TENSE. Gi-gashkadinciban ow sagaigan, bwa
f/fnririxhin(<n« tuna ; kakinn. ffttir nibiirnn gi-g*shkadi»-
dbdiiin ; kitchigdiM dtisli Jcawin givgashkaeKiurinebGn
lira/)/. This little lake had been fro/en over, before we
came here; and all the rivers had been fro/en; but the
great lake had not been frozen by that time.
395
Api kin degwishinan,ja'igwa gi-ishkwa-kitimagadoban ;
geget waieshkat gi-kitimagad oma. When thou arrivedst,
the hard poor times had passed by ; in the beginning
there was great poverty here.
FUTURE TENSE. Wdwa ta-sigwan, ta-jagigamiwan, nab-
ikwanan dash ta-bagamassinon, ishkote-nabikwan gaie
ta-bidjibidcmagad. Spring will soon set in, the ice will
clear out, and vessels will arrive, and a steamboat will
come in.
Kawin wabang ta-gimiwansinon, ta-awdnodog kabe-gi-
jig. It will not rain to-morrow, but it will probably be
foggy all day.
Bodadjiganan ta-nondagwadon dibakonige-gijigak. Gc-
get ta-sanagad 'iwapi, tdrldtchi-liotagendagwad . Trump-
ets will be heard on the day of judgment. It will be
hard indeed at that time, it will be very distressful.
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE. Apcgish mijakwak, inendam awiia ;
minawa dash bejig : apcgish kimiwang, inendam. Anin
dash ged-i/iwebakioan 1 One person thinks : I wish it
would be clear weather ; another again thinks : I wish it
would rain. Now how should it be ?
Missawa sogipomairalc, kitclii niskadak gaie, potch nin
wi-madja. Even if it snows, and if the weather is very
bad, I will still depart.
Kitchl aiekosim bimosseng, kishpin osam abawag, jaka-
gonagag gaie. A person is very much tired by walking,
when the weather is too mild and the snow soft.
PERFECT TENSE. Nin migwctcldivendam gi-dawishinoma-
gassinog k'itchi akosiivin oma cndanakiiang. I am thank-
ful that the great sickness, (plague, epidemic,) has not
come hero where we live.
396
Sigwanong wctiba nin gi-bimishkamin, waiba gi-jagig-
am twang. Last spring we have traveled soon in canoes,
(boats, etc.,) because the ice has cleared out soon.
Gi-wcndak apitchi anokadjigan, mi sa nibiwa ga-ondji-
gislip'madoidn. I have bought much, because merchan-
dise has been so cheap.
PLUPERFECT TENSE. Osam sanagassinogiban bimossewin,
mino gijigakiban gaie, pitchinago nin dtL-gi-dagw&Mn-
imin. Had walking not been so difficult, and had the
weather been fair, we would have arrived yesterday. .
Mimvanimakiban, kimiwansinogiban gaie,jcba kida-gi-
bosimin. Had the wind been fair, and had it not rained,
we would have embarked this morning.
FUTURE TENSE. Sigwang mi ap'i ge-kitchi-sanagadogwen
oma, kiwe. Namdndj gcd-ijiwebadogwen. Next spring,
they say, it will be distressful here. I don't know what
shall happen.
Aniniwapi ge-madjissemagak kid anonigosiwin 1 Niss-
ogwana-gak mi api gc-madjisseg. When will the time of
thy employment begin ? In three days it will begin.
Kawin nin hikendansin api ged-odjitchissemagak nin
nibowin. I do not know when the time of my death
shall come.
CONDITIONAL MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE. Da-kitchi-sanagad kakina gego, kishpin
bejig eta atawiwinini oma aiad. Every thing would be
very dear, if there be only one merchant here.
Kawin bapish da-minwendagwassinon oma, gcget da-
kitchi-kashkendagwad, kislipin kin madjaian. It would
not be agreeable at all here, it would be very sad indeed,
if thou shouldst go away from here.
PEEFECT TENSE. la'igwa da-gi-jagigamiwan nongom ; osam
397
dash anwatin, kawin wika nodinsinon. The ice would
already have gone away now ; but it is too calm, it never
blows
Da-gi-beshowad anamiewigamig, oma wakaigeiangoban.
The church would have been near, had we built our
house here.
Kawin da-gi-ijiwcbassinon, omi aiaidmban. It would
not have happened had I been here.
Mewija da-gi-onijishin mangiji, nawdtcli wdiba dagwish-
ingiban aw inlni. All would have been well (right)
here long ago, had that man come here sooner.
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
Ta-wasseiamagad. gi-ikito Debeniminang Kije-Manito ;
mi dash ga-iji-wasseiamagak. Let there be light, said
our Lord God ; and there was light.
Kego osam ta-sanagassinon kid aiiman,manota-wendadon;
nin gi-ina atawewinini. Let your goods not be too dear,
let them be cheap ; said I to the merchant.
PARTICIPLES.
PRESENT TENSE. Pindigeiog egassadeiamagak ishkwan-
deming, tchi mikameg kagige minawanigosiwin. Go in
through the narrow gate, to find joy everlasting.
Kakina gego maianadak, keshkendagwak gaie, atemagad
oma aking ; gijigong dash aiapitchi-mimvendagwak eta
dagomagad. All that is evil, and all that causes sorrow,
is here on earth ; but in heaven is only that which gives
the greatest contentment, (joy.)
Ojindan kakina wenijishinsinogin ikitowinan. Shun all
words that are not fair, (indecent.)
IMPERFECT TENSE. Kakina gego wenijishinsinogiban nin
398
gi-bonitomin nmiffom. All that was not good, (not fair,)
we have given it up now.
Kitchi nibiwa anokadjigan^ own atatD&wigamigonQ etcm-
agedogobanen, gi-4chftgitfemagad tibikong. A jjreat many
goods that were in this store, (as I understood,) have
burnt down last night.
PERFECT TENSE. Kcgo debwetangegon iir Ixtlxnnadji-
mowin ga-daavjisJiinomagak onui. Believe not the re-
port that has been brought here.
fvegotogwen ga-ijiwebadogwen ; gonimq la-inatchi-inak-
finiignd. 1 don't know what may have happened; per-
haps we will hear bad news.
Ki gi-gishpin&dvtfatn i;c papdgiwaiahan ga-apitchi-wtn-
dakin? J I ast thou bought the shirts that have been so
very cheap?
PLUPERFECT TENSE, Ki gi-wabandpnawa IKI kitclii anam-
icH'i & t)n iff g(t-ritrfrib(in O/IKI hu-« wkit/rg adcmi ! Have
you seen the large church that was here, before
the town burnt down ?
Eko-aiamagak anamicirin oma, n'ni wabandamin, irika
ga^wdbandjigadessinogiban OHIO ; -nin u<»i(/<iniin gait1,
ir i lea tuna ^(i-iiondd^LiiKi^d^^ino^ibun ga'mt. Since reli-
gion is in this place, we see, what never had been seen
here before; and we hear, what never before had been
heard here.
FUTURE TT.NSE. Nttbikwaning^ -nit. 'atriassinog-
7f'cii xi^ ir-fiii!!, mi iniH gc-bosii&fl. 1 will embark in the
vessel, which shall first arrive here next spring.
l\i'ji> missctwepidanccgcn dun in- in wctiba t,
liandawenaamo'g <l<i*h iir irileti g&-fya?iad(i$sinog
gijiffinig. !><>n't Avish for (<T covet) riclies that will soon
decay, (perish:) but seek those riches ill heaven, which
never will decay, ( perish.)
aw
399
dash ki tchitchag wika ge-nibossig, kawin ki babameni-
massi. Thou takest too much care of thy body, which
will soon die ; but of thy soul which never will die, thou
dost not take any care.
SECOND FUTURE TENSE. Dibakonige-gijigak kakina ta-
kikendjigade, minik ge-gi-ijiivcbak oma aking. On the
day of judgment all will be known that shall have hap-
pened here on earth.
Kakina ge-gi-kddjigademagak nongom aking, wedi miji-
shd ta-nagwad. All that shall have been hid now on
earth, will appear there openly.
DEFECTIVE VERBS.
Defective verbs are called ^hose which are not used in
all the moods, tenses and persons of common verbs. There
are some defective verbs in the Otchipwe language; as;
Iwa, he (she, it) says, (inquit.)
Iwiban, he (she, it) said.
Iwtbanig, they said.
Gi-iwa, he (she, it) has said.
This is all I ever heard of this verb. There is another
defective, and also irregular verb, which is somewhat more
complete than the above. In the following paradigm are
exhibited the moods, tenses and persons, which are com-
monly used of this verb. It has several significations ; it
signifies : I do, I am, I conduct myself, etc.
400
AFFIRMATIVE FORM.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE.
Nind ind, I do, I am,
kid ind,
(dij ino, he (she it) is,
ino, it is, (in. object,)
nind indimin, (nin dunin,)
kid indim, (ki dim,)
dowag,
NEGATIVE FORM.
Kawin nind indissi, or : Kawin nin dissi,
" kid indissi, I " ki dissi,
11 dissi, " dissi,
nind indissimin,
kid indissim,
dissiwag,
nin dissimin,
ki dissim,
dissi wag.
PERFECT TENSE.
(No affirmative.)
Kawin nin gi-dissi, I have not done, been,
Etc., as above.
FUTURE TENSE.
(No affirmative.)
Kawin nin ga-dissi, (kawin nin ga-wi-dissi,)
Etc., after the present tense.
401
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE.
Tchi diidn, that I do, be,
" diian,
" (did, digid ;) ing, (bata-digid,)
" diidng, (bata-diidng,)
" diiang, (bata-diiang,)
" dileg, (bata-diieg,)
" dowa'l, (bata-dowad.)
Tchi dissiwan,
dissiwan,
dissig,
'dissiwdng,
diss'iwang,
dissiweg,
*' dissigwa.
PERFECT TENSE.
Gi-diian, because I have been, done, etc.
Etc., after the above present tense.
Gi-dissiwdn, because I have not been, etc.
FUTURE TENSE.
Ge-diian, that I shall do, be, etc.
Ge-dissiwdn, that I shall not do, be, etc.
Etc., after the present tense.
402
PARTICIPLES.
PRESENT TENSE.
Nin endiian* I who do, who am,
kin endiian, thou who dost, who art,
win endid, (endigidj he (she, it) who
iw eng> it which is, (in. obj.)
ninawind endiidng, > who
kinawmd enduang, )
kinawa cndiicg, you who do, are,
winawa cndidjig they who do, arc, etc.
Nin cndissiwan I who was not, etc.,
kin endissiwan, thou who wast not,
win endissig, he who . . .*
ninawind endissiwdng, > we W^Q
kinawind endissiwang, )
kinawa endissiwcg, you who do, are,
winawa endissigog, ihey who do, are, etc.
PERFECT TENSE.
Nin ga-diidn, I who have been, done,
kin ga-diian,
win ga-flid, (ga-fligid,)
iw ga-ing, it that has been, (in. obj.)
Nin ga-dissiwdnt I who have not done,
kin ga-dissiioan, thou who, etc. . .
Etc., after the />/'(.« '/if tense.
FUTURE TENSE.
Nin irr-fliiun, I who shall be, do, etc.,
kinge-diian, thou who shall do, etc.,
•See /if mark at the end of thii paradigm.
403
win ge-digid, (ge-did,)hQ (she, it) who . . .
iwge-ing, it that shall be, (in. obj.)
Nin ge-dissiwan, I who shall not be, do,
kin ge-dissiwan^ thou who, etc. . .
Etc., after the above present tense.
•
Here are some of the most common cases of Change in
this defective verb.
PRESENT TENSE.
Mi endiidn, it is thus I am, I do, I behave,
mi endiian, it is thus thou art, thou art so,
mi end id,
mi e >ig, it is thus it is, it is so,
mi tirifUidng, (ninawind,} )
mi endiiang, (kinawind,) )
mi end ii eg,
mi endowad, if is thus they are, they do so, etc.,
Endiidnin* when I am so, when I do so, etc.,
endiianin, when thou art so, etc.;
endidjin,
end'tidngon, (endiiangon, )
endiiegon,
endowadjin,
PERFECT TENSE.
Mi ga- diian, it is thus I have done, I have been, etc.,
mi ga-diian,
mi ga-did, (ga-digid,)
miga-ing, it was thus it happened, it has been so, etc.,
mi ga-diiang,
mi ga-diiang,
mi ga-dowad, so they have been, done, etc.,
* See Remark at the end of this paradigm.
404
FUTURE TENSE.
Mi gc-diidn, it is thus I shall be, so I will do,
mi ge-diian,
mi ge-digid, (gc-did,)
mi ge-ing, it is thus it shall happen, it will be so, or, be it
so, (in the impcr. mood,) (ainsi soit-il.)
Remark. The prefix en in endiidn, cndiian, etc., is only
an effect of the Change; (see p. 130.) It is omitted in
compositions ; as : Ga-diidn, ge-diidn ; nin baiata-diian,
I a sinner ; baiatd-digid, a sinner ; baiata-didjiy, sinners,
etc. The end-syllable in, mcndiianin, etc., is likewise an
effect of the Change, in another case ; (see pages 139. and
140.)
Here are some specimens of the Dubitative of this defec-
tive verb.
Endowdnen, I don't know how I am, how I do, etc.,
endowancn, how thou art, etc.,
e.ndogwen, how he (she, it) does, etc.,
endowangen, > „ h d b h
endowangen, }
endou-cgwen, " how you are, do, ...
endowagwen, " how they are, behave, etc.
Endogobanen, how he (she, it)was, did,
cndowagobanen, how they did, were, etc.,
Ga-dowdncn, how I have been, how I h. done,
ga-dowanen, how thou hast been, etc.,
ga-dogwen, how he, . . .
ga-inogwen, how it has been, (in. obj.)
ga-dowdngent how we have been, etc.
Etc. . .
Ge-dowancn, how I shall be, how I will do, etc.,
ged-inogwen, how it shall be, how it will happen,
ge-dowdngen} how we shall be, how we will do, behave, etc.
Etc.
405
A few Examples on the Defective Verbs.
Wabang nin wi-madja, kitclii ginwenj dash nin gad-inend,
iwd. He says ; I will depart (start) to-morrow, and will
be absent very long.
Ki gi-wabama na ? nind ano gagwedjima. — Kairin ki wi-
windamossinon, iwd dash. I ask him indeed : Hast
thou seen him 1 but he says : I will not tell thee.
Nin ga-gosimin wabang ; iwibanig pitchinago. They said
yesterday : We will move to-morrow.
Wegonen ga-ikltod awishtoia 1 — Nin gad-ojiton wagakwad;
gi-iivd sa. What has the blacksmith said ? — He has
said : I will make the axe.
Egatchingin nind indimin, mojag bata-diidng. We be-
have shamefully, because we are sinning always.
Kawin -gicaiak nind iridissimin'; nin jjagwanaicadisimin.
We do not act right, (not behave well,) we live in dark-
ness, (in uncertainty.)
Wejimongin ani-ino mat eld minaimnigosiwin. Sinful
pleasure is like a thing that flies away.
Eshwamanissongin ino aw inini. kawin gwaiak dissi.
He is like a man that is afraid ; he is not well.
Kinawa baiata-diicg, aidndj kid indim nishkiiieg ; ki
gad-animlsim anwenindisossiweg. Ye sinners, you always
behave so as to offend me ; you will suffer if you do not
repent.
Debenimiian, bi-ividokawishin fbhi mino diidn. Lord, help
me, (assist me,) that I may behave well.
Wanendamawishin ga-bi-diidn ; kawin minawa nin ga-wi~
dissi. Forget what I have done ; I will not do so any
more.
Debenimiiang, widokawishinam ningot endiiangin ; ango-
tamawishinam gaie ga-bi-aindiidng, (ga-bi-diidng.)
Lord, assist us when anything happens us ; and take from
Us what we have done, (committed,) (our sins.)
26
406
En&nimiwanen mi gc-diian. — Eji-minwendaman, mi kagi-
nig gc-ti'i-rliidng. Whatever is thy will in reg;ird to me,
so I will do. — We will always behave according to thy
pleasure.
Endiiang -imngom, mi cncloK-agobancn gaiat ga-bimadisigo-
bancntig (thing. As we are now, so were probably those
who had lived on earth in olden tunes.
DebcnitniKin, ganawcnimisliin mlnik gc-dowancn. Lord,
take care of me, whatever may happen to me, (however I
may be.)
Aianjcniwiian, anin dash iw ged-inogwen ? Angel, how will
that be ?
Qebenindiqng) kaginig dibcndan gc-dowangcn, minik gaie
ge-kitimagisiwdngen. Lord, always govern, (be master
of,) whatever we shall be, and whatever misery (poverty,)
shall befall us.
Anin endtian nongom ? Endiidn sa nind hid. How dost
thou do to-day ? I do as I do.
FORMATION OF VERBS.
There are several kinds or modifications of verbs in the
Otchipwe language, which are formed from principal verbs,*
or from substantives, to express different circumstances,
which use to be expressed in othci languages by the com-
bination of two or more parts of speech.
We will exhibit here these kinds of verbs, and give the
rules for their formation, in as much as Rules can be indi-
cated for that.
1. RECIPROCAL VERBS.
They show a reaction of the subject on itself. They all
end in as or dis, at the first person singular, indicative,
* We call principal verbs, the transitive-proper, and the intransitive-
proper verbs.
407
I
present ; and at the third person in o, belong to the I. Con-
jugation. Here are the Rules for their formation.
RULE 1. Transitive verbs ending in awa, change their last
syllable wa into s, in order to form reciprocal verbs.
EXAMPLES.
Nin babdmitaiva, I obey him ; nin babamitas, I obey my-
•elf.'
Nin nondawa, I hear him ; nin nondas, I hear myself.
Nin kikinoamawa, I teach him ; nin kikinoamas, I t. mys.
Nin pisindawa, I listen to him ; nin pisindas, I 1. to mys.
Nind anukitaiva, T work for h. ; nind anokitas, I w. for m.
RULE 2. Transitive verbs ending in aa, ca, ia, oa, or a
with a consonant before it, (excepting m and w,) change
the final a into idis.
EXAMPLES.
Nin minaa, I give him to drink : nin minaidis, I give to
drink to myself.
Nin wabandaa, I show it to him ; nin ivabandaidis, I show
it to myself.
Nin bakadea, I make him starve ; nin bakadeidis, I make
myself starve.
Nin gagibishea, 1 make him deaf; nin gagibisheidis, I
make myself deaf.
Nin sdgia, I love him ; nin sagiidis, I love myself.
Nin bdpia, I laugh at him; nin bdpiidis, I 1. at myself.
Nin nodjimoa, I save or cure h.; nin nS&jimoidis, I c. my.
Nin moa, I make him weep ; -nin moid-is t I make mys. w.
Nin nissa, I kill him ; nin nissidis, I kill myself.
Nin ganona, I speak to him ; nin ganonidis, I s. to mys.
RULE 3. Transitive verbs ending in owa, change their last
syllable ica into dis.
408
i
EXAMPLES.
Nin pai-itcowa, I strike him ; nin pukitroflis, I s. myself.
\in /Hi*/utnji'oira, I whip him; nin bashanjeodis. I w. mys.
Nind agiranaoird. I cover him ; nind azrirancindis, I c. in.
Nin bashibaoiva, I stab him ; nin bashibaodis, I s. myself.
RULE 4. Transitive verbs ending in ma, change this sylla-
ble into nclis.
EXAMPLES.
Nin wabama, I see him ; nin wabandif, I see myself.
Nin kikenima, I know him; nin kikanindit, I know mys.
Ninjawenima, I have mercy on him ; ninjmn 'Hindis, I have
mercy on myself.
Nin kitimdgenivna, I pity him; nin kitiitmircnindi*, I p. m.
Nind dnwcnima, I reprimand him ; nind anwunindis, I r, m.
II. COMMUNICATIVE VERBS.
These verbs show a mutual action of two or more sub-
jects upon each other. They have only the plural number,
and they all end in dimin, at the first person plural, indica-
tive, present. (To the I. Conj.) They arc formed after the
reciprocal verbs, according to the following Rules.
RULE 1. The reciprocal verbs ending in rrv, change this
as into adinrin, in order to make communicative verbs.
EXAMPLES.
Nin nondas, I hear myself; nin nondadunin, we hear each
other.
Nin ///S.S//0/C/.S-, 1 understand mys. ; ///// nissitotad'nnin,
we understand carh othrr.
\in tii/no t/ix/tis, i d<> frond to myself; nin min o dodadimin,
we do good to each other.
Nin i>ixindrifi, I listen to myself: nin yisindadimin, we
listen to each other.
409
Nlnd anokitas, I work for myself; nind anoJcitadimin, we
work for each other.
RULE 2. The reciprocal verbs ending in dis, change this
syllable into dimin.
EXAMPLES.
Nin bamiidis, I take care of myself; nin lamiidimin, we
take care of each other.
Nin niskkiidis, I make myself angry ; nin nishkiidimin ,
we make each other angry.
Nin gashkiidis, I prevail upon myself; nin gashkiidimin,
we prevail upon each other.
Nin pakiteodis, I strike myself; nin pakitcodimin, we st.
each other.
Nin jingenindis, I hate myself; nin jingenindimin, we
hate each other.
Nin gagikindis, I recommend to myself; nin gagikindi-
min, we recommend to each other.
Nin ganawcnindis, I take care of myself; nin ganawcnin-
dimin, we take care of each other.
Note. The personal pronoun ki is to be employed instead
of nin in the communicative verbs in the first person, when
the person spoken to is included. (See Hem. 3, p. 45.)
III. PERSONIFYING VERBS.
They serve to represent an inanimate thing as doing
actions of an animate being. There are two kinds of these
verbs ; the one ending in on, and the other in magad.
I have already spoken of the formation of these verbs,
and I have here only to refer you for the formation of those
of the Jirst kind to page 362; and of the second kind to
page 85.
410
IV. REPROACHING VERBS.
A reproaching verb is used in order to signify that its
subject has a habit or quality, which is a reproach to him.
They are all derived from intransitive verbs of the I. Con-
jugation, and they also all belong to this Conjugation, be-
cause they all end in I at the characteristical third person.
The only Rule for their formation is this : Take the verb
you want to transform into a reproaching verb, in the
third person .singular, indicative, present, affirmative form,
and add shk to this person, and you have the reproaching
verb.
EXAMPLES.
Nin niba, I sleep ; 3 pers. nitxt ; nin nibashk, I sleep too
much.
Nin minikwe, I drink ; 3 pers. minikwe : nin minikweshk, I
drink too much ; I am a drunkard.
Nin masinaigc, I make debts ; 3 p. masinalgc; nin masi-
naigcshk, I make always debts.
Nin maw, I weep, cry ; tt p. mawl ; nin maioishk, I cry
too much or too often.
Nin nim, I dance ; 8 p. nimi ; nin nimiM', I dance too
often, too much.
Nin migas, I fight ; 3 p. migasn ; nin migasoshk, I am in
a habit of fighting.
V. SUBSTANTIVE VERBS PROPER.
This kind of verbs is derived from substantives. They
end in i at the third person. (I. Conj.) In regard to the
formation of these verbs, two Rules arc to be observed, viz :
RULE 1. To a substantive nniintttn or inanhnatc., ending in
a vowel, only a w is added, to form a verb.
EXAMPLES.
Inini, man ; niml 'mining I am a man.
Ikwet woman ; nind ikwew, I am a woman.
411
i chief ; nind ogimaw, I am a chief.
Aki, earth ; nind cfkiw, I am earth.
Sibi, river ; nin sibiw, I am a river.
Exception. To a substantive ending in a vowel that has
the nasal sound after it, (dt e, ?, b*) you have to add the
syllable iw, to form a verb.
EXAMPLES.
Akiwesi, an old man : nind akiwcsTiw, I am an old man.
Mindimoie, an old worn an; nin minditfroieiw, I am an old
woman.
Abinodjt, a child ; nind ab'modjihv, I am a child.
Gigo, a fish ; nin gigoiiv, 1 am a fish.
RULE 2. To a substantive, animate or inanimate, ending
in a consonant, the syllable iw is added, to make a verb
of it. Only those substantives ending in a consonant,
whose mutative vowel is o,t (which make their plural in
og, and some in wag,) take the syllable ow, to become
verbs.
EXAMPLES.
Wdbigan, clay ; nin wabiganiw, T am clay.
Jiwitagan, salt ; ninjiwifaganiw, I am salt ;
Ass in, a stone ; nind assiniiv, I am a stone.
Pakwejigan, bread; ninpakwrjigamw, 1 am bread.
Jishibens, a little duck ; nin jishibensiw, I am a little
duck.
Jaganash, an Englishman; nin Jaganashiw. I am an Eng-
lishman.
Gisiss, the sun ; nin gisissow, I am the sun.
Mitigy a tree ; nin mitigow, I am a tree.
Amik, a beaver ; nind amikow, I am a beaver.
Biwabik, iron ; nin biwabikow, I am iron.
* See p. 10, No. 3. t See p^e ?5,
412
Note. There is yet another kind of substantive- verbs in
this language. They are unipcr^onnl and belong to the
IX. Conjugation. They are derived from inanimate sub-
stantives ending in win ; and their formation consists in
adding iwan to the end-syllable win.
EXAMPLES.
Alinawiinigosiiciii, joy ; minatcanigosiwimwan, there
is joy.
Kaslikendamowin, sorrow ; kashkendatnowiniwan,- there
is sorrow.
llifpiirin, laughter; 'bapiwiniwan, there is laugh.
Mawiwin, weeping; mawiwiniwan, there is w.
Bakadcwin, starvation; bakadewiniwcm, there is st.
VI. ABUNDANCE-VERBS.
These verbs are also substantive-verbs, being formed
from substantives. But as they signify at the same time
fibitnrfnnre of what they express, they justly form a distinct
class of verbs, called as above. They are unipersonal verbs,
belonging to the VII. Conjugation.
There are two Rules for their formation, somewhat rela-
ting to those of the preceding number.
RULE 1. To form an abundance-verb, add the syllable ka
to a substantive ending in a vowel, may it be animate or
inanimate.
EXAMPLES.
Anitihinalct Indian ; unixhiiuihrkn, there is plenty of
lndiiiiis.
Xtirr'HHf^ moschcto ; $a«iim-l:(ii there is plenty of mos.
Nib!, \\-.\\- Hibikfi, tliore is much war
An iiniki, thunder ; animikika, ihrrc is a thunder-
rm.
t.urgeon ; najucka, there is abundance of s.
413
Exception. Substantives ending in a vowel which has
the nasal sound, take ika, to become abundance-verbs.
EXAMPLES.
Gigo, fish ; gigoika, there is plenty of fish.
Abinodji, a child ; abinodjiika, there is abundance of
children.
Assabikeshi, a spider ; assabikcsMika, there is abundance
of spiders.
Mishike, a turtle ; mishikcika, there is plenty of tur.
RULE 2. Substantives, animate or inanimate, ending in a
consonant, require the addition of ika or oka, to be
transformed into verbs of this class. (The mutative vowel
o requires oka.)
EXAMPLES..
Mikwdm, ice ; mikwdmika, there is much ice.
Gon, snow ; gonika, there is much snow.
Ashislik, dirt, (on the ashishkika, there is much dirt,
road, etc.) mud.
Namegoss, trout ; namegossika, there is abundance
of trout.
Miskwimin, a raspberry ; miskwiminika, there is plenty of
raspberries.
Andng, a star ; -anangoka, there are many stars.
Mitig, a tree ; mitigoka, there is abundance of
trees.
Wabos, a rabbit ; wabosoka, there are many rab.
VII. POSSESSIVE VERBS.
These verbs indicate possession or property, in a very
peculiar manner. They are substantive-verbs, being de-
rived from substantives, animate or inanimata, by prefix-
ing o or od, and the personal pronoun nin or nind in the
first person, etc. ; and they belong to the I. Conjugation,
114
being intransitive verbs, ending in a vowel at the charac-
teristical third person ; that is, in / or o. (This •> refers to
the imitative o. )
Those that terminate in n consonant at the first person
singular, indicative, pres., do ordinarily not take the pos-
sessive terminations. (See page 53.) Some ma} take
them occasionally.
But those that end in a rowel at the said person, take
the possessive terminations. These all end in i at the
characteristical third person.
EXAMPLES.
Tchhnan, canoe ; iilml utclumnn, I have a canoe.
Mokoinan, n knife ; nind omokomant 1 have a knife.
Odabnn, a sledge; nind od#daban, I have a sledge.
Noss,(n-oss,) my father; nind noss, I have a father.
Ningici.i!;, (ni-n-giciss,) nind ogwiss, I have a son.
my son :
Note. These end in / at the third person, otcliimani, etc.
Wagakwadt an axe ; nind owagakwad, I have an axe.
Makak, a box ; nind onic/siik, 1 have a box.
Akik, a kettle ; nind odakil:, I have a kettle.
Mitig, tree or wood ; nind omifig, T have a tree or
wood.
Note. These end in o at the third person, owa^ckwadn, . .
Joiiiia, silver, money ; nind tijoniifiin, 1 have money.
Pijiki, a cow; -ntnd <>/>i///, •/'///, I have a cow.
Opi?i, a potatoe ; •;////.// ud >/iin///t, I have ])otatoes.
A /.'/', earth, land; nind. odnkhn, \ have land.
Ishkotc, fire ; nind wlixlikntnn, \ have fire.
Note. These have the p<>ssrs>ivr i.- •••mi nations, ending in
i at the third person, njoniiunii, ojiijikimi, . . .
415
VIII. WORKING VERBS.
The verbs of this class signify the doing of a work] and
so I think they are properly called, working verbs. They
are substantive-verbs, all being derived from substantives,
animate or inanimate., and follow the same Rules in their
formation, as the abundance-verbs of No VI. These verbs
belong all to the I. Conj.
To make a working verb out of a substantive, you have
to prefix to it nin or nind, and to add ke, ike, or oke, ac-
cording to the same Rules, as you added kat ika or oka, in
No. VI.
EXAMPLES.
Mikana, path, road ; nin mikanake, I make a road.
Ishkote, fire; nind ishkotcke, I make fire.
Akakanje, charcoal : nind akakdnjeke, T burn coal.
Joniia, silver ; nin joniiakc, I work silver.
Mashkikiwabo, medicine : ni.n maslikikiwabokc, I prepare
medicine.
Ishkwandem, a door ; ninrl isJikwandcmikc, I make a door.
Mitchikanakobid/igan, fence : nin mitcldkanakobidjigan-
ike, I am making a fence.
Tchiman, a canoe ; nin tcUimanike, I am making a canoe.
Gigo, fish ; ningigoike, I am storing up fish.
Sisibakwad, sugar ; nin simbdkwadoke, 1 am making sugar.
Makak, box, barrel ; nin makakoke, I make barrels.
Biwabik, iron, metal ; nin biwalikoke, T make metal, I work
in a mine.
IX. FEIGNING VERBS.
These verbs are used to designate feigning or dissimula-
tion. A verb of this kind represents its subject doing
something for "show only, or by dissimulation. They all
terminate in kas, at the first person singular, indicative,
present : and in o at the characteristical third person ; and
416
consequently belong to the I. Conjugation. Some of them
are derived from other verbs, and some from substantives.
Those derived from xi/bxtdntires, follow in their forma-
tion exactly the Rules established in No. VI. All you have
additionally to do is, to add s to an abundance-verb, and to
prepose nin (nind,) and you have a feigning verb, as :
Anishinabeka ; feigning verb, nind anishinabeka9t I play
or act the Indian, I feign to be an Indian. Abinodjiika;
feigning verb, -niniL abinodfiikas, I play the child. \Vabo-
soka ; feigning verb, nin irabosokas, 1 feign to be a rabbit,
(in fables.)
Those feigning verbs that are .derived from verbs, add
the syllable kas to the characteristical third person of the
verbs from which they are formed.
EXAMPLES.
Nin niba, I sleep ; 3 person, i.iba ; nin nibakas, I feign
to sleep.
Ningagibishe, I am deaf; 3 p. gagibisJie : nin ^(t^ibisht-
kas, I dissemble to be deaf.
Nind ahos, I am sick ; 3 p. akosi ; nind ukutikas, I feign
to be sick.
Nin nib, 1 die ; 3 p. nibo ; nin nibokas, I feign to die.
X. CAUSING VERBS.
These verbs are called so, because they indicate that the
subject of such a verb /V///.ST.V sonic animate object to be in
a certain circumstance, or to dn something. They are all
finiuiritr verbs, belonging to the IV. Conjugation. They
are obtained from the Hiararteristical third person of in-
transitive verbs, by adding ", ia, or oa ; according to the
following Rules.
RT:T,E 1. When 1he chnracteristiciil third person ends in a
/j the, letter a only ia added, to form a causing verb.
417
EXAMPLES.
Nind abitchiba, I rise from the dead ; 3 person, abitehiba ;
nind abitchibaa, 1 raise him from the dead.
Nin manissc, I chop ; 3 p. manisse ; nin manissm, I make
him chop wood.
Nin widigc, I am married ; 3 p. widige ; nin ividigea, I
make him be married.
Nind anoki, I work ; 3 p. anoki : nind anokia, I make
him work.
Nin wab, I see, 3 p. wabi ; nin wabia, I make him see.
Nind ogimaw, I am a chief; 3 p. oglmawi ; nind ogimawia,
I make him a chief.
NinjdboSy I purge myself; 3 y.jaboso; ninjabosoa, I cause
him to take a purge,
RULE 2. When the characteristical third person ends in a
consonant, the syllable ia or oa is added to make a causing
verb. (The syllable oa refers to the mutative vowel o.)
EXAMPLES.
Nin kashfcendam, I am sad ; 3 person^ kashkendam ; nin
kashhendamia, 1 make him sad.
Nin itoashkawendam, I am firmly resolved ; 3 person maslt-
kawendam ; nin mashkawcndaniia, I cause him to be
firmly resolved.
Nin dodam, I do it ; 3 p, dodam ; nin dodamoa, I make
him do it,
Nin twdshin, I break through the ice ; 3 p. twashin ; nin
twashinoa, I cause him to break through the ice.
Note 1, All the verbs of the II. and III. Conjugations,
when transformed into causing verbs, ought to end in oa,
because their mutative vowel is o. But usage seems to
require to add ia to those that are composed of inendam^
(he thinks,) as the first two of these Examples, and many
others.
418
Xotc 2. It must be observed here, that not all the verbs
of the first three (or other) Conjugation* use to be trans-
formed into causing verbs ; and some have their own way
of becoming verbs of this kind, as: Niba, he sleeps; nin
jiibca, I cause him to sleep. Kilinwgisi, he is poor : nin
kitimagia, I make him poor. Wi'iijrrndhi'cig, they are
married together ; nin wicfrgendaagt I marry them together.
O wabanfan, he sees it ; niu wabandaa, I cause him to see
it, I show it to him. O kiknuhin, he knows it ; nin kikend-
anwna, I cause him to know it, I make it known to him, etc.,
etc. These are verbs by themselves.
XI. FREQUENTATIVE VERBS.
This kind of verbs is used to indicate a repetition or reit-
eration of the action expressed by the verb. The contri-
vance which makes common verbs become frequentative, is,
to double the first syllable of the verb.
EXAMPLES.
Nin pakiteouw, I strike him ; nin yapakiteowa, I strike him
repeatedly.
Nin tdngishkawc^, 1 kick him; nin tatdngiihkctv>a,\ kick
him several times.
Nin bashanjeotva, I whip him : nin babashanjcowa, I whip
him repeatedly.
Ni?i bapinodawa, 1 mock or scoff him; nin babajtinof/atra,
I continue to scoff him.
Nin frfni»iif(,} speak to him: nin . gaganona, I converse
with him a certain length of time.
Etc. . . etc. . . .
But somtimrs, especially when the first syllable of the
common verb lias the vowel /, this /' is changed in a in the
lir-t syllable of the frequent nfive verb.
\.MrLi:s.
Nin gig it, I speak (a short time;) nin gtfgigit, I speak
long, much.
419
Ninpindige, I come in ; nin paplndigc, I c. often in.
Nin nibaw, I stand ; nin nanibair, I s. here and there.
Nin iiiigiwc, I give ; nin mdmigiwe, T give often, or to sev-
eral persons.
Nin mina, I give him ; nin mdminag, I g. to several persons.
XII. PITYING VERBS.
This modification of verbs is used to manifest pity,
which the subject of these verbs has on himself, or on others.
In English it requires a whole phrase to express the mean-
ing of such a verb. We will exhibit here some of them ;
and below are the English phrases which express their
meaning.
Pit. v. 1. pers. 3. pers. Subj. moocLpres.
Nin debimash ; * debimashi ; debimaslian.
Nin ba/cadesh ; f bakadeshi ; bakadeskan.
Nin gagibishesh ; $ gagibisheshi ; gagibisheshau.
Nind akosish ; \\ akosishi; akosishan.
Nind ijibesish ; § ijiwebisisJii ; ijiwesishan.
* It is but too true what they say of me.
1 1 am worth pity, being so hungry.
f I am worth pity, being deaf.
II I am worth compassion, being sick.
(j I am miserable, being so.
Dcbimashinadog ; I think, what they say of that poor
fellow, is but too true. (Thirteen words for one.)
Remark 1. Many active verbs ending in amawa, indi-
cate by this termination something belonging to the object.
of the verb, or relating and alluding to it. This modifica-
tion of verbs is much used in the Otchipwe language, and
is expressive.
SOME EXAMPLES.
Nin wabandamawa od inanokiwin ; i see his work.
gi-wabandamawa od ojibiigan; I have seen his wri-
tng.
420
Nin jingfinlnmaira o Ixttadowin ; I hate his sin.
Nin jingendantawa o gaginawishkiwin : I hate his habit of
lying.
Nin kikencUanawa od ijiweoisiwin ; I know his conduct.
Nin u-i-kikcndaiiiawa o dodanwwin ; I want to know his do-
ings.
Nin gi-nondamawa o matcJd gijwewin ; I heard his bad
speaking.
Nin wi-nondamawa o nagamoioin ; I want to hear his sing-
ing.
Nin ei-ojitamawa bdbisikawagan, I have made his coat.
(Nind ojitmi.)
Nin nitamawa gcgo, I kill something for him. (Nin niton.)
Nin bositamawa nibdgan, I embark a bed for him. (Nin
bos it on.)
Etc, . . etc. . . .
You could, indeed, say : Nin wabandan od 'nian&kiwin ;
nin jingendan o gaginawi$kkiv>in ; nin kiltendtui od ijiirt-
bitiudn-; nin nondan, o inatcld gijwcirin; etc... This
would be understood by Indians, but it is not genuine Ot-
chipwe.
You see by these Examples, that the hist syllable of the
verb, (which always is a verb of the VI. Conj.,) from which
a verb of this discription is formed, is chani^'d into amaini,
(which makes it become a verb of the IV. Conj.) But in
some verbs ending in on, this last syllable is not changed
in amawa, but in awa ; as :
Nin MurljifJon, I carry it away ; nin madjidawa, I carry it
to him.
,\ni hidon, I bring it ; nin hidniHiy I bring it to him.
Niiirl fifuii, I put it. ; -nind nfatra, I p. it to him, or for him.
A"/// htnlnn, I hide it; nin kadrni'ii, 1 conceal it to him.
Nin stigitun, I like (keep) it; nin sagitawa, I don't give it
to him.
Etc. . s etc. .
421
It is evident that the verbs ending in an, change invaria-
bly this syllable in amawa, to become verbs of this descrip-
tion. But for those ending in on, I can discover no Rule
which could show us those that change this on in amawa,
and those that change it in awa.
Try to get the right use of this kind of verbs, by an at-
tentive observation of correct speakers of this language.
Remark 2. Let me now say a word of contracted verbs.
The Otchipwe language is full of them. There are no fixed
Rules for this contraction ; usage contracted or abbreviated
them, and established them in the language. Nor is it the
business of the Grammar, to give a detailed account of
them; this is the duty of the Dictionary. I will here only
give you a few specimens of contracted verbs, and at the
same time a hint, to be attentive and diligent in the anal-
yzing of compound and contracted verbs and other parts of
speech. Here are a few specimens.
Nin nddonddm, I fetch and bring it on my back, (JYin
nddin, I fetch it; nin bimonddn, I carry it on my back.)
Biddssimishka, he is coming here in a canoe. (Bi, deno-
ting approach ; ondass, come here ; bimishkctj he goes or
comes in a canoe, boat, etc.)
Nin bidadjim, I come and tell something. (Bi, denoting
coming ; nin dibadjim, I tell it.)
And innumerable others.
27
422
CHAPTER IV.
OF ADJECTIVES.
Aii Adjective is adjected or added to a substantive to
express its quality or manner of existing.
The Otchipwe adjectives, like the English, are perfectly
invariable, respecting gender, number and case. So we
say : Mi no kw'ncisens, a good boy ; mino Ikwcsensag, a good
girl ; mino dodamowin, a good action. As long as they
are adjectives, they are invariable ; but they are ordinarily
transformed into verbs, and then they are conjugated.
There are only a few adjectives proper in the Otchipwe
language, they are almost all adjective-verbs.
1. Here are some oj the first sort, adjectives
proper.
Mino, good. Geget mino inini kissaic ; thy brother is in-
deed a good man.
Mino ikweban aw, o gi-l;ildii-nita-jawc.niman wifJfani-
shinaben ; she was a good woman, she was very charit-
able towards her neighbor.
Mino ak'i na endaji-kttigcicg ? Is the soil good where
your field is?
Matchi, bad, evil. Matclii manito kl wi-minigonan match'*
inendamowinan ; the evil spirit suggests us bad thoughts.
Matchi anishinabeg anotch inaic.lii ijiwebiriwin&ii od
aianawan, match i nihi gate o sagitonawa ; bad Indi<in.s
have many evil habits, and they also like liquor, (bad
water.)
Matchi aUnodjilag ; bad children.
423
Gete, old, ancient. Gete anishinabeg gi-kitchi-batainowag ;
the Indians of old were very numerous.
Nln gete masinaigan nin bidon, bekanak dash mijishi-
kan ; I bring my old book, please give me another one.
Gete kitiganan ; old fields.
Oshki, new, recent; young. Oshki masinaigan ki bi-nan-
dotamon ; I come to ask thee for a new book.
Oshki nagamonan ki toi-kikinoamoninim ; I will teach
you new hymns.
Oshki abinodjij a young child. Oshki ininiwag, young
men.
Gwaidk, good, just, right, upright, straight. — Gwaidkinini,
a good or just man; gwaidk atawewinmiwag, good
traders.
Geget kitchi apitendagwad gwaiak ijiwebisiwin ; a good
upright conduct is greatly valuable.
Kagige, eternal, everlasting. — Gwaidk enamiadjig kagigc
bimadisiwin gijigong ta-minawag ; to good Christians
life everlasting will be given in heaven.
Kagige minawdnigosiwin dagomagad gijigong ; there is
eternal joy in heaven.
- K.I dd-gotdn iw kagigt ishkott andmakamig ; thou
oughtst to fear that eternal fire in hell.
Kitchitwa, holy, saint. — Kitchitwa Marie ; Saint Mary.
Ritchitwd Paul ; Saint Paul, Kitchitwa Anamitwig-
amiy ; the holy Church.
Nibiwa, much, many. Nibiwa aki o gi-gishpinadon ; he
bought much land.
Nibiwa odenawan o gi-wabandanan gi-babamadisid ; he
saw many cities on his travel.
Jesus nibiwa ketimagisinidjin o gi-jaweniman, nibiwa
424
aiakosinidjin o gi-nodjimoan. Jesus did charity to many
poor people, and healed many sick persons.
Pangi, some, a little, a few. — Pangi jiwitagan mijisUkan;
give me some salt.
Pangi opinin o gi-ashaman ; he gave him a few potatoes
to eat.
Pangi bimide mijishinam, gi-dtewan sa nin wassakwa-
nend.jiganinanin. Give us a little of your oil, for our
lamps are gone out.
Note. These two adjectives, nibiwa zndpangi, are oftener
adverbs than adjectives.
2. Here are some of the second sort, adjective-verbs.
Nlbwaka aw inini ; this is a wise man.
Nita-anoki aw ikwe ; this is an industrious woman.
Ncta-anokidjig kitigfrwininitoag kitchi daniwag ; indus-
trious farmers are wealthy.
Kakina ninidjanissag dkosiwag, my children are all sick.
Bakade, he is hungry ; nibdgwe, he is thirsty ; kitimdgisi,
he is poor ; jawcndagosi, he is happy.
Kissind, it is cold ; kijatc, it is warm ; anwatin, it is calm :
nodin, it is windy.
Remark 1. Where we use in English .in adjective with
the auxiliary verb to be, the Otchipwe language will cm-
ploy a verb, in which the adjective and the auxiliary verb
are joined in one verb. For this reason we call these
words a.dj<'< tin -verbs. So, for instance, in the above sen-
tences, nibirakf/, does not signify only //-/'AT, but, he is wise;
bakade, means not only hun^rt^ but, he is hungry ; kissina,
not only cold, but, it is cold, etc.
Remark 2. These adjective-verbs are true verbs denoting
quality, and are conjugated. They don't belong all to the
425
same Conjugation. The characteristical third person and
the quality of the verb indicate the Conjugation to which
an adjective- verb belongs. The enumeration of these verbs
is the business of the Dictionary. Here in the Grammar
we will merely give some Examples of adjective-verbs be-
longing to different Conjugations, as :
Nin wabishkis, I am white ; nin makateiois, I am black ;
nin jawendagos* I am happy ; nin sagiigosr I am ami-
able, (or loved.) To the I. Conjugation.
Nind agodjin, I am hanging ; nin minoshin, I am well
placed, (lying down.) To the III. Conjugation.
IVabishka, it is white ; bigashkct, it is broken ; wasseia, it
is light ; minosse, it is convenient, (it goes well, fits well.)
To the VII. Conjugation.
Wabishkamagad, it is white ; manadad, it is bad ; kash-
kendagivad, it is melancholy, sorrowful. To the VIII.
Conjugation.
Gwandtchiican, it is beautiful ; songan, it is strong ; oniji*
shin, it is fair, useful. To the IX. Conjugation.
DEGREES OF COMPARISON IN ADJECTIVES.
There are three degrees of qualification or comparison
which can be expressed in adjectives, the Positive, Com-
parative and Superlative. In the Otchipwe languag*
these degrees of comparison are expressed in the adjective-
verbs, by placing before them certain adverbs, as the Ex-
amples of No. 2 and 3 will show.
* By the intercalation of the syllable wi, between the final o and «,
in the last syllable of adjective-verbs ending in gos, the Otchipwe Ian*
guage gives to these verbs the signification of the influence of Divine
Power or Goodness. F. i. Nin jawendagowis, I am happy through the
goodness of God. Nin sagiigowis, I am loved by God, (God loves me.)
m
1. The Positive.
Adjectives in the Positirr express the quality of objects
simply, without respect to other objects, as :
Bckadisi, tabasscnindiso gale aw oshkinawe ; this young
man is meek and humble, (without respect to the meek*
ness and humility of others.)
Giwaslikwt'liwag igiw anishinabcg; these Indians are drunk,
(without expressing whether they are more or less drunk
than others.)
Gwandtcliiwan ki kitigan ; thy field is beautiful.
Onijishin ow ma$/ikiki ; this medicine is goo<l.
Note. .All the adjectives proper, and the ajectivc-vcrbs of
the Dictionary are in the Positive.
2. The Comparative.
Adjectives in the Comparative express the quality of an
object in a higher or lower degree than that of another ;
and according to these two kinds of comparison, the com-
paritive also is double,— the comparative of superiority, and
the comparative of inferiority.
a. The comparative of superiority is formed, in the Otchip-
we language, by placing the adverbs awQshime or min'iitch
before an adjective-verb in the positive. These tuo
adverbs have both the same signification ; they signify
more.
EXAMPLES.
Paul nawdtch kitimi, John dash ; Paul is more lazy than
John.
Airash.imc apifcHflfi^trftrl (inriuiiririn, kttk'nm ddtli uk'nig
rii'ln^og ; religion is more worth than all other things on
eartli.
427
Nin jawendagos geget, awdshime dash kin ki jawendagos ;
I am happy indeed, but thou art more happy, (happier.)
Nawdtch gisiss wassesi, tibikigisiss- dash ; the sun is
brighter (more bright) than the moon.
b. The comparative of inferiority is formed by placing be-
fore an adjective-verb the two adverbs nawdich pangi,
which signify less, or not so much, as :
• •
Nawdtch pangi kissinamagad nongom, bibinong dash ; it
is not so cold now than it was last winter.
Nawdtch pangi dkosi nongom, pitchinago ga-digid ; he is
not so sick to-day, than he was yesterday.
3, The Superlative.
Adjectives in the Superlative express the quality in a
very high or low, or even in the highest or lowest degree
in one object compared with one or more others ; and ac-
cording to this distinction, the superlative also is double.
relative and absolute.
a. The relative superlative (which expresses a very high
or low, but not the highest or lowest degree of all,) is
constructed by placing the adverbs apitchi, or kitchi,
Before an adjective-verb. These adverbs signify very,
very much. Sometimes also, to give more strength to
the superlative, both adverbs, apitcM and kitchi, are put
together.
EXAMPLES OF THIS SUPERLATIVE.
Kitchi ginosi aw inini ; this man is very tall, (but not the
tallest of all)
A-pitchi mino bimadisi aw kwiwisens ; this is a very good-
natured boy.
428
Kitchi mmwcnddgosiwag ogoio abinodjiiag ; these are very
amiable children.
Apitchi kitchi dkosi ; he is extremely sick.
Apitchi kitchi kitimagisi netd-giwashkwebid ; a drunkard
is extremely miserable.
b. The absolute superlative, (which expresses the highest
or lowest degree of all,) is constructed by placing before
an adjective-verb, the adverb mdtnawi, which signifies
together, or, at all. (In the Change it sounds maidmawi.)
EXAMPLES OF THE ABSOLUTE SUPERLATIVE.
Mi aw maiamawi-ginosid inini ; this man is the tallest of
all.
jA.w kwiwisens mamawi nibwaka endashiwad nin kikinoama-
kanag ; this boy is the wisest of all my scholars.
Maidmawi-niganisid Kitchi-mekatewikwanaie ; the Sove-
reign Pontiff, (the highest or foremost Bishop.)
ftlaidmawi-Islipendagosid ; the Most-High.
Remark. By the right use of the above adverbs, the
strictest distinction of the degrees of comparison can be
expressed. It must, however, be observed, that in com-
mon speaking the adverb apitchi is often employed to de-
note the absolute superlative. F. i. Kije-Manito apitchi
kijewadisi, apitchi gaie gwaiak ijiwcbisi ; God is most
merciful and most just, (in the highest degree, of course.)
429
CHAPTER V.
OF NUMBERS.
Numbers, (which are properly adjectives, adverbs and
verbs,) serve to express exactly the quantity and succession
of objects that can be counted.
There are in the Otchipwe language Jive distinct sorts
of numbers. These sorts of numbers I have arranged here
according to their derivation from each other. This order
is unusual in Grammars, but natural in the Otchipwe
Grammar. (Nij, nenij. Nijing, ntnijingr. eko-nijing.)
1. Cardinal numbers, which express an exact quantity
of objects without any report.
2. Distributive numbers, which denote distribution and
repartition.
3. Multiplying numbers, which indicate reiteration or
repetion.
4. Multiplying -distributive numbers, which combine the
idea of multiplication and distribution in one expression.
5. Ordinal numbers, which mark the order and succes-
sion of objects.
430
CARDINAL NUMBERS.
Bejig,
Ny,
Nisswi,
Niwin,
Ndnan,
Ningotwdsswi,
Nijwassiri,
Niskwdsswi,
Jang ass w,
Middsswi ash'i bcjig,
Midas swi ashi ?iij,
Mldasswi ashi ?//.vs ?/•/',
Ytjtana,
\ijtana,
no 11 an
jngassici,
out.
two.
three.
four.
five.
six.
seven.
eight.
nine.
ten.
eleven.
twelve.
thirteen.
fourteen.
fifteen.
sixteen,
seventeen.
eighteen,
nineteen.
twenty.
J\"n/u'(/flllfl,
Nanimidana,
7s// wdssimida >KI}
31.
40.
r>o.
<;o.
70.
80.
1)0.
100.
431
Ningotwak ashi bejig, • 101.
nij - • - 102.
midasswi, - - • HO.
midasswi ashi bejig, - III
" ningotwasswi , 116.
nijtana,
nijtana ashi nanan, - 125.
Nijwak, • -l 200.
li ashi nanimidana ashi nij, - - 252.
Nisswdk, - - - 300.
Niwak, . - - - 400.
Nanwak, 500.
Ningotiwasswak, ... - 600.
Nijwasswak, .... 700.
Nishwasswak, - - - 800.
Jangasswak, .... 900.
Middsswak, .... 1,000.
Midasswak ashi bejig, - - 1,001.
" midasswi, - - 1,010.
" nijwak ashi nissimidand, 1,230.
Nijing midasswak, 2,000.
Nissing " - . 3,000.
Niwing " 4,000,
A^anmgr " .... 5,000,
Ningot watching midasswak, - - 6,000.
Nij watching " - 7,000.
Nishwdtchmg " - - 8,000.
Jangatching " 9,000.
Middtcliing "... 10,000.
Mida tching ashi abiding midasswak, - 11,000.
Middtching ashi abiding middsswak ashi ningot-
wak ashi midasswi ashi bejig, - 11,111.
Middtching ashi nijing midasswak, - 12,000.
nissing " - 13,000.
«• nishwatching " - 18,000.
Middtching ashi j an gat chin g midassioak ashi nij-
wasswak ashi nishwassimidana ashi ningo-
twasswi, • - - 19,786.
432
N'ijtana dasso midasswak, 20,000.
ashi nanan, 20,005.
ashi midasswak, 21,000.
" ashi midatswak ashi
ningotwak ashi m'iddsswi ax/ii jiij, 21,112.
N'ijtana dasso midasswak ashi mining midasswak, 25,000.
" nishwdtching mi-
dasswak ashi nisswdk, - - 28,300.
Nissimi ana dasso midasswak, - - 30,000.
Nanimidana " - 50,000.
" " ashi nanwak ashi na-
nan, - - 50,505.
Jangassimidana dasso midasswak, - 90,000.
Ningotwak « 100,000.
Nisswak " 300,000.
Midasswak " - - 1,000,000.
Etc., etc.
Remark 1. To express 2000, they also say : nijtanak ;
3000, nissimidanak ; 4000, nimidanak; 5000, nanimida-
nak ; 6000, ningotwdssimidanul: ; 7000, nijwassimidanak ;
COOO, nishwdssimidanak ; 9000, jdugassimidandk. This
is the same as : twenty hundred, thirty hundred, forty hun-
dred, etc.
Remark 2. In counting from eleven up to twenty, they
ordinarily omit midasswi, and only say : ashi bejig, eleven;
ashi n\j, twelve ; ashi nisswi, thirteeen, etc. .
Remark 3. In common quick counting they say Jang,
instead ofjangasswi, nine; and /.v/vYcA, instead of mi das s-
w, ten. This is however not to be imitated.
EXAMPLES.
Adam, nitdm inini,jdngasi>wak ashi nissimidfHM dasso fli-
433
* bon gi-bimddisi oma (iking. Adam, the first man, lived
nine hundred and thirty years on earth.
Nisswak ashi ningotwassimidana ashi nanan gijigadon,
mi bejig kikinonowin. 365 days make a year.
Awdshime ndnwak masindiganan nind aidnan. I have
more than 500 books.
Nimidana dasso tibdigan Idtagigin nin gi-gishpinadon,
nijtana ashi ndno tibdigan dash manitowegin. I have
bought forty yards of calico, and twenty-five yards of
cloth.
Nijo bibon gi-anoki, mi dash ndnwak dasswabik joniian
gi-gaslikiad. He has worked two years and earned 500
dollars.
Naning midasswak ininiwan Jesus o gi-ashaman pagrvada-
kamig, ndnan dash eta pakwcjiganan o gi-awan. Jesus
fed 5000 men in the desert with only five loaves of
bread.
Debeniminang Jesus nissimidana ashi nisso bibon gi-bima-
disi aking. Our Lord Jesus lived 33 years on earth.
Ningwiss midassogwan eta gi-bimadisi, mi dash gijigong
gi-ijacL My son lived only ten days, and went to heaven.
Nisswi kwiwisensag kcidbi nind aidwag. I have yet three
boys.
Remark 1. The Cardinal numbers from one to ten un-
dergo a little change before substantives signifying measure,
of time or of other things ; and these substantives always
remain in the singular number. Instead of bejig, nij, nis-
swi, etc., we say before those substantives : ningo, nijo,
nisso, nio, ndno, ningotwdsso,mjivasso, nishwasso,jangasso,
midasso. Some instances of this you have seen in the
above Examples, and I will give you some more here.
Ningo gisiss nin gl-anonig. He hired me for a month, or
for one month.
434
na ki da<-mijix*t ningt'i tihdigan manitowegin?
VVouldst thou not give me a yard of cloth.
Nijo bibon gi-aid Moniaug. He was two years in Mon-
treal.
AV:>s0 tibdigan p&pagiwaidnigin ki minin. I give thee
three yards of cotton.
Gega ningotwdsso gisiss gi-inc>idi. He was absent nearly
six months.
Midasso tibdigan ashi niirin, or middsso tibaigan aslii niu
tibdigan, or ashi n'w til>digan. Fourteen yards.
Middsso bibon ashi ndno bibon nin gi-dams Waiciidta-
nong. I lived fifteen years in Detroit.
Remark 2. Cardinal numbers from ten to nineteen, when
before subatantives denoting measure, are expressed in
manners, viz :
1. Midasso bibon ashi bejig, eleven years.
nij, twelve years.
nanan, fifteen years, etc.
•1 Midasso bibon ashi ningo bibon, eleven years.
(i gisiss " nij<> gisiss, twelve months.
" dibaigan ashi jangasso dibaigan, nineteen bush-
els, etc.
3. Ashi ningo bibon, eleven years.
Ashi nis.so dilxiigan, thirteen yards, bush., feet., etc.
Ashi nano gisiss, fifteen months, etc.
Note. These three jHaniirrt of expressing numbers are to
be applied also to the subsequent RcmarLs; mutatis mu-
tandis.
Remark 3. When the Cardinal numbers before substan-
tives denoting inmturc. nrr rxpn-ssrd in round numbers,
twenty, thirty, fifty, hundred, thousand, etc., the word das-
. 435
so * is put between the number and the substantive, this
latter remaining invariably in the singular. But when num-
bers under ten are joined to the round numbers, the rules
of the foregoing Remark take place. You have already
seen some cases of this in the above Examples, and here
are some more.
Gwaidk nijtana dasso bibon gi-bimadisi ninddnissiban.
My deceased daughter has lived just twenty years.
Nnnidana dasso tibdigan stniba nin gi-glshpinana. I
bought forty yards of ro'bbon.
Nijwak dasso tibdbishkodjigan anokadjigan o bimondan.
He carries on his back 200 pounds of goods.
Wika nongom awiid ningotwak dasso bibon bimddisi ;
gaidt dash dnind ningotwdssivak, anind dash aw-
dshime jdngasswak dasso bibon gi-bimddisiwag. Now-
adays seldom a person lives a hundred years ; but in
ancient times some lived 600, and some upwards of 900
years.
Nimishomissiban ningotwak dasso bibon ashi mjo bibon
gi-bimddissi. My deceased grand-father lived a hundred
and two years.
Nisswiidana ashi ndno tibdbislikodjigan pakwejigan-
an nin gi-ashamig. He gave me thirty-five pounds of
flour.
Remark 4. When the substantive following a Cardinal
number, from one to nineteen, signifies objects of wood, stone,
metal, etc., or when days are mentioned, the Cardinal num-
ber is connected with certain syllables alluding to the ma-
terial, or shape, of the object expressed by the substantive;
according to the following scheme.
Note. The word dasso signifies nothing in itself ; it is only used in
connection with words signifying measure, of time or of other things,
436
a. With the syllable gican, to indicate days ; as :
Nijogwan nin gi-bimosse. I walked two days.
Jaiywa nissogioan kawin wissinissi. He has eaten no-
thing now three days.
Ndnogwan gi-aid omd. He stayed here five days.
Niogwan, nishwdssogwan, middssogwan ; middssogican
ashi nijogwan, or only : ashi nijogwan, etc.
To exprets one day, they will say, ningo gijig.
b. With the syllable ssag, to denote wooden vessels, such
as barrels, kegs, boxes, etc., as :
Ningotossag manddminag nin ga-gishpinanag. I will
buy a barrel of corn.
Nijossag pakwejigansan od aiawan. He has two barrels
of crackers.
Jdngassossag sagdiganan. Nine kegs of nails,
Nissossag joniia. Three boxes of money.
Nzossag, ndnossag, midassossag ; midassossag ashi be-
jig, etc.
c. With the syllable weg, to mark clothing materials, as :
Bejigwcg waboian. Oneblanket.
Nijweg waboianan, niweg dash papagiwaidnan, nisswcg
dash mosh.weg, mi minik ga-dlbaamagoidn. My pay
consisted in two blankets, four shirts and three handker-
chiefs.
Ndnweg, ningotwasswcg, midassweg ; midasswcg ashi
bejig
d. With the syllables watlg to allude to wood or lumber \
as :
Kawin gdnage bejigwatig nabdgissag nind aidwassi. I
have not a single board.
437
Midasswatig missdn bidon. Bring ten sticks of wood,
Nisswdtig abwm. Three paddles.
Ningotwasswatig ajeboianan. Six oars.
Nijwatig, nanwatig, nijwasswatig ; midasswatig ashi
jigy midasswatig ashi niwin ; ashi nanwatig.
c. With the syllables wdbik, to signify metal, stone, or
glass ; as :
Rejigwabik joniia ki ga-dibaamon. I will pay thee one
dollar.
Middsswabik wassetchiganabikon. Ten window-glasses,
(ten panes of window-glass,)
Nisswdbik kijabikisiganan. Three stoves,
Ndnwabik jigwanabikog nin binag. I bring with me
five grindstones.
Niwqbik, nishwdsswabik ; middsswabik ashi nijwabik,
or, midasswabik ashi nij, or only ashi nijwabik t ashi
nisswdbik, . . .
f. With the syllables minag, to designate globular ob-
jects, as :
Bejigominag tchiss ganage ashamakan. Give him at
least one turnip.
Nissominag mishiminag ki ga-minin. I will give thee
three apples,
Niominag opinig. Four potatoes.
Middssominag anwm. Ten musket-balls.
Midassominag ashi bejig ; middssominag ashi nij ; mi-
dassominag ashi niominag; ashi nanominag, ashijangass-
ominag*
There are many other syllables of this description in the
Otchipwe language, which are attached to Cardinal num-
bers to allude to some particular object,
88
438
Here are again some of them.
g. weican, alluding to a pair or pairs, as :
Ningotwewan makisinan, a pair of shoes ; nijwewaii,
nisswewan, niwewan ; nanwewan pijikiwag, five pair or
yoke of oxen. Midasswewan ashi bejig ; midasswewan
ashi ningotwasswewan ; ashi jangasswewan, nineteen
pair.
//. oshkin, to allude to a bag or sack, as :
Ningotoshkin opinig, a bag of potatoes ; nijoshkify ?tis-
soshkui, -nanuxlikin; nijtoQSSQskkVR mishimuiag, seven
bags of apples ; midassoshkin as/it nanan, fifteen bags.
?. onag, to allude to a canoe, boat, vessel, etc., as :
Ningotonag, nijonag • nionag tcliimanan ninwal)an<l<ni-
an, I see four canoes; nanonag ; midassonag nubik-
wanan, ten vessels; midassonag ashi nanonag ishkote-
nabikwanan gi-nibomagadon, fifteen steamboats have
perished.
;. mk, alluding to the outstretched arms of a man measur-
ing a fathom, as :
Ningotonik, nijonik, nistonik, nionik, nanonik ; midasx-
onik liminakwan, ten fathoms of cord ; midassonik ashi
ningotwassonih, sixteen fathoms.
k. sid, alluding to the measurement by the foot, as :
Ningotosid,
midassosid, ten feet; midassntiid ttxhi fa-jig; midassosid
ashi nijosid ; ashi nissosid, thirteen feet.
/. wakwoagan, alluding to the measurement by the span,
as:
ngotwdkwoagan, nijwakwoagan, nisswdkwoagan ; mi-
dasswakwoagan, ten span ; midasswdkwoagan ashi nan-
wdkwoagan, fifteen span.
I
439
m. nindj, alluding to a finger, for the measurement by the
inch, as :
Ningotonindj,one inch ; nijonindj, nissonindj ; jangaxx-
onindj, nine inches; midassonindj ashi bejig, eleven
inches.
Remark 5. The same syllables are also annexed to the
interpolation-word dasso, under the circumstances referred
to in the preceding Rem. 3., when the Cardinal numbers
before the substantive above described are round numbers ;
as twenty, thirty, forty, eighty, hundred, thousand. — The
following Examples will illustrate this Remark,
a. gwan, nijtana dassogwan, twenty days ; nanimidanci
dassogwan, fifty days.
b. ssag, ningotwdk dassossag bimide, a hundred barrels
of oil ; nissimidana dassossag gigo, thirty barrels of
fish.
c. weg, ningotwassimidana dasswtg waboianan, sixty blan-
kets ; mmidunct dassweg adopowmiginon, forty table-
cloths.
d. watig, nijwassimidana dasswdtig gtyikag, seventy ce-
dars; nijtana dasswatig abaj'w, twenty lodge-poles.
r. wabik, nishwdssimidana dasswabik j.ojiiia, eighty dol-
lars ; middsswak dasswabik sagdiganan, one thousand
nails.
/. ?ninag, niss'midana dassominag anindjimin, thirty peas;
jdngassimidana dassominag ogwissimanan, ninety pump-
kins.
And so also with the other syllables ; dasswewan, dass-
oshkin, dassonag, dassomk, dassosid, dasswdkwoagan, das-
sonindj.
Numbers under ten, attached to those round numbers,
will follow the rules of Remark 2. As, nijtana dasso-
gwan ashi nijogwan ; ningotwak dassossag ashi ndnos&ag,
etc., etc.
440
The manner of expressing age, the day of the month, and
the hour, is another peculiarity and difficulty of the Otchip-
we language, which we have to consider here.
Manner of expressing age.
1. If the age of a child is under a month, it is expressed in
the same manner as the day of the month, (p. 442. ) F. i.
Anin endassogwanagisid aw abinodji 1 How many days
is this child old ? Nijogwanagisi, nissogwanagisi, nio-
gwanagisi, midassogwanagisi, etc. . . It is two, three,
four, ten days old, etc. . .
2. If the age of a child is to be expressed in months, they
say thus:
Anin endasso-gisisswagisid aw abinodji ? How many
months is this child old ? Ningo-gisisswagisi, nyo-gis~
isswagisi, nio-gisisswagisi, ningotwasso-gisisswagiri, nti-
ddsso-gisisswagisi ashi nisswi, nijtana da&so-gisis&wagi-
si ashi nij, etc. ... It is one, two, four, six, thirteen,
twenty-two months old, etc.
3. If the age to be expressed is not over ten years, they
connect the Cardinal number with the word bibon,
(which signifies winter or year,) and make a verb of it ;
thus:
Anin endasso-bibonagisiian ? Nin nishwdsso-bibonagis ;
How many years art thou old? 1 am eight years old.
Anin endasso-bibonagisid ? Mufasao-bibonagisi. How
many years is he (she) old? He (she) is ten years old.
Ogow nijo(/ci(/<r kaiuin innx/ii in'm <>-l>ihun<igisissiwag ;
these twins are not yet five years old.
4. If the age is from ten to nineteen years, it can be ex-
pressed in three different manners ; thus :
Middsso-bil><'»ia<risi ashi n'nt Mbonoglli, or middsso-bi-
bonagisi athi ///'//•///, or ashi nMtibonagisi ; he is fourteen
years old. (In the first person the second manner is usu-
441
al ; as, nin midasso-bibonagis ashi nij ; nin midasso-bi-
bonagis ashi nanan, etc.)
5. If the age is over nineteen years, and expressed mround
numbers, they put dasso before bibon, and frame the
whole into a verb. Nin nimidana dasso-bibonagis, or
nimidana nin dasso-bibonagis ; I am forty years old.
Nanimidana dasso-bibonagisi; he is fifty years of age.
Awdshime nijtana ddsso-bibonagisiwag nishimeiag ; my
brothers are over twenty years old.
6. If the age is upwards of twenty years, and expressed in
mixed numbers, it is given as follows, viz :
Nijtana dasso-bibonagisi ashi niwin ; he is twenty-four
years old. Nin ndnimidana dasso-bibonagis ashi nisswi ;
I am fifty-three years old. Nijtana dasso-bibonagisi nin
bebejigoganjim, ashi nij ; my horse is twenty-two years
old.
Manner of expressing the day of the month.
The Otchipwe names of the twelve months or moons :
1. Mamto-gisiss, the moon of the spirit, (January.)
2. Namebini-gisiss, the moon of suckers, (fish,) (Feb-
ruary.
3. Ondbani-gisiss, the moon of the crust on the enow,
(March.)
4. Bebokwedagiming-gisiss,ihe moon of the breaking of
snow shoes, (April.)
5. Wdbigon-gisiss, the moon of flowers and blooms, (May.)
6. Odeimini-gisiss,themoon of strawberries, (heart-berries)
(June.)
7. Miskwimini-gisiss, the moon of raspberries, (red-ber-
ries,) (July.)
8. Min-gisiss, the moon of whortleberries, (August.)
9. Manominike-gisiss, the moon of the gathering of wild
rice, (September.)
44*2
10. Buu&wifgisist, the moon of the falling of leaves, (Oct.)
11. Oaskkadino-gisiss, the moon of freezing, (November.)
10. Manitc-gisissons, the little moon of the spirit, (Deer.)
The word gisiss, which means sun and moon, is an ani-
mate substantive.*
The question after the date is in'Otchipwe thus : An in
bn&assogwwwgisid gisiss nongom 1 How many days is the
moon old to-day ? Or, anin cpitch gisissowagak ? How
late is the moon?
The answer is, for the first day : Nongom mdila.
tnanito-gisiss, namebini- gisiss, etc.; to-day the month of
January, February, etc., begins to be counted. For the
following days they say : Such a month, or moon, is so and
so many days old. F. i.
Manito-gisiss nongom nijogwanagisi, to-day is the2dof Jan.
" nissogwanagisi, to-day is the 3d Jan.
" mogwanagisi, to-day is the 4th Jan.
ntrtiugwamigisi, to-day is the 5th Jan.
Namebini-gisiss nongom nishwdssogtoa^agisij to-day is the
8th. of February.
" middssogwanagist, to-day is the
10th. of February.
" midassogwanagisi a ah I bcjig, to-
day is the 1 1th. of February.
Ondbani-gisiss nongom ashi n\JQgW&nqLgi#i, to-day is the
llth. of March.
ifi, to-day
is the Hith. of March.
Wdbigon-gisiss nongom ashi wjtiwssogwinagisi, to-day is
the 17th. of .May,
19th of May.
*When they want to express the distincthn botween these two lu-
minanes, they will eay gisiss for the eun, and tibikigisiss, (aight.sun,) for
the moon.
443
Wdbigon-gisiss nongom nijtana dassogwanagisi, to-day is
the 20th of May,
Odeimin-gisiss nongom nijtana dassogwanagisi ashi bejig,
to-day is the 21st of June.
Odeimin-gisiss nongom nijtana dassogwanagisi ashi nij,
to-day is the 22d of June.
Bindkwi-gisiss nongom nijtana dassogwanagisi ashinnaan,
to-day is the 25th of October.
Bindkwi-gisiss nongom nijtana dassogwanagisi ashijang-
asswi, to-day is the 29th of October.
Manito-gisiss nongom nissimidana dassogwanagisi, to-day
is the 30th of December.
Manito-gisiss nongom nissimidana dassogwanagisi ashi
bejig, to-day is the 31st of December.
In writing the date in letters, etc., the name of the place
and of the month is first written, and then the day and year
in figures ; thus :
Wikiotdong, gashkadino-gisiss 23, 1849,
L'Anse, November the 23d, 1849.
Wawiidtanong, min-gisiss 6, 1850.
Detroit, August the 6th, 1850.
Manner of expressing the hour.
The Indians have no proper term for hour in their lan-
guage. They call it dibaigan, which signifies measure in
general, and is applied to several divisions of time and
other things. It means : mile, acre, bushel, yard, foot, etc.
Applied to the twelve hours it is used thus :
For the question :
Anin endasso-dibaiganeg 1 What o'clock is it? Or,
Anin epitch gijigak ? (epitch tibikak ?) How late is
it in the day 1 (in the night ?)
For the answers :
Ningo dibdigan, it is one o'clock ;
nijo dibdigan, it is two o'clock;
nijo dibaigan ashi abita, it is half-past two ,*
444
ni*so dibdigan, it is three o'clock j
mo „ „ four „
ndno „ „ five „
nishwasso ,, „ eight „
midfoso ,, „ ten „
middsso dibaigan ashi dbita, it is half-past ten ;
middsso dibaigan ashi bcjig, it is eleven o'clock ;
middsso dibaigan ashi ?iij, it is twelve o'clock.
Instead of midasso dibaigan ashi nijy they commonly
say : ndwokwc, or, ndwokwemagad, it is noon ; abitd-tibi-
kad, it is midnight.
2. DISTRIBUTIVE NUMBERS.
Bebcjig, -
nenij,
nrnisswi,
neniwin,
nenanan, -
neningotwasswi, -
nenijwasswi,
nenishwdsswi,
JKJangasswi,
memidasswi,
mtmidasswi ashi bejig>
memidasswi ashi nijy •
memidasswi ashi ndnant
1 by 1 ; 1 each, or to each,
2 every time, 2 each, or to each.
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1ft
11
12
15
memidasswi ashijdngasswi 19
nenij tana, - - 20
nenijtana ashi bcjig, - 21
ninissimidana> - - JJO
nriihnidana, - 40
nendnimidana , - - 50
neningotwassimidanaf - 60
nt-n'tjivassimidana, - 70
nenithwdtsimidana, - 80
jejangassimidajia, - 90
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
15
19
20
21
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
445
neningotwak - • 100 ev. tim. 100 each, or to each,
neningotwak aslii bejig, 101 ,, 101
nenijwak - - ' - 200 „ 200
jSjangasswak, - - 900 . 900
memidasswak, - - 1000
1000
2000
3000
11000
nijing memidasswak, - 2000
nissing inemidasswak, - 3000
midatching ashi abid- 11000
ing memidasswak,
midatching ashi nij- 12000 „ 12000 „
ing memidasswak,
nij tuna dassing me- 20000 „ 20000 „
midasswak,
ningotwak dassing me 100000 „ 100000 „
midasswak,
Etc. etc.
EXAMPLES.
Kakina ogoio ininiwag bebejig mit'igotchima?i gi-minawagt
A boat was given to each of these men.
Neniwin masindiganan od aianaivan. They have four
books each.
Naningim bi-ijan, nenij dash bi-widjiio kidji-kwivriscnsag.
Come often, and bring every time two other boys with
thee.
Anishikdbrg nenijweg waboianan gi-dibaamawdwag. The
Indians received in their payment two blankets each.
Memidassossag pakwejiganan od aiawawan. They have
ten barrels of flour each.
I
Nissaieiag neningotwak dasso dibdiffftn aki o gi-gishpina-
donawa. My brothers bought a hundred acres of land
each.
Nissing gi-ijd tashkiibodjiganing, jejdngassimidana dass-
wdtig dash nabagissagon o gi-bman. He went three
times to the mill, and brought ninety boards every time.
446
MemiddsstpapiL ashi ndnan pagdiganan nin gi-bi-nandota-
magog, ncn'ijtdiHi dasswdbik dtish nin gi->ninag. They
came and asked me fifteen nails each, and I gave to each
twenty, (or twenty each.)
-\cnijtana, neni*#imtdana gaic bemddisidjig gi-nihou-ag
endasso-gijigadinig odcnang, nii'gini aidnwgak kite hi
dkosiwin. Twenty or thirty persons died every day in
the city, during the time of cholera.
Rcjnark. All the five Remarks (p. 433-439,) are appli-
cable to Distributive Numbers as well as to Cardinal, as
you see in some of the above Examples.
3. MULTIPLYING NUMBERS.
Abiding, ------
>"ji»g,
niss'mg, ......
niwing, •
- once
- twice
- three t
4t
I
imes,
imes,
)
ningfitwaicking, -
6
)
ny watching, - ...
7
>
nislnratc/iing,
8
>
jdngatching) - -
9
,
middtchingi -
- 10
, t
midatching «.-»•/// abiding,
- 11
»
middtching aski iiijitig,
- 12
»
HI iddirh i n<r f/s/i i jangatching,
1!)
»>
nijtana daxsiiif/, -
n'l/ttinti (/(using <is hi (/hiding,
- 21
n
> »
ii'tjldiia dassing ashi nijing,
.>.)
~ /w,w
j»
nissimiduna (/(losing, - - - -
- :w
M
ni ngotirassi mill diia d<i*sing,
()1)
»>
n'i ngiit iral: dossing i - - - -
- 100
>»
ningotwak dusting <i*lii abiding, -
- 101
»
ningotwcjt daxxing as/ii midatching as/ii nijing, I I '3
///.N-.V//V//,- dfissing, - t}0()
nanwnk d/issi/i .... 500
447
midasswak classing, 1,000 „
midasswak asld nisswak ashi nijtana classing 1,324 „
ashi niwing,
midatching midasswak classing, - - 10,000 „
ningotwak classo midasswak classing, - 100,000 „
Etc., etc.
EXAMPLES.
Nijing ki.ga-dibdkonigonan Kije-Manito. God will judge
us twice.
Kitchitwa Paul naning gi-bashanjeowa, anamiewin ondji.
St. Paul was flogged five times, for religion's sake.
Ningotwak dassing ki windamoninim tchi gimodissiweg,
minotch dash nijing minawa ki gi-gimodim. I tell you a
hundred times not to steal, and yet you have stolen
twice again.
Midatching ashi nissing nin gi-wabama bibonong. I saw
him thirteen times last winter.
Meno-ijiwebisid inini nijwatching pangishin, minawa dash
pasigwi. A just man falls seven times, and rises up
again.
Pierre, nongom tibikak nissing ki gad-dgonwetam kikeni-
miian. Peter, this night thou shalt deny me three times.
4. MuLTIPLYING-DlSTRIBUTIVE NUMBERS.
Ai abiding f
nenijing,
7ienissing,
neniwing,
ntnaning,
neningotwatching,
nentj watching, -
nenishw (itching,
jyangatching, -
memidatching, -
once every time; once each, or to each,
twice every time ; twice each, or to each,
3 times every time; 3 times e., or toe.,
4 4
5
6
7
8
9
10
5
6
7
8
9
10
448
memiddtching ashi 11 times every time ; 11 tim. e., or to e.,
abiding,
memidatching ashi 12 ,, 12 „ „
nying,
memidatching ashi 15 ,, 15 ,, ,,
naning,
nenijtana dassing 20 ,, 20 „ „
nenijtana dassing 21 ,, 21 ,, ,,
ashi abiding,
nenissimidana das- 30 1 ,, 30 ,, ' „
sing,
nenimidana dassing, 40 „ 40 „ „
jcjangassimidana 90 „ 90 ,, ,,
dassing,
neningotwak das- 100 „ 100 ,, „
sing,
neningotwak das- 101 ,, 101 „ „
sing ashi abiding,
neningotwak das- 119 „ 119 „ „
sing ashi mi (latching
ashi jdngatrh I n^,
nenijwak dassing, 200 „ 200 „ „
nenisswak dassing, 300 ,, 300 „ „
jtjangasswak das- 900 ,, 900 „ „
sing,
m&nidasswakdas- 1000 „ 1000 „
ting,
mbnidasswakashi }%M ,, 1234 „ „
nijirtik (ix/ti nix-
si mid an n ilaxxing
mfmidatehing 10,000 „ 10,000
midasswak
mgotwal 100,000 „ 100,000
dassing mi-
Etc., etc.
449
EXAMPLES.
Geget matcJit kwiwisensish mibam ; nenijing, nenissing
gate o gi-papakiteowan iniiv w djl-kwiwisensan. This is
indeed a bad boy ; he struck twice or three times each
of these his fellow-boys.
Nij ningwissag nenanig gi-ijawag odenang. Two of my
sons went to town five times each.
Nissing bi-ijawag endasso-gijigadinig, neniwing dash -mo-
jag nin kikinoamawag. They come three times a day ;
and I teach them their lessons four times every time
(they come.)
Nij masindiganannind aidnan, nenijwatcliing dashja'igica
nin gi-wabandanan. I have two books, and I have read
them already seven times eaoh.
Nenissing nin gi-ganonag. I have spoken three times to
each, (to every one of them.)
Nisswi nind inawemaganag wdssa aiawag, nenishwdtching
dashja'igwa nin mddjibiamaway. Three of my relatives
are far off, and I have already written eight times to
each.
5. ORDINAL NUMBERS.
Netamissing, or nitdm, the first, or first ;
eko-nijing, the second, or secondly ;
eko-nissing, the third, or thirdly ;
tko-niwing, the fourth, or fourthly ;
eko-nananing, the fifth, or fifthly ;
eko-ningottoatching, the sixth, or sixthly;
ehniy watching, the seventh, or seventhly;
eko-nishwdtchir.g, the eighth, or eighthly ;
ckojdngatchii g, the ninth, or ninthly ;
eko-middtching, the tenth, or tenthly ;
eko*ashi-bejig, the eleventh, or eleventhly ;
eko-ashi-nijing, the twelfth, or twelfthly ;
eko-ashi-nissing, the thirteenth, or thirteenthly ;
eko-ashi-jangatching, the nineteenth, or nineteenthly \
450
eko-n'ijtanaweg, the twentieth, or tvventiethly ;
f'ko-n'ijtanaweg ashi bejig, the twenty-first, or twenty-firstly ;
cko-n'tjfaita ashi nijing, the twenty-second, or twenty-se-
condly ;
eko-n'ijtana ashi Hissing, the twenty-third, or twenty-thirdly;
cko-nissimidanaweg, the thirtieth, or thirtiethly ;
eko-niss'un'ulanaweg ashi bejig, the thirty-first, or thirty-
firstly ;
cko-iiiss'tmidana ashi mjing, the thirty-second, or thirty-
secondly ;
c.ko-nits'imidana ashi naning, the thirty-fifth, or thirty-
fifthly.
cko-nimidanaweg, the fortieth, or fortiethly ;
eko-nanimidanairrg, the fiftieth, or fiftiethly ;
eko-ningotwdssimidanawegj the sixtieth, or sixtiethly ;
eko-nijwassimidanaiweg, the seventieth, or seventiethly ;
eko-nisKvxissimidanaweg, the eightieth, or eightiethly ;
eko-jdngassimidanawegi the ninetieth, or ninctirtlily ;
eko-nin§otwakwak, tlic hundredth, or hundredthly ;
eko-ningotwakwak ashi bcjig, the hundred-first, or hundred-
firstly ;
cko-ningotwak ashi nijing, the hundred and second, or
hundred and secondly ;
eko-ningotwak ax/ii nisfiing, the hundred and third, or hun-
dred and thirdly ;
eko-ningotwak ashi. midatehtng ashi brjig, the hundred and
eleventh, or hundred and eleventhly ;
cko-ningotwak ashi •iniilaxxiri at/ii nijing't the hundred and
twelfth, or hundred and twelfthly ;
tko-ningotwak ashimidasswi a.^/ii ///.v.v///if, the hundred and
thirteenth, or hundred and thirtecnthly ;
elttHHingotwak «.v///' •nijltuwm-tr, the hundred and twentieth,
or hundred and twentiethly ;
cko-ningotwak ashi nijtumnrt^ ashi brjig, the hundred and
twenty-first, or hundred and twenty-firstly ;
eko-ningotwak axhi nijtand ashi nijing, the hundred and
twenty-second, or hundred and twenty-secondly ;
451
eko-ningotwak ashi nissimidanaweg, the hundred and thir-
tieth, or hundred and thirtiethly ;
eko-nijwakwak, the two hundredth, or two hundredthly ;
eko-nisswakwak, the three hundredth, or three hundredthly ;
eko-fsngassiMikwak, the nine hundredth, or nine hun-
dredthly :
eko-midasswakwak, the thousandth or thousandthly ;
eko-nijing midasswak, the two thousandth, or two thou-
sandthly.
Etc., etc.
EXAMPLES.
Nitdm iniui Adam kitchi ginwenj gi-bimddisi. The first
man Adam lived very long.
Eko-nissing apdbiwina* namadabi. He sits on the third
bench.
Kitchi gandsongewin eko-niwing Kijt-Manito o gandson-
gewinan. The fourth commandment of God is a great
commandment.
Eko-nijtana ashi Hissing wakdiganan odenag, mi ima en-
daidn. I live in the twenty-third house in the village.
K'tchi nibiwa attwan wedi masindiganan, eko-aslii-nissing
dash Mdawis/iiji. There are a great many books there,
bring me the thirteenth.
Anin iw eko-midasswakwak ashibtjig gagwendjindiwinan?
Which is the thousand and first question ?
Eko-ndnaning omodensan bidon ;wtnijishing mashktki pin-
dtmafjad. Bring here the fifth vial ; there is a good
medicine in it.
Eko-nijing gabeshiwinan mi maidmawi-omjisJiing. The
second encampment is the best of all.
Remark. You see in the above Examples, that the
Otchipwe substantive following the Ordinal Number, is
always in the plural, different from the English, which is
in the singular. The reason for this is, because the Otchip-
45-2
we Ordinal denotes a selection out of several objects. So,
for instance, in the above Examples : Eko-nissing apabi-
winnny the proper sense is : the third of the benches that are
standing there. — Eko-nananing omodensan: the ffthofthe
vials that are placed somewhere. — Eka-nying gabcs/ihri-
nan : the second of all the encampments on a certain route.
Cardinal numbers are frequently transformed into verbs,
which may be called Numeral verb*. This transformation
is performed in two different ways, according to the sub-
stantive to which the numeral verb refers, being different
for each of the two classes of substantives, animate and
inanimate.
1. Numeral Verbs for animate Substantives.
Bejig, one ; nin bejig, I am one, or alone,
ki bcjig, thou art one,
bejigo, he"(she) is one.
Nijt two ; nin nijimin, we af e two of us,
ki n'ijim, you are two,
nijiwagi they are two.
Nlssw'i, three ; nin nissimin, we are three,
ki nissim, you are three,
nissiwag, they are three.
Niwin, four; nin iinrt/nin, we are four of us, etc.
Ndnan, five ; nin ntuuiniinin, we are five.
Ningotwdssu'i , six ; nin ningotwcttchimi*., we are six.
Nijwasswi, seven ; n'm nijwatchi&in, we arc seven.
Nishwdsswi, eight; nin nishwdtcfamin, we are eight.
Jungasswi, nine; ninjdngatchimin, we are nine.
Midusswi, ten ; nin middtchimin, or nin midddatchimin.
we are i
Middsswi ashi bfjig, eleven ; n'in midaddtcliimin ashi brjif;,
we are eleven.
jMifldfxiri. ds/il nij, twelve ; •///// midddatchimin ashi nij,
we are twelve.
Middsswi ashi nistwi, thirteen; nin midddatchimin ashi
nisswi, we are thirteen, etc,
453
Nijtana, twenty ; nin nijtanawtmin, we are twenty of us.
Nijtana ashi bejig, twenty-one ; nin nijtanawtmin ashi bc-
jig, we are twenty-one.
Nissimidana, thirty ; nin nissimidanawemin, we are thirty.
Nijwassimidana, seventy ; nin mjwassimidanawemin, we
are seventy.
Jdngassimidana, ninety ; nin jdngassimidanawemin, we
are ninety.
Ningotwak, a hundred ; nin ningotwdkosimin, we are a
hundred.
Ningotwak ashi bcjig, 101 ; nin ningolwakosimin ashi be-
jig, we are 101 of us.
Ningotw&k ashi midasswi , 110 ; nin ningotwakosimin ashi
midasswi, we are 110.
Ningotwak ashi nijtan't ashi nisswi, 123; nin ningotwak-
osimin ashi nijtana ashi nisswi, we are 123.
Nijwaky 200 ; nin nijwdkosimin, we are 200.
Middsswak, 1,000; nin midassicdkosimin, we are 1,000.
Nijing middsswak, 2,000 ; nijing nin midasswdkosimin.
we are 2,000.
Ndning middsswak, 5,000 ; naning nin midasswdkosimin,
we are 5,000.
Middtchmg middsswak, 10,000 ; midatching nin midass-
wdkosimin, we are 10,000 of us.
Midatching ashi abiding middsswak, 11,000; midatching
ashi abiding nin midasswdkosimin, we are 11,000.
Midatching ashi nissing middsswak, 13,000 ; midatching
ashi nissing nin midasswdkosimm, we are 13,000.
Midatching ashi niwing midasswak ashi nisswak ashi mi-
dasswi ashi nijwasswi, 14,317 ; midatching ashi niwing
nin midasswdkosimin ashi nisswdk ashi midasswi ashi
nijwasswi, we are 14,317.
Nijtana dasso middsswak, 20,000 ; nijtana nin dasso mi-
dasswdkosimin, we are 20,000.
Nijtana dasso middsswak ashi middsswak , 21,000; nij-
tana nin dasso midasswdkosimin ashi midasswak, we
are 2 1, 000.
Nijtana dasso midasswak ashi middsswak ashi nineotwak
29
454
ashi middsswi ashi bejig, 21,111 ; nijtana nin dasso mi-
dasswdkosimin ashi midusmmk ashi. ningotwak axhi mi-
ddsswi ashi bejig, we are 21,111.
Ningotwak dasso midofswak, 100,000 ; ningotwak nin
dasso midasswdkosimni, we are 100,000.
Midasswdk dasso middsswak, 1,000,000; widdsswuk nin
dasso midasswdkosimin, we are a million of people.
Etc., etc.
Remark 1. All these numeral verbs belong to the I. Con-
jugation, and may be conjugated throughout all the tenses
and moods, both in the affirmative and negative forms, in
the plural, (except the first one.)
Remark 2. As a particularity of the Otchipwe language,
we observe here, that these numeral verbs are sometimes
even employed in the singular, F. i. Nissi, he is three,
(three in one, as in the Blessed Trinity.) They also say,
for instance, when a man has a wife and four children :
Ningotwdtchi, he is six. When a widower or a widow has
three children, they will say : Niwi, he (she) is four.
EXAMPLES.
Bejigo eta ninidjdniss, kin dash kmidjdnissqg n'tjiratchi-
wag. I have only one child, but thou hast seven <>f
them.
Ndnanibanig ninidjdnissag, nij dasli gi-nibowag, ?ni dash
nongfim n'l.xshrud rt.ti. I bad fi\c children, Ixit two died,
and so there are now only three.
Kawin midasswdkosisfiwag if<i ovkdodtnang bemddisidjig,
umndtch bdtaXnoiffog, Not only a thousand persons live
in this town, but more.
Middtching ashi ndtn'n« midasswdkosiwag knkina Ofr/n'/i-
weg entfashiwad. The number of tlie Chippewa Indians
is fifteen thousand.
Otdwag dash nhrhin midasswalcosiioog. And the number
of the Otawa Indians is four thousand.
455
Kitchi odenang Wawiidtanong gega nijtana dasso midas-
swdkosiwag bemddisidjig. The number of the inhabit-
ants of the city of Detroit is about twenty thousand.
Nongom gtt-bi-ijadjig kikinoamdding kaivin gi-de-nijtana-
wessiwag. Those that came to-day to school, were not
quite twenty.
Midaddtchiwag nin pijikimag, nin manishtanishimag dash
midadatchiwag ashi niwin, I have ten cows and four-
teen sheep.
2. Numeral Verbs for inanimate Substantives,
Bejig, one ;. bejigwan, one thing.
Nij , two ; nyinon, there are two things.
Nisswi, three ; nissinon, there are three things.
Niwin, four ; mwinon, there are four things.
Ndnan, five ; ndnaninon, there are five things.
Ningotivdsswi, six ; ningotwdtchinon, there are six things.
Nijwasswi, seven ; mjimtc/iinon, there are seven things.
Nishwdsswi, eight ; nishwdtchinon, there are eight things.
Jangasswi, nine ; jdngatchinon, there are nine things.
Middsswi, ten ; midadatchinon, there are ten things.
Middsswi ashi btjig, eleven ; midadatchinon ashi bejtg,
there are eleven things.
Middsswi ashi ndnan, fifteen; midadatchinon ashi ndnan,
there are fifteen things.
Nijtana, twenty ; nijtanawtwan, there are twenty things.
Nijtana ashi bejig, twenty-one ; nijtanawewan ashi bejig,
there are twenty-one things.
Ningotwassimidana, sixty ; ningotwdssimidanawtwan, there
are sixty things.
Ningotwdkwadon, 100.
Ningotwakwadon ashi bejig, 101.
Ningotwdkwadon ashi midasswi, 110.
Nijwakwadon, 200.
Nisswdkwadon, 300.
Midassivdkwadon, 1,000.
456
Midasswdkwadon ashi ningotwak, 1,100.
Nijing midasswdkwadon, 2,000.
Midutching midasswdkwadon, 10,000.
Nijtana dasso midasswdkwadon, 20,000.
Ningotwdssimidana dasso midasswdkwadon,
60,000.
Ningotwak dasso midasswakwadon, 100,000.
Midasswak dasso midasswdkwadon, 1,000,000
of inanimate objects.
Remark. Some of these inanimate numeral verbs, (being
all unipersonal,) belong to the VII. Conjugation, in the
plural, (except the first,) and others to the IX. Conj.
EXAMPLES.
Nijinpn nind adopowinan, ningotwdtchlnon dash nind apa-
biwinan. I have two tables and six chairs.
Oma odenang midddatchinon anamiewigamigon ashi bejig.
In this city there are eleven churches.
Ndnaniniwan* o wakdiganan. He possesses five houses.
Anin endassing ki masinaiganan ? — Nijtanawewan ashi
nisswi. How many books hast thou ? — Twenty-three,
(or, there are twenty-three ) «
Awdshime nibiwa nin nind aidnan ; gcga niwdkwadon nin
masinaiganan. I have more ; I have nearly four hun-
dred books.
ftfidadatchinon Kijc-Manito o ganasongcmnan. There
are ten commandments of God.
* Report to a second third p.crson.
457
CHAPTER VI.
OF PREPOSITIONS.
A Preposition is a word placed before a substantive or
a pronoun, to show the relation between it and some other
word in the sentence.
The word following a preposition, is the complement
thereof, or its object.
There is a great difference, regarding prepositions, be-
tween the Otchipwe language and other languages.
The same preposition is sometimes employed to point
out different relations. We shall see here how the princi-
pal prepositions of the English language, in their different
relations, are given in Otchipwe.
There are in this language scarcely any prepositions
that precede the substantive ; they are ordinarily connected
ivith the substantive which is their complement, forming
with it only one word ; or they precede the verb to which
they refer, and are conjugated with the verb.
We shall see here : I"10- which are the prepositions that
precede the substantive, their complement. lldo- We will
consider the prepositions that are connected with the
substantive, their complement, forming but one word with
it. Ill0- We shall point out the manner, how prepositions
precede the verb, their complement, and are conjugated
with it.
458
I.
The principal Otchipwe prepositions, that precede a sub-
stantive, (and which may properly be called prepositions,)
are the following, viz :
1. Tchigaii or tchig', near, nigh, by, close by, at, to.
EXAMPLES.
Tchigaii tchibdiatigong ffi-nibawiwag K. Marie, K. Jean
gaie. Near the cross (or, by the cross) stood St. Mary
and St. John.
Tchigaii odenang nin gi-gabesliwiin. We encamped near
the village, (or, tchig' odena.)
Tchig' islikote aton iw. Put this to the fire, (near the fire.)
Remark. The abbreviated preposition tchig1 is some-
times connected with its complement, and changes it a
little. F. i., tchig'ikdna, close by the road, or, near the
path; instead of tchig' m'ikana ; tcfiigilcaria 'jingiskin, he
lies near the road ; tckigikana natiiadabiban, he was sitting
by the path. — Tchigatig, near a piece of wood, instead of
tchig' watig ; tchigatig nin namadab, I am sitting by a
piece of wood.
2. Giwitdii, round, around.
EXAMPLES.
Kakina giwitdii kitchigaming nin gi-bimisfikd. I went all
round the lake, (giwitd-lcitchigami.)
Giwittiii or/fnfmir, round the village : xiirituii wigiwawmg,
round the lodge, (or house.)
3. Pindjaii or pindj', in, within, inside of.
EXAMPLES.
Piw/f rtnfiwirtriu-ffinifr, in the church ; pindjaii kitigdningf
in the field, (within the enclosure.)
459
Pindf wikaigan at'magad atewewigamlg. The store is
within the fort.
Remark. The English preposition in is more commonly
expressed by terminations added to the complement, than
by pindf or pindjaii. (See the Examples of No. II.)
4. Kobe or megwa, during, throughout.
EXAMPLES.
Pitchindgo kabe-gijig nin gi-kitclii-anoki. Yesterday 1
have worked hard all day, or during all day.
Kabe-bibon nin gi-dkos. I have been sick all winter,
during all winter.
Nfbinong kabe-nibin gi-babdmadisi. Last year he traveled
during all summer. — Kabe-kikinonowin, during the whole
year, (throughout the year.)
Megwa migdding, during war. Mtgiva ndwokwe-wissining,
during dinner.
5. Ndwaii or nassawaii, between, through, amidst.
EXAMPLES.
Jesus gi-sassagdkwaowa t drib aidti gong nassawaii nij gc-
modishkinidjin. Jesus was crucified between two thieves.
Jesus Jerusaleming gi~ija, nawaii dash Samariing, Galile-
ing gaie gi-ani-bimosse. Jesus went to Jerusalem, and
walked through Samaria and Galilee.
6. Megwe, among.
EXAMPLES.
Megwe anisTiinaben gi-ani-nitawigi. He was brought up
among the Indians.
Kishpin mojag megwe enamlassigog aiaian, kawin weweni
k'i ga-ganawendansin kid anamiewin. If thou lives!
460
always among pagans, thou wilt never keep well thy
religion.
Debeniminang nissimidana ashi nisso bibon gi-bimach'si
mcgm- ,1 iid airinini wan. Our Lord lived thirty-three
years among the Jews.
7. Andmaii or andm' , under, underneath, below, beneath.
EXAMPLES.
Deblndjiged o gi-inan Debenimidjln : Namaddbin nin
kitchinikdng, binish tcJii assagwa jangenimikig anamaii
l;i*idang. The Lord said to my Lord : Sit on my right
hand, until I put thy enemies under thy feet.
ftiwabikok&wininiwag a no in' akltuj anokiwag. The miners
work under ground.
Andmaii adopotffining jinitixliin gf/jfiircns. The cat lies
under the table. Andmaii nibaganing ; under the bed.
8. Ogitchaii or ogitch' on. upon.'
EXAMPLES.
Kcgo ogitchaii nibaganing awi-namadabiken. Don't sit
down upon the bed. Ogitch' adopoivin, on the -table.
Kitclii auxin aidban ogitchaii tchib&gamigong, ga-daji-pa-
gidcnimi/itl Lazure. There was a large stone upon the
sepulchre, where Lnzarus was buried.
Ogitchaii kijabikisiganiitff. On the stove.
Remark. The English preposition on or upon is more
commonly expressed, in the Otchipwe language, by termi-
nations added to its complement, than by ogitchaii or
ogitch'. (See some of the Examples of No. II.)
9. Ajawaii, behind.
EXAMPLES.
Ajawaii wdkaiganing gi-kdsoidiso. lie hid himself be-
hind the house.
461
Remark. The preposition behind is often expressed by
the word which signifies the back. F. i. Nin pikwanang
nibawi, he stands behind me ; (nin pikwan, my back.)
Awenen aw ki pikwanang nemadabid ? Who is sitting
behind thee? (ki pikwan t thy back.)
10. Nakakeia, or inakakeia, towards, to, about. (These
words are always put after the complement.)
EXAMPLES.
Kishpin osam kashkendaman oma aking, gijigong naka-
keia inabin; mi sa wedi ge-jawendagosiian kaginig.
When thou art too much grieved on earth, look towards
heaven ; there thou wilt be happy eternally.
Moniang nakakeia nin wi-ija sigwang. I intend to go to
Montreal (towards Montreal) next spring.
Wdshtanong nakakeia danald. He lives (somewhere) about
Grand River.
Bawiting nakakeia aiadog. He must be (somewhere) about
Saut Ste. Marie.
Remark on No. I.
All the prepositions of this Number are as well adverbs
as prepositions, and most of them rather adverbs than prep-
ositions. 1 put, them here only to show, how the English
prepositions near, by, at, round, in, during, between,
through, among, under, beneath, on, be/iind, towards, etc.,
could be expressed in the Otchipwe language, although
such expressions are not quite congenial to the language.
This language has scarcely any distinct prepositions; they
are commonly marked in the termination of the substantive
which is the complement of the English preposition. (This
will be better understood after the study of the following
number.)
II.
Let us consider now the prepositions that are conncrtrd
with the substantive which is their complement, forming
with it but one word. Or rather, (to speak Otchipwe
grammatically,) let us see, how the Otchipwe language, in-
stead of using distinct prepositions, adds certain termina-
tions to substantives, by which English prepositions are ex-
pressed.
These English prepositions are : at, in, from, out of, on,
to. The Otchipwe language expresses them by the following
five terminations, which are annexed to the complements of
the said prepositions; viz: g, iig, ang, ing* vug. — Kxans-
ples will illustrate the matter.
1. termination, p. Kitigtyininiwag kitrjii anokiu-ag o kit-
iganiwang. Farmers work hard in their fields. (O kit-
iganiwan, their fields : o kitiganiwang, in their fields.)
O wigiicamiwarig ohdjibdwagj they come <nit of their
houses, (or lodges.) (O wigiwamiwan, their houses; o
wgiwamiwang, out of their houses.)
O wigiirfiiHiirruicr aitnrtig, they are in their houses. (O
Wlgilffcumwan, their houses; o wigitra nihrang, in their
houses.-)
Nib ing. in summer. (Nibin, summer.) lliln.n
winter. (Ribon, winter.)
2. termination, ng. (tigning nibingbimadisiwag, fishes li\c
•t/ithe water. (Xibi, water; ni/ting, in the water.)
Sibing nin gi-bimishkdmin.^ \ve traveled (in a boat) on a
river, (tfibi, river ; .v/'///ng, on a river, or in a river.
Kitchigantivg /•/' ga-bimQ8hvnint we will sail nn the lake
(Kit eft garni ^ lake, kitr.higdmiug, on, or /'// the lake.
kiwakwfi nitdm nin wi-ija, ydnima dash
463
itigojiwak'mg. I will first go to England, and then to
France. (Jagandshiwaki, England; Jaganashiwaking,
"to, (in, or from,) England. Wcmitigojiicaki, France ;
Wemitgojiwaking,' to, (in, or from,) France.
Jaganashiwaking nind ondjiba, I cqme/rora England.
Jagandshiwak ng danisi, he lives in England.
Jominabong, in the wine. (Jominabo, wine.)
Odenang, in, to, from, the village or town. (Odena,
village, town, city.)
3. termination, ang. Wc~oncn eteg oma mashkimodzng'*
What is in that bag 1 (MasJikimod, bag.)
Nin pik "rmang nin g'-pakitcog, he struck me on my
back. (N n pikwa .», my back.)
Min ondjigd n otdu-agang, matter is running out of his
ear. (Otdwa-j, his ear.)
Mini attni otdicagang, there is matter in his ear.
Oni&ang, in, or on, his arm. (Onik, his arm.)
Nisidamg, in, or on, my foot. (Nisid, my foot.)
Omissadang, in, or on, his belly. (Omissdd, his belly.)
4. termination, ?'??£•. Anishinobe andkaning namadabi wis-
sinid, nin dash apabiwin'ing nin namadab, adopowining
dash nin wissin. The Indian sits on a mat when eating,
but I sit on a chair, and eat on' a table. ( And k tin, a
mat; apdbiwin, a chair ; adopowin, a table.)
Ninindfmg, in my hand. (Ninindj, my hand.)
Mikwdming, on the ice. (Mikwdm, ice.)
Wigiica?nmg, in a lodge, (or housej. (Wigiwam, lodge.)
Jerusalem'mg, in or from Jerusalem.
Kitigan'mg nind ondjiba, I come from the field. Kiti-
ga?i\ng nind ija, I am going to the field, (Kitigan^
field, garden.)
464
5. termination, oug. Meno-ijivx&isidjig pijignng ta-ij<nc-
ag. The good one will go to heaven. (Gijig, heaven,
sky, day.)
jion^mn tlnxh 7vV/»r/»-on«r iri-ijn. lie started from L'Anse,
went to Detroit, and now he intends to go to Quebec.
(Wikivcd, L'Anse; 1\'airiiiitan, Detroit ; Xcbek, Que-
bec.)
TchibaiatlgGngl on the cross. (Tchiltaiatig, cross.)
Akikong, in the kettle. (Akik, kettle.)
Oshkinjigong, in liis eye, or face. (Oshkinjig, his eye,
or face.
Remarks on No. II.
You see that the same termination can express sei
prepositions ; as, for instance, in the second termination,
where Jagandshiwakiug can mean : ///, to, Jr<»n, J-'mr-
land. The verb must decide, which of the three prepo-
sitions you hnve to employ, when yon translate from
Otchipwe into ]'"nixlish.
The same five terminations are also employed to render
in Otchipwe the Knirlish phrases that express comparison,
arid contain the words //7v, or r/.v-r/.v. We will consider
-ome E\;iinp!( s on each of the above five terminations.
1. term. Nibing iji lijatc -tion^om, it is warm to-day like
in summer, or as warm as in summer. (Ortnabi)iifin iji
kijiitt'.)
Bibong iji I;i.<xinfnn(itfii(I jii'igii'ii, it is alreatly cold like
in winter. (( )r, brlnm^in ij'i kidsinamogad.)
Jlibong ijiiiriirirutl, it looks like winter. (Or, be-but
nag wad.)
L2. term. A/A.'nij //' t>nin^tnni /'//•, this liquid is as clear
(clean) as water.
465
Jominabong ip^gwad, it tastes like wine.
Anishinabeng gi-bimadisi Kijc-Manito oma aking, God
lived on earth in the form of a man (like a man).
Oshkinaweug iji kijika aw akiwesi, this old man walks as
fast as a young man.
3. term. Mashkimodzng ijinagwad n'n papagiwaian, my
shirt looks like a bag.
Kitawagang iji ginwamagad iw, this is as long as thy
ears.
4. term. Anamiewimng apitendagicadon mino nagamonan.
good hymns are of as high a value as prayer.
.Assming iji mashkaw.tmagad iw, this is as hard as a
stone.
Matchi manitokewining iji manadad bishigwadisiwin.
fornication is as bad (as great a sin) as idolatry.
5. term. Wawiiatanong iji mitchamagad iw odena, that
city is as large as Detroit.
Mitigong ijinagwad 6w, this looks like wood.
Gega ajaweshkong iji ginwamagad ki mokoman, thy
knife is almost as long as a sword.
III.
All the other prepositions of the Otchipwe language are
connected with verbs, in a manner altogether peculiar to
this language. As their are no general rules for this connec-
tion, t must be acquired by use.
The following Examples on some of the prepositions of
this description, will facilitate to the learner the acquire-
ment of their correct use.
466
1. Ondjl, (In the Change * wendji,) for, for the sake of,
because, on account of, relating, regarding, respecting,
in regard to; therefore, by reason of, through.
EXAMPLES.
Kin nin bi-ondji-ija oma, I come here for thy sake, on
account of thee.
Kije-Manito ondji-anwcnindison gi-bata-diian, repent of
thy sins for God's sake.
Nitam aniskinabeg gi-batordodamowad, mi wendji-nibo-
wad kakina anishinabeg ; because the first men sinned,
therefore all men die.
Wtgoncn (ipitrhi riendji-kashkendaman gi-nibo
Kcgo iw weridji-kbshkendangen ; jdwendagosi
Why art thou so sorry for the death of thy son ? Don't
be so sorry for it, he is truly happy.
Debeniminang 6 jawerdjigewin nin. gad-ondji-boriiton
nin matclti •ijiircbishrhi ; through the grace of the Lord
I will abandon my bad conduct, (bad behavior.)
2. Eko-, ga-ako-, gcd-ako-, since, ago, all the time, c\< i
since, as long as. •
EXAMPLES.
Ja'fgira nisso bibonagadiiQ ga-ako-madjad, he left, here
these three years ago.
Knh'nin l><il;<in ijinagwodeko+iaian oi,m, all is changed
here since my arrival.
Eko-bimtidisiidn mcjin^ /•/' ininn "(maimi'tni ; thou took-
est well care of me all my lilrinnc, (since the beginning
of my life.)
* For the understanding of the grammntical term •'• Change," I refer
you to the end of the I. Conjugation, p. 128.
467
Eko-libonagak apine kid akos, thou hast freen sick ever
since the beginning of winter.
Ged-ako-bimadisiidn, as long as I shall live. Eko-aki-
wang, since the creation of the earth.
3. Islikwd-, gi-ishkwa- , ga-ishkiva-, ged-ishkwa-, after, or
the end of something.
EXAMPLES.
Gi'ishkwa-anamiegijigak, after Sunday ; gi-ishkwd-n&w-
okweg, after noon.
Aniniwapi ged-ishkwd-akiwang ? When will the end of
the wotld be 1
Kijc-Manito eta o kiktndan api gefl-ishkwa-akiwaninig.
God only knows when the end of the world will be.
Gi-ishkwa-wissiniidn nin ga-madja, I will start after din-
der, (after eating.)
Remark on No. Ill,
These prepositions again are rather adverbs. We w'll
do better to consider the rest of them under the head of
Adverbs.
The following remarks and examples may yet be useful
in the Chapter of Preposititons.
The following English prepositions : wit1!, without, to,
(before names of persons,) before, except, excepting, as for,
according to, against, instead of, are expressed in Otchip-
we in a very peculiar manner, which cannot be established
by rules, but must pe learned from use. The Examples
given here below will make you understand a little this par-
ticular manner af expressing prepositions.
1. With. The just ones will go to heaven with soul and bo-
dy, after resurrection. Kegi»otchitdg, kegi*wiiaw gaie
468
ta-ijdwag meno-ijiwebisidjig gi-abitchibawad .
I came in the house w th my snow-shoes on ; kegi-dgim
II in gi-pindige wakaiganing.
Thou comest with thy axe ; kegi-wagdkwad ki bi-ija.
I am married with this woman ; nin widigema aw ikwt.
I eat with somebody, nin widopama awiia. 1 sleep with
somebody, nin wibema awiia. I sit down with him,
(her,) nin widabima. I am standing with him, (her,)
nin widjigdbawitawa. I walk with somebody, nin wid-
jiica awiia. I write with a pen, migwan nind awa ojibii-
geidn.
I struck him with my hand, ninindj nin gi-pakiteowa .
Thou struckest him with a stone, assin in gi-pakiteowa.
He struck him with a stick, mitig o gi- pak te >wan.
I made a hole in the ice with an axe, nin gi-twaige wag-
dkwad.
2. With ut. (This preposition is always expressed in
Otchipwe with a verb in the negative form.)
He is a man without malice, aw inini kawin manjinini-
wagisissi.
Those that live without the knowledge of God, are un-
happy ; kitimdgisiwag kektnimassigog Kije-Maniton.
One cannot live without eating, kawin dd-oimadisissim
wissinjissing.
Nobody can see without eyes, kawin awiia dd-wabisis
oshkitijigos ig.
I could not write without hands, kawin nin da-gashki-
tossin tch ojibiigeidn unindfitsiwdn.
:J. To, (before nouns of persons,) I will return to my fa-
ther, noss n n wi-ijdnan.
Sinner, return to the Lord thy God, and to Jesus thy Sa-
vior ; baiata-ijiwebisiian, awi-nasikaw neiab Debendji-
469
ged ki Kije-Mznitom, Jesus gaie Ga-bimddjiik.
He is gone to his parents, onigiigon od ijanan.
4. Before. Nothing is hidden before God, kawin gego
kadjigadessinon cndssamid Kijc-Manito.
The hypocrites of old stood before the houses of the city,
when praying; gaidt ga-bi-anamiekasodjig nanibawiba-
nig enassamissininig wdkaiganan odenang enamiewad-
jin.
We shall all appear Iff ore Jesus, to be judged ; kakina ki
ga-nibawimin tndssamabid Jesus, tchi dibakonigoiang.
Before me, (when I am standing,} enassamigdbawiidn.
Before thee, (when thou art sitting,) endssamabiian.
Before him, (when he is lying,) endssamishing, etc., etc.
5. Except, excepting. He works every day, except Sunday ;
endasso-gijigak anoki, enamiegijigadinigin eta kawin.
I would willingly lose all, except my religion ; nin dd-
minwendam kakina gego tchi wanitoidu, nind anamiewin
eta kawin.
All my children died, except the oldest one; kakina nin-
idjanissag gi-nibowag, scs'ikisid eta ishkwane.
We are all sick in the house, except my mother ; kakina
nind dkosimin endashiiang, ninga eta kawin.
6. As for. . As for me, (for my part,) I will not go where
they dance ; nin win kawin nin wi-ijassi nimiiding.
As for him, (for his part,) he has no objection; winigo
kawin win ningot ikitossi.
As for thee, thou hast a good knowledge of religion, but
thy brother 'knows nothing of it ; kin win ki kikendaji
weweni anamicwin, kishime dash kawin gego o kikendan-
sin.
As for your work, I will speak to you to-morrow about
it; iw dash kid anokiwiniwa ejiwcbak, wdbang ki ga-
windam minim.
30
470
7. According to. Lord, let all be according to thy will ;
Debenimiian, apegixh- tnendam&n ijiwtbak kakina.
I regulate my life according to thy instructions ; nind
ijissiton nin bimidixhcin cji-gagtkitniian.
According to thy word ; ckitoian. Accoording to the
reports of people ; ckitowad ani$hinabegt or hewadisidyig.
Live according lo the commandments of God, and you
will be happy ; cji-gundsongcd Kijc-Manito, iji-bunu-
disiiog, mi dash tchi jawendagosiieg.
8. Against. Who is not with me, is against me ; aw w«-
djiicissig nind agonwctag.
He goes away against my will; minotch madja anogin-
aamawag.
He that acts against the will of God, is a sinner ; aw ai-
agon wet air ad Kije-Manitpn , batd-iji wcbisi.
Never do anything against the injunctions of thy religi-
ous instructor ; kcgo wika gcgo dodangen eji-ginaamok
enamie-gagikimik.
9. Instead of. Thou wouldst not give to thy child a stone
instead of bread; kuirin ki tla-d-.idanxi 'ur trlii m'massi-
wad kfriidjtiniss pakwejigtirnaa, mcshkwat dash axsinin
tchi nt'indd.
Instead of happiness which the sinner endeavors to pro-
cure, he will find real misery ; baidtu-i jiic<'l>ixid kawin
jawcnflagD.siin'ti o gtid-anmsin /iciif/aict-nda tig, mcxhkirat
gwaidk IcUlinii^hiiri n o g<t-inik<in.
Instead of a book thou givest me a little picture ; kawin
masinaigan ki myissi, mcshkwat masinitcliigans ki mij.
471
CHAPTER VII.
OF ADVERBS.
An Adverb is a word joined to a verb or to an adjective,
and sometimes to another adverb, to denote or modify some
circumstance respecting it. So, for instance, when we say,
aw mini kitchi akosi, this man is very sick ; the adverb
kitchi, very, modifies the verb, akosi, he is sick, and de-
notes how the man is sick.
Adverbs may be divided into various classes, according
to their signification. We will mention here some of each
class, with short Examples, to facilitate the use of this part
of speech.
1. Adverbs denoting manner.
Wewtni, well, rightly, correctly.
Kislipin gego ojitoian, weweni ojiton ; when thou art
doing something, do it well.
Weweni ojibiigen ; write correctly.
Iw epitendagwak tchi ojitong, apitcndagwad weweni tchi
ojitong ; what is worth doing, is worth doing well.
Mdmanj, bad, negligently.
Mamanj o gi-ojitonawa. They made it negligently, bad.
472
Kego mdmanj kitigckcn ; don't farm so negligently.
Beka, slowly, softly, easily, not loud.
Beka bimosscn, walk slowly.
Kishpin awiia wi-dnwenimad, beka ganoj. If thou wilt
reprimand somebody, speak to him gently.
Bisan, still, quietly.
Bisdn abiiog, kwiwiscnsidog ! Be still, boys.
Bisan ima numaddl/i kctbc-gijig, kit win anokisi. lie is
sitting there quietly all day, he does not work.
Naegatch,(\\ns the same signification as beka.)
Agdwa, hardly, scarcely, a little.
Agawa nin gashkiton U'i-bimosscia?r, niiul akos. 1 can
hardly walk, I am sick.
Agawa jagandshimo, he can talk a little English.
Agawa nin gi-gashkid, I could scarcely prevail upon
him. . .
Kitchi, very.
Nin kitclii mino aid, nin kitchi jawendagos. I am very
well, I am very happy.
Tebinak, (has the same signification as mdmanj.)
Scsika, or tchisika, suddenly, all at once, subitaneously.
Sesika gi-nibo, he died suddenly.
Kego fir.xikf/ ombinaken ^r^o kiccsigicang. Z)on't Jift up
suddenly any heavy ol)ject.
Gega, almost, nearly, about.
Nin gi-akov, <r<^« nin »i-nib. I was sick, I almost died.
Gega tiiitgotirak dasso bibonagisi. He is nearly a hun-
dred years old.
473 ,
Gega nijtana, gega nissimidana. About twenty, about
thirty.
Memindage, especially, principally, very.
Enamiadjig memindage da-jajawendjigewag. Christians
ought to be especially charitable.
Memindage kitimishki, he is very lazy.
Binisika, unprovoked, without reason, spontaneously.
Binisika nislikddisi aw inini. This man is angry un-
provoked.
Kawin w'ika binisika gego nin minigossi. He never gives
me anything spontaneously.
Gwaidk, justly, uprightly, straight.
Gwaidk bimddisin, Jci ga-jawendagos. Live uprightly,
and thou wilt be happy.
Gwaiak wedi ani-ijada. Let us go straight there.
Apitchi, extremely, exceedingly, quite, most, entirely.
Apitchi jawendjige Debendjiged. The Lord is most
merciful.
Apitchi dkosi ningd. My mother is quite sick.
Kissaie apitchi bakdn ijiwebisi nongom. Thy brother
changed entirely.
Awdndjis/i, purposely, notwithstanding a prohibition.
Nind dno-ginaamawa tclii ijassig, awandjish dash ija.
I forbid him to go, but he goes notwithstanding my pro-
hibition.
Awandjish bdpiwag. They laugh, although forbidden.
Napdtch, wrongly, not in the right order.
Kakina napatch o gi-atonawa. They put all wrongly,
(nothing in its due place.)
17J
Anishd, vainly, without effect, without reason, falsely, for
nothing, gratis.
Wegonen ba-ondji-ijaicff oma ? AnisJid. What you
come for here ? Nothing.
Anisha m'tgiweiog. Give it for nothing, gratis.
Mcmeshkwat, alternately, by turns, mutually, one alter
another.
Memeslikwat nagamoda. Let us sing alternately.
Jajaweriindiiog mcmeshkwat. Be charitable mutually
to each other.
Memeshkwat ajeboiciog, row by turns.
Kcgo kahina nidinutri gigitokegon ; mcnn'uhkicat gigi-
toiog. Don't speak all at one time ; speak one after a-
nother.
2. Adverbs denoting interrogation.
Anin? How?
Anln ('ji-l)imadisiian ? How dost tliou do 1
Anin ('jnilkadamcg <nr ? Jlow do you call this ?(for inani-
mate objects.)
Anin fjinikancg cue 1 How do you call this ? (for animate
objects.)
Wegonen ? What ?
ll'rgonen iw ? What is that ?
Wegonen ba-1(tl;<'>n(nn<in kinidjing ? \\'hat dost thou
hold in thy hand coming lin. '
Wegonen wcnilji-inairint n I AVhat art thou crying for?
Ania/urin? Why? What is the reason? (There is al-
ways a reproach contained in this interrogation.)
475
Anishwin bi-ijassiwan anamiewigamigong ? Why dost
them not come to church ?
Anishwin mojag dajimad kidj* anisliinabe 1 Why dost
thou always speak ill of thy neighbor ?
Na? Dost thou hear me ? or, do you hear me? or, is it so ?
Id ga-bos ganabatcli wabang, na 1 Thou wilt perhaps
embark to-morrow, is it so ? or, wilt thou not ?
Kaw'm ki kikehclansinawa maslii gc-dodamcg, na ? You
don't know yet what you shall do, do you ? or, is it so ?
Anin ekiloicg? na ? What you say? do you hear me?
Wa ? What? (This interrogating adverb is only used to
answer a call interrogating ; or lo request a repetition of
what was said, but not understood by the person spoken
to.)
John !—Wa 1 John !— TFhat 1
Wabang na ki wi-losl- — Wai Wilt thou embark to-
morrow ? — What ?
Anindi? Where?
Anindi aidwad iwngom ga-matchi-'bimadisidjig aking ?
Where are now those that led a bad life on earth ?
Anindi koss ? Anindi kigd? Where is thy father?
Where is thy mother ?
Anindi aidd Dcbcniminang Kijc-Manito ? Where is God
our Lord?
Aniniwapi ? When?
Aniniwapi gcd-ishkwa-ak'iwang ? When will be the end
of the world?
Aniniwapi gc-nibowad ki tchitchdgonanig ? When will
our souls die ?
Aniniwapi ga-bi-ijad, Jesus oma aking ? When came
Jesus on earth/
476
Anin dassing ? How often ?
Anin dassing ge-niboian ? How often shalt thou die ?
Anin dassing gc-dibakonigoian ? Hew often wilt thou
be judged ?
Aning dassing ga-ijdwad Moniang ? How often have
they been in Montreal ?
Anin minik ? How much ?
Anin minik ge-dibaamawind enamiad, kishpin wru-fnt
anokitawad Debendjigenidjin 1 How much will the
Christian be paid, if he serves well the Lord ?
Anin minik ga-minad aw ketimdgisid inini? How
much hast thou given to that poor man?
3. Adverbs denoting affirmation.
E* yes.
E nange ka, yes certainly. E nange, O yes.
Anmgwana, certainly, to be sure.
Ki kikendan na ga-ikitoian pitchinago 1 AningwaiM,
kawin nin wanendansin. Dost thou know what thou
hast said yesterday? Certainly, I did notTorget it.
Geget, verily, truly, yes indeed.
Ki gi-windamawa na ga-i urn tin? Gegct. Didst thou tell
him what I said to thee ? Yes.
Gegd bitimdgisi, he is poor indeed ; or, he is truly mis-
erable.
Gcget kid inininim. Verily I say unto you.
* This affirmative adverb cannot be expressed exactly in wrilinp ; it
must be heard. I have seen different essays to write it, but they are de-
ficient, because it is impost-iMc to ^ivo it rorrer.tly. Wlirn I saw that,
I adopted the simplest way of writing it, by tlip sinplo letter e ; only to
signifiy that the adverb which is used for njjinnalion, is to be pro-
nounced here. I remark here at the s:une time, that, the Indians will use
this affirmative adverb «, where we would s;iy in Kn^lish no. F. i. Knu*-
in na kishime wi-bi-ijassi 1 E. Will thj brother not , come ] Ao. This
is an abbreviated answer; the whole would be, E, kawin
yes it is so as you say, he will not come.
477
4. Adverbs denoting negation.
Ka, or kawin, no, not.
Kid akos na 1 Ka ; kawin nind akosissi. Art thou sick ?
No, I am not sick.
Ka bdpish, or kawin bapish, not at all.
Kawin bapish wi-bi-ijassi. He will not come at all.
Nind ano ganona, kawin dash bapish wi-gigitossi. I
talk to him, but he will not speak at all.
Kawin bapish gego Id kikendansi. Thou knowest no-
thing at all.
Kawessa, it won't do, T cannot, no, sir.
Ki wi-mij na joniia 1 Kawessa. Wilt thou give me
money ? No, sir.
Nind ano wlkwatchiton ; kawzssa dash. I endeavor to do
it ; but I cannot.
Ka wika, or, kawin wika, never.
Kawin wika ishkotewaboo minikwessin. He never drinks
ardent liquor.
Ka wika nind akosissi. I am never sick.
Ki tchitcluigonanig kawin wika ta-nibossiwag. Our souls
will never die.
Ka gego, or, kawin gego, nothing, (for inanimate objects.)
Kawin gcgo o wabandansin. He sees nothing.
~Wegonen nendawabandaman ? — Kawin gego. What art
thou looking for ? — Nothing.
Kawin ningotchi, nowhere.
Kije-Manito kawin ningotchi ishkwa-aiassi, misiwc aia.
God is nowhere absent, he is everywhere.
Kawin ningotchi nin wi-ijdssi. I will go nowhere.
Ka niashi, or, kawin mashi, not yet.
Kawin mashi s'igaandawassi. He is not yet baptized.
na ? — Ka masJii. Arc they gone? — Not
yet.
Kau'in mftsJii nammidana ki dasst-libonagisissi, Abra-
ham dash 1:1 gi-irtthuma ? Thou art not yet fifty years
old, and tliou hast seen Abraham ?
Kawin girctrh, not much.
Kan-in giirfrh tf/,v*</'.v.v/. He is not much sick.
Kawin gwctch iiin ^/-.v/'ir/'.v/'.v.s-/'. I was not much afraid.
Kegot (expression of prohibition,) don't, never do.
Kcgo ijakcn ircdi. Don't go there.
Kcgo icika rnin-ikwekcn ishkottwabo. Never drink ar-
dent liquor.
Kego gimodikcn, kego g'nrajiiinokcn. Don't steal, don't
lie.
-">. Adcerbs denoting place.
O/;m, here.
Onijitffin oma. It is pleasant here.
Apitchi gigfaka oind rianingotinong* Sometimes there
is plenty offish here.
Kiti*H$gisiit>ag om.a c'Hidjjg kitiinJ u\«'i. Those tliat live
here are poor, Ix'cairse they arc la/v.
fnuf, iccdi, iiridi, tliere.
Iveidi at /i iri-ijf/, mi dnxlt im<i ivcjdif i^c-u-i-ani'mn. 1 \vill
go there and always rcinaia there.
J\i kitindgitimin omd akin*; in-di dttxh giji»onir kt
g&j&toenddgosimin. We, arc miserable here on earth;
but there in heaven we will be hapj>\
f)nji, in, at: from. (In llie Vhangr it makes r/idtyi.)
(j Ilrlhlr.lu-m'uig gi-ft"j'-uigi. Jcsns was born in
Bet bleb
l\i-ln-knn« r/fiji 'mini ; Mon'mii" daji ikwr.. A man from
Quebec : a woman from Montreal.
479
Kitimagisi kitclti bataduwining cndaji-bimadisid. He
who is living in great sins, is miserable.
Pindig, in ; (in a house or other building, or in some
vessel.)
Anindi koss ? — Pindig aia. Where is thy father ? — Jle
is in.
Pindig anoki. He works in the house.
Kabe-bibon puidig aidwag pijikiwag. The oxen are all
winter in the stable.
Pindjaiit inside, (In the interior of a building or vessel.)
Kawin ma s/i > p'nidjn ii bjitchigade&swo* anam&wigQAnig.
The church is not yet finished inside,
Memindagc onijixhin plndjnli ow u-akaigcni. This house
here is very fine inside.
Agwatcli'ing, out, (out of doors.)
Agwatclihig ijada. Let us go out,
Agwatcliing 'nibcuciwag. They are standing out of doors.
Sana gad agwatching nibdng biboiig. It is hard to sleep
out of doors in winter.
Agwatchaii, outside.
Ki wdkaigan kitcM nunwdbaminagwad agwdtdiaii. Thy
house looks beautiful outside.
OshJcinagwad nin masindigan agatchai'i. My book
looks new outside.
Agaming, on the other side, on the opposite shore.
Agdming oudjibdwag. They come from the other side,
(of a river, lake, etc.)
Agdming nin wl-ija nongom. I will go to the other side
to-day,
Agaming, on the beach.
Agaming keiabi atewan nind aiiman. My things are yet
on the beach.
Kit r hi went jishid jig assimnsag aidwag agaming. There
are beautiful agates on the beach.
480
Aganung nin gi-mikdn ow. I found this on the beach.
Oiiddssagam, on this side, (of a river, lake, etc.)
Onddssagam ta-bi~ijdw>ag no-ngom agttmirg ciadjig.
The folks of the other side will come to this side to-day.
Nawdtch brftctinowag Ifemddisidjig onddssagam, again-
ing dash. There are more persons living on this sido
than on the other.
Awdssagam, on the other side, (of a river, lake, etc.)
Nawdtch gigoika awdssagam, «md daxli. There is more
plenty of fish on the other side than here.
Awdssagam mojag aiwk't. He works always on the
other side.
Etawagam, on both sides, (of a river, lake, etc.)
Etawagam aidicag cnamiadjig. There are Christians
on both sides.
Etawagam mawddi&hiwe omd ba-ijddjin. He makes
visits on both sides, when he comes hero.
Offidaki, on a hill or mountain.
Ogiddki 11 in, wi-ijd. 1 will fjo on the hill.
OgiddkTkitigt. He has his field on the hill.
Ogiddki tdwag. They live on the hill.
Nissdki, down hill, on the foot of a hill or mountain.
Nlssdki ija. lie is gone down hill.
Nissdki. ati'ii'fin kukina wakdiganai*. All the houses are
on the foot of the hill.
IVassa, far, far off.
Wdsxa un(ljih;iiriiif. They conie from far.
h'ifr/ii //V/.V.STA gi-ijfi, kairin niinnu'd la-bi-giwcstf. lie is
gone very far off; he will come back no more.
ISStho, near by.
Jlf-shn nin jm^ifltur a ntin. ^\ 'c set our nets near by.
Ili'tho nin Lti-nndji-ii'dbamd. I saw him near, from a
small distance.
481
Besho aidn, kego wassa ijaken. Remain near here j
don't go far.
Tibishko, opposite, over against.
Tibishko kikinoamddiwigamig tndagog nin dd?nin. We
lodge (or dwell) opposite the school house.
Tibishko k'l tclii jingwak patakisod nin gi-nibaw. I stood
opposite the great pine-tree.
Tibishko also signifies, equal, like, similar, but then it is
an adjective.
Ningotchi, somewhere.
Ningotchi ijd, kawin oma aidssi. He is gone somewhere,
he is not here.
Ningotchi nin gi-aton nhid agawateon, kawin nin mi-
kansin. I put somewhere my umbrella ; I cannot find it.
G. Adverbs denoting direction.
Ishpiming, up, up stairs ; on high.
Ishpiming indbin. Look up, (on high.)
Ishpiming nin wi-ijd awi-nibaidn. I'll go up stairs to
sleep.
Ishpiming gijigong nind indanenimag ninidjdnissag. I
think (believe) that my children are on high in heaven.
Tabashish, down, low ; below.
Osam tabashish nin namddab. I am sitting too low.
Kawin gwaidk ki gi-atossin ow ; tabashish ki da-aton.
Thou hast not- put this in its due place ; thou oughtst to
put it below.
Nigan, foremost, in advance ; beforehand.
Bejig nig an ta-bimosse. One will walk foremost.
Kakina mgan ki gi-windamugonan ged-ijiwebak. He
told us all beforehand what shall come to pass.
Kawin onijishinsinon <igan tchi dibaamawad kid ana-
kitagew'nin''m. It is not good, (thou dost not well,) to
pay thy workman in Advance.
482
, behind, back.
K&abi hlikii'ilang aidwag* They are behind, (or back
tliere.)
XingutcM ijaiang, mojag irfikn-tiang ki hi-MOssf. When
we are going somewhere, ihou walked always behind.
Remark. These four adverbs are frequently followed by
the adverb, nakakeia, which makes them to be the more,
" adverbs denoting direction." This nalcaL'tia correspond;-
exactly with the syllable ward, (or ward*,) which is com-
monly annexed to English adverbs denoting direction, as
Tshpiming, up ; ishpiming nakaktia, upward.
i, down ; taba&hish nakaktia, downward.
, before; Jiigan uakakvici, forward.
Ishkweiang, back : ishkwciang nakakcia, bakward.
This adverb, nakal;<'xiy corresjxnuis with the Enirli>lr
ward, also in other adverbs formed from substantives, a*
Homeward, endaidn nakakriu , (the Otchipwe verb varying
according to thfe person.)
Heavenward, g'tjigong 'nak<ikt'i<i.
Hell ward, andmakamig nakalccia.
7. Adccrbs daiotiii'r time.
Ningoting, once.
Ningvtinir «w 'mini nin kitrhi mln'> didagoban. That
man did me once a great good service.
. Ningoting ki gd-uil). 'J'hou shalt once die.
\in ^oting nin ga-jfitcki-jawencjagos. Once I will bo
very happy.
Piinima, afterwards ; not before.
Panima giiijKkiudriqi&Jiiniiang ij.ikan. Go after din-
ner.
Kigijr.b jiitfiin (IIHDH'HI n, paniiiKi dat'i viadji-anokin. In
the morning pray first, and afterwards begin to work.
483
Panima wabang ; panima s'tgwang. Not before to-
morrow ; not before next spring.
Nakawe, first.
Nakawe pi&indawisJun, panima ki gad-ikit ira-ikitoian.
First listen to me, afterwards thou wilt say what thou
hast to say.
Nakawe ndnagatawcndan, tchi bica glgitoian. Think
first, then speak.
Bwa, or bwa ?nashi, before.
Kijc-Mamto o gi-migiwenabanino gandsongewinan, bwa
bi-nigid Jesus. God had given his commandments be-
fore Jesus was born.
Apitchi kitchi n'tbiwa anisldndbcg gi-aiabariig owd
aking, k'mawind bird cddidng. Exceedingly many peo-
ple had been here on earth, before we were.
Tchi bwa bib ong ; tchi bwa nibing. Before winter ; be-
fore summer.
Mashi ndnge, not yet.
Maslii ndnge gtgo o kikendan. He knows nothing yet.
Mashi ndnge nin nibwakd. I am not yet wise.
Megwa, during, when, while.
Megwa ablnodjihoid gi-s'tgaandawa. He was baptized
when a child, (during childhood.)
Apegish gwaidk ijiwebisiian megwa bimadisiian aking.
I wish to behave well while living on earth, (during my
lifetime on earth.)
Megwa ojibiigc ; megwa nagamo. He is writing ; he is
singing.
Wa'iba, soon.
Gego wa-migiweianin, wa'iba migiwen. When thou art
to give something, give it soon.
Aw wdiba mdgiwed, nijing mtgiwe. He that gives soon,
gives double.
Wa'iba bi-giwen. Come back soon.
484
late.
\Vtka go nin nibdmin. We go to bed quite late.
Wt.ka gi-dnteenindiso, nongom dash gwttidk anamia.
He repented late, but now he is a good Christian.
Wika gi-mddjtucag. They started late.
Bmish, till, until.
Mojug 11 in ic i -anamia linisli tchi niboian. I will always
be a Christian, until 1 die.
Jesus od Ana nil Ctrl <j(imig mojag ta-ateni oma aking b't-
nish tchi ishkwb-akiwang. The Church of Jesus will
always be on earth, until the earth is no more.
Bluish oma; hinixh M n'uing. Till here; till Montreal.
Kitchz awassondgo, three days ago.
Awdssonago, the day before yesterday, (two days ago.)
Pitchindgo, yesterday, (one day ago.)
Nongom, or, nongnm gijigtik, to-day, (this day.)
Wdbang, to-morrow, (after one day.)
Au'asxivabahg, after to-morrow, (after two days.)
Kitchi awasnoabang, after three days.
Jeba, this morning.
Jtba nin gi-bi-ganonig. He came this morning and
spoke to me.
Mewija} a long time ago, (or, already.)
Mewija ukovibtnt. He has been tick now along time ago.
Gegapi, finally, lastly, ultimately.
Wawika, seldom, rarely.
Waieshkat, at first, in the beginning.
Pdbigc, immediately., directly.
Wtwib, quick, immediately.
Ja'igu'fi, already.
Ktja, in advance, beforehand.
i, when.
485
Gaidt, formerly, heretofore.
Naningotinong, sometimes.
Nanmgim, or, sasdgwana, often, frequently.
Mojag, always, constantly.
Anwdkam, several times, often.
Iwdpi, then, at that time.
Keiabi, yet.
Nit dm t first.
Apinc, continually, ever since.
Kdginlg, or, kagigekft?nigt always, eternally.
Nond, before the end ; rather.
Dassmg, every time, as often as ...
Kejidin, or, kejidine, or, kekejidine, quick, soon, imme-
diately.
Pitchtnag, only now, (not before this time,) soon, by and by.
Pitchinag dagwichin. He comes only now, (not before
this hour.)
Pitchinag nin madja, I start only now, (or so late.)
Pitchinag nin gad-ija endaian. L will go to thy house,
(I will go to see thee,) by and by.
Mddjan, kikinoamading ijaa. — Pil.chmag. Go to school.
— By and by.
8. Adverbs denoting uncertainty.
Gonimd, or, ganabdtch, perhaps.
Nissatchiwan nind ijd, gonima dash nisso gisiss nin
gad-inend. I am going below, and will be, perhaps, ab-
sent three months.
Ki da-gashkiton na nijike tchi bidjiamawad kissaie ? —
Ganabdtch sa nin dd-gashkiton. Couldst thou write, all
alone, a letter to thy brother ? — Perhaps I could.
Nishkddisi ganabdtch. He is perhaps angry.
31
486
Makija, may be, perhaps.
Gi-nibo na kimishomc? — Makija ; kawin maslii nin ki-
kendansin. Is thy uncle dead ? — May be ; I don't
know yet.
Makija anislid ikitom. It is perhaps a false report.
Makija geget. May be so indeed.
Namdndj, I don't know what . . ., it is doubtful how . . .
Namdndj gcd-ikitogwcn. I don't know what he will say.
Namandj gc-dodamowancn. I don't know what I shall do.
Namandj ga-ijiwelisigwer^. I don't know what he did.
Namandj idog, it is uncertain, unknown, doubtful.
Anin ga-ijitchigcd 1 — Namdndj idog. How did he ma-
nage it ? — I don't know.
Remark. This namandj, which is properly an adverb in
Otchipwe, cannot be given in English with an adverb, but
only with a verb, as above.
9. Adverbs denoting quantity.
Nibiwa, or, pangi nangr.; much.
JXibiica wixtini. He eats much.
Nibiica kitigr. He cultivates a large field.
J'aii«l nu-ngR nin bimossc kabe-bibon. I am walking
much all winter.
Remark. When nibiwa signifies many, it is an adjective.
, <>r, ii'tbiira iiun«cy little, a little.
Pangi <'t« 11 in btdnn. 1 Itrinjr only a little.
Pangi g'/'i'iton, nib'nra dank ndnagatawcndan. Talk
little and think much.
A ih iira ?idn«r /,'/' ga-mtttch ;-//•/'/, kis/ipin mojag takirtnt-
mad Kiji'-Mtuiito. You will scarcely ever pronounce a
bad word, if you constantly remember God.
487
Nenibiiva, much each, or much every time.
Nenibiwa minawag. They are given much each, (they
receive great shares.)
Nenibiwa anamia endasso-gijigadinig. He prays much
every day.
Pepangi, little each, or a little every time, by little and
little, gradually.
Pepangi kitigcwag anisliinabeg. The Indians cultivate
a small field each.
Pepangi nibd, pepangi gale wissini. He sleeps little (every
night,) and eats little (every time.)
Ki minin ow masindigan ; pepangi dash wabandan en-
dasso-gijigak, binish kakina gi-wabandaman. I give
thee this book ; read a little every day, until thou readest
it all.
Pangishe, very little.
Mi iw, or, mi minik, enough, that is all.
Minawa, again, more, besides.
Kakina, all.
10. Adverbs denoting comparison.
Awdshime, more.
Awashime nin dd-minwcndam tchi nissigoidn, iw dash
nind ananueioin tchi webinamdmban. I would be more
willing to be killed, than to reject my religion.
Awashime apitendagwad mino ijiwebisiwin, daniwin
dash. Virtue is more worth than riches.
Nawdtch, has the same signification as awdshime : but it
also signifies, a little, some. Nawatch nind akos ; this
can mean, I am more sick : or, I am a little sick.
Ki bakade na ? — Nawatch sa. Art thou hungry ? — A
little.
488
Ki gashkiton no, wi-jaganashimoian 1 — Nawatch sa.
Canst thou speak English 1 — Some.
Iw minik, or, ow minik, so much, as much as.
Gale win iw minik od iji «<ishkiton, kin eji-gashkitoian.
He can do as much as thou canst.
Ow minik bidokan. Bring so much.
Kawin ow minik eta da-dcbissessinon. So much only
would not be sufficient.
Bakdn, differently, otherwise.
Bdkan ijiurbiti ck<> (innmlad. He behaves differently
since he became a Christian.
Nawatch nibiwa, more.
Nawatch pangi, less.
Remark. The word nangi, (which occurs in No. 7 and
9,) cannot be given in English by itself; there is no word
in the English language that would exactly correspond with
nange. We may perhaps say it corresponds with not, be-
cause it makes the word to which it is connected, signify
the contrary ; but it has another position in the sentence,
for instance :
Debenimiian, nind apitendagos nange gc-ganonindmban^
Lord, I am not worthy to speak to thee.
Nin nibwaka nange. I am not wise.
Nibiwa nange nin kikcndan. I do not know much.
E nange ka. Yes, not no.
489
CHAPTER VIII.
OF CONJUNCTIONS.
A Conjunction is a part of speech which is used to con-
nect words and sentences.
Conjunctions are divided into two sorts, copulative con-
junctions, which serve to connect or to continue a sentence;
and disjunctive conjunctions, which serve to express oppo-
sition in different circumstances.
The following are the principal Otchipwe conjunctions.
1. Copulative Conjunctions.
Gaie, and, both, also. (This conjunction is ordinarily put
after the word that is connected by it to another word,
like the Latin que. Sometimes it is put before the word,
especially when it signifies also.)
Koss, kigd gaie ki ga-minddenimag. Honor father and
mother.
Gi-pindige anamiewigamigong, wcweni gaie o gi-pisind-
awan gegikwenidjin. He went to church, and listened
well to the preacher.
Mojag babamadisi, biboninig, nibininig gaie. He travels
always, both winter and summer.
Nin wi-ija ; gaie kinawa ijdiog. I will go ; go ye also.
Gaie kin, Thou also.
i, and, (This conjunction serves only to connect
numbers,)
490
Nijtana ashi nij. Twenty-two. (You cannot say : nij-
tana gaie nij ; or, nijtand, nij gaic.)
Midasswak ashi nishioasswak ashi nanimidana, 1850.
Tchi, or, tchi wi, that.
Ki windamon iw, tchi wi kikendaman. I tell thee this,
that thou mayst know it.
Nin bi-ija oma, tchi kikenimiian kciabi bimadisiia?i. I
come here, that thou mayst know I am living yet.
Remark. English sentences containing the conjunction
that, are commonly and better given in Otchipwc without
tchi. F. i. I am glad that thou art come ; win mnnrrmlam
dagwishinan. — Dost thou know that my father is dead ?
Ki kikrndan na gi-nibod noss 1 — I know that she is cha-
ritable ; nin kikenimd kijevPt&dirid. (In all these phrases
the English conjunction that could likewise be omitted.
Mi wcndji- (varying according to the tenor of the verb,)
therefore.
Mino ijiircbisi, nita-jawendjigt gnir, mi wendji-jawenda-
gosid. He is good and charitable, therefore he is happy.
Ostim winikirrshki, mi we^dji-kitimagisid apitchi. He
drinks too much, therefore he is so poor.
Kishpin, if, provide^!.
Kishpin batddowin goldman, kairin vifwtn'n ki g(t-<;»f-
ansin. If thou fearestsin, thou wilt not be afraid of death
l\ is h pin gmiitik ftmtkihin, kairin ki ga-kitimdgisitgi.
If thou workest well, thou wilt not be poor.
This conjunction, kis/ipin, is soiiictimos (nniltnl, and
sometimes put after tlin verb. In the sentence . : I'miinw
xiiiirdii" nin ga-madja, kishpin bimadisnap : next spring
1 will mi away, if I live; in this sentence we may omit
1;i*h frin, and say : /'/i/ii/mr xitiirnng ///// gd-madjft, liunit'l-
This is even better Otchipwc. — And we may also
491
say : Panima sigwang nin ga-madja, bimadisiian kishpin.
— This postposition of kishpin is sometimes heard among
the Indians.
Sa. This particle signifies sometimes : because, for.
Odena Ninive kai»in gi-banadjitchigadessinon, gi-anwe-
nindisowag sd imd ga-danak'idjig. The city of Nineveh
was not destroyed, because the inhabitants did penance.
Ninga-mmig Kije-Manito kagige bimddisiivin gijigong,
apitchi sa kijewddisi. God will give me life everlasting
in heaven, because he is infinitely good.
Dash. This conjunction is copulative or disjunctive, ac-
cording to its signification. It is copulative when signi-
fying and.
Nin gi-mjimin, nishime, nin dash. We were two of us,
my brother, and myself.
Boniton ki matchi ijiwebisiwin, ki ga-jawtnimig dash
Debendjigcd. Abandon thy bad conduct, and the Lord
will have mercy on thee.
Bi-ijan, anokin dash oma, ki ga-dibaamon dash ivetveni.
Corne and work here, and I will pay thee well.
2. Disjunctive Conjunctions.
Dash. It is disjunctive when signifying, lut, than.
Kije-Manito o gi-ojidn nit dm inmiican tchi dpitchi mino
aidnid, win dash gi-kishndgHdiso gi-batd-dodang. God
made the first man to be perfectly happy, but he made
himself unhappy by sinning.
Nibiwajoniia hi gashkia, osam dash kid atdgc, mi dash
iw gego ivcndji-danisissitvan. Thou earnest much money,
but thou playest too much, and therefore thou hast no
. property.
Nawdtch nin sasikis, kin dash. I am older than thou.
Nawatch nibwaka Paul, John dash. Paul is wiser than
John.
492
Awdsliime jawcndugosi nebwakad, ketchi-danid dash.
A wise man is happier than a rich one.
Missawa, although.
Jfissawa matclii igoidn, kawin nin awiia nin id matchi
indssi. Although spoken ill of, I will speak ill of nobody.
Missaica gagwSdjimagj kawin nin nakwctagossL Al-
though I ask him, he does not answer me.
Gonimd, kema, or ; either, or.
Niogwan, gonima nanogwan nin gad-incnd. I will be
gone four or five days.
JBcjig nijiicg o gi-bi-mamn?i oma nin mtKinttigttn, kfrna
kin, kciiKt ki.s/ii/ne. One of you came here and took my
book, either thou or thy brother.
Kaii'in . . ., kawin gale . . ., neither . . ., nor . . .
Kawin nin nin gi-mamossin Id •nicitinaiiriin, kaw'ni gale.
nishime. Neither I took thy book, nor my brother.
Kawin fasTtogwadisidjig, kawin gaic. neta-giioasJtkwtbid-
jig ta-pindigessiwag ogimawivtining gijigong. Neither
adulterers nor drunkards shall enter into the kingdom of
heaven.
Tchi, with the verb in the negative form, stands for the
English conjunction lc*t.
Nin gi-kihakiriunra jiijiki, tchi madjdsiig. I shut up
the cow, lest she run away.
Jawcn'nii ketffldgisid, tchi wind&mawa$*ig Qehcndjige-
nidjin t'ji-ni(itclii-<l<'>(l(ur<nl, mi dath tchi Ixitd-diian. ll;ivc
mercy on the poor, lest he cry unto the Lord against
thee, and it be sin unto thee.
7\'/'.s'///;/M, with the verb in the negative form, serves for un-
less, or, except,
Kislij'in anwenintKsotriwcgi ktikinn ki ga-banddjiidisom»
Unless you repent, you shall all perish.
Kixlifiin nmratth miiw (;n/v/>/.s/x.v///v///, ktnrin ki ga-
pindigessi Dcbcnimik o minawanigosiwining.
493
thou behavest better, thou shalt not enter into the joy of
thy Lord.
Kishpin enigok w'lkwatcliitossiwan, kawin wika ki ga-
gashkitossin wi-Otchipwemoian. Unless thou endeavorest
earnestly, thou wilt never be able to speak Otchipwe.
Minotch, but still, yet.
Kitchi niskadad, kissina gaie, minotch bi-ijawag. It is
very bad weather and cold, but still they come.
Kcgo minikwekcn ishkotcicabo, ki gi-ininaban ; minotcJi
mojag ki minikwcn. I told thee, don't drink any ardent
liquor ; yet thou drinkest it always.
Anaivi, dno, but, although.
Anishinabeg kitimagisiwag, anawi dash minwendamog.
The Indians are poor, but they are contented.
Nind dno pisindawa, kawin dash nin iiissitotawassi.
Although I listen to him, I cannot understand him.
Nind ano pagidawa, kawin dash grgo nin pindaatisin.
Although I set nets, I catch nothing.
Ijiy eji">* (varying according to the tense of the verb con-
nected with it,) as, as ... as, as ... so.
Dcbcnimiian, apegisli iji sagiindn, eji-sagiiian. Lord, I
wish to love thee as thou lovest me.
Mino ijiivebisin, eji-mino-ijiwebisiwad swanganamiadjig.
Be as good as true Christians are good.
Eji-kikinoamagoieg, mi ged-ani-dodameg. As you are
taught, so do.
* See p. 140.
494
CHAPTER IX.
OF INTERJECTIONS.
An Interject io?i is a word that is used to express an emo-
tion or a feeling of the person speaking.
It is to be observed, as a peculiarity of the Otchipwe lan-
guage, that the men have their own interjections, and the
females their own; and some are common to both sexes.
To express joy, admiration, surprise, fear, astonishment,
impatience, compassion, even anger and indignation,
The men and the boy swill sa.y,Atni<i ! tiirt! j aha ! ah !
The women and the girls will say, Nla ! > oh ! alas !
n'go ! n'ge ! j ha !
The differernce between those two kinds of interjections
is so sharp, that it would be the most ridiculous blunder for
an astonished man to say, Nid ! or for a surprised woman
to say, Atald !
The interjections common to both males and females, are
the following :
To express impatience : *brka ! ld:<t bcl:n I slowly ! stop !
tnifii. ! well !
" indignation, anger : tajiminlji ! tajiinfc/ji win! ha !
" pain, sorrow : io ! o!i ! ah !
" aversion: AT/ sliaine ! psliaw !
turns.* ! begone! away ! go ahead !
'' approbation : o ! well ! ay, ay !
" understanding or recollecting: ishte ! aha! yes!
495
To call or excite attention : na ! ina ! nashke ! lo ! see !
hark !
To encourage : tagd! ho! halloo!
haw! haw! halloo! courage! hurrah!
ambe ! ambessa ! well ! well ! come on !
To call somebody : hisht ! hey ! hear !
To stop : bcka ! hold on ! stop !
To admonish, exhort : bind ! behold ! now ! (anwatan
bina ! cease now !)
To answer a call : hoi ! halloo !
To command silence : slit ! she ! hush ! silence !
bisan ! hist ! be still !
OF PREFIXES AND OTHER PARTICLES.
There are in the Ofchipwe language many particles or
little words, some of which precede, and others follow verbs,
and give them a certain accessory signification. We will
exhibit here the most common of these particles, with the
.accessory signification they give to the verbs.
Particles. Acces. sig. Examples.
na ? of question, Ki sagia na Kije-Manito 1 Nin s«-
gia sa. Dost thou love God ? I
sa, of answer. love him.
Ka na Id nondansi ? Nin nondam
sa. Dost thou not hear? 1 hear.
Kawin na Paul ijinikasossi ? Hi
sa cjinikasod. Is not his name
Paul ? That is his name.
ho, ilco, of use, cus- Nindija ko. . . I use to go.
torn. Kiminikwen na kojominabo 1 Dost
thou use to drink wine 1
Nin minikwenaban sa ko. I used
to drink it.
496
bi't of approach. Bi-ijaujji-natikawishin ; come here,
come to me.
Bi-wdlxindaii ow niaxinaigan^ome
and see this book.
Nijimg nin gi-bi-wbamin, we slept
twice in coming to this place.
7ii-, ant-, of departure Gi-ani-madja, he is gone away.
or going. Gi-iti-giwcdog, I think he returned
home.
Jawcn 'mi ish inam^Deben imiiang^wan
nil: fr/ii ani-ftimadisiiang ; have
mercy on us, Lord, that we may
behave well in future.
awi-, of going on. Jesus niswing gi-am-arutmia nijikr,
kitiganing Gct/isr/iinni. Jesus
wont three times to pray alone,
in the garden of ( iethsemane.
Ma djcitla , a n- i-iralxi n da n da gd-iji irc-
hak. Let us go and see what has
happened.
bimi-y of passing. Wegonen Jesus ga-bimi-docUxng lie-
ki.s/i gi-hikirioamaged / What did
Jesus do at the same that he
preached (passing through differ-
ent places) .'
Anindi gc-bimi-ijaiang ? Through
which place shall we pass ?
wi-, wa-, of will, in- Nin iri-niba. — Nin-iri-nnithka. \
tion, will go to sleep. — 1 will get up.
A"/ iri-iri.-i.fin n/i / A'/ iri- niinikire
mi / \\'ilt thou eat ? Wilt thou
dr/nk \
M'n-ijdd. — \ Vii-diKHntddjifr. Jlo
that intends to «n>. Those that
intend to become Christians,
497
goyigo; 77i«,ofre-inforce- Nin igo. — Kinawa go. I myself,
ment. — You yourselves.
Kaginig igo ki ga-mino-aiamin gi-
jigong. We will be happy (or
well) in heaven, for all eternity.
Kaldna go gi-yaivag, they are all
gone, (without exception.)
Win ma gi-ikito, he has said it him-
self.
Ka ma win. No, no.
da-, of condition. Nin da-ija, kishpin ... I would
go, if. . .
Gwaiak net ki da- dibadjimotaw ga-
gadwedjitnindrnban 1 Wouldst
thou tell it to me right, (sincere-
ly,) if I asked thee.
gi-, ga-, of time past. O gi-ivabaman. — Mi aw ga-waba-
mind. He saw him. — This is the
person that was seen, etc., etc.
ta- \ of future Ta-nagamo. Ta-mawi. He will sing.
ga-, gad-, > time. He will cry, etc.
ge-, ffed-j ) Nin ga-dodam. Ki gad-ikit. I will
do. Thou wilt say; etc.
Mi aw ge-madjad, ged-ijad tashki-
ibocljiganing. This is the person
that will start, that will go to the
saw-mill.
498
PART III.
SYNTAX.
Syntax, or Syntaxis, is that part of Grammar, (according
to the meaning of this greek word, joining together,) which
teaches to join words, or the parts of speech, together in a
proper manner, into correct sentences.
A sentence is the connection of several words in such a
manner as to give a complete sense.
Every sentence must have a subject, to which something
is referred, or of which something is aflirmi'd or denied;
and an attribute, (predicate,) which refers or alludes to the
subject, or is .affirmed or denied of it. To join the attri-
bute to its subject, a third part of the sentence is necessary,
which is the verb.
To form a regular and complete sentence, three parts
are necessary ; the subject, the attribute, the verb.
The syntax of the Otchipwe language is peculiar. We
shall reduce it to a few chapters, and a i'cu rules and re-
marks in each chapter. Many remarks and rules that
could have been placed in this Thin/ /'art, occur in the
preceding part, where they stand in connection with other
rules, properly belonging to the part.
499
CHAPTER I.
SYNTAX OF SUBSTANTIVES OR NOUNS.
RULE. 1. The substantive governs the verb, respecting num-
ber and kind.
a. Respecting number.
A substantive in the singular number requires a verb in
the singular; as : Paul niba, Paul sleeps. Inini manisse,
ikwe gashkigwasso ; the man chops wood, the woman sews.
Mandan wakaigan onifishin, songan gaie ; this house is
beautiful and strong.
A substantive in the plural number must have a verb
likewise in the plural ; as : Abinodjliag ombigisiwag,
children make noise. Kakina ininiwag gi-gopiwag, ikwe-
wag eta abiwag. All the men are gone in the interior (in-
land), the women only are here. Ninsagitonanninmasina-
iganan,mojag nin wabandanan. I like my books, I read them
always.
Note. In English the verb does not always show its being
governed by the substantive, respecting number. In the
last sentence here above, for instance, the verb, / like, is
always the same, whether I like one book only, or several
books. But in Otchipwe we say : Nin sagiton masinaigan.
Nin sagiton&n masinaiganan.
Exception. There is one case of exception from this rule
500
in the Otchipwe language, where a substantive in the sin-
irular number has a verb in the plural after it. The case
is, when only one member of a household is taken for the
whole; as: Noss endawad gi-niha . libikong ; he slept last
night at my fathers's, (where my father dwells.) John en-
dawad nind ondjiha ; I come from John's, (where John
dwells.) Naningim nind ija niniixtf endawad ; I go fre-
quently to my sister's, (where my sister dwells.) This is
the usual way of expressing this case. Although I could
also say : Jo/in cm 1. ad nind ondjilxi. Nimisse nidad nind
ija. This would be correct, but not usual ; except if John,
for instance, should live all (dona in a house, I would then
correctly say; John, r.ndtid nind ondjiha ; and 1 could not
say otherwise, because then John would not be a member
of a household.
"Note. But when in the names of nations, one individual
is taken for all, the substantive retains its right ; it has a
verb in the singular with it; as: Wemitigvji endiemikid
nin wi-ija, I intend to go where the Frenchmen live, (to
France.) /aganask nibiwv o dilx'tidan nki ; the English
are in possession of much land, (in different parts of the
world.) Kitchimokoman nomaia gi-tiiigaso; the Americans
have lately been at war.
b. Respecting kind.
The Otchipwe substantives are of two kiadf/antfMfe and
inanimate. (See page 18.)
An animate substantive must invariably have a verb of
the same kind, if in connection with a verb ; it must have
inanimate verb of the IV. or V. Conj.: as : J\/n irahuma
1 :e a man. .\ni nunda-i-ai: iknrai!
gaic, I hear wnmrn and children. Kid at awe nag
thou sellcst potatoes.
An inanimate substantive requires an (nan mite verb, of
501
the VI. Conj.; as : Nin wabandan wakaigan, I see a house.
Q gi-aishpiuad;man midasswi mokomanan ; he has bought
ten knives. Kawin nin bidossin ki masinaigan, nin gi-
waniken ; I don't bring thy book, I forgot it.
This is to be understood of the transitive or active verbs.
In regard to the intransitive or neuter verbs, the general
syntactical rule is, that an animate subject always takes an
intransitive verb of the thre^ first Conjugations ; and an in-
animate subject takes a unipersonal verb of the three last
Conjugations. As : Koss gi-dagwishin. Nabikwan gi-
dagwishinomagad. Thy father arrived. A vessel arrived-.
Nissaiejaganashimo. Maud an masinaigan jaganashimo-
magad. My brother speaks English. This book speaks En-
glish, (is written ^in English.) Anishinabe aia oma. Wiiass
aiamagad oma. 'There is an Indian here. There is meat
here. Onijishi kinidjaniss. Onijishin ki masinaigan.
Thy child is beautiful. Thy book is beautiful.
RULE 2, Two or more substantives in the singular number,
taken in connection, require a verb in the plural, as :
Koss kiga gaie ki ga-minadenimag, thou shalt honor thy
father and thy mother. Jo/m, William, Nancy gaie gi-
madjawag ; John, William and Nancy, are gone away,
Mokoman, emikwan, onagan gaie winadon ; ki da-binito-
nan. The knife, the spoon, and the dish, are unclean ; thou
oughtst to clean them.
RULE 15. Two or more substantives in the singular num-
ber, taken separately, require a verb in the singular, as :
Nissaie, gonima nishime, ta-ija. My elder brother, or my
younger brother, (sister) will go. Koss, kema kiga, kema
kimisse, ta-bi-ija •oma nongom. Thy father, or thy mother,
or thy sister, is to come here to-day. Aw kwiwisens goni-
ma ki masinaigan, gonima dash ki mokomanens, o ga-
banadjiton. This boy will spoil either thy book or thy
penknife.
32
502
RULE 4. Wlien two substantives come together, denoting
the possessor and the object poKurs^ed, the .v/'«,'//. o or od is
put between them. (See page 39, where you will also
find Examples.)
RULE 5. When two substantives come together, not denoting
possession, but some other relation, they arc. connected
together in various trays.
1. Ey juxta-po.fi t ion, in putting the two substantives one
after another, without any alteration, connecting them
with a hyphen, as : [Vigwdss-teltiinifn , bark-canoe. Ishkote*
nabikimn, steamboat, (fire-tessel.) NabiRwan-ogima, cap-
tain of a vessel. Qigo-bimidt, lish-o/1. Astema-makak,
snuff-box, etc., etc.
2. By adding the letter i or o to the first substantive,
(that is, its imitative vowel ; see p. 85.) and then joining
both together with a hyphen, as :
John o g i-baba-gag i I: n-en oda n a n ire nindt xo tr / n i- x i^a a ndtifJ-
iwin. John preached the baptism of repentance, (re-
pentance-baptism.)
Bins!, ningom jawcndagosiw'rn i-gij iga k! Behold, now is
the day of salvation, (salvation-day.)
Batadomni-gaAsiamagewin. Forgiveness of sins, (sin-for-
giveness.
Assini-wnkiiigan. House of stones, (stone-building.)
Iliw '<l>i'.<)-;n.il.ai\<t. Jiailroad, (iron-road.)
M f o-irttL-tti^an. House of logs, trees, (log-house.)
Etc., etc.
J{. I'.y contrartinir the two substantives in one, abbrevi-
ating them at the same time.
Some of these contracted words are very properly written
in one word, as: Nd'jani'* //•/'//'/;/, singer, (iHtgiinimi or na-
gamoivin, song: and /'//////, man.) D.uakoiiigcwinini,
503
judge, (dibakonigewin, judgment ; andim'ni, man.) Barni*-
tagekwe, a maid-servant, (bamitagewin, service; and ikwe,
woman.) Gashkigwdssow'ikwe, a seamstress, (gashkig-
wassowin, sewing ; and ikwe, woman.)
But others of the contracted words are more properly
written separately, and connected only with a hyphen, as :
Nagamo-inasinaigan, song-book. Ananuc.-nagamon, reli-
gipus song or hymn, (anamicwui, religion, prayer.) Ana-
mie-gctigiJtweWin, religious sermon. Gagikwc-masinaigan,
sermon-book. And innumerable others.
Respecting the position of the substantive, or the place
which it occupies in the sentence, we have in Otchipwe no
positive rule. It may, like in Latin, precede or follow its
verb, almost always, without any material difference, as :
Bivabi-nigid Jesus. gi-ijiiccbadoirircn, itc; this had happened,
before Jesus was born. You may as well say : Jesus bwct
bi-nigid, gi-ijiwcbadogwcn iw. But you cannot well say in
English : Jesus before was born, this had happened. —
Nij masinal ganan n'ui gi-gisKpinadonan, or, nin gi-gish-
pinadonan nij masinaiganan ; is perfectly the same. Not
so perfectly the same in English : Two books I have bought ;
or, I have bought two books. The first of these two phrases
is certainly unusual in the English language.
There is much liberty in the Otchipwe langurge in re-
gard to the transposition of words in a sentence ; almost as
much as there is in Latin. I say almost ; not quite so much,
but more than in English. The following phrases, for in-
stance, are all perfectly correct and usual in Otchipwe ;
but they could not be given correctly word for word, in
English. If they are correct, they are certainly unusual,
some of them.
Koss ta-bi-ija oma nongom. Thy father will come here
to-day.
Nongom oma ta-bi-ija koss. To-day here will come thy
father.
504
Ta-bi-ija koss oma nongom. Will come thy father here
to-day.
Nongom oma koss ta-bi-ija. To-day here thy father will
come.
Oma nongom koss ta-bi-ija. Here to-day thy father will
come.
Ta-bi-ija koss nongom oma. Will come thy father to-day
here.
Koss nongom ta-bi-ija oma. Thy father to-day will come
here.
Oma ta-bi-ija nongom koss. Here will come to-day thy
father.
Etc., etc.
Observe the Indians when they speak, and you will see
how much transposition of words is used in their language.
Note. In citations or quotations, the substantive denoting
the person whose words are quoted, must be placed at the
end of the quotation, not in the beginning, as in English.
EXAMPLES.
Baba-ijaiog cnigokwag aki, miniOadjimowin gagikimig kn-
kina bemadisidjig ; <> gi-inan ./r.\//\ o kikinoamaganan.
Jesus said to his disciples : Go ye into all the world and
preach the Gospel to every creature.
Kego nongom ningofc/ii Ijalccn ; HI n gi-ig HOSX jrlxi. My
father suid to me this morning : Don't go anywhere to-
day, (don't to-day anywhere go.)
Wabang nin ga-hns, kishpin fiinrating ; ikifo •/;/'. s>v//V. My
brother says : I will embark to-morrow, if it is calm.
If you want to put the substantive dom>tin^ llio person
whose words you have to quote, in the beginning, you must
aay : Ow ikito ; or, ow gi-ikito> gi-ikitowagt etc., always
proposing ow, that, thus.
505
EXAMPLES.
Ow ikito Debendjigcd : Jaicendagosiwag banideedjig, Kije-
Maniton o ga-wabamawan. The Lord says : Blessed
are the pure in heart, for they shall see God.
Ow kid igonan Jesus : Sagiig metchi-dodonegog; jawenimig,
mi no dodaii'ig jangenimincgog. Jesus says to us: Love
them that do you evil ; have mercy on them and do good
to them that hate you.
Ow gi-ikito : Nibing nin gad-ija Wawiiatanong. He said :
next summer I will go to Detroit.
In relating what a person said, you have to give it in
Otchipwe in the way of quotation rather than otherwise.
EXAMPLES.
Paul said that his brother arrived last night. Nissaie gi-
bi-dagwisliin tibikong, gi-ikito Paul.
0
They said they would come to our house to-morrow. Nin
gad-ijamin endaieg wabang, ikitobanig.
I told him I had no money. Kawin nind ojoniiamissi, nin
gi-ina.
Of the Otchipwe Pronoun, Syntax has but little to say ;
Etymology talks much of it.
Pronouns are often absorbed in the verb ; as we have
seen in the Conjugations. F. i. Kishpin sagiiieg, if you
love me ; both pronouns, you and me, are contained in the
verb, sagiiieg.
The Rule of the English Syntax : " When two or more
nominatives combined are of different persons, the verb and
pronoun in the plural, prefer the first person to the second,
and the second to the third," is exactly the same in
Otchipwe.
506
EXAMPLES.
IT///, nin gale, nin gad-ijanrin. He and I will go, (we
will go.)
Kin, win gaie, kl gi-ikitom. Thou and he have said, (you
have said.)
NinawinrI, win igair, nin gi-kitchi-anokimin. We and he
worked hard, (we worked hard.)
Kinawa, nin igaic, ki gad-ijamin. You and I will go, (we
will go.)
Kin, winawa gaie, ki gi-ikitom. Thou and they have said,
(you have said.)
The repetition of the personal pronouns, I myself, thou
thyself, he himself, etc., is expressed in Otchipwe by re-
peating the same personal pronoun ; which, however, can
be done only in the first and second person, not in the
third, because the third person has no pronoun in the Con-
jugations.
EXAMPLES.
Nin nin gi-ikit iw. I have said that myself.
Nin nind ijanalmn. I went myself.
Kin ki ga-nondawa. Thou shall hear him thyself.
Kin kid ikitonaban. Thou saidst thyself.
Win o gi-ojiton iw. He made that himself.
Ninawind nin wi-ijamin. \\'e intend to go ourselves.
Kinawa ki gud-anintixiin. You will suffer yourselves.
Winawa ta-gagiruljiiuawag. They will be asked them-
selves.
If yet me is intended, the particle _£•«, or igo, is
put between the two personal pronouns, or siller •//•/// and
winawa, (in the third person,) as : Nin igo uin if /-/'/•// iir ;
yes, 1 have said that mysell. Kinaira go 1:1 gau-nnimisitu^
yes, you will sulFer yourselves, etc.
507
CHAPTER II.
SYNTAX OF VERBS.
The first Rule in the Syntax of substantives, may also be
considered as the first in the Syntax of verbs.
RULE 1. The verb must agree with its substantive, its sub-
ject, (expressed or understood,) in number and kind;
that is, a verb that refers to a subject in the singular
number, must be employed in the singular ; and a verb
referring to a subject in the plural, must likewise be
placed in the plural number. And a verb that alludes to
an animate subject, must be animate itself; and the verb
applied to an inanimate subject, 'must also be inanimate.
(See Examples of that under Rule 1., in the preceding
Chapter.)
Respecting the position of the verb in the sentence, we
say, (what we said of the substantive in the preceding
Chapter,) that there is no positive rule for it. The Otchip-
we verb is allowed to precede or follow its subject ; as you
have seen in many Examples here above.
In regard to quotations, we have one remark more to
make. The verb indicating quotation, not only of words
but also of thoughts, is always placed after the quotation,
may its subject be expressed or only understood, (except
you begin with ow, as stated above.)
EXAMPLES.
Nin gi-gagansoma aw inini pitchinago, oma tclii bi-ijad.
Kawin nin wi-ijassi ; gi-iwd dash. I exhorted that man
yesterday to come here ; but he said : I will not go.
508
A'?' nissitotawa na ekitod ? — Kawin. — Nin kitchi minwrn-
dam wab a rnindtn; ikito. Dost thou understand him
what he says ? — No. — He says : I am very glad to see
thee.
Ta-gimiwan nongom ; nin gi-inendam jeba. I thought
this morning, it would rain to-day.
Kishp'm nasikawag mekatewikwanaie, nin ga-nanibikimig;
inendamodog. He probably thinks : If I go to the Mis-
sionary, he will reprimand me.
Kawin nin wi-ijassimin anamiewigamigong nongom, osatir
niskadad; inendamodogenag. They probably think : The
weather is too bad ; we will not go to church to-day.
The English syntactical rule : " One verb governs ano-
ther in the infinitive mood ;" is different in Otchipwe. In
this language it will read thus :
RULE 2. One verb governs another in the subjunctive mood.
EXAMPLES.
Nind inendam tchi madjaidn. I think to go away, (to
depart.)
Knirin 'nin da-gashkitossi* nongom tchi madjaiamban*
I cannot start to-day.
Kawin o mikwendansin tchi gi-ikitod. He does not remem-
ber to have said it.
Iji John, William gaie, kikinoamading tchi ijawad. Tell
John and William to go to school.
Nhi kaMcndamin gi-bosiidng jtba. We are sorry to have
embarked this morning.
Minirendam abinotlji oduminod. The child likes to play.
RULE 3. " Two verbs (or other terms) implying negation
in the same sentence, are im/iro/H-r, ww/rs.v -irr mean to
affirm" This syntactical rule of other lan.uuajres under-
goes some modifications in the Otchipwe language.
* See Remarks,?. 119.
509
1. In Otchipwe the negation is expressed by two terms,
(except in some tenses, as you have seen in the Conjuga-
tions,) by the adverbs kawin or kcgo ; and by a certain syl-
lable or syllables in the verb itself.
2. There is a verb in this language, which is particular
in this respect, the verb nin ginaamawa, I forbid him. By
observing the Indians in their speaking, you will find that
they sometimes use it, implying a double negation, and do
not mean to affirm ; and at other times they will employ it,
as it is employed in other languages.
EXPLANATION.
Ki ginaamon tchi madjassiwan nongom. I forbid thee,
not to start to-day. — This sentence in English is equiva-
lent to this : / command thee to start to-day ; because
two terms implying negation, constitute an affirmation.
— But in Otchipwe it means : I forbid thee to start
to-day.
Kije-Manito o gi-ginaamawan nitam anishinaben, JcJii
midjissinig maniwang bejig mitig. God forbade the
first man, not to eat the fruit of a certain tree ; that is
to say in English ; he commanded him to eat it. — But.
in Otchipwe it has the right signification ; he forbade
him to eat it.
So they use this verb ordinarily. But sometimes they
employ it in the usual way of other languages, implying
only one negation. F. i.
Enamiad ginaamawa tchi gimodipan. The Christian is
forbidden to steal.
Kawin nin wi-ijassi icedi wigiwaming ; nin ginaamago
tchi ijaiamban. I will not go to that house ; I am for-
bidden to go.
Of Participles we have to observe here, that they are
sometimes substantives, and sometimes adjectives.
510
EXAMPLES OF PARTICIPLES USED AS SUBSTANTIVES.
Emtmiad, a Christian ; (part. pres. of the intran. verb
anamia, he prays.)
Keichitwawendagpsid. a Saint; (part. pres. of the intr. verb
kitchitwawendagosi, he is glorious, holy.)
J)elendjigedt master, lord ; (part. pres. of the intr. verb
dibendjige, he is master.
Kekinoamaged, a teacher, school-teacher ; (part. pres. of
the intr. verb kikinoamage, he teaches.)
Tchamaiilked, a boat-builder ; (part. pres. of the intr. verb
tchimanike, he makes a boat, or canoe.)
All these substantives form their plural by adding.//^, as:
Enami<t'ljiir, Christians ; ketcjutwaweitdogosidjig, the
Saints, etc.
EXAMPLES OF PARTICIPLES USED AS ADJECTIVES.
Wpnijishing, good, fair, useful ; (part. pros, of the unip.
verb, on.ijix!iin, it is good, etc.)
Maitnuidnk, bad ; (part. pres. of the unip. verb manadad, it
is bad.)
»//r/»Y//,-, difficult ; (part. pres. of the unip. verb sanagad,
it is difficult.)
Nebwakad, wise; (part. pres. of the intr. verb nihintku, he
(she) is wise.)
Note. In regard to the vorb especially, and to all other
parts of speecli, we have already said so much in the pre-
rcding part, that but little, if anything more, may remain
to be related in the present part, besides I'artini!, of which
ue u-jll treat in the following Chapter.
511
CHAPTER III.
OF PARSING OR ANALYZING.
Parsing is the anatomy of Grammar. As anatomy de-
composes or analyzes all the members and parts of the
body, and shows them separately, and then their coherence;
so Parsing decomposes or resolves a sentence into its ele-
ments, members, or parts of speech, and shows their
relation and connection.
RULES FOR PARSING.
First it must be stated, at every word in the sentence,
what part of speech it is ; and every part of speech may
then be parsed according to the following Rules.
1. A substantive or noun is parsed by telling its kind,
whether a common noun or a proper name ; whether
animate or inanimate ; its subject and object ; the num-
ber, whether singular or plural ; the person, whether the
simple, the second, or the third third person ; and the
case; and indicating the termination of its plural.
"2. A pronoun is parsed by stating the kind, (there are five
kinds or classes of pronouns,) the number and person ;
and by showing its connection with a verb, or with a
substantive.
3. A verb is parsed by telling its quality, and to which
Conjugation it belongs, which is done by naming the
Conjugation, or the characteristical third person ; by
naming its participle present, by which the verb's Change
512
is known ;* by stating its voice, form, mood, tense, per-
son and number.
4. An adjective is parsed by telling of which sort it is,
whether adjective proper, or adjective-verb ; by telling
whether compared or not ; and the degree of comparison,
if compared.
5. A number is parsed by indicating its clans or kind,
(there are five different classes of numbers.) If it is
transformed into a verb, the Conjugation to which it be-
longs, is to be stated.
6. A preposition is parsed by pointing out the words be-
tween which it shows the relation.
7. An adverb is parsed by stating its c/a.ss, (there are ten
classes of adverbs,) and by indicating the word it
modifies.
8. A conjunction is parsed by stating its sort, and by show-
ing the words or sentences which it joins together.
9. An interjection is parsed by merely naming it as such.
As a general Rule for parsing take this: State every-
thing that belongs to a part of speech in the sentence you
analyze, in as few words as possible, and always in the same
manner, as much as can be.
SPECIMENS OF PARSING OR ANALYZING.
Parse the following sentence according to the above
Rules: Sagiada Jesus, win MI nit.um ki gi-xti«iig»nu». (Let
us love Jesus, because he has first loved us.)
, is a verb, derived from •///'// ttt^ia, I love him ;
which is a transitive animate verb pf the IV. Conjugation.
It is in the imperative, first person plural, affirmative
form, active voice. Its subject (understood) is kinawind*
* See p. 128.
513
we ; its object is Jesus. Its participle present is,
saiagiad.
Jesus, is a substantive, proper name, simple third person,
object of sagiada.
Win, is a personal pronoun, he, masculine (here), singular,
third person ; it stands instead of Jesus, and is connected
with the following verb, sagiigonan.
Sa, is here a copulative conjunction, signify ing because, for;
it joins the pronoun win with the following verb.
Nilam^ first, is an adverb of the seventh class, denoting
time ; it modifies the verb sagiigonan.
Ki, is a personal pronoun, us, first person plural ; it is used
when the person spoken to is included. It is connected
with the following verb.
Gi-, is a particle or sign, indicating the perfect tense ; in
cases of Change it is ga-.
Sagiigonan, is a verb from nin sagia, I love him ; which
is a transitive animate verb of the IV. Conj., II. Case ; it
is, together with the preceding sign, in the perfect tense,
third person singular, relating to the first person plural ;
affirmative form, indicative mood. Its subject is the
above pronoun, win ; its object is the preceding hi, us.
Another specimen in the following sentence : Dcbend-
jiged o gi-inan Debenimidjin : Namadabin nin kitchini-
kang. (The Lord said unto my Lord : Sit on my right
hand.)
Dcbendjigcd, is the participle present, third person singular,
from nin dioendjige, I am master, lord ; which is an in-
transitive verb of the I. Conj. This participle is here
employed as substantive, in the simple third person ; it
is the subject of the next following verb. Its plural is
formed by adding jig.
O, is a possessive pronoun, third person ; but here it is the
objective case of the personal pronoun win, him.
514
<7/-, is a sign denoting the perfect tense ; in the Change
A'a-.
///«/?, is derived from nind inn, T toll him, I say to him;
which is a transitive animate verb of the IV. Conjnjr. ;
irregular in the imperative, //'/. It is, in conjunction
with o and #/-, in the active voice, affirmative form, in-
dicative, present ; third person singular, relating to a
second third person singular. Its subject is Dcbcndji^cd,
its object Debenimidjin, Participle present, cnad.
Debeniwidjin, is derived from nin dibr.ninut, lam his mas-
tea, his lord ; which is a transitive animate verb of the
IV. Conj. It is in the II. Case, participle present, affirm-
ative form, in the second third person, DcbcndjigKd being
the simple third person.
Namadabi.n, is an intransitive verb of the I. Conj., ?ii/t IKI-
madab, I am sitting, or, I sit down : affirmative form,
imperative, second person singular. Participle present,
nemaaabid.
Nin, is a pronoun, personal and possessive , here it is pos-
-ive conjunctive, my; first person singular. It is
connected with the following substantive, and relers tu
instead of which it stands.
Kitchrnikang, is a substantive, kitchinik, the right arm.
It is a common noun, inanimate; the object of the pro-
ceding pronoun ///'// ; in the singular number, simple
third person ; its plural is formed by adding an. The
English preposition on, is expressed by the termination
ang. (See Prepositions, No. 1J., X term, page- 4(5:5.)
I
A third specimen of parsing! Sentence:
?/)ftfr/ii ma niton <> dibenimigOW&ft : an' d<r It
ifoti xd'm triad k air in nit-a^bata-ijiwebisissi, ('J'hose that sin
habitually, are the servants of the evil spirit, (he is their
T;) but he that loves God, is not in the habit of sin-
ning.)
515
Neta-bata-didjig. is a verb composed of three parts. The
first part is nita-, which is no distinct part of speech,
but only used in compositions, to signify a habit, or cus*
torn. In the Cliangc. it makes, nctu-. The second part
is batd-, which again is no distinct part of speech, never
used by itself, but only in compositions, where it signi-
fies sinning, or injuring one's self. The third part is
the defect, ve verb, nin dind, I am, I do, etc. . . The
whole is in the affirmative form, participle present, si?n-
ple third person plural. It is the object of the verb di-
benimlgowan ; signifying : " Those that sin habitually. "
Matchi, is an adjective-proper, in the positive, simply qual-
ifying the following substantive. It signifies evil, bad, etc.
Sfanitbn, is a common substantive, manito, spirit. It is
animate, singular, the second third person, referring to
ncta-bata-didjig, which is the simple third person. It is
the subject of the verb dibenimigowan. Its plural is form-
ed by adding g, manitog.
O, is here the objective case of the personal pronoun winct-
wa, they ; it refers to neta-bata-didjig.
Dibenimigowan, is a verb derived from nin dibcnima,! am
his master ; which is a transitive animate verb of the
IV. Conj. It is in the passive voice, affirmative form,
indicative, present, third person plural. Its subject is,
matchi-maniton, and its object, neta-bata-didjig ; its par-
ticiple present is debenimad.
Aw, is a demonstrative pronoun, singular; signifying that^
or he that. The substantive instead of which it stands,
is not expressed, but understood ; as : A man, a person,
a Christian, etc. It is the simple third person, and the
subject of saiagiad.
Dash, is a conjunction, both copulative and disjunctive ;
here it is disjunctive, because it signifies but.
Kije-Maniton, is a substantive, the name of the Lord God.
Kije-Manito properly signifies, Kind t-pirit. It is the
second third person ; the preceding pronoun aw, (or the
516
substantive instead of which it stands,) being the simph
third person. It is the object of the following verb.
tfaiagiad, is a verb derived from mn Migia, I love him ;
which is a transitive animate verb of the IV. Conj. It is
here in the participle present, affirmative form, third per-
son singular. Its subject is aw, and its object Kij&-
Manlton.
Kawin, is an adverbof the fourth class, denoting negation.
It modifies the following verb.
Nitd-bata-ijiwebisissi, is a verb composed of three parts.
The two first parts are the same as in the first word of
this sentence. The third part is a verb derived from
nl /id ijiwebiS) I behave, I conduct myself; which is an
intransitive verb of the I. Conj.; its third person is, iji-
wcbisi ; its participle present, ejiiri'bix'u/. Its subject is
aw. The whole is in the negative form, indicative, pres-
ent, third person singular ; and signifies, in connection
with the preceding adverb : " He is not in the habit of
behaving sinfully. "
Parsing, or analyzing sentences, is the most useful gram-
matical exercise that can be found. It accounts for every
word and every syllable in the sentence, it recalls to memo-
ry all the Rules of Grammar, and shows practically their
use and application.
Dear reader, if you wish to acquire a solid and systemat-
ical knowledge of this language, be diligent in parsing sen-
tences. And write down you parsing exercises, like these
Specimens. The above Knles and Specimens show you the
uuinnr.r ; and &iit<'nrt'x lor parsing yon iiud in abundance
in the numerous Examples of this Grammar.
517
FAMILIAR PHRASES,
TO FACILITATE CONVERSATION.
I. For questioning, affirming, denying, going, coming, etc.
Who is that ? What is that ? Awenen aw 1 Wegonen ow ?
What is the matter ? Wegonen 1 or : Anin cjiwebak ?
W'hat is the news ? Anin enakamigak ?
What is your name I * An in ejinikasoian ?
What is the name of that man, woman, boy, girl ? Anin
ejinikasodaw inin<, ikioe, Lwiiuisens, ikwesens?
Wiiat is the name of this thing 1 Anin ejinikadeg owl
(in. obj.) t Anin ejinikasod dw? (an. obj.)
What do you say ? How ? What ? Anin ikitoian ?
Anin? Wcgoicn? Wa ?
What are you doing? (sing.) Wegonen wcjitoian?
What are you doing? (plur.) Wegonen wrjitoieg ?
Have you done ? Ki gi-ishkwata (ishkwatam) na ?
What do you want ? Wegonen ica-aiaiati (aiaieg) 1
What do you come for ? Wegonen ba-ondji-ljaian (ijaieg) ?
or : W^egonen ba-osikaiaii (osikaieg} ?
What do you mean ? Wegonen wa-ikitoian (ikitoieg) ?
What is the meaning of that ? Wegonen wa-ikitomagak iw ?
May one ask you? (sing.) Ki da-gagwcdjimigo na?
What do you want to ask me ? (sing.) Wegonen wa-gag-
wedjimiinn ?
* ^ote. I/i these Phrases as well as in the LKalopues, we express
the Indian second person singular, by the second person plural in Eng1-
lish, this beuijf in Kniriish the usual way.
t Soo Remark, p 1'J. (The mark an. signifies animate objects j and
the mark m. inanimate.)
33
518
Who lives here? Whose house is this? Awcncn oma en-
dad 1 A'ccncn ow wewakaiganid (wewigiwamid) ?
Whose books are these I Aivencn onow wemasinaiganidf
What have we to do 1 Wegonen gc-dodamangiban 1 (or,
ge-dodamang 1 )
Do you know that? (all in the sing.) Ki kikendan na iw 1
Do you hear me? Ki nondaw ina?
Do you understand me ? Ki nissitotaw ina ?
Do you remember (recollect)?* Ki mikwendan inal
Do you know me? Kiklkenhn ina ?
Whom do you look for? Aircurii nrndawabamadl
What do you look for ? \Yc:_:onrn ncndawabandaman 1
What have yon lost? \V;"S iicn gd-irnnit nan ?
Why don't you answer ? IV< uoi.cji wendji-nakwttansiwan ?
Wouln'd y^u give me . . . send me ... bring me ... lend
me. . . ? A'« na 1:1 da-jiiijisxi . . . nindaitsi . . . lidau'is-
si . . . • . .?
Go and fetch it. Aivi-in'din, (in. obj.) airi-uJj, (an. obj.)
I assure you. It is the truth. Gcgct. Dcbirci
I speak the truth; beliovc me. Nin dcbwr,
It is not so ; you tell a lie. Kamn awansinon ; ki
im
It is saul so; every body says it. Ikitnm sa ; ktikinu ikl-
to,
I contradict it ; I don't believe it. Ntnd agonwdam ; ka-
win
It is a filsc report, d,.n't believe it. Anisha dtbadjimom,
kcgo dc'nr.t n
Do y<M» j---t (j >kc) ? An'- /i. -i iui kid il;it Ir/ii
I beli re you. I don'i ! elie?e you. Ki dflnrct^n. Ka-
Win nun.
You are in T:io rijriit. Ki r/<
He is in the wronj. Ka.;-in dtln
519
I say yes. I say no. E, nind ikit. Kawin, nind ikit,
What do you say ? Nothing. Wcgonen dash kin ekitoian 1
Kawin ningot i (kawin gcgo.)
You have been imposed upon. Ki gi-giwanimigo.
Don't believe immediately everybody. Kego pabige deb-
tfetawaken bemadisidjig.
Who has told it to you ? Awencn ga-dibddjimotok 1
I intend to do it ; I will do it. Nind inendam tchi doda-
mdn; nin wi-dodam.
I consent to it ; I approve it. Nln minwendam tchi ijiwe-
bak iw ; nin minwabandan.
I am against it. Kawin nin minwendansi tchi ijiwebak iw.
I for my part, I say rfbthing. Nin win, kawin ningot nind
It would be better for me to ... Nawdtch nin da-mino-
dodam tchi . . .
I had rather . . . Nawutch nin da-minwendam . . .
You speak too much. You speak too loud. Kid osamidon.
Osam ki J:ijiwc.
Hold your tongue. Kid ombigis.
Don't say a word. Kego ningot ikitoken.
Be quiet; you make too much noise, (plur.) Bisan abig
(abiiog) ; osain kid ombigisim.
Do you know that man ? Ki ktkenima na aw inini ?
I saw him, but I never spoke to him. Nin gi-wabama, ka*-
win dash wika nin gi-ganonassi.
I forgot his name. Nin wanenima ejinikasod.
I heard several reports. Anotch babamddjimowin nin gi'
nondan.
It is not worth while to speak of that. Kawin apitcndag-
wassinon tchi dajindamingiban. *
* See Remark 8, page 119.
520
I request you to make that for me. Ki pagossenimin tchi
ojitamawiian ow.
I thank you for your kindness towards me. Migwctch mi-
no dodcnciidn.
You are too good to me. Osam ki mi no dodcnr.
I could never do too much for you. Kairin wikci tun da-
gasJikitossin osam tchi mino dodond-n , (ortdodon •. in ban..')
You are very kind indeed. Grgct ki kitchi kijcwudis.
I give you too much trouble. I give you too much work.
Osam ki kotagiin. O.<atn kid mwkiin.
It affords me pleasure to do tint; to make that for you.
Gc«ct nin minwvndam tchi dodaninn iw ; tc/ii ujltonnn. iw^
Where are you uoing ? Whoro are they gone ? AnlmU
eja i a n 1 A n i n di g a- ija ira d /
I am going far. I am going near by. Wassa nin n*i-ija.
Beslw nin wi-ija.
I am going home. Nin giwe, (endaiannind ija.)
He is going home. They are going home. (V/'/rr, (rndad
ija.) Giwetffagt( endawad ij«i-
You walk too fast. They walk too slow. Osam ki kijikd.
Osam btsikairag.
Are you in a great hurry ? Apitchi na ki wewibishkdl
Let us go on the other side of the bay, (river,) or. let us
cross the bay, (river, etc.) Agaming ijudu, or. a/aoira-
da, (in a canoe, etc,., ) ajaogakoda, (on foot on the ice.)
Let us cross the road. Ajoadoda mikanu.
Let us go in. Let us go out. Pindi^cda. Sagaandanda.
I go up. I go down. Nind akwantfawe. Ninniy.tauddin^
Let us go this way. They go that way. Oma nakukcia
ijndci. Wedi nakdkeia ijaim^.
He goes to the right, he dn(-> n,,t g<> to the left. (H-ifc/iini*
nakdkiia iju, kturin namandjinikamang nukakda
Go straight along. Gwai.dk ani-ijan.
521
Go back a little. Ajegabawin pangi.
Go back again, (return ) Ajegiwen.
Stay here, don't go away. Oma aian, kego madjaken.
Where you come from? (whence come you?) Anindi
wend jib aian ?
I come from your house. Enddian nind ondjiba.
I come from home. Endaidn nind ondjiba.
I come from my uncle's. Nijishe (or, nimishome *) cnda-
wad nind ondjiba.
Come here, or hither. Ondashan, or, bi-madjan, bi-ijan
oma.
Go there. \Vedi ijan, mad Jan.
Come to me. Sit down with me. Bi-nasikamsJiin. Wi-
dabimishin.
Come along with me. Stand here with me. Bi-widjiwi-
shin. Widjigabawitaivisliin oma.
Come near the fire, warm yourself. Bi-nasikan islikote, bi~
a was on.
Stop, hold on ; stay a little. Beka ; nogigabaivin nakawe.
I will wait for you. Wait for me here. Ki ga-biin. Bi-
ishin oma.
Open the door, the window. Pakdkonan islikwandem, was-
sctcltigan.
Let us shut the door, the windows. Kibakwaanda ishkwan-
dcm, wassetch iga n a n .
I will go home now ; to-morrow I will come here again.
Nin wi-giwe ningom ; wabang minawa nin ga-bi-ija.
I exhort him to go, to work, etc. Nin gagdnsoma tchi
madjad, tc/ii anokid, etc.
It is all the same whether he comes or not. Ml tibisliko
tchi dagwiehing, kema gaie tc/ii dagwishinsig.
* Nijishe, my mother's brother. Nimishome, my father's brother.
522
Thou deservest to be whipped. Ki wikwatchitamas tchi
beukanjeogoian.
I am poor for your sake,(you are the cause of my poverty.)
Kiiwwa nind ondji kitiuui^h<.
Religion will be the cause of thy happiness. Anamicicui
hi gad-o n dji-ja wendagos.
They have been ill treated for religion's sake. Anamicwin
gi-oii dji-matcki-d wlu ica wag.
Tell me what you think, what you are doing, etc. Winda-
maivishig enendameg, cndodamcg, etc.
He looks like a dead person; you look sick; they speak
like angry people. Nclumgin ijrndg^yi ; aialcosingin kid
tjinagos ; neshkadisingin iji. gijwewag.
One laughs, and the other weeps. Brjig bajri, Icjig dash
mawi.
Some are rich and some are poor. Anind daniwug, unhid
One or the other will come here, (or, let one or the other
come here.) Bfjitf n'ljhrad ta-hi-ija OIIKI.
One of them will embark. Hci endashiwad ta-bosi.
I have a good memory, T shall not forgot, it soon. TV//; nila-
tnifidjimendan gcg<>, I; air in -irallxt nin ga^wanend&nsin.
He is happier than you. Naicntrh. win jawendagosi, kin
dash, (or, kin gi-jawendagoBiian.)
John is \\iscr than Paul. Ntiifalcli John nibiruka, Paul
dash, (< r, eji-nibwakad Paul.}
How much have you been charged for this gun? Anin mi-
ni k ga-inagindamagoian <nr j>rtx/ikixi»(in '?
William was charged more. Naicatch nibiica IViUiam gi-
inagindamatPCL
1 shall not go away IK i ' ik to him. Kuir'ni nin toi-
Madjnxsi tclii Inra »<int.jtug.
He is \\isf-r than he is rich. Nawatch nibwaka, cji-danid
dask.
523
He is as rich as he is wise. Epitchi nibwakad mi epitch
danid.
You are as happy as I am. Eji-jawendagosiidn mi eji-
jawendagosiian gaic kin.
The older he grows, the deafer he is. Eshkam gagibishe
cji-giLad.
The more they are taught, the more they are ignorant.
Eshkam gagibadisiwag ano kikinoamawindwa*
The more I work, the better I am off. Eshkam nin mino
aia aitokii'.ii.
As long as I sh:ill behave well, I will be loved, Ged-apitch-
mimt-ijtwcb -iiiln, nin ga-sagi/go.
I am not rich enough to buy that. Kawin nin dt-danisissi
g&giskpinadoiamban Iw.
You are not learned enough to be his teacher, (to teach
him.) Kaw'iii ki ga-dt-kikinoamawassi.
He is old enough to be his own master, and to take care
of himself. Doapitiai gc-dibcnindisod, gc-bamiidisod
gaie.
They arrived to-day sooner than they usually do. NawatcJi
nongom waiba gi-dagwishiriogt cji-dagwiskii owad iko.
John is the wisest of all my scholars. John awasliime nib-
waka cndavii icad nin kikinuamaganag,
This book is the most precious of all my books. Ow ma-
.sinaigan awasliime apitendagwad endassing nin masi-
naiganan.
I am not the person to do that Kawin nind awissi ge-
d od ami m b a n i w,
He is not capable of stoaling. Kawin G.da-gashkitossin
tchi gimodid, (or, tchi gimodtpan.)
I don't hate you, on the contrary, I love you. Kawin ki
jingcnimissinon, gwaiak ki sagiin.
You are by far not so strong as he is. Ki mashkawis
nange eji-maslikawisid.
524
I give him leave (permission) to go, to do that, to marry,
etc. Nin pagidina tclii madjad, tchi ojitod iw, tchi
widigcdy etc.
2. To inquire after health.
Good day, sir ; how do you do to-day ? Bun jour, nidji ;
anin tji-bimadisiian (or, audit an) nongom ?
Thank you, I am well. Migwetch, nin mino bimadis, (nin
mitio aia.)
How do your children do? Anin fji-lh/w din head kinld-
jamssag 1
They are likewise well ; nobody is sick. Mino aictwag
gaie winau-a ; kairin aid /a akovixsi.
How does your sister do? Anin cji-aiad (endigid) kimissc
{bishimt) !
How does your brother do? Anin cji-aiad (cji-bimadisid)
kissaie (k is hi me) ?
Is your mother in good health ? Mino a'ta na kiga ?
She is not well. Kawin mi)i<> r/zV/sv/.
She is a little indisposed. Pangi akosi*
What is her illness ? Anin cna pined ?
She has got a cold. Agigoka sf(.
She has a violent headache. O kitclti akotin o$1ifi<f,
(o nissigon os/it/gican.)
T have heard your uncle is also unwell. Kimishomc. (kijr-
akosid>x gaie /''in
He has got a sore throat. O gonrhii^an od akosin.
{ have toothacho. Xihid u'uid fiknsin.
Has Iliis child been sick now a long ti-nc ? Mtwija
nkii-.ihiin (in- ii'hii> nlji ?
No, not very loni,'. J\airin apilclti //inrija.
Have you long been sick ? Mricija na kid akosinaban ?
525
A week. Ten days. A month. Ningo anamicgijigad.
Middssogwan. Ningo gisiss.
But now I think on it ; ho\v does your aunt do? Pit china $
nln mikircndan; amii cji-aiad (eji-bimadisid) kinoshe
(kisigoss) ?*
She is not yet recovered ; she is yet very sick. Kawin
maihinodjimossi, kciabi kitchi akosi.
I have sore eyes, but my legs are not sore now. Tfishkin-
jigon nind akosinan, kawin dasli nikadan nongom nind
akosissin&n,
My breast is sore, (a female speaking,) but my sister has
no more a sore breast. Nin toto&himag nind akosinag,
ha win dash nimisse keiabi od akosistiiuan.
My brother is getting better. — My mother is perfectly well.
Nitxa/e (or, nishiwc) cshkam nau-atchmino aia. — Ningd
apitchi nil no aia.
I am happy to hear it. Nin minwendam iw nondaman.
My father is quite sick ; he fell sick suddenly last night.
JVoss kitchi akosi ; scsika gi-ukusi tibikong*
Have you any medicines ? Mashkiki na kid aian ?
L have many good medicines. Anotch mashkiki wenijishing
nind aian.
Have you any purging medicine ; castor-oil, salt (for purg-
ing :) vomitive or emetic ; camphor (Opodeldoc,) etc. ?
Kid aian na jubo^igan ; bimide-ja,bo$igant jiwitagani-
jabosigan ; jashigagowesigan ; gwcndasscg, etc. ?
This child is sick ; it has perhaps worms ; it is always
occupied with its nose. Akosi aw abinodji; gonima
ogejagimiwidog, mojag odjanj o dajikan.
Here is some vermifuge. Ow ogejagimi-mashkiki.
I have the diarrhoea. I have the fever, (ague.) I have
pains in the bowels, (colick.) I have pain in the breast.
* Ninoshe, (or,ninwishe.) my mother's sister. Ninsigoss, my father's
lister.
526
Ninjubokawis. Nin niningishka. Nind dkoshkade. Nin
kakigan nui akosin.
3. Of the age*
How old are you ? Anin endasso-bibonagisiian 1
I am twenty years old. Nin nijtana dnxso bibunugi.i.
How old is your father ? An>n endasso-bibonagisid koss?
L don't know his age ; he is already old. Kairin nin kikr-
nimassi endasso-bibonagisigwcn ; ja'igica kiichi anishin-
abciri.
He (she) is young, he (she) is a child. He is a young man j
she is a younir woin;in. lie is a m;m : she is a woman.
He is an old man ; she is an old woman. Onhkihinta-
di.si, ahinodji'uri. Oshkinawewi ; oshkinigikwewi* Ini-
nlii'i ; i/wciri. Akiwesiiwi; mindimoieitffi.
He (she) is very old ; extremely old. Gikti ; apitrld gikti.
He (she) returned to childliood. NSiab ubinodjiiwi.
You are active (vigorous) yet, although very old. Keiabi
ki kijijairix ano gikaian.
I thank the Lord who gives me good health in my age.
Migzoetch -it f /id i/ifi Debendjiged kc'mhi inijid mi no biina-
dixiirin ('iritis'tutn.
Are you of my age ? JE/>/V/s /'/>///, na kid « pit is 1
\ am the oldest. Nin nin Ndxikis.
I am the youngest. Onf/ass nJnd ondadis.
\Vho is the oldest person in this village? (or, here in the
village?) Aircnrn (iir maidmtiwi-Sasikisid oina. odc-
iHin
Who is the oldest of yon two '(of you both) ? Aircncn
//t'/.v/V/ l.-'iiidira IHIHIIJ (or, nijiieg) ?
How many brothers have you? Anin rmlatlriwad kissaio
i'i« (kiskimeiag) !
(jo p. 4-10.
527
How many sisters have you ? Anin endashiwad kimisseiag
(kishimeidg) 1
I have three older brothers, and two younger than I. Nis-
siu'ctg nissaieiag, nijiwag dash nishitneiag kwiwisensag*
I have two older sisters, and three younger than I. Niji-
wag nimissciag, nitsiwag dash nishimeiog ikicesensag.
How old is the oldest of your brothers (sisters) ? Anin
endasso-bilwtiagisid sesikisid kissaic (kimisse) /
How old is the youngest of your brothers (sisters)? Anin
endasso-bibonagisid amishimc egashiid kiskime kwiwi-
sens (iTcwesens) ?
You are very tall for your age. Ki kitchi gino.s cpitlsiian.
Is not Paul older than William ? Kawin na Paul awashime
sasikisissi, (Vtlliam dash?
No, he is younger. Kawin, ondass win ondadisi.
How old may this young woman be ? Anin endasso-bibo-
nctgisigwen an* oshkinigikwe?
She is young yet, but she is tall. Oshkilimadisi keiabi,
anisha dash giaosi.
My cousin is adult. My nieces are not yet adult (grown
up). Gi-nitaicigi nttawiss. Kawin mas lie nitawigissi-
wag nishimis <dg.
Very seldom a person now lives to the age of a hundred
years. Kitchi wiJ:a awiia nongom ningutwak dassobibon
bimadist.
4. On the liour.^
What o'clock is it (what time is it) ? Anin endasso-diba-
iganeg ?
It is one o'clock, two o'clock, etc. Ningo dibaigan, nijo
dibaigan, etc.
The day-break will soon appear. Ja'igwa gega ta-waban.
* See p. 18. f See p. 443.
528
The daybreak appears. — The sun is rising. Jdigwa tea-
ban. — (JT is iss b I - tint I: ad in .
Is it late? (speaking in the m';rni-n«.) No, it is not late, it
is early yet, (morning yet.) / /i/ii^iji^ffff na 1 — Kuirin
ishp iif >j igu >' -v i n i > u , hi- 1 (i l> I Ic iff ijcb (ciraga ,7.
How late may it be (in the day) ? Anin c/fitn'n-^i/iga-
tbg't
Is it already noon ? Nuuwkwc (or, naiffokwemctgad) ?ui
.'•a /
No, it is not yet noon. Kawin wathi naienk
It is just noon now, twelve o'clock, (iiraiak
n on if 01 n.
He started after twelve o'clock (noon.) Ga-ishkwa-ftawok-
wcnig gi-madja.
Three o'clock in the afternoon. Nixso (libai^du <rfi-ishkira-
nawokweg.
Is it early yet? (speaking in the afternoon.} Ishpigifigad
it a kciabi ?
It is not early (in the afternoon), it will soon be evening.
Ka irin ijs/ij) igtj igfi v.s- ,; /ion, ja ig ;ra a n /-< » n (i^,nfh i.
It is evening. It is twilight. J -hi. Tiblka-
baminagwad.
Is it late in the night ? — No, it is not late, fshpitibtkdd
?KI ' — Kdiri ii ishpitibikassinon.
It is night. It. is a very d:irk night : I see nothing. \i-
b&tibik. Kitchi kashkitibikad^; kn. nin tcaban-
f/ fin sin.
Is it aircady midnight ? — No, it is not yet midnight. Abita-
tibikad naja'igwa / Kfi/r/n ma* hi. abita-tibikassifton.
How lato nny it be (in the night) ? Anin
f/ 'ifii'i-n ! (or, ( i>!trli til •' ')
1 1 i s H e v e 1 1 < > V 1 or k . tt ba i^d n >• a a.xh i bij it'.
it is just, midnight. Abitii-tibikad gwoiak.
It is now past midnight. Gi*i*hkwa-abita~tibik<id
529
I will start after midnight. Gi-iskkwa-abitd-tibikak nin
ga-madja.
I started after midnight. Ga-iskktoa-abitd-tibikak nin gi-
madja.
He started after midnight. Ga-ishkwa-abi(d-!ibikadinig gi-
maclja.
Do you get up early in the morning 1 Wa'iba na ko kid
oi,is'(.ka kigijcb ?
I always get up in the morning early ; this morning only
I did not get up early. AJojag klt.rhi kigijeb nind onish-
ka ; jtba eta kawin wa ba nin gi-onishkassi.
Get up. my brother, (sister,) it is day-light. Onishkan,
nisltim ; jaigwa gi-traban.
You are lazy ; you use to sleep too long. Ki kltimlslilc-;
osam g^nwiij kl nib a AT.
It is not yet ten o'clock. Kawin mashi midasso dibaigan-
non,
Are you accustomed to get up at ten o'clock ? Medasso-
dibaig&neg na ko kid tiiiishka ?
See the watch, (clock,) is it going ? Wcibam dibaigisiss-
wan. ftfadjishka na /
It is riot going ; I have not wound it up. I will wind it up
now. Kate hi madjishkasw ; kawin nin gi-ikwabiuwassi.
No'ugom nin gad-iku'abiowa.
When dees the sun set ? Aniniwapi gislss pengishimod ?
It sets at six o'clock.' Nengotwasso-dibaigaiicg sa pang-
isliimo.
When will you go home? (plur.) Aniniwapi gc-giwcieg?
We will go home exactly at seven o'clock. Najwasso-dibai-
ganeg sa gwaiak nin wi-giia min.
This watch is very fine. How much did it cost ? Kitclfi
onijishi aw dibaigisisswdn. Anin dasswabik ga-ina~
ginsod ?
It cost twenty dollars. Nijtana sa dasswabik gi-iuaginso.
530
It is an old watch ; it is not new. Gcta-a'iaa, kawin oshld-
aictawissi.
This watch goes too slow ; too quick ; it is broken ; some-
times it stops. Aw dibigaigisisswan o*<nn bcxikai osam
kijikd ; gi-bigo$hka ; naningotinong iia^ax/i
When will you go out to-day 1 Atiiniicajii ge-s&gctaman
no H gout ?
I will go out at nine o'clock ; and before three o'clock I
will come home again. J^ngasso^ibaiganeg na nui ga-
sagaum ; tclil bio a dash nisso dibaigan nui ga-bl-giwe
minawa.
Laborers work ten hours every day. Anokiwimniwag »H-
dasso- d i ba iga n a , . oki wng en da s.w-g ij igad. i 11 ig.
How many hours do you sleep every night? Anin dasso*
' dibaigan nihaian tebikakin ?
I sleep six hours every night. Ningotwasso diluigan si*
tti/t mba indasso-tibikak.
5. For and at breakfast,
When do you use to take breakfast ? Aniniwapi wassiniicg
iko kig jc.b (
At seven o'clock. Neyivasso-dibaigancg .ST/.
Our breakfast is ready. Sfijaigwa wi~ioissiniiang,
Come and sit down here ; sit down here by my side. Orna
b<-ii(i/iK/(/!/t> n ; bi-widabimishin.
\\"hat do you choose ? Wi-gmu-n gr-iri-diaitin ?
I will eat. some fish, (jign nhi gm/-iinwd /Hingt.
Here is trout, :md here is white-fish. Which do you like
best? i)l aw namtgoss, aw dash (ttikaneg. Anin aw
nawatc/i incinrrmnuid !
I will 1ak<- some whit -lish this morning. Atlkaincg nin
iri-<initi / no i ,<>in.
Is it fresh iish .' (J.^/iki gigfi na ?
No, it is s:ili«: i ii-ii. A' •///•///, jiwttagani-gigu air.
531
It is very nice ; it has an excellent taste. Gegct kttchi
onijishi ; kitclii minopogosi.
Take some bread ; some crackers. Mami aw pakwrjigan ;
ogoiv pakwejigansag.
These crackers are very fine ; very good. Kitclii onijishi-
wag pakwejigansag ; kitclii minopogosiwag.
Don't you wish to eat potatoes 1 Kawin na opinig ki ivi-
amoassig ?
I took some ; I am eating them. I am very fond of pota-
toes. Your potatoes have a good taste indeed. Nin gi-
mamag sa; nind amoag. Nin kitchi minwenimag opinig.
Gcgct minopogosiwag kid opinimiwag*
Will you drink some chocolate 1 Miskivdbo na ki ivi-mi-
nikwen ?
I will drink some. Nin ivi-minikwcn sa.
But I will drink some coffee. Nin dash malcatc-mashkiki-
wabo nin wi-minikircn.
Who will drink some coffee 1 Awenen ge-wi-minikwed
makatc-maslikikiwabo?
I will take some ? Nin nin wi-minikwcn pangi.
Give me your cup. — That's enough ; you give me too much.
Bidon kid onagans. — Mi iw ; osam nibiwa ki mij.
Take some milk in it, and sugar. Totoshabo dagonan,
sisibakivad gaie.
Will you drink some more ? Give me your cup. Minawa
na ki wi-minikwcn ? J3idon kid onagans.
\ thank you ; that is enough. Migwctch ; mi iw.
There is also some tea, who will drink some? Anibisliabo
gaie. oma atemagad, awenen ge-minikwed ?
Thank you, I will drink none. Migwetch, kawin nin nin
wi- minikwessin.
And you. sir ? Kin dash, nidji ?
I will drink a little, very little. Pangi nin wi-minikwent
pangi go.
532
This tea is very strong. Kltrhi mashkawd garni ow am-
bhhauo.
I like strong tea. Nin mniwcndan meshkdwagamig ani-
bish
I don't like it, I like better weak tea. Knwin nin minicen-
dansin, awashime inn minwendan lr/d, jagwagam
You did not take any butter, do you never eat any 1 K«ic-
•/// a) -i >•/// totjshabo-bimide kid odapinansin. kuicin na wi-
ka /,•/' initljixsin ?
I eat it sometimes, I will take a little. J\7« inidjin so f
pan '-nuinnni.
You eat very little of every thing. Kitchi pcpangi ki
tffissin.
I thank you, I have eaten considerably. Miyicefch, cniwek
ni'i.irit ni n !j;i-!cixsin.
I must go now, I must go to work ; I have much work to
do to-day. N'ui u'i-iinitlja das/i nungom, inn ici-anoki;
nib'ura anokiiciii nind <ii<m non^om.
6. On the weather.
How is the weather? A nin tji~gijigoJc ?
Is it fine wc^itlirr .' — Is it bad weather ? Mino gijigad na ?
Matt fr ir,ijiifad nal
It is fine weather. — It is bad weather. Mino gijigad so.
Md tr/ii ^ij/^df/ .sv/.
The weather is very bad. XixMdad, (kilchi uixkadnd.)
It is cloudy. — It is clear iair weather, the sun shines. An-
akirad. — Mijulcirad.
It is dark, gloomy weather all day. Agaira tfijignd kab(-
It is f<»ir.Lry, t'n1 ^"n docs not apj>ear. Awdn, kawin gisiss
bi-nagosisi i.
It blows, it is windy. Nodin.
533
It blows hard, it is stormy. Kitclii nodin.
It is a dreadful time indeed. Geget gotamigwad.
It blows a gale, a hurricane. Apitchi kitclii nodin.
The wind blows cold. Takassin.
The wind turned, shifted. Gwekdnimad.
I think it will rain to-day. Ta-gimiwan nongom, nind in-
endam.
It is likely enough. Mi gegct cjinagwak.
It drizzles. — It rains. — It hails. Awdnibissa. — Gimiwan.
— Sessegan*
Does it rain ? Does it not rain 1 Gimiwan na 1 Kawin net
gimiiransiuon ?
It rained when I left home, but it does not rain now. Gim-
iwanoban api ba-madjaidn, kawin dash nongom gimi-
wansinon.
It rains again. It rains very fast. It rains a little. Min.
awa gimiwan. Kitchi gimiwan. Agdwa gimiwan.
I am wet, I am all wet. Nin nissdbawe, nind apitchi ms-
sabawe.
Are you not wet ? Kawin na kin ki nissabawessil
I am wet too, I have no umbrella .Mi go gaie nin, kawin sa
gego agawateon nind aiansin.
Are you afraid of getting wet ? Ki got an na iw tchi niss-
abaweian 1
Yes, I am afraid of it ; I use to be sick when I get wet. E,
nin gotan sa ; nind akos iko nessabaweianin.
It is cold. It is very cold. It is extremely cold indeed.
Kissina, or kissinamagad. Kitclii kissina. Apitchi gc*
get kissina.
I am cold, very cold. Nin gikadj, nin kitchi gikadj.
I am starving with cold. Nin gawddj.
My fingers are benumbed with with cold. Nin lakwdki"
ganjiwadj.
34
534
Come in and warm yourself, there is a fire here. Pindigen,
bi-awason, ish/iolciran oma.
It snows fast. — It snows thick. Sogipo, or sogipomagad .
]\Ia ma ngadepo .
The lake, the river, etc., is freezing over. Sdgaigan, sibi,
etc., gashkadin.
The lake is hard frozen over. Sdgaiagan gi-kitchi-gasli-
kadln.
This afternoon I will skate. Nongom gi-iM'wa-nawokirrg
nin wi-joshkwadac.
I have a fine pair of skates. Geget kitclii onijishinon ni/i
joshkwddaaganan.
It thaws now, (it is mild weather.) Jaigwa abawa, or al-
awamagad.
The snow is soft. The snow melts away. Jakagonaga.
Gon ningiso, or angoso.
It begins to be warm. Jaigwa Jcijate, or kijatcmagad.
How warm it is. — It is very warm. Gcgct kijatc — KitcJii
kijatc.
I am warm. Nind dbwcs, (I sweat.)
I am excessive hot. Ninrf apitchi abirr*.
Let us go into the shade. Agawatcg ijada.
We will have a heavy rain, it is too warm. Ta-kitchi-ginu-
irft/i, os am kijdtc.
The sky is cloudy all over. Kite hi. dnakwad.
It lightens excessively. Kite hi wamwinttu-dg animikig.
It thunders, the thunder roars, Animikiwan, masitdgosi-
wag animikig.
What a clap of thunder ! Gcgct kitchi animiki ! Paxh-
kakteaamog !
Are you afraid of thunder ? To be sure. Ki gossag na
Many people are afraid of thunder. Nibiwa bemadisidjig a
gossawan animikin.
535
I never was afraid of it. Kawin nin wika nin gossassig.
Be not afraid, the storm is over. Kego segisiken, jdigwa
ishkwa-n i skadad.
It clears up. Eshkam mijakwad.
I see the rain-bow. Nin wabandan nagweiab.
This is a sign of fair weather. Mi wendji-kikendaming
tclii mino gijigak.
It is very good (pleasing) that it has rained, the ground
was already too dry ; but now the fields will produce
well. Kltchi mimi'cndagwad gi-gimiwang, osam jaigwa
bibinekamigidcban aki ; nongom dash weweni ta-nitawi-
ginonkitiganan.
It is dirty now after the rain. Ajishkika nongom gi-gimi-
wang.
It is bad walking. Sanagad bimosseng.
7. For and at dinner.
It is twelve o'clock now. Come in, we will dine. Jaigwa
nawokwe. Bi-pmdigen, ki ga-wissinimin.
Come sit down on this chair. Ri-nabadamin ow apabi-
wining.
Put another plate (cover) here. Minawa bejig tessinagan
atoiog oma.
There is some meat here. Wiiass oma atemagad.
Beef, veal, pork, ham, deer-meat, bear-meat. Pijikiwi-wi-
iass, pijikinsiwi-wiiass, kokoshiwi-wiiass ,wawashkeshiwi-
wiiass, mako-wiiass.
Help yourself. Kin igo mamon minik menwendaman.
You don't eat, are you sick ? Kawin ki wissinissi, kid
akos na 1
No, I am not sick, I eat much. Kawin nind akosissi,
nibiwa nin icissin.
Potatoes are there and turnips too. Which you like bet-
636
ter? Opinifr ainu'd", tchiss gate oma ate. Wegonen
nawatcli iiiciurcndtnnan. ?
1 will take some turnips. Tchiss nin wi-?)iamon.
Bring salt here and pepper, you did not put it on the table.
Jiwitigan bidoiog gairi^adgang gaic, kaicin Id gi-atoss-
inawa adopowining.
Take some more meat. Mlnawa wiiass mamon.
This ham is very nice, I ate some. Mandan kokoshiwi-wiiass
kitchi minpogwad, nin. gi-midjin paiigi.
This deer-meat has an excellent flavor, and is done nicely.
Iw irairaxlikcxhiwi-ivnass mcmindagc w/wj/w/wv/r/, wc-
weni gaic gijidetnagad.
Have the Indians killed many deer this \\inter 1 Nibiwa
na anishinabeg o gi-nissawan wawaslikeskiwan nongom
biboninig 1
Yes, sir, a great many ; a young man killed seven deer, not
long ago. Gegf:t kite hi -niblu-a ; brjig oshkinawc nomaia
iiijirf/xxiri o "l-nissan ipawQshkeshiwan.
Deer-meat is very good, I like it better than any other kind
of meat. Wawa$hk<ahiwi-wiia$ in< iniada^c /nitio/ o^icad,
awashime nin minwendan, kakina daxli anitid //•//<-/.<>•.
Are there many rabbits here? Walosog na btttai-notcag
oma 1
There are a great many here, and the Indians arc very
skillful in trapping them. Kitclii batdinoirdg onia, ki-
tc/ii irdiriiigrxiirriir f/a.^/i irnhhiiHthi'g ddtxvinurdd.
\ will eat some of this rabbit. J^angi nin iri-diiuxt (tin wa-
bos.
Are there partridges also here ? JBi-newag na gaic d'nnrdg
urn a ?
There are, we eat them often. Aiawag sa, ndiiingim nind
amodiuini".
In summer j>igeons will be here in great quantity. A/
ta-osami mti.
537
We must also drink at our dinner. Ki ga-minikwemin gaie
wissiniiang.
Let us drink, but we-will only drink water, no wine. Min-
ikweda, nibi dash ki ga-minikwemin, kawin win jomin-
aljo.
We have all taken .the temperance pledge, we will keep it.
Kaklna mamawi ki gi-mamomin minikwessi-masinaigan-
san, ki wi-ganaioendamin dash.
I for my part, I will always keep it faithfully as long as I
live. Nin ivin ged-ako-bimadisiian nin wi-ganawendan
weweni.
And so will I. Mi go gaie nin.
There are also some apples here, would you eat any ? Mi-
shiminag gaie oma aiawag, kawin na ki da-amoassig 1
I will eat some. Nin da-amoag sa.
I ate one, two, three, etc., apples. Bejigominag* nijomi-
nag, nissominag, etc., mishiminag nin gi-amoag.
Eat some of these strawberries, there are very many
now here. Odeiminan gaie midjin, kitchi latainadon
nongom gcget oma.
Raspberries will also be in great abundance, by and by.
Miskwiminag(misk6minag) gaie ta-batainowag ndgatch.
I will eat some raspberries. Pangi nin wi-amoag miskwi-
minag.
Will you take some more ? Kcidbi na ki wi-aiawag 1
No, sir, I thank you; I'll eat some of these sweatmeats (pre-
serves,) Kawin, migwetch ; pangi pashkiminassigan
dash nin wi-midjin.
I have dined very well. Weweni nin gi-nawokwe-wissin.
So have I. Mi go gaie nin.
* See page 437.
538
8. Concerning the Otchipwe language.
\ wish to know well the Otchipwe language. Apegish we-
went kikendamdn ici-Otchipwcmoidn.
The Otchipwe language is very difficult, I can speak it a
little. Kltchi sanagad OichipwemQwin, pangi nin gash-
kiton ivi- Otch ip ircm u ian .
You will soon speak it better if you endeavor. Wuilxt
nawatch weweni ki gad-Otchipwcm, kishphi wiku-atchi-
toian.
I endeavor indeed very much, but I can effect nothing.
Nind ano wikwatchitoii apitc/ii, kawessa dash nin gash-
Icitossin.
I think it will be long before I learn to speak well Otchipwe.
Wika ganabatch nin ga-gashkiton wciccni tchi Otc/tij:-
wemoian.
\ will always speak Otchipwe when I speak to you, if you
are willing. Nin gad-Otchipwem nwjag genoninanin,
kishpi n in in irrn da m « n .
Thank you, friend, do that and so I shall indeed know it
sooner. Migwetch, nirlji, ml gc-dodunnui, mi dash gegct
waiba nawatclitchi kikendarnan.
Speak slowly, my friend, you speak too fast; I cannot ev-
en understand a half of what you say. Bt-k<i •iniir(ttr/i
gigiton, nidji, osam ki daddtdbi; kavrin ganage abita
ki nixtitufiMximin <'l:t1oJ<tn.
How do the Indians call this? An in uw ejinikadamowad
anishitidbeg /
This is called .... .... ijinikadc on:
And this4 how is it called? Ow (/nth, an in cjinikadegl
It is called .... .... //// rjlnikadrg.
\ will write down these words, and I will write all the
Otchipwe words, by this means also, I shall learn the
Otchipwe language. Nin gad-ojibianan iniw ikitowin-
539
an, nin wi-ojibianan, mi ima gate ge-ondji-kikendamdn
Otchipwemowin.
Have you nobody that would teach you constantly 1 Kawin
na awiia kid aidwassi ge-kikhioaniokiban mojag ?
No, I have nobody yet, but I will employ somebody to
teach me regularly. Kit win mushi awiia nind aidwassi,
nin gad-anona dash awiia ge-kikinoamawid weweni.
I will employ you, if you will teach me, and you will come
every day to give me lessons. Kin ki gad-anonin, kish-
pin wi-kik'nioamawiian, cndassc-gijigak dash ki ga-bi-
kikinoamaw.
Yes, I promise it to you, I will come every day to teach you.
We will begin to-morrow. E, ki nakomin sa, endasso-
gijigak ki ga-bi-kikinoamon. Wabang ki ga-madjita- •
min.
I would be very happy if I could soon speak well the Otchip-
we language, in order to preach right (well) to the In-
dians. Nin da-kitchi-minwc.ndam, waiba tchi kikcnda-
mdn weweni tchi Otcliipwcmoian, mi sa gwaiak tchi wi-
gagiki m ag wa an is h i n a b eg.
Do you understand all I say, when I am speaking to you .'
Ki nissitotaw ina kakina minik ekitoian genonindnin ?
Yes certainly, I understand you well. E nange ka, ki
nissitoton weweni.
Do you understand every Indian ? Kakina na anishina-
beg ki nissitotawag 1
I don't understand every one, I understand some of them ;
but some speak too quick when they are speaking to me,
end I don't know what they say. Kawin kakina nin nissito-
taicassig, bebejig eta nin nissitotawag ; anind dash osam
daddtabiwag genoj iwadj'in , kawin dash nin kikenimassig
ekitowagwen.
When they are speaking to each other, do you understand
them well ? Kishpin dash ganonidiwad, ki nissitotawag
na weweni ?
540
When they are speaking to each other, I don't much under-
stand them; I understand thorn bettor when they speak
tome. Kishpin ganonidiwad, fcatqin gwetcfr nin nixtito-
tawassig ; awas/iimc nin nix.^ito'tt iru^ ^ttnoj/trad.
You will soon know it, endeavor, don't be discouraged, (dis-
heartened.) \Vaibti nairatc/i ki ga-kikenda7i, aictngwa-
, L'cgo jagwenimoken.
I am not discouraged, and I will not give it up. Kaicin
nin jagwenimossij kan-in gate. nin iri-anijitansl.
9. On traveling ~by land in 1hc Indian country, (in
winter.)
When shall we start (depart) ? Aninhraiii gc-nntdjaiang ?
We shall soon now depart, prepare. Jaigwa iraiba ki ga~
mad j ami n, ojitun.
I am preparing, I am about. Nind ojita, nind ajntchita.
Have you made my snow-shoes 1 Ki gi-gijiciit wa nind
agimag.
Your snow-shoes are not quite made ; I made indeed the
frame, but they are not yet filled, (laced.) Kawin mashi
fipitr/ii irijiaxxi irn g kid tig'nnng ; (tixuri nin ifi-irdginag^
kau-iii t/ax/i maxlii tt&kkimasossiv)ag.
Who will fill them? Airmen (/ash ged*ctshfehtian&d ?
My wife will <ill them to-morrow. l\7in iridi^-ma^an o gad-
athkimanan 'training.
Are my moccasins made ? Nin imtkixinan na gi-gijitcM-
Iciran \
Yes, my sister made them ; she has made one pair, two
pair, three pair, four pair, etc. /',', n gi-iijit<ni(in >v/ ;//"-
i ; •iiinfriitirt'irt/n, nym-iran, iiiamr/'iran, n'nrtiran,
etr.y o ^i-ttjitoiKi n.
\ brontrlit also nips^fbot-l'ags,) one pair, two pair, etc., for
your use. Ajigctnan gait' nin gi-bidonan^ ningotircwau-
nijwcwan, itc., kin »<d-ai<>i'in .
541
And my mittens ? Nin mahdjikaicanag dash 1
Aha ! I forgot them. I will fetch them. Islitc ! nin gi-
wanikenag. Nin wi-ndnag.
We will start (depart) after Sunday, (on Monday.) Gi-ish-
kwa-anamiegijigak said ga-madjamin.
We will start in two days, in three days, in four days. Nijog-
wanagak, nissogwanagak, niogicanagak, ki ga-madja-
min.
What provisions shall we take for our voyage? Wegonen
dash ged-ani-n a wapo i a ng 1
We will take some pork and flour ; we will also take some
meat. Kokosh, palcwtjtgan gaie ki ga-nawapomin,
iviiass gaie ki ga-nawapomin.
Is that pork cooked ; and is the flour baked (into bread) ;
is the meat cooked? Gisiso na aw kokosh, pakwejigan
gaie ; gijide na wiiass ? (or, gijidemag&d.)
Not yet, the day after to-morrow my sister will cook the
pork and bake bread ; she will also cook the meat. Kaw-
in mashi, awasswdbdng nimisse o ga-gisiswan kokoshan,
pakwejiganan gaie ; wiiass gaie o ga-gisisan.
Well, let us start. — I will tie up my pack, (my load.) Am-
be, madjada. Nin wi-takolidon nin bimiwanan.
Oho! my pack is very heavy. Atala ! kitchi kosigwan nin
bimiwanan.
Do you carry all that we shall need ? Ki madjidon na ka-
kina ge-wi-aioiang 1
I think I have all, a little kettle, little dishes, knives, a
hatchet. Mi go kakina, nind inendam, akikons, onagan-
san, mokotnanan, wagakwadons.
Don't you forget any thing ? have you any matches ? Kaw-
in na gego ki wanikessi ? Ishkotewatigonsan na gaie kid
aianan 1
Yes, they are here. Let us go. E, atewan. Madjada.
We go too fast. — We go too slow. Osam ki kijikamin. —
Osam ki besikamin.
542
We don't go in the right direction ; there, there ! Kawin
gwaidk kid ani-ijassimin ; irrdi gox/ui !
0 yes! indeed! I almost went astray. Ishte ! gcgct ! ge-
ga nin gi-wanishin.
Hold on ! I will drink some water here. I am very thirsty.
I am sweating so much. Ilcka! nin wi-minikwen nibi
oina. Nin kite hi ni bug ire, osa/H ninrf ahtrrs.
Don't drink too much water, and don't cat any snow, or
else you will be tired very soon. Krgo <>x<un nibiira nibi
minikweken, kt'go gaic gon anioakcn, gmiimti icaiba ki
gaeL&ieko*.
Is there a trail all along, where we are 'going? Mikandwan
IKI m^fig cj (dang ?
There is indeed a trail, but it shows very little ; it has
snowed too much of late. Ajuuri. mikanawan, (i^uim
dash 'nfigirnd ; oxam gi-sogipo now ft : a.
Why ! are you tired ? Anin ! kid uicko* iia >
1 am not yet tired, I walk easily. Kairin iiuishi nind <in'-
kosisxi, nin, in'inu btmosse.
Walk in «r is good here, it is a fine place, there is no under-
wood here. Mi no bimossewinagad onm , onijishin, jibei-
But here there is much underwood, it is bad walking indeed.
The snow is soft. The snow is deep. Onin r/.'f.s-//. kite hi
iif. Jakdonaa. ,/.s7/.-
pag
There is no trail (no road) here : wcwill go astray. l\<t-
irin orna tfiikanawansinon ; ki ga-wanishinimin.
\\ f arc already Lr<>n<- nstray. 'I'hat is very bad. Mi jai-
•riffi gi-wanishinatig, (icgcf xana^ud.
Stop, I will look for tlie road, (trail.) Here it is! Come
here ! licka, nin ga-nandonean mikana, J\li
It is uo\v noon, (twelve o'clock.) Let us now take a me;il.
jifiirokiCf'g.
543
Well ! I will make a fire ; we will make some tea. Haw !
Nin ga-bodawe ; anibisJiabo ki gad-ojitomin.
I am a little tired. At the same time I have pain in one of
my legs : (I am lame.) Nawatcli nind aiekos. Baietoj
nind akosin bcjig nikdd.
We will not walk long now ; evening is approaching. Ka-
win ginwenj ki ga-bimossessimin ; jaigwa ani-onagoslii. <
Where shall we camp ? There is no fine place. Anindi gc-
gabeshiiang ? Kawin ningotchi onijishinsinon.
Let us camp here ; this is a fine place. Oma gabeshida ;
onijishin cma.
There is much snow, the snow is deep. I must throw out
much snow, to make a camp. Oeget gonika , ishpagona-
ga, (islipate.) Kitchi nibiica gon nin ga-wcbina tchi
ojitoidn gabeshiwin.
I will take (or break) boughs; I will take many, in. order
to make a good bed. Jingobig nin wi-mamag, (nin wi-
bokobinag;) nibiwa nin ici-mamdg, ivewcni tchi apislii-
monikeian.
Friend, chop much wood, it will be perhaps cold to-night.
Nibiwa manissen, nidji, ta-kiss mama gad ganabatch tibi-
kak, (ta-kissintibikad.)
So much wood will be enough. Mi iw ge-debisseg missan.
Let us make fire. Let us cook. Let us eat. Bodawcda.
Tchibakweda . Wissinida.
Hang up my moccasins and my nips, (foot-rags.) to dry.
Agodon nin makisinan, nind- ajiganan gaie, tchi batcg.
Let us lie down, the night is advanced. Gawishimoda}jai-
gwa islipitibikad.
Halloo ! let us get up ; the day-break will soon appear.
Ambe ! onishkada ; jaigwa gega ta-waban.
My moccasins and nips have dried well. Wewcni gi-batc-
wan nin makisinan, nind ajiganan gaie.
Let us start. Is it far yet where we are going ? Madjada.
Wassa na keiabi ejaiang ?
54J
We will have to sleep twice more, that is, this evening, and
to-morrow ; and the day after to-morrow we will arrive.
Keiabi nijing ki gad-ani-nibainin, mi sa, '/wngotn onago-
shiff, wdbang gaie ; awasswabang dash Id ga-ddgirixkin-
imlu.
We are walking smartly all day. IVt'irciii ki Itunosscinin
ftabe-gijig.
Now the sun will soon set ; let us camp. Jaigica gcga ta-
paugixliiiH.o gixsis ; gabctliirla.
We have come far to-day. Wassa nongom hi gi-dirgirishi-
nrmi n.
Let us make a good camp again. ~\Vcu'cnl wiiunra ojitoda
gabeshiwin,
Let us get up and start. If we walk very fast, \ve will
this evening the house we are going to.
madjada. Kishpin « pitch i kijikaidng, noiigaiu
shig I:i ga-u:ab(rml(D>i'ui waktiigan. rjuning.
I will be very glad to reach the house to-day. Nin da-kitcld-
minwendain ic.lii oditaman wakaigan i^on
The house is now near ; two miles more. Jaigica beshu-
wad 'irukuigdn ; kc'mbi ni/<> dllxt'i^an.
There is the house. Mi wtdi irftkaigtui.
I am very glad. Nin kitrfii ininircndam.
10. On traveling by water, in the Indian cai/nfry, (in
summer.)
Friend, when shall we embark ? Aniniwapi (/ /',"'.
iiidji /
I don't knoxv. I will probably not embark soon ; I have
no canoe. llndtigirrti. Wika gantilnttch /tin n'ni ga-bos ;
kfurfii nind utcliiiiKiiiixsi.
Do you intend to make to yourself a canoe? .A'/' iri-ojitoti
na dnxh ki tchiinan /
Yes, I will make our soon. The hark is here1 : and to-mor-
row I will go for some cedar. (irf>c/t iruiha inn iri-oji-
t'l/t. Atetnagad vrigUMUS f wibangd&sli nin wi-passfige.
545
You are skillful, friend, in making canoes. Ki wawinges,
nidji , tch iman ikeian .
It is a long while since I always make canoes. Every sum-
mer I make two or three canoes. Mewija cko-tchimani-
keian mo jag. Endasso-nibin nij, nisswi gate, nind oji-
toiuin tc li Ima nan.
Make also for me a canoe, friend ; I will pay you well.
Gate nin, nidji, ojitamawishikan tcliiman; iveweni Tel
ga-dibaamon.
I will make one ; I will make it perfectly well ; I have nice
bark. Nin gad-ojiton sa ; apitchi wcweni nin wl-ojiton ;
gwanatch wigwass nind aian.
Please make it soon, friend. I will use that this summer.
Waiba ojitokau', nidji. Mi iw ged-aioidn nongom ni-
bing.
I intend to go far ; I will be absent long. Wassa nin ivi-
ija ; ginwenj nin gad-in end.
Yes, I will make it soon. Geget waiba nin gad-ojiton.
I come to see you making a canoe. You are skillful indeed,
(you do it well.) Ki bi-wabamin tchimanikeian. Ge-
get ki ivawinges.
Well, friend ! is my canoe already made ? Anin, nidji!
jaigwa na gi-gijitchigade, nin tcliiman ?
It is indeed all made, but there is no pitch yet on it. I will
pitch it to- morrow. Anawi kakina gi-gijitchigade, ka-
ivin dash mashi pigikadessinon. TVabaiig nin wi-pigi-
kadan.
Here is your canoe, Are you contented? Mi ow ki tclii-
man. Ki minwcndam ina ?
Yes, I am contented, it is nice ; I suppose it is strong. E,
nin mimvcndam, onijishin sa ; songanodog.
lere is your payment. Ow ki dibaamogowin.
thank you, sir, you pay me well. Migwetcn, nidji, icewe-
ni ki dibaamau'.
will embark the day after to-morrow, if it is calm. Awass-
wabang nin ga-bos, kishpin anwating.
546
I intend to hire three Indians ; one will steer, and two will
paddle. Nissici anishinabeg nin wi-(tn<niag; bejig ta-
odakc, nij dash ta-tchimcwag.
I ask yon, Paul, first: Will you hire? I will be absent
long; perhaps two months. Kin, Paul, nitain 1:1 itag-
wedjimin : Ki wi-anonigos na 1 Ginwcnj nin gad-incnd ;
nijo gisiss ganabatch.
I promise you, I will embark with you. Ki nakomin, ki
gad-ad aaivamin sa.
And look for two other men; Paul, who would embark with
us. Minawa dash, Paul, nij ininiwag nandawabajn ged-
adaawaminangog.
I have found two young fellows. Nin gi-mikawag nij osh-
kinau'cg.
Are they good paddlers ? Nita-tchimewag na ?
First rate. Would it not be better that we should row ?
Apitchi sa. Kawin na nawatch da-onijishinsinon tchi
ajeboicidng 1
Ves, it would be good ; we go quicker by rowing, than by
paddling. Gegct da-onij is/tin ; awashimc *a Icijikatn
ajeboicng, iw clash tclilinm^.
I will make two oars ; and I have a paddle. Nin gad-oji-
tonan ntjwatig ajeboianakon ; (tbw'i <!(t*h nin>l aian.
Halloo, halloo, my boys ! let us embark ! It is very calm.
Hair, hair, kteiwisensidog ! hoxida! Kitclii amratin.
l-'nibark all things. Here arc our provisions, l-'nibark the
axe also, the dishes rind our beds; all together. JJosito-
iog kakimi. Mi jiidndun ki nawapwdninan. Wugak-
irni] i^itir, bositoiog, ond^dnan, ki nibaganinanin gate ;
kakina go.
All is shipped now. Mi kakina gi-bo$itchigadcg,
All is not yet shipped ; here is the tent ; put it in the ca-
noe. Kawin mas hi kit kin a boiitchigodcssino* ; wit out
papagiwaianegamig ; bositoiog.
547
Fetch it, friend John, put it here. Bidon, nidji John, oma
aton.
That's all. Let us embark ! Mi kakina. Bosida !
It is very calm indeed. Row smartly, my boys. Kitchi
anwatin gegct. Weweni ajeboieiog, kwiwisensidog.
There is more and more wind ; the wind is fair, we ,will
sail. Eslikam nodin ; minwanimad, ki ga-bimashimin.
Put up the mast and hoist the sail. Patakinig ningassim-
ononak, ombdkobidjigeg.
Aha! we are sailing very fast. Ataia ! gegct ki kijeiashi-
min.
Paul, steer well ; take care of the canoe. Weweni odakcn,
Paul ; ganawendan tchiman.
It blows harder and harder ; and the sea runs higher and
higher. Waves come in. Eslikam kitchi nodin ; esk-
kam gale mamangashka. Bosiwag tigowag.
The wind shifted. Take down the sail. Jaigwa gwckd-
nimad. Bindkonigeg.
It will be dreadful ; let us save ourselves. Is there a river
near? Ta-kitclii-sanagad ; ojimoda. Sibi na dago
besho ?
There is a large river ; we will fly there. Steer for that
place, Paul. Wedi kitchi sibi ; mi wedi gcd-ininijimoi-
ang. Mi wedi, Paul, gcd-inikweaman.
This is a very fine river. I am glad that we are here. It
blows harder and harder. It blows from the lake. Ge-
get gwanatch sibi. Nin mimcendam oma aiaiang.
Eshkam kitchi nodin. Ndwitch ondin.
A dreadful time ! See, how the lake looks ! Kitchi gold-
migwad ! Na, cjinagwak kitchigami !
The wind will probably blow long from the lake; we will
be long wind-bound here. Ginwenj ganabatch nawitch
ta-ondin ; ginwenj ki ga-ginissmaogomin oma.
548
Pitch the tent, boys, it will rain ; it is very cloudy. Pata-
kidoiogpapagiteaiancgamig, Icwiwisensidog.ta-gimfiwctn ;
kite lit anakwad.
Bring in here all our luggage, it will be very bad weather.
Pindigadoiog oma kakina kid aiiminanin, tu-kitcbi-nis-
kadad.
Put also the canoe better inland, lest the wind carry it off.
Tchlman t/aie nnpiming nawatch afoiog, tchiwebassinog.
We have now been wind-bound here two days — three days
— four days ; to-morrow I hope we will embark. Jtii^wa
nijogwan — nissngwan — nlogwan ki gimtsinaagavrin oma;
wabang ganabatch ki. ga-l>o imin.
We will start very early in the morning, if it is calm.
Kite lii kigijcb ki ga-bosimin, kishpin aincating.
Wake up, boys, get up ; it is calm, we will embark, (start.)
Goshkosiiog, kiciwiscnsidog, onishkag ; anwatin, ki ga-
bosimin.
I see ' there two canoes. Let us go^-there and see those
that travel there, (in canoes.) Tthimaiian iiijoiicii; it in
wabandanan ircdi. Ijada awi-wabamada tcedi I-
k ad jiii.
Bon jour ! bon jour ! Where you come from ? Bo jo ! bo
jo ! Anindi toendjibaieg /
Saut Ste. Marie. — And you? J}awitinx *(t. — Kinairn dnxh?
We come from L'Anse. — What news at the Saut? Wik-
wedong nind nndjihtnuin. — Anin rnnktitnigi:!; Jlnwit'rng /
Not any. Two children died lately. — We ;ire Marving :
we have nothing to eat. Kairui nin^ot. Nij ahiiuxljlid^
ir'i-inl) >iru<r utniia'ia. — Xin bahodcniui nlnawind.
Paul, give them so ne pork and Hour. Paul, ashtini knk<>-
a/if in, jH/kirrjifruiirni ^tfic.
Well ! thank you, thank yon ! — We will eat nicely indeed.
O! <> ! nu^iri'lrli, wiguvtrh ! — (irgrt ni n . <ja-mi mi-
ni mi H.
And \ve have also nothing to smoke. Nin mant'pwam'n
nniau'ind.
549
Here is some tobacco. Ow assenia.
Ho ! that's right, that's right ! You make us happy indeed.
0 ! wendjita, wendjita! Geget ki debiimin.
Bon jour ! Farewell, farewell ! Bo jo ! Madjag, madjag !
Let us land, boys ; evening is approaching. Gabada, kwi-
wisensidog ; jaigwa ani-onagoshi.
Let us not land there, it is too stony. Kego wedi gabas-
sida, osam assinika.
Let us land here, there is sand here. This is indeed a fine
landing-place. Oma gabada, mitawanga oma. Geget
gwanatch gabewin.
If it is calm to-morrow, or if the wind is fair, then we will
arrive to-morrow at the village. Kishpin anwating wa-
bangi gonlma gaie minwanimak, mi wabang tchi de-mi-
jagaiang odenang.
Let us embark (start), the wind is fair; we are happy.
Bosida, minwanimad ; ki jawendagosimin.
We are again sailing very fast. Ki kitcJii kijeiasJdmin
minawa.
The sea runs higher and higher. I am sick, I am sea-sick.
1 am always so, when the sea is high. Eslikam mamang-
aslika; nind akos, nin majidee. Mi mo jag endiidn, kish-
pin mamangashkag.
Sea-sickness is very disagreeable. I wish we should soon
arrive. Geget sanagad iw majideewin. Apegish waiba
mijagaiang.
We shall soon arrive. — Here is the village we are going to.
Waiba ki ga-mijagamin. — Mi wedi odcna ejaiang.
I am glad indeed. Geget nin minwendam.
35
550
For the use of Missionaries.
TWO DIALOGUES
BETWEEN A MISSIONARY AND AN INDIAN.
A. Dialogue between a Missionary and a Pagan Indian.
Missionary. Bo jo, nidji !
Indian. Bb jo, bo jo !
M. A nin cji-bimadisiian?
Ki mino a la na 1
I. Nin inino aia anawi nin;
ninidjaniss dash bejig gegct
hit rid akosi.
M. Mewija na akosiban ?
I. Kit eld mewija ; nj>inc
sigwanong. fiftbiwa gaic ako-
' fnojag akosiwag uon-
anishinabeg, hitrhi •nibi-
iii/mirf/is,
oi/in diuniiii' iri/i.
M. Kid innulam juf, ni
gi-dagwithinonutgak
ai/tntriii. mi (lU'utihhnc
Missionary, Bon jour,
friend, (comrade.)
Indian. Bon jour, bon
jour !
M. How do yo do ? Are
you well ?
/. I, for my part, I am
well ; but one of my child-
ren is very sick indeed.
M. Has it been sick
long?
/. Very loii£ ,- over since
last, spring. And many <>f
my relations are sick. Now
the Indians arc always sick,
and a <jTrat many die, since
religion is here.
M. Do you think, my
friend, because religion has
arrived here, therefore more
551
anlshlnabeg wendjl-nibowad ;
kid inendam na geget ?
I. Aningwana, mi sa gcgct
cnt'iidamdn. Ml mojag ekito-
wad anlshlnabeg. Geget d ask
debwewag ; nin wabandan
nongom.
M. Kego iw inendangcn,
kawin awanslnon. Anishd
ikitowag anishinabeg. Jgiw
sa jangcndangiff anamieivin,
mi igho ckitodjig. Ktnrln
dash dcbwcssiwag. I\cgo, nid-
ji, debwetawaken ; nanagata-
u'endan pangi cjlwcbak. Ki
kltchi anishinabcw jaigirtt,
nidjl; eniwek mewija cko-ba-
bamosscian omd aking. Na-
nagatawendan dash pangi.
Kawin na gaiat, minik bus-
ako-kikendaman gale kin, ka-
irin net nawatcli batahiissiba-
nig oma anishinabeg, nongom
dash endashiwad ?
I. Geget batainobanig; ka-
klna dash gi-nlbowag gega.
Geget kitchl nibiiva amsliina-
beg gi-nibowag eko-klkcnda-
man. Ina ivedi A ... ejini-
kadeg, gi • kltchi - odcndwan
gaiat wedl; kitchi nibiwa ani-
shinabeg mamawi gi-aiabanig
ima, Nongom dash kairln
ganage bejig alassl. Ima
gale B . . . ejinikadeg, mi
Indians die now ; do you
really think so ?
J. Certainly, I think so.
That is what the Indians
always say. And they tell
the truth ; I see it now.
M. Don't think that, it
is not so. The Indians
don't speak the truth when
they say so. They who
hate religion, they are those
who say so. But they don't
tell the truth. My friend,
don't believe what they say ;
reflect a little how things are.
You are an old man, my
friend ; it is a pretty long
while since you walk about
on earth. Now reflect a
little. Were not in oldeu
times, as much as you know
(remember) yourself, were
not the Indians here more
numerous than they are
now ?
I. They, were numerous
indeed ; But they almost
all died away. A great
many Indians have died
since I know, (within my
memory.) So, for instance,
in the place called A . . .,
there was in former times a
great village ; a great many
Indians were there toge-
ther. And now there is not
552
i ma gi-kitchi-odenawang.
Mi uu a «(t-d anal-id nossiban.
Geget g}-l>(ttainadon wighni-
i/id it hna; tihi kikendan. Non-
gom dash kd-wln ganage Ix'jig
irigiwdtn trcdi dtcsshton. Mi-
si ice gaic bakan- gi-atewan
odenawan ; kawin dash non-
gom gcgo. Gcgct kitchi ni-
biwa anishinabea gi-nibowag
oma, eko-kikendaman.
M. Gcgct ki deface, nidji.
Gi-batainoH'fig tpdicshkat ani-
sliindhcg mislwe oma; non-
gom dash kitchi paytgiwagisi-
•ii-ag. Mi xa gcgct rjiircbak.
\Vi n da man-is liin dash, nidji ;
anai)iidl>aniir na igiw anishi-
nabeg ga^nibodjig ?
I. Ka ! Kawin sa hcapi
man hi aiiftriiifirin oma gi-dd-
anishinabewaking.
M. Nidji, nanagatawendan
pa n g i /'//' f/cifnidii : Kair/n
iu'djii iiidr-hi (inn ininrni oma
gi-dagossinon anishinabewa-
king ; diHiii-i r/frs/i kite hi nilii-
ii'ft anishinabeg gi-nibowag.
Antnnu:irin na gi-ondji-ui-
a single one there. And so
in the place called B . . .,
there was a great village
there too. There was the
home of my deceased fa-
ther. A great many lodges
have been there ; I know
it. But now there is not
a single lodge there. And
in several other places there
have been villages ; and
now there are none there.
A great many Indians in-
deed have died here, since
I know, (within my recol-
lection.)
M. Yes you speak the
truth, friend. In former
times the Indians have been
very numerous here round ;
but now their number is
very small. It is so indeed.
IJut tell me, my friend,
were those Indians that
died away. Christians? (have
they prayed ?)
/. No ! There was n*>
prayer (religion) yet at that
time here in the Indian
country.
M. Friend, reflect a lit-
tle on \vhat yon say tli' •
There was n<> prayer (reli-
gion) yet at that time here
in the Indian country ; and
still so many Indians have
died. Has religion been
553
wag ? Anamiewin na o gi-
nissigonawa ?
I. Kawin. Kawin sa ana-
miassibanig.
M. Kawin anamiassibanig,
anawi dash kitchi nibiwa gi-
nibotvag. Nanagatawendan
iw, nidji. Mi ima ge-ondji-
kikendaman ow : Kawin ana-
miewin ondji-nibossiwag ani-
shinabeg.
I. Geget ; lei debwe gana-
batch. Eniwek nin nissito-
tan iw.
M Ow dash gale nanaga-
tawendan, nidji, keiabi non-
gom ijiwebad iw. Kishpin
ningotchi anishinabeg odcto-
wad, anamiassigwa dash, esh-
kam nibowag, eshkam pangi-
wagisiwag. Tibishko gon
cji-ningisod sigwaninig, esh-
kam dash pangiwagisi ; mi
ndssdb anishinabeg enamias-
sigog eshkam pangiwagisi-
wag ; eshkam tanassag nin-
gisowag. Nanagatawendan
iw, nidji ; ki ga-kikendan
dash ejiicebak ; kawin anisha
nind ikitossi.
I. Mi gosha ejiwebak, nin
kikendan gate ninf Nin wa-
bandan sa eji nibowad mojag
anishinabeg ; memindage wi-
nawa abinodjiiag,
the cause of their dying ?
Has religion killed them ?
/. No ; they were not
religious, (did not pray.)
M. They were not reli-
gious, (Christians,) and still
so many have died. Re-
flect upon that, friend. By
that you ought to know (to
learn) this : Religion is not
the cause of the dying of
the Indians.
/, Yes, I think you tell
the truth. I understand
that pretty well.
M. Consider moreover
this, my friend. It is yet
now so the case. If Indians
live together somewhere,
(form a village,) and are
not Christians, they die
away more and more ; they
are continually decreasing.
As the snow melts away in
spring, and decreases more
and more; so decrease con-
tinually the pagan Indians ;
they melt down, I may say.
Reflect upon that, friend,
and you wili know how it
is ; I don't speak without
reason.
L O yes, it is so, I know
it myself. I see it how the
Indians are always dying
away ; especially the chil-
dren.
554
M. Mhi lira dash oil' Lid
•ni in : Ki ft h pin dat/i n/iii!<>-
ff/ii ania/hinabeg oftetowad^
anamiawad da$h± rshkam ba-
abinodjiiag nibossiwag. En-
da sso-ki Id nun o icaga k n a watch
ha I a i it <> ira if we n dad /.s- if/jig,
i ^ in' da-di -iirbodjig. Mi go
uiit'ni'c. fjiirrbuk a in ir ad cna-
iniftdjig ; mi go misiicc kitclti
uking, cudanakiwad icaiah-
is.hkiviedjig, miejiwebak; mo-
'](/<* naii'iitcli batainowqg vcen-
dadisidjigi ncbudjig dath.
Kairin anisha iii-nd ikitossi,
nidji ; mi gcgct cj'nnbak ;
kikentfagwad .SY/. Ojibiabag
Icakina wendadisidjig t kakiiiti
<fa'n' ucliudjig ; mi daxh inia
ufeiidji-kikendagwak hr, tia-
utatch batainowad wmdadisi-
r///ir, neb (x/jig
I. Mi iiangirctiia rjirrrbak ?
l\ n iniii nin kikcntla iis'uuiba n,
/.-/ drbwiton ilux/i ckitoian.
M. Drbirrffrtri^/iin, nidji.
f rthlcani bata'inoipag (in-
i.s/iinab(L! I'liiMiniiKiji^ ; iriini-
u-a rlrrx/i oiiamiassigog r.s7//.v///i
paftgiwagisi ivag.
I. Eshkam ki debwcton, Id
M. Moreover I tell you
this : If on the contrary
Indians form a villain* some-
where, and arc (•hrirtintix,
they continually increase ;
and the children don't much
die. Every year the num-
ber of those that are horn
is larger, than of those that
die. So it is everywhere
the case, where there are
Christians ; and everywhere
in large countries, where
white people live, this is
the case ; the number of
those that are born is al-
ways larger, than of those
that die. I don't speak so
without a good reason, my
friend ; it is so ; it is a
known fact. All those that
are born, and all those that
die, are registered ; and
thereby it is known that the
number of those that are
born is larger than of those
that die.
/. Is it so ? I did not
know that ; but I believe
what you say.
M. Believe me, friend,
Chrhtiun Indians continu-
ally increase ; hut \\\vpa<f(in
Indians decrease continu-
ally.
/. I believe you more
555
minoton gale ; eshkam gate
inn nissitotan minik ekitoian.
M. 'Wcgoncn dash, nidji,
ti'endji-ikitoian, kitchi nibo-
icag anishinabcg cko-anamia-
icad ?
I. Anish, nln nondawog
mojag anishinabeg ekitomad-;
mi go gaie nin ga-ondji-ikito-
ian.
M. Mi sa gegft ekitowad
an isldnabcg enamiqssigog.
Kid in in dash, iiidji, kau'in
ncbu-akadjig naiagata iccnd-
fingig ikitossiwag iw; winawa
fta gcgibadisidjig, gego kc-
kendct nsigog , naiaga ta wen d-
ansigog gaie gego^ mi igiw
ckitodjig. Kego dash I: in,
nidji i kciabi incndangcn iu\
anamiewin tcld ondjinibowad
finishinabcg. Ki icabandan
sa cjiwebak ; awashime nibi~
nxi cnamiassigog anishinabeg
mbowag, enamiadjig dash.
I. Geget ; pitchinag nin
nissitotan iw ; kawin dash
keiabi nin gad-ikitossi ga-iki-
toian ; kawin gaie, nin gad-
inendansin.
and more, and I like to
hear you ; and I under-
stand Setter and better what
you are saying.
M. But why do you say,
friend, many Indians die
now since they are Chris-
tians (praying) 1
I. Why, I hear always
Indians say it ; and that
was the reason why I also
said so.
M. So the pagan (not
praying) Indians indeed
say. But I tell you, friend,
the wise and reflecting ones
do not say so; only those
that are unwise, that know
nothing, and never reflect
upon anything, only those
say so. But you, my friend,
do never think that Indians
die away because they are
Christians (praying.) You
see yourself how it is ;
more pagan Indians die
than Christian Indians.
L Yes, indeed ; I only
now understand that ; and
now I will say no more
what I have said ; and I
will not think it, (believe
M. Ki kikendan na dash, M. But do you know,
nidji) wendji-niboivad nibiwa friend, why so many pagan
aaishinabeg enamiassigog ? Indians die away 1
556
I. Kawhi nin kikcnflansin;
kawin wika nin •nanagata-
wendaiisin in-. — Wcgonen iw
wendji-nibowad /
M. Ki ga-windamon, nidji;
weweni n />>• it of a wish in . Ena-
miassigog aitishinabcg kawin
o kikenimassiwawan Debcnd-
jigenidjin Kije-Manilon. Ka-
kina gcgo win o kikcndan,
kaginig In wabam'igonan mi-
siwe. Kawin dash winawa
enamiassigog o gassassiwa-
wan, kawin sa o kikenimassi-
wawan ; mi dash wendji-jag-
wenimossigwa, grmodj gcgo
tchi matchi dodamowad ; mi
dash gcgct naningim gimodj
matchi dodamowad. Kishpin
enamiassig (inixhinabe jinge-
nimad widf anishinabeny gi-
modj od (inhuman matchi
mashkiki, mi dash rji-nissad;
gimodj \ kawin awiia o kikeni-
migossin.
I. Mi sa gcgct naningim
ejiwebak. I\ibiira nin mik-
weniimg gate nin, iw gd-tln-
dawindjig ; matchi 'mafihkiki
gimodj gi-a$hamawagt mi dash
ga-ondji-nibowad.
M. Win turn- flash f-namiud-
"ii is I 1 1 ti a l> eg <i tr i n kc ial> i
iw dotltinxiirng; n mikin-niina-
wan wi Jag ])i In- ndjigc nidji nt
o gossawan gaic. Ninwaha-
inig kaginigt nin kikcnitnig
I. I don't know it ; I
have never reflected upon
it. — What is the reason of
their dying away ?
M. I will tell you, friend ;
understand rne well. The
pagan Indians do not know
the Lord God. He knows
all, he sees us always and
everywhere. But the pa-
gans do not fear him, be-
cause they know him not ;
and that is the reason why
they are not afraid of com-
mitting evil secretly ; and
so they commit evil secret-
ly very often. When a
pagan Indian hates his fel-
low-Indian, he secretly
makes him eat poison, and
so he kills him ; in a hidden
manner, nobcdy knows it.
JF. This is often the case
indeed. I remember man\
myself, to whom it was
done so ; poison was given
them secretly, and so they
died.
M. But the Christian In-
dians do that no more ; they
remember always the Lord,
and fear him. They al-
ways think, lie sees me
continually, and knows what
557
endodaman ; od incnimawan
mojag. Mi dash wendji-jag-
wenimowad tchi apitchi ma-
tchi dodamowapan.
I. Nin nissitotan gate iw ;
nind inendam dash nongom,
onijishmodoganamicwin,kisli-
pin enamiadjigjagwcnimowad
tchi matchi dodamowad.
M. Minawa dash, nidji,
minawa ki wtndamon, wcndji-
niboieg kinawa, kinidjinissi-
wag gaie. Nin kikendan sa
ejitchigeieg. Kishpin awiia
akosid amshinabc, gonima
abinodji, gonima gaie kitchi
anishinabe, pabige anotch
mashkiki mhut tchi odapln-
ang. Anind dash iw mash-
kiki, kawin onij ishinsinon ; mi
dash wendji-nibowad nibiwa
anisliinabeg, memindage abi-
nodjiiag.
I. Mi na geget iiv, kid in-
endam ? Kawin na iw oniji-
shinsinon, tchi nandndawiin-
diban aiakosid.
M. Anawi onijishin nan-
andawiiwewin, kiskpin ivcweni
nanandawiind aiakosid. Oni-
jishin anind ?nashkiki, kawin
dash kakina onij ishinsinon.
Kishpin gaie osam nibiwa
anotch mashkiki minind aia-
kosid, kawin gaie iw onijish-
insinon. Mi minawa iiv wen-
I am doing. And there-
fore they are afraid of
committing criminal ac-
tions.
/. I understand that also ;
and I think how, religion
must be a good thing, if
the Christians are afraid of
doing bad actions.
M. And again, my friend,
again I tell you why you
are so dying away, you and
your children. I know
how you manage it. When
an Indian gets sick, may it
be a child or a grown per-
son, they give him imme-
diately all kinds of medi-
cines to take. But some of
these medicines are not
good (for the case) ; and
therefore so many Indians
die, especially children.
/. Is it so indeed, you
think ? Is it not good to
give medicines to sick per-
sons 1
M. The giving of medi-
cines to sick persons is
certainly good, if they are
given in a proper manner.
Some medicines are good,
but not all are good. And
if too much of all kinds of
medicines is given to the
sick person, it is not good
558
-uibhrn
, mcmindage
I. IV'uuiu'fi daxh cudtnidd-
j/g, kairin tin ir'nunca irika
fiiashjtiki <*(/ od&pii\t(inswk<iwa
aiakosiwadgin ?
M. Anniri irate, irhiau'ti
mashkiki od odapinanau-ci, we-
nijishirig mashkikl sa ; brkith
gate Debendjigenidjin od apl-
tclii apenimQnawan. \\'in *a
eta od apitclii dihcndan himn-
dixiirhi, kairiti diriia bemadi-
sid akin" o di/iciK/ansiii. A'a-
iriu dfix't (ir.utdi indxhkiki od
odapinansinawa ; o pisinda-
icfiirdn, o babamitawawan ge-
gikwenidjin.
I. Vtfeg>cmen daxh minatra
ircndji-nilx.irdd lub'nrd diti-
r, kid iinnddin?
) nidjj.
i /,/ kikftidan. L^dic. kin,
ddxfi L'fiirin ki inik-
wendansin..
I. 1\~c«iiiirn in' ]
M. .l^likffi ' u-dlio ,sv/. d'
. Kifrhi nil'iifd dtii-
<>
Ai>it<'lii dash
<> i/ii iiir/'/if/d iidira;
inil.-dninii-d'l , imbi»r o nii-
either. This is again a
reason why so many In-
dians, especially children,
die away.
/. But the Chri>tians, do
they not take any medi-
cines when they are sick ?
M. Certainly they also
take medicines, useful me-
dicines ; but at the same
time they put all their trusl
in the Lord. U<- is the
only master of life ; no
person living on earth
is master of it. But they
don't take all sorts of medi-
cines ; they listen to those
that preach to them, and
obey them, (they do ac-
cording to their advice.)
/. What is again the
cause of the dying of many
Indians, you think I
J/. 1 will tell you, friend,
you know it also yourself,
but you don't think on it.
I. What is it ?
M. Ardent liquor, (fire-
water.) It is verv bad.
Ardent liquor kills a
Lrrc;it many Indians. And
the Indians likr it so much,
when they g<'t it, (find it,)
they will immediately drink
559
l>lwad. Kislipin d'fsh anisJiin-
cibeg gtwashkwebitffcedi g('g('t
kitcld mat eld dodnmog ; na-
n'uiguu, gdic nissiditctig".
I. Mi sa gcgft cndodamo-
trnd ; n in kikcndiangw&iak.
Nibiwa nln kikcnlmag ga-
dodangig iiv, gi-nissaicad
widf dnishiriahewan gi-gi-
ica shkweb i inn d,
M. Mi iw icendji-nibowad
ullhra anhliiuabcg. — Guie
clash bakati minawa o nissi-
gonawu anishi-nabcg ishkotc-
wabo. Apltclii ma slikawa-
magad iw, apitchi mat eld
dodagcmagad. Kishphi cnciia
naniiigim minikwcd, o mat eld
dodan wuair, kakina o tclia-
gisan p'mdjaii ; kau-in gni-
wenj ta-liiiutdtx'nxi, kisfrpiri
nanangim minikiccd islikotc-
wabo. Mi sa minawa nibiwa
an ish in a beg en a m id ssigog
wa'iba wcndji-nibowad , osam
•nanmgim, osam gaic ncnibiwa
m in i kwewad ishkotc ica bo.
I. Kawin dash eta enamias-
sigog anishinabeg o minik-
wessinawa 'ishkotewabo ; ena-
miadjig gaie o minikicenawa.
M. Gcget, nidji, ki debwe.
Kitclii ka shkcndagwad iw,
minikivewad ishkotewabo cna-
it until they get drunk.
And if the Indians get
drunk, they are very mk-
chievous indeed ; they fre-
quently commit murder
(when drunk.)
I. Yes they do that; I
know it very well. I know
several who have done that,
who have killed their fel-
low-Indians when drunk..
M. This is a cause of
the dying of many Indians.
But ardent liquor destroys
Indians again in another
way. It is exceedingly
strong, it is very mischiev-
ous. If a person drinks it
often, he hurts his body, he
burns it all inside ; he w/11
not live long, if he drinks
ardent liquor frequently.
This is again another cause
why many pagan Indians
soon die, because they
drink so often and so much
ardent liquor.
/. But not only pagan In-
dians drink ardent liquor ;
Christians also drink it.
M. Yes, friend, you
speak the truth. It is very
mortifying that Christian
560
in i ad jig a-nis/iinabeg. Kaw-
in clash baldinissiwag ighv
tncnikwedjig. Oxam niojag
ginaamawawag i cu/u-ck dash
nibiwa o babamendanattHigag-
ikwewin. Anind dash eta
kfiii-in o babamendasinqwa, mi
dash kit wen mimkwewad. Bc-
bejig dash eta minikwetoag,
wawika gale. \Vinawa dash
enamiassigog anishinabcg ka-
kina minikwewag, mojag gaie
minikwewag das ting mrkdino-
wad ishkotewabo. Kakina
miniknvii'dx, inin'nra", ikirr-
wag, weshkinigidjig, kakina
go ; kitchi nenibiwa it"ie o mi-
nikwenawa /'//• matr/ti. iiibi.
Mi dash geget kitchi match!
dodasowad ; o banAdjitoriawa
wiiaw i ira n . Na n i ngul i n o ng
gaie airiifi, inc^n-a ffiic&gfakwe-
bid, ishkotrng pangishin,gon-
ima gaic nibikang, mi daxli
ima dapined. Nibiira ani-
.s- // / // a I) c<f rnuinid -v \ igog o nis-
sigonaira ishkotewabo.
I. Geget kifinHigitiiii'dg dii-
iskinabeg enamiassigog. Non-
(r(nn ircirnii ni/i kik< ndtin iji-
kifit/ir/fritiiirtif/. A'i giwondon
gd-ikitonui nnn^oni ; kdkina
gate n i n n />• \ iftifnti, nin ;// / // o-
t an if air niinik tkitoidn; ml
dd.</i udiftffr/i, irmdji-kikt'n-
danidn eji-kitimagisticad <»-
Indians drink ardent liquor.
But those that drink it are
not very numerous. They
are too much forbidden to
do it ; and the number of
those that care for preach-
ing is considerable. But
some don't care for it, and
they drink although forbid-
den. But only some drink,
and seldom. On the con-
trary, the pagan Indians,
they all drink, and they al-
ways drink whenever they
they can get ardent liquor.
All drink, men, women,
young people, and all ; and
they drink very freely of
that bad liquid. And so
they hurt themselves very
much ; they destroy them-
selves (their bodies). Some-
times it happens that a
drunken Indian falls in the
fire or in the water, and
perishes there. Many pa-
gan Indians are destroyed
by ardent liquor.
/. The pagan Indians
an- miserable indeed. Now
I know well how miserable
they are. I have heard
what you have said now :
and I understand all, and
hear with pleasure all you
are saving; and therefore
I know better now, how
561
amiassigog anishinabeg. Nin
kikendan gaie nongom wend-
ji-nibowad nibiwa (tnishina-
beg. Gfgf't, kawin anamic-
win ondji-n iboss iwag.
M. Weivetii, nidji, nanag-
atawcndan kakina ga-iji-win-
damondn. Panima ningoting
minawa ki ga-ganonidimin.
poor and miserable are the
pagan Indians. And I know
now why so many Indians
die. Truly religion is not
the cause of their dying a-
way.
M. Friend, reflect well
upon all that I told you. —
By and by we will speak to
each other again.
B. Dialogue between a Missionary and an Indian that is
disjjoscd to take religion.
Indian. Weweni ki bi-nasi-
kon nongom. Kawin anisha
n in bi-ijas.si. IVenijishing
gego ki wi-li-gagu-edjimin ; ki
pagossenimin gaie tchi gagiki-
miian.
Missionary. Nin kitchi min-
wendam sa bi-ijaian. Apegish
naningim bi-pindigeian oma.
Apegish gaie anamie wig ami-
gong naniugim pindigeian,
tchi pisindaman gagikwewin ;
gonima ki gad-inendam tchi
odapinaman gaie kin Debend-
jiged od ikitowin, tchi anami-
aian gaie kin.
I. Nin pindige sa ko anam-
iewigamigotig enamiegijigak-
Tndia.it. I conle here to
see you. I dorrt come with-
out a good reason. I have
to ask you some good useful
questions ; and I request
you to instruct me.
Missionary. I am very
glad indeed you come. I
wish you would come in of-
ten. And I wish you would
come to church also often,
to hear the sermon ; you
will then perhaps be willing
to accept the word of the
Lord, and to become a
Christian also yourself.
/. I use to come to
church on Sundays. I like
5G2
/'/;. JV/'// minircnthun phtnd-
amdn anamic-gagikweipin,
M. Ki mint) doddm sa pin-
digcitin. Kith inn lutningim
pindigcian, eskkam l:i ga-nix-
titntan gagikurwin ; ki gud-
i'lcndamdash tchl anamiaian.
I. Anawi sn gtgctjaigwa
nind inefidam tchi anamiaidn;
nin jdgwcnim dash. Guniwa
kdirin nin got nin gad-inabad-
jitossiu ; oMim gate sanagad
M. Kcgo jngwcnimokcn,
kego gaie gego awashime a \>i-
tendangcn oma aking, (IIHUII-
iewin dash. Aicashinic ana-
inii-ii'in apitendagwad, haki-
na dats/i t/nniirin liking cnda-
gng. Mi MI anamiewin ged-
oii'lji-ijad (uriia gijigong, gi-
ishkwarbimadisid a king ; kag-
iift' minawajiigosiwining daxli
ii-rdi td-jtindigr.
I. Kawcssa ganabatch nin-
(i '/-hid. \ I '<! ia bishkiwedjig eta
ta-ipindigewag gijigoug,
'ni ani$hinabeg.
M. A nin I'kiluidn, ni'lji !
AirrtH'ti i l;if,'d iir /
I. Ik ltd /rag >•« anishina-
Irg.
to hear a religious sermon.
M. You do well in com-
ing (to church). If you
come often you will under-
stand better and better the
sermon ; and you will In-
willing to become a Chris-
tian.
/. I am indeed willing
to become a Christian ; but
I don't dare (1 am afraid).
I will perhaps have no use
of it i and religion is too
difficult.
M. Don't be discourag-
ed (disheartened), and don't
esteem any thing on earth
higher than religion. Re-
ligion is more worth than
all the riches that are on
earth. It is religion which
will bring a person to heav-
en, after his life on earth :
and there he will enter into
an everlasting joy.
/. I think this will not
be for us (Indians). They
say that only white people
will enter heaven, but not
Indians.
.)/. What are yon saying
there, friend ! Whosav-
/. The Indians say it.
563
M. Kego debwetawaken ba-
pish. Kawin waiabishki-
wcdjig eta ta-pindigessiwag
gijigong kagige minawani-
gosiwining ; mi go gaie ani-
shindbeg, kishpin anamiawad,
gwaiak gaie iji bimadisiwad
oma aking.
I. Bakan dashwinaira iki-
towag anishinabeg. Kawin
wika aniskinabe ta-pindigessi
wedi endanid Kitchi Maniton.
Gwaiak gaie o kikendaaaicd
tchi gashkitossigwa wedi tchi
jnndigewad ; mi dash gwctch
wen dj i-odap i n a n s Ig wa an a. m -
iewin. Agawishka anishin-
abe anamiad, ikitowag ; kaw-
in potch ningol o gad-inabad-
jitossin od anamiewin.
M. Gwaiak o kikendanawa
anishinabeg tchi gaslikitossig-
wa gijigong tchi ijawad, kid
ikit. Wcgonen dash iw wen-
dji-kikcndamowad 1
I. Ki ga-windamon gwaiak
tji-kikendaman gaie nin. Nin-
goting sa, mewija nawatchj)c-
jig anishinabe kiwe gi-odapi-
namogoban anamicwin, gi-sig-
aandawa dash ; mojag dash
weweni gi-anamia binish gi-
ishkwa-bimadisid. Ga-ishk-
wa-bimadisid dash oma aking,
M. Don't believe them
at all. Not only white peo-
ple will enter heaven, the
everlasting joy ; Indians al-
so, if they are Christians,
and behave (live) well in
this world.
/. But they say differ-
ently, the Indians. Never
an Indian will go in there
where dwells the Great
Spirit. They know it per-
fectly well that it is impos-
sible for them to go in
there ; and that is the rea-
son why they don't much
take religion. TAey say,
an Indian labors in vain
(gains nothing) by being a
Christian ; he will never
make any use of his reli-
gion.
M. You say they know it
perfectly well that it is im-
possible for them to go to
heaven. But how do they
know that ?
/. I will tell you exactly
as I know it myself. Once,
a considerable time ago, an
Indian, they say, took re-
ligion and was baptized ;
and he afterwards always
was a good Christian until
the end of his life. ^Ifter
his life here on earth, he
ff'tjiaong nftkdkda gl-
ani~madja. Degwishing daxh
irtdi, o iralaman ini nitron
ima nabawinidjin ishkwande-
ming. Ow dash od hum /,•/'-
we aw anishiuabe : Nin ?/•/-
pindige onia. K air in kin oma
I: i ga-pindigessi ; od Agon
dash kiwe iniw ininhcan. Min-
awa da. sit anishinabe ow od
i n a ii : Nind an am i a, gas It ti ,
nin ga-pindige ; nin gi-igoban
sa mekatewikwanaie mc^ica
gi-bimadisiian aking : J\ix/i-
pin weweni anamiaian, ki ga-
pindige gijigong gi-ishkira-
himadisiia.li (iking ; 'nin. i,r/-
igoban, mi dash ba-ondji-ija-
ian. Kawcssa, od -igon r/r/.s7/
in'ni' ininiiran ; auisha ki gi-
7/v/ irjlmig mckatcwikwanait .
Ikogan, ka wika airiiu ani-
shinabe oma ta-pindigessi.
yl?/v/.vs, ikitgan! Mi ga-igod
iniii- ininiwan ishkwandeming
nabairinif/jin: mi <l<i*h div atii-
Khinn.be nciab go-bi-iji-giwed
oma aking; <> gi-i nan dash
anishindben : ./\r<r<> (uximi-
(i krgo n kin (firn,/i i'lj i k i ire i dog ;
knii'in p«1ih ki irti-"-ashkitnt-
.<i/iaira trika gijigong tclii ija-
i(«; o gi-inan, o«i-irinda-
•DI a iran daxh ga-dodaiffind. —
.Mi f/a.\/i in- wendji-jagweni-
moian ^ nil nin.
took liis way toward heaven.
On arriving there he sees a
man standing at the door.
And that Indian, they say,
says to him: I will go in
here. No, thou shalt not
go in here ; says that man
to him, they say. And a-
gain the Indian says to him:
I am a Christian,! tell you,
I must go iu ; the Mission-
ary told me, while I was
living on earth : If you be-
come a Christian, you will
go to heaven, after your life
on earth ; so he told me,
and that is the reason I
come here. No, by no
means, says that man to
him ; the Missionary lias
only cheated thee. Go a-
way ; never shall an Indian
go iii here. Away, begone!
So has that man that stands
at the door, spoken to him;
and so that Indian came
back again on earth ; and
he said to the Indians:
Don't take religion, ye, my
friends ; yon will never be
able, (even if you take it,)
to no in heaven. So he
said to them, and then he
told them how he was treat-
ed. And that is the rea-
si n why I am discouraged
top myself, (\\\\y I don't
i ike religion.)
565
M. Anish, mi sa gegrt ckit-
oicad anishinabeg enamiassi-
gog. Ki debwctawag n a dash
kin, nidji ?
I. Anish, nin debwetawag.
Mojag sa nin nondawag chit"
owad, gcgapi dash nin dcb-
U'ctawag.
M. Pisindaicishin, nidji,
weweni ki wi-ivindamon eji-
U'ebak. Dcljwctaii'ishin, kaic-
in wika anisha gcgo ki winda-
mossinon.
I. Weweni ki wi-pisindon.
Mi sa ba-ondji-ijaian nongom
anotch gego daiepweurinagak
tchi windamawiian,
M. Gwaiak kid in in, kego
dtbwctangcn iw dibadjim oi/'itt.
Encaniassigog anixhinabcg,
jangcndangig anamiewin, on-
djita o gi-ojitonawa iw, tchi
odapinansigwa anishinabeg
anumiewin ; ow tchi inendang
anishinabc: Ocget nin ici-waic-
jimig mekatewikwanaic gag-
ansomid tchi anamiaioag. —
Potch kawin wika nin da-
gashkitossin gijigong tchi pin-
digeian missawa gaie anami-
aidn. Mi tchi inendang ani-
shinabe enamiassig, mi dash
tchi odapinansig anamiewin,
mi sa ga-ondji-ojitowad iiv
dibadjimowin. Kego dash ba-
36
M. Yes, the pagan In-
dians say so indeed. But
do you believe them,
friend ?
my
I. Why, I believe them.
I hear them always say so,
finally I believe them.
M. Listen to me, friend,
I will tell you exactly how
it is. Believe me ; 1 never
tell you anything without a
good reason,
/. I will listen to you at-
tentively. I come for that
purpose to-day, that you
may tell me some true say-
ings.
Jl/. I tell you plainly,
don't believe that story. Pa-
gan Indians, those who hate
religion, have made it on
purpose, in order that the
Indians should not take re-
Figion. that the Indian should
think thus : Indeed the Mis-
sionary intends to cheat me
when he is persuading me
to take religion. But it
would be impossible for me
to go to heaven, even if I
took religion. In order that
the pagan Indian should
think so, and accordingly
not become a Christian,
that is the reason why they
566
pish, nidji, dcbwctangcn. —
Kishpin awiia gt-ifrf nibod,
kawin minawa abitchibassi ;
panima gi-ishktoa-akiwang t«-
abitcldbawag kakina imbod-
jig ; nongoni dash kawin awiia
abitchibassi, kawin awiia bi-
giwcssi oma a king kish/fhi
gcgct nibod, tchi dibadjimod
cjiwebadinig wcdi.
I. Anin iw ? Anawi nin
wabama ko awiia glnwcuj ni-
bod, panima dash wika mina-
wa abijishin.
M. Kawin, nidji, kawin,
nibossi, anisha wanimikairi.
Kishpin awiia wanimikawid)
naningotinong giniMnj ku win
mamadjissi, nebongin iji jin-
ima ; kawin dash gegci
'iii o fahitchagwan
n dash
mikan'td, Itawin wcdi
ondjihuxsi diairnd igiw ga-
ishkwa-bimadisidjig a kin if ;
I: a win. «an(t«<! gi-tnadjassiwan
o tchitchagwan. ./'anim/i i hi,
awiia iff 'get niln/d, nuidjawan
o tchltchagtffan ; ktt/ri/t daxli
air/ iff ni'tfih hi-»iirrx*i
Mi ///•
. J)rbintiin,
nidji.
made that story. But, my
friend, don't believe it at
all. If a person really dies
he never more rises a^ain
from the dead; only on the
end of the world all the
dead will rise up again ; but
now nobody rises from the
dead, nobody comes back
again here on earth, to tell
how it is there.
7. How is that ? I some-
times see somebody die for
a long time, and then after
a long while he revives
again.
M. No, my friend, he
does not die, he only faints.
If a person faints, he does
sometimes not stir for a long
while, he lies there like a
dead person ; but he is not
really dead, his soul did not
depart; and when he gets
his senses again, he is not
coming from where those
are that have finished their
lives on earth ; his soul did
not depart. \\ hen a per-
son really dies, his soul de-
parts ; but nobody ever
comes hack again that i>
departed, that, is dead. This
is the real trut.ii. Believe
it, my friend.
567
I. Nindebwctamgeget. Ki
debwcton ekitoian ; kin sa
gwaiak ki kikendan cjiwebak
bimadisiwin aking, ged-ijiwc-
bak gaie api ged-ishkwa-bima-
d is ing aking.
M. Minawa dash kid inin,
kego debwctawakcn awiia eki-
tod\ Kawin anishinabeg o
da-ga shkitossi nawa gijigong
tchi wi-ijawad, missawa wcicc-
ni anamiawad, anamiewining
gale dupinewad. Kego bafrixk
iw debwetangen, Apitchi
gwaiak gi-ikito n-in Deben-
dang bimadisiwin : Kakina
bemadisidjig aking endas-
so-winsowad o ga-gashkitona-
wa tcJii pindigewdd n'md ogi-
maiL'iicin ing gijigong, kishpin
anamiawad, gwaiak gaie iji-
webisiwad aking. Be.kish
dash gaie ow gi-ikito : Ena-
miadjig dash eta ta-ijawag
gijigong, kishpin mino-ijiwe-
bisiwad ; kaicin dash en ami-
assig awiia wika ima ta-pin-
digessi ; gi-ikito Dcbcndji-
ged. Kishpin anishinabe
ana?niassig, geget win lea-
win ta-pindigessi gijigong
wika ; kishpin dash ana-
miad, wcweni gaie ijiwcbisid,
ta-pindige kagige minawani-
gosiwining, tibishko waiabish-
kiwcdjig enamiadjig meno-
ijiwebisidjig eji-pindigewad.
I. Yes, I believe. I be-
lieve you what you say ; you
know well how life is on
earth, and what will be
there, when this earthly life
is finished.
M. I tell you once more,
don't believe any body that
says : Indians can never go
to heaven, even if they are
good Christians, and die
Christians. Don't believe
that at all. The Master of
life has said very express-
ly : All people on earth,
whatever name they have,
shall be able to enter my
kingdom in heaven, if they
be Christians and behave
well on earth. And at the
same time he said : Chris-
tians only will go to heaven,
if they behave well ; but
never shall a pagan go in
there; so said the Lord. If
an Indian is no Christian,
he indeed shall never go to
heaven ; but if he is a
Christian and behaves well,
he will go into that eternal
joy, the same as white
Christians that behave well,
will go in.
568
I. At aid ! gcgct sa kitchi
£• /' ira n inioira if an ixh inabeg.
Mi^intch ga-wijidamawiian
nongom; nin kitchi mhnrcn-
dam. J// dash in: ge-mindji-
mendaman. Kishphi da*li
nondawca* anishindbe bakan
tchi ik/tofl, kairin nin ga-dcb-
wetawatsi.
M. Mi iir gii'tiifik. Kcgo
dcbicetawakcn ; anisha ikito-
wci« cpitch jingcndawowad
f.'iif/ttiicirin. Mi dash iw
iraif/ji-ikitoirad, tchi anami-
assigica a nishinabeg.
I. Migtoetch ; mi .9« geget
imrt'/ti gi-nissitotomdn iir.
Minmra dash bakan ikitowag
anishinabeg. Mojagnin non-
flawftg: ai'X'f dash nin segis
naningotinong.
M. Wcgonen dash iiv?
I. Ow sa i kit 1 1 waif : Ka-
wcssa mika ! Kaw'ui ani-
irika tfijitf'triff ta-ij-
f, wa iabishkiwedjig eta
> binisiicag
trinturfi, (iiiitihinabi: f/as/i iri-
JJakiui ningotchi oii(l;i-
, ktiwin.
fibiihkn waiabishldwedjig ;
knwin. das/I ta-pindigessiwag
l\it< hi M/inifu/i t'nddii'ul ,i>t<iiiL
Mi nmjag rki-
na bakan ningotchi ondjiba-
I. Ila ! the Indians arc
great liars indeed. I am
very thankful for what you
have told me now ; I am
very glad. I will now re-
member this. And if 1
hear an Indian say differ-
ently, I will not believe him.
M. That is right. Don't
believe them ; they are tel-
ling lies by mere hatred
against religion. And they
say this in order that the
Indians should not take reli-
gion.
/. I am thankful ; I have
well understood this. But
the Indians say auain anoth-
er thing. I hear them al-
ways ; sometimes I fear in-
deed.
M. And what is that?
/. They say : Oh ! it is
impossible ! Never the Inr
dians will go to heaven, on-
ly white people will go ;
why, they arc clean, but llic
Indian is unclean. The
Indians have, another ori-
tfin, not thr same as the
whites ; and they shall not
<r<> in where the Great Spirit
dwells, they are quite of an-
other origin. So the Indi-
ans al\\ay> say. Do they
indeed originate elsewhere?
569
wag anishinabeg 1 Anindi
wendjibawad 1
M. Kego gaie iw debwctan-
ge?i, nidji. Pagwana ikito-
wag cncndamowad. Kawin o
kikendansinawa, waieshkat
ga-bi-ijiwcbadinig. Weweni
dash nin kikcndan iw; nin
wabandari sa ho kctchitwawtn-
dagwak masinaigan, Deben-
djiged o masinaigan ; mi
dash ima iraidbandaman ga-
ijitchigcd Dcbcndjigrd wai-
eshkat. Bejig sa eta inhii-
wan, bcjig gale ikwcwan o gi-
ojian; mi dash igiw nij kaki-
na mamawi wendadisiiang ;
kawin awiia ningutchi bakttii
ondjibassi. Gcgct giican inw-
wag anishinabeg ekitowad.
Mi go gaic kinawa, cnishina-
bcwiicg, mi gaie kinawa ima
ivendadisiicg, igiw nij nitam
anishinabeg. Kawin anishin-
abeg bakanisissiiuag; gaie
winawa tibishko ondjibau-ag,
kakina waiabishkiwedjiy wtn-
djibawad. Bejig sa eta ini-
miwan, bcjig gaie ikwewan
Debendjigcd waieshkat o gi-
assan oma akingjni dash igiw
nij kakina mamawi wendadi-
siiang. Weweni dcbwctan,
nidji; mi iw gwaiak debwe-
win.
I. Weweni nin dcbwctan
gaie iw. Nin kitchi minwcn-
Where do they originate ?
M. Never believe that
either, my friend. They
say it by guess' as they im-
agine it. They don't know
what happened (or came to
pass) in the . beginning.
But I know it well, because
I read that sacred book,
the book of the Lord ; and
there I read what the Lord
has done in the beginning.
He created one man and
one woman : and from these
two persons we take our
origin ; nobody comes from
elsewhere. The Indians
are telling a great lie by
what they say. You also,
you Indians, you descend
from the same two first per-
sons. The Indians have
not another origin ; they
come from where all white
people corne, (they have
the same origin with all
white people.) The Lord
has placed in the beginning
only one man and one wo-
man on eartli, and from
these two we all descend,
all of us. Believe that firm-
ly, friend ; this is the real
truth.
I. I believe firmly that
also. I am very glad that
570
dam dash gi-windamawiifin.
Missawa anishinabcwiian,
nin da-g€tshkiton
tclil ijalan gi-i
fiiii/n aking, kitltpin gioaiak
anamiaian. Mi na iw 1
M. Mi sa iw. Gcgct we-
trrni 1:1 nissitotan grgo wn»-
damonaitiii. Anin ? Mina-
ica na yego ki sanagcndan ?
I. E, minawa sa. Anawi
ti hid hi en (Jam trlii anamiaidn
ifa/r nin; osam flash nauagad
gana/Htli/i ; f^onima kawln
•nhi ga-gasJikitossin wcwcni
tchi ganawenddmdn.
M. Wegohen iw*
I. Anotcli sa go gcgo, cji-
gagiki inhidica cnamiadjig
tchi gtnin wendamowad.
M. Ki dft-gnxlikitnn na,
ni'lji, tclti fijiitrlii bonitnittn
ishkdtevMbot kixhj>in anaint-
autti ?
I. Anish, $(t)ing<id, hr.
j\'iti (l(i-tr(i*hkit.<ni f/a.^/i tchi
bonitoidn, khhfiin anamiaidn.
Nin /.'/,('( ;if/ ft n sa nut IKK! a !: ;
ti/iif/ n/iiff/ii klkrnrlan rji-ki-
//v/.v-
.: i
you told me that. Although
I am an Indian, I could go
to heaven after this life on
earth, if I be a good Chris-
tian. Is it so 1
M. So it is. You under-
stand very well, when I tell
you something. Well ?
llave you any more diffi-
culties ?
/. Yes, some more. I
intend indeed to take reli-
gion myself; but it is per-
haps too difficult ; I will
perhaps not be able to keep
it well, (to observe it.)
M. What is that (that
is so difficult) ?
I. Sundry things that
are recommended to the
Christians to observe, (to
keep.)
M. Would you be ;iblo,
friend, to tnve up entirely
ardent liquor, if you took
religion ?
7, Why, that is difficult.
But I could <rivc it up, if I
hecame a ( Vrisi.ian. I
know it is mischievous ; I
know very well how poor
and miserable an Indian
makes himself, if he is a
friend of ardent liquor.
571
M. Mi gegct. Kishpin
dash gashkitoian tclii apitchi
bonitoian ishkotcwabo, kawin
bakan gego ki ga-bwanawi-
tossin. Ki ga-gaslikiton na
weweni tclii wcbinaman kaki-
na anishinabe-ijitwawin 1
I. E nange ka. Kawin sa
jaigu-a gwetch nin babamen-
dansin ; kawhi ganabatch
gwetch I nabadass inon .
M, Kawin tiapish ningot
inabadassinon ; o kitchi jin-
gendan gaie Debcndjigcd ;
mcshkwat a pi tchi wcnijishing
ijitwawin win o gi-minan be-
madisinidjin aking, mi sa, an-
amiewin. — Jlinaica na gego
ki sanagcndan ?
I. Kawin anawi gego ;
apitchi dash nin manadjitnn
anamicn-in, mi sa waiba wen-
dji-odapi nn >i s i iran . Weweni
sa nin wi-udupinan.
M. Gcgct, nidji, ki mino
inenda?n. Dcbendjigcd ki gi-
jatffenimig, ki gi-minig dash
mino incndamowin. Wewcni
nanagatawendan mojag, pin-
digen dash gaie anamicwiga-
migong enamiegijigakin, tchi
nondaman gagikweivin, esh-
kam tchi nissitotaman ejiwe-
bak Kije-Manito od ikitowin.
Naningotinong gaie bi-ijan
M. Th.it's true. Now
if you can give up totally
ardent liquor, you will not
be unable to do all the
rest. Will you easily reject
and abandon all the Indian
religious practices ?
/. Yes, certainly. 1 do
already not care much for
them ; they are probably of
no great use.
M. They are of no use
at all ; and the Lord abhors
them much ; instead of
them he has given to men
on earth a most useful re-
ligious practice, that is,
the Christian religion
(prayer.) — Have you any
other difficulty ?
/. No, not any ; but I
respect very much religion,
that is the reason why I
don't take it very soon. I
intend to take it in a proper
manner.
M. Indeed, my friend,
you think well. The Lord
had mercy on you and gave
you a good thought (a good
will.) Reflect well always,
and come to church on
Sundays, to hear the ser-
mon, in order to under-
stand better and better the
word of God. And come
here sometimes, I will give
572
oma, ki ga-kikinoamon. (11-
gtt HIII kitc'ii 7/1 i.niccnd am, in-
cndaman waccni tchi odapin-
aman anamlewin. Ki ga-ja-
wcndagos geget, kishp&n irc-
irrni anamiaian binish tchi
Ishkwa-biniaditiiaii akiug.
Anotch Jritimagisisffin oma
aking dagomagad. Kixhpin
dash wcwini odapinaman l:i~
timagisiwin, kotagitowin ga-
le; wtwzni gale ijitchigeian,
cji-m i n u'cn da ng DC be n dj i^t<! ,
ki ga-pindiganig /.Y/^/^V ntin-
awanigosivfining gijigong,
gi~islikwa-kitimagisiiaii oma
aking,
T. Gegct ki kitclii minoton.
Hfig wetc/i cj i -gag i kim i i a n .
]}'diba nongoin. HI n iri-or/(i pi-
nan anamictcin, gu-aiak dash
m »jag n i n ici-ga n a icui da n .
M. Mi gc-1odaman, nidji,
ki ga-jawendagos dash kagi-
you instructions. I am
very ijlad indeed that you
intend to take religion in a
proper manner. Vou will
be happy indeed, if you are
a Lfood Christian until you
cease to live on earth.
There is much misery here
on earth. But if you take
misery and sufferings with
patience ; and if you be-
have well, according to the
pleasure of the Lord, he
will take you into that ev-
erlasting joy in heaven, af-
ter your misery on earth.
1. I listen to you with
great pleasure. I thank
you for the instructions you
give me. Now 1 will soon
take religion, and I will
keep it faithfully all the
time.
M. Do that, my friend,
and you will be happy
eternally.
END OF CTCHJPWE <:K v
INDEX.
Page.
Introduction, ...... 5
PART FIRST. ORTHOGRAPHY ... 6
PART SECOND. ETYMOLOGY ... 15
CHAPTER I. OF SUBSTANTIVES OR NOUNS . 16
Formation of the Plural ... 21
" Substantives . . 28
Terms of Contempt ... 33
" Diminutives .... 36
Cases of Substantives ..... 39
CHAPTER II. OF PRONOUNS ... 43
1. Personal Pronouns . . . . 43
2. Possessive Pronouns .... 46
Of the possessive Terminations . .53
Terms of Relationship .... 60
Of the Third Persons .... 72
3. Demonstrative Pronouns . . . .77
4. Interrogative Pronouns .... 80
5. Indefinite Pronouns .... 81
CHAPTER III. OF VERBS .... 84
Division of verbs ..... 84
Mutative Vowel .... .85
Inflection of Verbs 89
Of the Dubitative . . . . . 95
Conjugation of Verbs ..... 98
Conjugation-Table 99
I. CONJUGATION . . . . . 100
Examples on the I. Conj. .... j22
THE CHANGE 128
Rules for the use of the Change . . .136
L Dubitative Conjugation . . . .142
574
Examples on the I. Dubit. Conj. . . 14(>
Hemark in regard to the second third pers. . 149
II. CONJUGATION ..... 154
Examples on the II. Conj. .... 1(>2
II. Dubitative Conj. . . . .168
Examples on the II. Dubit. Conj. . . .172
Some Examples in regard to the second third pers. 17(5
III. CONJUGATION I so
Examples on the III. Conj. - . . ISO
III. Dubitative Conj. 190
Examples on the III. Dubit. Conj. . . 1 9*2
A few Examples in regard to the second third pers. 19G
IV. CONJUGATION . ... 200
Active Voice, Affirmative Form . . . 201
" Negative Form . . . 208
Examples on the whole Active Voice . . 215
Passive Voice, Affirm, and Neg. Forms . . 224
Examples on the whole Passive Voice . . 23(>
Three kinds of verbs irreg. in the Imperative. . 242
IV. Dubitative Conj. . . Active Voice, Ail'. Form 246
Neg. " ' 250
Examples on the whole Active Voice of the IV. D. C. 25 1
Passive Voice, All', and Neg. Forms . . % 25s
Kxmnples on the whole Pass. V. of the IV. D. C. 2<>l
FIRST CAST. 2<>6
Examples on the First Case . . . 27?
SECOND CASK 2S2
Examples on .the Second Case . . . 303
IV. Dubitative Conj. in the I. Casr . . 310
IV. Dubitative Conj. in the II. ( 'asr . . 314
Examples mi the two Cases of the IV. Dubit. Conj. 31S
Short Examples in regard \u\\\vsrc.und third person
in verbs of the IV. Conj 324
V. C ...... 32!)
K\nti)|>!es <>n the V. Conj. . 335
V. Dubit. Conj.
Examples on the V, Dubit. Conj. . . . 345
575
VI. CONJUGATION . . , 349
Conjugation of Personifying Verbs . . 360
VI. Dubit. Conj'. ....... 363
Examples on the whole VI. Conj. . ... . 366
A few Examples in regard to the second third pers. 372
VII. CONJUGATION . . . . • . 374
VII, Dubit. Conj. . . . .377
Examples on the whole VII. Conj. . , 379
Some Examples in regard to the second third pers. 383
VIII. CONJUGATION . ... 384
VIII. Dubit. 386
Some Examples in regard to the second third pers. 388
IX. CONJUGATION ..... 389
IX. Dubit. Conj. . 391
A few Examples in regard to the second third person 393
Examples on the VIII. and IX. Conj. . . 393
Defective Verbs 399
Dubitative of a Defective Verb . . . 404
A few Examples on the Defective Verbs . . 405
Formation of Verbs ..... 406
CHAPTER IV., OF ADJECTIVES . 422
Degrees of Comparison in adj. . . . 425
CHAPTER V. OF NUMBERS ... 429
Cardinal Numbers 430
Distributive Numbers ... - 444
Multiplying Numbers ..... 446
Multiplying Distributive Numbers . . 447
Ordinal Numbers ...... 449
Numeral-Verbs for animate Substantives . 452
Numeral-Verbs for inanimate Substantives . 455
CHAPTER VI. OF PREPOSITIONS . 457
CHAPTER VII. OF ADVERBS ... 471
1. Adverbs denoting manner . . . 471
2. " interrogation . . 474
3. (i affirmation . . . 476
576
4. " negation . . . 477
5. " place .... 478
6. " (//r ret ion . . .481
7. , " time .... 482
8. " uncertainty ... . 485
9. quality ... 486
10. " comparison . . . 487
CHAPTER VIII. OF CONJUNCTIONS . 489
CHAPTER IX. OF INTERJECTIONS . . . 494
Of Prefixes and other Particles . . . 495
PART THIRD. SYNTAX , 498
CHAPTER I. SYNTAX OF SUBSTANTIVES . 499
CHAPTER II. SYNTAX OF VERBS . . 507
CHAPTER III. OF PARSING ... 511
Specimens of Parsing ..... 512
FAMILIAR PHRASES, to facilitate conversation 517
1. For questioning, affirming, etc., . . 517
2. To enquire after health, .... 524
3. Of the age 526
4. On the hour ...... 527
5. For and at breakfast .... 530
6. On the weather .... 532
7. For and at dinner ..... 53;"i
8. Concerning the Otchipwe language . . ">3S
9. On traveling by land .... 540
10. On traveling by »-<il •••/• . . . 544
A. Dialogue between a Missionary and a Pagan In-
dian 550
B. Dialogue between a Missionary and an Indian
that is disposed to take religion. . . 561
Room
Live Music Archive
Librivox Free Audio
Metropolitan Museum
Cleveland Museum of Art
Internet Arcade
Console Living Room
Books to Borrow
Open Library
TV News
Understanding 9/11